Chevrolet - Blazer 4wd - Workshop Manual - 2005 - 2005

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Blazer 4wd Engine and year V6-4.3L VIN X (2005) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Accessory Delay Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 9 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 10 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 11 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 12 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 13 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 14 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 15 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 16 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 17 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 18 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 19 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 20 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 21 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 22 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 23 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 24 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 26 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 27 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 28 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 29 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 30 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 31 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 40 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 45 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 50 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 51 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 57 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 74 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 79 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 80 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 102 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 103 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 104 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 110 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 111 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 112 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Calibration Procedure MEMORY SEAT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The memory seat module uses position sensor inputs to establish soft stop locations for the adjuster motors several millimeters ahead of the physical limits of the adjuster assembly. After replacing a memory seat module or adjuster components, it may be necessary to reset the adjuster motor soft stop locations. When the repair procedure has been completed, operate the seat adjuster switch in every direction until the seat adjuster reaches its mechanical hard stop by repeatedly pressing and releasing the switch as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 118 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Control Module Replacement MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the memory seat module harness connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws securing the memory module bracket to the seat adjuster frame. 4. Remove the memory module bracket with the module. 5. Remove the module from the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the memory seat module into the bracket until the module is seated. 2. Install the memory seat module and bracket to the seat adjuster frame assembly with 2 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Install the memory seat module harness connectors. 4. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 119 5. Calibrate the seat. Refer to Memory Seat Calibration Procedure . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams Memory Seat Module - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 123 Memory Seat Module - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 124 Memory Seat Module - Driver C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Harness Routing (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 128 Heated Seat Control Module - Driver/Front Passenger (Part Of The Heated Seat Assembly) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof Control Module And Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 132 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 133 Sunroof Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 134 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the straps that retain the wiring harness. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Slide the sunroof control module (2) to the right in order to remove the sunroof control module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the sunroof control module (2) to the left in order to install the sunroof control module to the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed. 3. Install the straps that retain the wiring harness. 4. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 139 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 140 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: After installation, calibrate the new EBCM to the tire size that is appropriate to the vehicle. 1. Important: Thoroughly wash all contaminants from around the EHCU. The area around the EHCU must be free from loose dirt to prevent contamination of disassembled ABS components. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the EBCM (2). 2. Remove the four T 25-TORX® mounting screws (1) that fasten the EBCM (2) to the BPMV (3). 3. Remove the EBCM (2) from the BPMV (3). Removal may require a light amount of force. Important: Do not use a tool to pry the EBCM or the BPMV. 4. Clean the BPMV (3) to EBCM (2) mounting surfaces with a clean cloth. Installation Procedure Important: Do not reuse the old mounting screws. Always install new mounting screws with the new EBCM. 1. Important: Do not use RTV or any other type of sealant on the EBCM gasket or mating surfaces. Install EBCM (2) on to the BPMV (3). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the four new T-25 TORX® screws (1) in the EBCM (2). ^ Tighten the four T-25 TORX® screws to 5 Nm (39 inch lbs.) in an X-pattern. 3. Connect the electrical connectors to the EBCM (2). 4. Revise the tire calibration using the Scan Tool Tire Size Calibration function. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module (CCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 145 Cruise Control Module (CCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 146 Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the cruise control cable. Refer to Cruise Control Cable Replacement (LU3). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 nuts that retain the cruise control module to the mounting bracket studs. 5. Remove the cruise control module from the mounting bracket. 6. Remove the 3 screws that retain the mounting bracket to the cowl panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the mounting bracket to the cowl panel with the 3 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cruise control module bracket screws to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 2. Install the cruise control module to the vehicle. 3. Install the 3 nuts that retain the cruise control module to the mounting bracket. Tighten the cruise control module nuts to 9.0 N.m (6.6 lb ft). 4. Connect the electrical connector. 5. Install the cruise control cable. Refer to Cruise Control Cable Replacement (LU3). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Test the systems operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Body Wiring To Blower Motor And Resistor (With RPO Code C42) Body Wiring To Blower Motor And Resistor (With RPO Code C60) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 151 Blower Motor Relay Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Relay (With RPO Code ZR2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 161 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 162 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 163 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Details, RH Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 171 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 172 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 173 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 174 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 176 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 177 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 178 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 179 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 180 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 181 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 182 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 183 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 184 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 185 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 186 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 187 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 188 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 189 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 190 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 191 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 192 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 193 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 194 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 195 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 196 Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 197 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 198 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM control inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data received from other control modules connected to the class 2 serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link. The control module capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM message. The BCM controls these functions: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages and Console. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Automatic headlamp control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Keyless entry (AUO option)-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Passlock theft deterrent-Refer to Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Retained accessory power (RAP)-Refer to Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM receives 2 signals from the ignition switch. These are the Ignition 1 and Ignition 3 circuits. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals/circuits, either switch closed or switch open. - The status of the engine run flag (ERF). Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 201 OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 202 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with modules on the class 2 serial data line. The serial data line is the means by which the microprocessor-controlled modules in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the scan tool is connected to the class 2 serial data line through the DLC, the scan tool can be used to monitor each module for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 kbps. This value is an average, class 2 uses a variable pulse width modulation to carry data and depending on the message it may operate faster or slower. The bus will float at a nominal 7.0 volts during normal operation. Each module can pull this lower during the transmission. The bus is not at battery positive voltage or ground potential during normal operation. When the ignition switch is in RUN, each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1088. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector located below the instrument panel and close to the steering column. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and it is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 serial data signal at terminal 2 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data line on this vehicle is a star configuration. The following modules are attached to SP 201 and communicate on the class 2 serial data line: The body control module (BCM) - The driver information center (DIC), w/Trip - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The memory seat module (MSM) - driver, w/D44 - The powertrain control module (PCM) - The radio - The transfer case shift control module (TCSCM), w/NP8 DIAGNOSTIC ENABLE CIRCUIT W/NP1 The transfer case shift control module is equipped with the ability to store diagnostic information, which is useful to a technician in the event of module, component or wiring failures. This information can be retrieved from the transfer case shift control module (TCSCM) by way of flash codes, which are displayed on the 3 transfer case shift control switch buttons. These buttons are located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. For more information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Displaying in Transfer Case - NVG 233-NP1. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 203 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) POWER MODE Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its limit. The body control module (BCM) turns OFF the RAP function and de-energizes the RAP relay when one of the following conditions are met: The BCM senses the opening of any door or the lift gate. - The ignition switch transitions from OFF to ON. - The BCM receives a message from its internal timer indicating the end of the RAP period after 10 minutes. - The BCM detects a decrease in battery capacity below a prescribed limit. The BCM monitors the ignition switch position, battery condition, and passenger compartment door status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. If the ignition switch transitions from ON to OFF, the battery voltage is within the acceptable range and the passenger compartment doors are closed, the body control module energizes the RAP relay. This provides power for the following: Driver information center (DIC) - Outside rearview mirror switch - Power door lock control switches - Power window control switches - Radio - Sunroof Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 206 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 207 Steps 1 - 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 208 Steps 11 - 14 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 209 Steps 1 - 12 Power Mode Mismatch POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Normal vehicle class 2 communications and module operations will not begin until the system power mode has been identified. Discrete wires from the ignition switch contacts are monitored by the power mode master (PMM) module in order to determine the correct power mode. The PMM communicates the system power mode to all class 2 modules on the class 2 serial data line. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation to identify which module is the PMM and the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 210 Steps 1 - 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 211 Steps 7 - 13 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 6. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 7. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 8. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 212 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS DATA Battery Voltage: The scan tool displays the battery voltage. RAP Timer: The scan tool displays the seconds left before the BCM turns the RAP relay OFF. The BCM uses this feature to allow the operation of the radio and the power windows for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes) after the ignition is turned OFF. After the time has elapsed or the door is opened the BCM will open the ground circuit for the RAP relay. INPUT 1 Driver Door Jamb Sw.: The scan tool displays the position of the driver door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the driver door is open. Ignition 1: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN or CRANK position. Ignition 3: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN position only. Ignition Power Mode: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays OFF, RUN, CRANK and UNKNOWN. The UNKNOWN display is when the BCM can not determine the position of the ignition switch. Key in Ignition: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition key in the ignition switch cylinder. The scan tool displays YES when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition switch cylinder. The BCM uses this data in controlling the operation of the reminder chime feature. Liftglass/Rear Gate: The scan tool displays position of the liftglass/rear gate. Psgr. Door Jamb/Door Handle Switches: The scan tool displays the position of the passenger door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the door is open. RAP Relay Feedback: The scan tool displays the state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM activates the RAP relay. OUTPUTS RAP Relay: The scan tool displays the commanded state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM provides ground to the RAP relay control circuit. The BCM will allow operation of the radio and the power windows with the ignition OFF and the doors closed for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes). MODULE INFORMATION 1 Manufacturers Enable Counter: The scan tool displays the actual value for the manufacturers enable counter (MEC) in the BCM. This information is for the assembly plant only. Software Design Suffix: The scan tool displays the version of the software part number in the BCM. Software Part Number: The scan tool displays the software identification number (ID) in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 2 RAP Calibration Number: The scan tool displays the RAP calibration part number in the BCM. RAP Suffix: The scan tool displays the RAP identification number in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 3 Module Part Number: The scan tool displays the part number assigned to the BCM that is currently in the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 213 Body Control Module (BCM) Scan Tool Output Controls Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: Programming the BCM - Programming Theft Deterrent System Components The procedures below are designed to setup the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. PROGRAMMING THE BCM IMPORTANT: After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Perform the BCM special function "Request BCM Info. for SPS," then connect the scan tool to the SPS terminal. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup. PROGRAMMING THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the Passlock system. - The engine will not crank or start. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 216 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The ignition switch should be in the OFF position when connecting or disconnecting the connectors to the body control module (BCM). Always disconnect the Brown BCM connector FIRST and connect the Brown BCM connector LAST. The BCM can set DTCs with the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the lower I/P sound insulator from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the BCM. 4. Bend the 2 snap retainers back slightly and pull the BCM from the bracket at an angle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM to the bracket at an angle under the wide hook retainer, with the label facing away from the bracket. 2. Apply pressure on the left side of the BCM in order to move the module toward the mounting bracket base. Snap the module into place. 3. Ensure that the module is fully seated. Ensure that both snap retainers are holding the module. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the BCM. Connect the brown connector LAST. 5. Install the lower I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 6. Install the left I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 7. Use the following components in order to program the BCM with the proper calibrations: - The Techline Terminal - The scan tool 8. Perform the BCM programming. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 9. Clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 221 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 222 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 223 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 226 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 227 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 228 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 229 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 230 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION POWERTRAIN The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The powertrain control module (PCM) is the control center of this system. The PCM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The PCM constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the PCM. The following are some of the functions that the PCM controls: The engine fueling - The ignition control (IC) - The knock sensor (KS) system - The evaporative emissions (EVAP) system - The secondary air injection (AIR) system (if equipped) - The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system - The automatic transmission functions - The generator - The A/C clutch control - The cooling fan control POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE FUNCTION The powertrain control module (PCM) constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs and controls systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. The input and output devices in the PCM include analog-to-digital converters, signal buffers, counters, and output drivers. The output drivers are electronic switches that complete a ground or voltage circuit when turned on. Most PCM controlled components are operated via output drivers. The PCM monitors these driver circuits for proper operation and, in most cases, can set a DTC corresponding to the controlled device if a problem is detected. MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 233 - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. TRIP A trip is an interval of time during which the diagnostic test runs. A trip may consist of only a key cycle to power up the powertrain control module (PCM), allow the diagnostic to run, then cycle the key off to power down the PCM. A trip may also involve a PCM power up, meeting specific conditions to run the diagnostic test, then powering down the PCM. The definition of a trip depends upon the diagnostic. Some diagnostic tests run only once per trip (i.e., catalyst monitor) while other tests run continuously during each trip (i.e., misfire). WARM-UP CYCLE The powertrain control module (PCM) uses warm-up cycles to run some diagnostics and to clear any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). A warm-up cycle occurs when the engine coolant temperature increases 22°C (40°F) from the start-up temperature. The engine coolant must also achieve a minimum temperature of 71°C (160°F). The PCM counts the number of warm-up cycles in order to clear the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The PCM will clear the DTCs when 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a malfunction. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) The powertrain control module (PCM) is programmed with test routines that test the operation of the various systems the PCM controls. Some tests monitor internal PCM functions. Many tests are run continuously. Other tests run only under specific conditions, referred to as Conditions for Running the DTC. When the vehicle is operating within the conditions for running a particular test, the PCM monitors certain parameters and determines if the values are within an expected range. The parameters and values considered outside the range of normal operation are listed as Conditions for Setting the DTC. When the Conditions for Setting the DTC occur, the PCM executes the Action Taken When the DTC Sets. Some DTCs alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or a message. Other DTCs do not trigger a driver warning, but are stored in memory. The PCM also saves data and input parameters when most DTCs are set. This data is stored in the Freeze Frame and/or Failure Records. The DTCs are categorized by type. The DTC type is determined by the MIL operation and the manner in which the fault data is stored when a particular DTC fails. In some cases there may be exceptions to this structure. Therefore, when diagnosing the system it is important to read the Action Taken When the DTC Sets and the Conditions for Clearing the DTC in the supporting text. There are different types of DTCs and different actions taken when the DTCs set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions for a description of the general characteristics of each DTC type. DTC STATUS When the scan tool displays a DTC, the status of the DTC is also displayed. The following DTC statuses are indicated only when they apply to the DTC that is set. Fail This Ign. (Fail This Ignition): Indicates that this DTC failed during the present ignition cycle. Last Test Fail: Indicates that this DTC failed the last time the test ran. MIL Request: Indicates that this DTC is currently requesting the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). This selection will report type B DTCs only when they have requested the MIL (failed twice). Test Fail SCC (Test Failed Since Code Clear): Indicates that this DTC that has reported a failure since the last time DTCs were cleared. History: Indicates that the DTC is stored in the powertrain control module (PCM) History memory. Type B DTCs will not appear in History until they have requested the MIL (failed twice). History will be displayed for all type A DTCs and type B DTCs (which have requested the MIL) that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. Type C DTCs that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles will also appear in History. Not Run SCC (Not Run Since Code Clear): DTCs will be listed in this category if the diagnostic has not run since DTCs were last cleared. This status is not included with the DTC display since the DTC can not be set if the diagnostic has not run. This information is displayed when DTC Info is requested using the scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 234 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Distributor Ignition (DI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 235 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT Service of the powertrain control module (PCM) should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for the PCM to be replaced, the PCM should be inspected first to see if the correct part is being used. NOTE: Turn the ignition OFF when installing or removing the PCM connectors and disconnecting or reconnecting the power to the PCM (battery cable, PCM pigtail, PCM fuse, jumper cables, etc.) in order to prevent internal PCM damage. IMPORTANT: Remove any debris from the PCM connector surfaces before servicing the PCM. Inspect the PCM module connector gaskets when diagnosing/replacing the PCM. Ensure that the gaskets are installed correctly. The gaskets prevent contaminant intrusion into the PCM. Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. NOTE: In order to prevent internal damage to the PCM, the ignition must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting the PCM connector. 2. Move the PCM retention bar and retainer away from the PCM. 3. Remove the PCM from the PCM mounting bracket. 4. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the replacement PCM from the packaging. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 236 2. Verify the service number in order to ensure the service number is the same number as the faulty PCM. 3. Connect the PCM electrical connectors. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the PCM electrical connectors screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 4. Slide the PCM retainer into the PCM bracket slots. 5. Pull the PCM retention bar into position. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Program the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 241 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 242 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION COIL AND ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 243 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair IGNITION CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Remove 2 screws (4) holding the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) to the bracket. 3. Remove the ignition control module and heat sink. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) on the bracket with the 2 screws (4). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 248 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 249 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at various locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM performs calculations using the signals received from the internal and external sensors. The SDM compares the results of the calculations to values stored in memory. When these calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator ON. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON. In the event that ignition 1 voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important to note, when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 250 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the floor console, if equipped. 3. Cut an "X" in the carpet over the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). 4. Fold the carpet back to expose the SDM. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (4) from the SDM harness connector (3). 6. Disconnect the SDM harness connector (3) from the SDM (2). 7. Remove the SDM mounting fasteners (1). 8. Remove the SDM (2) from the vehicle. 9. Repair the fasteners using the following procedure: 1. Remove the stripped nut and discard the nut. 2. Drill out the weld spots to the weld stud from the floor pan side, then remove and discard the stud. 3. Condition the floor panel attaching surface where the new stud is to be installed. 4. Install new weld stud GM P/N 115115602 and clamp the weld stud. 5. Migweld the stud at the drilled holes from above or below the floor pan (as required). 6. Apply body sealer GM P/N 9984248 around any exposed openings. 7. Install a new fastener GM P/N 11515933. IMPORTANT: The following repair procedures should only be used in the event that the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) mounting studs and/or fasteners are damaged to the extent that the SDM may no longer be properly mounted. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other impurities from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM (2) horizontally to the vehicle. 3. Point the arrow on the SDM toward the front of the vehicle. 4. Install the SDM mounting fasteners (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten fasteners to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Install the SDM harness connector (3) to the SDM (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 251 6. Install the CPA (4) to the SDM harness connector (3). 7. Tape the cut carpet to cover the SDM. 8. Install the floor console, if equipped. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. IMPORTANT: The AIR BAG indicator may remain ON after the SDM has been replaced. DTC B1001 may set requiring the SDM part number to be set in multiple modules. If the indicator remains ON after enabling the SIR system, perform the diagnostic system check and follow the steps thoroughly to ensure that the SDM is set properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-04-21-002 Date: March 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Guidelines for Replacement of Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) Models: 2005 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with New Venture Gear (NVG) Transfer Case (RPOs NP1, NP4, NP8) Dealers are replacing the TCCM unnecessarily. Dealers are replacing the TCCM with codes stored in HISTORY only. The TCCM does not have a current fault condition when tested. Parts reviewed at the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) have a 75% No Trouble Found (NTF) rate. The only two legitimate reasons to replace the TCCM are: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C0550 ^ NO Communication with a scan tool. DTC C0550 This DTC indicates that the module has an internal fault and should be replaced. No Communication ^ The no communication conditions referenced here are also caused by a module internal fault to a point where the module physically will not talk. A technician cannot pull DTCs from the module because it will not communicate. The module is electrically dead. ^ No communication is not to be confused with a U1026 code. This code tells the technician that the module may still be functioning but is temporarily off line. This code may be set by the Instrument Panel (IP) or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) against the TCCM. The technician needs to figure out why the module went off line. These are typically caused by connection concerns. There is no need to replace a TCCM for a U1026 DTC. Diagnostic Aids ^ When diagnosing a transfer case electrical control system, ALWAYS check power and ground wiring first. ^ Test the connections for intermittent or poor connections, complete plug insertion, bent pins, pushed out terminals and water contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement > Page 273 Pay particular attention to the terminal connections at the module. Spread or open terminal connections may create an intermittent contact. Do a pin drag test. Refer to the terminal testing information in the table shown. ^ After repairs are complete, ALWAYS clear DTCs from the module prior to a system function test. If codes are not cleared first, the system will not function after repair. The technician may erroneously think that the system is still down and that further repairs are needed. Warranty Dealers who unnecessarily replace the TCCM that are found to have No Trouble Found (NTF) at the WPC will be returned to the AVM (Area Service Manager), or the DSM (District Service Manager) in Canada, through the Regional Feedback Process and may be charged back for the repair through the WINS system. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Control Module: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 276 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 277 Control Module: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 278 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 279 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 282 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 283 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 284 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driven/Front Passenger (Except LH Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 298 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 299 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility, Crew Cab With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 300 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Pickup With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 301 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Without RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 302 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock And Window Switch - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 306 Door Lock and Window Switch - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 307 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 308 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 309 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 313 Outside Rearview Folding Mirror Switch (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement > Page 316 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Carefully use a flat-bladed tool in order to release the outside mirror switch retaining tabs from the trim panel. 2. Remove the outside mirror switch from the trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the power folding mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power folding mirror switch. 2. Position the power folding mirror switch to the door trim panel. 3. Apply downward pressure to the power folding mirror switch, ensuring the retaining tabs are fully seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement > Page 317 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Folding Outside Mirror Switch Replacement POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the folding outside mirror switch by carefully using a flat-bladed tool in order to pry up on the leading edge. 3. Remove the accessory switch panel from the armrest. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge leaving the electrical connections connected. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the power folding mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power folding mirror switch. 2. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 3. Install the power folding mirror switch to the door trim panel. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Power Seat Motor Position Sensor: Diagrams Seat Front Vertical Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 321 Seat Horizontal Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 322 Seat Rear Vertical Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Seat Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 326 Seat Motors (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 327 Seat Harness Routing (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (w/ 6-Way) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 330 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver C1 (w/ 8-Way, w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 331 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver C2 (w/ 8-Way, W/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 332 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver/Front Passenger (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 333 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger (w/ 6-Way) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 334 Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger C1 (w/ 8-Way, W/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 335 Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger C2 (w/ 8-Way, w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 336 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Lumbar Switch Seat Lumbar Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 337 Seat Lumbar Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Lumbar Switch Replacement LUMBAR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 340 2. Install the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Seat Switch Replacement - Power SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 341 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with the 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 342 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 343 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with the 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Endgate Harness Routing View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 347 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams Rear Window Wiper Cutout and Liftglass Ajar Jamb Switch (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 348 Liftglass/End Gate Lock Cylinder Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Sunroof Opening Position Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 355 Sunroof Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement SUNROOF OPENING POSITION SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the sunroof to the closed position. IMPORTANT: - Remove the headliner. - The sunroof open position (SOP) switch is aligned to the drive cables. The SOP switch comes from the factory set to the sunroof glass panel CLOSED position. A position lock pin has been installed by the factory on the top of the SOP switch. This pin must remain until after the installation of the sunroof actuator and of the SOP switch. This lock pin locks the drive gears in place and must be removed before the complete sunroof module is installed to the vehicle. - If the SOP switch is removed for inspection, the sunroof must be in the CLOSED position. A position lock pin must be inserted. If a position lock pin is not available, place 2 wires, such as the ends of a paper clip, in the holes. 2. Remove the sunroof window. 3. Remove the sunroof control module. 4. If you reuse the SOP switch, insert the position lock pin (1) in order to lock the SOP switch in the closed position. 5. Remove the sunroof motor/actuator. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the SOP switch (3). 7. Remove the screw (2) which secures the SOP switch to the sunroof module. 8. Hold down on both of the drive cables. Lift up on the SOP switch in order to remove the switch from the sunroof module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat-bladed tool if you adjust the cable mechanism and/or the cam mechanism in order to align the cable and/or the cam timing holes.When the timing holes are aligned, insert a pin with diameter 0.0317 mm (1/8 in) or a drill bit (1) into each set of the timing holes. Use tape in order to hold each pin in place. IMPORTANT: The cable mechanisms and/or the cam mechanisms, on both sides of the glass, contain a set of timing holes. These holes are aligned in the CLOSED position of the sunroof glass panel . These holes are located on the side opposite the rear screw hole, which is used in order to mount the sunroof glass panel. When installing a new sunroof open position (SOP) switch, set the sunroof glass panel to the CLOSED position. 2. Keeping the position lock pin on the new SOP switch, align the switch over the drive cables. IMPORTANT: The SOP switch comes from the factory with a position lock pin that is installed on top of the switch. This locks the timing gears in place. Do not remove the position lock pin until after the SOP switch and the actuator are installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement > Page 358 3. Apply pressure to the SOP switch until the switch is completely seated.If the switch does not slide into position, the ridges on the drive cable housings will not go into the grooves on the back of the SOP switch. Lift each cable into the switch, and press down on the assembly until the assembly is completely seated. 4. Install the screw which secures the SOP switch to the sunroof module. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 3.4 N.m (30 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector to the SOP switch. 6. Install the sunroof motor/actuator. 7. Remove the position lock pin (1). 8. Remove the 2 alignment pins from the cable mechanisms and/or from the cam mechanisms. 9. Install the sunroof control module, but do not install the headliner until after the sunroof operation has been verified. 10. Verify the operation of the sunroof module. 11. Install the sunroof window. 12. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement > Page 359 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement (With RPO Code CF5) SUNROOF SWITCH REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driver information console (DIC). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the driver information display module. 3. Remove 6 screws securing the sunroof switch assembly to the DIC. 4. Remove the sunroof switch assembly from the DIC. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the sunroof switch to the sunroof console with 6 screws. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the driver information display module. 3. Install the DIC. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 367 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 368 3. Using a pair of needle nose pliers, compress the locking tabs on the fluid level sensor 4. Remove the brake fluid level sensor from the reservoir. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 369 1. Install the brake fluid level sensor in the reservoir. Important: A snap should be felt or heard when installing the brake fluid level sensor into the reservoir, 2. Install the electrical connector to the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 370 3. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Warning Switch: Specifications Park Brake Warning Light Switch Mounting Bolt 35 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 374 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 375 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 2. Remove the electrical connector. 3. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 376 4. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake warning lamp switch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Tighten the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 377 3. Install the electrical connector. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Wheel Speed Sensor Mounting Bolt 12 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 381 Front Frame Grounds Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 382 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 383 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 389 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 390 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 391 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 396 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams A/C High Pressure Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations A/C Accumulator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 405 A/C Low Pressure Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Switch: Diagrams Door Jamb Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 413 Door Jamb Switch - Front Passenger (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 414 Door Jamb Switch - LR/RR (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 3. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). 4. Reach up and disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Squeeze the locking tabs in order to remove the door jamb switch from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the door jamb switch to the vehicle. Fully seat the locking tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 4. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 417 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 418 Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Rear DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Caution Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Use a flat bladed tool in order to remove the door jamb switch from the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Tape the wires to the body in order to prevent them from dropping into the rear door hingepillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the door jamb switch to the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 422 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY The fuel sender assembly consists of the following major components: - The fuel level sensor (6) - The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (1) - The fuel pump module (2) - The fuel strainer (3) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 423 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 424 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 428 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 429 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. Lift the temperature sensor upward in order to remove the temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the temperature sensor by sliding the temperature sensor downward. 3. Install the radiator grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Warning Switch: Specifications Park Brake Warning Light Switch Mounting Bolt 35 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 433 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 434 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 2. Remove the electrical connector. 3. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 435 4. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake warning lamp switch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Tighten the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 436 3. Install the electrical connector. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 441 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front speaker grille from the vehicle. 2. Turn the sensor counter-clockwise 1/4 turn in order to remove. 3. Disconnect the electrical connection from the DRL ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connection to the DRL ambient light sensor. 2. Insert the sensor and turn counter-clockwise 1/4 turn in order to seat. 3. Install the front speaker grille to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Backup Lamp Switch (w/M/T) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Floor Pedals Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 448 Stop Lamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 449 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the pushrod retainer from the brake pedal pin. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and the pushrod from the brake pedal pin. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 450 2. Install the stop lamp switch and the pushrod to the brake pedal pin. 3. Install the pushrod retainer on the brake pedal pin. The retainer will snap into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Switch: Diagrams Door Jamb Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 457 Door Jamb Switch - Front Passenger (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 458 Door Jamb Switch - LR/RR (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 3. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). 4. Reach up and disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Squeeze the locking tabs in order to remove the door jamb switch from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the door jamb switch to the vehicle. Fully seat the locking tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 4. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 461 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 462 Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Rear DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Caution Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Use a flat bladed tool in order to remove the door jamb switch from the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Tape the wires to the body in order to prevent them from dropping into the rear door hingepillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the door jamb switch to the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 466 Fog Lamp Switch - Front Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Alignment Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Headlamp Leveling Switch (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 473 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 474 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is OFF and that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 2. Remove the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the screws that retain the headlamp switch panel to the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 5. Remove the headlamp switch panel from the instrument panel accessory trim plate. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the headlamp switch panel to the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 2. Install the screws that retain the headlamp switch panel to the instrument cluster bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connectors. 4. Install the instrument panel accessory trim plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module/Horn Pad Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 478 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Horn Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the inflator module. 3. Remove the horn plunger from the steering column by pressing inward to the stop and rotating the horn plunger 90 degrees. 4. Remove the screws which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. 5. Remove the horn plunger from the steering wheel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the horn plunger to the steering wheel. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the screws which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. ^ Tighten the screws to 5.5 Nm (50 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 479 3. Install the horn plunger to the steering column. 4. Install the inflator module. 5. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the upper and lower trim covers. 3. Important: The abrasion sleeve located on the steering column wire harness assembly must be reinstalled. Make note of what connector is coming out of the abrasion sleeve for installation purposes. Remove the wire harness assembly (1) from the wire harness strap (2). 4. Disconnect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector from the SIR system coil connector. 5. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly out of the bulkhead connector (1). 6. Remove the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2). 7. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 483 Installation Procedure 1. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) onto the steering column tilt head assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Be sure that the electrical contact of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) rests on the turn signal cancel cam assembly. Screw the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) into the turn signal and multifunction assembly (2). ^ Tighten the top pan head tapping screw (1) to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the side pan head tapping screw (3) to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 3. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly into the bulkhead connector (1). 4. Connect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector to the SIR coil connector. 5. Important: The abrasion sleeve must be installed back onto the steering column wire harness assembly. The ignition lock cylinder case wires and connector must be hanging out of the middle of the abrasion sleeve. Install the wire harness assembly (1) into the wire harness strap (2). 6. Install the upper and lower trim covers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 484 7. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 492 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 498 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 499 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 500 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 501 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 502 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 506 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 507 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 508 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 514 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 517 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 518 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 519 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 523 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the Class 2 circuit to the instrument panel cluster (IPC). This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 7. Remove the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 8. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7) from under the fuel sender cover. 9. Remove the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 10. Squeeze the locking tangs and remove the fuel level sensor (3). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel level sensor (3). 2. Install the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 3. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7). 4. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 5. Connect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 6. Install the fuel sender assembly. 7. Install the fuel tank. 8. Refill the fuel tank. 9. Install the fuel filler cap. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. 11. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 526 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Sender Assembly Replacement (Utility/Crew Cab) FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 527 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 531 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. A high FTP sensor voltage indicates a low fuel tank pressure or vacuum. A low FTP sensor voltage indicates a high fuel tank pressure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 532 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) from fuel sender assembly (2) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) on the fuel sender assembly (2). 2. Connect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel tank. 4. Refill the fuel tank. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 536 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 537 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the IAT sensor by pulling straight out using a rotating motion. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the IAT sensor by gently pushing the sensor into the air cleaner outlet duct until seated. 2. Connect the IAT sensor harness connector. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 541 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 544 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 545 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 549 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 550 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Other than checking for a worn grommet and loose electrical connectors, the only service possible is a unit replacement if the diagnosis shows a malfunctioning manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAP sensor by pulling straight up with a slight rocking motion. NOTE: Do not rotate or pry on the MAP sensor when removing. Damage to the MAP sensor or the intake manifold may result. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet. 5. Discard the MAP sensor grommet. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new MAP sensor grommet on the MAP sensor. 2. Install the MAP sensor. 3. Connect the MAP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 554 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 560 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 561 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 564 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 2 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 565 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 2 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 2 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 571 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 572 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 576 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 577 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 578 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Component Views Manual Transmission (4.3L w/2WD) Manual Transmission (2WD) 1 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Transfer Case (4.3L M/T w/4WD) Transfer Case (4WD) 1 - Manual Transmission 2 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 3 - Transfer Case (4WD) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 583 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4L60-E / 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 584 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 585 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Connector End View Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 588 Vehicle Speed Sensor Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the vehicle speed sensor. 3. remove these parts: ^ The vehicle speed sensor ^ The O-ring seal Installation Procedure 1. Coat a new O-ring seal with a thin film of transmission oil. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install these parts: 1. The O-ring on the vehicle speed sensor assembly. 2. The vehicle speed sensor assembly. 3. Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 591 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 592 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the sensor. 4. Remove the bolt (2). 5. Using a twisting and pulling motion, remove the vehicle speed sensor (1) from the case. 6. Remove and discard the O-ring seal (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the new O-ring seal (3) on the vehicle speed sensor (1). 2. Coat the O-ring seal (3) with clean transmission fluid. 3. Install the vehicle speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. 6. Remove the drain pan. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 599 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 605 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 606 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 613 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 614 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 615 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 616 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 617 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 623 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 626 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 627 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 628 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 632 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 635 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 636 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 641 Inflatable Restraint I/P Module Disable Switch (Pickup Only) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 645 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 646 Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 647 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END DISCRIMINATING SENSOR The front end discriminating sensor is equipped on some vehicles to supplement SIR system performance. The discriminating sensor is an electro-mechanical sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). The SDM uses the input from the discriminating sensor to assist in determining the severity of a frontal collision further supporting air bag deployment. If the SDM determines a deployment is warranted, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 648 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END DISCRIMINATING SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove off road skid plate, if equipped. 3. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector. 4. Disconnect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector from the sensor. 5. Drill out the mounting rivets. 6. Remove the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The following procedures should be utilized in the event that sensor mounting holes or fasteners are damaged to the extent that the sensor can no longer be properly mounted. 7. Perform the following steps in order to complete the first fastener repair: 1. Remove and discard the improperly installed rivet. 2. Reattach sensor with new rivet. 8. Perform the following steps in order to complete the second fastener repair: 1. Remove the improperly installed rivet. 2. Enlarge the mounting holes (1) in the lower radiator support to 9.0 mm (0.35 in). 3. Insert and properly seat the rivnut. 4. Install sensor with screw. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 649 Tighten fasteners to 8.0 N.m (71 lb in). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other impurities from the mounting surface. 2. Install the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor horizontally to the lower radiator support surface. Ensure that the arrow is pointing toward the front of the vehicle. 3. Install the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor mounting rivets (GM P/N 15715058). 4. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector to the sensor. 5. Install the connector position assurance (CPA) to the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector. 6. Install the off road skid plate, in equipped. 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 653 Seat Belt Switch - LF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Clutch Start Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 662 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair Clutch Start Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the plastic retainer tabs from the clutch start switch. 2. Remove the clutch start switch from the push rod. 3. Remove the connector from the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the connector to the clutch start switch. 2. Install the clutch start switch to the pushrod with the plastic tabs. 3. Install the push rod to the clutch pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 669 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 675 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Regulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to release tension on the reverse boost valve retaining ring. 4. Remove the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 5. Remove the reverse boost valve sleeve (5) and the reverse boost valve (4). 6. Remove the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 7. Remove the pressure regulator valve (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure regulator valve (1). 2. Install the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 3. Install the reverse boost valve (4) in the reverse boost valve sleeve (5). 4. Install the reverse boost valve (4) and sleeve (5) in the oil pump cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 676 5. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to expose the retaining ring slot. 6. Install the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 7. Install the transmission oil filter and pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams Tow/Haul Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 680 Tow/Haul Switch: Testing and Inspection Tow/Haul Switch/Indicator Always On or Inoperative Circuit Description Tow/haul mode enables the operator to achieve enhanced shift performance when towing or hauling a load. When tow/haul mode is selected, the tow/haul switch input signal to the body control module (BCM) is momentarily toggled to zero volts. This signals the powertrain control module (PCM) to extend the length of time between upshifts and increase transmission line pressure. Cycling the tow/haul switch again disables tow/haul mode and returns the transmission to a normal shift pattern. Diagnostic Aids Inspect the connectors at the BCM, and all other circuit connecting points for an intermittent condition. Inspect the circuit wiring for an intermittent condition. If the electrical circuit checks are OK and the tow/haul shift pattern is not occurring, there may be a mechanical/hydraulic condition that prevents tow/haul operation. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 681 Steps 1-8 Test Description These numbers correspond to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This step tests for a faulty tow/haul switch. 3. This step tests for voltage input from the BCM to the tow/haul switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 685 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 686 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 687 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Gear Sensor/Switch, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the backup lamp switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The backup lamp switch has pre-applied thread sealant on the threads. Install the backup lamp switch. ^ Tighten the backup lamp switch to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 697 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 698 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 699 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 702 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 707 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Remove the vacuum line for the transfer case vacuum switch. 5. Remove the transfer case vacuum switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case vacuum switch ^ Tighten the transfer case vacuum switch to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case vacuum switch vacuum line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 710 3. Install the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Install the transfer case brace bolts. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt at the engine to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the transfer case brace bolt at the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the transfer case shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 711 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 712 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 713 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 720 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 721 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 722 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 723 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 724 Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 727 2. Install the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the front propeller shaft. 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 728 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case right rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the transfer case shield. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 729 Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor into the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case left rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Lockout Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Window Lockout Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 738 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 739 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 740 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 741 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 742 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 743 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 744 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 745 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 746 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 747 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 748 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 749 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 750 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 751 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 752 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 753 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 754 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 755 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 756 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 757 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 758 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 759 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 760 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 761 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 762 Power Window Switch: Connector Views Door Lock And Window Switch - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 763 Door Lock and Window Switch - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 764 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 765 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 766 Window Switch - LR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 767 Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 768 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power window switch from the trim panel by using a flat-bladed tool in order to pry upward on the leading edge. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch.Use a small screwdriver in order to press in the retainer springs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Install the power window switch to the trim panel by pressing down. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 773 Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 774 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to pry the switch away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors as necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors as necessary. 2. Install the switch to the instrument panel. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 778 Wiper Switch: Diagrams Rear Window Wiper Cutout and Liftglass Ajar Jamb Switch (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 779 Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 780 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to pry the switch away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors as necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors as necessary. 2. Install the switch to the instrument panel. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 786 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 787 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 788 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 789 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 790 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 791 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 792 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 795 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 796 Fastener Tightening Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (?). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 799 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (?). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 800 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description Toe Description Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 801 Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 802 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (?). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (?). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Toe Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 803 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Lead/Pull Description Lead/Pull Description At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 804 Lead/pull is usually caused by these factors: ^ Tire construction ^ Wheel alignment ^ Unbalanced steering gear The way in which a tire is built may produce lead/pull. The rear tires will not cause lead. Memory Steer Description Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the these inspections inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Perform these steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 807 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (RWD) Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (RWD) Important: Before you adjust caster and camber angles, raise and release the front bumper. Do this twice in order to allow the vehicle to return to a normal height. 1. Adjust the caster and the camber by inserting shims between the upper control arm shaft and the frame bracket. Add shims or subtract shims or transfer shims in order to change the readings. 2. In order to adjust the caster and the camber, loosen the upper control arm shaft-to-frame nuts (1). Add shims or remove shims (2) as required. Tighten the nuts. Check the toe after you change the caster and the camber. 3. Caster - Transfer the shims from front to rear or from rear to front. The transfer of one shim from the rear bolt to the front bolt decreases positive caster. 4. Camber - Change the shims at the front and the rear of the cross shaft. Add an equal number of shims at the front and the rear of the cross shaft. This decreases positive camber. 5. A normal shim pack will leave at least two threads of the bolt exposed beyond the nut (1). The difference between the front shim pack and the rear shim pack must not exceed 10 mm (0.40 inch). If you cannot meet these requirements, check for damage to the control arms and to related parts. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut on the thinner shim pack first. This improves the shaft-to-frame clamping force. This also improves torque retention. ^ Tighten the nuts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 808 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (4WD) Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (4WD) 1. Important: Before adjusting the caster angle and camber angle, raise and release the front bumper. Do this twice in order to allow the vehicle to return to a normal height. Use the cams on the upper control arm frame attaching bolts to adjust the caster and the camber. To adjust the caster and the camber, loosen the upper control arm-to-frame attaching nuts. Rotate the cam by rotating the bolt head. ^ Caster - To increase positive caster, move the front cam lobe inboard and move the rear cam lobe outboard. ^ Camber - To increase positive camber, move the front and the rear cam lobes inboard. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts after you select the proper cam position. ^ Tighten the nuts to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 809 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment Tie rod adjuster parts often rust in service. Discard the nuts and the bolts if the torque required to remove the nut from the bolt exceeds 9 Nm (80 lb inch) after breakaway. Apply penetrating oil between the clamp and the tube. Rotate the clamps until the clamps move freely. Install new bolts and nuts with the correct part number if needed. Change the length of the tie rods in order to increase or decrease toe-in. Use the threaded sleeve to change the length of the tie rods. When the tie rods are mounted ahead of the steering knuckle, the rods must be decreased in length to increase toe or increased in length to decrease toe. Perform these steps to make front toe adjustments: 1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead position. 2. Perform the toe adjustments separately at each side. 3. Determine the toe (3) from the alignment equipment. 4. Loosen the tie rod adjuster clamp bolts at each end to the tie rod adjuster sleeve. 5. Adjust the toe by turning the tie rod adjuster in order to achieve the proper toe specification. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Position the tie rod adjuster clamps. ^ Tighten the tie rod adjuster clamp bolts to 21 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 7. Verify the number of threads showing on the tie rod ends at each side of the adjuster sleeve are equal within three threads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................379-427 kPa (55-62 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 816 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 817 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. The electric fuel pump supplies fuel through an inline fuel filter to the fuel injection system. The pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. A separate pipe returns unused fuel to the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 818 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 819 Steps 8-13 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 820 Steps 14-20 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 821 Steps 21-23 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 831 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 837 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 838 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner cover wingnuts. 2. Remove the air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clear out any debris in the air cleaner housing. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the air cleaner element into the air cleaner housing. 2. Install the air cleaner cover. 3. Tighten the air cleaner cover wingnuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 844 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 845 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. .........................................................1,000 ohms per ft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 849 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires-Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 850 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wire at each spark plug. - Twist the boots 1/2 turn before removing the boots. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wire from each spark plug. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wire from the distributor. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wires from the distributor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires at the distributor. NOTE: If the boot to wire movement has occurred, the boot will give a false visual impression of being fully seated. Ensure that the boots have been properly assembled by pushing sideways on the installed boots. Failure to properly seat the terminal onto the spark plug will lead to wire core erosion and result in an engine misfire or crossfire condition, and possible internal damage to the engine. 2. Install the spark plug wire to each spark plug. 3. Inspect the wires for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. 3. Wire routings must be kept intact during service and followed exactly when wires have been disconnected or when replacement of the wires is necessary. Failure to route the wires properly can lead to radio ignition noise and cross firing of the plugs, or shorting of the leads to the ground. 4. Any time the spark plug wires or boots are installed on the spark plugs, new dielectric grease needs to be applied inside the boot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Description and Operation Distributor: Description and Operation DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The distributor ignition (DI) system is responsible for producing and controlling a high energy secondary spark. This spark is used to ignite the compressed air/fuel mixture at precisely the correct time. This provides optimal performance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions. This ignition system consists of a single ignition coil and ignition control module (ICM). Spark energy is delivered via a distributor cap, rotor, and secondary spark plug wires. The driver module within the ICM is commanded to operate the coil by the powertrain control module (PCM), that has complete control over spark timing. The DI system consists of the following components: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Ignition Coil And ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Secondary Ignition Components The distributor is only used as a means to operate the CMP sensor and to distribute spark in the correct sequence. Since the distributor has no influence on base timing the distributor is not adjustable on V6 engines. The distributor position can be adjusted on V8 engines because the chance of crossfire between terminals is greater due to the proximity of the terminals. The spark is distributed through conventional carbon core wires to the spark plugs. The plugs are tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Powertrain Control Module (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Modes Of Operation There is one normal mode of operation, with the spark under PCM control. If the CKP pulses are lost the engine will not run. The loss of a CMP signal may result in a longer crank time since the PCM cannot determine which stroke the pistons are on. Diagnostic trouble codes are available to accurately diagnose the ignition system with a scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Inspection DISTRIBUTOR INSPECTION 1. Inspect the cap for cracks, tiny holes or carbon tracks between the cap terminal traces. Diagnose the carbon tracks using the following procedure: 1. Remove the cap. 2. Place 1 lead from the DMM on a cap terminal. 3. Use the other lead in order to probe all other terminals and the center carbon ball. 4. Move the base lead to the next terminal. Probe all other leads. 5. Continue this procedure until you test all the secondary terminals. 6. If there are any non-infinite readings, replace the cap. IMPORTANT: Discoloration of the cap and some whitish build up around the cap terminals is normal. Yellowing of the rotor cap, darkening and some carbon build up under the rotor segment is normal. Replacement of the cap and the rotor is not necessary unless there is a driveability concern. 2. Inspect the cap for excess build-up of corrosion on the terminals. Scrape clean the terminals. Replace the cap if the corrosion is excessive. Some buildup is normal 3. Inspect the rotor segment for excess wear. Replace the rotor if excess looseness in the rotor segment is present. 4. Inspect the shaft for shaft-to-bushing looseness: 1. Inspect the housing for cracks or damage. 2. Insert the shaft in the housing. 3. If the shaft wobbles, replace the housing assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 856 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnosis DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system includes the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor, the camshaft position (CMP) sensor, the ignition coil with the ignition control module (ICM), the secondary wires, the spark plugs, and the circuit conductors and connectors. The powertrain control module (PCM) controls the ignition system. The PCM monitors the input signals from various engine sensors. The PCM controls the dwell of the ignition primary coil, computes the desired spark timing and firing of the ignition system via an ignition control (IC) timing control circuit to the ICM. The Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnostic Table assumes the following conditions: The battery is fully charged. - There is adequate fuel in the fuel tank. - The fuel delivery system is functional. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Engine mechanical conditions may prevent the distributor from rotating. Inspect the following if the distributor rotor does not rotate: A broken distributor drive shaft - A worn or broken distributor drive gear - A worn or broken camshaft timing chain and gears An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. If a repair is necessary. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 857 Steps 1-9 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 858 Steps 10-19 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 859 Steps 20-32 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 860 Steps 33-48 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 861 Steps 49-50 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. This step is testing for a CKP sensor signal to the PCM. 4. This step is testing for an internally shorted CMP sensor. 9. This step is testing for spark output at more than one spark plug wire. The J 26792 Spark Tester requires a minimum of 25,000 volts to operate. 10. This step determines if spark is being delivered to the distributor cap. 20. This test is testing if the PCM is providing a timing control signal to the ICM. 21. This test checks for a basic engine mechanical problem. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul DISTRIBUTOR OVERHAUL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (2). NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1). If not, replace the distributor. 3. Remove the two screws from the rotor. 4. Remove the rotor. 5. Note the locating holes that the rotor was removed from: - The rotor screw holes (1) - The rotor locator pin holes (2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 864 6. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel with the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 7. Remove the two screws that hold the CMP sensor. 8. Discard the screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. 10. Note the dimple located below the roll pin hole on one side of the gear. The dimple will be used to properly orient the gear onto the shaft during reassembly. 11. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 12. Drive out the roll pin with a suitable punch. 13. Remove the driven gear from the distributor shaft. 14. Remove the round washer. 15. Remove the tang washer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 865 16. Remove the shim washer (1). 17. Remove the old oil seal. ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel for the CMP sensor. NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Insert the sensor into the housing. 3. Install two new screws for the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 866 4. Identify the correct rotor mounting position: - At the rotor screw holes (1) - At the rotor locator pin holes (2) 5. Install the distributor rotor according to the index marks. 6. Install two rotor hold down screws. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 7. Install the shim washer (1) on the bottom of the distributor shaft. 8. Install the tang washer. 9. Install the round washer. 10. Install the driven gear according to the index marks. 11. Align the rotor segment as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). 12. Install the gear and align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 867 13. Check to see If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite the rotor segment when the driven gear is installed in the distributor. 14. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 15. Install the roll pin with a suitable punch and hammer in order to hold the driven gear in the correct position. 16. Install the new oil seal under the mounting flange of the distributor base. 17. Install the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 868 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement DISTRIBUTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: There are two procedures available to install the distributor. Use Installation Procedure 1 when the crankshaft has NOT been rotated from the original position. Use Installation Procedure 2 when any of the following components are removed: The intake manifold - The cylinder head - The camshaft - The timing chain or sprockets - The complete engine If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns on and DTC P1345 sets after installing the distributor, this indicates an incorrectly installed distributor. Engine damage or distributor damage may occur. Use Procedure 2 in order to install the distributor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the distributor cap. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the wire boot in order to remove the wire from the distributor cap. 4. Remove the electrical connector from the base of the distributor. 5. Remove the 2 screws that hold the distributor cap to the housing. 6. Discard the screws. 7. Remove the distributor cap from the housing. 8. Use a grease pencil in order to note the position of the rotor in relation to the distributor housing (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 869 9. Mark the distributor housing and the intake manifold with a grease pencil. 10. Remove the mounting clamp hold down bolt. 11. Remove the distributor. 12. As the distributor is being removed from the engine, watch the rotor move in a counter-clockwise direction about 42 degrees. This will appear as slightly more than 1 clock position. 13. Note the position of the rotor segment. 14. Place a second mark on the base of the distributor (2). This will aid in achieving proper rotor alignment during the distributor installation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 1. If installing a new distributor assembly, place 2 marks on the new distributor housing in the same location as the 2 marks on the original housing. 2. Remove the new distributor cap, if necessary. 3. Align the rotor with the second mark (2). 4. Guide the distributor into the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 870 5. Align the hole in the distributor hold-down base over the mounting hole in the intake manifold. 6. As the distributor is being installed, observe the rotor moving in a clockwise direction about 42 degrees. 7. Once the distributor is completely seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the mark on the distributor base (1). - If the rotor segment is not aligned with the number 1 mark, the driven gear teeth and the camshaft have meshed one or more teeth out of alignment. - In order to correct this condition, remove the distributor and reinstall the distributor. 8. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 9. Install the distributor cap. 10. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 11. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 871 12. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 13. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 14. Refer to installation procedure 2 if malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 1. Rotate the crankshaft balancer clockwise until the alignment marks on the crankshaft balancer are aligned with the tabs on the engine front cover and the number 1 piston is at top dead center of the compression stroke. IMPORTANT: Rotate the number 1 cylinder to TDC of the compression stroke. The engine front cover has 2 alignment tabs and the crankshaft balancer has 2 alignment marks (spaced 90 degrees apart) which are used for positioning number 1 piston at TDC. With the piston on the compression stroke and at top dead center, the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) must align with the engine front cover tab (2) and the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (4) must align with the engine front cover tab (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 872 2. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). 3. Installing the driven gear 180 degrees out of alignment, or locating the rotor in the wrong holes, will cause a no-start condition. Premature engine wear or damage may result. NOTE: The ignition system distributor driven gear and rotor may be installed in multiple positions. In order to avoid mistakes, mark the distributor on the following components in order to ensure the same mounting position upon reassembly: - The distributor driven gear - The distributor shaft - The rotor holes With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). - The alignment will not be exact. - If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite of the rotor segment when the gear is installed in the distributor. 4. Using a long screw driver, align the oil pump drive shaft to the drive tab of the distributor. 5. Guide the distributor into the engine. Ensure that the spark plug towers are perpendicular to the centerline of the engine. 6. Once the distributor is fully seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the pointer cast into the distributor base. - There may be a 6 cast into this pointer, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 6 cylinder engine or an 8, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 8 cylinder engine. - If the rotor segment does not come within a few degrees of the pointer, the gear mesh between the distributor and the camshaft may be off a tooth or more. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 873 - If this is the case, repeat the procedure again in order to achieve proper alignment. 7. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 8. Install the distributor cap. 9. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 10. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. 11. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 12. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 13. Repeat installation procedure 2 if the malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the MIL is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 877 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. AC R41-932 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 878 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE 1. Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. 2. Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION 1. Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. 2. Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. 3. Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 879 4. Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. 5. Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION 1. Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. 2. Carbon Fouled-Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures - Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. 3. Deposit Fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 880 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the spark plug wires. 2. Loosen each spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or air blast away any dirt from around the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs 1 at a time. Place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder numbers. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 881 1. Properly position each spark plug washer. 2. Inspect each spark plug gap. Adjust each plug as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.524 mm (0.060 in) 3. Hand start the spark plugs in the corresponding cylinders. 4. Tighten the spark plugs. - For used heads tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). - For new aluminum heads tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). - For new iron heads tighten the spark plugs to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the spark plug wires. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. ^ No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example: If the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 885 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Ensure that the vehicle batteries are in good condition, and fully charged. 2. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 3. Disconnect the positive ignition coil wire plug from the ignition coil. 4. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connector. 5. Remove all of the spark plugs. 6. Notice: Do not insert objects into the throttle plate opening. Damage to the throttle body can result, requiring replacement of the throttle body assembly. Block the throttle linkage wide open. 7. Install the engine cylinder compression gage to the cylinder being tested. 8. Using the vehicle starter motor, rotate, or crank the engine for 4 compression strokes, or puffs, for the cylinder being tested. If the engine rotates for more than 4 compression strokes, test the cylinder again. 9. Record the compression reading. 10. Remove the engine cylinder compression gage from the cylinder being tested. 11. Repeat steps 8-11 for each additional cylinder. All cylinders must be tested to obtain valid test results. 12. If any cylinders have low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 oz) of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole. 13. Repeat steps 8-11 for all low compression cylinders. 14. The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. ^ Normal The compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression. ^ Piston rings leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression builds up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. ^ Valves leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. ^ Head gasket leaking Compression is low on the first stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. Adjacent cylinders have the same, or similar, low compression readings. 15. If one or more cylinders fails to meet the minimum specified compression, repair or replace all damaged or worn components and test the engine again. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 890 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 891 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 892 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 895 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 896 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 897 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 898 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 899 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 900 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 901 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 903 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 904 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 905 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Drive Belt Rumbling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 906 Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Drive Belt Squeal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 907 Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the squeal noise. If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the squeal noise is the drive belt(s) or an accessory drive component. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. This test is to verify that an accessory drive component does not have a seized bearing. With the belt remove test the bearings in the accessory drive components for turning smoothly. Also test the accessory drive components with the engine operating by varying the load on the components to verify that the components operate properly. 5. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 908 6. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 7. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 8. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. Drive Belt Vibration Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Such as but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 909 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom such as the exhaust system, or the drivetrain. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) or accessory drive components may be causing the vibration. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The drive belt(s) may cause a vibration. While the drive belt(s) is removed this is the best time to inspect the condition of the belt. 6. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 8. This step should only be performed if the fan is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the engine cooling fan for bent, twisted, loose, or cracked blades. Inspect the fan clutch for smoothness, ease of turning. Inspect for a bent fan shaft or bent mounting flange. 9. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smoothness and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 10. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Drive Belt Whine Drive Belt Whine Diagnosis Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 910 Diagnostic Aids The drive belt(s) will not cause the whine noise. If the whine noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. Such items but not limited to may be an A/C system overcharged, the power steering system restricted or the wrong fluid, or the generator failing. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 3. This test is to verify that the noise is being caused by the drive belt(s) or the accessory drive components. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The inspection should include checking the drive belt tensioner and the drive belt idler pulley bearings. The drive belt(s) may have to be installed and the accessory drive components operated separately by varying their loads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 911 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Install a 3/8 inch drive wrench on the drive belt tensioner arm and rotate the arm counterclockwise. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Slowly release the tension on the drive belt tensioner arm. Installation Procedure 1. Route the drive belt over all the pulleys except the drive belt tensioner pulley. 2. Observe the drive belt routing for the vehicles without air conditioning. 3. Observe the drive belt routing for the vehicles with air conditioning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 912 4. Install a 3/8 inch drive wrench on the drive belt tensioner arm and rotate the arm counterclockwise. 5. Install the drive belt over the drive belt tensioner pulley. 6. Slowly release the tension on the drive belt tensioner arm. 7. Inspect for the drive belt being properly installed on the pulleys. 8. Avoid mis-positioning the drive belt by one or more grooves. 9. Confirm for the proper drive belt size and the correct drive belt routing by observing the location of the fix pointer and the index marks on the drive belt tensioner. With a new drive belt installed the fix pointer should align within the indentation on the drive belt tensioner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 913 10. With a used drive belt installed the fix pointer should not align past the index mark. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 924 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 930 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 931 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner cover wingnuts. 2. Remove the air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clear out any debris in the air cleaner housing. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the air cleaner element into the air cleaner housing. 2. Install the air cleaner cover. 3. Tighten the air cleaner cover wingnuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair This Article has been updated by bulletin #PIT3330, dated December 22, 2004. Condition/Concern: A customer may inquire about the availability of the passenger compartment air filter. Recommendation/Instructions: Starting in 2003 model year, the passenger compartment air filter is no longer available as a factory option. With the redesigned HVAC case, there is no longer a cavity for the filter. The GM parts catalog indicates there is a replacement filter available; however, there is no provision for it. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Fluid/Filter Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When the transmission is at operating temperatures, take necessary precautions when removing the drain plug, to avoid being burned by draining fluid. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transmission oil pan. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 4. If necessary, remove the bolts and position aside the range selector cable bracket for clearance while lowering the pan. It is not necessary to remove the cable from the lever or bracket. 5. Remove the oil pan bolts from the front and sides of the pan only. 6. Loosen the rear oil pan bolts approximately 4 turns. 7. Lightly tap the oil pan with a rubber mallet in order to loosen the pan to allow the fluid to drain. 8. Remove the remaining oil pan bolts. 9. Remove the oil pan and the gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 938 10. Grasp firmly while pulling down with a twisting motion in order to remove the filter. 11. Remove the filter seal. The filter seal may be stuck in the pump; if necessary, carefully use pliers or another suitable tool to remove the seal. 12. Discard the seal. 13. Inspect the fluid color. 14. Inspect the filter. Pry the metal crimping away from the top of the filter and pull apart. The filter may contain evidence for root cause diagnosis: ^ Clutch material ^ Bronze slivers indicating bushing wear ^ Steel particles 15. Clean the transmission case and the oil pan gasket surfaces with solvent, and air dry. You must remove all traces of the old gasket material. Installation Procedure 1. Coat the new filter seal with automatic transmission fluid. 2. Install the new filter seal into the transmission case. Tap the seal into place using a suitable size socket. 3. Install the new filter into the case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 939 4. Install the oil pan and a new gasket. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan bolts. ^ Tighten the oil pan to transmission case bolts alternately and evenly to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. If previously removed, install the range selector cable bracket and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Apply a small amount of sealant GM P/N 12346004 to the threads of the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 8. Install the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. 11. Check the COLD fluid level reading for initial fill only. 12. Inspect the oil pan gasket for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 945 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 946 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Description and Operation FUEL STRAINER The fuel strainer attaches to the lower end of the fuel sender. The fuel strainer is made of woven plastic. The functions of the fuel strainer are to filter contaminants and to wick fuel. The fuel strainer normally requires no maintenance. Fuel stoppage at this point indicates that the fuel tank contains an abnormal amount of sediment or contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 950 Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Service and Repair FUEL STRAINER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to the Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 6. Note the position of the fuel strainer (2) on the fuel sender. 7. Support the fuel sender assembly with one hand and grasp the strainer (2) with the other hand. 8. Pull the strainer off the fuel sender. Discard the strainer after inspection. 9. Inspect the strainer. Replace a contaminated strainer and clean the fuel tank. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install a new fuel strainer (2) in the same position as noted during disassembly. Push the strainer on the bottom of the fuel sender until the strainer is fully seated. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly. 3. Install the fuel tank. 4. Refill the fuel tank. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 955 Oil Filter: Specifications Oil Filter ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Oil Filter Adapter Bolt ........................................ ...................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Oil Filter Fitting ............................................................................................................................. ........................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Adapter Mounting Bracket Bolt ................................................................................................................................... 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Adapter Nut ..................................................................................... ............................................................................ 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Inlet and Outlet Hose Clip Bolt ................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Inlet and Outlet Hose to Remote Oil Filter Adapter Bolt ............................................................................................ 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 956 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil into a suitable container. 3. For 2WD vehicles, remove the oil filter from the oil filter adapter. 4. For 4WD vehicles, open the access panel in the steering linkage shield. 5. Remove the oil filter from the remote oil filter adapter. 6. Inspect to ensure the engine oil filter gasket is removed. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 957 1. Lubricate the oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. For a RWD vehicle, install the oil filter to the oil filter adapter. 3. For 4WD vehicles, install the oil filter to the remote oil filter adapter. 4. Tighten the oil filter following the instructions on the filter. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan drain plug into the oil pan. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the crankcase with the proper capacity and quality of engine oil. 8. Operate the engine and check for leaks and oil pressure. 9. For a 4WD vehicles, close the access panel in the steering linkage shield. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Pressure Hose Power Steering Pressure Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the steering linkage shield, if equipped. 3. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the pressure hose from the power steering pump. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. Disconnect the power steering gear pressure hose from the power steering gear. 8. Remove the power steering gear pressure hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 963 1. Install the power steering gear pressure hose to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the power steering pressure hose to the power steering gear. ^ Tighten the power steering pressure hose to the power steering gear to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Connect the power steering pressure hose to the power steering pump. ^ Tighten the power steering pressure hose to the power steering pump to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 7. Install the steering linkage shield, if equipped. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 964 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Return Hose Power Steering Return Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the power steering gear return hose from the power steering pump (for vehicles without a power steering cooler). 4. Disconnect the power steering gear return hose from the power steering cooler, if equipped. 5. Disconnect the wiring harness clip from the power steering return hose at the power steering gear. 6. Disconnect the power steering gear return hose from the power steering gear. 7. Remove the power steering gear return hose from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 965 Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. 1. Install the power steering gear return hose to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the power steering return hose to the power steering gear. ^ Tighten the power steering return hose to the power steering gear to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the wiring harness clip to the power steering return hose at the power steering gear. 4. Connect the power steering gear return hose to the power steering cooler, if equipped. ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the power steering gear return hose to the power steering pump (for vehicles without a power steering cooler). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 966 ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 6. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 967 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose from the power steering pump. 4. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose from the power steering cooler. 5. Remove the power steering cooler hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 968 1. Install the power steering cooler hose to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the power steering cooler hose to the power steering cooler. ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the power steering cooler hose to the power steering pump. ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 4. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 5. Install the air cleaner assembly. 6. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet (4.3L) ^ Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Partially drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 3. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator support. 4. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 5. Reposition the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. 6. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp from the coolant outlet. 7. Reposition the radiator inlet hose from the coolant outlet. 8. Remove the radiator inlet hose. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator inlet hose to the coolant outlet. 2. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp to the coolant outlet. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 973 3. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. 4. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 5. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator support. 6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 8. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 974 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet (4.3L) ^ Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 3. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp from the water pump. 4. Remove the radiator outlet hose. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator outlet hose. 2. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp to the water pump. 3. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 980 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 981 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Brake Fluid and Brake Fluid Handling Use extreme care when selecting brake system fluids or seal damage can result. Do not reuse brake system fluids. Do not mix power steering fluid with brake fluid. Fluid contamination may result in swelling and deterioration of rubber parts. This can lead to reduced brake performance and the eventual loss of braking capability. Service booster components in a clean work area separate from the brake servicing area. Wash hands before changing work areas. Do not use the same containers for brake and power steering fluids. Caution: Brake fluid may be irritating to the skin or the eyes, or may cause nausea, vomiting, or diarrhea if swallowed. In case of contact or swallowing take the following actions: ^ Eye contact - rinse thoroughly with water ^ Skin contact - wash with soap and water ^ if swallowed - Contact a physician immediately. Give two glasses of water and induce vomiting by sticking fingers down the throat. Notice: Brake fluid will damage electrical connections and painted surfaces. Use shop cloths, suitable containers, and fender covers to prevent brake fluid from contacting these areas. Always re-seal and wipe off brake fluid containers to prevent spills. Always store brake fluid in a closed, sealed container. Never use previously opened containers of stored brake fluid. Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container. Brake fluid left in open or improperly sealed containers will absorb moisture. Moisture can lower the brake fluid boiling point, causing the following problems: ^ Brake system contamination ^ Corrosion ^ Deterioration of rubber components Substandard Or Contaminated Brake Fluid It the brake fluid contains improper fluid, water, or other contaminates, the brake fluid may boil or may deteriorate rubber components in the hydraulic brake system. Evidence of rubber deterioration occurs in the following areas: ^ Swollen master cylinder piston seals ^ Swelling of the wheel cylinder boots ^ Swelling of caliper boots ^ Swelling of the master cylinder reservoir diaphragm If rubber deterioration is found, replace all rubber parts, including the hoses, in the brake system. Inspect for brake fluid on the brake linings. Replace the brake linings that are contaminated with brake fluid. If the brake fluid is contaminated and the master cylinder piston seals are good, check for leaks and excessive heat conditions. If no leaks or excessive heat conditions are found, flush the brake system. Flushing The Hydraulic Brake System In order to flush the brake hydraulic system, run new brake fluid through the brake system. Continue until the brake fluid at each bleeder valve comes out clear. Flushing is the only way to clean contaminated fluid out of the system. Flush the brake hydraulic system for the following reasons: ^ New hydraulic brake parts are installed ^ Contamination may be present ^ You do not know the grade of brake fluid in the brake system ^ Mineral oil is present in the brake fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Clutch Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 986 Clutch Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345347, in Canada 10953517) or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 991 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 992 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 993 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 994 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY Automatic Transmission ...................................................................................................................... ......................................... 13.8 quarts (13.1 liters) Manual Transmission .......................................... .......................................................................................................................... 14.1 quarts (13.3 liters) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 997 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-037E Date: April 07, 2011 Subject: Release of DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saturn Relay 2005 and Prior Saturn L-Series 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2005-2008 Saturn VUE with 4T45-E 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Except 2008 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Equinox Except 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Epica Except 2007 and Prior Chevrolet Optra Except 2008 and Prior Pontiac Torrent, Vibe, Wave Except 2003-2005 Saturn ION with CVT or AF23 Only Except 1991-2002 Saturn S-Series Except 2008 and Prior Saturn VUE with CVT, AF33 or 5AT (MJ7/MJ8) Transmission Only Except 2008 Saturn Astra Attention: DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-037D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSFER CASES and POWER STEERING The content of this bulletin does not apply to manual transmissions or transfer cases. Any vehicle that previously required DEXRON(R)-III for a manual transmission or transfer case should now use P/N 88861800. This fluid is labeled Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid. Some manual transmissions and transfer cases require a different fluid. Appropriate references should be checked when servicing any of these components. Power Steering Systems should now use P/N 9985010 labeled Power Steering Fluid. Consult the Parts Catalog, Owner's Manual, or Service Information (SI) for fluid recommendations. Some of our customers and/or General Motors dealerships/Saturn Retailers may have some concerns with DEXRON(R)-VI and DEXRON(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and transmission warranty claims. DEXRON(R)-VI is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids (except as noted above). Please remember that the clean oil reservoirs of the J-45096 - Flushing and Flow Tester machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI for testing, flushing or filling General Motors transmissions/transaxles (except as noted above). DEXRON(R)-VI can be used in any proportion in past model vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission/transaxle in place of DEXRON(R)-III (i.e. topping off the fluid in the event of a repair or fluid change). DEXRON(R)-VI is also compatible with any former version of DEXRON(R) for use in automatic transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON(R)-VI ATF General Motors Powertrain has upgraded to DEXRON(R)-VI ATF with the start of 2006 vehicle production. Current and prior automatic transmission models that had used DEXRON(R)-III must now only use DEXRON(R)-VI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 1002 All 2006 and future model transmissions that use DEXRON(R)-VI are to be serviced ONLY with DEXRON(R)-VI fluid. DEXRON(R)-VI is an improvement over DEXRON(R)-III in the following areas: * These ATF change intervals remain the same as DEXRON(R)-III for the time being. 2006-2008 Transmission Fill and Cooler Flushing Some new applications of the 6L80 six speed transmission will require the use of the J 45096 Flushing and Flow Tester to accomplish transmission fluid fill. The clean oil reservoir of the machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 1003 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 1004 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Capacity Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill ..................................................................................................... ............................................................................................ 4.7L (5.0 Qt) 4L60-E/4L65-E Transmission Fluid Pan Removal ........................................................................................................ ............................................................................................. 4.7L (5.0 Qt) Overhaul ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... 10.6L (11.0 Qt) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1007 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ...................................... DEXRON III or Equivalent Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1008 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Steps 1-17 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1009 Steps 18-20 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle for 15 minutes or until the transmission fluid reaches an operating temperature of 82 - 93°C (180 - 200°F). 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 3. With your foot on the brake, move the shift lever through each gear range. Pause for about 3 seconds in each range, ending in PARK. 4. Apply the parking brake and let the engine idle for 3 minutes. 5. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator. Give the indicator a full twist in order to close. 6. Wait 3 seconds and remove the indicator. 7. Read both sides of the indicator. The fluid must be within the hot cross-hatched area using the lowest level reading. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Checking Procedure FLUID CHECKING PROCEDURE WHEN TO CHECK AND CHANGE A good time to check the automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the Maintenance schedule, and be sure to use the proper transaxle fluid. HOW TO CHECK Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: ^ When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). ^ At high speed for quite a while. ^ In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather. ^ While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to drive longer. CHECKING THE FLUID LEVEL Prepare the vehicle as follows: 1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear, pausing for about three seconds in each gear. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). 4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. 5. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: ^ The automatic transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the black loop located toward the rear of the engine. See Engine Compartment Overview for more information on location. ^ Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. ^ Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and pull it back out again. ^ Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the crosshatched area. ^ If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way. CONSISTENCY OF READINGS Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission breather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged. HOW TO ADD FLUID If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the dipstick. 1. Pull out the dipstick. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 liters). Do not overfill. NOTICE: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled other than DEXRON-III may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEXRON-III labeled automatic transaxle fluid. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check," earlier in this article. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1012 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid/Filter Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When the transmission is at operating temperatures, take necessary precautions when removing the drain plug, to avoid being burned by draining fluid. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transmission oil pan. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 4. If necessary, remove the bolts and position aside the range selector cable bracket for clearance while lowering the pan. It is not necessary to remove the cable from the lever or bracket. 5. Remove the oil pan bolts from the front and sides of the pan only. 6. Loosen the rear oil pan bolts approximately 4 turns. 7. Lightly tap the oil pan with a rubber mallet in order to loosen the pan to allow the fluid to drain. 8. Remove the remaining oil pan bolts. 9. Remove the oil pan and the gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1013 10. Grasp firmly while pulling down with a twisting motion in order to remove the filter. 11. Remove the filter seal. The filter seal may be stuck in the pump; if necessary, carefully use pliers or another suitable tool to remove the seal. 12. Discard the seal. 13. Inspect the fluid color. 14. Inspect the filter. Pry the metal crimping away from the top of the filter and pull apart. The filter may contain evidence for root cause diagnosis: ^ Clutch material ^ Bronze slivers indicating bushing wear ^ Steel particles 15. Clean the transmission case and the oil pan gasket surfaces with solvent, and air dry. You must remove all traces of the old gasket material. Installation Procedure 1. Coat the new filter seal with automatic transmission fluid. 2. Install the new filter seal into the transmission case. Tap the seal into place using a suitable size socket. 3. Install the new filter into the case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 1014 4. Install the oil pan and a new gasket. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan bolts. ^ Tighten the oil pan to transmission case bolts alternately and evenly to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. If previously removed, install the range selector cable bracket and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Apply a small amount of sealant GM P/N 12346004 to the threads of the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 8. Install the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. 11. Check the COLD fluid level reading for initial fill only. 12. Inspect the oil pan gasket for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 2.0L (2.2 Qt) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1019 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................................................................ Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1020 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Fluid Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36511 Oil Fill/Drain Plug Hex Bit Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Using J 36511 remove the oil fill and drain plugs. Drain the oil in a suitable container. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant to the oil drain plug threads. Use sealant GM P/N 12346004 or the equivalent. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Using J 36511 install the oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the oil drain plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1021 3. Fill the transmission to the level of the fill plug hole. 4. Apply sealant to the oil fill plug threads. Use sealant GM P/N 12346004 or the equivalent. 5. Using J 36511 install the oil fill plug. ^ Tighten the oil fill plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Front Drive Axle Lubrication Update Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Front Drive Axle Lubrication Update Bulletin No.: 05-00-90-010 Date: December 07, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Front Drive Axle Carrier Lubricant Information Models: 1999-2005 Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 2005 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel or All-Wheel Drive and Separate Front Drive Axle Carriers This bulletin is being issued to revise the front drive axle carrier lubricant specification in the Maintenance and Lubrication and the Front Drive Axle sub-sections of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. This information also updates the information found in the Owner Manual. Important: Front drive axle carriers do not require periodic lubricant replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Front Drive Axle Lubrication Update > Page 1026 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Oil Capacity Front .................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.6 pints (1.2 liters) Rear ................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................... 4.0 pints (1.9 liters) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1029 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Type Differential Fluid Type Front and Rear Grade ......................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... GL-5 Viscosity ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 80W-90 Front Differential Differential Fluid Type The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB number 05-00-90-010 dated December 07, 2005. 1999-2004 7.25 Inch (Blazer, Jimmy, S-10, Sonoma, Astro, Safari) Grade ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................... GL-5 Viscosity ............................................................................................................. ...................................................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 7.25 Inch (Trailblazer, Envoy, Bravada, Rainier Grade ....................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ Synthetic Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 75W-90 8.25 Inch With Selectable 4WD Grade ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................... GL-5 Viscosity ................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. 80W-90 8.25 Inch With AWD Grade ......................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Synthetic Viscosity ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 75W-90 1999-2001 9.25 Inch Grade ............................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................ GL-5 Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 9.25 Inch Grade ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Synthetic Viscosity .................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 75W-90 Front Drive Axle Differential Fluid Type The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB number 05-00-90-010 dated December 07, 2005. 1999-2004 7.25 Inch (Blazer, Jimmy, S-10, Sonoma, Astro, Safari) Grade ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................... GL-5 Viscosity ............................................................................................................. ...................................................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 7.25 Inch (Trailblazer, Envoy, Bravada, Rainier Grade ....................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ Synthetic Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 75W-90 8.25 Inch With Selectable 4WD Grade ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................... GL-5 Viscosity ................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. 80W-90 8.25 Inch With AWD Grade ......................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Synthetic Viscosity ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 75W-90 1999-2001 9.25 Inch Grade ............................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................ GL-5 Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 9.25 Inch Grade ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Synthetic Viscosity .................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 75W-90 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Front Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Front Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Front Drive Axle 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Make sure the vehicle is level. 3. Inspect the front axle for leaks. Repair as necessary. 4. Remove the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. 5. Clean the area around the front axle fill plug. 6. Remove the front axle fill plug and the washer. 7. Inspect the oil level. Specification The oil level should be between 0 - 13 mm (0 - 0.5 inch) below the fill plug opening. 8. If the level is low, add oil until the level is even with the bottom edge of the fill plug opening. Use the proper fluid. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 9. Install the fill plug and the washer. Tighten the plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. 11. Lower the vehicle. Lubricant Replacement - Front Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Front Drive Axle Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 1032 3. Remove the fill plug and the washer. 4. Remove the drain plug and the washer. 5. Drain the fluid from the front axle differential. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the drain plug and the washer. Tighten the drain plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 2. Fill the front differential with lubricant. Use the proper fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 1033 3. Install the fill plug and the washer. Tighten the fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 1034 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (7.6 Inch Axle) Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (7.6 Inch Axle) 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Make sure the vehicle is level. 3. Inspect the rear axle for leaks. Repair as necessary. 4. Clean the area around the rear axle fill plug. 5. Remove the rear axle fill plug. 6. Inspect the lubricant level. The lubricant level should be between 0 - 10 mm (0 - 0.4 inch) below the fill plug opening. 7. If the level is low, add lubricant until the level is even with the bottom edge of the fill plug opening. Use the proper fluid. Refer to fluid and Lubricant Recommendations in Maintenance and Lubrication. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the rear axle fill plug. Tighten the rear axle fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (8.6 Inch Axle) Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (8.6 Inch Axle) 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Make sure the vehicle is level. 3. Inspect the rear axle for leaks. Repair as necessary. 4. Clean the area around the rear axle fill plug. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 1035 5. Remove the rear axle fill plug. 6. Fabricate a dipstick from a pipe cleaner or similar item. Form the pipe cleaner into an "L". 7. Insert the pipe cleaner into the fill plug opening with the stem facing down. 8. Remove the pipe cleaner and measure the distance from the bend in the pipe cleaner to the lubricant level. The distance between the bend and the lubricant level should be 15 - 40 mm (0.6 - 1.6 inch). 9. If the measurement is greater than 40 mm (1.6 inch), add lubricant until the level is between 15 40 mm (0.6 - 1.6 inch) from the bottom edge of the fill plug hole. Use the proper fluid. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 10. Install the rear axle fill plug. Tighten the rear axle fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 11. Lower the vehicle. Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the rear axle fill plug. 3. Remove the rear axle housing cover and the rear axle housing cover gasket. 4. Drain the lubricant into a suitable container. 5. Inspect the bottom of the rear axle housing for excessive metal particle accumulation. This accumulation is symptomatic of extreme wear. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 1036 1. Install the new rear axle housing cover gasket and the rear axle housing cover. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the rear axle housing cover bolts. Tighten the rear axle housing cover bolts in a crosswise pattern to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill the rear axle. Use the proper fluid. 4. Install the rear axle fill plug. Tighten the rear axle fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case New Venture 233 (RPO NP1) .............................................................................................................. ............................................................. 1.0L (1.1 Qt) New Venture 236 (RPO NP8) .......................... ................................................................................................................................................. 1.9L (2.0 Qt) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1041 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Case NV 233 (RPO NP1) ...................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Dexron III NV 236 (RPO NP8) ............................................................................................................................................ AUTO-TRAK II Fluid GM P/N 12378508 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure Important: When servicing the transfer case, use only hand tools when removing the fill or drain plugs. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Important: If the drain or fill plugs are damaged and need to be replaced, use only replacement plugs that are made from aluminum. Remove the transfer case fill plug. 4. Important: When draining the transfer case oil, always use the proper container for draining. Remove the transfer case drain plug. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case drain plug. ^ Tighten the transfer case drain plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 1044 2. Fill the transfer case with the proper amount of approved fluid. 3. Install the transfer case fill plug. ^ Tighten the oil fill plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 1045 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure Important: When servicing the transfer case fluid, use only hand tools when removing the fill or drain plugs. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case from the vehicle. 3. Important: If the drain or fill plugs are damaged and need to be replaced, use only replacement plugs that are made from aluminum. Remove the transfer case fill plug. 4. Important: When draining the transfer case oil, always use the proper container for draining. Remove the transfer case drain plug. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case drain plug. ^ Tighten the transfer case drain plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 1046 2. Fill the transfer case with the proper amount of approved fluid. 3. Install the transfer case fill plug. ^ Tighten the oil fill plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1051 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1052 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter Change ............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 4.3L (4.5 Qt) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1055 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ........................................ Look for Starburst Symbol Grade ............................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................ 5W-30 Below -29° C (-20° F) ................................................................................................................................................. 5W-30 synthetic (preferred) , 0W-30 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1056 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil into a suitable container. 3. For 2WD vehicles, remove the oil filter from the oil filter adapter. 4. For 4WD vehicles, open the access panel in the steering linkage shield. 5. Remove the oil filter from the remote oil filter adapter. 6. Inspect to ensure the engine oil filter gasket is removed. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1057 1. Lubricate the oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. For a RWD vehicle, install the oil filter to the oil filter adapter. 3. For 4WD vehicles, install the oil filter to the remote oil filter adapter. 4. Tighten the oil filter following the instructions on the filter. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan drain plug into the oil pan. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the crankcase with the proper capacity and quality of engine oil. 8. Operate the engine and check for leaks and oil pressure. 9. For a 4WD vehicles, close the access panel in the steering linkage shield. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1062 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 1067 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Contaminated R134A Refrigerant Bulletin No.: 06-01-39-007 Date: July 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Found on Market for Automotive Air-Conditioning Systems Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin should be directed to the Service Manager as well as the Parts Manager. Commercially Available Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Impurities have been found in new commercially available containers of R134a. High levels of contaminates may cause decreased performance, and be detrimental to some air-conditioning components. Accompanying these contaminates has been high levels of moisture. Tip: Excessive moisture may cause system concerns such as orifice tube freeze-up and reduced performance. Industry Reaction: New Industry Purity Standards Due to the potential availability of these lower quality refrigerants, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), and the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry (ARI) are in the process of instituting reliable standards that will be carried on the labels of future R134a refrigerant containers. This identifying symbol will be your assurance of a product that conforms to the minimum standard for OEM Automotive Air-Conditioning use. How Can You Protect Yourself Today? It is recommended to use GM or ACDelco(R) sourced refrigerants for all A/C repair work. These refrigerants meet General Motors own internal standards for quality and purity, insuring that your completed repairs are as good as the way it left the factory. Parts Information The part numbers shown are available through GMSPO or ACDelco(R). The nearest ACDelco(R) distributor in your area can be found by calling 1-800-223-3526 (U.S. Only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 1068 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 1.8 lbs (0.8 kg) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1071 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................... R134a P/N 12356150 U.S. (10953485 Canada) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - New PAG Oil Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New PAG Oil Bulletin No.: 02-01-39-004B Date: November 16, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: New PAG Oil Released Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Built With R-134a Refrigeration System All Air Conditioning Compressor Types (Excluding R4 and A6 Type Compressors) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the PAG oil part number used for R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-01-39-004A (Section 01 - HVAC). All General Motors vehicles built with R-134a refrigerant systems shall now be serviced with GM Universal PAG Oil (excluding vehicles equipped with an R4 or A6 compressor). R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems shall use PAG OIL, GM P/N 12356151 (A/C Delco part number 15-118) (in Canada, use P/N 10953486). Important: The PAG oil referenced in this bulletin is formulated with specific additive packages that meet General Motors specifications and use of another oil may void the A/C systems warranty. Use this new PAG oil when servicing the A/C system on the vehicles listed above. Oil packaged in an 8 oz tube should be installed using A/C Oil Injector, J 45037. Refer to the HVAC Section of Service Information for detailed information on Oil Balancing and Capacities. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES ACCUMULATOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2.0 oz) NOTE: Add PAG equal to the amount of oil drained from the old accumulator plus the additional specified amount. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount drained. The Delphi Compressor HT6 service compressor is shipped dry. CONDENSER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 30 ml (1.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount drained. EVAPORATOR REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 90 ml (3.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount drained. TOTAL SYSTEM PAG OIL CAPACITY (HT6) ................................................................................................................................. 236 ml (8.0 oz) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1078 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) Oil ................................................................................................................ GM P/N 12378526 (Canadian P/N 88900060) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme II Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Two - Person Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Use the two-person bleed procedure under the following conditions: ^ Installing a new Electro-Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) or new Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV). ^ Air is trapped in the valve body. ^ Do not drive the vehicle until the brake pedal feels firm. ^ Do not reuse brake fluid that is used during bleeding. ^ Use the vacuum, the pressure and the gravity bleeding procedures only for base brake bleeding. 1. Raise the vehicle in order to access the system bleed screws. 2. Bleed the system at the right rear wheel first. 3. Install a clear hose on the bleed screw. 4. Immerse the opposite end of the hose into a container partially filled with clean DOT 3 brake fluid. 5. Open the bleed screw 1/2 to 1 full turn. 6. Slowly depress the brake pedal. While the pedal is depressed to its full extent, tighten the bleed screw. 7. Release the brake pedal and wait 10-15 seconds for the master cylinder pistons to return to the home position. 8. Repeat the previous steps for the remaining wheels. The brake fluid which is present at each bleed screw should be clean and free of air. 9. This procedure may use more than a pint of fluid per wheel. Check the master cylinder fluid level every four to six strokes of the brake pedal in order to avoid running the system dry. 10. Press the brake pedal firmly and run the Scan Tool Automated Bleed Procedure. Release the brake pedal between each test. 11. Bleed all four wheels again using Steps 3-9. This will remove the remaining air from the brake system. 12. Evaluate the feel of the brake pedal before attempting to drive the vehicle. 13. Bleed the system as many times as necessary in order to obtain the appropriate feel of the pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1084 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 3.1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary add Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 3.2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3.3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 3.4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 3.5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 3.6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 3.7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 3.8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 3.9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder - after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder - loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 3.10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With the right front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 21.1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 21.2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 1085 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings installed to the master cylinder ports, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to at least the half-way point with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the master cylinder reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 lbs.), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 8. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 9. Remove the transparent hoses from the master cylinder reservoir. 10. Install the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 11. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 12. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1090 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1091 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1092 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1093 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1094 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1095 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1096 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1097 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 1098 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - I/P Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1106 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1107 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1108 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1109 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1110 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Underhood location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1111 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1112 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1113 Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1114 Fuse: Locations Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1115 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1116 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1117 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1118 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1119 location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1120 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1121 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1122 Location View Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1123 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1124 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1125 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1126 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - I/P Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1129 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1130 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1131 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1132 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1133 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1134 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1135 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1136 Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1137 Fuse: Application and ID Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1138 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1139 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1140 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1141 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1142 location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1143 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1144 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1145 Location View Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1146 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1147 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1148 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 1149 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1154 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1155 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1156 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1157 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1158 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1159 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1160 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1161 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C4 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1162 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C4 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1163 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1164 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1167 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1168 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1169 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1174 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1175 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 1176 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ALWAYS ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS If the problem is intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1-6 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 2. This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1182 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Inoperative MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INOPERATIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. There should be a steady MIL with the ignition ON and the engine OFF. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1183 Steps 1-11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 1184 Steps 12-15 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation This vehicle does not use the Engine Oil Life System and has no monitor to reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1188 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair This vehicle does not use the GM Oil Life System, and does not have an oil life indicator to reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions Vehicle Lifting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1193 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. NOTE: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Use only the prescribed lift points when elevating the vehicle. Vehicle Lift Points Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1194 Vehicle Lifting Points The jack and hoist lift points for the front of the vehicle are located between the front body mounts and the transmission crossmember. The jack and hoist lift points for the rear of the vehicle are located at the front hangers for the rear springs. The front end lift points for the floor jack are at the following locations: Beneath the lower control arms, inboard from the shock absorber mounts - Beneath the center of the front crossmember The rear end lift points for the floor jack are at the following locations: Beneath the axle housing, inboard from the shock absorber mounts - Beneath the axle differential Whenever the vehicle is lifted using a jack or a floor jack, observe the following precautions: Chock the wheels at the end of the vehicle opposite the end being lifted - Use jack stands for support. Place jack stands at the any of the following locations: Beneath the frame Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1195 - Beneath the front suspension crossmember - Beneath the axle When removing major components from the vehicle while the vehicle is on a hoist, chain the vehicle frame to the hoist pads in order to prevent tip-off. NOTE: When jacking or lifting a vehicle, do not allow the lift pads to contact any of the following parts: The catalytic converter - The brake lines - The brake cables - The fuel lines - The accelerator cables - The transmission shift cables Lift pad contact may damage the parts. Lift pad contact may cause unsatisfactory vehicle performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 1210 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 1224 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Service and Repair Spare Tire: Service and Repair Tire Hoist and Shaft Replacement (4 Door Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire carrier. 2. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove hoist assembly mounting nuts. 4. Remove hoist assembly mounting bolts from the frame. 5. Remove hoist assembly mounting bolts from the rear crossmember. 6. Remove hoist assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the hoist assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1229 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install hoist assembly mounting bolts to the rear crossmember. ^ Tighten the hoist assembly mounting bolts to the rear crossmember to 11 Nm (100 inch lbs.). 3. Install hoist assembly mounting bolts to the frame. 4. Install hoist assembly mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the hoist assembly mounting nuts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Install the spare tire to the spare tire carrier. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1238 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1239 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1240 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 1245 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1250 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1251 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1252 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1258 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1259 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1260 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 1265 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 1270 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 1271 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1276 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1277 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1278 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 1283 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1288 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1289 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1290 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1300 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1301 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1302 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 1307 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 1312 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 1313 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1318 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel exhibits excessive runout. ^ The wheel is bent. ^ The wheel is cracked. ^ The wheel is severely rusted. ^ The wheel is severely corroded. Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. ^ The wheel leaks air. Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause: ^ Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel ^ Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components ^ Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius ^ Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance ^ Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel has elongated bolt holes. ^ The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. You can repair porosity in aluminum wheels. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair 1. Remove the tire and wheel. 2. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 3. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order to locate the leak. 4. Inscribe a mark on the wheel in order to indicate the leak areas. 5. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to Indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 6. Remove the tire from the wheel. Important: Do not damage the exterior surface of the wheel. 7. Use number 80 grit sandpaper to scuff the inside of the rim surface at the leak area. 8. Use general purpose cleaner such as 3M (R) P/N 08984 or equivalent, to clean the leak area. 9. Apply 3 mm (0.12 inch) thick layer of adhesive/sealant, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or equivalent, to the leak area. 10. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. 11. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 12. Install the tire to the wheel. 13. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 14. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order ensure the leak is sealed. 15. Balance the tire and wheel. 16. Install the tire and wheel. 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1321 Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Finish Damage Evaluation Procedure Important: ^ If the wheels are chrome-plated, do not re-plate or refinish the wheels. ^ If the wheels are polished aluminum, do not refinish the wheels in the dealer environment. Utilize a refinisher that meets manufacturer guidelines. 1. Inspect the wheels for damage from uncoated wheel balance weights or from automatic car wash facilities. 2. Inspect the wheels for the following conditions: ^ Corrosion ^ Scrapes ^ Gouges 3. Verify the damage is not deeper than what sanding can remove. 4. Inspect the wheels for cracks. If a wheel has cracks, discard the wheel. 5. Inspect the wheels for bent rim flanges. If a rim flange is bent, discard the wheel. Refinishing Procedure Caution: To avoid serious personal injury when applying any two part component paint system, follow the specific precautions provided by the paint manufacturer. Failure to follow these precautions may cause lung irritation and allergic respiratory reaction. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove the balance weights from the wheel. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. 4. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel: ^ Lubricants ^ Wax ^ Dirt Important: ^ Do not re-machine the wheel. ^ Do not use chemicals in order to strip the paint from the wheel. 5. Use plastic media blasting in order to remove the paint from the wheel. 6. If the wheel had a machined aluminum finish, spin the wheel and use sand paper in order to restore the circular machined appearance. Important: The wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface must remain free of paint. 7. Mask the wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface. 8. Follow the paint manufacturer's instructions for painting the wheel. 9. Unmask the wheel. 10. Install a new valve stem. Important: Use new coated balance weights in order to balance the wheel. 11. Install the tire to the wheel. 12. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel mounting surface: ^ Corrosion ^ Overspray ^ Dirt 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1322 Wheels: Service and Repair Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Wheel Nut Torque Adapters Caution: If penetrating oil gets on the vertical surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum it could cause the wheel to work loose as the vehicle is driven, resulting in loss of control and an injury accident Notice: Never use heat to loosen a tight wheel. It can shorten the life of the wheel, studs, or hub and bearing assemblies. Wheel nuts must be tightened in sequence and to the specified torque to avoid bending the wheel or rotor. Important: Penetrating oil effectively removes tight wheels. Apply the oil sparingly to the hub surface, if you use oil. Removing wheels can be difficult, because of foreign material or a tight fit between the wheel center hole and the hub or the rotor. Excessive force, such as hammering on the wheel or the tire, can cause damage. Slightly tapping the tire side wall with a rubber mallet is acceptable. Wheel removal should be performed in the following manner: 1. Tighten all wheel nuts on the affected wheel. Do not torque the wheel nuts. 2. Loosen each wheel nut two turns. 3. Apply quick, hard jabs to the brake pedal in order to loosen the wheel. If this does not loosen the wheel, rock the vehicle from side to side, using the body weight of 1 or more persons. 4. Repeat this procedure if the wheel is still tight. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 3. Remove the wheel nuts. Mark the location of the tire and wheel assembly to the hub assembly. 4. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 5. Clean the wheel nuts, studs, and the wheel and rotor mounting surfaces. Installation Procedure Caution: Before installing the wheels, remove any buildup of corrosion on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or disc mounting surface by scraping and wire brushing. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This can cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, causing loss of control and possibly personal injury. Notice: A torque wrench or J 39544 must be used to ensure that wheel nuts are tightened to specification. Never use lubricants or penetrating fluids on wheel stud, nuts, or mounting surfaces, as this can raise the actual torque on the nut without a corresponding torque reading on the torque wrench. Wheel nuts, studs, and mounting surfaces must be clean and dry. Failure to follow these instructions could result in wheel, nut, and/or stud damage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1323 1. Install the wheel and the tire assembly. Align the locating mark of the tire and wheel to the hub assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts evenly and alternately to avoid excessive runout. ^ Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) using J 39544-KIT 3. Install the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1324 Wheels: Service and Repair Tire Repair Tire Repair Many different materials and techniques are available on the market in order to repair tires. Not all of the materials and techniques work on some types of tires. Tire manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. Obtain the instructions from the manufacturer. If the vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, do not repair the compact spare. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1325 Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair 1. Remove the tire and wheel. 2. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 3. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order to locate the leak. 4. Inscribe a mark on the wheel in order to indicate the leak areas. 5. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to Indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 6. Remove the tire from the wheel. Important: Do not damage the exterior surface of the wheel. 7. Use number 80 grit sandpaper to scuff the inside of the rim surface at the leak area. 8. Use general purpose cleaner such as 3M (R) P/N 08984 or equivalent, to clean the leak area. 9. Apply 3 mm (0.12 inch) thick layer of adhesive/sealant, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or equivalent, to the leak area. 10. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. 11. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 12. Install the tire to the wheel. 13. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 14. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order ensure the leak is sealed. 15. Balance the tire and wheel. 16. Install the tire and wheel. 17. Lower the vehicle. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Finish Damage Evaluation Procedure Important: ^ If the wheels are chrome-plated, do not re-plate or refinish the wheels. ^ If the wheels are polished aluminum, do not refinish the wheels in the dealer environment. Utilize a refinisher that meets manufacturer guidelines. 1. Inspect the wheels for damage from uncoated wheel balance weights or from automatic car wash facilities. 2. Inspect the wheels for the following conditions: ^ Corrosion ^ Scrapes ^ Gouges 3. Verify the damage is not deeper than what sanding can remove. 4. Inspect the wheels for cracks. If a wheel has cracks, discard the wheel. 5. Inspect the wheels for bent rim flanges. If a rim flange is bent, discard the wheel. Refinishing Procedure Caution: To avoid serious personal injury when applying any two part component paint system, follow the specific precautions provided by the paint manufacturer. Failure to follow these precautions may cause lung irritation and allergic respiratory reaction. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove the balance weights from the wheel. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. 4. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel: ^ Lubricants ^ Wax ^ Dirt Important: ^ Do not re-machine the wheel. ^ Do not use chemicals in order to strip the paint from the wheel. 5. Use plastic media blasting in order to remove the paint from the wheel. 6. If the wheel had a machined aluminum finish, spin the wheel and use sand paper in order to restore the circular machined appearance. Important: The wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface must remain free of paint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1326 7. Mask the wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface. 8. Follow the paint manufacturer's instructions for painting the wheel. 9. Unmask the wheel. 10. Install a new valve stem. Important: Use new coated balance weights in order to balance the wheel. 11. Install the tire to the wheel. 12. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel mounting surface: ^ Corrosion ^ Overspray ^ Dirt 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly to the vehicle. Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Wheel Nut Torque Adapters Caution: If penetrating oil gets on the vertical surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum it could cause the wheel to work loose as the vehicle is driven, resulting in loss of control and an injury accident Notice: Never use heat to loosen a tight wheel. It can shorten the life of the wheel, studs, or hub and bearing assemblies. Wheel nuts must be tightened in sequence and to the specified torque to avoid bending the wheel or rotor. Important: Penetrating oil effectively removes tight wheels. Apply the oil sparingly to the hub surface, if you use oil. Removing wheels can be difficult, because of foreign material or a tight fit between the wheel center hole and the hub or the rotor. Excessive force, such as hammering on the wheel or the tire, can cause damage. Slightly tapping the tire side wall with a rubber mallet is acceptable. Wheel removal should be performed in the following manner: 1. Tighten all wheel nuts on the affected wheel. Do not torque the wheel nuts. 2. Loosen each wheel nut two turns. 3. Apply quick, hard jabs to the brake pedal in order to loosen the wheel. If this does not loosen the wheel, rock the vehicle from side to side, using the body weight of 1 or more persons. 4. Repeat this procedure if the wheel is still tight. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 3. Remove the wheel nuts. Mark the location of the tire and wheel assembly to the hub assembly. 4. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 5. Clean the wheel nuts, studs, and the wheel and rotor mounting surfaces. Installation Procedure Caution: Before installing the wheels, remove any buildup of corrosion on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or disc mounting surface by scraping and wire brushing. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1327 loosen. This can cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, causing loss of control and possibly personal injury. Notice: A torque wrench or J 39544 must be used to ensure that wheel nuts are tightened to specification. Never use lubricants or penetrating fluids on wheel stud, nuts, or mounting surfaces, as this can raise the actual torque on the nut without a corresponding torque reading on the torque wrench. Wheel nuts, studs, and mounting surfaces must be clean and dry. Failure to follow these instructions could result in wheel, nut, and/or stud damage. 1. Install the wheel and the tire assembly. Align the locating mark of the tire and wheel to the hub assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts evenly and alternately to avoid excessive runout. ^ Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) using J 39544-KIT 3. Install the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 4. Lower the vehicle. Tire Repair Tire Repair Many different materials and techniques are available on the market in order to repair tires. Not all of the materials and techniques work on some types of tires. Tire manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. Obtain the instructions from the manufacturer. If the vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, do not repair the compact spare. Tire Mounting and Dismounting Tire Mounting and Dismounting Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1328 Notice: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. 1. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp, sometimes called European-type, tire changers are recommended. 2. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. 3. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Notice: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 4. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (Canadian P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. 5. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. 6. inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 7. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Tire Rotation Tire Rotation In order to equalize wear, rotate the tires at the specified intervals. Also, rotate the tire and wheel assembly whenever you notice uneven tire wear. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions, due to design. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that can generate tire noise. This especially makes regular tire rotation necessary. ^ For vehicles with single rear wheels (4 tires), rotate the tires as shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 1329 ^ For vehicles with single rear wheels (5 tires), rotate the tires as shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1333 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Hub, Bearing, and Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45859 Axle Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and the wheel. 3. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 4. Remove the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. 5. Remove the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 6. Remove the rotor. 7. On 4WD vehicles, disengage the wheel driveshaft from the hub and bearing using the J 45859 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1334 8. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt from the wheel hub and bearing. 9. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the wheel hub and bearing. 10. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. Important: Lay the wheel hub and bearing on the wheel hub studs on the outboard side. This prevents damage or contamination to the bearing seal. 11. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle. 12. Remove the splash shield from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1335 13. Remove the wheel hub and bearing seal from the wheel hub and bearing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel hub and bearing seal to the wheel hub and bearing. 2. Install the splash shield to the steering knuckle. Align the shield to the steering knuckle. 3. Install the wheel hub and bearing assembly to the steering knuckle. Align the threaded holes. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1336 4. Install the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing. 6. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the rotor. 8. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 9. Install the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 10. Install the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. ^ Tighten the drive axle nut to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the tire and the wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Drive Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................ ................................................ 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: Customer Interest Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 1349 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 1355 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1356 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nuts .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 140 Nm (100 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1357 Wheel Nut Torque Sequence Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1358 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: ^ The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. ^ The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. ^ M = Metric ^ 12 = Diameter in millimeters ^ 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and the wheel. 3. Remove the rotor. Important: Do not hammer on a wheel stud. 4. Remove the wheel stud bolt using J 43631. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel hub and bearing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install 4 washers and the nut to the wheel stud. ^ Tighten the wheel stud nut to 130 Nm (95 ft. lbs.), drawing in the wheel stud. 3. Remove the nut and the washers. 4. Install the rotor. 5. Install the tire and the wheel. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1361 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Separator Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the rotor. 4. Remove the wheel stud from the axle flange using the J43631. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stud into the axle flange. 2. Install the 4 washers and the lug nut to the stud. 3. Tighten the lug nut in order to draw the stud into the flange until the stud fully seats. 4. Remove the lug nut and the washers. 5. Install the rotor. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions Jump Starting: Service Precautions CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 1365 Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. NOTE: This vehicle has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system. Make sure the vehicle or equipment being used to jump start the engine is also 12 volt, negative ground. Use of any other type of system will damage the vehicle's electrical components. This vehicle has a 12 volt positive, negative ground electrical system. Do not try to jump start a vehicle if you are unsure of the other vehicle's positive voltage or ground position. The booster (charged) battery and the discharged battery should be treated carefully when using jumper cables. 1. Position the vehicle with the booster (charged) battery so that the jumper cables will comfortably reach the battery of the other vehicle. - Do not let the 2 vehicles touch. - Make sure that the jumper cables do not have loose clamps or missing insulation. 2. Perform the following steps on both vehicles: 1. Place the automatic transmission in PARK. 2. Block the wheels. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn off all electrical loads that are not needed (leave the hazard flashers ON). 5. Turn OFF the ignition switch. 3. Attach the end of 1 jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. IMPORTANT: Some vehicles have a battery remote positive stud. ALWAYS use the battery remote positive stud in order to give or to receive a jump start. 4. Attach one end of the remaining jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery. 5. Make the final connection of the negative jumper cable to the block or suitable bracket connected directly to the block, away from the battery. NOTE: Do not connect the negative booster cable to the housings of other vehicle electrical accessories or equipment. The current flow during jump starting may damage such equipment. 6. Start the engine of the vehicle that is providing the jump start and turn off all electrical accessories. Raise the engine RPM to approximately 1500 RPM. 7. Crank the engine of the vehicle with the battery.If the engine does not crank or cranks too slowly, perform the following steps: 0. Turn the ignition OFF. 1. Allow the booster vehicle engine to run at approximately 1500 RPM for 5 minutes. 2. Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 1366 8. Reverse the steps exactly when removing the jumper cables. The negative battery cable must first be disconnected from the engine that was jump started. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions Vehicle Lifting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1370 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. NOTE: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Use only the prescribed lift points when elevating the vehicle. Vehicle Lift Points Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1371 Vehicle Lifting Points The jack and hoist lift points for the front of the vehicle are located between the front body mounts and the transmission crossmember. The jack and hoist lift points for the rear of the vehicle are located at the front hangers for the rear springs. The front end lift points for the floor jack are at the following locations: Beneath the lower control arms, inboard from the shock absorber mounts - Beneath the center of the front crossmember The rear end lift points for the floor jack are at the following locations: Beneath the axle housing, inboard from the shock absorber mounts - Beneath the axle differential Whenever the vehicle is lifted using a jack or a floor jack, observe the following precautions: Chock the wheels at the end of the vehicle opposite the end being lifted - Use jack stands for support. Place jack stands at the any of the following locations: Beneath the frame Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1372 - Beneath the front suspension crossmember - Beneath the axle When removing major components from the vehicle while the vehicle is on a hoist, chain the vehicle frame to the hoist pads in order to prevent tip-off. NOTE: When jacking or lifting a vehicle, do not allow the lift pads to contact any of the following parts: The catalytic converter - The brake lines - The brake cables - The fuel lines - The accelerator cables - The transmission shift cables Lift pad contact may damage the parts. Lift pad contact may cause unsatisfactory vehicle performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. ^ No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example: If the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1378 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Ensure that the vehicle batteries are in good condition, and fully charged. 2. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 3. Disconnect the positive ignition coil wire plug from the ignition coil. 4. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connector. 5. Remove all of the spark plugs. 6. Notice: Do not insert objects into the throttle plate opening. Damage to the throttle body can result, requiring replacement of the throttle body assembly. Block the throttle linkage wide open. 7. Install the engine cylinder compression gage to the cylinder being tested. 8. Using the vehicle starter motor, rotate, or crank the engine for 4 compression strokes, or puffs, for the cylinder being tested. If the engine rotates for more than 4 compression strokes, test the cylinder again. 9. Record the compression reading. 10. Remove the engine cylinder compression gage from the cylinder being tested. 11. Repeat steps 8-11 for each additional cylinder. All cylinders must be tested to obtain valid test results. 12. If any cylinders have low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 oz) of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole. 13. Repeat steps 8-11 for all low compression cylinders. 14. The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. ^ Normal The compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression. ^ Piston rings leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression builds up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. ^ Valves leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. ^ Head gasket leaking Compression is low on the first stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. Adjacent cylinders have the same, or similar, low compression readings. 15. If one or more cylinders fails to meet the minimum specified compression, repair or replace all damaged or worn components and test the engine again. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolt ....................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft: Specifications Camshaft Retainer Bolt ....................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.) Camshaft Sprocket Bolt ................................... ......................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Camshaft Camshaft End Play ................................................................................................................................................ 0.0254-0.2286 mm (0.0010-0.0090 inch) Camshaft Journal Diameter ................................................................................................................................... 47.440-47.490 mm (1.8677-1.8696 inch) Camshaft Journal Out-of-Round ...................................................................................................................................................... 0.008 mm (0.0003 inch) Camshaft Lobe Lift - Exhaust ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.0953 mm (0.2793 inch) Camshaft Lobe Lift - Intake ........................................................................................................................................................... 6.8678 mm (0.2704 inch) Camshaft Runout ........................................................................................ ..................................................................................... 0.100 mm (0.0039 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1386 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the timing chain and the camshaft sprocket. 2. Remove the valve lifters. 3. Remove the balance shaft drive gear. 4. Remove the camshaft retainer bolts and retainer. 5. Notice: All camshaft journals are the same diameter, so care must be used in removing or installing the camshaft to avoid damage to the camshaft bearings. Remove the engine camshaft. 1. Install the three 5/16-18 x 4.0 inch bolts into the engine camshaft front bolt holes. 2. Using the bolts as a handle, carefully rotate and pull the engine camshaft out of the camshaft bearings. 3. Remove the bolts from the front of the engine camshaft. 4. Clean and inspect the camshaft and the bearings. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1387 1. Important: Whenever a new camshaft is installed, do the following procedures: ^ Change the engine oil. ^ Change the engine oil filter. ^ Add GM Engine Oil Supplement GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or the equivalent to the engine oil. Apply clean engine oil GM P/N 12345610 (Canadian P/N 993193) or equivalent, or engine oil supplement GM P/N 1052367 (Canadian P/N 992869) or equivalent to the following components: ^ The engine camshaft lobes ^ The camshaft bearing journals ^ The camshaft bearings 2. Install three 5/16-18 x 4.0 inch bolts into the engine camshaft front bolt holes. 3. Notice: All camshaft journals are the same diameter, so care must be used in removing or installing the camshaft to avoid damage to the camshaft bearings. Use the bolts as a handle in order to install the engine camshaft. 4. Remove the 3 bolts from the front of the engine camshaft. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If reusing the fasteners, apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent to the threads of the camshaft retainer bolts. 6. Install the camshaft retainer and bolts. ^ Tighten the camshaft retainer bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 7. Install the balance shaft drive gear. 8. Install the valve lifters. 9. Install the timing chain and camshaft sprocket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement ^ Tools Required J 3049-A Valve Lifter Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Remove the valve rocker arms and the valve pushrods. 3. Important: Place the components in a rack so that the components can be reinstalled to their original location. Remove the bolts and valve lifter pushrod guide. 4. Important: Place the valve lifters in the rack in the upright position in order to maintain the oil inside the valve lifters. Remove the valve lifters. 5. Important: Some valve lifters may be stuck in the valve lifter bores because of gum or varnish deposits and may require the use of J 3049-A for removal. Use the J 3049-A in order to remove the stuck valve lifters. 6. Use a cleaning solvent and a shop towel to clean any varnish from the valve lifter bores. 7. Inspect the valve lifter bores for excessive wear or scoring. Replace the engine block if there is excessive wear or deep scoring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1391 8. Inspect the camshaft for wear or damage. If the wear is questionable remove the camshaft and inspect. 9. Important: Components that are to be reused must be marked, sorted, and organized for assembly. Mark, sort, and organize the components for assembly. 10. Clean the components in cleaning solvent. 11. Dry the components with compressed air. 12. Inspect the valve lifter pushrod guides for excessive wear. 13. Inspect the valve lifter pushrod guides for cracks or damage. 14. Inspect the valve lifter for the following: ^ Broken or damaged clip (1) ^ Worn pushrod socket (2) ^ Scuffed or worn lifter body (3)If the valve lifter shows scuffing or wear, inspect the engine block valve lifter bores for wear. ^ Worn roller (4) ^ Loose or damaged pin (5) ^ Plugged oil hole (6) Installation Procedure Important: It is normal for NEW lifters to make a slight ticking noise when the engine is first started. Increasing the engine RPMs slightly to raise oil pressure should stop the noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1392 1. Apply lubricant GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or equivalent to the valve lifter rollers. 2. Important: If reusing the valve lifters, install the valve lifters in the original positions. Install the valve lifters. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve lifter pushrod guides. ^ Tighten the valve lifter pushrod guide bolts to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the valve rocker arms and pushrods. 5. Install the lower intake manifold. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair Push Rod: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Important: Mark, sort, and organize all the components for assembly. Remove the valve rocker arms. 3. Remove the valve rocker arm supports. 4. Remove the valve pushrods. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1396 5. Important: Parts that are to be reused must be marked, sorted, and organized for assembly. Mark, sort, and organize the components for assembly. 6. Clean the components with cleaning solvent. 7. Dry the components with compressed air. 8. Inspect the valve rocker arm components for the following: ^ Valve rocker arm valve pushrod socket contact surface (1)The contact surface must be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. ^ Valve rocker arm roller pivot for binding or damage (2) ^ Valve rocker arm valve stem contact surface (3)The contact surface should be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. ^ Valve rocker arm bolt threads for damage (4) 9. Inspect the valve pushrods for the following: ^ Restriction of the oil passage (1) ^ Wear or scoring of the end contact surfaces (2)The end contact surfaces must be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1397 ^ Shaft for bends (3)Roll the valve pushrod on a flat surface to determine if the valve pushrod is bent. 10. Inspect the valve rocker support for excessive wear or damage. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Be sure to keep parts in order. Parts must be reinstalled into the original location and position. Install the valve pushrods. 2. Important: Be sure that the arrow on the valve rocker arm support is in the up position. Install the valve rocker arm supports. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1398 3. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or equivalent to the following valve rocker arm contact surfaces: ^ Valve pushrod socket (1) ^ Roller pivot (2) ^ Valve stem tip (3) 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm assemblies as follows: 1. Finger start the bolt at location (1). 2. Finger start the bolt at location (2). 3. Finger start the bolt at location (3). 4. Finger start the remaining valve rocker arm bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1399 5. Rotate the crankshaft balancer to position the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) 57-63 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise from the engine front cover alignment tab (2). 6. Important: Once the valve rocker arm assemblies are installed and properly torqued, no additional valve lash adjustment is required. Tighten the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten valve rocker arm bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Important: Mark, sort, and organize all the components for assembly. Remove the valve rocker arms. 3. Remove the valve rocker arm supports. 4. Remove the valve pushrods. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1403 5. Important: Parts that are to be reused must be marked, sorted, and organized for assembly. Mark, sort, and organize the components for assembly. 6. Clean the components with cleaning solvent. 7. Dry the components with compressed air. 8. Inspect the valve rocker arm components for the following: ^ Valve rocker arm valve pushrod socket contact surface (1)The contact surface must be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. ^ Valve rocker arm roller pivot for binding or damage (2) ^ Valve rocker arm valve stem contact surface (3)The contact surface should be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. ^ Valve rocker arm bolt threads for damage (4) 9. Inspect the valve pushrods for the following: ^ Restriction of the oil passage (1) ^ Wear or scoring of the end contact surfaces (2)The end contact surfaces must be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1404 ^ Shaft for bends (3)Roll the valve pushrod on a flat surface to determine if the valve pushrod is bent. 10. Inspect the valve rocker support for excessive wear or damage. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Be sure to keep parts in order. Parts must be reinstalled into the original location and position. Install the valve pushrods. 2. Important: Be sure that the arrow on the valve rocker arm support is in the up position. Install the valve rocker arm supports. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1405 3. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or equivalent to the following valve rocker arm contact surfaces: ^ Valve pushrod socket (1) ^ Roller pivot (2) ^ Valve stem tip (3) 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm assemblies as follows: 1. Finger start the bolt at location (1). 2. Finger start the bolt at location (2). 3. Finger start the bolt at location (3). 4. Finger start the remaining valve rocker arm bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1406 5. Rotate the crankshaft balancer to position the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) 57-63 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise from the engine front cover alignment tab (2). 6. Important: Once the valve rocker arm assemblies are installed and properly torqued, no additional valve lash adjustment is required. Tighten the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten valve rocker arm bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Balance Shaft Replacement ^ Tools Required J 8092 Universal Driver Handle - J 36996 Balance Shaft Installer - J 45059 Angle Meter Removal Procedure 1. Remove the radiator. 2. Remove the A/C condenser. 3. Remove the valve lifter pushrod guide. 4. Remove the timing chain and camshaft sprockets. 5. Remove the balance shaft drive gear. 6. Important: The balance shaft drive and balance shaft driven gears are serviced as a set. The set includes the balance shaft driven gear bolt. Remove the balance shaft driven gear bolt from the balance shaft. 1. Use a wrench in order to secure the balance shaft. Place the wrench onto the balance shaft near to the balance shaft front bearing. 2. Remove the balance shaft bolt. 3. Remove the wrench from the balance shaft. 7. Remove the balance shaft driven gear from the balance shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1411 8. Remove the bolts and the balance shaft retainer. 9. Important: The balance shaft and the balance shaft front bearing are serviced only as a package. Do not remove the balance shaft front bearing from the balance shaft. Use a soft-faced hammer in order to remove the balance shaft from the engine block. 10. Clean and inspect the balance shaft. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The balance shaft and the balance shaft front bearing are serviced only as an assembly. Do not remove the balance shaft front bearing from the balance shaft. Apply clean engine oil GM P/N 12345610 (Canadian P/N 993193) or equivalent to the balance shaft front bearing. 2. Use the J 36996 and the J 8092 in order to install the balance shaft. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the balance shaft retainer and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1412 4. Install the balance shaft driven gear onto the balance shaft. 5. If reusing the fastener, apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent to the threads of the balance shaft driven gear bolt. 6. Install the balance shaft driven gear bolt. 1. Use a wrench to secure the balance shaft. Place the wrench onto the balance shaft near to the balance shaft front bearing. 2. Install the balance shaft driven gear bolt. ^ Tighten the balance shaft driven gear bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Using the J 45059, rotate the balance shaft driven gear bolt an additional 35 degrees. 7. Remove the wrench from the balance shaft. 8. Rotate the balance shaft by hand in order to ensure that there is clearance between the balance shaft and the valve lifter pushrod guide. If the balance shaft does not rotate freely, check to ensure that the retaining ring on the balance shaft front bearing is seated on the case. 9. Install the balance shaft drive gear. DO NOT install the camshaft sprocket bolts at this time. 10. Rotate the engine camshaft so that the timing mark on the balance shaft drive gear is in the 12 o'clock position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1413 11. Remove the balance shaft drive gear. 12. Rotate the balance shaft so that the timing mark on the balance shaft driven gear is in the 6 o'clock position. 13. Position the balance shaft drive gear onto the engine camshaft. 14. Look to ensure that the balance shaft drive gear and the balance shaft driven gear timing marks are aligned. 15. Install the timing chain and the camshaft sprocket. 16. Install the engine front cover. 17. Install the valve lifter pushrod guide. 18. Install the A/C condenser. 19. Install the radiator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance - Production ...................................................................................................... 0.038-0.078 mm (0.0015-0.0031 inch) Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance - Service ........................................................................................................... 0.025-0.063 mm (0.0010-0.0025 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Nut ^ First Pass .......................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) ^ Final Pass ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 70 degrees Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance - Production ...................................................................................................... 0.038-0.078 mm (0.0015-0.0031 inch) Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance - Service ........................................................................................................... 0.025-0.063 mm (0.0010-0.0025 inch) Connecting Rod Side Clearance ........................................................................................................................................ 0.15-0.44 mm (0.006-0.017 inch) Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter ........................................................................................................................ 57.116-57.148 mm (2.2487-2.2497 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round - Production ....................................................................................................................... 0.008 mm (0.0003 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round - Service ............................................................................................................................ 0.025 mm (0.0010 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Taper - Production ................................................................................................................................... 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) Connecting Rod Journal Taper - Service ......................................................................................................................................... 0.025 mm (0.0010 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Bearing Cap Bolt - Preferred Method ^ First Pass .......................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) ^ Final Pass ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 73 degrees Crankshaft Bearing Cap Bolt - Optional Strategy ................................................................................................................................... 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance #1 - Production .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.02-0.05 mm (0.0008-0.0020 inch) #2, #3, and #4 - Production ................................................................................................................................... 0.028-0.058 mm (0.0011-0.0023 inch) #1 - Service ........................................................................................................................................................... 0.0254-0.05 mm (0.0010-0.0020 inch) #2, #3, and #4 - Service ......................................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.063 mm (0.0010-0.0025 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Seal Retainer > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Seal Retainer: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Important: Do not remove the crankshaft rear oil seal housing if only replacing the crankshaft rear oil seal. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the engine flywheel. 3. Remove the bolts and the nut holding the crankshaft rear oil seal housing to the engine. 4. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. 5. Remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil seal housing gasket. 6. Clean all the sealing surfaces. 7. Inspect and replace the crankshaft rear oil seal housing for warping, cracks, wear, or damage. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing a NEW crankshaft rear oil seal housing the crankshaft rear oil seal will come with the housing. If reusing the housing and then installing a NEW seal follow the instructions for installing the housing and than Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacement. Install a NEW crankshaft rear oil seal housing gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Seal Retainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1426 2. Install the NEW crankshaft rear oil seal housing with the oil seal to the engine block using the following procedure. 1. Important: Do not oil or grease the seal lip or the crankshaft seal area. Leave the sleeve in the crankshaft rear oil seal and use the sleeve as a guide to ease the seal lip over the end of the crankshaft. 2. Push the crankshaft rear oil seal housing fully onto the crankshaft until the crankshaft rear oil seal housing is against the crankshaft rear oil seal gasket and the engine. 3. Remove the sleeve. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the bolts and the nut to the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. ^ Tighten the crankshaft rear oil seal housing bolts and nut to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 4. Install the engine flywheel. 5. Install the oil pan. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft End Play ........................................................................................................................................................ 0.050-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance #1 - Production .................................................................................................... 0.02-0.05 mm (0.0008-0.0020 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance #2, #3, and #4 - Production ............................................................................. 0.028-0.058 mm (0.0011-0.0023 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance #1 - Service ..................................................................................................... 0.0254-0.05 mm (0.0010-0.0020 inch) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance #2, #3, and #4 - Service ................................................................................... 0.025-0.063 mm (0.0010-0.0025 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter #1 .................................................................................................................. 62.199-62.217 mm (2.4488-2.4495 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter #2 and #3 ....................................................................................................... 62.191-62.215 mm (2.4485-2.4494 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter #4 .................................................................................................................. 62.179-62.203 mm (2.4480-2.4489 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round - Production ...................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round - Service ........................................................................................................................... 0.025 mm (0.0010 inch) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.007 mm (0.0003 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the coolant heater cord bolt and the retainer. 2. Cut the plastic ties and remove the heater cord from the wiring harness. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Disconnect the coolant heater cord electrical connector. 5. Remove the coolant heater cord. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the coolant heater electrical connector. 2. Install the coolant heater cord. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Install the coolant heater cord to the wiring harness. 5. Install the plastic ties to retain the coolant heater cord to the wiring harness. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the coolant heater cord retainer and bolt. ^ Tighten the coolant heater cord bolt to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Cord Replacement > Page 1434 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Replacement Coolant Heater Replacement (4.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Remove the coolant jacket plug, if not originally equipped with an engine coolant heater, by using the following procedure: 1. Carefully tap the coolant jacket plug near the outer edge. This causes the plug to rotate in the hole. Do not score the machined surface of the hole. 2. Grasp the plug with pliers and pull the plug out. 3. Remove the cord from the engine coolant heater. 4. Loosen the bolt. 5. Remove the engine coolant heater. 6. Clean the core plug hole. Remove any the following conditions: ^ Burrs ^ Compound ^ Paint ^ Rough spots Installation Procedure 1. Apply a coating of lubricant to the O-ring seal and the cleaned surface of the plug opening in the block. Use a water spray resistant, high-temperature grease lubricant (GM P/N 9985164 or equivalent). 2. Important: Install the heater element. Avoid element contact to the inner walls of the engine block. Install the engine coolant heater and push tight to the block. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolt until both locking wings draw tight against the inner wall of the engine block. ^ Tighten the bolt to 1.9 Nm (17 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Cord Replacement > Page 1435 4. Important: The heater cord must not touch the following components: ^ The engine ^ The hot pipes ^ The manifold ^ Any moving components Install the heater cord to the coolant heater. 5. Route the heater cord (2WD). 6. Route the heater cord (4WD). 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 8. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Balancer Bolt ..................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) Crankshaft Balancer Remover/Installer Bolt ............................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Crankshaft Pulley Bolt ............................................................................................................. ................................................................. 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1439 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Balancer Replacement ^ Tools Required J 23523-F Balancer Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the fan shroud assembly. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Notice: To prevent damage to the end of the crankshaft when using a crankshaft balancer removal tool install a bolt in the crankshaft. Use a shorter bolt with the same threads as the crankshaft balancer bolt. This bolt will allow a place for the tool to push against. The shorter bolt is to keep from going past the threads in the crankshaft and damaging the crankshaft threads. Remove the crankshaft balancer bolt and washer. 5. Remove the bolts and the crankshaft pulley. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Use the J 23523-F in order to remove the crankshaft balancer. 1. Install the J 23523-F plate and bolts onto the crankshaft balancer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1440 ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the J 23523-F forcing screw into the plate. 3. Rotate the J 23523-F forcing screw clockwise in order to remove the crankshaft balancer. 7. Remove the J 23523-F from the crankshaft balancer. 8. Note the position and length of any front groove pins (crankshaft balancer) (if applicable). 9. Clean the crankshaft balancer in cleaning solvent. 10. Dry the crankshaft balancer with compressed air. 11. Inspect the crankshaft balancer for the following: ^ Loose or improperly installed front groove pin (1) (crankshaft balancer)A properly installed front groove pin should be installed until flush or below flush with the face of the crankshaft balancer. ^ Important: A crankshaft front oil sealing surface with excessive scoring, grooves, rust, or other damage must be replaced. Worn, grooved, or damaged crankshaft front oil sealing surface (2) Minor imperfections on the crankshaft balancer crankshaft front oil seal surface may be removed with a polishing compound or fine grade emery cloth. ^ Worn, chunking, or deteriorated rubber (3) between the hub and the outer ring ^ Worn or damaged keyway (4) ^ Worn or damaged bolt hole threads (5) Installation Procedure 1. Apply a small amount of grease to the crankshaft front cover oil seal sealing surface if reusing the seal. Look to ensure that the front groove pin (crankshaft balancer) is installed in the proper location (if applicable).The length and location of the pins must be the same as the original length Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1441 and location. 2. Notice: The inertial weight section of the crankshaft balancer is assembled to the hub with a rubber type material. The correct installation procedures (with the proper tool) must be followed or movement of the inertial weight section of the hub will destroy the tuning of the crankshaft balancer. Apply a small amount of adhesive GM P/N 12346141 (Canadian P/N 10953433) or equivalent onto the crankshaft balancer keyway in order to seal the crankshaft balancer keyway and crankshaft joint. 3. Align the keyway of the crankshaft balancer with the crankshaft balancer key. 4. Install the crankshaft balancer onto the end of the crankshaft. 5. Use the J 23523-F in order to press the crankshaft balancer onto the crankshaft. 1. Install the J 23523-F plate and bolts onto the front of the crankshaft balancer. ^ Tighten the J 23523-F plate bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the J 23523-F screw into the end for the crankshaft. 3. Install the J 23523-F bearing, the washer, and the nut onto the screw. 4. Rotate the J 23523-F nut clockwise until the crankshaft balancer hub is completely seated against the crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring. 6. Remove the J 23523-F. 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the crankshaft pulley and bolts. ^ Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1442 8. Ensure that the crown of the crankshaft balancer washer (2) is faced away from the engine. 9. Install the crankshaft balancer washer and the bolt. ^ Tighten the crankshaft balancer bolt to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the drive belt. 11. Install the fan shroud assembly. 12. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Rings Piston Ring End Gap - First Compression Ring - Production ........................................................................................... 0.25-0.40 mm (0.010-0.016 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Second Compression Ring - Production ....................................................................................... 0.38-0.58 mm (0.015-0.023 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Oil Control Ring - Production ...................................................................................................... 0.25-0.76 mm (0.010-0.029 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - First Compression Ring - Service ................................................................................................. 0.25-0.50 mm (0.010-0.020 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Second Compression Ring - Service ............................................................................................ 0.38-0.80 mm (0.015-0.031 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Oil Control Ring - Service .................................................................................................... 0.005-0.090 mm (0.0002-0.0035 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - First Compression Ring - Production ................................................................ 0.030-0.070 mm (0.0012-0.0027 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Second Compression Ring - Production ............................................................ 0.076-0.280 mm (0.0030-0.0110 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Oil Control Ring Production ........................................................................... 0.046-0.196 mm (0.0018-0.0077 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - First Compression Ring - Service ...................................................................... 0.030-0.085 mm (0.0012-0.0033 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Second Compression Ring - Service .................................................................. 0.030-0.085 mm (0.0012-0.0033 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Oil Control Ring - Service ................................................................................. 0.076-0.200 mm (0.0030-0.0079 inch) Pistons and Pins Piston - Piston to Bore Clearance - Production ......................................................................................................... 0.018-0.061 mm (0.0007-0.0024 inch) Piston - Piston to Bore Clearance - Service ..................................................................................................................................... 0.075 mm (0.0029 inch) Pin - Piston Pin Clearance to Connecting Rod Bore - Press Fit ................................................................................ 0.012-0.048 mm (0.0005-0.0019 inch) Pin Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore - Production ...................................................................................... 0.013-0.023 mm (0.0005-0.0009 inch) Pin Piston Pin Clearance to Piston Pin Bore - Service .................................................................................................................. 0.025 mm (0.0010 inch) Pin - Piston Pin Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... 23.545-23.548 mm (0.9270-0.9271 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Rings Piston Ring End Gap - First Compression Ring - Production ........................................................................................... 0.25-0.40 mm (0.010-0.016 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Second Compression Ring - Production ....................................................................................... 0.38-0.58 mm (0.015-0.023 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Oil Control Ring - Production ...................................................................................................... 0.25-0.76 mm (0.010-0.029 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - First Compression Ring - Service ................................................................................................. 0.25-0.50 mm (0.010-0.020 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Second Compression Ring - Service ............................................................................................ 0.38-0.80 mm (0.015-0.031 inch) Piston Ring End Gap - Oil Control Ring - Service .................................................................................................... 0.005-0.090 mm (0.0002-0.0035 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - First Compression Ring - Production ................................................................ 0.030-0.070 mm (0.0012-0.0027 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Second Compression Ring - Production ............................................................ 0.076-0.280 mm (0.0030-0.0110 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Oil Control Ring Production ........................................................................... 0.046-0.196 mm (0.0018-0.0077 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - First Compression Ring - Service ...................................................................... 0.030-0.085 mm (0.0012-0.0033 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Second Compression Ring - Service .................................................................. 0.030-0.085 mm (0.0012-0.0033 inch) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Oil Control Ring - Service ................................................................................. 0.076-0.200 mm (0.0030-0.0079 inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1454 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1455 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Important: Mark, sort, and organize all the components for assembly. Remove the valve rocker arms. 3. Remove the valve rocker arm supports. 4. Remove the valve pushrods. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1459 5. Important: Parts that are to be reused must be marked, sorted, and organized for assembly. Mark, sort, and organize the components for assembly. 6. Clean the components with cleaning solvent. 7. Dry the components with compressed air. 8. Inspect the valve rocker arm components for the following: ^ Valve rocker arm valve pushrod socket contact surface (1)The contact surface must be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. ^ Valve rocker arm roller pivot for binding or damage (2) ^ Valve rocker arm valve stem contact surface (3)The contact surface should be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. ^ Valve rocker arm bolt threads for damage (4) 9. Inspect the valve pushrods for the following: ^ Restriction of the oil passage (1) ^ Wear or scoring of the end contact surfaces (2)The end contact surfaces must be smooth with no scoring or excessive wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1460 ^ Shaft for bends (3)Roll the valve pushrod on a flat surface to determine if the valve pushrod is bent. 10. Inspect the valve rocker support for excessive wear or damage. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Be sure to keep parts in order. Parts must be reinstalled into the original location and position. Install the valve pushrods. 2. Important: Be sure that the arrow on the valve rocker arm support is in the up position. Install the valve rocker arm supports. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1461 3. Apply prelube GM P/N 12345501 (Canadian P/N 992704) or equivalent to the following valve rocker arm contact surfaces: ^ Valve pushrod socket (1) ^ Roller pivot (2) ^ Valve stem tip (3) 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm assemblies as follows: 1. Finger start the bolt at location (1). 2. Finger start the bolt at location (2). 3. Finger start the bolt at location (3). 4. Finger start the remaining valve rocker arm bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1462 5. Rotate the crankshaft balancer to position the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) 57-63 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise from the engine front cover alignment tab (2). 6. Important: Once the valve rocker arm assemblies are installed and properly torqued, no additional valve lash adjustment is required. Tighten the valve rocker arm bolts. ^ Tighten valve rocker arm bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the breather tube at the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Partially drain the cooling system. 4. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the water outlet housing. 5. Important: The PCV orifice is part of the valve cover and cannot be removed. If damaged, replace the valve cover. Remove the PCV valve hose assembly from the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1467 6. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector. 7. Important: A/C compressor and bracket removal is not necessary. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolts. 8. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets. 9. Discard the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1468 10. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 11. Remove the valve rocker arm cover gasket. 12. Discard the valve rocker arm cover gasket. 13. Clean the valve rocker arm cover in cleaning solvent. 14. Dry the valve rocker arm cover with compressed air. 15. Inspect the valve rocker arm cover for the following: ^ Damage to the PCV orifice or grommet (1) ^ Damage to the bolt holes (2) A damaged valve rocker arm cover may interfere with the valve rocker arms. ^ Damage to the exterior of the valve rocker arm cover (3) ^ Gouges or damage to the sealing surface (4) ^ Damage to the oil fill tube grommet (5) ^ Restrictions to the ventilation system passages Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1469 Installation Procedure 1. Important: Do not reuse the valve cover gasket or the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets. Install the NEW valve rocker arm cover gasket into the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Install the NEW valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets into the valve rocker arm cover. 3. Install the valve rocker arm cover onto the cylinder head. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1470 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm cover bolts. ^ Tighten the valve rocker arm cover bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 5. Install the radiator inlet hose to the water outlet housing. 6. Fill the cooling system. 7. Install the PCV valve hose assembly to the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1471 8. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector. 9. Install air cleaner outlet duct. 10. Connect the breather tube to the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1472 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Right) Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the breather tube from the air cleaner outlet duct and the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wires from the spark plugs for the right side of the engine. 3. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve. 4. Unfasten the heater hose retainer above the valve rocker arm cover. 5. Move and secure the heater hoses aside. 6. Remove the bolt (3) holding the engine wiring harness bracket to the generator. 7. Disconnect the crankcase position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (2). 8. Move and secure the engine wiring harness aside. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1473 9. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolts. 10. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets. 11. Discard the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets. 12. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 13. Remove the valve rocker arm cover gasket. 14. Discard the valve rocker arm cover gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1474 15. Clean the valve rocker arm cover in cleaning solvent. 16. Dry the valve rocker arm cover with compressed air. 17. Inspect the valve rocker arm cover for the following: ^ Damage to the breather tube grommet (1) ^ Damage to the bolt holes (2) A damaged valve rocker arm cover may interfere with the valve rocker arms. ^ Damage to the exterior of the valve rocker arm cover (3) ^ Gouges or damage to the sealing surface (4) ^ Damage to the oil fill tube grommet (5) ^ Restrictions to the ventilation system passages Installation Procedure 1. Important: Do not reuse the valve cover gasket or the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets. Install the NEW valve rocker arm cover gasket into the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Install the NEW valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets into the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1475 3. Install the valve rocker arm cover onto the cylinder head. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve rocker arm cover bolts. ^ Tighten the valve rocker arm cover bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 5. Position the engine wiring harness. 6. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (2). 7. Install the engine wiring harness and the bolt (3) to the generator mounting bracket. ^ Tighten the engine wiring harness bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement (Left) > Page 1476 8. Position the heater hoses. 9. Install the heater hoses in the retainer above the valve rocker arm cover. 10. Install the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve. 11. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs for the right side of the engine. 12. Install the breather tube to the air cleaner outlet duct and the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter - J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor - J 5892-D Valve Spring Compressor - J 42073 Valve Stem Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Remove the required valve rocker arms. 3. Remove the required spark plugs. 4. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug hole. 5. Connect a shop air supply hose and apply compressed air in order to hold the valves in place. 6. Remove a bolt from a valve rocker arm. 7. Install a flat washer on the bolt. 8. Install the bolt in the valve rocker arm bolt hole for the valve spring requiring removal. 9. Caution: Compressed valve springs have high tension against the valve spring compressor. Valve springs that are not properly compressed by or released from the valve spring compressor can be ejected from the valve spring compressor with intense force. Use care when compressing or releasing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor and when removing or installing the valve stem keys. Failing to use care may cause personal injury. Use the J 5892-D in order to compress the valve spring. 1. Hook the slotted end of J 5892-D under the washer on the valve rocker arm bolt. 2. Apply steady pressure on the valve spring cap until the valve keys are accessible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1480 10. Notice: Completely engage the J 38606 jaws on the valve spring. The J 38606 may slip off and scratch the valve spring. Replace the valve spring if the valve spring becomes scratch. Use J 38606 when J 5892-D will not fit. 11. Remove the valve keys (1). 12. Carefully release the valve spring tension. 13. Remove the J 5892-D or the J 38606. 14. Remove the valve spring cap (2) and valve spring (3). 15. Remove the valve stem oil seal (4). Installation Procedure 1. Important: The exhaust valve oil stem seal has the letters EX (1) molded into the top of the seal. The exhaust valve oil stem seal material is brown in color (2) with a white stripe (3) painted onto the outside diameter of the seal, or the material may be red in color (2) with no paint stripe. The intake valve oil seal is black in color. Assemble the valve into the proper valve guide. 2. Select the proper valve stem oil seal for the specific valve guide. 3. Lubricate the valve stem oil seal and the outside diameter of the valve guide with clean engine oil. 4. Assemble the valve stem oil seal onto the valve stem. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1481 5. Caution: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. Using the J 42073, install the valve stem oil seal onto the valve guide. 1. Tap the valve stem oil seal onto the valve guide until the J 42073 bottoms against the valve spring seat. 2. Inspect the valve stem oil seal. The valve stem oil seal should not be bottomed against the valve guide. There should be a 1 - 2 mm (0.03937 0.07874 inch) gap between the bottom edge of the valve stem oil seal and the valve guide. 6. Install the valve spring (3). 7. Install the valve spring cap (2) onto the valve spring (3), over the valve stem. 8. Caution: Compressed valve springs have high tension against the valve spring compressor. Valve springs that are not properly compressed by or released from the valve spring compressor can be ejected from the valve spring compressor with intense force. Use care when compressing or releasing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor and when removing or installing the valve stem keys. Failing to use care may cause personal injury. Use the J 5892-D in order to compress the valve spring. Hook the slotted end of J 5892-D under the washer on the valve rocker arm bolt. 9. Apply steady pressure on the valve spring cap until the valve keys are accessible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1482 10. Notice: Completely engage the J 38606 jaws on the valve spring. The J 38606 may slip off and scratch the valve spring. Replace the valve spring if the valve spring becomes scratch. Use the J 38606 if the clearance does not permit use of the J 5892-D. 11. Install the valve stem O-ring seal. 12. Install the valve stem keys. Use grease in order to hold the valve stem keys in place. 13. Carefully release the valve spring pressure, making sure the valve stem keys stay in place. 14. Notice: The valve stem keys must correctly seat in the valve spring cap. Engine damage may occur by not installing properly. Remove the J 5892-D or the J 38606. 1. Look to ensure that the valve stem keys seat properly in the upper groove of the valve stem. 2. Tap the end of the valve stem with a plastic faced hammer in order to seat the valve stem keys, if necessary. 15. Remove the J 22794. 16. Install the spark plugs. 17. Install the valve rocker arms to the cylinder head. 18. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1488 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 1489 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1490 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1493 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1494 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1495 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1496 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1497 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1498 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1499 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping Drive Belt Chirping Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The symptom may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belt(s) or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belt(s) in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt(s) duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the chirping noise. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1500 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1501 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt(s) the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it may be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Drive Belt Excessive Wear Drive Belt Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Excessive wear on a drive belt(s) is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt(s) to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt(s) fall off. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1502 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt(s) may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt(s) by one groove on a pulley. 3. The installation of a drive belt that is two wide or two narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 4. This inspection is to verify the drive belt(s) is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt(s) should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Drive Belt Falls Off Drive Belt Falls Off Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt(s) repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt(s) is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1503 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may of occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked may will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. Drive Belt Rumbling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1504 Drive Belt Rumbling Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. The drive belt(s) may have a condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt(s), completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belt(s) is installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is causing the rumbling noise. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belt(s) is to ensure that it is not causing a the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. Drive Belt Squeal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1505 Drive Belt Squeal Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids A loose or improper installation of a body component, a suspension component, or other items of the vehicle may cause the squeal noise. If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belt and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the squeal noise is the drive belt(s) or an accessory drive component. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. This test is to verify that an accessory drive component does not have a seized bearing. With the belt remove test the bearings in the accessory drive components for turning smoothly. Also test the accessory drive components with the engine operating by varying the load on the components to verify that the components operate properly. 5. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1506 6. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 7. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misalign pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across two or three pulleys. If a misalign pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 8. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. Drive Belt Vibration Drive Belt Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Such as but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. Test Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1507 The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom such as the exhaust system, or the drivetrain. 3. This test is to verify that the drive belt(s) or accessory drive components may be causing the vibration. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The drive belt(s) may cause a vibration. While the drive belt(s) is removed this is the best time to inspect the condition of the belt. 6. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 8. This step should only be performed if the fan is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the engine cooling fan for bent, twisted, loose, or cracked blades. Inspect the fan clutch for smoothness, ease of turning. Inspect for a bent fan shaft or bent mounting flange. 9. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smoothness and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 10. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Drive Belt Whine Drive Belt Whine Diagnosis Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping > Page 1508 Diagnostic Aids The drive belt(s) will not cause the whine noise. If the whine noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. Such items but not limited to may be an A/C system overcharged, the power steering system restricted or the wrong fluid, or the generator failing. Test Description The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on the diagnostic table. 3. This test is to verify that the noise is being caused by the drive belt(s) or the accessory drive components. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belt removed. 4. The inspection should include checking the drive belt tensioner and the drive belt idler pulley bearings. The drive belt(s) may have to be installed and the accessory drive components operated separately by varying their loads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1509 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Install a 3/8 inch drive wrench on the drive belt tensioner arm and rotate the arm counterclockwise. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Slowly release the tension on the drive belt tensioner arm. Installation Procedure 1. Route the drive belt over all the pulleys except the drive belt tensioner pulley. 2. Observe the drive belt routing for the vehicles without air conditioning. 3. Observe the drive belt routing for the vehicles with air conditioning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1510 4. Install a 3/8 inch drive wrench on the drive belt tensioner arm and rotate the arm counterclockwise. 5. Install the drive belt over the drive belt tensioner pulley. 6. Slowly release the tension on the drive belt tensioner arm. 7. Inspect for the drive belt being properly installed on the pulleys. 8. Avoid mis-positioning the drive belt by one or more grooves. 9. Confirm for the proper drive belt size and the correct drive belt routing by observing the location of the fix pointer and the index marks on the drive belt tensioner. With a new drive belt installed the fix pointer should align within the indentation on the drive belt tensioner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1511 10. With a used drive belt installed the fix pointer should not align past the index mark. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Drive Belt Tensioner: Specifications Drive Belt Idler Pulley Bolt ................................................................................................................... ................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Drive Belt Tensioner Bolt ................................... ...................................................................................................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1515 Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner Diagnosis Inspection Procedure 1. Notice: Allowing the drive belt tensioner to snap into the free position may result in damage to the tensioner. Important: When the engine is operating the drive belt tensioner arm will move. Do not replace the drive belt tensioner because of movement in the drive belt tensioner arm. Remove the drive belt. 2. Position a 3/8 inch drive wrench on the drive belt tensioner arm and rotate the arm counterclockwise. 3. Move the drive belt tensioner through its full travel. ^ The movement should feel smooth. ^ There should be no binding. ^ The tensioner should return freely. 4. If any binding is observed, replace the drive belt tensioner. 5. Install the drive belt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1516 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the drive belt. 2. Remove the bolt. 3. Remove the drive belt tensioner. Installation Procedure 1. Install the drive belt tensioner assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the attaching bolt. ^ Tighten the tensioner assembly bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the drive belt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Inspection 1. Notice: Refer to Engine Mounting Notice in Service Precautions. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Inspect for loose or missing bolts at the following locations: ^ The engine mount to the engine ^ The engine mount to the engine mount frame bracket through-bolts ^ The engine mount frame bracket to the frame 3. Replace missing or loose bolts. 4. Notice: Refer to Engine Lifting Notice in Service Precautions. In order to access the square tab on the right side of the engine remove the starter. Using a jack on the square tab at the rear of the engine block (left side shown the right side requires removal of the starter) raise the engine in order to complete the following tasks: ^ Remove weight from the engine mount. ^ Place a slight tension on the rubber cushion. ^ Observe the engine mount while raising the engine. 5. Replace the engine mount if the following conditions exist: ^ Heat check cracks cover the hard rubber surface. ^ The rubber cushion is separated from the metal plate of the engine mount. ^ There is a split through the rubber cushion. ^ Replace the starter, if removed. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Replacement - Left Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement - Left Engine Mount Replacement - Left Removal Procedure Notice: Broken or deteriorated mounts can cause misalignment and destruction of certain drive train components. When a single mount breaks, the remaining mounts are subjected to abnormally high stresses. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the underbody shields, if equipped. 3. Remove the engine mount through-bolt and nut for the side being replaced. 4. Remove the left hand exhaust manifold. 5. Notice: When raising or supporting the engine for any reason, do not use a jack under the oil pan, any sheet metal, or the crankshaft pulley. Lifting the engine in an unapproved manner may cause component damage. Using a suitable lifting device, raise the engine only enough to remove the engine mount. 6. Remove the bolts for the engine mount frame bracket. 7. Remove the engine mount frame bracket. 8. Remove the bolts holding the engine mount to the engine. 9. Remove the engine mount with the shield. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Replacement - Left > Page 1522 1. Sub-assemble the engine mount, shield, and one bolt. 2. Install the engine mount and shield to the engine. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine mount to engine bolts. ^ Tighten the engine mount to engine bolts to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the engine mount frame bracket to the frame. 5. Install the engine mount frame bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the engine mount frame bracket bolts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the engine. 7. Install the left hand exhaust manifold. 8. Install the engine mount through-bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten the through-bolts to 74 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the nuts to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the underbody shields, if equipped. 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Replacement - Left > Page 1523 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement - Right Engine Mount Replacement - Right Removal Procedure Notice: Broken or deteriorated mounts can cause misalignment and destruction of certain drive train components. When a single mount breaks, the remaining mounts are subjected to abnormally high stresses. 1. Notice: Refer to Engine Mounting Notice in Service Precautions. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the underbody shields, if equipped. 3. Remove the engine mount through-bolt and nut for the side being replaced. 4. Notice: Refer to Engine Lifting Notice in Service Precautions. Using a jack on the square tab (left side shown) at the rear of the engine block, raise the engine. In order to access the square tab on the right side remove the starter. 5. Raise the engine only enough to remove the engine mount. 6. Remove the bolts for the engine mount frame bracket. 7. Remove the engine mount frame bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Replacement - Left > Page 1524 8. Remove the bolts holding the engine mount to the engine. 9. Remove the engine mount with the shield. Installation Procedure 1. Sub-assemble the engine mount, shield, and one bolt. 2. Install the engine mount and shield to the engine. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine mount to engine bolts. ^ Tighten the engine mount to engine bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the engine mount frame bracket to the frame. 5. Install the engine mount frame bracket bolts. ^ Tighten the engine mount frame bracket bolts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the engine and remove the jack. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Replacement - Left > Page 1525 7. Install the engine mount through-bolts and nuts. Tighten the through-bolts or the nuts to the following: ^ Tighten the through-bolts to 74 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the nuts to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the starter, if removed. 9. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Idler Pulley: Specifications Belt Idler Pulley Bolt ............................................................................................................................ .................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right Removal Procedure 1. Remove the drive belt. 2. Remove the drive belt idler pulley bolt. 3. Remove the drive belt idler pulley. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the drive belt idler pulley and bolt to the generator mounting bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the drive belt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Right > Page 1531 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - Without Air Conditioning Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement - without Air Conditioning Removal Procedure 1. Remove the drive belt. 2. Remove the belt idler pulley bolt. 3. Remove the belt idler pulley from the power steering pump mounting bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the belt idler pulley and the bolt to the power steering pump mounting bracket. ^ Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the drive belt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure - at 1,000 RPM ................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 42 kPa (6 psi) Oil Pressure - at 2,000 RPM ........................... ............................................................................................................................................. 125 kPa (18 psi) Oil Pressure - at 4,000 RPM ................................................................................................... ..................................................................... 166 kPa (24 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1536 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing 1. With the vehicle on a level surface, allow adequate drain down time, 2-3 minutes, and measure for a low engine oil level. Add the recommended grade engine oil, and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures FULL on the oil level indicator. 2. Operate the engine and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle oil pressure gage or the oil indicator light. Listen for a noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 3. Inspect for the following: ^ Engine oil diluted by moisture or unburned fuel mixtures ^ Improper engine oil viscosity for the expected temperature ^ Incorrect or faulty oil pressure gage sensor ^ Incorrect or faulty oil pressure gage ^ Plugged oil filter ^ Malfunctioning oil filter bypass valve 4. Remove the oil pressure gage sensor or another engine block oil gallery plug. 5. Install an oil pressure gage. 6. Start the engine and then allow the engine to reach normal operation temperature. 7. Measure the engine oil pressure at the following RPM: 1. 42 kPa (6 psig) minimum, at 1,000 RPM 2. 125 kPa (18 psig) minimum, at 2,000 RPM 3. 166 kPa (24 psig) minimum, at 4,000 RPM 8. If the engine oil pressure is below minimum specifications, inspect the engine for one or more of the following: ^ Oil pump worn or dirty ^ Malfunctioning oil pump pressure relief valve ^ Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged ^ Excessive bearing clearance ^ Cracked, porous or restricted oil galleries ^ Engine block oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed ^ Broken valve lifters Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil level indicator. 2. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 3. Remove the oil level indicator tube bolt. 4. Remove the oil level indicator tube from the engine using a twisting motion. 5. Clean the old sealer from the oil level indicator tube and the engine block. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent around the oil level indicator tube 13 mm (0.5 inch) below the tube bead. 2. Install the oil level indicator tube into the engine block. Rotate the oil level indicator tube into position. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil level indicator tube bolt. ^ Tighten the oil level indicator tube bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1540 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Install the oil level indicator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1545 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 1546 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter Change ............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 4.3L (4.5 Qt) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1549 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ........................................ Look for Starburst Symbol Grade ............................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................ 5W-30 Below -29° C (-20° F) ................................................................................................................................................. 5W-30 synthetic (preferred) , 0W-30 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1550 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil into a suitable container. 3. For 2WD vehicles, remove the oil filter from the oil filter adapter. 4. For 4WD vehicles, open the access panel in the steering linkage shield. 5. Remove the oil filter from the remote oil filter adapter. 6. Inspect to ensure the engine oil filter gasket is removed. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1551 1. Lubricate the oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. For a RWD vehicle, install the oil filter to the oil filter adapter. 3. For 4WD vehicles, install the oil filter to the remote oil filter adapter. 4. Tighten the oil filter following the instructions on the filter. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan drain plug into the oil pan. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the crankcase with the proper capacity and quality of engine oil. 8. Operate the engine and check for leaks and oil pressure. 9. For a 4WD vehicles, close the access panel in the steering linkage shield. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement (4WD) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front skid plate bolt. 3. Remove the front skid plate. 4. Important: Have a drain pan ready for the engine oil to drain into. Remove the bolt from the remote oil filter adapter. 5. Remove and discard the seals. 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Remove air cleaner assembly. Refer to Air Cleaner Assembly Replacement in Engine Controls - 4.3 L 8. Remove the engine oil cooler lines from radiator. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting. 9. Remove engine oil cooler lines from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 1556 10. Inspect the fittings, the connectors, the cooler lines, the cooler, the filter lines, and the remote filter adapter for damage, distortion, or restriction. Replace parts as necessary. 11. Flush the engine oil cooler, the engine oil cooler lines, the remote engine oil filter adapter, and the remote engine oil filter lines with the same type of engine oil normally circulating through the engine. Installation Procedure 1. Install new seals on both ends of the engine oil cooler line. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine oil cooler line mounting bolt to the remote oil filter adapter. ^ Tighten the bolt to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil cooler mounting bolt to the engine. ^ Tighten the bolt to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 1557 4. Important: When performing the following procedure, do not reuse the old retaining rings. Replace the old retaining rings with new ones. Install the engine oil cooler lines to the radiator. 5. Pull back on the engine oil cooler lines to ensure a proper connection. 6. Install the front skid plate. 7. Install the front skid plate bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower the vehicle 9. Inspect and fill the engine oil to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 1558 Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting Removal Procedure 1. Disengage the plastic caps from the quick connect fittings. Pull the caps back along the pipe. 2. Using a bent-tip screwdriver or equivalent, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to rotate the retaining ring. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the quick connector until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed.Discard the retaining rings. 4. Remove the engine oil cooler line from the quick connector fitting at the radiator. Pull the lines straight out from the connectors. 5. Clean all of the components in a suitable solvent, and dry them with compressed air. 6. Inspect the fittings, the connectors, the cooler lines, and the cooler for damage, distortion, or restriction. Replace parts as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing the following procedure, do not reuse the old retaining rings. Replace the old retaining rings with new ones. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring down over the fitting. Install a new retaining ring into each quick connector fitting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 1559 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connector. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the connector until the retaining ring is positioned with all 3 ears through the 3 slots. 4. Ensure the 3 retaining ring ears can be seen from the inside of the connector and the retaining ring can move freely in the slots. 5. Install the engine oil cooler line into the quick connector fitting until a click is heard or felt. Pull back on the engine oil cooler lines to ensure a proper connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 1560 6. Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap. Snap the plastic cap onto the quick connect fitting. 7. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting. 8. Inspect and fill the engine oil to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1565 Oil Filter: Specifications Oil Filter ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Oil Filter Adapter Bolt ........................................ ...................................................................................................................................... 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Oil Filter Fitting ............................................................................................................................. ........................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Adapter Mounting Bracket Bolt ................................................................................................................................... 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Adapter Nut ..................................................................................... ............................................................................ 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Inlet and Outlet Hose Clip Bolt ................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Remote Oil Filter Inlet and Outlet Hose to Remote Oil Filter Adapter Bolt ............................................................................................ 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1566 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil into a suitable container. 3. For 2WD vehicles, remove the oil filter from the oil filter adapter. 4. For 4WD vehicles, open the access panel in the steering linkage shield. 5. Remove the oil filter from the remote oil filter adapter. 6. Inspect to ensure the engine oil filter gasket is removed. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1567 1. Lubricate the oil filter gasket with clean engine oil. 2. For a RWD vehicle, install the oil filter to the oil filter adapter. 3. For 4WD vehicles, install the oil filter to the remote oil filter adapter. 4. Tighten the oil filter following the instructions on the filter. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan drain plug into the oil pan. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the crankcase with the proper capacity and quality of engine oil. 8. Operate the engine and check for leaks and oil pressure. 9. For a 4WD vehicles, close the access panel in the steering linkage shield. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position a suitable container to catch the engine oil. 3. Remove the engine oil cooler pipe bolt from the oil filter adapter. 4. Remove the engine oil cooler adapter pipes and seals from the oil filter adapter. 5. Remove the engine oil filter (except Four Wheel Drive vehicle). 6. Remove oil filter adapter bolts. 7. Remove the oil filter adapter and the oil filter adapter gasket. 8. Discard the oil filter adapter gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement > Page 1572 9. Remove the oil filter adapter seal (O-ring). 10. Discard the oil filter adapter seal (O-ring). Installation Procedure 1. Install the new oil filter adapter seal (O-ring) into the groove on the oil filter adapter. 2. Install the oil filter adapter and a new oil filter adapter gasket. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil filter adapter bolts. ^ Tighten the oil filter adapter bolts to 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement > Page 1573 4. Install the oil filter adapter pipe seals and pipes to the oil filter adapter. 5. Install the oil filter adapter pipe bolt. ^ Tighten the oil filter adapter pipe bolt to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the engine oil filter (except Four Wheel Drive vehicles). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Operate the engine and check for leaks. 9. Inspect the engine oil level and fill to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement > Page 1574 Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Remote Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Remote Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position a suitable container to catch the engine oil. 3. Remove the engine oil filter. 4. Remove the engine oil cooler pipes from the remote engine oil filter adapter. 5. Remove the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses from the remote oil filter adapter. 6. Remove the nuts and the remote oil filter adapter from the remote oil filter mounting bracket. 7. If necessary, remove the remote oil filter adapter mounting bracket and bolts from the radiator support. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the remote oil filter adapter mounting bracket and bolts to the radiator support, if removed. ^ Tighten the remote oil filter adapter mounting bracket bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the remote oil filter adapter and nuts to the mounting bracket. ^ Tighten the remote oil filter adapter nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses to the remote oil filter adapter. 4. Install the engine oil cooler pipes to the remote engine oil filter adapter. 5. Install the engine oil filter. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Operate the engine and check for leaks. 8. Inspect the engine oil level and fill to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement > Page 1575 Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Remote Oil Filter Adapter Pipe Replacement Remote Oil Filter Adapter Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the steering linkage shield, if equipped. 3. Position a suitable drain pan for the engine oil to drain into when the hoses are removed. 4. Remove the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose clip bolt from the oil pan. 5. Remove the bolt attaching the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses to the remote oil filter adapter. 6. Remove the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses and the seals from the remote oil filter adapter. 7. Discard the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose seals. 8. Remove the bolt attaching the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses to the oil filter pipe adapter. 9. Remove the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses. 10. Remove and discard the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose seals. 11. Clean and inspect the remote engine oil filter inlet and outlet hoses and fittings. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement > Page 1576 1. Install NEW seals on both ends of the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses and the bolt to the oil filter pipe adapter. ^ Tighten the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose to remote oil filter pipe adapter bolt to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hoses to the remote oil filter adapter. ^ Tighten the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose to the remote oil filter adapter bolt to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the remote oil filter inlet and outlet clip and bolt to the oil pan. ^ Tighten the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose clip bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 5. Install the steering linkage shield, if equipped. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Operate the engine and check for leaks. 8. Inspect the engine oil level and fill to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Filter Adapter Replacement > Page 1577 Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Bypass Valve Replacement Oil Filter Bypass Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Position a suitable container to catch the engine oil. 3. Remove the oil filter (2WD vehicle). 4. Remove the oil filter adapter. 5. Using a suitable prying tool remove the oil filter bypass valve. 6. Clean and inspect valve bore for damage. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW oil filter bypass valve using the following procedure: 1. Use a brass drift that is the same diameter as the outside diameter of the oil filter bypass valve. 2. Install the oil filter bypass valve into the oil gallery bore until slightly below flush with the surface of the engine block. 3. Using a pointed punch, stake the engine block area around the oil filter bypass valve. Stake in 3 locations 120 degrees apart. 2. Install the oil filter adapter (RWD vehicle) or the remote oil filter pipe adapter (4WD vehicle). 3. Install the oil filter (RWD vehicle). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Baffle Bolt ............................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.) Oil Pan Drain Plug ............................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Oil Pan ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.) Tighten the oil pan bolts and nuts in sequence. ^ Oil Pan Bolt and Nut in Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1581 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Replacement (4 Wheel Drive) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the oil level indicator. 3. Remove the front differential assembly. 4. Remove the starter. 5. Remove the transmission cover. 6. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil into a suitable container. 7. Remove the remote oil filter pipe adapter. 8. Remove the bolt holding the remote oil filter inlet and outlet hose clip to the oil pan. 9. Remove the stud holding the bracket for the starter wire harness and if equipped, the transmission oil cooler pipes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1582 10. Remove the access plugs for the oil pan rear nuts. 11. Remove the transmission to oil pan bolts (automatic transmission shown). 12. Important: The low oil level sensor is not reusable. Use a NEW low oil sensor. Remove and discard the engine oil level sensor (if applicable). 13. Remove the oil pan bolts and nuts. 14. Remove the oil pan. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1583 15. Remove the oil pan gasket. 16. Discard the oil pan gasket. 17. Clean all sealing surfaces on the engine and the oil pan. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Any time the transmission and the engine oil pan are off of the engine at the same time, install the transmission before the oil pan. This is to allow for the proper oil pan alignment. Failure to achieve the correct oil pan alignment can result in transmission failure. Apply a 5 mm (0.197 inch) wide and 25 mm (1.0 inch) long bead of adhesive GM P/N 12346141 or equivalent to both the right and left sides of the engine front cover to engine block junction at the oil pan sealing surfaces. 2. Apply a 5 mm (0.197 inch) wide and 25 mm (1.0 inch) long bead of adhesive GM P/N 12346141 or equivalent to both the right and left sides of the crankshaft rear oil seal housing to engine block junction at the oil pan sealing surfaces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1584 3. Important: Always install a NEW oil pan gasket. The oil pan gasket and oil pan must be installed and the fasteners tightened while the adhesive is still wet to the touch. Install the NEW oil pan gasket into the groove in the oil pan. 4. Important: The oil pan alignment must always be flush or forward no more than 0.3 mm (0.011 inch) from the rear face of the engine block. Install the oil pan onto the engine block. Press the oil pan gasket into the grooves of the engine front cover and crankshaft rear oil seal housing. 5. Slide the oil pan back against a suitable straight edge. 6. Install the oil pan bolts and nuts, but do not tighten. 7. Measure the pan-to-transmission housing clearance using a feeler gage and a straight edge. Use a feeler gage to check the clearance between the oil pan-to-transmission housing measurement points. If the clearance exceeds 0.3 mm (0.011 inch) at any of the 3 oil pan-to-transmission housing measurement points (1), then repeat the step until the oil pan-to-transmission housing clearance is within the specification. The oil pan must always be forward of the rear face of the engine block. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1585 8. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the oil pan bolts and nuts in sequence. ^ Tighten the oil pan bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Measure the clearance between the 3 oil pan-to-transmission housing measurement points in order to ensure proper alignment. 10. Install a NEW oil pan drain plug seal (O-ring) onto the oil pan drain plug. 11. Install the oil pan drain plug into the oil pan. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 12. Important:The low oil level sensor is not reusable. Use a NEW low oil sensor. Install the NEW engine oil level sensor (if applicable). ^ Tighten the engine oil level sensor to 13 Nm (115 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1586 13. Notice: Any time the transmission and the engine oil pan are off of the engine at the same time, install the transmission before the oil pan. This is to allow for the proper oil pan alignment. Failure to achieve the correct oil pan alignment can result in transmission failure. Install the transmission to oil pan bolts. ^ Tighten the transmission to the oil pan bolts to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 14. Install the access plugs for the oil pan rear nuts. 15. Install the stud holding the bracket for the starter wire harness and if equipped, the transmission oil cooler pipes. ^ Tighten the bracket stud to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.). 16. Install the remote oil filter pipe adapter. 17. Install the bolt holding the oil filter inlet and outlet hose clip to the oil pan. ^ Tighten the hose clip bolt to 10 Nm (88 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1587 18. Install the transmission cover and bolts. ^ Tighten the transmission cover bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 19. Install the starter motor. 20. Install the front differential assembly. 21. Install the oil level indicator. 22. Fill the engine with engine oil. 23. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1591 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure - at 1,000 RPM ................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 42 kPa (6 psi) Oil Pressure - at 2,000 RPM ........................... ............................................................................................................................................. 125 kPa (18 psi) Oil Pressure - at 4,000 RPM ................................................................................................... ..................................................................... 166 kPa (24 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1596 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing 1. With the vehicle on a level surface, allow adequate drain down time, 2-3 minutes, and measure for a low engine oil level. Add the recommended grade engine oil, and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures FULL on the oil level indicator. 2. Operate the engine and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle oil pressure gage or the oil indicator light. Listen for a noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 3. Inspect for the following: ^ Engine oil diluted by moisture or unburned fuel mixtures ^ Improper engine oil viscosity for the expected temperature ^ Incorrect or faulty oil pressure gage sensor ^ Incorrect or faulty oil pressure gage ^ Plugged oil filter ^ Malfunctioning oil filter bypass valve 4. Remove the oil pressure gage sensor or another engine block oil gallery plug. 5. Install an oil pressure gage. 6. Start the engine and then allow the engine to reach normal operation temperature. 7. Measure the engine oil pressure at the following RPM: 1. 42 kPa (6 psig) minimum, at 1,000 RPM 2. 125 kPa (18 psig) minimum, at 2,000 RPM 3. 166 kPa (24 psig) minimum, at 4,000 RPM 8. If the engine oil pressure is below minimum specifications, inspect the engine for one or more of the following: ^ Oil pump worn or dirty ^ Malfunctioning oil pump pressure relief valve ^ Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged ^ Excessive bearing clearance ^ Cracked, porous or restricted oil galleries ^ Engine block oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed ^ Broken valve lifters Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C Date: February 03, 2010 Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine). When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause damage or potential failure of the new service engine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1601 Intake Manifold: Specifications Lower Intake Manifold Bolt ^ First Pass in Sequence ..................................................................................................................... .............................................. 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.) ^ Second Pass in Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................... 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.) ^ Final Pass in Sequence .................................................................................................................... ................................................ 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Upper Intake Manifold Stud ^ First Pass .......................................................................................................................................... ............................................. 5 Nm (44 inch lbs.) ^ Final Pass ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................. 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.) Throttle Body Stud ............................................................................................................................... ................................................... 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower Removal Procedure Important: You do not have to remove the upper intake manifold in order to remove the lower intake manifold. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the breather tube at the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 4. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body. 5. Remove the accelerator cable from the accelerator control cable bracket. 6. Disconnect the cruise control cable, if equipped, from the throttle shaft and the accelerator cable bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1604 7. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the intake manifold, if equipped with A/C. 8. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose 9. Drain the cooling system. 10. Remove the radiator inlet hose at the water outlet. 11. Remove the heater hose from the intake manifold. 12. Remove the water pump inlet hose from the intake manifold. 13. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: ^ The fuel meter body assembly (1) ^ The EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (2) ^ The manifold air pressure (MAP) sensor (3) 14. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: ^ The ignition coil (2) ^ The ignition control module (ICM) (1) ^ The generator (4) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1605 15. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: ^ The idle air control (IAC) motor (3) ^ The throttle position (TP) sensor (2) ^ The A/C compressor cutoff switch, if equipped (5) ^ The A/C clutch switch, if equipped (1) ^ The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (4) 16. Remove the engine wiring harness clips from the brackets. 17. Move the engine wiring harness aside. 18. Remove the accelerator cable bracket from the throttle body and the intake manifold. 19. Remove the accelerator and the cruise control cable bracket from the throttle bracket.Leave the accelerator and cruise control cables on the bracket. 20. Disconnect the PCV hose assembly from the intake manifold and the valve rocker arm cover. 21. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve. 22. Remove the distributor. 23. Disconnect the fuel supply and return pipes at the rear of the intake manifold. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1606 24. Important: Do not discharge the refrigerant. Perform the following in order to remove the left front bolt for the intake manifold: 1. Remove the drive belt. 2. Loosen the nut for the power steering pump rear bracket at the side of the engine. 3. Remove the nut for the power steering pump rear bracket at the front of the engine. 4. Remove the bolts and the nut for the power steering pump mounting bracket. 5. Leave the A/C compressor, if equipped, and the power steering pump on the power steering pump mounting bracket. 6. Slide the power steering pump bracket forward to access the bolt at the front of the intake manifold. 25. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor wire connector (if equipped) from the engine wiring harness bracket. 26. Remove the lower intake manifold bolts. 27. Important: The intake manifold may be removed as an assembly. Do not remove the specific intake manifold components unless component service is required. Do not allow dirt or debris to enter the fuel system. Ensure that the ends of the fuel system are properly sealed. Do not disassemble the Central Sequential Fuel Injection (SFI) unit, unless service is required. Remove the intake manifold assembly. 28. Remove and discard the lower intake manifold gaskets. 29. Important: Do not immerse the assembled intake manifold in cleaning solvent. Clean the lower intake manifold in cleaning solvent. 30. Dry the lower intake manifold with compressed air. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1607 31. Inspect the lower intake manifold for the following: ^ Damage to the gasket sealing surfaces (1), (2) and (3) ^ Restricted cooling system passages (5) ^ Cracks or damage ^ Damage to the threaded bolt holes 32. Replace intake manifold if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Apply the proper amount of the sealant when assembling this component. Excessive use of the sealant can prohibit the component from sealing properly. A component that is not sealed properly can leak leading to extensive engine damage. Apply a 4.0 mm (0.157 inch) patch of adhesive GM P/N 12346141 (Canadian P/N 10953433) or equivalent to the cylinder head side of the lower intake manifold gasket at each end. 2. Important: The lower intake manifold gasket must be installed while the adhesive is still wet to the touch. Install the lower intake manifold gasket onto the cylinder head. Use the gasket locator pins in order to properly seat the lower intake manifold gasket on the cylinder head. 3. Notice: Apply the proper amount of the sealant when assembling this component. Excessive use of the sealant can prohibit the component from sealing properly. A component that is not sealed properly can leak leading to extensive engine damage. Important: The lower intake manifold must be installed and the fasteners tightened while the adhesive is still wet to the touch. Apply a 5 mm (0.197 inch) bead of adhesive GM P/N 12346141 (Canadian P/N 10953433) or equivalent to the front top of the engine block. 4. Extend the adhesive bead 13 mm (0.50 inch) onto each lower intake manifold gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1608 5. Apply a 5 mm (0.197 inch) bead of adhesive GM P/N 12346141 (Canadian P/N 10953433) or equivalent to the rear top of the engine block. 6. Extend the adhesive bead 13 mm (0.50 inch) onto each lower intake manifold gasket. 7. Install the lower intake manifold onto the engine block. 8. If reusing the fasteners, apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953433) or equivalent to the threads of the lower intake manifold bolts. 9. Install the lower intake manifold bolts. 10. Notice: Proper lower intake manifold fastener tightening sequence and torque is critical. Always follow the tightening sequence, and torque the intake manifold bolts using the 3 step method. Failing to do so may distort the crankshaft bearing bore alignment and cause damage to the crankshaft bearings. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the lower intake manifold bolts. 1. Tighten the bolts on the first pass in sequence to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). 2. Tighten the bolts on the second pass in sequence to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 3. Tighten the bolts on the final pass in sequence to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1609 11. Position the power steering pump mounting bracket. 12. Loosely install the power steering pump mounting bracket bolts and nuts. 13. Install the nut for the power steering pump rear bracket at the front of the engine. ^ Tighten the power steering pump mounting bracket bolts and the power steering pump rear bracket nuts to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 14. Install the drive belt. 15. Install the fuel supply and return pipes to the rear of the intake manifold. 16. Important: In order to install the distributor for the correct engine timing, position the engine to number one cylinder top dead center. Remove the spark plug for number one cylinder. 17. Rotate the crankshaft until number one cylinder is in the compression stroke. 18. Align the 2 reference marks on the crankshaft balancer (1) and (4) with the 2 alignment marks (2) and (3) on the front cover. 19. Install the spark plug. 20. Install the distributor. 21. Install the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1610 22. Install the PCV hose assembly to the intake manifold and the valve rocker arm cover. 23. Install the accelerator cable and cruise control cable bracket to the throttle body. ^ Tighten the accelerator cable and cruise control bracket nuts to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.). 24. Install the accelerator cable bracket to the intake manifold and the throttle body. ^ Tighten the accelerator cable bracket studs and nuts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 25. Position the engine wiring harness. 26. Install the engine wiring harness clips in the brackets. 27. Connect the following electrical connectors: ^ The idle air control (IAC) motor (3) ^ The throttle position (TP) sensor (2) ^ The A/C compressor cutoff switch, if equipped (5) ^ The A/C clutch switch, if equipped (1) ^ The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (4) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1611 28. Connect the following electrical connectors: ^ The fuel meter body assembly (1) ^ The EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (2) ^ The manifold air pressure (MAP) sensor (3) 29. Connect the following electrical connectors: ^ The ignition coil (2) ^ The ignition control module (ICM) (1) ^ The generator (4) 30. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose. 31. Connect the vacuum hose to the intake manifold, if equipped with A/C. 32. Install the water pump inlet hose to the intake manifold. 33. Install the heater hose to the intake manifold. 34. Install the radiator inlet hose to the thermostat housing. 35. Install the cruise control cable, if equipped to the bracket and the throttle shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1612 36. Install the accelerator cable onto the throttle body. 37. Wrap the cable in between the finger of the hook tab and the pulley wall. Make sure that the cable is fully seated in the pulley groove. The cable must not lie outside of the hook tab. 38. Install the accelerator cable to the accelerator cable control bracket. 39. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 40. Connect the breather tube to the air cleaner outlet duct. 41. Fill the cooling system. 42. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1613 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold Replacement Intake Manifold Replacement - Upper Removal Procedure Important: The upper intake does not have to be removed to remove the lower intake manifold. 1. Disconnect the breather tube at the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct retaining wingnut. 3. Disconnect the IAT sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct from the throttle body. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1614 5. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body. 6. Remove the accelerator cable from the accelerator control cable bracket. 7. Disconnect the cruise control cable, if equipped from the throttle shaft and the accelerator cable bracket. 8. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the intake manifold for the vacuum tank. 9. Remove the power brake booster vacuum hose. 10. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: ^ The A/C compressor clutch (1) ^ The A/C compressor cutoff switch (5), if equipped ^ The throttle position (TP) sensor (2) ^ The idle air control (IAC) motor (3) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1615 11. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: ^ The fuel meter body assembly (1) ^ The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (3) ^ The EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (2) 12. Remove the engine wire harness clip from the accelerator cable bracket. 13. Move the engine wiring harness aside. 14. Remove the accelerator cable bracket from the throttle body and the intake manifold. 15. Remove the accelerator and cruise control cable bracket from the throttle body. Leave the accelerator and cruise control cables on the bracket. 16. Remove the PCV valve hose assembly from the intake manifold and the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1616 17. Remove the bracket for the engine wiring harness from the intake manifold stud. 18. Remove the fuel lines from the fuel meter body assembly. 19. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve. 20. Remove the studs for the upper intake manifold. 21. Remove the upper intake manifold. 22. Remove the upper intake manifold gasket from the groove. 23. Discard the gasket. 24. Remove the seal from the fuel meter body assembly. 25. Discard the seal. 26. Important: Do not immerse the assembled upper intake manifold in cleaning solvent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1617 Clean all sealing surfaces and the inside of the upper intake manifold with a shop towel and cleaning solvent. 27. Inspect the upper intake manifold for the following: ^ Cracks or other damage to the exterior ^ Cracking or damage to the gasket grooves ^ Loose or damaged bolt hole thread inserts ^ Damage to the throttle body mounting surface 28. If replacing the upper intake manifold, turn and remove the power brake booster vacuum tube fitting from the upper intake manifold. 29. Remove and discard the seal. 30. If replacing the upper intake manifold, turn and remove the PCV valve cover from the upper intake manifold. 31. Remove and discard the seal. 32. Remove the throttle body if replacing the upper intake manifold. 33. Remove the MAP sensor if replacing the upper intake manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Install the throttle body, if removed. 2. Install the MAP sensor, if removed. 3. Install the PCV valve cover, if removed, using the following procedure: 1. Install a NEW seal (O-ring) on the PCV valve cover. 2. Lubricate the seal with clean engine oil. 3. Install the PCV valve cover in the upper intake manifold. 4. Turn and lock the PCV valve cover in position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1618 4. Install the power brake booster vacuum tube fitting, if removed, using the following procedure: 1. Install a NEW seal (O-ring) on the power brake booster vacuum tube fitting. 2. Lubricate the seal with clean engine oil. 3. Install the power brake booster vacuum tube fitting in the upper intake manifold. 4. Turn and lock the power brake booster vacuum tube fitting in position. 5. Install a NEW seal on the fuel meter body assembly. 6. Lubricate the seal with clean engine oil. 7. Install a NEW upper intake manifold to lower intake manifold gasket in the groove of the upper intake manifold. 8. Install the upper intake manifold onto the lower intake manifold. 9. If reusing the fasteners, apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 or equivalent to the threads of the upper intake manifold attaching bolts. 10. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the upper intake manifold attaching studs. 1. Tighten the upper intake manifold attaching studs on the first pass to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1619 2. Tighten the upper intake manifold attaching studs on the final pass to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.). 11. Install the fuel lines to the fuel meter body assembly. 12. Install the EVAP canister purge solenoid valve. 13. Install the bracket for the engine wiring harness on the lower intake manifold stud. 14. Install the engine wiring harness bracket nut. ^ Tighten the engine wiring harness bracket nut to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 15. Install the accelerator and cruise control cable bracket to the throttle body. 16. Install the accelerator and cruise control cable bracket nuts. ^ Tighten the accelerator and cruise control cable bracket nuts to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.). 17. Install the accelerator control cable bracket to the throttle body and the intake manifold. ^ Tighten the accelerator control cable bracket studs and nuts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 18. Connect the PCV valve hose assembly to the intake manifold and the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1620 19. Position the engine wiring harness. 20. Install the wire harness clip to the accelerator cable bracket. 21. Connect the following electrical connectors: ^ The fuel meter body assembly (1) ^ The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (3) ^ The EVAP canister purge solenoid valve (2) 22. Connect the following electrical connectors: ^ The A/C compressor clutch (1) ^ The A/C compressor cutoff switch (5), if equipped ^ The throttle position (TP) sensor (2) ^ The idle air control (IAC) motor (3) 23. Connect the vacuum hose from the vacuum tank to the intake manifold. 24. Install the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold. 25. Install the cruise control cable, if equipped to the throttle shaft and the bracket. 26. Install the accelerator cable onto the throttle body. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1621 27. Wrap the cable in between the finger of the hook tab and the pulley wall. Make sure that the cable is fully seated in the pulley groove. The cable must not lie outside of the hook tab. 28. Install the accelerator cable to the accelerator cable control bracket. 29. Notice: ^ Handle the MAF sensor carefully. ^ Do not drop the MAF sensor in order to prevent damage to the MAF sensor. ^ Do not damage the screen located on the air inlet end of the MAF. ^ Do not touch the sensing elements. ^ Do not allow solvents and lubricants to come in contact with the sensing elements. ^ Use a small amount of a soap based solution in order to aid in the installation. Install air cleaner outlet duct to throttle body. 30. Install air cleaner outlet duct to MAF sensor. ^ Tighten the hose clamp to 4 Nm (32 inch lbs.). 31. Connect the IAT sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement - Lower > Page 1622 32. Install the air cleaner outlet duct retaining wingnut. ^ Tighten the wingnut to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 33. Connect the breather tube to the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 35621-B Rear Main Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission assembly. 2. Remove the engine flywheel. 3. Remove the crankshaft rear oil seal from the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. Insert a suitable tool into the access notches and then carefully pry the crankshaft rear oil seal from the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. 4. Discard the crankshaft rear oil seal. 5. Clean off any dirt or rust in the area. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a small amount (2 to 3 drops) of clean engine oil to the bore of the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. 2. Apply a small amount (2 to 3 drops) of clean engine oil to the outside diameter of the engine flywheel pilot flange. 3. Apply a small amount (1 drop) of clean engine oil to the outside diameter of the flywheel locator pin. 4. Apply a small amount (2 to 3 drops) of clean engine oil to the crankshaft seal surface. 5. Inspect the J 35621-B flange for imperfections that may damage the crankshaft rear oil seal. Minor imperfections may be removed with a fine grade emery cloth. 6. Important: DO NOT allow oil or any other lubricants to contact the seal lip surface of the crankshaft rear oil seal. Remove the sleeve from the crankshaft rear oil seal. 7. Apply a small amount (2 to 3 drops) of clean engine oil to the outside diameter of the crankshaft rear oil seal. 8. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal onto the J 35621-B. 9. Install the J 35621-B onto the rear of the crankshaft and hand tighten the tool bolts until snug. 10. Notice: Proper alignment of the crankshaft rear oil seal is critical. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal near to flush and square to the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. Failing to do so may cause the crankshaft rear oil seal or the crankshaft rear oil seal installation tool to fail. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal onto the crankshaft and into the crankshaft rear oil seal housing. 1. Turn the J 35621-B wing nut clockwise until the crankshaft rear oil seal is installed near to flush and square to the crankshaft rear oil seal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1627 housing. Increased resistance will be felt when the crankshaft rear oil seal has reached the bottom of the crankshaft rear oil seal housing bore. 2. Turn the J 35621-B wing nut counterclockwise to release the J 35621-B from the crankshaft rear oil seal. 11. Remove the J 35621-B from the crankshaft. 12. Wipe off any excess engine oil with a clean rag. 13. Install the engine flywheel. 14. Install the transmission assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 35468 Cover Aligner/Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the crankshaft balancer. 2. Use a suitable prying tool to remove the crankshaft front oil seal. 3. Inspect engine front cover seal bore area for damage. 4. Inspect the crankshaft balancer seal area. Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the exterior of the seal with clean engine oil. 2. Use the J 35468 with a hammer in order to install the crankshaft front oil seal. 3. Inspect to ensure the crankshaft front oil seal is flush and square to the engine front cover. 4. Install the crankshaft balancer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter - J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor - J 5892-D Valve Spring Compressor - J 42073 Valve Stem Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Remove the required valve rocker arms. 3. Remove the required spark plugs. 4. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug hole. 5. Connect a shop air supply hose and apply compressed air in order to hold the valves in place. 6. Remove a bolt from a valve rocker arm. 7. Install a flat washer on the bolt. 8. Install the bolt in the valve rocker arm bolt hole for the valve spring requiring removal. 9. Caution: Compressed valve springs have high tension against the valve spring compressor. Valve springs that are not properly compressed by or released from the valve spring compressor can be ejected from the valve spring compressor with intense force. Use care when compressing or releasing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor and when removing or installing the valve stem keys. Failing to use care may cause personal injury. Use the J 5892-D in order to compress the valve spring. 1. Hook the slotted end of J 5892-D under the washer on the valve rocker arm bolt. 2. Apply steady pressure on the valve spring cap until the valve keys are accessible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1634 10. Notice: Completely engage the J 38606 jaws on the valve spring. The J 38606 may slip off and scratch the valve spring. Replace the valve spring if the valve spring becomes scratch. Use J 38606 when J 5892-D will not fit. 11. Remove the valve keys (1). 12. Carefully release the valve spring tension. 13. Remove the J 5892-D or the J 38606. 14. Remove the valve spring cap (2) and valve spring (3). 15. Remove the valve stem oil seal (4). Installation Procedure 1. Important: The exhaust valve oil stem seal has the letters EX (1) molded into the top of the seal. The exhaust valve oil stem seal material is brown in color (2) with a white stripe (3) painted onto the outside diameter of the seal, or the material may be red in color (2) with no paint stripe. The intake valve oil seal is black in color. Assemble the valve into the proper valve guide. 2. Select the proper valve stem oil seal for the specific valve guide. 3. Lubricate the valve stem oil seal and the outside diameter of the valve guide with clean engine oil. 4. Assemble the valve stem oil seal onto the valve stem. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1635 5. Caution: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. Using the J 42073, install the valve stem oil seal onto the valve guide. 1. Tap the valve stem oil seal onto the valve guide until the J 42073 bottoms against the valve spring seat. 2. Inspect the valve stem oil seal. The valve stem oil seal should not be bottomed against the valve guide. There should be a 1 - 2 mm (0.03937 0.07874 inch) gap between the bottom edge of the valve stem oil seal and the valve guide. 6. Install the valve spring (3). 7. Install the valve spring cap (2) onto the valve spring (3), over the valve stem. 8. Caution: Compressed valve springs have high tension against the valve spring compressor. Valve springs that are not properly compressed by or released from the valve spring compressor can be ejected from the valve spring compressor with intense force. Use care when compressing or releasing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor and when removing or installing the valve stem keys. Failing to use care may cause personal injury. Use the J 5892-D in order to compress the valve spring. Hook the slotted end of J 5892-D under the washer on the valve rocker arm bolt. 9. Apply steady pressure on the valve spring cap until the valve keys are accessible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1636 10. Notice: Completely engage the J 38606 jaws on the valve spring. The J 38606 may slip off and scratch the valve spring. Replace the valve spring if the valve spring becomes scratch. Use the J 38606 if the clearance does not permit use of the J 5892-D. 11. Install the valve stem O-ring seal. 12. Install the valve stem keys. Use grease in order to hold the valve stem keys in place. 13. Carefully release the valve spring pressure, making sure the valve stem keys stay in place. 14. Notice: The valve stem keys must correctly seat in the valve spring cap. Engine damage may occur by not installing properly. Remove the J 5892-D or the J 38606. 1. Look to ensure that the valve stem keys seat properly in the upper groove of the valve stem. 2. Tap the end of the valve stem with a plastic faced hammer in order to seat the valve stem keys, if necessary. 15. Remove the J 22794. 16. Install the spark plugs. 17. Install the valve rocker arms to the cylinder head. 18. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1641 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Balance Shaft Replacement ^ Tools Required J 8092 Universal Driver Handle - J 36996 Balance Shaft Installer - J 45059 Angle Meter Removal Procedure 1. Remove the radiator. 2. Remove the A/C condenser. 3. Remove the valve lifter pushrod guide. 4. Remove the timing chain and camshaft sprockets. 5. Remove the balance shaft drive gear. 6. Important: The balance shaft drive and balance shaft driven gears are serviced as a set. The set includes the balance shaft driven gear bolt. Remove the balance shaft driven gear bolt from the balance shaft. 1. Use a wrench in order to secure the balance shaft. Place the wrench onto the balance shaft near to the balance shaft front bearing. 2. Remove the balance shaft bolt. 3. Remove the wrench from the balance shaft. 7. Remove the balance shaft driven gear from the balance shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1646 8. Remove the bolts and the balance shaft retainer. 9. Important: The balance shaft and the balance shaft front bearing are serviced only as a package. Do not remove the balance shaft front bearing from the balance shaft. Use a soft-faced hammer in order to remove the balance shaft from the engine block. 10. Clean and inspect the balance shaft. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The balance shaft and the balance shaft front bearing are serviced only as an assembly. Do not remove the balance shaft front bearing from the balance shaft. Apply clean engine oil GM P/N 12345610 (Canadian P/N 993193) or equivalent to the balance shaft front bearing. 2. Use the J 36996 and the J 8092 in order to install the balance shaft. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the balance shaft retainer and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1647 4. Install the balance shaft driven gear onto the balance shaft. 5. If reusing the fastener, apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent to the threads of the balance shaft driven gear bolt. 6. Install the balance shaft driven gear bolt. 1. Use a wrench to secure the balance shaft. Place the wrench onto the balance shaft near to the balance shaft front bearing. 2. Install the balance shaft driven gear bolt. ^ Tighten the balance shaft driven gear bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Using the J 45059, rotate the balance shaft driven gear bolt an additional 35 degrees. 7. Remove the wrench from the balance shaft. 8. Rotate the balance shaft by hand in order to ensure that there is clearance between the balance shaft and the valve lifter pushrod guide. If the balance shaft does not rotate freely, check to ensure that the retaining ring on the balance shaft front bearing is seated on the case. 9. Install the balance shaft drive gear. DO NOT install the camshaft sprocket bolts at this time. 10. Rotate the engine camshaft so that the timing mark on the balance shaft drive gear is in the 12 o'clock position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1648 11. Remove the balance shaft drive gear. 12. Rotate the balance shaft so that the timing mark on the balance shaft driven gear is in the 6 o'clock position. 13. Position the balance shaft drive gear onto the engine camshaft. 14. Look to ensure that the balance shaft drive gear and the balance shaft driven gear timing marks are aligned. 15. Install the timing chain and the camshaft sprocket. 16. Install the engine front cover. 17. Install the valve lifter pushrod guide. 18. Install the A/C condenser. 19. Install the radiator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolt ....................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Chain: Service and Repair Timing Chain, Sprockets, and/or Tensioner Replacement ^ Tools Required J 5590 Rear Pinion Bearing Race Installer - J 5825-A Crankshaft Gear Remover Removal Procedure Notice: In order to rotate the engine install a bolt with the same threads as the crankshaft, but do not use the crankshaft balancer bolt or a bolt longer than 1 inch, in the crankshaft. Failing to do so will cause damage to the bolt threads and the crankshaft threaded hole when removing the bolt. 1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor reluctor ring. 2. Install a 7/16-20 x 1 inch bolt into the end of the crankshaft. 3. Notice: Align the timing marks before removing the timing chain. If it is necessary to turn either the camshaft or the crankshaft with the timing chain removed, loosen or remove the valve rocker arms. Turning either the crankshaft or camshaft with the timing chain removed may cause the pistons to contact the valves, resulting in damage. Rotate the crankshaft until: ^ The timing marks on both sprockets line up. ^ The number 4 cylinder is at top dead center (TDC) of the compression stroke. 4. Unsnap the timing chain tensioner shoe from the pin (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1655 5. Remove the camshaft sprocket bolts. 6. Remove the camshaft sprocket and the camshaft timing chain. 7. Using J 5825-A and an open end wrench, remove the crankshaft sprocket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1656 8. Remove the crankshaft balancer key. 9. If necessary, remove the timing chain tensioner bracket bolt and bracket. 10. Clean and inspect the timing chain and sprockets, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If necessary, install the timing chain tensioner bracket and bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1657 ^ Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 2. Install the key into the crankshaft keyway. The crankshaft balancer key should be parallel to the crankshaft or with a slight incline. 3. Align the keyway of the crankshaft sprocket with the crankshaft balancer key. 4. Using J 5590, install the crankshaft sprocket. 5. Important: Install the camshaft sprocket with the alignment mark at the 6 o'clock position. Install the camshaft sprocket and the camshaft timing chain. Wrap the timing chain around the crankshaft sprocket and position to the driver's side of the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1658 6. Install the timing chain tensioner shoe onto the bracket and position the top of the shoe under the tab at the top of the bracket. 7. Insert the camshaft timing chain sprocket into the timing chain and position so when the camshaft timing chain sprocket is installed on the camshaft, the camshaft timing marks will line up. Important: Do not use a hammer to install the camshaft sprocket onto the camshaft. To do so may dislodge the expansion cup plug. 8. Install the camshaft sprocket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1659 9. Ensure that the crankshaft sprocket is aligned at the 12 o'clock position and camshaft sprocket is aligned at the 6 o'clock position. 10. Remove the bolt that was installed in the end of the crankshaft. 11. Install the CKP sensor reluctor ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Timing Chain, Sprockets, and/or Tensioner Replacement ^ Tools Required J 5590 Rear Pinion Bearing Race Installer - J 5825-A Crankshaft Gear Remover Removal Procedure Notice: In order to rotate the engine install a bolt with the same threads as the crankshaft, but do not use the crankshaft balancer bolt or a bolt longer than 1 inch, in the crankshaft. Failing to do so will cause damage to the bolt threads and the crankshaft threaded hole when removing the bolt. 1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor reluctor ring. 2. Install a 7/16-20 x 1 inch bolt into the end of the crankshaft. 3. Notice: Align the timing marks before removing the timing chain. If it is necessary to turn either the camshaft or the crankshaft with the timing chain removed, loosen or remove the valve rocker arms. Turning either the crankshaft or camshaft with the timing chain removed may cause the pistons to contact the valves, resulting in damage. Rotate the crankshaft until: ^ The timing marks on both sprockets line up. ^ The number 4 cylinder is at top dead center (TDC) of the compression stroke. 4. Unsnap the timing chain tensioner shoe from the pin (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1663 5. Remove the camshaft sprocket bolts. 6. Remove the camshaft sprocket and the camshaft timing chain. 7. Using J 5825-A and an open end wrench, remove the crankshaft sprocket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1664 8. Remove the crankshaft balancer key. 9. If necessary, remove the timing chain tensioner bracket bolt and bracket. 10. Clean and inspect the timing chain and sprockets, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. If necessary, install the timing chain tensioner bracket and bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1665 ^ Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 2. Install the key into the crankshaft keyway. The crankshaft balancer key should be parallel to the crankshaft or with a slight incline. 3. Align the keyway of the crankshaft sprocket with the crankshaft balancer key. 4. Using J 5590, install the crankshaft sprocket. 5. Important: Install the camshaft sprocket with the alignment mark at the 6 o'clock position. Install the camshaft sprocket and the camshaft timing chain. Wrap the timing chain around the crankshaft sprocket and position to the driver's side of the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1666 6. Install the timing chain tensioner shoe onto the bracket and position the top of the shoe under the tab at the top of the bracket. 7. Insert the camshaft timing chain sprocket into the timing chain and position so when the camshaft timing chain sprocket is installed on the camshaft, the camshaft timing marks will line up. Important: Do not use a hammer to install the camshaft sprocket onto the camshaft. To do so may dislodge the expansion cup plug. 8. Install the camshaft sprocket bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1667 9. Ensure that the crankshaft sprocket is aligned at the 12 o'clock position and camshaft sprocket is aligned at the 6 o'clock position. 10. Remove the bolt that was installed in the end of the crankshaft. 11. Install the CKP sensor reluctor ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Engine Front Cover Bolt ...................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1671 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine oil pan. 2. Remove the crankshaft balancer. 3. Remove the water pump. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. 5. Remove the crankshaft position sensor seal (O-ring). 6. Discard the crankshaft position sensor seal (O-ring). 7. Remove the engine front cover bolts. 8. Important: After the composite engine front cover is removed do not reinstall the engine front cover. Always install a NEW engine front cover. Remove the engine front cover. 9. Discard the engine front cover. 10. Clean all sealing surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Once the composite engine front cover is removed DO NOT reinstall the engine front cover. Always install a NEW engine front cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1672 Install the NEW engine front cover. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine front cover bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.). 3. Important: DO NOT reuse the original crankshaft position sensor seal (O-ring). When installing the crankshaft position sensor be sure the crankshaft position sensor is fully seated and held stationary in the engine front cover crankshaft position sensor bore. A crankshaft position sensor that is not completely seated will cock in the engine front cover and may result in erratic engine operation. Lubricate the NEW crankshaft position sensor seal (O-ring) with clean engine oil. 4. Install the NEW crankshaft position sensor seal (O-ring) onto the crankshaft position sensor. 5. Install the CKP sensor. 6. Install the water pump. 7. Install the crankshaft balancer. 8. Install the engine oil pan. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................379-427 kPa (55-62 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1679 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1680 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. The electric fuel pump supplies fuel through an inline fuel filter to the fuel injection system. The pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. A separate pipe returns unused fuel to the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1681 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1682 Steps 8-13 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1683 Steps 14-20 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1684 Steps 21-23 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1694 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1700 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1701 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner cover wingnuts. 2. Remove the air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clear out any debris in the air cleaner housing. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the air cleaner element into the air cleaner housing. 2. Install the air cleaner cover. 3. Tighten the air cleaner cover wingnuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1707 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 1708 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. .........................................................1,000 ohms per ft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1712 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires-Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1713 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wire at each spark plug. - Twist the boots 1/2 turn before removing the boots. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wire from each spark plug. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wire from the distributor. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wires from the distributor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires at the distributor. NOTE: If the boot to wire movement has occurred, the boot will give a false visual impression of being fully seated. Ensure that the boots have been properly assembled by pushing sideways on the installed boots. Failure to properly seat the terminal onto the spark plug will lead to wire core erosion and result in an engine misfire or crossfire condition, and possible internal damage to the engine. 2. Install the spark plug wire to each spark plug. 3. Inspect the wires for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. 3. Wire routings must be kept intact during service and followed exactly when wires have been disconnected or when replacement of the wires is necessary. Failure to route the wires properly can lead to radio ignition noise and cross firing of the plugs, or shorting of the leads to the ground. 4. Any time the spark plug wires or boots are installed on the spark plugs, new dielectric grease needs to be applied inside the boot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Description and Operation Distributor: Description and Operation DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The distributor ignition (DI) system is responsible for producing and controlling a high energy secondary spark. This spark is used to ignite the compressed air/fuel mixture at precisely the correct time. This provides optimal performance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions. This ignition system consists of a single ignition coil and ignition control module (ICM). Spark energy is delivered via a distributor cap, rotor, and secondary spark plug wires. The driver module within the ICM is commanded to operate the coil by the powertrain control module (PCM), that has complete control over spark timing. The DI system consists of the following components: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Ignition Coil And ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Secondary Ignition Components The distributor is only used as a means to operate the CMP sensor and to distribute spark in the correct sequence. Since the distributor has no influence on base timing the distributor is not adjustable on V6 engines. The distributor position can be adjusted on V8 engines because the chance of crossfire between terminals is greater due to the proximity of the terminals. The spark is distributed through conventional carbon core wires to the spark plugs. The plugs are tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Powertrain Control Module (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Modes Of Operation There is one normal mode of operation, with the spark under PCM control. If the CKP pulses are lost the engine will not run. The loss of a CMP signal may result in a longer crank time since the PCM cannot determine which stroke the pistons are on. Diagnostic trouble codes are available to accurately diagnose the ignition system with a scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Inspection DISTRIBUTOR INSPECTION 1. Inspect the cap for cracks, tiny holes or carbon tracks between the cap terminal traces. Diagnose the carbon tracks using the following procedure: 1. Remove the cap. 2. Place 1 lead from the DMM on a cap terminal. 3. Use the other lead in order to probe all other terminals and the center carbon ball. 4. Move the base lead to the next terminal. Probe all other leads. 5. Continue this procedure until you test all the secondary terminals. 6. If there are any non-infinite readings, replace the cap. IMPORTANT: Discoloration of the cap and some whitish build up around the cap terminals is normal. Yellowing of the rotor cap, darkening and some carbon build up under the rotor segment is normal. Replacement of the cap and the rotor is not necessary unless there is a driveability concern. 2. Inspect the cap for excess build-up of corrosion on the terminals. Scrape clean the terminals. Replace the cap if the corrosion is excessive. Some buildup is normal 3. Inspect the rotor segment for excess wear. Replace the rotor if excess looseness in the rotor segment is present. 4. Inspect the shaft for shaft-to-bushing looseness: 1. Inspect the housing for cracks or damage. 2. Insert the shaft in the housing. 3. If the shaft wobbles, replace the housing assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 1719 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnosis DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system includes the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor, the camshaft position (CMP) sensor, the ignition coil with the ignition control module (ICM), the secondary wires, the spark plugs, and the circuit conductors and connectors. The powertrain control module (PCM) controls the ignition system. The PCM monitors the input signals from various engine sensors. The PCM controls the dwell of the ignition primary coil, computes the desired spark timing and firing of the ignition system via an ignition control (IC) timing control circuit to the ICM. The Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnostic Table assumes the following conditions: The battery is fully charged. - There is adequate fuel in the fuel tank. - The fuel delivery system is functional. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Engine mechanical conditions may prevent the distributor from rotating. Inspect the following if the distributor rotor does not rotate: A broken distributor drive shaft - A worn or broken distributor drive gear - A worn or broken camshaft timing chain and gears An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. If a repair is necessary. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 1720 Steps 1-9 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 1721 Steps 10-19 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 1722 Steps 20-32 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 1723 Steps 33-48 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 1724 Steps 49-50 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. This step is testing for a CKP sensor signal to the PCM. 4. This step is testing for an internally shorted CMP sensor. 9. This step is testing for spark output at more than one spark plug wire. The J 26792 Spark Tester requires a minimum of 25,000 volts to operate. 10. This step determines if spark is being delivered to the distributor cap. 20. This test is testing if the PCM is providing a timing control signal to the ICM. 21. This test checks for a basic engine mechanical problem. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul DISTRIBUTOR OVERHAUL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (2). NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1). If not, replace the distributor. 3. Remove the two screws from the rotor. 4. Remove the rotor. 5. Note the locating holes that the rotor was removed from: - The rotor screw holes (1) - The rotor locator pin holes (2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1727 6. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel with the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 7. Remove the two screws that hold the CMP sensor. 8. Discard the screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. 10. Note the dimple located below the roll pin hole on one side of the gear. The dimple will be used to properly orient the gear onto the shaft during reassembly. 11. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 12. Drive out the roll pin with a suitable punch. 13. Remove the driven gear from the distributor shaft. 14. Remove the round washer. 15. Remove the tang washer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1728 16. Remove the shim washer (1). 17. Remove the old oil seal. ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel for the CMP sensor. NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Insert the sensor into the housing. 3. Install two new screws for the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1729 4. Identify the correct rotor mounting position: - At the rotor screw holes (1) - At the rotor locator pin holes (2) 5. Install the distributor rotor according to the index marks. 6. Install two rotor hold down screws. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 7. Install the shim washer (1) on the bottom of the distributor shaft. 8. Install the tang washer. 9. Install the round washer. 10. Install the driven gear according to the index marks. 11. Align the rotor segment as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). 12. Install the gear and align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1730 13. Check to see If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite the rotor segment when the driven gear is installed in the distributor. 14. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 15. Install the roll pin with a suitable punch and hammer in order to hold the driven gear in the correct position. 16. Install the new oil seal under the mounting flange of the distributor base. 17. Install the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1731 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement DISTRIBUTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: There are two procedures available to install the distributor. Use Installation Procedure 1 when the crankshaft has NOT been rotated from the original position. Use Installation Procedure 2 when any of the following components are removed: The intake manifold - The cylinder head - The camshaft - The timing chain or sprockets - The complete engine If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns on and DTC P1345 sets after installing the distributor, this indicates an incorrectly installed distributor. Engine damage or distributor damage may occur. Use Procedure 2 in order to install the distributor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the distributor cap. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the wire boot in order to remove the wire from the distributor cap. 4. Remove the electrical connector from the base of the distributor. 5. Remove the 2 screws that hold the distributor cap to the housing. 6. Discard the screws. 7. Remove the distributor cap from the housing. 8. Use a grease pencil in order to note the position of the rotor in relation to the distributor housing (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1732 9. Mark the distributor housing and the intake manifold with a grease pencil. 10. Remove the mounting clamp hold down bolt. 11. Remove the distributor. 12. As the distributor is being removed from the engine, watch the rotor move in a counter-clockwise direction about 42 degrees. This will appear as slightly more than 1 clock position. 13. Note the position of the rotor segment. 14. Place a second mark on the base of the distributor (2). This will aid in achieving proper rotor alignment during the distributor installation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 1. If installing a new distributor assembly, place 2 marks on the new distributor housing in the same location as the 2 marks on the original housing. 2. Remove the new distributor cap, if necessary. 3. Align the rotor with the second mark (2). 4. Guide the distributor into the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1733 5. Align the hole in the distributor hold-down base over the mounting hole in the intake manifold. 6. As the distributor is being installed, observe the rotor moving in a clockwise direction about 42 degrees. 7. Once the distributor is completely seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the mark on the distributor base (1). - If the rotor segment is not aligned with the number 1 mark, the driven gear teeth and the camshaft have meshed one or more teeth out of alignment. - In order to correct this condition, remove the distributor and reinstall the distributor. 8. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 9. Install the distributor cap. 10. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 11. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1734 12. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 13. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 14. Refer to installation procedure 2 if malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 1. Rotate the crankshaft balancer clockwise until the alignment marks on the crankshaft balancer are aligned with the tabs on the engine front cover and the number 1 piston is at top dead center of the compression stroke. IMPORTANT: Rotate the number 1 cylinder to TDC of the compression stroke. The engine front cover has 2 alignment tabs and the crankshaft balancer has 2 alignment marks (spaced 90 degrees apart) which are used for positioning number 1 piston at TDC. With the piston on the compression stroke and at top dead center, the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) must align with the engine front cover tab (2) and the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (4) must align with the engine front cover tab (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1735 2. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). 3. Installing the driven gear 180 degrees out of alignment, or locating the rotor in the wrong holes, will cause a no-start condition. Premature engine wear or damage may result. NOTE: The ignition system distributor driven gear and rotor may be installed in multiple positions. In order to avoid mistakes, mark the distributor on the following components in order to ensure the same mounting position upon reassembly: - The distributor driven gear - The distributor shaft - The rotor holes With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). - The alignment will not be exact. - If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite of the rotor segment when the gear is installed in the distributor. 4. Using a long screw driver, align the oil pump drive shaft to the drive tab of the distributor. 5. Guide the distributor into the engine. Ensure that the spark plug towers are perpendicular to the centerline of the engine. 6. Once the distributor is fully seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the pointer cast into the distributor base. - There may be a 6 cast into this pointer, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 6 cylinder engine or an 8, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 8 cylinder engine. - If the rotor segment does not come within a few degrees of the pointer, the gear mesh between the distributor and the camshaft may be off a tooth or more. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 1736 - If this is the case, repeat the procedure again in order to achieve proper alignment. 7. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 8. Install the distributor cap. 9. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 10. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. 11. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 12. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 13. Repeat installation procedure 2 if the malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the MIL is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1740 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. AC R41-932 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1741 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE 1. Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. 2. Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION 1. Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. 2. Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. 3. Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1742 4. Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. 5. Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION 1. Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. 2. Carbon Fouled-Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures - Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. 3. Deposit Fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1743 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the spark plug wires. 2. Loosen each spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or air blast away any dirt from around the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs 1 at a time. Place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder numbers. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1744 1. Properly position each spark plug washer. 2. Inspect each spark plug gap. Adjust each plug as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.524 mm (0.060 in) 3. Hand start the spark plugs in the corresponding cylinders. 4. Tighten the spark plugs. - For used heads tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). - For new aluminum heads tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). - For new iron heads tighten the spark plugs to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the spark plug wires. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. ^ No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example: If the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1748 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Ensure that the vehicle batteries are in good condition, and fully charged. 2. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 3. Disconnect the positive ignition coil wire plug from the ignition coil. 4. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connector. 5. Remove all of the spark plugs. 6. Notice: Do not insert objects into the throttle plate opening. Damage to the throttle body can result, requiring replacement of the throttle body assembly. Block the throttle linkage wide open. 7. Install the engine cylinder compression gage to the cylinder being tested. 8. Using the vehicle starter motor, rotate, or crank the engine for 4 compression strokes, or puffs, for the cylinder being tested. If the engine rotates for more than 4 compression strokes, test the cylinder again. 9. Record the compression reading. 10. Remove the engine cylinder compression gage from the cylinder being tested. 11. Repeat steps 8-11 for each additional cylinder. All cylinders must be tested to obtain valid test results. 12. If any cylinders have low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 oz) of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole. 13. Repeat steps 8-11 for all low compression cylinders. 14. The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. ^ Normal The compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression. ^ Piston rings leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression builds up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. ^ Valves leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. ^ Head gasket leaking Compression is low on the first stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. Adjacent cylinders have the same, or similar, low compression readings. 15. If one or more cylinders fails to meet the minimum specified compression, repair or replace all damaged or worn components and test the engine again. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Outlet Stud ................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Water Pump Bolt .............................................. ........................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1752 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement (4.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Loosen the water pump pulley bolts. 3. Remove the cooling fan and clutch assembly. Refer to Fan Clutch Replacement. 4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in Engine Mechanical 4.3L. 5. Remove the water pump pulley mounting bolts. 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the water pump. 8. Remove radiator outlet hose from the water pump. 9. Remove the water pump mounting bolts. 10. Remove the water pump from the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1753 11. Remove the water pump gaskets. 12. Clean the water pump gasket mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump gaskets. 2. Install the water pump to the engine. 3. Apply a sealer (GM P/N 12346004) to the bolt threads. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the water pump mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the mounting bolts to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1754 5. Install the radiator outlet hose to the water pump. 6. Install the water pump pulley. 7. Install the water pump pulley bolts. ^ Tighten the water pump pulley bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in Engine Mechanical - 4.3L. 9. Install the fan clutch assembly. Refer to Fan Clutch Replacement. 10. Fill the radiator cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 11. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1760 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1761 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1762 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye > Page 1763 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY Automatic Transmission ...................................................................................................................... ......................................... 13.8 quarts (13.1 liters) Manual Transmission .......................................... .......................................................................................................................... 14.1 quarts (13.3 liters) NOTE: ALL capacity specifications are approximate. When replacing or adding fluids, fill to the recommended level and recheck fluid level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1766 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Reservoir Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Replacement in Engine Controls 4.3L. Important: Do not disconnect wiring harness to PCM. 2. Using the J 38185 reposition the hose clamp. 3. Remove the hose from the coolant recovery reservoir. 4. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir retaining nuts. 5. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir. 6. Drain the coolant from the reservoir. Installation Procedure 1. Install the coolant recovery reservoir. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1770 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the reservoir retaining nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 8 - 11 Nm (6 - 8 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the hose to the coolant recovery reservoir. 4. Using the J 38185 reposition the hose clamp. 5. Install the PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Replacement in Engine Controls - 4.3L. 6. Add coolant to reservoir. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Clutch: Service and Repair Fan Clutch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 46406 Fan Clutch Wrench Removal Procedure 1. Remove the upper fan shroud. Refer to Fan Shroud Replacement. 2. Remove the fan clutch from the water pump in a counterclockwise direction using the J 46406. 3. Remove the fan clutch assembly. 4. Remove the fan blade mounting bolts. 5. Remove the fan blade from the fan clutch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fan blade to the fan clutch. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the fan blade mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1775 3. Install the fan clutch assembly to the water pump using the J 46406. ^ Tighten the fan clutch to 56 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper fan shroud. Refer to Fan Shroud Replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1780 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1781 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1782 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Fan Shroud Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the upper fan shroud bolts. 2. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir hose from the lower fan shroud. 3. Remove the upper fan shroud. 4. Lift the lower fan shroud just enough to disengage the locating tabs from the radiator. 5. Remove the lower fan shroud from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower fan shroud in the vehicle. 1. Position the lower fan shroud against the radiator. 2. Engage the locating tabs by pushing down on the fan shroud. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1786 2. Install the upper fan shroud. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the upper fan shroud bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 4. Install the coolant recovery reservoir hose to the lower fan shroud. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1791 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1792 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Radiator: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1797 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1798 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1799 Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator Replacement (4.3L) ^ Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Reposition the coolant recovery hose clamp from radiator. 3. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir hose from the radiator. 4. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 5. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. 6. Remove the fan shroud. Refer to Fan Shroud Replacement. 7. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 8. Remove the radiator outlet hose from the radiator. 9. Remove the engine oil cooler lines from the radiator. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting. 10. Remove the transmission oil cooler lines from the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Line Quick Connect Fitting in Automatic Transmission - 4L60-E. 11. Remove the radiator. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1800 1. Important: Inspect the rubber mounts before installing the radiator. Install the radiator. 2. Install the transmission oil cooler lines to the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Line Quick Connect Fitting in Automatic Transmission - 4L60-E. 3. Install the engine oil cooler line to the radiator. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting. 4. Install the radiator outlet hose to the radiator. 5. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 6. Install fan shroud. Refer to Fan Shroud Replacement. 7. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. 8. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 9. Install the coolant recovery reservoir hose to the radiator. 10. Reposition the coolant recovery reservoir hose clamp to the radiator. 11. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet (4.3L) ^ Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Partially drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 3. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the radiator support. 4. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp from the radiator. 5. Reposition the radiator inlet hose from the radiator. 6. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp from the coolant outlet. 7. Reposition the radiator inlet hose from the coolant outlet. 8. Remove the radiator inlet hose. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator inlet hose to the coolant outlet. 2. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp to the coolant outlet. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 1805 3. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator. 4. Using the J 38185, reposition the radiator inlet hose clamp to the radiator. 5. Install the radiator inlet hose to the radiator support. 6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 8. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Hose Replacement - Inlet > Page 1806 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet Radiator Hose Replacement - Outlet (4.3L) ^ Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp from the radiator. 3. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp from the water pump. 4. Remove the radiator outlet hose. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator outlet hose. 2. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp to the water pump. 3. Using the J 38185 reposition the radiator outlet hose clamp to the radiator. 4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1812 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1813 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1814 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Temperature sticks can be used to determine a thermostat's operating range, by rubbing 87°C (188°F) and 97°C (206°F) sticks on the thermostat housing. ^ Use a tempilstick in order to find the opening and the closing temperatures of the coolant thermostat. J 24731-188 tempilstick melts at 87°C (188°F). The thermostat should begin to open. - J 24731-206 tempilstick melts at 97°C (206°F). The thermostat should be fully open. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1818 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Replacement (4.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Partially drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Outlet Resonator Replacement in Engine Controls - 4.3 L. 3. Remove the throttle body bracket nuts and reposition the bracket. 4. Remove the water outlet housing mounting bolts. 5. Remove the water outlet housing from the lower intake manifold and set aside. 6. Remove the gasket or O-ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1819 7. Remove the thermostat. 8. Clean all the sealing surfaces of the water outlet housing. 9. Clean the sealing surface on the lower intake manifold. Installation Procedure 1. Important: In order to prevent leakage, thoroughly clean all parts and sealing surfaces. Install the thermostat. 2. Install a new gasket or O-ring. 3. Install the water outlet housing to the lower intake manifold. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1820 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the water outlet housing mounting bolts. ^ Tighten water outlet housing mounting bolts to 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the throttle body bracket to the throttle body. 6. Install the throttle body bracket nuts. ^ Tighten the throttle body bracket nuts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 8. Inspect for coolant leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Outlet Stud ................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Water Pump Bolt .............................................. ........................................................................................................................................ 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1824 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement (4.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 2. Loosen the water pump pulley bolts. 3. Remove the cooling fan and clutch assembly. Refer to Fan Clutch Replacement. 4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in Engine Mechanical 4.3L. 5. Remove the water pump pulley mounting bolts. 6. Remove the water pump pulley. 7. Remove the radiator outlet hose clamp from the water pump. 8. Remove radiator outlet hose from the water pump. 9. Remove the water pump mounting bolts. 10. Remove the water pump from the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1825 11. Remove the water pump gaskets. 12. Clean the water pump gasket mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump gaskets. 2. Install the water pump to the engine. 3. Apply a sealer (GM P/N 12346004) to the bolt threads. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the water pump mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the mounting bolts to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1826 5. Install the radiator outlet hose to the water pump. 6. Install the water pump pulley. 7. Install the water pump pulley bolts. ^ Tighten the water pump pulley bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement in Engine Mechanical - 4.3L. 9. Install the fan clutch assembly. Refer to Fan Clutch Replacement. 10. Fill the radiator cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System. 11. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Bulletin No.: 06-06-01-010A Date: February 04, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Close-Coupled Converter and Engine Breakdown or Non-Function Due to Severe Overheat or Lack of Oil Causing Piston(s) Connecting Rod(s) Crankshaft Cylinder(s) and/or Head(s) Camshaft(s) Intake and/or Exhaust Valve(s) Main and/or Rod Bearing(s) Damage Models: 2004-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks with Close-Coupled Catalytic Converters Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-01-010 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Certain 2004-2008 General Motors products may be equipped with a new style of catalytic converter technically known as the close-coupled catalytic converter providing quick catalyst warm-up resulting in lower tail pipe emissions earlier in the vehicle operating cycle. If an engine breakdown or non-function were to occur (such as broken intake/exhaust valve or piston) debris may be deposited in the converter through engine exhaust ports. If the engine is non-functioning due to a severe overheat event damage to the ceramic "brick" internal to the catalytic converter may occur. This may result in ceramic debris being drawn into the engine through the cylinder head exhaust ports. If a replacement engine is installed in either of these instances the replacement engine may fail due to the debris being introduced into the combustion chambers when started. When replacing an engine for a breakdown or non-function an inspection of the catalytic converters and ALL transferred components (such as exhaust/ intake manifolds) should be performed. Any debris found should be removed. In cases of engine failure due to severe overheat dealers should also inspect each catalytic converter for signs of melting or cracking of the ceramic "brick". If damage is observed the converter should be replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1832 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Protective Goggles and Gloves Notice. Notice: Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Notice: Refer to OEM Standard Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission support. Refer to Transmission Support Replacement (RWD) or Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2). 3. Disconnect the LH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 4. Disconnect the RH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1833 5. Disconnect the post-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 6. Remove the muffler to the catalytic converter flange nuts. 7. Remove the muffler from the catalytic converter. 8. Remove the catalytic converter to exhaust manifold flange nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1834 9. Remove the catalytic converter from the rubber catalytic converter hangers. 10. Remove the catalytic converter and gaskets from the vehicle. 11. Remove the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the heated oxygen sensors (H02S) as necessary. 2. Install the catalytic converter and NEW gaskets to the vehicle. 3. Install the catalytic converter to the catalytic converter rubber hangers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precaution. 4. Install the catalytic converter to exhaust manifold flange nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1835 ^ Tighten the catalytic converter to exhaust manifold nuts to 53 Nm (39 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the muffler and NEW gasket to the catalytic converter. 6. Install the muffler to the catalytic converter flange nuts. ^ Tighten the muffler to the catalytic converter flange nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 7. Connect the post-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 8. Connect the RH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1836 9. Connect the LH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 10. Install the transmission support. Refer to Transmission Support Replacement (RWD) or Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2). 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Left & Right Bolt/Stud ^ First Pass ............................................................................................................................................. ...................................... 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) ^ Final Pass ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................... 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Protective Goggles and Gloves. Notice: Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Notice: Refer to OEM Standard Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the catalytic converter. 3. Remove the exhaust manifold pipe to manifold flange bolts. 4. Remove the exhaust manifold pipe and seal from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the exhaust manifold pipe and new seal to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the exhaust manifold pipe to manifold flange bolts. ^ Tighten the exhaust manifold pipe to manifold flange bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 3. install the catalytic converter. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Specifications Muffler: Specifications Catalytic Converter to Muffler Flange nuts (4.3L) ................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1846 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler Replacement (Utility 4.3L) Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Protective Goggles and Gloves Caution. Notice: Refer to Vehicle Lifting and Jacking notice. Notice: Refer to OEM Standard Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the catalytic converter to muffler flange nuts. 3. Disconnect the insulator from the tail pipe hanger. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1847 4. Disconnect the insulators from the muffler hanger (4-door utilities). 5. Disconnect the insulator from the muffler and tail pipe hanger. 6. Remove the muffler from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the muffler and NEW gasket to the vehicle. 2. Connect the insulator to the muffler and tail pipe hanger. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1848 3. Connect the insulators to the muffler hanger (4-door utilities). 4. Connect the insulator to the tail pipe hanger. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the muffler to catalytic converter flange nuts. ^ Tighten the muffler to catalytic converter flange nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Pipe Gasket > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe Gasket: Service and Repair Exhaust Seal Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Protective and Gloves. Notice: Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Notice: Refer to OEM Standard Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the exhaust manifold pipe to manifold flange bolts. 3. Remove the exhaust manifold pipe from the exhaust manifold 4. Remove and discard the seal. Installation Procedure 1. Install the exhaust manifold pipe and NEW seal to the exhaust manifold. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the exhaust manifold pipe to manifold flange bolts. ^ Tighten the exhaust manifold pipe to manifold flange bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Details, RH Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1861 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1862 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1863 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1864 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1865 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1866 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1867 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1868 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1869 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1870 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1871 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1872 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1873 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1874 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1875 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1876 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1877 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1878 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1879 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1880 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1881 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1882 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1883 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1884 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1885 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1886 Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1887 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 1888 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM control inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data received from other control modules connected to the class 2 serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link. The control module capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM message. The BCM controls these functions: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages and Console. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Automatic headlamp control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Keyless entry (AUO option)-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Passlock theft deterrent-Refer to Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Retained accessory power (RAP)-Refer to Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM receives 2 signals from the ignition switch. These are the Ignition 1 and Ignition 3 circuits. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals/circuits, either switch closed or switch open. - The status of the engine run flag (ERF). Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 1891 OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 1892 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with modules on the class 2 serial data line. The serial data line is the means by which the microprocessor-controlled modules in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the scan tool is connected to the class 2 serial data line through the DLC, the scan tool can be used to monitor each module for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 kbps. This value is an average, class 2 uses a variable pulse width modulation to carry data and depending on the message it may operate faster or slower. The bus will float at a nominal 7.0 volts during normal operation. Each module can pull this lower during the transmission. The bus is not at battery positive voltage or ground potential during normal operation. When the ignition switch is in RUN, each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1088. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector located below the instrument panel and close to the steering column. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and it is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 serial data signal at terminal 2 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data line on this vehicle is a star configuration. The following modules are attached to SP 201 and communicate on the class 2 serial data line: The body control module (BCM) - The driver information center (DIC), w/Trip - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The memory seat module (MSM) - driver, w/D44 - The powertrain control module (PCM) - The radio - The transfer case shift control module (TCSCM), w/NP8 DIAGNOSTIC ENABLE CIRCUIT W/NP1 The transfer case shift control module is equipped with the ability to store diagnostic information, which is useful to a technician in the event of module, component or wiring failures. This information can be retrieved from the transfer case shift control module (TCSCM) by way of flash codes, which are displayed on the 3 transfer case shift control switch buttons. These buttons are located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. For more information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Displaying in Transfer Case - NVG 233-NP1. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 1893 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) POWER MODE Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its limit. The body control module (BCM) turns OFF the RAP function and de-energizes the RAP relay when one of the following conditions are met: The BCM senses the opening of any door or the lift gate. - The ignition switch transitions from OFF to ON. - The BCM receives a message from its internal timer indicating the end of the RAP period after 10 minutes. - The BCM detects a decrease in battery capacity below a prescribed limit. The BCM monitors the ignition switch position, battery condition, and passenger compartment door status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. If the ignition switch transitions from ON to OFF, the battery voltage is within the acceptable range and the passenger compartment doors are closed, the body control module energizes the RAP relay. This provides power for the following: Driver information center (DIC) - Outside rearview mirror switch - Power door lock control switches - Power window control switches - Radio - Sunroof Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1896 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1897 Steps 1 - 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1898 Steps 11 - 14 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1899 Steps 1 - 12 Power Mode Mismatch POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Normal vehicle class 2 communications and module operations will not begin until the system power mode has been identified. Discrete wires from the ignition switch contacts are monitored by the power mode master (PMM) module in order to determine the correct power mode. The PMM communicates the system power mode to all class 2 modules on the class 2 serial data line. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation to identify which module is the PMM and the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1900 Steps 1 - 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1901 Steps 7 - 13 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 6. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 7. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 8. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1902 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS DATA Battery Voltage: The scan tool displays the battery voltage. RAP Timer: The scan tool displays the seconds left before the BCM turns the RAP relay OFF. The BCM uses this feature to allow the operation of the radio and the power windows for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes) after the ignition is turned OFF. After the time has elapsed or the door is opened the BCM will open the ground circuit for the RAP relay. INPUT 1 Driver Door Jamb Sw.: The scan tool displays the position of the driver door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the driver door is open. Ignition 1: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN or CRANK position. Ignition 3: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN position only. Ignition Power Mode: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays OFF, RUN, CRANK and UNKNOWN. The UNKNOWN display is when the BCM can not determine the position of the ignition switch. Key in Ignition: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition key in the ignition switch cylinder. The scan tool displays YES when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition switch cylinder. The BCM uses this data in controlling the operation of the reminder chime feature. Liftglass/Rear Gate: The scan tool displays position of the liftglass/rear gate. Psgr. Door Jamb/Door Handle Switches: The scan tool displays the position of the passenger door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the door is open. RAP Relay Feedback: The scan tool displays the state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM activates the RAP relay. OUTPUTS RAP Relay: The scan tool displays the commanded state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM provides ground to the RAP relay control circuit. The BCM will allow operation of the radio and the power windows with the ignition OFF and the doors closed for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes). MODULE INFORMATION 1 Manufacturers Enable Counter: The scan tool displays the actual value for the manufacturers enable counter (MEC) in the BCM. This information is for the assembly plant only. Software Design Suffix: The scan tool displays the version of the software part number in the BCM. Software Part Number: The scan tool displays the software identification number (ID) in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 2 RAP Calibration Number: The scan tool displays the RAP calibration part number in the BCM. RAP Suffix: The scan tool displays the RAP identification number in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 3 Module Part Number: The scan tool displays the part number assigned to the BCM that is currently in the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1903 Body Control Module (BCM) Scan Tool Output Controls Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: Programming the BCM - Programming Theft Deterrent System Components The procedures below are designed to setup the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. PROGRAMMING THE BCM IMPORTANT: After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Perform the BCM special function "Request BCM Info. for SPS," then connect the scan tool to the SPS terminal. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup. PROGRAMMING THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the Passlock system. - The engine will not crank or start. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1906 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The ignition switch should be in the OFF position when connecting or disconnecting the connectors to the body control module (BCM). Always disconnect the Brown BCM connector FIRST and connect the Brown BCM connector LAST. The BCM can set DTCs with the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the lower I/P sound insulator from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the BCM. 4. Bend the 2 snap retainers back slightly and pull the BCM from the bracket at an angle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM to the bracket at an angle under the wide hook retainer, with the label facing away from the bracket. 2. Apply pressure on the left side of the BCM in order to move the module toward the mounting bracket base. Snap the module into place. 3. Ensure that the module is fully seated. Ensure that both snap retainers are holding the module. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the BCM. Connect the brown connector LAST. 5. Install the lower I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 6. Install the left I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 7. Use the following components in order to program the BCM with the proper calibrations: - The Techline Terminal - The scan tool 8. Perform the BCM programming. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 9. Clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 1911 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 1912 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1913 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1916 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1917 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1918 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1919 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1920 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION POWERTRAIN The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The powertrain control module (PCM) is the control center of this system. The PCM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The PCM constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the PCM. The following are some of the functions that the PCM controls: The engine fueling - The ignition control (IC) - The knock sensor (KS) system - The evaporative emissions (EVAP) system - The secondary air injection (AIR) system (if equipped) - The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system - The automatic transmission functions - The generator - The A/C clutch control - The cooling fan control POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE FUNCTION The powertrain control module (PCM) constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs and controls systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. The input and output devices in the PCM include analog-to-digital converters, signal buffers, counters, and output drivers. The output drivers are electronic switches that complete a ground or voltage circuit when turned on. Most PCM controlled components are operated via output drivers. The PCM monitors these driver circuits for proper operation and, in most cases, can set a DTC corresponding to the controlled device if a problem is detected. MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 1923 - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. TRIP A trip is an interval of time during which the diagnostic test runs. A trip may consist of only a key cycle to power up the powertrain control module (PCM), allow the diagnostic to run, then cycle the key off to power down the PCM. A trip may also involve a PCM power up, meeting specific conditions to run the diagnostic test, then powering down the PCM. The definition of a trip depends upon the diagnostic. Some diagnostic tests run only once per trip (i.e., catalyst monitor) while other tests run continuously during each trip (i.e., misfire). WARM-UP CYCLE The powertrain control module (PCM) uses warm-up cycles to run some diagnostics and to clear any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). A warm-up cycle occurs when the engine coolant temperature increases 22°C (40°F) from the start-up temperature. The engine coolant must also achieve a minimum temperature of 71°C (160°F). The PCM counts the number of warm-up cycles in order to clear the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The PCM will clear the DTCs when 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a malfunction. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) The powertrain control module (PCM) is programmed with test routines that test the operation of the various systems the PCM controls. Some tests monitor internal PCM functions. Many tests are run continuously. Other tests run only under specific conditions, referred to as Conditions for Running the DTC. When the vehicle is operating within the conditions for running a particular test, the PCM monitors certain parameters and determines if the values are within an expected range. The parameters and values considered outside the range of normal operation are listed as Conditions for Setting the DTC. When the Conditions for Setting the DTC occur, the PCM executes the Action Taken When the DTC Sets. Some DTCs alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or a message. Other DTCs do not trigger a driver warning, but are stored in memory. The PCM also saves data and input parameters when most DTCs are set. This data is stored in the Freeze Frame and/or Failure Records. The DTCs are categorized by type. The DTC type is determined by the MIL operation and the manner in which the fault data is stored when a particular DTC fails. In some cases there may be exceptions to this structure. Therefore, when diagnosing the system it is important to read the Action Taken When the DTC Sets and the Conditions for Clearing the DTC in the supporting text. There are different types of DTCs and different actions taken when the DTCs set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions for a description of the general characteristics of each DTC type. DTC STATUS When the scan tool displays a DTC, the status of the DTC is also displayed. The following DTC statuses are indicated only when they apply to the DTC that is set. Fail This Ign. (Fail This Ignition): Indicates that this DTC failed during the present ignition cycle. Last Test Fail: Indicates that this DTC failed the last time the test ran. MIL Request: Indicates that this DTC is currently requesting the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). This selection will report type B DTCs only when they have requested the MIL (failed twice). Test Fail SCC (Test Failed Since Code Clear): Indicates that this DTC that has reported a failure since the last time DTCs were cleared. History: Indicates that the DTC is stored in the powertrain control module (PCM) History memory. Type B DTCs will not appear in History until they have requested the MIL (failed twice). History will be displayed for all type A DTCs and type B DTCs (which have requested the MIL) that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. Type C DTCs that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles will also appear in History. Not Run SCC (Not Run Since Code Clear): DTCs will be listed in this category if the diagnostic has not run since DTCs were last cleared. This status is not included with the DTC display since the DTC can not be set if the diagnostic has not run. This information is displayed when DTC Info is requested using the scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 1924 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Distributor Ignition (DI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1925 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT Service of the powertrain control module (PCM) should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for the PCM to be replaced, the PCM should be inspected first to see if the correct part is being used. NOTE: Turn the ignition OFF when installing or removing the PCM connectors and disconnecting or reconnecting the power to the PCM (battery cable, PCM pigtail, PCM fuse, jumper cables, etc.) in order to prevent internal PCM damage. IMPORTANT: Remove any debris from the PCM connector surfaces before servicing the PCM. Inspect the PCM module connector gaskets when diagnosing/replacing the PCM. Ensure that the gaskets are installed correctly. The gaskets prevent contaminant intrusion into the PCM. Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. NOTE: In order to prevent internal damage to the PCM, the ignition must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting the PCM connector. 2. Move the PCM retention bar and retainer away from the PCM. 3. Remove the PCM from the PCM mounting bracket. 4. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the replacement PCM from the packaging. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1926 2. Verify the service number in order to ensure the service number is the same number as the faulty PCM. 3. Connect the PCM electrical connectors. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the PCM electrical connectors screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 4. Slide the PCM retainer into the PCM bracket slots. 5. Pull the PCM retention bar into position. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Program the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1931 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1932 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION COIL AND ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1933 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair IGNITION CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Remove 2 screws (4) holding the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) to the bracket. 3. Remove the ignition control module and heat sink. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) on the bracket with the 2 screws (4). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1941 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1947 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1948 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1949 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1950 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1951 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1955 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1956 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1957 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1963 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1966 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1967 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 1968 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1972 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the Class 2 circuit to the instrument panel cluster (IPC). This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 7. Remove the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 8. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7) from under the fuel sender cover. 9. Remove the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 10. Squeeze the locking tangs and remove the fuel level sensor (3). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel level sensor (3). 2. Install the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 3. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7). 4. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 5. Connect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 6. Install the fuel sender assembly. 7. Install the fuel tank. 8. Refill the fuel tank. 9. Install the fuel filler cap. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. 11. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 1975 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Sender Assembly Replacement (Utility/Crew Cab) FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 1976 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1980 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. A high FTP sensor voltage indicates a low fuel tank pressure or vacuum. A low FTP sensor voltage indicates a high fuel tank pressure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1981 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) from fuel sender assembly (2) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) on the fuel sender assembly (2). 2. Connect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel tank. 4. Refill the fuel tank. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1985 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1986 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the IAT sensor by pulling straight out using a rotating motion. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the IAT sensor by gently pushing the sensor into the air cleaner outlet duct until seated. 2. Connect the IAT sensor harness connector. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1990 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1993 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1994 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1998 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1999 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Other than checking for a worn grommet and loose electrical connectors, the only service possible is a unit replacement if the diagnosis shows a malfunctioning manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAP sensor by pulling straight up with a slight rocking motion. NOTE: Do not rotate or pry on the MAP sensor when removing. Damage to the MAP sensor or the intake manifold may result. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet. 5. Discard the MAP sensor grommet. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new MAP sensor grommet on the MAP sensor. 2. Install the MAP sensor. 3. Connect the MAP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2003 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2009 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2010 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2013 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 2 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2014 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 2 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 2 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2020 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2021 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2025 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2026 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2027 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Component Views Manual Transmission (4.3L w/2WD) Manual Transmission (2WD) 1 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Transfer Case (4.3L M/T w/4WD) Transfer Case (4WD) 1 - Manual Transmission 2 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 3 - Transfer Case (4WD) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2032 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4L60-E / 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2033 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2034 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Connector End View Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2037 Vehicle Speed Sensor Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the vehicle speed sensor. 3. remove these parts: ^ The vehicle speed sensor ^ The O-ring seal Installation Procedure 1. Coat a new O-ring seal with a thin film of transmission oil. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install these parts: 1. The O-ring on the vehicle speed sensor assembly. 2. The vehicle speed sensor assembly. 3. Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2040 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2041 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the sensor. 4. Remove the bolt (2). 5. Using a twisting and pulling motion, remove the vehicle speed sensor (1) from the case. 6. Remove and discard the O-ring seal (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the new O-ring seal (3) on the vehicle speed sensor (1). 2. Coat the O-ring seal (3) with clean transmission fluid. 3. Install the vehicle speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. 6. Remove the drain pan. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2048 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2054 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2055 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2062 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2063 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2064 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2065 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2066 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2072 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2075 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2076 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2077 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2081 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2084 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2085 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................379-427 kPa (55-62 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2092 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2093 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. The electric fuel pump supplies fuel through an inline fuel filter to the fuel injection system. The pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. A separate pipe returns unused fuel to the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2094 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2095 Steps 8-13 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2096 Steps 14-20 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2097 Steps 21-23 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2107 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2113 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 2119 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 2120 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 2126 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 2127 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2128 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner cover wingnuts. 2. Remove the air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clear out any debris in the air cleaner housing. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the air cleaner element into the air cleaner housing. 2. Install the air cleaner cover. 3. Tighten the air cleaner cover wingnuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2134 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2135 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. .........................................................1,000 ohms per ft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2139 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires-Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2140 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wire at each spark plug. - Twist the boots 1/2 turn before removing the boots. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wire from each spark plug. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wire from the distributor. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wires from the distributor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires at the distributor. NOTE: If the boot to wire movement has occurred, the boot will give a false visual impression of being fully seated. Ensure that the boots have been properly assembled by pushing sideways on the installed boots. Failure to properly seat the terminal onto the spark plug will lead to wire core erosion and result in an engine misfire or crossfire condition, and possible internal damage to the engine. 2. Install the spark plug wire to each spark plug. 3. Inspect the wires for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. 3. Wire routings must be kept intact during service and followed exactly when wires have been disconnected or when replacement of the wires is necessary. Failure to route the wires properly can lead to radio ignition noise and cross firing of the plugs, or shorting of the leads to the ground. 4. Any time the spark plug wires or boots are installed on the spark plugs, new dielectric grease needs to be applied inside the boot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Description and Operation Distributor: Description and Operation DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The distributor ignition (DI) system is responsible for producing and controlling a high energy secondary spark. This spark is used to ignite the compressed air/fuel mixture at precisely the correct time. This provides optimal performance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions. This ignition system consists of a single ignition coil and ignition control module (ICM). Spark energy is delivered via a distributor cap, rotor, and secondary spark plug wires. The driver module within the ICM is commanded to operate the coil by the powertrain control module (PCM), that has complete control over spark timing. The DI system consists of the following components: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Ignition Coil And ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Secondary Ignition Components The distributor is only used as a means to operate the CMP sensor and to distribute spark in the correct sequence. Since the distributor has no influence on base timing the distributor is not adjustable on V6 engines. The distributor position can be adjusted on V8 engines because the chance of crossfire between terminals is greater due to the proximity of the terminals. The spark is distributed through conventional carbon core wires to the spark plugs. The plugs are tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Powertrain Control Module (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Modes Of Operation There is one normal mode of operation, with the spark under PCM control. If the CKP pulses are lost the engine will not run. The loss of a CMP signal may result in a longer crank time since the PCM cannot determine which stroke the pistons are on. Diagnostic trouble codes are available to accurately diagnose the ignition system with a scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Inspection DISTRIBUTOR INSPECTION 1. Inspect the cap for cracks, tiny holes or carbon tracks between the cap terminal traces. Diagnose the carbon tracks using the following procedure: 1. Remove the cap. 2. Place 1 lead from the DMM on a cap terminal. 3. Use the other lead in order to probe all other terminals and the center carbon ball. 4. Move the base lead to the next terminal. Probe all other leads. 5. Continue this procedure until you test all the secondary terminals. 6. If there are any non-infinite readings, replace the cap. IMPORTANT: Discoloration of the cap and some whitish build up around the cap terminals is normal. Yellowing of the rotor cap, darkening and some carbon build up under the rotor segment is normal. Replacement of the cap and the rotor is not necessary unless there is a driveability concern. 2. Inspect the cap for excess build-up of corrosion on the terminals. Scrape clean the terminals. Replace the cap if the corrosion is excessive. Some buildup is normal 3. Inspect the rotor segment for excess wear. Replace the rotor if excess looseness in the rotor segment is present. 4. Inspect the shaft for shaft-to-bushing looseness: 1. Inspect the housing for cracks or damage. 2. Insert the shaft in the housing. 3. If the shaft wobbles, replace the housing assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2146 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnosis DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system includes the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor, the camshaft position (CMP) sensor, the ignition coil with the ignition control module (ICM), the secondary wires, the spark plugs, and the circuit conductors and connectors. The powertrain control module (PCM) controls the ignition system. The PCM monitors the input signals from various engine sensors. The PCM controls the dwell of the ignition primary coil, computes the desired spark timing and firing of the ignition system via an ignition control (IC) timing control circuit to the ICM. The Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnostic Table assumes the following conditions: The battery is fully charged. - There is adequate fuel in the fuel tank. - The fuel delivery system is functional. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Engine mechanical conditions may prevent the distributor from rotating. Inspect the following if the distributor rotor does not rotate: A broken distributor drive shaft - A worn or broken distributor drive gear - A worn or broken camshaft timing chain and gears An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. If a repair is necessary. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2147 Steps 1-9 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2148 Steps 10-19 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2149 Steps 20-32 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2150 Steps 33-48 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2151 Steps 49-50 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. This step is testing for a CKP sensor signal to the PCM. 4. This step is testing for an internally shorted CMP sensor. 9. This step is testing for spark output at more than one spark plug wire. The J 26792 Spark Tester requires a minimum of 25,000 volts to operate. 10. This step determines if spark is being delivered to the distributor cap. 20. This test is testing if the PCM is providing a timing control signal to the ICM. 21. This test checks for a basic engine mechanical problem. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul DISTRIBUTOR OVERHAUL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (2). NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1). If not, replace the distributor. 3. Remove the two screws from the rotor. 4. Remove the rotor. 5. Note the locating holes that the rotor was removed from: - The rotor screw holes (1) - The rotor locator pin holes (2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2154 6. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel with the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 7. Remove the two screws that hold the CMP sensor. 8. Discard the screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. 10. Note the dimple located below the roll pin hole on one side of the gear. The dimple will be used to properly orient the gear onto the shaft during reassembly. 11. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 12. Drive out the roll pin with a suitable punch. 13. Remove the driven gear from the distributor shaft. 14. Remove the round washer. 15. Remove the tang washer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2155 16. Remove the shim washer (1). 17. Remove the old oil seal. ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel for the CMP sensor. NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Insert the sensor into the housing. 3. Install two new screws for the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2156 4. Identify the correct rotor mounting position: - At the rotor screw holes (1) - At the rotor locator pin holes (2) 5. Install the distributor rotor according to the index marks. 6. Install two rotor hold down screws. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 7. Install the shim washer (1) on the bottom of the distributor shaft. 8. Install the tang washer. 9. Install the round washer. 10. Install the driven gear according to the index marks. 11. Align the rotor segment as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). 12. Install the gear and align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2157 13. Check to see If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite the rotor segment when the driven gear is installed in the distributor. 14. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 15. Install the roll pin with a suitable punch and hammer in order to hold the driven gear in the correct position. 16. Install the new oil seal under the mounting flange of the distributor base. 17. Install the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2158 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement DISTRIBUTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: There are two procedures available to install the distributor. Use Installation Procedure 1 when the crankshaft has NOT been rotated from the original position. Use Installation Procedure 2 when any of the following components are removed: The intake manifold - The cylinder head - The camshaft - The timing chain or sprockets - The complete engine If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns on and DTC P1345 sets after installing the distributor, this indicates an incorrectly installed distributor. Engine damage or distributor damage may occur. Use Procedure 2 in order to install the distributor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the distributor cap. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the wire boot in order to remove the wire from the distributor cap. 4. Remove the electrical connector from the base of the distributor. 5. Remove the 2 screws that hold the distributor cap to the housing. 6. Discard the screws. 7. Remove the distributor cap from the housing. 8. Use a grease pencil in order to note the position of the rotor in relation to the distributor housing (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2159 9. Mark the distributor housing and the intake manifold with a grease pencil. 10. Remove the mounting clamp hold down bolt. 11. Remove the distributor. 12. As the distributor is being removed from the engine, watch the rotor move in a counter-clockwise direction about 42 degrees. This will appear as slightly more than 1 clock position. 13. Note the position of the rotor segment. 14. Place a second mark on the base of the distributor (2). This will aid in achieving proper rotor alignment during the distributor installation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 1. If installing a new distributor assembly, place 2 marks on the new distributor housing in the same location as the 2 marks on the original housing. 2. Remove the new distributor cap, if necessary. 3. Align the rotor with the second mark (2). 4. Guide the distributor into the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2160 5. Align the hole in the distributor hold-down base over the mounting hole in the intake manifold. 6. As the distributor is being installed, observe the rotor moving in a clockwise direction about 42 degrees. 7. Once the distributor is completely seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the mark on the distributor base (1). - If the rotor segment is not aligned with the number 1 mark, the driven gear teeth and the camshaft have meshed one or more teeth out of alignment. - In order to correct this condition, remove the distributor and reinstall the distributor. 8. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 9. Install the distributor cap. 10. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 11. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2161 12. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 13. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 14. Refer to installation procedure 2 if malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 1. Rotate the crankshaft balancer clockwise until the alignment marks on the crankshaft balancer are aligned with the tabs on the engine front cover and the number 1 piston is at top dead center of the compression stroke. IMPORTANT: Rotate the number 1 cylinder to TDC of the compression stroke. The engine front cover has 2 alignment tabs and the crankshaft balancer has 2 alignment marks (spaced 90 degrees apart) which are used for positioning number 1 piston at TDC. With the piston on the compression stroke and at top dead center, the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) must align with the engine front cover tab (2) and the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (4) must align with the engine front cover tab (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2162 2. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). 3. Installing the driven gear 180 degrees out of alignment, or locating the rotor in the wrong holes, will cause a no-start condition. Premature engine wear or damage may result. NOTE: The ignition system distributor driven gear and rotor may be installed in multiple positions. In order to avoid mistakes, mark the distributor on the following components in order to ensure the same mounting position upon reassembly: - The distributor driven gear - The distributor shaft - The rotor holes With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). - The alignment will not be exact. - If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite of the rotor segment when the gear is installed in the distributor. 4. Using a long screw driver, align the oil pump drive shaft to the drive tab of the distributor. 5. Guide the distributor into the engine. Ensure that the spark plug towers are perpendicular to the centerline of the engine. 6. Once the distributor is fully seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the pointer cast into the distributor base. - There may be a 6 cast into this pointer, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 6 cylinder engine or an 8, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 8 cylinder engine. - If the rotor segment does not come within a few degrees of the pointer, the gear mesh between the distributor and the camshaft may be off a tooth or more. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2163 - If this is the case, repeat the procedure again in order to achieve proper alignment. 7. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 8. Install the distributor cap. 9. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 10. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. 11. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 12. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 13. Repeat installation procedure 2 if the malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the MIL is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2167 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. AC R41-932 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2168 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE 1. Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. 2. Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION 1. Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. 2. Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. 3. Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2169 4. Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. 5. Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION 1. Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. 2. Carbon Fouled-Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures - Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. 3. Deposit Fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2170 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the spark plug wires. 2. Loosen each spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or air blast away any dirt from around the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs 1 at a time. Place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder numbers. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2171 1. Properly position each spark plug washer. 2. Inspect each spark plug gap. Adjust each plug as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.524 mm (0.060 in) 3. Hand start the spark plugs in the corresponding cylinders. 4. Tighten the spark plugs. - For used heads tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). - For new aluminum heads tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). - For new iron heads tighten the spark plugs to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the spark plug wires. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. ^ No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example: If the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2175 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Ensure that the vehicle batteries are in good condition, and fully charged. 2. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 3. Disconnect the positive ignition coil wire plug from the ignition coil. 4. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connector. 5. Remove all of the spark plugs. 6. Notice: Do not insert objects into the throttle plate opening. Damage to the throttle body can result, requiring replacement of the throttle body assembly. Block the throttle linkage wide open. 7. Install the engine cylinder compression gage to the cylinder being tested. 8. Using the vehicle starter motor, rotate, or crank the engine for 4 compression strokes, or puffs, for the cylinder being tested. If the engine rotates for more than 4 compression strokes, test the cylinder again. 9. Record the compression reading. 10. Remove the engine cylinder compression gage from the cylinder being tested. 11. Repeat steps 8-11 for each additional cylinder. All cylinders must be tested to obtain valid test results. 12. If any cylinders have low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 oz) of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole. 13. Repeat steps 8-11 for all low compression cylinders. 14. The minimum compression in any one cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any one cylinder is 1035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). Multiply the highest cylinder pressure by 70 percent, 1035 kPa x 70 percent = 725 kPa (150 psi x 70 percent = 105 psi), in order to determine the lowest allowable pressure in any other cylinder. ^ Normal The compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression. ^ Piston rings leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression builds up on the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. ^ Valves leaking Compression is low on the first compression stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. ^ Head gasket leaking Compression is low on the first stroke. The compression does not build up on the following strokes, and does not reach normal. Compression does not improve much, if at all, when you add oil. Adjacent cylinders have the same, or similar, low compression readings. 15. If one or more cylinders fails to meet the minimum specified compression, repair or replace all damaged or worn components and test the engine again. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2182 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2186 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2187 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the IAT sensor by pulling straight out using a rotating motion. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the IAT sensor by gently pushing the sensor into the air cleaner outlet duct until seated. 2. Connect the IAT sensor harness connector. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Details, RH Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2193 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2194 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2195 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2196 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2197 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2198 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2199 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2200 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2201 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2202 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2203 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2204 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2205 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2206 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2207 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2208 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2209 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2210 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2211 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2212 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2213 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2214 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2215 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2216 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2217 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2218 Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2219 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2220 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM control inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data received from other control modules connected to the class 2 serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link. The control module capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM message. The BCM controls these functions: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages and Console. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Automatic headlamp control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Keyless entry (AUO option)-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Passlock theft deterrent-Refer to Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Retained accessory power (RAP)-Refer to Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM receives 2 signals from the ignition switch. These are the Ignition 1 and Ignition 3 circuits. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals/circuits, either switch closed or switch open. - The status of the engine run flag (ERF). Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2223 OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2224 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with modules on the class 2 serial data line. The serial data line is the means by which the microprocessor-controlled modules in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the scan tool is connected to the class 2 serial data line through the DLC, the scan tool can be used to monitor each module for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 kbps. This value is an average, class 2 uses a variable pulse width modulation to carry data and depending on the message it may operate faster or slower. The bus will float at a nominal 7.0 volts during normal operation. Each module can pull this lower during the transmission. The bus is not at battery positive voltage or ground potential during normal operation. When the ignition switch is in RUN, each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1088. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector located below the instrument panel and close to the steering column. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and it is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 serial data signal at terminal 2 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data line on this vehicle is a star configuration. The following modules are attached to SP 201 and communicate on the class 2 serial data line: The body control module (BCM) - The driver information center (DIC), w/Trip - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The memory seat module (MSM) - driver, w/D44 - The powertrain control module (PCM) - The radio - The transfer case shift control module (TCSCM), w/NP8 DIAGNOSTIC ENABLE CIRCUIT W/NP1 The transfer case shift control module is equipped with the ability to store diagnostic information, which is useful to a technician in the event of module, component or wiring failures. This information can be retrieved from the transfer case shift control module (TCSCM) by way of flash codes, which are displayed on the 3 transfer case shift control switch buttons. These buttons are located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. For more information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Displaying in Transfer Case - NVG 233-NP1. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2225 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) POWER MODE Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its limit. The body control module (BCM) turns OFF the RAP function and de-energizes the RAP relay when one of the following conditions are met: The BCM senses the opening of any door or the lift gate. - The ignition switch transitions from OFF to ON. - The BCM receives a message from its internal timer indicating the end of the RAP period after 10 minutes. - The BCM detects a decrease in battery capacity below a prescribed limit. The BCM monitors the ignition switch position, battery condition, and passenger compartment door status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. If the ignition switch transitions from ON to OFF, the battery voltage is within the acceptable range and the passenger compartment doors are closed, the body control module energizes the RAP relay. This provides power for the following: Driver information center (DIC) - Outside rearview mirror switch - Power door lock control switches - Power window control switches - Radio - Sunroof Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2228 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2229 Steps 1 - 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2230 Steps 11 - 14 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2231 Steps 1 - 12 Power Mode Mismatch POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Normal vehicle class 2 communications and module operations will not begin until the system power mode has been identified. Discrete wires from the ignition switch contacts are monitored by the power mode master (PMM) module in order to determine the correct power mode. The PMM communicates the system power mode to all class 2 modules on the class 2 serial data line. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation to identify which module is the PMM and the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2232 Steps 1 - 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2233 Steps 7 - 13 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 6. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 7. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 8. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2234 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS DATA Battery Voltage: The scan tool displays the battery voltage. RAP Timer: The scan tool displays the seconds left before the BCM turns the RAP relay OFF. The BCM uses this feature to allow the operation of the radio and the power windows for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes) after the ignition is turned OFF. After the time has elapsed or the door is opened the BCM will open the ground circuit for the RAP relay. INPUT 1 Driver Door Jamb Sw.: The scan tool displays the position of the driver door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the driver door is open. Ignition 1: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN or CRANK position. Ignition 3: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN position only. Ignition Power Mode: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays OFF, RUN, CRANK and UNKNOWN. The UNKNOWN display is when the BCM can not determine the position of the ignition switch. Key in Ignition: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition key in the ignition switch cylinder. The scan tool displays YES when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition switch cylinder. The BCM uses this data in controlling the operation of the reminder chime feature. Liftglass/Rear Gate: The scan tool displays position of the liftglass/rear gate. Psgr. Door Jamb/Door Handle Switches: The scan tool displays the position of the passenger door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the door is open. RAP Relay Feedback: The scan tool displays the state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM activates the RAP relay. OUTPUTS RAP Relay: The scan tool displays the commanded state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM provides ground to the RAP relay control circuit. The BCM will allow operation of the radio and the power windows with the ignition OFF and the doors closed for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes). MODULE INFORMATION 1 Manufacturers Enable Counter: The scan tool displays the actual value for the manufacturers enable counter (MEC) in the BCM. This information is for the assembly plant only. Software Design Suffix: The scan tool displays the version of the software part number in the BCM. Software Part Number: The scan tool displays the software identification number (ID) in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 2 RAP Calibration Number: The scan tool displays the RAP calibration part number in the BCM. RAP Suffix: The scan tool displays the RAP identification number in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 3 Module Part Number: The scan tool displays the part number assigned to the BCM that is currently in the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2235 Body Control Module (BCM) Scan Tool Output Controls Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: Programming the BCM - Programming Theft Deterrent System Components The procedures below are designed to setup the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. PROGRAMMING THE BCM IMPORTANT: After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Perform the BCM special function "Request BCM Info. for SPS," then connect the scan tool to the SPS terminal. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup. PROGRAMMING THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the Passlock system. - The engine will not crank or start. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2238 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The ignition switch should be in the OFF position when connecting or disconnecting the connectors to the body control module (BCM). Always disconnect the Brown BCM connector FIRST and connect the Brown BCM connector LAST. The BCM can set DTCs with the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the lower I/P sound insulator from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the BCM. 4. Bend the 2 snap retainers back slightly and pull the BCM from the bracket at an angle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM to the bracket at an angle under the wide hook retainer, with the label facing away from the bracket. 2. Apply pressure on the left side of the BCM in order to move the module toward the mounting bracket base. Snap the module into place. 3. Ensure that the module is fully seated. Ensure that both snap retainers are holding the module. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the BCM. Connect the brown connector LAST. 5. Install the lower I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 6. Install the left I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 7. Use the following components in order to program the BCM with the proper calibrations: - The Techline Terminal - The scan tool 8. Perform the BCM programming. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 9. Clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2244 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2245 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2246 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2247 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2248 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2252 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2253 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2254 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2260 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2263 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2264 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2265 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Timing Ring > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Timing Ring: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Reluctor Ring Replacement ^ Tools Required J 5590 Crankshaft Gear Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine front cover. 2. Remove the crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Failure to properly align the crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring may result in component damage and effect OBD II system performance. Important: The reluctor ring is shaped like a dish. The dish must face the engine front cover. Failure to do so will damage the front cover and the reluctor ring. Install the crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring. 1. Align the keyway on the crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring with the crankshaft balancer key in the crankshaft. 2. Use the J 5590 in order to push the crankshaft position sensor reluctor ring onto the crankshaft until completely seated against the crankshaft sprocket. 2. Install the engine front cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Body Wiring Harness, DLC And RCDLR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2276 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2277 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2278 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2281 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2282 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2283 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2284 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2285 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION POWERTRAIN The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The powertrain control module (PCM) is the control center of this system. The PCM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The PCM constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the PCM. The following are some of the functions that the PCM controls: The engine fueling - The ignition control (IC) - The knock sensor (KS) system - The evaporative emissions (EVAP) system - The secondary air injection (AIR) system (if equipped) - The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system - The automatic transmission functions - The generator - The A/C clutch control - The cooling fan control POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE FUNCTION The powertrain control module (PCM) constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs and controls systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. The input and output devices in the PCM include analog-to-digital converters, signal buffers, counters, and output drivers. The output drivers are electronic switches that complete a ground or voltage circuit when turned on. Most PCM controlled components are operated via output drivers. The PCM monitors these driver circuits for proper operation and, in most cases, can set a DTC corresponding to the controlled device if a problem is detected. MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 2288 - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. TRIP A trip is an interval of time during which the diagnostic test runs. A trip may consist of only a key cycle to power up the powertrain control module (PCM), allow the diagnostic to run, then cycle the key off to power down the PCM. A trip may also involve a PCM power up, meeting specific conditions to run the diagnostic test, then powering down the PCM. The definition of a trip depends upon the diagnostic. Some diagnostic tests run only once per trip (i.e., catalyst monitor) while other tests run continuously during each trip (i.e., misfire). WARM-UP CYCLE The powertrain control module (PCM) uses warm-up cycles to run some diagnostics and to clear any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). A warm-up cycle occurs when the engine coolant temperature increases 22°C (40°F) from the start-up temperature. The engine coolant must also achieve a minimum temperature of 71°C (160°F). The PCM counts the number of warm-up cycles in order to clear the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The PCM will clear the DTCs when 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a malfunction. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) The powertrain control module (PCM) is programmed with test routines that test the operation of the various systems the PCM controls. Some tests monitor internal PCM functions. Many tests are run continuously. Other tests run only under specific conditions, referred to as Conditions for Running the DTC. When the vehicle is operating within the conditions for running a particular test, the PCM monitors certain parameters and determines if the values are within an expected range. The parameters and values considered outside the range of normal operation are listed as Conditions for Setting the DTC. When the Conditions for Setting the DTC occur, the PCM executes the Action Taken When the DTC Sets. Some DTCs alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or a message. Other DTCs do not trigger a driver warning, but are stored in memory. The PCM also saves data and input parameters when most DTCs are set. This data is stored in the Freeze Frame and/or Failure Records. The DTCs are categorized by type. The DTC type is determined by the MIL operation and the manner in which the fault data is stored when a particular DTC fails. In some cases there may be exceptions to this structure. Therefore, when diagnosing the system it is important to read the Action Taken When the DTC Sets and the Conditions for Clearing the DTC in the supporting text. There are different types of DTCs and different actions taken when the DTCs set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions for a description of the general characteristics of each DTC type. DTC STATUS When the scan tool displays a DTC, the status of the DTC is also displayed. The following DTC statuses are indicated only when they apply to the DTC that is set. Fail This Ign. (Fail This Ignition): Indicates that this DTC failed during the present ignition cycle. Last Test Fail: Indicates that this DTC failed the last time the test ran. MIL Request: Indicates that this DTC is currently requesting the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). This selection will report type B DTCs only when they have requested the MIL (failed twice). Test Fail SCC (Test Failed Since Code Clear): Indicates that this DTC that has reported a failure since the last time DTCs were cleared. History: Indicates that the DTC is stored in the powertrain control module (PCM) History memory. Type B DTCs will not appear in History until they have requested the MIL (failed twice). History will be displayed for all type A DTCs and type B DTCs (which have requested the MIL) that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. Type C DTCs that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles will also appear in History. Not Run SCC (Not Run Since Code Clear): DTCs will be listed in this category if the diagnostic has not run since DTCs were last cleared. This status is not included with the DTC display since the DTC can not be set if the diagnostic has not run. This information is displayed when DTC Info is requested using the scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 2289 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Distributor Ignition (DI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2290 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT Service of the powertrain control module (PCM) should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for the PCM to be replaced, the PCM should be inspected first to see if the correct part is being used. NOTE: Turn the ignition OFF when installing or removing the PCM connectors and disconnecting or reconnecting the power to the PCM (battery cable, PCM pigtail, PCM fuse, jumper cables, etc.) in order to prevent internal PCM damage. IMPORTANT: Remove any debris from the PCM connector surfaces before servicing the PCM. Inspect the PCM module connector gaskets when diagnosing/replacing the PCM. Ensure that the gaskets are installed correctly. The gaskets prevent contaminant intrusion into the PCM. Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. NOTE: In order to prevent internal damage to the PCM, the ignition must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting the PCM connector. 2. Move the PCM retention bar and retainer away from the PCM. 3. Remove the PCM from the PCM mounting bracket. 4. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the replacement PCM from the packaging. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2291 2. Verify the service number in order to ensure the service number is the same number as the faulty PCM. 3. Connect the PCM electrical connectors. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the PCM electrical connectors screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 4. Slide the PCM retainer into the PCM bracket slots. 5. Pull the PCM retention bar into position. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Program the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2295 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the Class 2 circuit to the instrument panel cluster (IPC). This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 7. Remove the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 8. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7) from under the fuel sender cover. 9. Remove the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 10. Squeeze the locking tangs and remove the fuel level sensor (3). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel level sensor (3). 2. Install the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 3. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7). 4. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 5. Connect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 6. Install the fuel sender assembly. 7. Install the fuel tank. 8. Refill the fuel tank. 9. Install the fuel filler cap. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. 11. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 2298 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Sender Assembly Replacement (Utility/Crew Cab) FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 2299 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2303 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. A high FTP sensor voltage indicates a low fuel tank pressure or vacuum. A low FTP sensor voltage indicates a high fuel tank pressure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2304 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) from fuel sender assembly (2) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) on the fuel sender assembly (2). 2. Connect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel tank. 4. Refill the fuel tank. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2308 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The engine idle speed is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve is on the throttle body. The IAC valve pintle moves in and out of an idle air passage bore to control air flow around the throttle plate. The IAC valve consists of a movable pintle, driven by a gear attached to an electric motor called a stepper motor. The stepper motor is capable of highly accurate rotation, or of movement, called steps. The stepper motor has 2 separate windings that are called coils. Each coil is supplied current by 2 circuits from the powertrain control module (PCM). When the PCM changes polarity of a coil, the stepper motor moves one step. The PCM uses a predetermined number of counts to determine the IAC pintle position. Observe IAC counts with a scan tool. The IAC counts will increment up or down as the PCM attempts to change the IAC valve pintle position. An IAC Reset will occur when the ignition key is turned OFF. First, the PCM will seat the IAC pintle in the idle air passage bore. Second, the PCM will retract the pintle a predetermined number of counts to allow for efficient engine start-up. If the engine idle speed is out of range for a calibrated period of time, an idle speed diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Inspect for the following conditions: High resistance in an IAC valve control circuit - The correct positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve, properly installed, and proper operation of the PCV valve - Proper operation and installation of all air intake components - Proper installation and operation of the mass air flow (MAF) sensor, if equipped - A tampered with or damaged throttle stop screw - A tampered with or damaged throttle plate, throttle shaft, throttle linkage, or cruise control linkage, if equipped - A skewed high throttle position (TP) sensor - Excessive deposits in the IAC passage or on the IAC pintle - Excessive deposits in the throttle bore or on the throttle plate - Vacuum leaks - A high or unstable idle condition could be caused by a non-IAC system condition that can not be overcome by the IAC valve. Refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the condition is determined to be intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2309 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2310 Steps 7-11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2311 Steps 12-19 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This test will determine the ability of the PCM and IAC valve control circuits to control the IAC valve. 7. This test will determine the ability of the PCM to provide the IAC control valve circuits with a ground. On a normally operating system, the test lamp should not flash while the IAC Counts are incrementing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2312 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet resonator. 3. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve harness connector. 4. Remove the IAC valve mounting screws. 5. Remove the IAC valve and O-ring from the throttle body assembly. CLEANING AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Clean the IAC valve O-ring sealing surface, pintle valve seat, and air passage. - Remove excess carbon deposits with a small amount of carburetor cleaner on a parts cleaning brush. Follow any instructions on the cleaner container regarding cleaner usage. - DO NOT use a cleaner containing an extremely powerful solvent such as methl ethyl ketone. - Shiny spots on the pintle and seat do not represent a bent or misaligned pintle shaft. - If heavy deposits are present in the air passage, remove the throttle body for a complete cleaning. 2. Replace the IAC valve O-ring. IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2313 1. On a new IAC valve, measure the distance between the IAC valve pintle and mounting flange. Use finger pressure to slowly retract the pintle if the distance is more than 28 mm (1-1/8 in). IMPORTANT: Use an identical part when installing a new idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve pintle shape and dimensions are designed for specific applications. 2. Lubricate the IAC valve O-ring with clean engine oil. 3. Align the flange holes with the mounting holes on the throttle body assembly. 4. Insert the IAC valve through the O-ring into the throttle body assembly. 5. Install the IAC valve mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the IAC valve are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2314 6. Connect the IAC valve harness connector. 7. Install the air cleaner outlet resonator. 8. Perform the IAC Reset procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF, for 5 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Start the engine and check for proper idle speed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2319 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2320 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2321 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2322 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2323 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2324 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2325 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2326 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2327 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2328 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2329 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2330 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2331 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2332 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2333 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2334 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2335 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2336 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2337 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2338 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2339 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2340 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2341 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2342 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2343 Data Link Connector (DLC) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH CLASS 2 DEVICE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Modules connected to the class 2 serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules. Connecting a scan tool to the data link connector (DLC) allows communication with the modules for diagnostic purposes. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS The engine will not start when there is a total loss of class 2 serial data communication while the ignition is OFF. The following conditions will cause a total loss of class 2 serial data communication: A class 2 serial data circuit shorted to ground. - A class 2 serial data circuit shorted to voltage. - An internal condition within a module or connector on the class 2 serial data circuit, that causes a short to voltage or ground to the class 2 serial data circuit. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device > Page 2346 Steps 1 - 11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device > Page 2347 Steps 12 - 19 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device > Page 2348 Steps 20 - 22 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. A partial malfunction in the class 2 serial data circuit uses a different procedure from a total malfunction of the class 2 serial data circuit. The following modules communicate on the class 2 serial data circuit: The body control module (BCM) - The driver information center (DIC), w/Trip - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The memory seat module (MSM) - driver, w/D44 - The powertrain control module (PCM) - The radio - The transfer case shift control module (TCSCM), w/NP8 3. The following DTCs may be retrieved with a history status, but are not the cause of the present condition. - U1300 - U1301 - U1305 6. A state of health DTC with a history status may be present along with a U1000 or U1255 code having a current status. This indicates that the malfunction occurred when the ignition was ON. 7. Data link connector terminals 2 and 5 provide the connection to the class 2 serial data circuit and the signal ground circuit respectively. 10. A poor connection at DLC terminal of the splice pack SP201 would cause this condition but will not set a DTC. 11. An open in the class 2 serial data circuit between the DLC and splice pack SP201 will prevent the scan tool from communicating with any module. This condition will not set a DTC. 12. The class 2 serial data circuit is shorted to voltage or ground. The condition may be due to the wiring or due to a malfunction in one of the modules. When testing the wire for a short, make sure there is not a module connected to the wire being tested. This test isolates the BCM class 2 serial data circuits. 13. There is a redundant class 2 serial data circuit between BCM and PCM. 16. The BCM detects that the ignition is ON and sends the appropriate power mode message to the other modules. Therefore, the BCM must remain connected to the DLC for any other module to communicate with the scan tool. This test isolates the rest of the splice pack SP201 serial data circuits. 20. If there are no current DTCs that begin with a "U", the communication malfunction has been repaired. 21. The communication malfunction may have prevented diagnosis of the customer complaint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Class 2 Device > Page 2349 Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Scan Tool Does Not Power Up SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some modules however, will not communicate unless the ignition is ON and the power mode master (PMM) module sends the appropriate power mode message. TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1 - 4 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. If the battery positive voltage and ground circuits of the DLC are functioning properly, the malfunction must be due to the scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2353 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2356 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2357 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ALWAYS ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS If the problem is intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1-6 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 2. This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 2362 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Inoperative MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INOPERATIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. There should be a steady MIL with the ignition ON and the engine OFF. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 2363 Steps 1-11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 2364 Steps 12-15 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2368 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2369 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Other than checking for a worn grommet and loose electrical connectors, the only service possible is a unit replacement if the diagnosis shows a malfunctioning manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAP sensor by pulling straight up with a slight rocking motion. NOTE: Do not rotate or pry on the MAP sensor when removing. Damage to the MAP sensor or the intake manifold may result. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet. 5. Discard the MAP sensor grommet. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new MAP sensor grommet on the MAP sensor. 2. Install the MAP sensor. 3. Connect the MAP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2373 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2379 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2380 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2383 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 2 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2384 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 2 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 2 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Details, RH Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2391 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2392 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2393 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2394 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2395 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2396 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2397 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2398 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2399 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2400 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2401 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2402 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2403 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2404 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2405 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2406 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2407 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2408 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2409 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2410 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2411 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2412 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2413 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2414 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2415 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2416 Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2417 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2418 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM control inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data received from other control modules connected to the class 2 serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link. The control module capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM message. The BCM controls these functions: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages and Console. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Automatic headlamp control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Keyless entry (AUO option)-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Passlock theft deterrent-Refer to Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Retained accessory power (RAP)-Refer to Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM receives 2 signals from the ignition switch. These are the Ignition 1 and Ignition 3 circuits. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals/circuits, either switch closed or switch open. - The status of the engine run flag (ERF). Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2421 OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2422 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with modules on the class 2 serial data line. The serial data line is the means by which the microprocessor-controlled modules in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the scan tool is connected to the class 2 serial data line through the DLC, the scan tool can be used to monitor each module for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 kbps. This value is an average, class 2 uses a variable pulse width modulation to carry data and depending on the message it may operate faster or slower. The bus will float at a nominal 7.0 volts during normal operation. Each module can pull this lower during the transmission. The bus is not at battery positive voltage or ground potential during normal operation. When the ignition switch is in RUN, each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1088. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector located below the instrument panel and close to the steering column. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and it is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 serial data signal at terminal 2 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data line on this vehicle is a star configuration. The following modules are attached to SP 201 and communicate on the class 2 serial data line: The body control module (BCM) - The driver information center (DIC), w/Trip - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The memory seat module (MSM) - driver, w/D44 - The powertrain control module (PCM) - The radio - The transfer case shift control module (TCSCM), w/NP8 DIAGNOSTIC ENABLE CIRCUIT W/NP1 The transfer case shift control module is equipped with the ability to store diagnostic information, which is useful to a technician in the event of module, component or wiring failures. This information can be retrieved from the transfer case shift control module (TCSCM) by way of flash codes, which are displayed on the 3 transfer case shift control switch buttons. These buttons are located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. For more information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Displaying in Transfer Case - NVG 233-NP1. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 2423 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) POWER MODE Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its limit. The body control module (BCM) turns OFF the RAP function and de-energizes the RAP relay when one of the following conditions are met: The BCM senses the opening of any door or the lift gate. - The ignition switch transitions from OFF to ON. - The BCM receives a message from its internal timer indicating the end of the RAP period after 10 minutes. - The BCM detects a decrease in battery capacity below a prescribed limit. The BCM monitors the ignition switch position, battery condition, and passenger compartment door status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. If the ignition switch transitions from ON to OFF, the battery voltage is within the acceptable range and the passenger compartment doors are closed, the body control module energizes the RAP relay. This provides power for the following: Driver information center (DIC) - Outside rearview mirror switch - Power door lock control switches - Power window control switches - Radio - Sunroof Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2426 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2427 Steps 1 - 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2428 Steps 11 - 14 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2429 Steps 1 - 12 Power Mode Mismatch POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Normal vehicle class 2 communications and module operations will not begin until the system power mode has been identified. Discrete wires from the ignition switch contacts are monitored by the power mode master (PMM) module in order to determine the correct power mode. The PMM communicates the system power mode to all class 2 modules on the class 2 serial data line. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation to identify which module is the PMM and the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2430 Steps 1 - 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2431 Steps 7 - 13 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 6. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 7. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 8. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2432 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS DATA Battery Voltage: The scan tool displays the battery voltage. RAP Timer: The scan tool displays the seconds left before the BCM turns the RAP relay OFF. The BCM uses this feature to allow the operation of the radio and the power windows for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes) after the ignition is turned OFF. After the time has elapsed or the door is opened the BCM will open the ground circuit for the RAP relay. INPUT 1 Driver Door Jamb Sw.: The scan tool displays the position of the driver door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the driver door is open. Ignition 1: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN or CRANK position. Ignition 3: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN position only. Ignition Power Mode: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays OFF, RUN, CRANK and UNKNOWN. The UNKNOWN display is when the BCM can not determine the position of the ignition switch. Key in Ignition: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition key in the ignition switch cylinder. The scan tool displays YES when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition switch cylinder. The BCM uses this data in controlling the operation of the reminder chime feature. Liftglass/Rear Gate: The scan tool displays position of the liftglass/rear gate. Psgr. Door Jamb/Door Handle Switches: The scan tool displays the position of the passenger door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the door is open. RAP Relay Feedback: The scan tool displays the state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM activates the RAP relay. OUTPUTS RAP Relay: The scan tool displays the commanded state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM provides ground to the RAP relay control circuit. The BCM will allow operation of the radio and the power windows with the ignition OFF and the doors closed for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes). MODULE INFORMATION 1 Manufacturers Enable Counter: The scan tool displays the actual value for the manufacturers enable counter (MEC) in the BCM. This information is for the assembly plant only. Software Design Suffix: The scan tool displays the version of the software part number in the BCM. Software Part Number: The scan tool displays the software identification number (ID) in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 2 RAP Calibration Number: The scan tool displays the RAP calibration part number in the BCM. RAP Suffix: The scan tool displays the RAP identification number in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 3 Module Part Number: The scan tool displays the part number assigned to the BCM that is currently in the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2433 Body Control Module (BCM) Scan Tool Output Controls Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: Programming the BCM - Programming Theft Deterrent System Components The procedures below are designed to setup the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. PROGRAMMING THE BCM IMPORTANT: After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Perform the BCM special function "Request BCM Info. for SPS," then connect the scan tool to the SPS terminal. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup. PROGRAMMING THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the Passlock system. - The engine will not crank or start. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2436 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The ignition switch should be in the OFF position when connecting or disconnecting the connectors to the body control module (BCM). Always disconnect the Brown BCM connector FIRST and connect the Brown BCM connector LAST. The BCM can set DTCs with the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the lower I/P sound insulator from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the BCM. 4. Bend the 2 snap retainers back slightly and pull the BCM from the bracket at an angle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM to the bracket at an angle under the wide hook retainer, with the label facing away from the bracket. 2. Apply pressure on the left side of the BCM in order to move the module toward the mounting bracket base. Snap the module into place. 3. Ensure that the module is fully seated. Ensure that both snap retainers are holding the module. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the BCM. Connect the brown connector LAST. 5. Install the lower I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 6. Install the left I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 7. Use the following components in order to program the BCM with the proper calibrations: - The Techline Terminal - The scan tool 8. Perform the BCM programming. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 9. Clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2441 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 2442 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2443 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2446 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2447 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2448 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2449 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2450 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DESCRIPTION POWERTRAIN The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The powertrain control module (PCM) is the control center of this system. The PCM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The PCM constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the PCM. The following are some of the functions that the PCM controls: The engine fueling - The ignition control (IC) - The knock sensor (KS) system - The evaporative emissions (EVAP) system - The secondary air injection (AIR) system (if equipped) - The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system - The automatic transmission functions - The generator - The A/C clutch control - The cooling fan control POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE FUNCTION The powertrain control module (PCM) constantly looks at the information from various sensors and other inputs and controls systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The PCM also performs diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The PCM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the PCM detects a malfunction, the PCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. The input and output devices in the PCM include analog-to-digital converters, signal buffers, counters, and output drivers. The output drivers are electronic switches that complete a ground or voltage circuit when turned on. Most PCM controlled components are operated via output drivers. The PCM monitors these driver circuits for proper operation and, in most cases, can set a DTC corresponding to the controlled device if a problem is detected. MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) OPERATION The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. - The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 2453 - The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. - The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. - When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. - When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. TRIP A trip is an interval of time during which the diagnostic test runs. A trip may consist of only a key cycle to power up the powertrain control module (PCM), allow the diagnostic to run, then cycle the key off to power down the PCM. A trip may also involve a PCM power up, meeting specific conditions to run the diagnostic test, then powering down the PCM. The definition of a trip depends upon the diagnostic. Some diagnostic tests run only once per trip (i.e., catalyst monitor) while other tests run continuously during each trip (i.e., misfire). WARM-UP CYCLE The powertrain control module (PCM) uses warm-up cycles to run some diagnostics and to clear any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). A warm-up cycle occurs when the engine coolant temperature increases 22°C (40°F) from the start-up temperature. The engine coolant must also achieve a minimum temperature of 71°C (160°F). The PCM counts the number of warm-up cycles in order to clear the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The PCM will clear the DTCs when 40 consecutive warm-up cycles occur without a malfunction. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) The powertrain control module (PCM) is programmed with test routines that test the operation of the various systems the PCM controls. Some tests monitor internal PCM functions. Many tests are run continuously. Other tests run only under specific conditions, referred to as Conditions for Running the DTC. When the vehicle is operating within the conditions for running a particular test, the PCM monitors certain parameters and determines if the values are within an expected range. The parameters and values considered outside the range of normal operation are listed as Conditions for Setting the DTC. When the Conditions for Setting the DTC occur, the PCM executes the Action Taken When the DTC Sets. Some DTCs alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or a message. Other DTCs do not trigger a driver warning, but are stored in memory. The PCM also saves data and input parameters when most DTCs are set. This data is stored in the Freeze Frame and/or Failure Records. The DTCs are categorized by type. The DTC type is determined by the MIL operation and the manner in which the fault data is stored when a particular DTC fails. In some cases there may be exceptions to this structure. Therefore, when diagnosing the system it is important to read the Action Taken When the DTC Sets and the Conditions for Clearing the DTC in the supporting text. There are different types of DTCs and different actions taken when the DTCs set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions for a description of the general characteristics of each DTC type. DTC STATUS When the scan tool displays a DTC, the status of the DTC is also displayed. The following DTC statuses are indicated only when they apply to the DTC that is set. Fail This Ign. (Fail This Ignition): Indicates that this DTC failed during the present ignition cycle. Last Test Fail: Indicates that this DTC failed the last time the test ran. MIL Request: Indicates that this DTC is currently requesting the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). This selection will report type B DTCs only when they have requested the MIL (failed twice). Test Fail SCC (Test Failed Since Code Clear): Indicates that this DTC that has reported a failure since the last time DTCs were cleared. History: Indicates that the DTC is stored in the powertrain control module (PCM) History memory. Type B DTCs will not appear in History until they have requested the MIL (failed twice). History will be displayed for all type A DTCs and type B DTCs (which have requested the MIL) that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles. Type C DTCs that have failed within the last 40 warm-up cycles will also appear in History. Not Run SCC (Not Run Since Code Clear): DTCs will be listed in this category if the diagnostic has not run since DTCs were last cleared. This status is not included with the DTC display since the DTC can not be set if the diagnostic has not run. This information is displayed when DTC Info is requested using the scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 2454 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Distributor Ignition (DI) System POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: - The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2455 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REPLACEMENT Service of the powertrain control module (PCM) should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for the PCM to be replaced, the PCM should be inspected first to see if the correct part is being used. NOTE: Turn the ignition OFF when installing or removing the PCM connectors and disconnecting or reconnecting the power to the PCM (battery cable, PCM pigtail, PCM fuse, jumper cables, etc.) in order to prevent internal PCM damage. IMPORTANT: Remove any debris from the PCM connector surfaces before servicing the PCM. Inspect the PCM module connector gaskets when diagnosing/replacing the PCM. Ensure that the gaskets are installed correctly. The gaskets prevent contaminant intrusion into the PCM. Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. NOTE: In order to prevent internal damage to the PCM, the ignition must be OFF when disconnecting or reconnecting the PCM connector. 2. Move the PCM retention bar and retainer away from the PCM. 3. Remove the PCM from the PCM mounting bracket. 4. Disconnect the PCM electrical connectors. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the replacement PCM from the packaging. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2456 2. Verify the service number in order to ensure the service number is the same number as the faulty PCM. 3. Connect the PCM electrical connectors. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the PCM electrical connectors screws to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 4. Slide the PCM retainer into the PCM bracket slots. 5. Pull the PCM retention bar into position. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Program the PCM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2463 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2469 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2470 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2471 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2472 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2473 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Left Side Of The Engine Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2477 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2478 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Loosen the wing nuts on the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Move the air intake assembly aside. 4. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Disconnect the ECT sensor harness connector. 6. Remove the ECT sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. - Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2479 1. Coat the threads (only) with GM P/N 12346004 sealer or equivalent. 2. Install the ECT sensor in the engine. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector. 4. Refill the cooling system. Refer to Draining and Filling Cooling System in Cooling System. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct assembly and tighten the wing nuts. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2485 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2488 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2489 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2490 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2494 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR The fuel level sensor consists of a float, a wire float arm, and a ceramic resistor card. The position of the float arm indicates the fuel level. The fuel level sensor contains a variable resistor which changes resistance in correspondence with the position of the float arm. The control module sends the fuel level information via the Class 2 circuit to the instrument panel cluster (IPC). This information is used for the IPC fuel gage and the low fuel warning indicator, if applicable. The control module also monitors the fuel level input for various diagnostics. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 7. Remove the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 8. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7) from under the fuel sender cover. 9. Remove the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 10. Squeeze the locking tangs and remove the fuel level sensor (3). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel level sensor (3). 2. Install the fuel level sensor retaining clip (4). 3. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector (7). 4. Connect the fuel level sensor electrical connector retaining clip (6). 5. Connect the fuel pump electrical connector (5). 6. Install the fuel sender assembly. 7. Install the fuel tank. 8. Refill the fuel tank. 9. Install the fuel filler cap. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. 11. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 2497 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Sender Assembly Replacement (Utility/Crew Cab) FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Replacement > Page 2498 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2502 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank and outside air pressure. The control module provides a 5-volt reference and a ground to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor provides a signal voltage back to the control module that can vary between 0.1-4.9 volts. A high FTP sensor voltage indicates a low fuel tank pressure or vacuum. A low FTP sensor voltage indicates a high fuel tank pressure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2503 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) from fuel sender assembly (2) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel tank pressure sensor (1) on the fuel sender assembly (2). 2. Connect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the fuel tank. 4. Refill the fuel tank. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2507 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2508 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the IAT sensor by pulling straight out using a rotating motion. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the IAT sensor by gently pushing the sensor into the air cleaner outlet duct until seated. 2. Connect the IAT sensor harness connector. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2512 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2515 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2516 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2520 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2521 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Other than checking for a worn grommet and loose electrical connectors, the only service possible is a unit replacement if the diagnosis shows a malfunctioning manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAP sensor by pulling straight up with a slight rocking motion. NOTE: Do not rotate or pry on the MAP sensor when removing. Damage to the MAP sensor or the intake manifold may result. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet. 5. Discard the MAP sensor grommet. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new MAP sensor grommet on the MAP sensor. 2. Install the MAP sensor. 3. Connect the MAP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Switch Socket Removal Procedure 1. Important: Clean the area around the sensor and Distributor before removal. Do not allow debris to enter the engine. Remove the distributor. 2. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor using the J 41712. 4. Important: Note the alignment of the engine oil pressure sensor fitting prior to removal. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the threads of the fitting and/or the engine oil pressure sensor. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2525 Install the engine oil pressure sensor fitting, if removed. ^ Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor fitting to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the engine oil pressure sensor. ^ Using the J 41712, tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the engine oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Install the distributor. 6. Check and adjust engine oil level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2531 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 1 Sensor 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2532 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Bank 2 Sensor 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2535 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 2 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 1 SENSOR 2 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 2536 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Replacement Bank 2 Sensor 1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) REPLACEMENT BANK 2 SENSOR 1 TOOLS REQUIRED J 39194-B Oxygen Sensor Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the connector (1) for the HO2S. NOTE: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Coat the threads of the oxygen sensor with anti-seize compound GM P/N 5613695, if necessary. IMPORTANT: A special anti-seize compound is used on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New, or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an engine and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before the reinstallation. 2. Install the HO2S (2) using a J 39194-B. NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the HO2S harness connector (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2542 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2543 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2547 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2548 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2549 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Component Views Manual Transmission (4.3L w/2WD) Manual Transmission (2WD) 1 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Transfer Case (4.3L M/T w/4WD) Transfer Case (4WD) 1 - Manual Transmission 2 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 3 - Transfer Case (4WD) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2554 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4L60-E / 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2555 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2556 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Connector End View Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2559 Vehicle Speed Sensor Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the vehicle speed sensor. 3. remove these parts: ^ The vehicle speed sensor ^ The O-ring seal Installation Procedure 1. Coat a new O-ring seal with a thin film of transmission oil. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install these parts: 1. The O-ring on the vehicle speed sensor assembly. 2. The vehicle speed sensor assembly. 3. Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2562 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2563 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the sensor. 4. Remove the bolt (2). 5. Using a twisting and pulling motion, remove the vehicle speed sensor (1) from the case. 6. Remove and discard the O-ring seal (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the new O-ring seal (3) on the vehicle speed sensor (1). 2. Coat the O-ring seal (3) with clean transmission fluid. 3. Install the vehicle speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. 6. Remove the drain pan. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2569 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2570 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2574 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2575 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2576 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Component Views Manual Transmission (4.3L w/2WD) Manual Transmission (2WD) 1 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Transfer Case (4.3L M/T w/4WD) Transfer Case (4WD) 1 - Manual Transmission 2 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 3 - Transfer Case (4WD) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2581 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4L60-E / 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2582 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2583 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams NV 3500 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Connector End View Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2586 Vehicle Speed Sensor Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NV 3500 Manual Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the vehicle speed sensor. 3. remove these parts: ^ The vehicle speed sensor ^ The O-ring seal Installation Procedure 1. Coat a new O-ring seal with a thin film of transmission oil. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install these parts: 1. The O-ring on the vehicle speed sensor assembly. 2. The vehicle speed sensor assembly. 3. Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2589 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV 3500 Manual Transmission > Page 2590 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the sensor. 4. Remove the bolt (2). 5. Using a twisting and pulling motion, remove the vehicle speed sensor (1) from the case. 6. Remove and discard the O-ring seal (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the new O-ring seal (3) on the vehicle speed sensor (1). 2. Coat the O-ring seal (3) with clean transmission fluid. 3. Install the vehicle speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the bolt (2). ^ Tighten the bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the wiring harness electrical connector to the vehicle speed sensor. 6. Remove the drain pan. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Precautions Bulletin No.: 06-06-01-010A Date: February 04, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Close-Coupled Converter and Engine Breakdown or Non-Function Due to Severe Overheat or Lack of Oil Causing Piston(s) Connecting Rod(s) Crankshaft Cylinder(s) and/or Head(s) Camshaft(s) Intake and/or Exhaust Valve(s) Main and/or Rod Bearing(s) Damage Models: 2004-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks with Close-Coupled Catalytic Converters Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-06-01-010 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Certain 2004-2008 General Motors products may be equipped with a new style of catalytic converter technically known as the close-coupled catalytic converter providing quick catalyst warm-up resulting in lower tail pipe emissions earlier in the vehicle operating cycle. If an engine breakdown or non-function were to occur (such as broken intake/exhaust valve or piston) debris may be deposited in the converter through engine exhaust ports. If the engine is non-functioning due to a severe overheat event damage to the ceramic "brick" internal to the catalytic converter may occur. This may result in ceramic debris being drawn into the engine through the cylinder head exhaust ports. If a replacement engine is installed in either of these instances the replacement engine may fail due to the debris being introduced into the combustion chambers when started. When replacing an engine for a breakdown or non-function an inspection of the catalytic converters and ALL transferred components (such as exhaust/ intake manifolds) should be performed. Any debris found should be removed. In cases of engine failure due to severe overheat dealers should also inspect each catalytic converter for signs of melting or cracking of the ceramic "brick". If damage is observed the converter should be replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2596 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Protective Goggles and Gloves Notice. Notice: Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Notice: Refer to OEM Standard Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission support. Refer to Transmission Support Replacement (RWD) or Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2). 3. Disconnect the LH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 4. Disconnect the RH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2597 5. Disconnect the post-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 6. Remove the muffler to the catalytic converter flange nuts. 7. Remove the muffler from the catalytic converter. 8. Remove the catalytic converter to exhaust manifold flange nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2598 9. Remove the catalytic converter from the rubber catalytic converter hangers. 10. Remove the catalytic converter and gaskets from the vehicle. 11. Remove the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the heated oxygen sensors (H02S) as necessary. 2. Install the catalytic converter and NEW gaskets to the vehicle. 3. Install the catalytic converter to the catalytic converter rubber hangers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precaution. 4. Install the catalytic converter to exhaust manifold flange nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2599 ^ Tighten the catalytic converter to exhaust manifold nuts to 53 Nm (39 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the muffler and NEW gasket to the catalytic converter. 6. Install the muffler to the catalytic converter flange nuts. ^ Tighten the muffler to the catalytic converter flange nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 7. Connect the post-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 8. Connect the RH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2600 9. Connect the LH pre-converter heated oxygen sensor (H02S) electrical connection. 10. Install the transmission support. Refer to Transmission Support Replacement (RWD) or Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2). 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2605 Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2606 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2607 Canister Purge Solenoid: Description and Operation EVAP PURGE SOLENOID VALVE The EVAP purge solenoid valve controls the flow of vapors from the EVAP system to the intake manifold. The purge solenoid valve opens when commanded ON by the control module. This normally closed valve is pulse width modulated (PWM) by the control module to precisely control the flow of fuel vapor to the engine. The valve will also be opened during some portions of the EVAP testing, allowing engine vacuum to enter the EVAP system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2608 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) purge pipe. 2. Disconnect the purge solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the purge solenoid mounting nuts. 4. Remove the engine wiring harness bracket from the mounting stud. 5. Remove the purge solenoid from the intake manifold. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2609 1. Install the purge solenoid to the intake manifold. 2. Install the engine wiring harness bracket to the mounting stud. 3. Install the purge solenoid mounting nuts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 4. Connect the purge solenoid electrical connector. 5. Connect the EVAP purge pipe. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid And Canister (4-door Utility And Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2614 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2615 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP VENT SOLENOID VALVE The EVAP vent solenoid valve controls fresh airflow into the EVAP canister. The valve is normally open. The control module commands the valve ON, closing the valve during some EVAP tests, allowing the system to be tested for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement (2-Door Utility) Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement (2-Door Utility) EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT (2-DOOR UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Lower the spare tire, underbody mounted spare tire only. 3. Remove the shield (2) from the fuel tank shield (3). 4. Disconnect the vent valve electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the vent hose (3). 6. Bend back the tang on the bracket. 7. Remove the vent valve (1) from the bracket (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the vent valve (1) onto the bracket (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2618 2. Connect the vent hose (3). 3. Connect the vent valve electrical connector. 4. Install the shield (2) to the fuel tank shield (3) with the retainers (1). 5. Raise the spare tire, underbody mounted spare tire only. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2619 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement (4-Door Utility) EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT (4-DOOR UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the spare tire, underbody mounted spare tire only. 4. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent valve harness connector. 5. Disconnect the vent hose (1) from the EVAP canister vent valve (2). 6. Release the tang on the vent bracket (4). 7. Remove the vent valve (2) from the bracket (4). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the vent valve (2) onto the bracket (4). 2. Test the EVAP canister vent valve retention to the vent bracket (4). 3. Connect the EVAP vent hose (1) to the EVAP canister vent valve (2). 4. Connect the EVAP canister vent valve harness connector. 5. Raise the spare tire, underbody mounted spare tire only. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) pipe from the EVAP canister purge valve. 2. Disconnect the EVAP (2) pipe from the EVAP front chassis pipe (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the EVAP pipe (2) to the EVAP front chassis pipe (1). 2. Connect the EVAP pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 2624 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Chassis/Canister EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS/CANISTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the rear evaporative emission (EVAP) pipe from the chassis EVAP pipe (1). 3. Remove the EVAP pipe from the retainers. 4. Cap the fuel and EVAP pipes in order to prevent possible fuel system contamination. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the caps from the fuel and EVAP pipes. 2. Connect the rear EVAP pipe to the chassis EVAP pipe (1). 3. Install the EVAP pipe into the retainers. 4. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 2625 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Canister/Fuel Tank EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CANISTER/FUEL TANK REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) vapor pipe from the fuel sender assembly. 3. Cap the fuel sender and EVAP vapor pipe in order to prevent contamination. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the caps from the fuel sender assembly and EVAP vapor pipe. 2. Connect the EVAP vapor pipe to the fuel sender assembly. 3. Install the fuel tank. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 2626 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine/Chassis EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) HOSES/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE/CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Disconnect the chassis evaporative emission (EVAP), fuel feed, and return pipes (1) at the engine compartment EVAP, fuel feed, and return pipes. 3. Remove the transmission. 4. Remove the EVAP/fuel pipe retainer clip (2) from the left cylinder head. 5. Disconnect the EVAP pipe (1). 6. Remove the EVAP pipe from the retainers. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, before connecting fuel pipe fittings, always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. 1. Install the new O-ring seals on the engine compartment EVAP, fuel feed, and the return pipes. 2. Connect the chassis EVAP, fuel feed, and return pipes (1) to the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 3. Install the EVAP and fuel pipes into the retainer clip (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine > Page 2627 4. Install the retainer clip bolt. Tighten the fuel pipe retainer clip bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 5. Connect the EVAP pipe (1). 6. Install the transmission. 7. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative System Service Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative System Service Port: Description and Operation EVAP SERVICE PORT The EVAP service port is located in the EVAP purge pipe between the EVAP purge solenoid valve and the EVAP canister. The service port is identified by a green colored cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Description and Operation Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation Crankcase Ventilation System Description General Description A crankcase ventilation system is used to consume crankcase vapors in the combustion process instead of venting them to the atmosphere. Fresh air from the intake system is supplied to the crankcase, mixed with blow by gases and then passed through a calibrated orifice into the intake manifold. Operation The primary control is through the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) orifice which meters the flow at a rate depending on inlet vacuum. The PCV orifice is an integral part of the valve cover. If abnormal operating conditions occur, the system is designed to allow excessive amounts of blow by gases to back flow through the crankcase vent into the intake system to be consumed by normal combustion. Results of Incorrect Operation A plugged orifice may cause the following conditions: ^ Rough idle ^ Stalling or slow idle speed ^ Oil leaks ^ Sludge in engine A leaking orifice may cause the following conditions: ^ Rough idle ^ Stalling ^ High idle speed Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2634 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection Crankcase Ventilation System Inspection/Diagnosis Results Of Incorrect Operation ^ A plugged positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) orifice or hose may cause the following conditions: ^ Rough idle ^ Stalling or slow idle speed ^ Oil leaks ^ Oil in air cleaner ^ Sludge in engine ^ A leaking PCV orifice or hose may cause the following conditions: ^ Rough idle ^ Stalling ^ High idle speed Functional Check With these systems, any blow-by in excess of the system capacity, from a badly worn engine, sustained heavy load, etc., is exhausted into the air cleaner and is drawn into the engine. Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system depends upon a sealed engine. If oil slugging or dilution is noted and the crankcase ventilation system is functioning properly, check the engine for a possible cause. Correct any problems. If an engine is idling rough, inspect for a clogged PCV orifice, a dirty vent filter, air cleaner element, or plugged hose. Replace as required. Use the following procedure: 1. Remove the PCV hose from the rocker arm cover. 2. Operate the engine at idle. 3. Place your thumb over the end of the hose in order to check for a vacuum. If there is no vacuum at the hose, inspect for the following items: ^ Plugged hoses ^ The manifold port 4. Turn OFF the engine. 5. Inspect the PCV orifice in the valve cover for debris or blockage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................379-427 kPa (55-62 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2641 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2642 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. The electric fuel pump supplies fuel through an inline fuel filter to the fuel injection system. The pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. A separate pipe returns unused fuel to the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2643 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2644 Steps 8-13 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2645 Steps 14-20 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2646 Steps 21-23 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2651 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2652 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROLS PEDAL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left closeout/insulator panel. 2. Lift upward on the accelerator pedal in order to relieve tension on the cable. 3. Remove the retainer from the pedal lever hole by compressing the tabs on the retainer. 4. Remove cable from the slot in the pedal lever (1). 5. Remove the accelerator pedal mounting nuts (2). 6. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The accelerator cable must not be kinked or damaged in any way during installation. Ensure that the mounting surface between the accelerator pedal assembly and the bulkhead is free of insulation. The carpet and padding in the pedal area must be positioned to lay flat and be free of wrinkles and bunches. Wire, hoses, cables, and other flexible components should not be within 13 mm (0.52 in) of the cable or lever, at any point in their travel. 1. Place the accelerator pedal assembly over the mounting studs and onto the mounting surface. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2656 2. Install the accelerator pedal mounting nuts (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the accelerator pedal mounting nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 3. Lift upward on the accelerator pedal. 4. Insert the cable through the pedal lever slot. 5. Press the retainer into the lever hole until fully seated. 6. Check the accelerator pedal for free movement by depressing and releasing the pedal several times. IMPORTANT: The pedal must operate freely without binding through the full range of pedal movement. 7. Install the left closeout/insulator panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2666 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2672 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2673 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner cover wingnuts. 2. Remove the air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner element. 4. Clear out any debris in the air cleaner housing. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the air cleaner element into the air cleaner housing. 2. Install the air cleaner cover. 3. Tighten the air cleaner cover wingnuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2679 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2684 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2685 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2686 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2687 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2688 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Precautions Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-035C Date: July 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Usage of E85 Fuels in GM Vehicles Models: 1997-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 1997-2008 Isuzu NPR Commercial Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year and additional engines with E85 capability. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-035B (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Customer Interest in E85 Fuel As the retail price of gasoline increases, some locations in the country are seeing price differentials between regular gasoline and E85 where E85 is selling for substantially less than regular grade gasoline. One result of this is that some customers have inquired if they are able to use E85 fuel in non-E85 compatible vehicles. Only vehicles designated for use with E85 should use E85 blended fuel. E85 compatibility is designated for vehicles that are certified to run on up to 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. All other gasoline engines are designed to run on fuel that contains no more than 10% ethanol. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Using E85 Fuels in Non-Compatible Vehicles General Motors is aware of an increased number of cases where customers have fueled non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85. Fueling non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85, or with fuels where the concentration of ethanol exceeds the ASTM specification of 10%, will result in one or more of the following conditions: Lean Driveability concerns such as hesitations, sags and/or possible stalling. SES lights due to OBD codes. Fuel Trim codes P0171 and/or P0174. Misfire codes (P0300). Various 02 sensor codes. Disabled traction control or Stability System disabled messages. Harsh/Firm transmission shifts. Fuel system and/or engine mechanical component degradation. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. If the dealer suspects that a non-FlexFuel designated vehicle brought in for service has been fueled with E85, the fuel in the vehicle's tank should be checked for alcohol content with tool J 44175. If the alcohol content exceeds 10% the fuel should be drained and the vehicle refilled with gasoline - preferably one of the Top Tier brands. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2689 Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. A complete list of GM's FlexFuel vehicles can be found in this Service Bulletin, or at www.livegreengoyellow.com. E85 Compatible Vehicles The only E85 compatible vehicles produced by General Motors are shown. Only vehicles that are listed in the E85 Compatible Vehicles section of this bulletin and/or www.livegreengoyellow.com are E85 compatible. All other gasoline and diesel engines are NOT E85 compatible. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2690 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Refueling Station Information Bulletin No.: 06-06-04-030 Date: May 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Locations of E85 Refueling Stations and Expanded E85 Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Equipped for Flexible Fuel (E85) Attention: U.S. dealers - This bulletin should be directed to the Sales Manager as well as the Service Manager. Copies of this bulletin may be given to customers purchasing or considering the purchase of E85 capable vehicles, and may be left or posted in customer waiting areas. Canadian dealers - This bulletin is intended for the U.S. Market and provides only limited information relevant to the Canadian market. Customer Questions, Concerns and Refueling Locations for E85 Fuel Extensive information on E85 Ethanol based fuels can be found at www.livegreengoyellow.com . This General Motors site contains vital information that anticipates and answers customer questions and concerns about E85 fuel. Part of the information is a useful link that provides the location nationally of all E85 refueling stations. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 2691 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Top Tier Detergent Gasoline Information Bulletin No.: 04-06-00-047 Date: June 24, 2004 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Top Tier Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) Models: 2005 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks (U.S. Only) A new class of gasoline, called Top Tier Detergent Gasoline, will be appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by four automotive companies. A description of the concept and benefits of Top Tier is provided in the following question and answer section. What is Top Tier Detergent Gasoline? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by four automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Who developed Top Tier Detergent Gasoline standards? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by four automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda and Toyota. Why was Top Tier Detergent Gasoline developed? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet Top Tier Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, Top Tier was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the four automotive companies join together to develop Top Tier? All four corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline? Top Tier Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using Top Tier Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Where can Top Tier Detergent Gasoline be purchased? The Top Tier program began on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and are making plans to introduce Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, a list of all fuel marketers meeting Top Tier standards will be made available. For now, look for the "Top Tier" designation at the gas pump. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2692 Fuel: Specifications GASOLINE OCTANE Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. ADDITIVES To provide cleaner air, all gasoline in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to your fuel. Gasoline containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasoline may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasoline, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don't use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't be covered under your warranty. Some gasoline that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasoline. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. CALIFORNIA FUEL If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp ) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > With Special Tool Fuel: Testing and Inspection With Special Tool ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS (WITH SPECIAL TOOL) DESCRIPTION Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector at the lowest point in the fuel injection system, and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust or deterioration. Ethanol concentrations of greater than 10 percent can cause driveability conditions and fuel system deterioration. Fuel with more than 10 percent ethanol could result in driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling , or no start. Excessive concentrations of ethanol used in vehicles not designed for it may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and fuel filter restriction. TEST PROCEDURE 1. Test the fuel composition using J 44175 Fuel Composition Tester and J44175-3 Instruction Manual. 2. If water appears in the fuel sample, perform the following steps: 1. Clean the fuel system. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. 2. Replace the fuel filter. Fuel Composition Test Examples 3. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM in order to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample. Refer to the examples in the Fuel Composition Test Examples table. 4. If the fuel sample contains more than 15 percent ethanol, add fresh, regular gasoline to the vehicle's fuel tank. 5. Test the fuel composition. 6. If testing shows the ethanol percentage is still more than 15 percent, replace the fuel in the vehicle. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > With Special Tool > Page 2695 Fuel: Testing and Inspection Without Special Tool ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT SPECIAL TOOL) TEST DESCRIPTION Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector at the lowest point in the fuel injection system and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust or deterioration. Ethanol concentrations of greater than 10 percent can cause driveability conditions and fuel system deterioration. Fuel with more than 10 percent ethanol could result in driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. Excessive concentrations of ethanol used in vehicles not designed for it may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and fuel filter restriction. ALCOHOL IN FUEL TESTING PROCEDURE The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If alcohol contamination is suspected then use the following procedure to test the fuel quality. 1. Using a 100 ml (3.38 oz) specified cylinder with 1 ml (0.034 oz) graduation marks, fill the cylinder with fuel to the 90 ml (3.04 oz) mark. 2. Add 10 ml (0.34 oz) of water in order to bring the total fluid volume to 100 ml (3.38 oz) and install a stopper. 3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10-15 seconds. 4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure. 5. Re-install the stopper and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10-15 seconds. 6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the fuel, the volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and water, will be more than 10 ml (0.34 oz). For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml (0.51 oz), this indicates at least 5 percent alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel. PARTICULATE CONTAMINANTS IN FUEL TESTING PROCEDURE The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the bottom of the sample, use the following procedure to diagnose the fuel. 1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter (0.53 qt) of fuel. 2. Place the container on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow settling of the particulate contamination. Particulate contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles. 3. Observe the fuel sample. If any physical contaminants or water are present, clean the fuel system. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation FUEL FILLER CAP NOTE: If a fuel tank filler cap requires replacement, use only a fuel tank filler cap with the same features. Failure to use the correct fuel tank filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel and EVAP system. The fuel fill pipe has a tethered fuel filler cap. A torque-limiting device prevents the cap from being over-tightened. To install the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear audible clicks. This indicates that the cap is correctly torqued and fully seated. A fuel filler cap that is not fully seated may cause a malfunction in the emission system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2704 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2705 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable in order to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt is made to start the engine. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Loosen the fuel filler cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Connect the J 34730-1A or the equivalent to the fuel pressure connection. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fitting while connecting the gage in order to avoid spillage. 6. Install the bleed hose of the gage into an approved container. 7. Open the valve on the gage in order to bleed the system pressure. The fuel connections are now safe for servicing. 8. Drain any fuel remaining in the gage into an approved container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: Customer Interest Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2714 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2715 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2716 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2717 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2723 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2724 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2725 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 2726 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 04-06-04-051B > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-051B Date: January 04, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Maintenance Cleaning of Fuel Injectors Models: 2006 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the name and part number of GM Fuel System Treatment. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-051A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools, equipment and programs to support fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. General Motors does not endorse, support or acknowledge the need for fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. Fuel injector cleaning is approved only when performed as directed by a published GM driveability or DTC diagnostic service procedure. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, the only preventative maintenance currently endorsed by GM regarding its gasoline engine fuel systems is the addition of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, P/N 88861011 (for U.S. ACDelco(R), use P/N 88861013) (in Canada, P/N 88861012), added to a tank of fuel at each oil change. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030A for proper cleaning instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 04-06-04-051B > Jan > 06 > Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Injector Maintenance Cleaning Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-051B Date: January 04, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Maintenance Cleaning of Fuel Injectors Models: 2006 and Prior All General Motors Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the name and part number of GM Fuel System Treatment. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-051A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools, equipment and programs to support fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. General Motors does not endorse, support or acknowledge the need for fuel injector cleaning as a preventative maintenance procedure. Fuel injector cleaning is approved only when performed as directed by a published GM driveability or DTC diagnostic service procedure. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, the only preventative maintenance currently endorsed by GM regarding its gasoline engine fuel systems is the addition of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, P/N 88861011 (for U.S. ACDelco(R), use P/N 88861013) (in Canada, P/N 88861012), added to a tank of fuel at each oil change. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030A for proper cleaning instructions. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Central Sequential Fuel Injection (Central SFI) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2738 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation FUEL INJECTORS The Multec 2 fuel injector assembly is a solenoid device controlled by the control module that meters pressurized fuel to a single engine cylinder. The control module energizes the high-impedance, 12 ohms, injector solenoid to open a normally closed ball valve. This allows fuel to flow into the top of the injector, past the ball valve, and through a director plate at the injector outlet. The director plate has four machined holes that control the fuel flow, generating a spray of finely atomized fuel at the injector tip. Fuel from the injector tip is directed at the intake valve, causing the fuel to become further atomized and vaporized before entering the combustion chamber. This fine atomization improves fuel economy and emissions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Coil Test FUEL INJECTOR COIL TEST CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The control module enables the appropriate fuel injector pulse for each cylinder. Ignition voltage is supplied directly to the fuel injectors. The control module controls each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit via a solid state device called a driver. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or too low will affect engine driveability. A fuel injector control circuit DTC may not set, but a misfire may be apparent. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS - Monitoring the misfire current counters, or misfire graph, may help to isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. - Operating the vehicle over a wide temperature range may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. - Perform the fuel injector coil test within the conditions of the customer's concern. A fuel injector condition may only be apparent at a certain temperature, or under certain conditions. TEST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2741 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2742 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Balance Test With special Tool FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST WITH SPECIAL TOOL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The scan tool is first used to energize the fuel pump relay. The fuel injector tester is then used to pulse each injector for a precise amount of time, allowing a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This causes a drop in system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. Fuel Injector Balance Test Example (Actual Results May Vary) TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2743 Steps 1-5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2744 Steps 6-8 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 3. The engine coolant temperature (ECT) must be below the operating temperature in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2745 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2 FUEL INJECTOR BALANCE TEST WITH TECH 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The scan tool is first used to energize the fuel pump relay. The scan tool is then used to pulse each injector for a precise amount of time allowing a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This causes a drop in system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. Fuel Injector Balance Test Example (Actual Results May Vary) TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2746 Steps 1-5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Coil Test > Page 2747 Steps 6-8 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 3. The engine coolant temperature (ECT) must be below the operating temperature in order to avoid irregular fuel pressure readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure FUEL INJECTOR CLEANING PROCEDURE TOOLS REQUIRED - J 44466-12 CSFI Fuel Metering Body Jumper Block - J 44466-13 Screws - J 44466-11 IAFM Fuel Transfer Tube Recycling Block - J 41413 EVAP Pressure and Purge Station - J 44466-10 Regulator and Hose Assembly - J 39021 Fuel Injector Coil and Balance Tester - J 39021-210 Injector Tester Adapter Box - J 39021-301 V6 Fuel Injector Test Adapter - J 38500-A Fuel Injector Cleaner 1. Loosen the fuel fill cap to relieve vapor pressure in the fuel tank. 2. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) clean air tube from air inlet duct and set aside. 3. Remove the resonator and air inlet duct from throttle body. 4. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose and connector from intake manifold. 5. Remove the electrical connector from the central sequential fuel injection (CSFI) fuel metering body. 6. Remove the spark plug wires from 1, 3 and 5 from the distributor cap. 7. Remove the fuel line bolt (4) at the rear of intake manifold. 8. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 9. Remove the nuts (1) and clamp (2) from the fuel pipe. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2750 10. Remove fuel pipes from the metering body. 11. Install the J 44466-12 (2) and the J 44466-13 (1) to the metering body and tighten. IMPORTANT: Make sure that the fuel pipe O-rings, washers, and spacers are present and in their proper position. 12. Install the J 44466-11 (4) , clamp (2) and J 44466-13 (1) to the fuel pipe and tighten. 13. Obtain the J 41413 , close the valve (2) on the tank (3), and remove the regulator assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2751 14. Install the J 44466-10 (5) to the J 41413 tank (3) 15. Connect the J 44466-10 hose (1) to the J 44466-12 (3). 16. Install the J 39021 , the J 39021-210 and J 39021-301 (4) to the metering body electrical connector. 17. Adjust the amperage selector switch on J 39021 to 0.5 amps. 18. Open the valve (2) on the tank (3). 19. Open the valve (4) on the J 44466-10 to pressurize the fuel system. Then close valve (4) before firing injectors. IMPORTANT: The minimum pressure required on the gage (6) is 150 psi. If 150 psi is not obtained, the tank (3) must be refilled prior to performing this procedure. 20. Fire one injector using the J 39021. Observe a pressure drop on the gage (6) and verify the injector/poppet valve operation. An injector/poppet that is stuck and not operational will have no pressure drop on the gage. If an injector remains stuck, repeat the procedure multiple times (as required) until the injector is operational. 21. Repeat steps 19 and 20 for each individual injector to verify that all injector/poppet valve assemblies are unstuck and functional. 22. Shut off the pressure valve (2) on the tank (3) of the J 41413. 23. Bleed off the pressure at the J 44466-10. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2752 24. Install the PCV fresh air tube to the air inlet duct. 25. Disconnect and remove the J 44466-10 (1) from the J 44466-12 (3) and the J 41413. 26. Remove the J 39021-301 , J 39021-210 and J 39021 from the metering body. 27. Install the vehicle electrical connector to the metering body. 28. Install brake booster vacuum hose and connector to the intake manifold. 29. Install ignition wires 1, 3, and 5 to the distributor cap. 30. Install the resonator and air intake duct to the throttle body and hand tighten wing nut. 31. Obtain J 38500-A (2). IMPORTANT: Make sure the valve at the bottom of the canister (3) is closed. 32. Remove the canister top and add top engine cleaner GM P/N 1050002 (Canadian P/N 992872) to the canister. 33. Fill the remainder of the canister with regular unleaded gasoline and install the canister top. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2753 34. Suspend J 38500-A from a convenient underhood location. 35. Connect the hose from J 38500-A (1) to the service port on the J 44466-12 (3). 36. Open valve (3) at the bottom of J 38500-A. 37. Connect a shop air source to the fitting at the top of J 38500-A and adjust the regulator (1) to 75 psi. 38. Let the vehicle run at idle until the canister is empty and the vehicle stalls. 39. Remove the shop air supply from J 38500-A. 40. Depressurize the J 38500-A. 41. Disconnect the J 38500-A hose from the J 44466-12. 42. Remove the PCV clean air tube from the air inlet duct and set aside. 43. Remove the resonator and air inlet duct from the throttle body and set aside. 44. Remove ignition wires 1, 3, and 5 from the distributor cap. 45. Remove brake booster vacuum hose and connector from the intake manifold. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2754 46. Bleed the residual pressure from J 44466-12. 47. Remove J 44466-13 (1) and J 44466-12 (2) from the metering body. 48. Remove J 44466-13 (1), clamp (2) and J 44466-11 (4) from the fuel pipe (3). 49. Install the fuel pipe (3) to the metering body. IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the O-rings (6 and 8), washers (7), and spacers (5) are present and in proper position. 50. Install the clamp (2) and nuts (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts to 3 N.m (27 lb ft). 51. Apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489), or equivalent to the threads of the fuel pipe bolt (4). 52. Install the fuel pipe bolt. Tighten the bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2755 53. Install the brake booster vacuum hose and connector to the intake manifold. 54. Install the resonator and air inlet duct to the throttle body. 55. Install the PCV clean air tube to the inlet duct. 56. Install brake booster vacuum hose and connector to the intake manifold. 57. Install ignition wires 1, 3, and 5 to the distributor cap. 58. Add 1 ounce of port fuel injector cleaner GM P/N 12345104 (Canadian P/N 12345515), or equivalent to the vehicle fuel tank for each gallon of gasoline estimated to be in the tank. IMPORTANT: Instruct the customer to add the remainder of the bottle of port fuel injector cleaner to the vehicle fuel tank at the next fill up. 59. Hand tighten the fuel tank filler cap. 60. Start the vehicle and check for fuel leaks. 61. Using a Tech II scan tool, check for any stored Powertrain DTC codes. Clear codes as required. 62. Disconnect Tech II scan tool. IMPORTANT: Advise the customer to change brands of fuel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2756 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector Replacement FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The engine oil may be contaminated with fuel if the fuel injectors are leaking. 1. Remove the fuel meter body. 2. Remove the injector retainer lock nuts (4) and retainer (2). 3. While pulling the fuel injector downward, push with a small tip punch down between the injector terminals until the injector is removed. NOTE: Use care in removing the fuel injectors to prevent damage to the electrical connector terminals. The fuel injector is serviced as a complete assembly only. Also since the injectors are electrical components, these injectors should not be immersed in any type of liquid solvent or cleaner as damage may occur. Fuel injector cleaning is not recommended. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When ordering new fuel injectors, be sure to order the correct injector for the application being serviced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector Cleaning Procedure > Page 2757 1. Lubricate the NEW injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil. 2. Install the fuel injector (3) into the fuel meter body injector socket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the retainer (4) and the injector retainer lock nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 4. Install the fuel meter body. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS Quick-connect fittings provide a simplified means of installing and connecting fuel system components. The fittings consist of a unique female connector and a compatible male pipe end. O-rings, located inside the female connector, provide the fuel seal. Integral locking tabs inside the female connector hold the fittings together. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) QUICK CONNECT FITTING(S) SERVICE (METAL COLLAR) TOOLS REQUIRED J 37088-A Fuel Line Quick-Connect Separator REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Remove the retainer from the quick-connect fitting. 3. Blow dirt out of the fitting using compressed air. CAUTION: Wear safety glasses when using compressed air in order to prevent eye injury. 4. Choose the correct tool from J 37088-A tool set for the size of the fitting. Insert the tool into the female connector, then push inward to release the locking tabs. 5. Pull the connection apart. 6. Using a clean shop towel, wipe off the male pipe end. NOTE: If necessary, remove rust or burrs from the fuel pipes with an emery cloth. Use a radial motion with the fuel pipe end in order to prevent damage to the O-ring sealing surface. Use a clean shop towel in order to wipe off the male tube ends. Inspect all the connections for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components and assemblies as required. 7. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components as required. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 2763 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end. CAUTION: Always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting the fuel pipe fittings in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. 2. Push both sides of the fitting together to cause the retaining tabs to snap into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the fitting to make sure the connection is secure. 4. Install the retainer to the quick-connect fitting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 2764 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Plastic Collar) QUICK CONNECT FITTING(S) SERVICE (PLASTIC COLLAR) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing any fuel system connection. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 2. Using compressed air, blow any dirt out of the quick-connect fitting. CAUTION: Wear safety glasses when using compressed air in order to prevent eye injury. 3. Squeeze the plastic retainer release tabs. 4. Pull the connection apart. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male fuel pipe end. CAUTION: Always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting the fuel pipe fittings in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quick Connect Fitting(S) Service (Metal Collar) > Page 2765 2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together in order to cause the retaining tabs to snap into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the quick-connect fitting in order to make sure the connection is secure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Meter Body > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Meter Body: Description and Operation FUEL METER BODY ASSEMBLY The fuel meter body assembly (1) attaches to the lower intake manifold. The fuel meter body assembly performs the following functions: - Distributes fuel evenly to the injectors (3) - Integrates the fuel pressure regulator (6) into the fuel metering system Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Meter Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2769 Fuel Meter Body: Service and Repair FUEL METER BODY ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE An 8-digit part identification number is on a mylar label affixed to the fuel meter body assembly. Refer to this number if servicing or part replacement is required. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold assembly. 4. Before removal, clean the fuel meter body assembly with a spray type engine cleaner, GM X-30A or the equivalent, if necessary. Follow the package instructions. DO NOT soak fuel meter body assemblies in liquid cleaning solvent. NOTE: Do not use any solvent that contains Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent may damage fuel system components. 5. Lightly pull on the injector tube and use a small pocket screwdriver to remove the injector from the manifold. NOTE: Cover the injector sockets in order to prevent dirt and other contaminants from entering the open fuel passages. IMPORTANT: When disconnecting the injectors, remember the sequence in order to ensure correct injectors placement to each cylinder. 6. Remove the fuel meter body from the bracket by releasing the lock tabs on the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel meter body in the intake manifold. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Meter Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2770 2. Push the fuel meter body into the bracket. Make sure all of the tabs are locked into place. 3. Push the injectors into the casting sockets. CAUTION: Verify that the poppet nozzles are firmly seated and locked in their casting sockets in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. An unlocked poppet nozzle could work loose from its socket and produce a fuel leak. IMPORTANT: The fuel meter body assemblies are numbered to indicate poppet nozzle order. 4. Inspect the injectors in order to ensure they are firmly seated and locked in the casting sockets. 5. Install the upper intake manifold assembly. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY The fuel pressure regulator is a diaphragm relief valve. The diaphragm has fuel pressure on one side and regulator spring pressure and intake manifold vacuum on the other side. The fuel pressure regulator maintains a constant pressure differential across the fuel injectors under all operating conditions. The fuel pressure regulator compensates for engine load by increasing fuel pressure as the engine vacuum drops. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2774 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. Remove the fuel pressure regulator retainer clip (5). 3. Twist and pull the fuel pressure regulator (6) in order to remove the regulator from the housing using a shop towel to catch any spilled fuel. 4. Remove and discard the regulator seal O-ring (10). 5. Remove and discard the regulator filter (9). 6. Remove and discard the regulator seal O-ring (8). 7. Remove and discard the backup ring (7). 8. Cover the fuel pressure regulator housing to prevent contamination from entering the fuel system. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Lubricate the NEW O-rings seals with clean engine oil. 2. Assemble the following NEW parts to the fuel pressure regulator: - Backup ring (7) - Regulator seal O-ring (8) - Regulator filter (9) - Regulator seal O-ring (10) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2775 3. Install the fuel pressure regulator with the vacuum tube pointing down. 4. Install the fuel pressure regulator retainer clip (5). 5. Install the upper manifold. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................379-427 kPa (55-62 psi) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal FUEL PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TOOLS REQUIRED J 34730-1A Fuel Pressure Gage INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Install the J 34730-1A to the fuel pressure service connection. CAUTION: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. NOTE: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: - The fuel pipe connections - The hose connections - The areas surrounding the connections 2. Turn ON the ignition. 3. Place the bleed hose of the fuel pressure gage into an approved gasoline container. CAUTION: Do not drain the fuel into an open container. Never store the fuel in an open container due to the possibility of a fire or an explosion. 4. Open the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage in order to bleed the air from the fuel pressure gage. 5. Command the fuel pump ON with a scan tool. 6. Close the bleed valve on the fuel pressure gage. 7. Inspect for fuel leaks. REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Place the fuel pressure gage bleed hose into an approved container and open the bleed valve to bleed OFF fuel system pressure. 2. Place a shop towel under the J 34730-1A to catch any remaining fuel spillage. 3. Remove the J 34730-1A from the fuel pressure connection. 4. Drain any fuel remaining in the fuel pressure gage into an approved container. 5. Inspect for leaks using the following procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2782 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 6. Install the cap on the fuel pressure connection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2783 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. The electric fuel pump supplies fuel through an inline fuel filter to the fuel injection system. The pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pressure regulator maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. A separate pipe returns unused fuel to the fuel tank. TEST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2784 Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2785 Steps 8-13 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2786 Steps 14-20 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2787 Steps 21-23 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Description and Operation FUEL STRAINER The fuel strainer attaches to the lower end of the fuel sender. The fuel strainer is made of woven plastic. The functions of the fuel strainer are to filter contaminants and to wick fuel. The fuel strainer normally requires no maintenance. Fuel stoppage at this point indicates that the fuel tank contains an abnormal amount of sediment or contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2791 Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Service and Repair FUEL STRAINER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to the Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Remove the fuel tank. 5. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 6. Note the position of the fuel strainer (2) on the fuel sender. 7. Support the fuel sender assembly with one hand and grasp the strainer (2) with the other hand. 8. Pull the strainer off the fuel sender. Discard the strainer after inspection. 9. Inspect the strainer. Replace a contaminated strainer and clean the fuel tank. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install a new fuel strainer (2) in the same position as noted during disassembly. Push the strainer on the bottom of the fuel sender until the strainer is fully seated. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly. 3. Install the fuel tank. 4. Refill the fuel tank. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Return Line: Description and Operation FUEL FEED AND RETURN PIPES The fuel feed pipe carries fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel injection system. The fuel return pipe carries fuel from the fuel injection system back to the fuel tank. The fuel pipes consist of 2 sections: The rear fuel pipe assemblies are located from the top of the fuel tank to the chassis fuel pipes. The rear fuel pipes are constructed of nylon. - The chassis fuel pipes are located under the vehicle and connect the rear fuel pipes to the fuel injection system. The chassis fuel pipes are constructed of steel. NYLON FUEL PIPES CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury observe the following items: Replace all nylon fuel pipes that are nicked, scratched or damaged during installation, do not attempt to repair the sections of the nylon fuel pipes - Do not hammer directly on the fuel harness body clips when installing new fuel pipes. Damage to the nylon pipes may result in a fuel leak. - Always cover nylon vapor pipes with a wet towel before using a torch near them. Also, never expose the vehicle to temperatures higher than 115°C (239°F) for more than one hour, or more than 90°C (194°F) for any extended period. - Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting fuel pipe fittings. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. (During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated.) Nylon pipes are constructed to withstand maximum fuel system pressure, exposure to fuel additives, and changes in temperature. There are 3 sizes of nylon pipes used: 9.53 mm (3/8 in) ID for the fuel feed - 7.94 mm (5/16 in) ID for the fuel return - 12.7 mm (1/2 in) ID for the vent Heat resistant rubber hose or corrugated plastic conduit protect the sections of the pipes that are exposed to chafing, high temperature, or vibration. Nylon fuel pipes are somewhat flexible and can be formed around gradual turns under the vehicle. However, if nylon fuel pipes are forced into sharp bends, the pipes kink and restrict the fuel flow. Also, once exposed to fuel, nylon pipes may become stiffer and are more likely to kink if bent too far. Take special care when working on a vehicle with nylon fuel pipes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 4. Disconnect the spark plug wires from the left side of the distributor. 5. Disconnect the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) at the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 6. Remove the injector fuel inlet and outlet pipe retainer nuts. 7. Remove the injector fuel inlet and the outlet pipe retainer. 8. Remove the rear fuel pipe bracket retaining bolt. 9. Pull straight up on the fuel pipes in order to remove the fuel pipes from the injector assembly. 10. Remove the O-ring seals from both ends of the fuel feed and return pipes. 11. Discard the O-ring seals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2797 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Assemble the new O-rings into the inlet and outlet of the fuel injector assembly. 2. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male tube ends. 3. Install the fuel feed and return pipes to the injector assembly. 4. Install the fuel pipe retainer and the attaching nuts. 5. Install the rear fuel pipe bracket retaining bolt. 1. Tighten the rear fuel pipe bracket bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 2. Tighten the fuel pipe retainer nuts to 3 N.m (27 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the new O-ring seals on the engine compartment fuel feed and the return pipes. 7. Install the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) to the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. Tighten the fuel pipe fittings to 27 N.m (20 lb ft). 8. Connect the spark plug wires to the left side of the distributor. 9. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. 11. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 12. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2798 Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Disconnect the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) at the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 4. Remove the transmission. 5. Remove the fuel pipe retainer clip (2) from the left cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the fuel feed pipe (3) and the fuel return pipe (2). 7. Remove the fuel feed and return pipes. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, before connecting fuel pipe fittings, always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. 1. Install the new O-ring seals on the engine compartment fuel feed and the return pipes. 2. Connect the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) to the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 3. Install the fuel pipes into the retainer clip (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2799 4. Install the fuel pipe retainer clip bolt. 1. Tighten the fuel pipe fittings to 27 N.m (20 lb ft) using a back-up wrench. 2. Tighten the fuel pipe retainer clip bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 5. Connect the fuel feed pipe (3) and the fuel return pipe (2). 6. Install the transmission. 7. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2800 Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement (Fuel Pipe Repair) FUEL HOSE/PIPES ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (FUEL PIPE REPAIR) Steel fuel lines-These are welded steel tubes, meeting GM specifications 124-M, or the equivalent. The fuel feed line is 9.5 mm (3/8 inches) diameter and the fuel return line is 8 mm (5/16 inches) diameter. Do not use copper or aluminum tubing to replace steel tubing. Those materials do not have satisfactory durability to withstand normal vehicle vibration. Coupled hose-Do not repair the hoses. Replace them only as an assembly. Uncoupled hose-Use only reinforced fuel resistant hose, made of Fluoroelastomer material. Do not use a hose within 100 mm (4 in) of any part of the exhaust system, or within 2154 mm (10 in) of the catalytic converter. The hoses inside diameter must match the outside diameter of the steel tubing. Clamps-These are stainless steel, screw bank-type clamps, #2494772, or equivalent. Steel Fuel Line Repair 1. Cut a piece of fuel hose 100 mm (4 in) longer than the section of line to be removed. If you remove more than 152 mm (6 in), use a combination of steel pipe and hose. The hose length should not be more than 2154 mm (10 in) total. 2. With a tube cutter, cut a section of the pipe to replace. Use the first step on the reamer to form a bead on the ends of the pipe and, also, on the new section of pipe, if used. 3. Slide the hose clamps onto the pipe and push the hose 51 mm (2 in) onto each portion of the fuel pipe. Tighten a clamp on each side of the repair. 4. Secure fuel line to the frame. 5. Check for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2801 Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement (Rear) FUEL HOSE/PIPES ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (REAR) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Clean all the fuel pipe connections and the surrounding areas before disconnecting in order to avoid possible contamination of the fuel system. 6. Remove the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the rear fuel feed pipe from the fuel filter inlet. 8. Disconnect the rear fuel return pipe from the chassis fuel return pipe (2). 9. Remove the fuel feed and return pipes from the retainers. 10. Cap the fuel pipes in order to prevent possible fuel system contamination. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the caps from the fuel and evaporative emission (EVAP) pipes. 2. Connect the rear fuel return pipe to the chassis fuel return pipe (2). 3. Connect the rear fuel feed pipe to the fuel filter inlet. 4. Install the fuel feed and return pipes into the retainers. 5. Install the fuel tank. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Refill the fuel tank. 8. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 9. Connect the negative battery cable. 10. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation FUEL FEED AND RETURN PIPES The fuel feed pipe carries fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel injection system. The fuel return pipe carries fuel from the fuel injection system back to the fuel tank. The fuel pipes consist of 2 sections: The rear fuel pipe assemblies are located from the top of the fuel tank to the chassis fuel pipes. The rear fuel pipes are constructed of nylon. - The chassis fuel pipes are located under the vehicle and connect the rear fuel pipes to the fuel injection system. The chassis fuel pipes are constructed of steel. NYLON FUEL PIPES CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury observe the following items: Replace all nylon fuel pipes that are nicked, scratched or damaged during installation, do not attempt to repair the sections of the nylon fuel pipes - Do not hammer directly on the fuel harness body clips when installing new fuel pipes. Damage to the nylon pipes may result in a fuel leak. - Always cover nylon vapor pipes with a wet towel before using a torch near them. Also, never expose the vehicle to temperatures higher than 115°C (239°F) for more than one hour, or more than 90°C (194°F) for any extended period. - Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting fuel pipe fittings. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. (During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated.) Nylon pipes are constructed to withstand maximum fuel system pressure, exposure to fuel additives, and changes in temperature. There are 3 sizes of nylon pipes used: 9.53 mm (3/8 in) ID for the fuel feed - 7.94 mm (5/16 in) ID for the fuel return - 12.7 mm (1/2 in) ID for the vent Heat resistant rubber hose or corrugated plastic conduit protect the sections of the pipes that are exposed to chafing, high temperature, or vibration. Nylon fuel pipes are somewhat flexible and can be formed around gradual turns under the vehicle. However, if nylon fuel pipes are forced into sharp bends, the pipes kink and restrict the fuel flow. Also, once exposed to fuel, nylon pipes may become stiffer and are more likely to kink if bent too far. Take special care when working on a vehicle with nylon fuel pipes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - ENGINE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 4. Disconnect the spark plug wires from the left side of the distributor. 5. Disconnect the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) at the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 6. Remove the injector fuel inlet and outlet pipe retainer nuts. 7. Remove the injector fuel inlet and the outlet pipe retainer. 8. Remove the rear fuel pipe bracket retaining bolt. 9. Pull straight up on the fuel pipes in order to remove the fuel pipes from the injector assembly. 10. Remove the O-ring seals from both ends of the fuel feed and return pipes. 11. Discard the O-ring seals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2807 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Assemble the new O-rings into the inlet and outlet of the fuel injector assembly. 2. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male tube ends. 3. Install the fuel feed and return pipes to the injector assembly. 4. Install the fuel pipe retainer and the attaching nuts. 5. Install the rear fuel pipe bracket retaining bolt. 1. Tighten the rear fuel pipe bracket bolt to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 2. Tighten the fuel pipe retainer nuts to 3 N.m (27 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the new O-ring seals on the engine compartment fuel feed and the return pipes. 7. Install the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) to the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. Tighten the fuel pipe fittings to 27 N.m (20 lb ft). 8. Connect the spark plug wires to the left side of the distributor. 9. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 10. Connect the negative battery cable. 11. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. 12. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2808 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Chassis FUEL HOSE/PIPES REPLACEMENT - CHASSIS REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Disconnect the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) at the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 4. Remove the transmission. 5. Remove the fuel pipe retainer clip (2) from the left cylinder head. 6. Disconnect the fuel feed pipe (3) and the fuel return pipe (2). 7. Remove the fuel feed and return pipes. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, before connecting fuel pipe fittings, always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. 1. Install the new O-ring seals on the engine compartment fuel feed and the return pipes. 2. Connect the chassis fuel feed and return pipes (1) to the engine compartment fuel feed and return pipes. 3. Install the fuel pipes into the retainer clip (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2809 4. Install the fuel pipe retainer clip bolt. 1. Tighten the fuel pipe fittings to 27 N.m (20 lb ft) using a back-up wrench. 2. Tighten the fuel pipe retainer clip bolt to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 5. Connect the fuel feed pipe (3) and the fuel return pipe (2). 6. Install the transmission. 7. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. 9. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2810 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement (Fuel Pipe Repair) FUEL HOSE/PIPES ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (FUEL PIPE REPAIR) Steel fuel lines-These are welded steel tubes, meeting GM specifications 124-M, or the equivalent. The fuel feed line is 9.5 mm (3/8 inches) diameter and the fuel return line is 8 mm (5/16 inches) diameter. Do not use copper or aluminum tubing to replace steel tubing. Those materials do not have satisfactory durability to withstand normal vehicle vibration. Coupled hose-Do not repair the hoses. Replace them only as an assembly. Uncoupled hose-Use only reinforced fuel resistant hose, made of Fluoroelastomer material. Do not use a hose within 100 mm (4 in) of any part of the exhaust system, or within 2154 mm (10 in) of the catalytic converter. The hoses inside diameter must match the outside diameter of the steel tubing. Clamps-These are stainless steel, screw bank-type clamps, #2494772, or equivalent. Steel Fuel Line Repair 1. Cut a piece of fuel hose 100 mm (4 in) longer than the section of line to be removed. If you remove more than 152 mm (6 in), use a combination of steel pipe and hose. The hose length should not be more than 2154 mm (10 in) total. 2. With a tube cutter, cut a section of the pipe to replace. Use the first step on the reamer to form a bead on the ends of the pipe and, also, on the new section of pipe, if used. 3. Slide the hose clamps onto the pipe and push the hose 51 mm (2 in) onto each portion of the fuel pipe. Tighten a clamp on each side of the repair. 4. Secure fuel line to the frame. 5. Check for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Hose/Pipes Replacement - Engine Compartment > Page 2811 Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement (Rear) FUEL HOSE/PIPES ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (REAR) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Clean all the fuel pipe connections and the surrounding areas before disconnecting in order to avoid possible contamination of the fuel system. 6. Remove the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the rear fuel feed pipe from the fuel filter inlet. 8. Disconnect the rear fuel return pipe from the chassis fuel return pipe (2). 9. Remove the fuel feed and return pipes from the retainers. 10. Cap the fuel pipes in order to prevent possible fuel system contamination. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the caps from the fuel and evaporative emission (EVAP) pipes. 2. Connect the rear fuel return pipe to the chassis fuel return pipe (2). 3. Connect the rear fuel feed pipe to the fuel filter inlet. 4. Install the fuel feed and return pipes into the retainers. 5. Install the fuel tank. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Refill the fuel tank. 8. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 9. Connect the negative battery cable. 10. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Hose: Description and Operation FUEL FILL PIPE The fuel fill pipe has a built-in restrictor in order to prevent refueling with leaded fuel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) FILLER TUBE REPLACEMENT (2-DOOR UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure. 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Wipe the vent hose connection at the fuel tank and then disconnect the vent hose and clamp (1). 5. Wipe the fuel filler hose connection at the fuel tank and then disconnect the fuel filler hose and clamp (2). 6. Remove the filler pipe ground strap bolt (4). 7. Remove the fuel fill pipe to fill pipe housing attaching screws. 8. Remove the fuel fill and vent pipes and hoses. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel fill and vent pipes and hoses to the fuel tank and the fill pipe housing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2818 - Tighten the vent hose clamp (1) to 1.7 N.m (15 lb in). - Tighten the fuel fill hose clamp (2) to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the fill pipe ground strap to the frame with the bolt (4) and washer (3). Tighten the ground strap bolt to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Install the fuel fill pipe to fill pipe housing attaching screws. Tighten the fuel fill pipe to fill pipe housing screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2819 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Filler Tube Replacement (4-Door Utility Lower) FILLER TUBE REPLACEMENT (4-DOOR UTILITY LOWER) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the fuel from the fuel tank, leaving the lower fuel fill hose disconnected. 2. Remove the spare tire (underbody mounted spare tire only). 3. Loosen the upper fuel fill hose clamp (7). 4. Disconnect the ground wire (5) from the frame crossover. 5. Remove the ground wire retaining straps (6) from the lower fuel fill tube. 6. Remove the lower fuel fill tube retaining bolt from the frame crossover. 7. Disconnect the lower fuel fill tube (12) from the upper fuel fill hose (11). 8. Remove the fuel fill tube (12). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the fuel fill tube (12) over the frame crossover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2820 2. Connect both the upper (11) and lower (13) fuel fill hoses to the lower fuel fill tube (12). 3. Install the lower fuel fill tube retaining bolt to the frame crossover. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fuel fill tube bracket retaining bolt to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 4. Install the ground wire (5) to the frame crossover. Tighten the ground strap retaining screw to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 5. Attach the ground wire to the lower fuel fill tube with new retaining straps (6). 6. Position the hose clamps (2, 7) on the upper (11) and lower (13) fuel fill hoses. Tighten the hose clamps (2, 7) to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 7. Install the spare tire (underbody mounted spare tire only). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the fuel fill cap and refill the fuel tank. 10. Install the fuel fill cap. 11. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2821 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Filler Hose Replacement (2-Door Utility) FUEL FILLER HOSE REPLACEMENT (2-DOOR UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Drain the fuel below the level of the fuel fill hose. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 3. Remove the fuel filler pipe. 4. Wipe the vent hose connection at the fuel tank and then disconnect the vent hose and clamp (1). 5. Wipe the fuel filler hose connection at the fuel tank and then disconnect the fuel filler hose and clamp (2). 6. Cap the fuel tank openings in order to prevent possible fuel system contamination. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the caps from the fuel tank openings. 2. Install the fuel fill and vent hoses to the fuel tank. - Tighten the vent hose clamp (1) to 1.7 N.m (15 lb in). - Tighten the fuel fill hose clamp (2) to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the fuel filler pipe. 4. Refill the fuel system. 5. Install the fuel filler cap. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. 7. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 2822 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Filler Hose Replacement (4-Door Utility Lower) FUEL FILLER HOSE REPLACEMENT (4-DOOR UTILITY LOWER) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Drain the fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining Procedure (2-Door Utility). 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the fuel fill hose clamp (1) at the fuel tank fill tube. 4. Remove the fuel fill hose (13). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the fuel fill hose (13) to the fuel tank and fuel fill tube (12). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the fuel fill hose clamps to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 2. Lower the vehicle. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap and refill the fuel tank. 4. Install the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2826 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY The fuel sender assembly consists of the following major components: - The fuel level sensor (6) - The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (1) - The fuel pump module (2) - The fuel strainer (3) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2827 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2828 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2832 Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2833 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2837 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Testing and Inspection IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The engine idle speed is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve is on the throttle body. The IAC valve pintle moves in and out of an idle air passage bore to control air flow around the throttle plate. The IAC valve consists of a movable pintle, driven by a gear attached to an electric motor called a stepper motor. The stepper motor is capable of highly accurate rotation, or of movement, called steps. The stepper motor has 2 separate windings that are called coils. Each coil is supplied current by 2 circuits from the powertrain control module (PCM). When the PCM changes polarity of a coil, the stepper motor moves one step. The PCM uses a predetermined number of counts to determine the IAC pintle position. Observe IAC counts with a scan tool. The IAC counts will increment up or down as the PCM attempts to change the IAC valve pintle position. An IAC Reset will occur when the ignition key is turned OFF. First, the PCM will seat the IAC pintle in the idle air passage bore. Second, the PCM will retract the pintle a predetermined number of counts to allow for efficient engine start-up. If the engine idle speed is out of range for a calibrated period of time, an idle speed diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Inspect for the following conditions: High resistance in an IAC valve control circuit - The correct positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve, properly installed, and proper operation of the PCV valve - Proper operation and installation of all air intake components - Proper installation and operation of the mass air flow (MAF) sensor, if equipped - A tampered with or damaged throttle stop screw - A tampered with or damaged throttle plate, throttle shaft, throttle linkage, or cruise control linkage, if equipped - A skewed high throttle position (TP) sensor - Excessive deposits in the IAC passage or on the IAC pintle - Excessive deposits in the throttle bore or on the throttle plate - Vacuum leaks - A high or unstable idle condition could be caused by a non-IAC system condition that can not be overcome by the IAC valve. Refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the condition is determined to be intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2838 Steps 1-6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2839 Steps 7-11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2840 Steps 12-19 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This test will determine the ability of the PCM and IAC valve control circuits to control the IAC valve. 7. This test will determine the ability of the PCM to provide the IAC control valve circuits with a ground. On a normally operating system, the test lamp should not flash while the IAC Counts are incrementing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2841 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet resonator. 3. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve harness connector. 4. Remove the IAC valve mounting screws. 5. Remove the IAC valve and O-ring from the throttle body assembly. CLEANING AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Clean the IAC valve O-ring sealing surface, pintle valve seat, and air passage. - Remove excess carbon deposits with a small amount of carburetor cleaner on a parts cleaning brush. Follow any instructions on the cleaner container regarding cleaner usage. - DO NOT use a cleaner containing an extremely powerful solvent such as methl ethyl ketone. - Shiny spots on the pintle and seat do not represent a bent or misaligned pintle shaft. - If heavy deposits are present in the air passage, remove the throttle body for a complete cleaning. 2. Replace the IAC valve O-ring. IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2842 1. On a new IAC valve, measure the distance between the IAC valve pintle and mounting flange. Use finger pressure to slowly retract the pintle if the distance is more than 28 mm (1-1/8 in). IMPORTANT: Use an identical part when installing a new idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve pintle shape and dimensions are designed for specific applications. 2. Lubricate the IAC valve O-ring with clean engine oil. 3. Align the flange holes with the mounting holes on the throttle body assembly. 4. Insert the IAC valve through the O-ring into the throttle body assembly. 5. Install the IAC valve mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the IAC valve are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2843 6. Connect the IAC valve harness connector. 7. Install the air cleaner outlet resonator. 8. Perform the IAC Reset procedure: 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF, for 5 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Start the engine and check for proper idle speed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair Resonator: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER OUTLET RESONATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the breather tube from the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct retaining wingnut. 4. Separate the air cleaner outlet duct from the air cleaner by loosening the hose clamp after the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 5. Remove air cleaner outlet duct. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2847 1. Install air cleaner outlet duct to throttle body. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install air cleaner outlet duct to MAF sensor. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the hose clamp to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Connect the IAT sensor harness connector. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct retaining wingnut. Tighten the wingnut to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Connect the breather tube to the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2854 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the MAF sensor from the air cleaner cover and air cleaner outlet duct by loosening the hose clamps. NOTE: Refer to Mass Air Flow (MAF) Handling Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the MAF sensor to the air cleaner outlet duct and the air cleaner cover. IMPORTANT: The embossed arrow on the MAF sensor indicates the proper air flow direction. The arrow must point towards the engine. 2. Secure the air cleaner cover and outlet duct to the MAF sensor. 3. Connect the MAF sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2860 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2861 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Assembly Replacement THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: An 8 digit part identification number is stamped on the bottom of the throttle body casting. Refer to this number if servicing or part replacement is required. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Remove the air cleaner adapter stud. 4. Disconnect the cruise control cable from the throttle body. 5. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body. 6. Remove the nuts retaining the accelerator cable routing bracket. 7. Position the bracket aside. 8. Remove the stud and nuts retaining the accelerator control cable bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 2866 9. Position the bracket aside. 10. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve harness connector. 11. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor harness connector. 12. Remove the throttle body retaining studs. 13. Remove the throttle body assembly. 14. Discard the throttle body seal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 2867 1. Clean the seal surface on the intake manifold. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Install the throttle body assembly with a new seal. 3. Install the throttle body assembly retaining studs. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the studs to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 4. Install the accelerator control cable bracket using the mounting stud and nuts. Tighten the stud and nuts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Install the accelerator cable routing bracket using the mounting nuts. Tighten the accelerator cable routing bracket nuts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 2868 6. Install the accelerator cable onto the throttle body. NOTE: Check for unrestricted and complete throttle opening and closing positions by operating the accelerator pedal in order to prevent vehicle damage. Also check for poor carpet fit under the accelerator pedal. Throttle should operate freely without bind between full closed and wide open throttle. 7. Install the cruise control cable onto the throttle body. 8. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. 9. Connect the IAC valve harness connector. 10. Install the air cleaner adapter stud. Tighten the stud to 8 N.m (71 lb in). 11. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 12. Use the following procedure in order to inspect the accelerator pedal operation. 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 2. Use a scan tool in order to observe the parameter for the TP sensor. 3. Depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. 4. Release the accelerator pedal. 5. Verify the throttle position has gone from 0-100 percent and back to 0 percent. IMPORTANT: The accelerator pedal should operate freely without binding between closed and wide open throttle (WOT). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body Assembly Replacement > Page 2869 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body Cleaning Procedure THROTTLE BODY CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Inspect the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate for deposits. You must open the throttle valve in order to inspect all of the surfaces. 3. Clean the throttle body bore and the throttle valve plate using a clean shop towel with GM Top Engine Cleaner, P/N 1052626 or an equivalent product. NOTE: Do not subject a throttle body assembly which contains the following components to an immersion cleaner or a strong solvent: - Throttle position (TP) sensor - Idle air control (IAC) valve - Sealed throttle shaft bearings The cleaners will damage the electric components or sensors. The cleaners will damage some of these components that contain seals or O-rings. Solvents can wash away or break down the grease used on non-serviceable throttle shaft bearings. Never use a wire brush or scraper to clean the throttle body. A wire brush or sharp tools may damage the throttle body components. Do not use a cleaner that contains methyl ethyl ketone. This extremely strong solvent may damage components and is not necessary for this type of cleaning. 4. If the deposits are excessive, remove and disassemble the throttle body for cleaning. 5. After disassembly, clean the throttle body using a parts cleaning brush. DO NOT immerse the throttle body in any cleaning solvent. 6. If you removed and disassembled the throttle body for cleaning, assemble and install the throttle body. 7. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROLS CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body. 3. Remove the accelerator cable from the accelerator control cable bracket. 4. Remove the accelerator cable from the cable routing bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2873 5. Disconnect the accelerator cable (1) from the bracket clip (2). 6. Remove the left closeout/insulator panel. 7. Remove the accelerator cable from the accelerator pedal. 8. Remove the accelerator cable panel insulator retainer (2) from the accelerator cable (1). 9. Squeeze the accelerator cable tangs (3) and push the cable through the bulkhead (4). 10. Remove the accelerator cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the accelerator cable (1) through the bulkhead (4). 2. Install the accelerator cable panel insulator retainer (2) on the accelerator cable (1). 3. Install the accelerator cable to the accelerator pedal (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2874 4. Connect the accelerator cable (1) to the bracket clip (2). 5. Install the accelerator cable onto the throttle body. 6. Ensure that the cable is fully seated in the pulley groove. The cable must not lie outside of the hook tab. 7. Install the accelerator cable to the accelerator cable control bracket. 8. Install the accelerator cable to the cable routing bracket. 9. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 10. Use the following procedure in order to inspect the accelerator pedal operation. IMPORTANT: The accelerator pedal should operate freely without binding between closed and wide open throttle. 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 2. Using a scan tool, observe the parameter for the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. 4. Release the accelerator pedal. 5. Verify the throttle position has gone from 0 percent to 100 percent and back to 0 percent. 11. Install the left closeout/insulator panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2880 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the mounting screws from the throttle position (TP) sensor. 3. Remove the TP sensor from the throttle body assembly. NOTE: The TP sensor is an electrical component. Do not soak the TP sensor in any liquid cleaner or solvent as damage may result. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Place the TP sensor over the throttle shaft and align the TP mounting holes with their corresponding holes in the throttle body assembly. 2. Install the TP sensor mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: The screws used to attach the TP sensor are coated with thread locking adhesive. Clean the attaching screw threads and apply thread locking material GM P/N 1052624 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2881 Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the throttle body. 4. Connect the TP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2888 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2889 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2890 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2891 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2892 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2898 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2901 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2902 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2903 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Description and Operation Distributor: Description and Operation DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The distributor ignition (DI) system is responsible for producing and controlling a high energy secondary spark. This spark is used to ignite the compressed air/fuel mixture at precisely the correct time. This provides optimal performance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions. This ignition system consists of a single ignition coil and ignition control module (ICM). Spark energy is delivered via a distributor cap, rotor, and secondary spark plug wires. The driver module within the ICM is commanded to operate the coil by the powertrain control module (PCM), that has complete control over spark timing. The DI system consists of the following components: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Ignition Coil And ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Secondary Ignition Components The distributor is only used as a means to operate the CMP sensor and to distribute spark in the correct sequence. Since the distributor has no influence on base timing the distributor is not adjustable on V6 engines. The distributor position can be adjusted on V8 engines because the chance of crossfire between terminals is greater due to the proximity of the terminals. The spark is distributed through conventional carbon core wires to the spark plugs. The plugs are tipped with platinum for long wear and higher efficiency. Powertrain Control Module (PCM) The PCM controls all ignition system functions, and constantly corrects the basic spark timing. The PCM monitors information from various sensor inputs that include the following: The throttle position (TP) sensor - The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor - The mass airflow (MAF) sensor - The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor - The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - The transmission gear position or range information sensors - The engine knock sensors (KS) Modes Of Operation There is one normal mode of operation, with the spark under PCM control. If the CKP pulses are lost the engine will not run. The loss of a CMP signal may result in a longer crank time since the PCM cannot determine which stroke the pistons are on. Diagnostic trouble codes are available to accurately diagnose the ignition system with a scan tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Inspection DISTRIBUTOR INSPECTION 1. Inspect the cap for cracks, tiny holes or carbon tracks between the cap terminal traces. Diagnose the carbon tracks using the following procedure: 1. Remove the cap. 2. Place 1 lead from the DMM on a cap terminal. 3. Use the other lead in order to probe all other terminals and the center carbon ball. 4. Move the base lead to the next terminal. Probe all other leads. 5. Continue this procedure until you test all the secondary terminals. 6. If there are any non-infinite readings, replace the cap. IMPORTANT: Discoloration of the cap and some whitish build up around the cap terminals is normal. Yellowing of the rotor cap, darkening and some carbon build up under the rotor segment is normal. Replacement of the cap and the rotor is not necessary unless there is a driveability concern. 2. Inspect the cap for excess build-up of corrosion on the terminals. Scrape clean the terminals. Replace the cap if the corrosion is excessive. Some buildup is normal 3. Inspect the rotor segment for excess wear. Replace the rotor if excess looseness in the rotor segment is present. 4. Inspect the shaft for shaft-to-bushing looseness: 1. Inspect the housing for cracks or damage. 2. Insert the shaft in the housing. 3. If the shaft wobbles, replace the housing assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2909 Distributor: Testing and Inspection Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnosis DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION (DI) SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system includes the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor, the camshaft position (CMP) sensor, the ignition coil with the ignition control module (ICM), the secondary wires, the spark plugs, and the circuit conductors and connectors. The powertrain control module (PCM) controls the ignition system. The PCM monitors the input signals from various engine sensors. The PCM controls the dwell of the ignition primary coil, computes the desired spark timing and firing of the ignition system via an ignition control (IC) timing control circuit to the ICM. The Distributor Ignition (DI) System Diagnostic Table assumes the following conditions: The battery is fully charged. - There is adequate fuel in the fuel tank. - The fuel delivery system is functional. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS Engine mechanical conditions may prevent the distributor from rotating. Inspect the following if the distributor rotor does not rotate: A broken distributor drive shaft - A worn or broken distributor drive gear - A worn or broken camshaft timing chain and gears An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection, rubbed through wire insulation, or a wire broken inside the insulation. If a repair is necessary. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2910 Steps 1-9 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2911 Steps 10-19 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2912 Steps 20-32 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2913 Steps 33-48 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Distributor Inspection > Page 2914 Steps 49-50 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 3. This step is testing for a CKP sensor signal to the PCM. 4. This step is testing for an internally shorted CMP sensor. 9. This step is testing for spark output at more than one spark plug wire. The J 26792 Spark Tester requires a minimum of 25,000 volts to operate. 10. This step determines if spark is being delivered to the distributor cap. 20. This test is testing if the PCM is providing a timing control signal to the ICM. 21. This test checks for a basic engine mechanical problem. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul DISTRIBUTOR OVERHAUL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (2). NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1). If not, replace the distributor. 3. Remove the two screws from the rotor. 4. Remove the rotor. 5. Note the locating holes that the rotor was removed from: - The rotor screw holes (1) - The rotor locator pin holes (2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2917 6. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel with the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 7. Remove the two screws that hold the CMP sensor. 8. Discard the screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. 10. Note the dimple located below the roll pin hole on one side of the gear. The dimple will be used to properly orient the gear onto the shaft during reassembly. 11. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 12. Drive out the roll pin with a suitable punch. 13. Remove the driven gear from the distributor shaft. 14. Remove the round washer. 15. Remove the tang washer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2918 16. Remove the shim washer (1). 17. Remove the old oil seal. ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1. Line up the square-cut hole in the vane wheel for the CMP sensor. NOTE: Refer to Distributor Driven Gear Can Be Installed in Multiple Positions Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Insert the sensor into the housing. 3. Install two new screws for the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2919 4. Identify the correct rotor mounting position: - At the rotor screw holes (1) - At the rotor locator pin holes (2) 5. Install the distributor rotor according to the index marks. 6. Install two rotor hold down screws. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 7. Install the shim washer (1) on the bottom of the distributor shaft. 8. Install the tang washer. 9. Install the round washer. 10. Install the driven gear according to the index marks. 11. Align the rotor segment as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). 12. Install the gear and align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2920 13. Check to see If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite the rotor segment when the driven gear is installed in the distributor. 14. Support the distributor drive gear in a V-block or similar fixture. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. 15. Install the roll pin with a suitable punch and hammer in order to hold the driven gear in the correct position. 16. Install the new oil seal under the mounting flange of the distributor base. 17. Install the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2921 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement DISTRIBUTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE NOTE: There are two procedures available to install the distributor. Use Installation Procedure 1 when the crankshaft has NOT been rotated from the original position. Use Installation Procedure 2 when any of the following components are removed: The intake manifold - The cylinder head - The camshaft - The timing chain or sprockets - The complete engine If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns on and DTC P1345 sets after installing the distributor, this indicates an incorrectly installed distributor. Engine damage or distributor damage may occur. Use Procedure 2 in order to install the distributor. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the spark plug wires from the distributor cap. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the wire boot in order to remove the wire from the distributor cap. 4. Remove the electrical connector from the base of the distributor. 5. Remove the 2 screws that hold the distributor cap to the housing. 6. Discard the screws. 7. Remove the distributor cap from the housing. 8. Use a grease pencil in order to note the position of the rotor in relation to the distributor housing (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2922 9. Mark the distributor housing and the intake manifold with a grease pencil. 10. Remove the mounting clamp hold down bolt. 11. Remove the distributor. 12. As the distributor is being removed from the engine, watch the rotor move in a counter-clockwise direction about 42 degrees. This will appear as slightly more than 1 clock position. 13. Note the position of the rotor segment. 14. Place a second mark on the base of the distributor (2). This will aid in achieving proper rotor alignment during the distributor installation. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 1. If installing a new distributor assembly, place 2 marks on the new distributor housing in the same location as the 2 marks on the original housing. 2. Remove the new distributor cap, if necessary. 3. Align the rotor with the second mark (2). 4. Guide the distributor into the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2923 5. Align the hole in the distributor hold-down base over the mounting hole in the intake manifold. 6. As the distributor is being installed, observe the rotor moving in a clockwise direction about 42 degrees. 7. Once the distributor is completely seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the mark on the distributor base (1). - If the rotor segment is not aligned with the number 1 mark, the driven gear teeth and the camshaft have meshed one or more teeth out of alignment. - In order to correct this condition, remove the distributor and reinstall the distributor. 8. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 9. Install the distributor cap. 10. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 11. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2924 12. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 13. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 14. Refer to installation procedure 2 if malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 1. Rotate the crankshaft balancer clockwise until the alignment marks on the crankshaft balancer are aligned with the tabs on the engine front cover and the number 1 piston is at top dead center of the compression stroke. IMPORTANT: Rotate the number 1 cylinder to TDC of the compression stroke. The engine front cover has 2 alignment tabs and the crankshaft balancer has 2 alignment marks (spaced 90 degrees apart) which are used for positioning number 1 piston at TDC. With the piston on the compression stroke and at top dead center, the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (1) must align with the engine front cover tab (2) and the crankshaft balancer alignment mark (4) must align with the engine front cover tab (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2925 2. Align white paint mark on the bottom stem of the distributor, and the pre-drilled indent hole in the bottom of the gear (3). 3. Installing the driven gear 180 degrees out of alignment, or locating the rotor in the wrong holes, will cause a no-start condition. Premature engine wear or damage may result. NOTE: The ignition system distributor driven gear and rotor may be installed in multiple positions. In order to avoid mistakes, mark the distributor on the following components in order to ensure the same mounting position upon reassembly: - The distributor driven gear - The distributor shaft - The rotor holes With the gear in this position, the rotor segment should be positioned as shown for a V6 engine (1) or V8 engine (2). - The alignment will not be exact. - If the driven gear is installed incorrectly, the dimple will be approximately 180 degrees opposite of the rotor segment when the gear is installed in the distributor. 4. Using a long screw driver, align the oil pump drive shaft to the drive tab of the distributor. 5. Guide the distributor into the engine. Ensure that the spark plug towers are perpendicular to the centerline of the engine. 6. Once the distributor is fully seated, the rotor segment should be aligned with the pointer cast into the distributor base. - There may be a 6 cast into this pointer, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 6 cylinder engine or an 8, indicating that the distributor is to be used on a 8 cylinder engine. - If the rotor segment does not come within a few degrees of the pointer, the gear mesh between the distributor and the camshaft may be off a tooth or more. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Overhaul > Page 2926 - If this is the case, repeat the procedure again in order to achieve proper alignment. 7. Install the distributor mounting clamp bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the distributor clamp bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 8. Install the distributor cap. 9. Install 2 new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 10. Install the electrical connector to the distributor. 11. Install the spark plug wires to the distributor cap. 12. Install the ignition coil wire.Note the correct orientation of the wire boot. 13. Repeat installation procedure 2 if the malfunction indicator lamp is turned ON after installing the distributor. IMPORTANT: If the MIL is turned ON after installing the distributor, and a DTC P1345 is found, the distributor has been installed incorrectly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. .........................................................1,000 ohms per ft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2930 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires-Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: - Tearing - Piercing - Arcing - Carbon tracking - Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2931 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG WIRE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wire at each spark plug. - Twist the boots 1/2 turn before removing the boots. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wire from each spark plug. 2. Disconnect the spark plug wire from the distributor. - Twist each spark plug boot 1/2 turn. - Pull only on the boot or use a tool designed for this purpose in order to remove the wires from the distributor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the spark plug wires at the distributor. NOTE: If the boot to wire movement has occurred, the boot will give a false visual impression of being fully seated. Ensure that the boots have been properly assembled by pushing sideways on the installed boots. Failure to properly seat the terminal onto the spark plug will lead to wire core erosion and result in an engine misfire or crossfire condition, and possible internal damage to the engine. 2. Install the spark plug wire to each spark plug. 3. Inspect the wires for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. 3. Wire routings must be kept intact during service and followed exactly when wires have been disconnected or when replacement of the wires is necessary. Failure to route the wires properly can lead to radio ignition noise and cross firing of the plugs, or shorting of the leads to the ground. 4. Any time the spark plug wires or boots are installed on the spark plugs, new dielectric grease needs to be applied inside the boot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams Ignition Coil Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2935 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation IGNITION COIL AND ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2936 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL(S) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly (2) and nut (1). 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the ignition coil wire to the distributor. 4. Remove the accelerator cable bracket. 5. Remove the studs holding the bracket and the ignition coil to the intake manifold. 6. Remove the bracket and the ignition coil. 7. Drill and punch out the two rivets holding the ignition coil to the bracket. 8. Remove the ignition coil from the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2937 1. Install the ignition coil to the bracket with the 2 screws. IMPORTANT: A replacement ignition coil kit comes with 2 screws in order to attach the ignition coil to the bracket. 2. Install the ignition coil and the bracket to the intake manifold with studs. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the studs to 11 N.m (97 lb in). 3. Install the accelerator control bracket. Tighten the accelerator control cable bracket nuts and studs to 12 N.m (8.9 lb ft). 4. Install the ignition coil wire.The wire must not touch anything like the dip stick. Rubbing will make a ground or short after time of use. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2938 5. Install the electrical connectors. 6. Install the air cleaner assembly (2) and nut (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION COIL AND ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair IGNITION CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Remove 2 screws (4) holding the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) to the bracket. 3. Remove the ignition control module and heat sink. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) on the bracket with the 2 screws (4). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2948 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2951 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2952 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations Ignition Coil, Ignition Control Module (ICM), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Throttle Body, And Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2957 Ignition Control Module (ICM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2958 Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION COIL AND ICM The ICM is connected to the PCM by an ignition control (IC) circuit. The ICM also has a ground circuit and shares an ignition 1 voltage supply with the ignition coil. The coil driver in the ICM controls current through the ignition coil based on signal pulses from the PCM. There is no back-up or by-pass function in the ICM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2959 Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair IGNITION CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Remove 2 screws (4) holding the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) to the bracket. 3. Remove the ignition control module and heat sink. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ignition control module (2) and the heat sink (1) on the bracket with the 2 screws (4). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2966 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR The CMP sensor is a hall-effect sensor located in the ignition distributor base, and uses the same type of circuits as the CKP sensor. The CMP sensor signal is a digital ON/OFF pulse, output once per revolution of the camshaft. The CMP sensor information is used by the PCM to determine the position of the valve train relative to the CKP. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2967 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness connector from the distributor. 3. Remove the distributor cap screws. 4. Remove the distributor cap. 5. Remove the rotor screws. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2968 6. Remove the rotor. 7. Align the square slot in the reluctor wheel with the CMP sensor. 8. Remove the CMP screws. 9. Remove the CMP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the old cap, CMP sensor, and rotor screws. Use the replacement screws that have been coated with a thread locking compound. 1. Insert the CMP sensor through the reluctor wheel slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2969 2. Install new CMP mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 2.2 N.m (19 lb in). 3. Install the rotor onto the reluctor wheel. 4. Install new rotor screws. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 5. Install the distributor cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2970 6. Install new distributor cap screws. Tighten the screws to 2.4 N.m (21 lb in). 7. Connect the CMP sensor harness connector. 8. Connect the spark plug wires and ignition coil wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2976 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR The CKP sensor is a three wire sensor based on the magneto resistive principle. A magneto resistive sensor uses two magnetic pickups between a permanent magnet. As an element such as a reluctor wheel passes the magnets the resulting change in the magnetic field is used by the sensor electronics to produce a digital output pulse. The PCM supplies a 12-volt, low reference, and signal circuit to the CKP sensor. The sensor returns a digital ON/OFF pulse 3 times per crankshaft revolution for the V6 engine, 4 times for the V8 engine. The CKP sensor reads the crankshaft mounted reluctor wheel to identify pairs of cylinders at top dead center (TDC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP System Variation Learn Procedure CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 3. Select the crankshaft position variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn the A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Camshaft position (CMP) signal activity-If there is a CMP signal condition, refer to the applicable DTC. - Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP system variation learn procedure with the scan tool. 6. Accelerate to WOT. IMPORTANT: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 7. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 8. The scan tool display reads Test In Progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP variation learn procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information for the applicable DTC. 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether or not DTC P0315 is set: An engine replacement - A PCM replacement - A harmonic balancer replacement - A crankshaft replacement - A CKP sensor replacement - Any engine repairs which disturb the crankshaft to CKP sensor relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2979 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Replacement CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: The CKP system variation learn procedure will need to be performed whenever the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is removed or replaced. Refer to CKP System Variation Learn Procedure. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with the underbody shield package, then remove the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. 3. Remove the steering linkage shield. 4. Disconnect the CKP sensor harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2980 5. Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolt. 6. Remove the CKP sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: When installing the CKP sensor, make sure the sensor is fully seated before tightening the mounting bolt. A poorly seated CKP sensor may perform erratically and may set false DTCs. - DO NOT reuse the original O-ring. 1. Replace the CKP sensor O-ring. 2. Lubricate the O-ring with clean engine oil before installing the CKP sensor. 3. Install the CKP sensor. IMPORTANT: Make sure the CKP sensor mounting surface is clean and free of burrs. 4. Install the CKP sensor mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > CKP System Variation Learn Procedure > Page 2981 Tighten the CKP sensor mounting bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the CKP sensor harness connector. 6. Install the steering linkage shield. 7. Install the steering linkage shield mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor And Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2985 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor, Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve, And Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor, Knock Sensor (KS), And Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Knock Sensor (KS) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2988 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PURPOSE The knock sensor (KS) system enables the control module to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The control module uses the KS system to test for abnormal engine noise that may indicate detonation, also known as spark knock. SENSOR DESCRIPTION This KS system uses one or two flat response two-wire sensors. The sensor uses piezo-electric crystal technology that produces an AC voltage signal of varying amplitude and frequency based on the engine vibration or noise level. The amplitude and frequency are dependant upon the level of knock that the KS detects. The control module receives the KS signal through a signal circuit. The KS ground is supplied by the control module through a low reference circuit. The control module learns a minimum noise level, or background noise, at idle from the KS and uses calibrated values for the rest of the RPM range. The control module uses the minimum noise level to calculate a noise channel. A normal KS signal will ride within the noise channel. As engine speed and load change, the noise channel upper and lower parameters will change to accommodate the normal KS signal, keeping the signal within the channel. In order to determine which cylinders are knocking, the control module only uses KS signal information when each cylinder is near top dead center (TDC) of the firing stroke. If knock is present, the signal will range outside of the noise channel. If the control module has determined that knock is present, it will retard the ignition timing to attempt to eliminate the knock. The control module will always try to work back to a zero compensation level, or no spark retard. An abnormal KS signal will stay outside of the noise channel or will not be present. KS diagnostics are calibrated to detect faults with the KS circuitry inside the control module, the KS wiring, or the KS voltage output. Some diagnostics are also calibrated to detect constant noise from an outside influence such as a loose/damaged component or excessive engine mechanical noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2989 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the distributor. 3. Remove the fuel pipes. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 5. Remove the knock sensor retaining bolt (1). 6. Remove the knock sensor (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knock sensor (2) and bolt (1). NOTE: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sensor to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Connect the knock sensor harness connector (3). 3. Install the fuel pipes. 4. Install the distributor. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 15 Nm (11.0 lb ft) Spark Plug Gap ................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 1.52 mm (0.060 in) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2993 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. AC R41-932 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2994 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection SPARK PLUG INSPECTION SPARK PLUG USAGE 1. Ensure that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. 2. Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling-Colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage-Hotter plug SPARK PLUG INSPECTION 1. Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. 2. Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. 3. Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2995 4. Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Refer to Ignition System Specifications. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. A rattling sound indicates internal damage. - A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes (3, 4) reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. 5. Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. SPARK PLUG VISUAL INSPECTION 1. Normal operation-Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. 2. Carbon Fouled-Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures - Leaking fuel injectors - Excessive fuel pressure - Restricted air filter element - Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output Weak coils - Worn ignition wires - Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. 3. Deposit Fouling-Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2996 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the spark plug wires. 2. Loosen each spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or air blast away any dirt from around the spark plugs. 4. Remove the spark plugs 1 at a time. Place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder numbers. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2997 1. Properly position each spark plug washer. 2. Inspect each spark plug gap. Adjust each plug as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.524 mm (0.060 in) 3. Hand start the spark plugs in the corresponding cylinders. 4. Tighten the spark plugs. - For used heads tighten the spark plugs to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). - For new aluminum heads tighten the spark plugs to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). - For new iron heads tighten the spark plugs to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the spark plug wires. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3004 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3005 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3006 Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3011 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3012 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3013 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3017 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3018 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3019 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3022 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3023 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3024 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3025 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3026 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3027 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3028 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3029 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3030 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3031 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3032 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3033 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3034 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3035 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3036 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3037 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3038 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3039 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3040 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3041 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3042 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3043 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3044 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3045 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3046 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3047 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3048 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Control and Shift Solenoids Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 2. Important: Do not remove the valve body for this procedures. Removal of the 1-2 accumulator is necessary only if servicing the pressure control solenoid. Remove the 1-2 accumulator if necessary. 3. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 5. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 6. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 7. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3049 8. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid. Installation Procedure 1. Install the 3-2 control solenoid. 2. Install the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 3. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. 4. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid.Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3050 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 7. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 8. Install the 1-2 accumulator. 9. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3054 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3055 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3058 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3059 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3060 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3061 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3062 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3063 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3064 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3065 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3066 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3067 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3068 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3069 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3070 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3071 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3072 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3073 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3074 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3075 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3076 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3077 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3078 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3079 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3080 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3081 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3082 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3083 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid, TCC Solenoid, and Wiring Harness ^ Tools Required J 28458 Seal Protector Retainer Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and the filter. 3. Disconnect the transmission harness 20-way connector from the transmission internal harness pass-through connector. Depress both tabs on the connector and pull straight up; do not pry the connector. 4. Important: Removal of the valve body is not necessary for this procedure. Remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly. Do not remove the spacer plate. 5. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3084 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid in order to access one of the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 8. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 10. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining bolts and the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness. 11. Using J 28458, release the pass-through electrical connector from the transmission case. 1. Use the small end of the J 28458 over the top of the connector. 2. Twist in order to release the four tabs retaining the connector. 3. Pull the harness connector down through the transmission case. 1. Remove the TCC solenoid (with O-ring seal) and wiring harness assembly from the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3085 2. Inspect the TCC solenoid and wiring harness assembly for these defects: ^ Damage ^ Cracked connectors ^ Exposed wires ^ Loose pins Installation Procedure 1. Install the wiring harness and TCC solenoid assembly with a new O-ring seal to the transmission. 2. Install the pass-through electrical connector to the transmission case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness and install the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the control valve body retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the TCC solenoid retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3086 4. Install the pressure control solenoid. Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. Install the TCC PWM solenoid to the control valve body. 7. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 8. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 9. Install the 1-2 accumulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3087 10. Connect the transmission harness 20-way connector to the transmission pass-through connector. Align the arrows on each half of the connector and insert straight down. 11. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3093 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3094 Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3097 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3098 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3099 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-04-21-002 Date: March 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Guidelines for Replacement of Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) Models: 2005 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with New Venture Gear (NVG) Transfer Case (RPOs NP1, NP4, NP8) Dealers are replacing the TCCM unnecessarily. Dealers are replacing the TCCM with codes stored in HISTORY only. The TCCM does not have a current fault condition when tested. Parts reviewed at the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) have a 75% No Trouble Found (NTF) rate. The only two legitimate reasons to replace the TCCM are: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C0550 ^ NO Communication with a scan tool. DTC C0550 This DTC indicates that the module has an internal fault and should be replaced. No Communication ^ The no communication conditions referenced here are also caused by a module internal fault to a point where the module physically will not talk. A technician cannot pull DTCs from the module because it will not communicate. The module is electrically dead. ^ No communication is not to be confused with a U1026 code. This code tells the technician that the module may still be functioning but is temporarily off line. This code may be set by the Instrument Panel (IP) or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) against the TCCM. The technician needs to figure out why the module went off line. These are typically caused by connection concerns. There is no need to replace a TCCM for a U1026 DTC. Diagnostic Aids ^ When diagnosing a transfer case electrical control system, ALWAYS check power and ground wiring first. ^ Test the connections for intermittent or poor connections, complete plug insertion, bent pins, pushed out terminals and water contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement > Page 3116 Pay particular attention to the terminal connections at the module. Spread or open terminal connections may create an intermittent contact. Do a pin drag test. Refer to the terminal testing information in the table shown. ^ After repairs are complete, ALWAYS clear DTCs from the module prior to a system function test. If codes are not cleared first, the system will not function after repair. The technician may erroneously think that the system is still down and that further repairs are needed. Warranty Dealers who unnecessarily replace the TCCM that are found to have No Trouble Found (NTF) at the WPC will be returned to the AVM (Area Service Manager), or the DSM (District Service Manager) in Canada, through the Regional Feedback Process and may be charged back for the repair through the WINS system. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Control Module: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3119 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3120 Control Module: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3121 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3122 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 3125 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 3126 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 3127 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3133 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Regulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to release tension on the reverse boost valve retaining ring. 4. Remove the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 5. Remove the reverse boost valve sleeve (5) and the reverse boost valve (4). 6. Remove the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 7. Remove the pressure regulator valve (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure regulator valve (1). 2. Install the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 3. Install the reverse boost valve (4) in the reverse boost valve sleeve (5). 4. Install the reverse boost valve (4) and sleeve (5) in the oil pump cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3134 5. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to expose the retaining ring slot. 6. Install the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 7. Install the transmission oil filter and pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams Tow/Haul Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3138 Tow/Haul Switch: Testing and Inspection Tow/Haul Switch/Indicator Always On or Inoperative Circuit Description Tow/haul mode enables the operator to achieve enhanced shift performance when towing or hauling a load. When tow/haul mode is selected, the tow/haul switch input signal to the body control module (BCM) is momentarily toggled to zero volts. This signals the powertrain control module (PCM) to extend the length of time between upshifts and increase transmission line pressure. Cycling the tow/haul switch again disables tow/haul mode and returns the transmission to a normal shift pattern. Diagnostic Aids Inspect the connectors at the BCM, and all other circuit connecting points for an intermittent condition. Inspect the circuit wiring for an intermittent condition. If the electrical circuit checks are OK and the tow/haul shift pattern is not occurring, there may be a mechanical/hydraulic condition that prevents tow/haul operation. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3139 Steps 1-8 Test Description These numbers correspond to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This step tests for a faulty tow/haul switch. 3. This step tests for voltage input from the BCM to the tow/haul switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3143 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3144 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3145 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Gear Sensor/Switch, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the backup lamp switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The backup lamp switch has pre-applied thread sealant on the threads. Install the backup lamp switch. ^ Tighten the backup lamp switch to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3155 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3156 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3157 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3160 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3165 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Remove the vacuum line for the transfer case vacuum switch. 5. Remove the transfer case vacuum switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case vacuum switch ^ Tighten the transfer case vacuum switch to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case vacuum switch vacuum line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3168 3. Install the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Install the transfer case brace bolts. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt at the engine to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the transfer case brace bolt at the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the transfer case shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3169 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3170 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3171 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3178 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3179 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3180 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3181 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3182 Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3185 2. Install the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the front propeller shaft. 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3186 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case right rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the transfer case shield. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3187 Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor into the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case left rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 05-06-04-077 > Dec > 05 > Engine Controls - Lack of Power When Hot PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Lack of Power When Hot Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-077 Date: December 22, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Lack of Power (LU3 Engine) at High Ambient Temperatures Only (If Necessary, Reprogram PCM with New Service Calibration) Models: 2003-2005 Chevrolet Astro, Blazer, Express, S-10, Silverado 2003-2005 GMC Jimmy, Safari, Savana, Sierra, Sonoma with 4.3L Vortec(TM) V6 Engine (VIN X - RPO LU3) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle may exhibit a lack of power at high ambient temperatures. Cause Engineering has identified a concern with the PCM software. In high ambient temperatures, the engine control management system may falsely retard the timing, causing a noticeable loss of power. Correction Important: Before Reprogramming the PCM, verify the customer concern. Refer to SI Engine Controls and under Diagnostic Information and Procedures. Refer to Lack of Power, Sluggishness, or Sponginess for the cause of the low power condition at high ambient temperatures. If no trouble is found, then reprogram the PCM. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations if the above concern is encountered. An updated PCM calibration is now available to address this concern. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The new PCM calibrations will be available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 12.5, which was broadcast to dealers on 12/11/2005. For the dealerships that use CDs, the CD version will be 1.0 for 2006, which will be mailed 0111212006. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 05-06-04-077 > Dec > 05 > Engine Controls - Lack of Power When Hot PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Lack of Power When Hot Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-077 Date: December 22, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Lack of Power (LU3 Engine) at High Ambient Temperatures Only (If Necessary, Reprogram PCM with New Service Calibration) Models: 2003-2005 Chevrolet Astro, Blazer, Express, S-10, Silverado 2003-2005 GMC Jimmy, Safari, Savana, Sierra, Sonoma with 4.3L Vortec(TM) V6 Engine (VIN X - RPO LU3) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle may exhibit a lack of power at high ambient temperatures. Cause Engineering has identified a concern with the PCM software. In high ambient temperatures, the engine control management system may falsely retard the timing, causing a noticeable loss of power. Correction Important: Before Reprogramming the PCM, verify the customer concern. Refer to SI Engine Controls and under Diagnostic Information and Procedures. Refer to Lack of Power, Sluggishness, or Sponginess for the cause of the low power condition at high ambient temperatures. If no trouble is found, then reprogram the PCM. Reprogram the PCM with the latest calibrations if the above concern is encountered. An updated PCM calibration is now available to address this concern. This calibration, or any that follow, is designed to address this concern. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) using the appropriate Service Information (SI) procedures. The new PCM calibrations will be available to dealerships as part of TIS2000 incremental satellite update version 12.5, which was broadcast to dealers on 12/11/2005. For the dealerships that use CDs, the CD version will be 1.0 for 2006, which will be mailed 0111212006. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3207 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3208 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3209 Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3214 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3215 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3216 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3220 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3221 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3222 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3225 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3226 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3227 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3228 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3229 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3230 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3231 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3232 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3233 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3234 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3235 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3236 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3237 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3238 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3239 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3240 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3241 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3242 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3243 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3244 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3245 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3246 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3247 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3248 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3249 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3250 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3251 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Control and Shift Solenoids Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 2. Important: Do not remove the valve body for this procedures. Removal of the 1-2 accumulator is necessary only if servicing the pressure control solenoid. Remove the 1-2 accumulator if necessary. 3. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 5. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 6. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 7. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3252 8. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid. Installation Procedure 1. Install the 3-2 control solenoid. 2. Install the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 3. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. 4. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid.Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3253 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 7. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 8. Install the 1-2 accumulator. 9. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3257 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3258 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3261 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3262 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3263 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3264 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3265 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3266 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3267 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3268 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3269 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3270 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3271 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3272 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3273 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3274 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3275 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3276 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3277 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3278 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3279 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3280 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3281 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3282 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3283 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3284 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3285 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3286 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid, TCC Solenoid, and Wiring Harness ^ Tools Required J 28458 Seal Protector Retainer Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and the filter. 3. Disconnect the transmission harness 20-way connector from the transmission internal harness pass-through connector. Depress both tabs on the connector and pull straight up; do not pry the connector. 4. Important: Removal of the valve body is not necessary for this procedure. Remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly. Do not remove the spacer plate. 5. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3287 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid in order to access one of the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 8. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 10. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining bolts and the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness. 11. Using J 28458, release the pass-through electrical connector from the transmission case. 1. Use the small end of the J 28458 over the top of the connector. 2. Twist in order to release the four tabs retaining the connector. 3. Pull the harness connector down through the transmission case. 1. Remove the TCC solenoid (with O-ring seal) and wiring harness assembly from the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3288 2. Inspect the TCC solenoid and wiring harness assembly for these defects: ^ Damage ^ Cracked connectors ^ Exposed wires ^ Loose pins Installation Procedure 1. Install the wiring harness and TCC solenoid assembly with a new O-ring seal to the transmission. 2. Install the pass-through electrical connector to the transmission case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness and install the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the control valve body retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the TCC solenoid retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3289 4. Install the pressure control solenoid. Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. Install the TCC PWM solenoid to the control valve body. 7. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 8. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 9. Install the 1-2 accumulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3290 10. Connect the transmission harness 20-way connector to the transmission pass-through connector. Align the arrows on each half of the connector and insert straight down. 11. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3296 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3297 Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3300 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3301 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 3302 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3308 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3309 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3310 Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3315 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3316 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3317 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3321 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3322 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3323 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3326 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3327 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3328 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3329 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3330 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3331 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3332 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3333 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3334 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3335 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3336 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3337 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3338 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3339 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3340 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3341 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3342 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3343 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3344 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3345 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3346 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3347 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3348 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3349 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3350 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3351 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3352 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Control and Shift Solenoids Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 2. Important: Do not remove the valve body for this procedures. Removal of the 1-2 accumulator is necessary only if servicing the pressure control solenoid. Remove the 1-2 accumulator if necessary. 3. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 5. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 6. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 7. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3353 8. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid. Installation Procedure 1. Install the 3-2 control solenoid. 2. Install the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 3. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. 4. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid.Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3354 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 7. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 8. Install the 1-2 accumulator. 9. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3358 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3359 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3362 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3363 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3364 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3365 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3366 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3367 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3368 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3369 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3370 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3371 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3372 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3373 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3374 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3375 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3376 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3377 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3378 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3379 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3380 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3381 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3382 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3383 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3384 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3385 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3386 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3387 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid, TCC Solenoid, and Wiring Harness ^ Tools Required J 28458 Seal Protector Retainer Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and the filter. 3. Disconnect the transmission harness 20-way connector from the transmission internal harness pass-through connector. Depress both tabs on the connector and pull straight up; do not pry the connector. 4. Important: Removal of the valve body is not necessary for this procedure. Remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly. Do not remove the spacer plate. 5. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3388 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid in order to access one of the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 8. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 10. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining bolts and the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness. 11. Using J 28458, release the pass-through electrical connector from the transmission case. 1. Use the small end of the J 28458 over the top of the connector. 2. Twist in order to release the four tabs retaining the connector. 3. Pull the harness connector down through the transmission case. 1. Remove the TCC solenoid (with O-ring seal) and wiring harness assembly from the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3389 2. Inspect the TCC solenoid and wiring harness assembly for these defects: ^ Damage ^ Cracked connectors ^ Exposed wires ^ Loose pins Installation Procedure 1. Install the wiring harness and TCC solenoid assembly with a new O-ring seal to the transmission. 2. Install the pass-through electrical connector to the transmission case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness and install the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the control valve body retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the TCC solenoid retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3390 4. Install the pressure control solenoid. Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. Install the TCC PWM solenoid to the control valve body. 7. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 8. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 9. Install the 1-2 accumulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3391 10. Connect the transmission harness 20-way connector to the transmission pass-through connector. Align the arrows on each half of the connector and insert straight down. 11. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis Accumulator: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-030B Date: October 18, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Diagnostic Information on Harsh 1-2 Upshift Models: 2001-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E or 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-030A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The following four conditions have been found to cause the majority of consistent, harsh 1-2 shift comments. ^ Chips/Sediment/Debris/Contamination found in the valve body, 1-2 accumulator valve (371) bore, may cause the 1-2 accumulator valve to stick or hang-up. ^ Chips/Sediment/Debris/Contamination found in the valve body, 4-3 sequence valve (383) bore, may cause the 4-3 sequence valve to stick or hang-up. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3396 A cracked 1-2 accumulator piston (56) that is allowing fluid to leak by. Mislocated/Missing valve body-to-spacer plate check balls (61). When attempting to correct a consistent harsh 1-2 shift, the four conditions listed above should be inspected as possible causes. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual for further possible causes of this condition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3397 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3398 This diagnostic table should be used when addressing a harsh 1-2 shift concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3399 Accumulator: Service and Repair Accumulator Assembly, Spacer Plate, and Gaskets ^ Tools Required J 25025-B Pump and Valve Body Alignment Pin Set - J 36850 Transjel Lubricant Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Important: The 1-2 accumulator can be removed without removing the control valve assembly. Remove the control valve body. 4. Remove the accumulator cover retaining bolts. 5. Remove the 1-2 accumulator cover assembly. 6. Disassemble the 1-2 accumulator. 1. Blow compressed air into the 1-2 accumulator cover, as shown, to remove the 1-2 accumulator piston. 2. Remove the 1-2 accumulator inner and outer springs. 7. Inspect the 1-2 accumulator inner and outer springs for cracks. 8. Remove the 1-2 accumulator piston seal (1) from the 1-2 accumulator piston. 9. Inspect the 1-2 accumulator piston for these defects: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3400 ^ Porosity ^ Cracks ^ Scoring ^ Nicks and scratches 1. Inspect the 1-2 accumulator cover for these defects: ^ Porosity ^ Cracks ^ Scoring ^ Nicks and scratches 2. Remove the spacer plate support retaining bolts. 3. Important: Use care not to drop these items that will be removed along with the spacer plate: ^ The number 1 checkball ^ The 3-4 accumulator spring ^ The 3-4 accumulator pin Remove the spacer plate support. 4. Remove the spacer plate to valve body gasket, the spacer plate and the spacer plate to transmission case gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3401 5. Remove the 3-4 accumulator piston (2). 6. Inspect the 3-4 accumulator spring for cracks. 7. Remove the 3-4 accumulator piston seal (1) from the 3-4 accumulator piston. 8. Inspect the 3-4 accumulator piston for these defects: ^ Porosity ^ Cracks ^ Scoring ^ Nicks and scratches Installation Procedure 1. Install a new 3-4 accumulator piston seal (1) to the 3-4 accumulator piston. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3402 2. Install the 3-4 accumulator pin (1) into the transmission case and retain the pin with J 36850. 3. Install the 3-4 accumulator piston (2) onto the pin (1) in the transmission case.Ensure that the 3-4 accumulator piston legs face away from the transmission case. 4. Install the J 25025-B (2, 3) to the transmission case. 5. Install the spacer plate to transmission case gasket and the spacer plate to valve body gasket to the spacer plate; use J 36850 in order to retain the gaskets to the spacer plate. ^ The case gasket is identified by a C. Be sure to place the case gasket on the transmission case side of the spacer plate. ^ The valve body gasket is identified by a V. Be sure to place the valve body gasket on the valve body side of the spacer plate. 6. Ensure that the solenoid screens (1, 2) are in place on the spacer plate. 7. Place the checkball (3) on the spacer plate in the location shown. 8. Place the 3-4 accumulator spring (4) on the spacer plate. 9. Install the spacer plate and related components to the transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3403 10. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the spacer plate support and the spacer plate support retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the spacer plate support retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 11. After installing the spacer plate support (2), look through the hole in the spacer plate to ensure that the checkball (1) has remained in the proper location. 12. Install a new 1-2 accumulator piston seal (1) to the 1-2 accumulator piston. 13. Install the 1-2 accumulator inner and outer springs to the 1-2 accumulator cover. 14. Install the 1-2 accumulator piston onto the pin in the 1-2 accumulator cover. Ensure that the piston legs face the accumulator cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3404 15. Install the 1-2 accumulator cover and the accumulator cover retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the accumulator cover retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 16. Remove the J 25025-B from the transmission case. 17. Install the control valve body. 18. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 19. Lower the vehicle. 20. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair 2-4 Servo ^ Tools Required J 29714-A Servo Cover Depressor Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Support the transmission with a suitable jack. 3. Remove the transmission support. 4. Remove the exhaust manifold pipe. 5. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 6. Lower the transmission just enough to gain access to the oil cooler lines. 7. Disconnect the oil cooler lines, if necessary, to gain access to the 2-4 servo. 8. Remove the oil pan bolt below and to the left of the 2-4 servo cover. 9. Install the J 29714-A to the oil pan rail. 10. Tighten the bolt on the J 29714-A in order to compress the servo cover. 11. Remove the servo cover retaining ring. 12. Loosen the bolt on the J 29714-A to release tension on the servo cover. 13. Remove the servo cover and O-ring seal. If the cover is hung up on the seal, use a pick (2) to pull and stretch the seal (1) out of the groove. Cut and remove the O-ring seal before removing the cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3408 14. Remove the 2-4 servo assembly from the transmission. 15. Inspect the 4th apply piston, the 2-4 servo converter, 2nd apply piston, and the piston inner housing for these defects: ^ Cracks ^ Scoring ^ Burrs and nicks Installation Procedure 1. Install the new seals on the pistons and the servo cover. 2. Lubricate the seals with clean transmission fluid. 3. Install the 2-4 servo assembly into the 2-4 servo bore. 4. Install the servo cover and O-ring seal. 5. Install the J 29714-A. 6. Tighten the bolt on the J 29714-A in order to compress the servo cover. 7. Install the servo cover retaining ring. 8. Remove the J 29714-A from the oil pan flange. 9. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan bolt. ^ Tighten the oil pan bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 10. Connect the oil cooler lines to the transmission, if removed. 11. Raise the transmission into place. 12. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 13. Install the exhaust manifold pipe. 14. Install the transmission support. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3409 15. Remove the transmission jack. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Cracked Case Diagnosis Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cracked Case Diagnosis Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-024B Date: August 18, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Diagnosis of Cracked or Broken Transmission Case Models: 2006 and Prior Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 and Prior HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60/4L60-E/4L65-E or 4L80-E/4L85-E or Allison(R) Series 1000 Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-024A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Diagnosing the cause of a cracked or broken transmission case requires additional diagnosis and repair or a repeat failure will occur. A cracked or broken transmission case is most often the result of abnormal external torsional forces acting on the transmission case. If none of the conditions listed below are apparent, an internal transmission component inspection may be required. Repairs of this type may be the result of external damage or abuse for which General Motors is not responsible. They are not the result of defects in materials or workmanship. If in doubt, contact your General Motors Service Representative. The following items should be considered: ^ It is important to inspect the vehicle for signs of an out of line condition, impact damage or foreign material to the following components: - The transmission - The engine mounts - The transmission rear mount and crossmember - Vehicle frame damage that alters the front to rear alignment of the driveshaft - The driveshafts (both front and rear) - The wheels (caked with mud, concrete, etc.) - The tires (roundness, lack of cupping, excessive balance weights) - The transfer case (if the vehicle is 4WD) ^ A worn or damaged driveshaft U-Joint has shown to be a frequent cause of transmission case cracking, especially on vehicles that see extended periods of highway driving. Always inspect the U-joint condition when diagnosing this condition. ^ For driveshaft damage or imbalance, Inspect the driveshafts (both front and rear) for dents, straightness/runout or signs of missing balance weights. Also, inspect for foreign material such as undercoat sprayed on the driveshaft. ^ The driveshaft working angles may be excessive or non-canceling, especially if the vehicle carrying height has been altered (lifted or lowered) or if the frame has been extended or modified. ^ Damaged or worn upper or lower rear control arms or bushings. ^ A rear axle that is not seated in the rear spring properly (leaf spring vehicles). ^ Broken rear springs and or worn leaf spring bushings. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Cracked Case Diagnosis > Page 3414 In some cases, the customer may not comment about a vibration but it is important to test drive the vehicle while using the electronic vibration analysis tool in an attempt to locate the cause of the torsional vibration. Refer to the Vibration Diagnosis and Correction sub-section of the appropriate Service Manual for more details on diagnosing and correcting vibrations. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 3423 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 3433 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-027 Date: June 04, 2008 Subject: No Movement When Transmission is Shifted to Drive or Third - Normal Operation When Shifted to Second, First or Reverse (Replace Forward Sprag Assembly) Models: 1982 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 - 2007 Buick Rainier 2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006 Chevrolet SSR 2006 - 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Colorado, Express, Silverado Classic, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 GMC Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2006 - 2008 GMC Canyon, Envoy, Savana, Sierra Classic, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006 - 2007 HUMMER H2 2006 - 2008 HUMMER H3 2006 - 2008 Saab 9-7X with 4L60, 4L60E, 4L65E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30, M32, M33 or M70) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle has no movement when the transmission is shifted to DRIVE or THIRD position, but there is normal operation when it is shifted to SECOND, FIRST or REVERSE position. Cause This condition may be caused by a damaged forward sprag assembly (642). Correction When inspecting the sprag, it is important to test the sprag for proper operation by holding the outer race (644) with one hand while rotating the input sun gear (640) with the other hand. The sun gear should rotate only in the counterclockwise direction with the input sun gear facing upward. If the sprag rotates in both directions or will not rotate in either direction, the sprag elements should be inspected by removing one of the sprag assembly retaining rings (643). Refer to SI Unit Repair section for forward clutch sprag disassembly procedures. If the sprag is found to be damaged, make repairs to the transmission as necessary. A new forward roller clutch sprag assembly is now available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 3447 If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the Pressure Control (PC) solenoid valve (377) fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid (377) as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J45096. Refer to SI Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test for the procedure. The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The following information applies when this sprag is used in 1982-86 transmissions. The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 3448 interchangeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-027 Date: June 04, 2008 Subject: No Movement When Transmission is Shifted to Drive or Third - Normal Operation When Shifted to Second, First or Reverse (Replace Forward Sprag Assembly) Models: 1982 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 - 2007 Buick Rainier 2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006 Chevrolet SSR 2006 - 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Colorado, Express, Silverado Classic, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 GMC Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2006 - 2008 GMC Canyon, Envoy, Savana, Sierra Classic, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006 - 2007 HUMMER H2 2006 - 2008 HUMMER H3 2006 - 2008 Saab 9-7X with 4L60, 4L60E, 4L65E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30, M32, M33 or M70) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle has no movement when the transmission is shifted to DRIVE or THIRD position, but there is normal operation when it is shifted to SECOND, FIRST or REVERSE position. Cause This condition may be caused by a damaged forward sprag assembly (642). Correction When inspecting the sprag, it is important to test the sprag for proper operation by holding the outer race (644) with one hand while rotating the input sun gear (640) with the other hand. The sun gear should rotate only in the counterclockwise direction with the input sun gear facing upward. If the sprag rotates in both directions or will not rotate in either direction, the sprag elements should be inspected by removing one of the sprag assembly retaining rings (643). Refer to SI Unit Repair section for forward clutch sprag disassembly procedures. If the sprag is found to be damaged, make repairs to the transmission as necessary. A new forward roller clutch sprag assembly is now available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 3458 If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the Pressure Control (PC) solenoid valve (377) fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid (377) as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J45096. Refer to SI Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test for the procedure. The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The following information applies when this sprag is used in 1982-86 transmissions. The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 3459 interchangeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Extension Housing: Service and Repair Transmission Extension Housing Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 3. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 4. Remove the propeller shaft. 5. Remove the transmission mount. 6. Remove the case extension bolts (1). 7. Remove the case extension (2). 8. Remove and discard the case extension O ring seal (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install a new case extension O ring seal (3). 2. Install the case extension (2). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the case extension bolts (1). ^ Tighten the case extension bolts (1) to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the transmission mount. 5. Install the propeller shaft. 6. Remove the drain pan and the transmission jack. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-037E Date: April 07, 2011 Subject: Release of DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saturn Relay 2005 and Prior Saturn L-Series 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2005-2008 Saturn VUE with 4T45-E 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Except 2008 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Equinox Except 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Epica Except 2007 and Prior Chevrolet Optra Except 2008 and Prior Pontiac Torrent, Vibe, Wave Except 2003-2005 Saturn ION with CVT or AF23 Only Except 1991-2002 Saturn S-Series Except 2008 and Prior Saturn VUE with CVT, AF33 or 5AT (MJ7/MJ8) Transmission Only Except 2008 Saturn Astra Attention: DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-037D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSFER CASES and POWER STEERING The content of this bulletin does not apply to manual transmissions or transfer cases. Any vehicle that previously required DEXRON(R)-III for a manual transmission or transfer case should now use P/N 88861800. This fluid is labeled Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid. Some manual transmissions and transfer cases require a different fluid. Appropriate references should be checked when servicing any of these components. Power Steering Systems should now use P/N 9985010 labeled Power Steering Fluid. Consult the Parts Catalog, Owner's Manual, or Service Information (SI) for fluid recommendations. Some of our customers and/or General Motors dealerships/Saturn Retailers may have some concerns with DEXRON(R)-VI and DEXRON(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and transmission warranty claims. DEXRON(R)-VI is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids (except as noted above). Please remember that the clean oil reservoirs of the J-45096 - Flushing and Flow Tester machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI for testing, flushing or filling General Motors transmissions/transaxles (except as noted above). DEXRON(R)-VI can be used in any proportion in past model vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission/transaxle in place of DEXRON(R)-III (i.e. topping off the fluid in the event of a repair or fluid change). DEXRON(R)-VI is also compatible with any former version of DEXRON(R) for use in automatic transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON(R)-VI ATF General Motors Powertrain has upgraded to DEXRON(R)-VI ATF with the start of 2006 vehicle production. Current and prior automatic transmission models that had used DEXRON(R)-III must now only use DEXRON(R)-VI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 3475 All 2006 and future model transmissions that use DEXRON(R)-VI are to be serviced ONLY with DEXRON(R)-VI fluid. DEXRON(R)-VI is an improvement over DEXRON(R)-III in the following areas: * These ATF change intervals remain the same as DEXRON(R)-III for the time being. 2006-2008 Transmission Fill and Cooler Flushing Some new applications of the 6L80 six speed transmission will require the use of the J 45096 Flushing and Flow Tester to accomplish transmission fluid fill. The clean oil reservoir of the machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 3476 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 3477 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Capacity Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill ..................................................................................................... ............................................................................................ 4.7L (5.0 Qt) 4L60-E/4L65-E Transmission Fluid Pan Removal ........................................................................................................ ............................................................................................. 4.7L (5.0 Qt) Overhaul ........................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... 10.6L (11.0 Qt) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3480 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ...................................... DEXRON III or Equivalent Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3481 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Transmission Fluid Checking Procedure Steps 1-17 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3482 Steps 18-20 1. Start the engine and operate the vehicle for 15 minutes or until the transmission fluid reaches an operating temperature of 82 - 93°C (180 - 200°F). 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 3. With your foot on the brake, move the shift lever through each gear range. Pause for about 3 seconds in each range, ending in PARK. 4. Apply the parking brake and let the engine idle for 3 minutes. 5. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator. Give the indicator a full twist in order to close. 6. Wait 3 seconds and remove the indicator. 7. Read both sides of the indicator. The fluid must be within the hot cross-hatched area using the lowest level reading. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Checking Procedure FLUID CHECKING PROCEDURE WHEN TO CHECK AND CHANGE A good time to check the automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the Maintenance schedule, and be sure to use the proper transaxle fluid. HOW TO CHECK Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: ^ When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). ^ At high speed for quite a while. ^ In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather. ^ While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to drive longer. CHECKING THE FLUID LEVEL Prepare the vehicle as follows: 1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear, pausing for about three seconds in each gear. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). 4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. 5. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: ^ The automatic transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the black loop located toward the rear of the engine. See Engine Compartment Overview for more information on location. ^ Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. ^ Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and pull it back out again. ^ Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the crosshatched area. ^ If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way. CONSISTENCY OF READINGS Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission breather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged. HOW TO ADD FLUID If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the dipstick. 1. Pull out the dipstick. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 liters). Do not overfill. NOTICE: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled other than DEXRON-III may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEXRON-III labeled automatic transaxle fluid. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check," earlier in this article. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 3485 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid/Filter Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When the transmission is at operating temperatures, take necessary precautions when removing the drain plug, to avoid being burned by draining fluid. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transmission oil pan. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 4. If necessary, remove the bolts and position aside the range selector cable bracket for clearance while lowering the pan. It is not necessary to remove the cable from the lever or bracket. 5. Remove the oil pan bolts from the front and sides of the pan only. 6. Loosen the rear oil pan bolts approximately 4 turns. 7. Lightly tap the oil pan with a rubber mallet in order to loosen the pan to allow the fluid to drain. 8. Remove the remaining oil pan bolts. 9. Remove the oil pan and the gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 3486 10. Grasp firmly while pulling down with a twisting motion in order to remove the filter. 11. Remove the filter seal. The filter seal may be stuck in the pump; if necessary, carefully use pliers or another suitable tool to remove the seal. 12. Discard the seal. 13. Inspect the fluid color. 14. Inspect the filter. Pry the metal crimping away from the top of the filter and pull apart. The filter may contain evidence for root cause diagnosis: ^ Clutch material ^ Bronze slivers indicating bushing wear ^ Steel particles 15. Clean the transmission case and the oil pan gasket surfaces with solvent, and air dry. You must remove all traces of the old gasket material. Installation Procedure 1. Coat the new filter seal with automatic transmission fluid. 2. Install the new filter seal into the transmission case. Tap the seal into place using a suitable size socket. 3. Install the new filter into the case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Checking Procedure > Page 3487 4. Install the oil pan and a new gasket. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan bolts. ^ Tighten the oil pan to transmission case bolts alternately and evenly to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. If previously removed, install the range selector cable bracket and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Apply a small amount of sealant GM P/N 12346004 to the threads of the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 8. Install the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. 11. Check the COLD fluid level reading for initial fill only. 12. Inspect the oil pan gasket for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Fluid/Filter Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: When the transmission is at operating temperatures, take necessary precautions when removing the drain plug, to avoid being burned by draining fluid. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the transmission oil pan. 3. Remove the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 4. If necessary, remove the bolts and position aside the range selector cable bracket for clearance while lowering the pan. It is not necessary to remove the cable from the lever or bracket. 5. Remove the oil pan bolts from the front and sides of the pan only. 6. Loosen the rear oil pan bolts approximately 4 turns. 7. Lightly tap the oil pan with a rubber mallet in order to loosen the pan to allow the fluid to drain. 8. Remove the remaining oil pan bolts. 9. Remove the oil pan and the gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3491 10. Grasp firmly while pulling down with a twisting motion in order to remove the filter. 11. Remove the filter seal. The filter seal may be stuck in the pump; if necessary, carefully use pliers or another suitable tool to remove the seal. 12. Discard the seal. 13. Inspect the fluid color. 14. Inspect the filter. Pry the metal crimping away from the top of the filter and pull apart. The filter may contain evidence for root cause diagnosis: ^ Clutch material ^ Bronze slivers indicating bushing wear ^ Steel particles 15. Clean the transmission case and the oil pan gasket surfaces with solvent, and air dry. You must remove all traces of the old gasket material. Installation Procedure 1. Coat the new filter seal with automatic transmission fluid. 2. Install the new filter seal into the transmission case. Tap the seal into place using a suitable size socket. 3. Install the new filter into the case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3492 4. Install the oil pan and a new gasket. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the oil pan bolts. ^ Tighten the oil pan to transmission case bolts alternately and evenly to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. If previously removed, install the range selector cable bracket and bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Apply a small amount of sealant GM P/N 12346004 to the threads of the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. 8. Install the oil pan drain plug, if equipped. ^ Tighten the oil pan drain plug to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. 11. Check the COLD fluid level reading for initial fill only. 12. Inspect the oil pan gasket for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 3497 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 3498 Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Line Fitting Applications Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-004 Date: January 31, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: 4L60-E, 4L65-E, 4L70-E HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M70 M32, M33, MK2 MD6) Oil Cooler Fitting Change Models: 1997-2008 GM Light Duty Trucks (Including Saab) with 4L60-E, 4L65-E, 4L70-E HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M70, M3, M33, MK2, MD6) Aluminum cooler line fittings - These new fittings (2) cannot be used on earlier cases because the threaded hole is not the same size. Old style fittings (1) will continue to be available through SPO parts. Service cases will be the new case and fittings. The old cases with the old thread design will not be maintained for service. The connection on the hose side will accept both the short snout and the newer longer snout cooler hose assemblies. The fittings (1) have a new torque specification of 20 N.m (14 lb ft). They also have one inner and one outer "0" ring that are not serviced separately. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 3499 The new thread size 9/16-1a UNF-2A (1) was implemented on 11-29-07 or Julian date 333. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission oil cooler (TOC) lines from the radiator. On vehicles equipped with a 4.3L engine and 4WD, it may be necessary to gain access to the lower cooler line (2) through the right side wheel well opening. 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. For vehicles equipped with a 2.2L engine, remove the nut securing the cooling line to the engine. 4. For vehicles equipped with a 4.3L engine, remove the clip and stud securing the cooler line to the engine. 5. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 6. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe and the transmission support assembly. 7. Carefully lower the transmission to gain access to the cooler line fittings. 8. Remove the TOC lines from the fittings on the transmission. If the vehicle is equipped with 4WD, it may be necessary to disconnect and temporarily relocate the transfer case vent hose to provide access to the fittings. 9. Remove the TOC lines from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the TOC lines to the vehicle. 2. Install the TOC lines to the transmission. 3. Install the transfer case vent hose, if equipped. 4. Raise the transmission into position. 5. Install the exhaust crossover pipe and the transmission support assembly. 6. Remove the transmission jack. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3502 7. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. For vehicles equipped with a 4.3L engine, install the stud and clip securing the TOC line to the engine. ^ Tighten the stud to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 8. For vehicles equipped with a 2.2L engine, Install the nut securing the TOC lines to the engine. ^ Tighten the nut to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Install the TOC lines to the radiator. 11. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3503 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Line Quick Connect Fitting Transmission Fluid Cooler Line Quick Connect Fitting Removal Procedure 1. Important: Perform this procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm (2 inch). 2. Using a bent-tip screwdriver, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to rotate the retaining ring around the quick connect fitting until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring. 5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting. Installation Procedure 1. Important: ^ Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion. ^ Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect fittings. Install new retaining rings. ^ Ensure this procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the fittings. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using this procedure: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3504 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all three ears through the three slots on the fitting. 4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring. 5. Ensure that the three retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining ring moves freely in the fitting slots. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3505 6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt. 8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9. Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick connect fitting. 10. Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect fitting. 11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting. 12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 3506 13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting. 14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Pan Magnet Upgrade Fluid Pan: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Pan Magnet Upgrade INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-040B Date: May 05, 2009 Subject: Information on Normal Maintenance or Warranty Service for 4T40, 4T45, 4T65, 4L60 Automatic Transmission Oil Pan Magnet Upgrade Models: 2002-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Equipped With the Following Transmissions: 4T40-E or 4T45 HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN4, MN5, ME7) 4T65 Transmission (RPO M15 and MN7) 4L60 Transmission and Derivatives (RPO M30 is 4L60, M32 is 4L65, M70 is 4L70) Attention: Do not remove the transmission oil pan unless normal maintenance or diagnosis of a customer concern requires it. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 4T65 and 4L60 transmissions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-040A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. A new transmission oil pan magnet, P/N 29535617, was released for service. The current square transmission oil pan magnet may become saturated with normal ferrous sediment and the Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) is now collecting ferrous sediment, making it vary from design. For a given current the PCS electromagnet is stronger, causing the line pressure to be less than needed. When checking PCS line pressure (refer to Line Pressure Check in SI) and it shows that the line pressure is lower than required (refer to Current-Amps/Line Pressure Chart in SI), for a given current at the PCS or the transmission oil pan was removed (for either normal maintenance or warranty service), only then should the transmission oil pan magnet be upgraded. 1. Remove and discard the original square transmission oil pan magnet and install a new one in the current location (See graphics below for the correct application). 2. Install the second new transmission oil pan magnet in the following location as shown in the illustration. 4T40 & 4T45 4T65E Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Pan Magnet Upgrade > Page 3511 Note Only on 4T65E, the second magnet (left) should be attached to the transmission filter. If the magnet is attached in any other location, it may cause interference (refer to graphic above). 4L60 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Pan Magnet Upgrade > Page 3512 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3513 Fluid Pan: Specifications Transmission Pan Bolts Tighten alternately and evenly to ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 Nm (97 Inch Lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3517 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Regulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to release tension on the reverse boost valve retaining ring. 4. Remove the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 5. Remove the reverse boost valve sleeve (5) and the reverse boost valve (4). 6. Remove the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 7. Remove the pressure regulator valve (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure regulator valve (1). 2. Install the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 3. Install the reverse boost valve (4) in the reverse boost valve sleeve (5). 4. Install the reverse boost valve (4) and sleeve (5) in the oil pump cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3518 5. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to expose the retaining ring slot. 6. Install the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 7. Install the transmission oil filter and pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F Date: February 05, 2010 Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin 05-07-30-012. Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift. During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in the transfer case. This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3530 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3531 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3532 Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 3546 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 3552 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 3553 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 3554 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 3555 To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube and Seal Replacement Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Filler Tube and Seal Replacement Filler Tube and Seal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a 2.2L engine, remove the bolt securing the dipstick to the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the transmission oil level indicator. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. If the vehicle is equipped with a 2.2L engine, proceed to step 7. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with a 4.3L engine, remove the exhaust manifold pipe. 6. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 7. Support the transmission and transfer case, if equipped, with a suitable jack. 8. Remove the transmission support. 9. Lower the transmission to gain access to the bolt securing the filler tube to the transmission torque converter housing. 10. Remove the bolt securing the filler tube to the torque converter housing. 11. Remove the filler tube and seal from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new seal into the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube and Seal Replacement > Page 3558 2. Lubricate the seal with transmission fluid and install the filler tube into the seal. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the bolt securing the filler tube to the transmission torque converter housing. ^ Tighten the bolt to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 4. Raise the transmission. 5. Install the transmission support. 6. Remove the transmission jack. 7. If the vehicle is equipped with a 2.2L engine, proceed to step 9. 8. Install the rear output shaft. 9. Install the exhaust manifold pipe. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. If the vehicle is equipped with a 2.2L engine, install the bolt securing the dipstick to the exhaust manifold. 12. Install the bolts securing the oil level indicator tube to the engine. ^ Tighten the bolts to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 13. Install the transmission oil level indicator. 14. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube and Seal Replacement > Page 3559 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Manual Shift Shaft Seal Replacement Manual Shift Shaft Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43911 Selector Shaft Seal Remover - J 43909 Selector Shaft Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch. 3. Be sure that the jackscrew for J 43911 is backed off and will not interfere with installation of the removal tool. Slide the seal remover tool over the selector shaft (2) with the threaded end of the tool towards the seal. 4. Rotate the removal tool so that the threads on the end of the tool engage the steel shell (1) of the seal. Use a wrench to be sure that the removal tool is firmly attached to the seal shell. 5. Rotate the jackscrew in the clockwise direction to remove the seal from the bore. Discard the seal that was removed. Installation Procedure 1. Carefully slide a new selector shaft seal (1) over the selector shaft (2) with the wide face of the steel case facing outward. Position the seal so that it is starting to enter the seal bore. 2. Obtain J 43909 and remove the inner sleeve so that the tool will slide over the selector shaft. 3. Slide the J 43909 into position so that the end of the tool contacts the seal being installed. Use a mallet to strike the J 43909 and drive the new seal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube and Seal Replacement > Page 3560 into the seal bore until it is seated at the bottom of the bore. 4. Install the PNP Switch. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Tube and Seal Replacement > Page 3561 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transmission Extension Housing Rear Oil Seal Replacement Transmission Extension Housing Rear Oil Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required - J 21426 Extension Housing Seal Installer - J 36850 Transjel Lubricant Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the propeller shaft. 4. Remove the case extension housing rear oil seal. Use a flat bladed tool and carefully pry the seal from the housing. 5. Inspect the case extension housing for damage. Replace the extension housing if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the inside diameter of the new seal with J 36850. 2. Use the J 21426 with a soft faced mallet to install the seal. 3. Install the seal to the extension housing. 4. Install the propeller shaft. 5. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 6. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3566 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Regulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to release tension on the reverse boost valve retaining ring. 4. Remove the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 5. Remove the reverse boost valve sleeve (5) and the reverse boost valve (4). 6. Remove the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 7. Remove the pressure regulator valve (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure regulator valve (1). 2. Install the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 3. Install the reverse boost valve (4) in the reverse boost valve sleeve (5). 4. Install the reverse boost valve (4) and sleeve (5) in the oil pump cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3567 5. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to expose the retaining ring slot. 6. Install the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 7. Install the transmission oil filter and pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams Tow/Haul Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3571 Tow/Haul Switch: Testing and Inspection Tow/Haul Switch/Indicator Always On or Inoperative Circuit Description Tow/haul mode enables the operator to achieve enhanced shift performance when towing or hauling a load. When tow/haul mode is selected, the tow/haul switch input signal to the body control module (BCM) is momentarily toggled to zero volts. This signals the powertrain control module (PCM) to extend the length of time between upshifts and increase transmission line pressure. Cycling the tow/haul switch again disables tow/haul mode and returns the transmission to a normal shift pattern. Diagnostic Aids Inspect the connectors at the BCM, and all other circuit connecting points for an intermittent condition. Inspect the circuit wiring for an intermittent condition. If the electrical circuit checks are OK and the tow/haul shift pattern is not occurring, there may be a mechanical/hydraulic condition that prevents tow/haul operation. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3572 Steps 1-8 Test Description These numbers correspond to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This step tests for a faulty tow/haul switch. 3. This step tests for voltage input from the BCM to the tow/haul switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3576 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3577 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3578 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3584 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3585 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 3586 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3590 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3591 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3592 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3595 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3596 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3597 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3598 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3599 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3600 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3601 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3602 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3603 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3604 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3605 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3606 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3607 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3608 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3609 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3610 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3611 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3612 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3613 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3614 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3615 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3616 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3617 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3618 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3619 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3620 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3621 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Control and Shift Solenoids Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 2. Important: Do not remove the valve body for this procedures. Removal of the 1-2 accumulator is necessary only if servicing the pressure control solenoid. Remove the 1-2 accumulator if necessary. 3. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 5. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 6. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 7. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3622 8. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid. Installation Procedure 1. Install the 3-2 control solenoid. 2. Install the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 3. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. 4. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid.Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3623 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 7. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 8. Install the 1-2 accumulator. 9. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull the shift lever seal away from the upper steering column trim cover. 2. Remove the screw (2) that retains the shift lever to the steering column. 3. Remove the shift lever (1) from the steering column. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shift lever (1) to the steering column. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the screw (2) that retains the shift lever to the steering column. ^ Tighten the screw to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the shift lever seal to the upper steering column trim cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Adjustment 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Place the transmission range selector control lever (column or floor shift) into the NEUTRAL position. 3. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the positive assurance pin (2) from the bracket. 5. Release the cable lock tab (1). 6. Ensure that the transmission range selector lever is in the NEUTRAL position. Rotate the range select lever fully clockwise then counter clockwise two detents. 7. Pull the cable end completely forward and release it. This allows the adjustment spring to position the cable to its most rearward position. Use care not to pull the cable past the ball stud, this will result in a misadjusted cable. 8. If the adjustment body is not free to move under spring load, a proper adjustment can still be made. Push the adjustment body against the rearward stop. Pull the cable end just far enough forward to install it to the ball stud. 9. Install the range selector cable end (2) to the range selector lever ball stud (1). 10. Depress the locking tab of cable (1) to set the adjustment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3631 11. Install the positive assurance pin (2) into the bracket. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Check the vehicle for proper operation. These conditions must be met: ^ When moving the shift lever from Park to L, all detent positions will be attainable. ^ There will be an equal amount of "free play" between the shift lever and the gate in the drive and reverse detent. If there is no "free play", the adjustment is not acceptable. ^ With the key in the "on" position and shift lever in reverse, the key will not be removable, and the steering wheel will not be locked. ^ With the key in the "locked" position, and the shift lever in the "park" position, the key will be removable, the steering wheel will be locked, and the shift lever will not disengage park. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) Shift Cable: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) Removal Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Position the steering column shift lever in the NEUTRAL position. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Disconnect the range selector cable (2) from the range selector lever ball stud (1). 5. Remove the positive assurance pin (2) from the bracket. 6. Remove the retainer (1) from the range selector cable and transmission bracket. 7. Depress the tangs and remove the range selector cable from the bracket. 8. Remove the transfer case shield, if equipped. 9. Push the range selector cable grommet up through the floor panel of the vehicle. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the instrument panel trim and knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) > Page 3634 12. Remove the door sill plate and the left hinge pillar trim panel. 13. Place the drivers seat in the most rearward position. 14. Pull back the carpet and insulation around the driver's area. 15. Remove the cable end (1) from the steering column ball stud. 16. Remove the retainer (2) securing the cable to the steering column bracket. 17. Depress the tangs and remove the cable from the steering column bracket. 18. Remove the cable from the retainer (1) located next to the accelerator pedal. 19. Remove the sound deadening material from the floor panel that covers the cable. 20. Pull the cable up through the opening in the floor panel and remove the cable from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the cable through the opening in the floor panel. 2. Install the grommet to the floor panel. 3. Install the sound deadening material that covers the cable. 4. Install the cable to the retainer (1) located next to the accelerator pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) > Page 3635 5. Install the cable to the steering column bracket. 6. Install the retainer (2) that secures the cable to the steering column bracket. 7. Install the cable end (1) to the steering column ball stud. 8. Install the carpet and insulation to the drivers side floor area. 9. Install the door sill plate and the left hinge pillar trim panel. 10. Install the knee bolster and instrument panel trim. 11. Ensure that the steering column shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position. 12. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 13. Install the range selector cable to the bracket. 14. Install the retainer (1) to the range selector cable and transmission bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) > Page 3636 15. Ensure that the transmission range selector lever is in the NEUTRAL position. 16. After the adjustment procedure, install the range selector cable (2) to the range selector cable lever ball stud (1). 17. Install the positive assurance pin to the bracket. 18. Install the transfer case shield, if equipped. 19. Lower the vehicle and check for proper operation. Repeat the adjustment procedure if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) > Page 3637 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Console Shift) Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Console Shift) Removal Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Position the shift controller in the NEUTRAL position. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Disconnect the range selector cable (2) from the range selector lever ball stud (1). 5. Remove the positive assurance pin (2) from the bracket. 6. Remove the retainer (1) from the range selector cable and transmission bracket. 7. Depress the tangs and remove the range selector cable from the bracket. 8. Remove the transfer case shield, if equipped. 9. Push the range selector cable grommet up through the floor panel of the vehicle. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the console. 12. Remove the front mat and carpet. 13. Ensure that the transmission is in the mechanical neutral position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) > Page 3638 14. Disconnect the cable end from the controller ball stud. 15. Remove the retainer securing the cable to the controller. 16. Depress the tangs and remove the cable from the controller. 17. Remove the sound deadening material from the floor panel that covers the cable. 18. Pull the cable up through the opening in the floor panel and remove the cable from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the cable through the opening in the floor panel. 2. Install the grommet to the floor panel. 3. Install the sound deadening material that covers the cable. 4. Install the cable to the controller. 5. Install the retainer securing the cable to the controller. 6. Connect the cable end to the controller ball stud. 7. Install the front mat and carpet. 8. Install the console. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Replacement (Column Shift) > Page 3639 9. Ensure that the shift controller is in the NEUTRAL position. 10. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 11. Install the range selector cable to the bracket. 12. Install the retainer (1) to the range selector cable and transmission bracket. 13. Ensure that the transmission range selector lever is in the NEUTRAL position. 14. After the adjustment procedure, install the range selector cable (2) to the range selector cable lever ball stud (1). 15. Install the positive assurance pin to the bracket. 16. Install the transfer case shield, if equipped. 17. Lower the vehicle and check for proper operation. Repeat the adjustment procedure if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Gear: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear Sun Gear: Customer Interest A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 00-07-30-022D Date: June 10, 2008 Subject: No Reverse, Second Gear or Fourth Gear (Replace Reaction Sun Shell with More Robust Heat Treated Parts) Models: 1993 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003 - 2005 HUMMER H2 with 4L60/65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30 or M32) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2005 model year to the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-07-30-022C (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a no reverse, no second or no fourth gear condition. First and third gears will operate properly. Cause The reaction sun gear (673) may not hold inside the reaction sun shell (670). Correction Important: There are FOUR distinct groups of vehicles and repair procedures involved. Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust washer: ^ The sun shell can be identified by four square holes used to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell P/N 24228345, reaction carrier to shell thrust washer (699B) P/N 8642202 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674) P/N 8642331er (674) P/N 8642331along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that have had previous service to the reaction sun shell: It is possible that some 2001 and prior model year vehicles have had previous service to the reaction sun shell. At the time of service, these vehicles may have been updated with a Reaction Sun Shell Kit (Refer to Service Bulletin 020730003) without four square holes to retain the thrust washer. If it is found in a 2001 model year and prior vehicles that the reaction sun shell DOES NOT have four square holes to retain the thrust washer, these vehicles must be serviced with P/Ns 24229825 (674), 24217328 and 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and later that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust bearing: The sun shell can be identified by no holes to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell, P/N 24229825, reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A), P/N 24217328 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674), P/N 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built from November, 2001 through June, 2002: These vehicles should have the reaction carrier shaft replaced when the sun shell is replaced. Use shell kit P/N 24229853, which contains a sun shell (670), a reaction carrier shaft (666), a reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A) and a reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674). The appropriate seals and washers listed below should also be used. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Follow the service procedure below for diagnosis and correction of the no reverse, no second, no forth condition. Important: If metallic debris is found on the transmission magnet, the transmission must be completely disassembled and cleaned. Metallic debris is defined as broken parts and pieces of internal transmission components. This should not be confused with typical "normal" fine particles found on all transmission magnets. Failure to properly clean the transmission case and internal components may lead to additional repeat repairs. 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and inspect the magnet in the bottom of the pan for metal debris. Refer to SI Document ID # 825141. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Gear: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 3648 2. Remove the transmission from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate SI document. Important: ^ Inspect all the transmission components for damage or wear. Replace all damaged or worn components. The parts shown above should be sufficient to correct this concern. ^ This condition does not normally require replacement of the transmission completely. Components such as clutches, valve body, pump and torque converters will NOT require replacement to correct this condition. Disassemble the transmission and replace the appropriate parts listed below. Refer to the Unit Repair Manual - Repair Instructions. 3. Reinstall the transmission in the vehicle. Refer to appropriate service information. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Gear: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 3649 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear Sun Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 00-07-30-022D Date: June 10, 2008 Subject: No Reverse, Second Gear or Fourth Gear (Replace Reaction Sun Shell with More Robust Heat Treated Parts) Models: 1993 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003 - 2005 HUMMER H2 with 4L60/65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30 or M32) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2005 model year to the parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-07-30-022C (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a no reverse, no second or no fourth gear condition. First and third gears will operate properly. Cause The reaction sun gear (673) may not hold inside the reaction sun shell (670). Correction Important: There are FOUR distinct groups of vehicles and repair procedures involved. Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust washer: ^ The sun shell can be identified by four square holes used to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell P/N 24228345, reaction carrier to shell thrust washer (699B) P/N 8642202 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674) P/N 8642331er (674) P/N 8642331along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and prior that have had previous service to the reaction sun shell: It is possible that some 2001 and prior model year vehicles have had previous service to the reaction sun shell. At the time of service, these vehicles may have been updated with a Reaction Sun Shell Kit (Refer to Service Bulletin 020730003) without four square holes to retain the thrust washer. If it is found in a 2001 model year and prior vehicles that the reaction sun shell DOES NOT have four square holes to retain the thrust washer, these vehicles must be serviced with P/Ns 24229825 (674), 24217328 and 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built in the 2001 model year and later that make use of a reaction shaft to shell thrust bearing: The sun shell can be identified by no holes to retain the thrust washer. Use reaction sun shell, P/N 24229825, reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A), P/N 24217328 and reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674), P/N 8642331 along with the appropriate seals and washers listed below. ^ Vehicles built from November, 2001 through June, 2002: These vehicles should have the reaction carrier shaft replaced when the sun shell is replaced. Use shell kit P/N 24229853, which contains a sun shell (670), a reaction carrier shaft (666), a reaction carrier shaft to shell thrust bearing (669A) and a reaction sun gear shell thrust washer (674). The appropriate seals and washers listed below should also be used. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Follow the service procedure below for diagnosis and correction of the no reverse, no second, no forth condition. Important: If metallic debris is found on the transmission magnet, the transmission must be completely disassembled and cleaned. Metallic debris is defined as broken parts and pieces of internal transmission components. This should not be confused with typical "normal" fine particles found on all transmission magnets. Failure to properly clean the transmission case and internal components may lead to additional repeat repairs. 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and inspect the magnet in the bottom of the pan for metal debris. Refer to SI Document ID # 825141. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 3655 2. Remove the transmission from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate SI document. Important: ^ Inspect all the transmission components for damage or wear. Replace all damaged or worn components. The parts shown above should be sufficient to correct this concern. ^ This condition does not normally require replacement of the transmission completely. Components such as clutches, valve body, pump and torque converters will NOT require replacement to correct this condition. Disassemble the transmission and replace the appropriate parts listed below. Refer to the Unit Repair Manual - Repair Instructions. 3. Reinstall the transmission in the vehicle. Refer to appropriate service information. When servicing the transmission as a result of this condition, the transmission oil cooler and lines MUST be flushed. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 00-07-30-022D > Jun > 08 > A/T - 4L60/65E, No Reverse/2nd or 4th Gear > Page 3656 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-010C Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Torque Converter Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Except VTi Equipped Vehicles (RPO M16 and M75) 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with ALL Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007-2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-010B (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The purpose of this bulletin is to help technicians determine when a torque converter should be replaced. Below is a list of general guidelines to follow. The converter should NOT be replaced if the following apply: ^ DTC P0742 - TCC stuck on is set. This code is almost always the result of a controls condition (i.e. stuck TCC solenoid/valve). Experience has shown that this code rarely indicates a mechanical concern within the torque converter. ^ The fluid has an odor or is discolored but no evidence of metal contamination. ^ Fine metal particles (traces of metal flakes/gray color to fluid ) are found in the converter. This is not harmful to the torque converter. ^ The vehicle has been exposed to high mileage. ^ A small amount of wear appears on the hub where the oil pump drive gear mates to the converter (RWD only). A certain amount of such wear is normal for both the hub and oil pump gear. Neither the converter nor the front pump assembly should be replaced. The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ^ The vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. First complete all electrical and hydraulic diagnosis and check for proper engine operation. The converter clutch may be damaged. Also the converter bushing and/or internal 0-ring may be damaged. ^ Evidence of damage to the oil pump assembly pump shaft turbine shaft drive sprocket support and bearing or metal chips/debris in the converter. ^ Metal chips/debris are found in the converter or when flushing the cooler and the cooler lines. ^ External leaks in the hub weld area lug weld or closure weld. ^ Converter pilot is broken damaged or fits poorly into the crankshaft. ^ The converter hub is scored or damaged. ^ The transmission oil is contaminated with engine coolant engine oil or water. ^ If excessive end play is found after measuring the converter for proper end play (refer to Service Manual). ^ If metal chips/debris are found in the fluid filter or on the magnet and no internal parts in the unit are worn or damaged. This indicates that the material came from the converter. ^ The converter has an unbalanced condition that results in a vibration that cannot be corrected by following Converter Vibration Procedures. ^ Blue converter or dark circular ring between lugs. This condition will also require a complete cleaning of the cooler and a check for adequate flow Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information > Page 3661 through the cooler. ^ Converter bearing noise determined by noise from the bell housing area in Drive or Reverse at idle. The noise is gone in Neutral and Park. ^ If silicon from the viscous clutch is found in the lower pan (4T80-E ONLY). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Torque Converter Check Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 3666 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3670 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3671 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3674 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3675 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3676 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3677 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3678 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3679 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3680 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3681 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3682 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3683 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3684 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3685 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3686 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3687 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3688 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3689 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3690 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3691 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3692 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3693 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3694 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3695 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3696 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3697 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3698 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3699 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid, TCC Solenoid, and Wiring Harness ^ Tools Required J 28458 Seal Protector Retainer Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and the filter. 3. Disconnect the transmission harness 20-way connector from the transmission internal harness pass-through connector. Depress both tabs on the connector and pull straight up; do not pry the connector. 4. Important: Removal of the valve body is not necessary for this procedure. Remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly. Do not remove the spacer plate. 5. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3700 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid in order to access one of the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 8. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 10. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining bolts and the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness. 11. Using J 28458, release the pass-through electrical connector from the transmission case. 1. Use the small end of the J 28458 over the top of the connector. 2. Twist in order to release the four tabs retaining the connector. 3. Pull the harness connector down through the transmission case. 1. Remove the TCC solenoid (with O-ring seal) and wiring harness assembly from the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3701 2. Inspect the TCC solenoid and wiring harness assembly for these defects: ^ Damage ^ Cracked connectors ^ Exposed wires ^ Loose pins Installation Procedure 1. Install the wiring harness and TCC solenoid assembly with a new O-ring seal to the transmission. 2. Install the pass-through electrical connector to the transmission case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness and install the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the control valve body retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the TCC solenoid retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3702 4. Install the pressure control solenoid. Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. Install the TCC PWM solenoid to the control valve body. 7. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 8. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 9. Install the 1-2 accumulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3703 10. Connect the transmission harness 20-way connector to the transmission pass-through connector. Align the arrows on each half of the connector and insert straight down. 11. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 3708 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 3709 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 3710 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 3711 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams Tow/Haul Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3715 Tow/Haul Switch: Testing and Inspection Tow/Haul Switch/Indicator Always On or Inoperative Circuit Description Tow/haul mode enables the operator to achieve enhanced shift performance when towing or hauling a load. When tow/haul mode is selected, the tow/haul switch input signal to the body control module (BCM) is momentarily toggled to zero volts. This signals the powertrain control module (PCM) to extend the length of time between upshifts and increase transmission line pressure. Cycling the tow/haul switch again disables tow/haul mode and returns the transmission to a normal shift pattern. Diagnostic Aids Inspect the connectors at the BCM, and all other circuit connecting points for an intermittent condition. Inspect the circuit wiring for an intermittent condition. If the electrical circuit checks are OK and the tow/haul shift pattern is not occurring, there may be a mechanical/hydraulic condition that prevents tow/haul operation. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3716 Steps 1-8 Test Description These numbers correspond to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This step tests for a faulty tow/haul switch. 3. This step tests for voltage input from the BCM to the tow/haul switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission mount shield bolts, if equipped. 3. Remove the transmission mount shield, if equipped. 4. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 5. Remove the transmission mount to the transmission support retaining nut or nuts. 6. Remove the transmission mount shield bracket, if equipped. 7. Raise the transmission to take the weight off of the mount. 8. Remove the transmission mount to the transmission or transfer case adapter mounting bolts (1). 9. Raise the transmission just enough to remove the transmission mount. 10. Remove the transmission mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3720 1. Install the transmission mount to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount to the transmission or transfer case adapter mounting bolts (1). ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the transmission. 4. Install the transmission mount shield bracket, if equipped. 5. Install the transmission mount to the transmission support retaining nut or nuts. ^ Tighten the nut or nuts to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the transmission jack. 7. Install the transmission mount shield, if equipped. 8. Install the transmission mount shield bolts, if equipped. ^ Tighten the transmission mount shield front bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the transmission mount shield rear bolts to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3724 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3725 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3726 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-038D > Sep > 06 > A/T - Poor Performance/MIL ON/DTC P0757 Valve Body: Customer Interest A/T - Poor Performance/MIL ON/DTC P0757 Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-038D Date: September 12, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0757 Set, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, Poor Performance of Transmission, Transmission Slipping (Clean Transmission Valve Body and Case Oil Passages of Debris) Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E/4L65-E/4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30/M32/M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007 model year and the 4L70-E transmission. Also, information has been added to Condition, Cause and Correction. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-038C (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: An illuminated MIL where DTC P0757 is found as a history code in the PCM or TCM. No 3rd and 4th gear. The transmission does not shift correctly. The transmission feels like it shifts to Neutral or a loss of drive occurs. The vehicle free wheels above 48 km/h (30 mph). High RPM needed to overcome the free wheeling. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-038D > Sep > 06 > A/T - Poor Performance/MIL ON/DTC P0757 > Page 3735 Chips or debris plugging the bleed orifice of the 2-3 shift solenoid (367). This will cause the transmission to stay in 2nd gear when 3rd gear is commanded and return to 1st gear when 4th gear is commanded. A 2-3 shift valve (368) or 2-3 shuttle valve (369) that is stuck, restricted and/or hung-up in its bore. This condition may also be an indication of a damaged 2-4 band or 3-4 clutches. This clutch damage may generate debris causing the 2-3 shift valve line-up to stick in the valve body bore and set DTC P0757. Correction Inspect the condition of the transmission fluid for signs of overheat or a burnt odor. If either is noted, the transmission should be disassembled for further investigation and repaired as needed. Inspect the inside of the oil pan for signs of clutch friction material. A small amount of friction material in the bottom of the pan is normal. If a large amount of clutch material is noted in the fluid or bottom pan, the transmission should be disassembled for further investigation and repaired as needed. Inspect and clean the 2-3 shift valve (368), the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) and the valve bore of debris/metal chips. Inspect and clean the 2-3 shift solenoid (367B) opening of debris/metal chips. While inspecting the 2-3 shift solenoid (367B), look for a screen over the solenoid opening. If the solenoid DOES NOT have a screen, replace the solenoid. All current GMSPO stock shift solenoids have a screen over the solenoid opening. If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the pressure control (PC) solenoid valve fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to SI "Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test" for the procedure. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information and service procedures. Warranty Information For repairs performed under warranty, use the applicable published labor code and information. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-024 Date: September 27, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on 4L60-E M30 Rear Wheel Drive Automatic Transmission Valve Body Reconditioning, DTC P0741, P0756, P0894, Harsh 1-2 Shift Models The following new service information outlined in this bulletin will aid technicians in providing easy to follow valve body reconditioning instructions and new illustrations to simplify reassembly of the valve body. This service bulletin will also provide additional service information documents that are related to the 4L60-E transmission. Related Service Documents DTC P0741 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System - Stuck Off. Refer to Service Bulletin 04-07-30-041. DTC P0756 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Performance - No First or Second Gear. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-07-30-036F. DTC P0894 - Transmission Component Slipping. Refer to Service Bulletin 06-07-30-007. Harsh 1-2 Shift. Refer to Bulletin PIP3170E. If valve body cleaning is not required, Do Not disassemble the bores unless it is necessary to verify movement of valves. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3745 Inspection Procedure Using the exploded views in this bulletin, inspect each bore for freedom of valve(s) movement and evidence of debris. Pay particular attention to those valves related to the customer's concern. Verify movement of the valves in their normal installed position. Valves may become restricted during removal or installation. This is normal due to small tolerances between the valves and bores. If a valve is restricted and cannot be corrected by cleaning the valve and bore, then replace the valve body. Describe the restricted valve on the repair order. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3746 Valve Body Spring and Bore Plug Chart (inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3747 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3748 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3749 Left Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3750 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3751 Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly Be sure all solenoids are installed with the electrical connectors facing the non-machined (cast) side of the valve body; otherwise the solenoids will bind against the transmission case as the valve body bolts are tightened and damage may occur. Disassembly/Reassembly If a valve is restricted by a metal burr from machining that bore, remove the valve and burr, then inspect movement in the valve's normal position. If no Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3752 other debris or restrictions are found, then reassemble the valve body and install in the transmission. If the valve body has been contaminated with debris from another transmission component failure, then disassemble all bores for complete cleaning of all valve body components. If possible, keep individual bore parts separated for ease of reassembly. Use the illustrations in this bulletin for a positive identification and location of individual parts: Using GM Brake Clean, or equivalent, in a safe and clean environment (clean aluminum pan), clean the valve body and dry it with compressed air. Use appropriate eye protection. Clean individual valve body components with GM Brake Clean, or equivalent. Coat each valve with clean ATF and reassemble in each bore. Check each valve for free movement during assembly of each bore. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-038D > Sep > 06 > A/T - Poor Performance/MIL ON/DTC P0757 Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Poor Performance/MIL ON/DTC P0757 Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-038D Date: September 12, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0757 Set, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, Poor Performance of Transmission, Transmission Slipping (Clean Transmission Valve Body and Case Oil Passages of Debris) Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E/4L65-E/4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30/M32/M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007 model year and the 4L70-E transmission. Also, information has been added to Condition, Cause and Correction. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-038C (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: An illuminated MIL where DTC P0757 is found as a history code in the PCM or TCM. No 3rd and 4th gear. The transmission does not shift correctly. The transmission feels like it shifts to Neutral or a loss of drive occurs. The vehicle free wheels above 48 km/h (30 mph). High RPM needed to overcome the free wheeling. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-038D > Sep > 06 > A/T - Poor Performance/MIL ON/DTC P0757 > Page 3757 Chips or debris plugging the bleed orifice of the 2-3 shift solenoid (367). This will cause the transmission to stay in 2nd gear when 3rd gear is commanded and return to 1st gear when 4th gear is commanded. A 2-3 shift valve (368) or 2-3 shuttle valve (369) that is stuck, restricted and/or hung-up in its bore. This condition may also be an indication of a damaged 2-4 band or 3-4 clutches. This clutch damage may generate debris causing the 2-3 shift valve line-up to stick in the valve body bore and set DTC P0757. Correction Inspect the condition of the transmission fluid for signs of overheat or a burnt odor. If either is noted, the transmission should be disassembled for further investigation and repaired as needed. Inspect the inside of the oil pan for signs of clutch friction material. A small amount of friction material in the bottom of the pan is normal. If a large amount of clutch material is noted in the fluid or bottom pan, the transmission should be disassembled for further investigation and repaired as needed. Inspect and clean the 2-3 shift valve (368), the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) and the valve bore of debris/metal chips. Inspect and clean the 2-3 shift solenoid (367B) opening of debris/metal chips. While inspecting the 2-3 shift solenoid (367B), look for a screen over the solenoid opening. If the solenoid DOES NOT have a screen, replace the solenoid. All current GMSPO stock shift solenoids have a screen over the solenoid opening. If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the pressure control (PC) solenoid valve fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to SI "Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test" for the procedure. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information and service procedures. Warranty Information For repairs performed under warranty, use the applicable published labor code and information. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-030B Date: October 18, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Diagnostic Information on Harsh 1-2 Upshift Models: 2001-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E or 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-030A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The following four conditions have been found to cause the majority of consistent, harsh 1-2 shift comments. ^ Chips/Sediment/Debris/Contamination found in the valve body, 1-2 accumulator valve (371) bore, may cause the 1-2 accumulator valve to stick or hang-up. ^ Chips/Sediment/Debris/Contamination found in the valve body, 4-3 sequence valve (383) bore, may cause the 4-3 sequence valve to stick or hang-up. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3762 A cracked 1-2 accumulator piston (56) that is allowing fluid to leak by. Mislocated/Missing valve body-to-spacer plate check balls (61). When attempting to correct a consistent harsh 1-2 shift, the four conditions listed above should be inspected as possible causes. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual for further possible causes of this condition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3763 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3764 This diagnostic table should be used when addressing a harsh 1-2 shift concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-024 Date: September 27, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on 4L60-E M30 Rear Wheel Drive Automatic Transmission Valve Body Reconditioning, DTC P0741, P0756, P0894, Harsh 1-2 Shift Models The following new service information outlined in this bulletin will aid technicians in providing easy to follow valve body reconditioning instructions and new illustrations to simplify reassembly of the valve body. This service bulletin will also provide additional service information documents that are related to the 4L60-E transmission. Related Service Documents DTC P0741 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System - Stuck Off. Refer to Service Bulletin 04-07-30-041. DTC P0756 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Performance - No First or Second Gear. Refer to Service Bulletin 01-07-30-036F. DTC P0894 - Transmission Component Slipping. Refer to Service Bulletin 06-07-30-007. Harsh 1-2 Shift. Refer to Bulletin PIP3170E. If valve body cleaning is not required, Do Not disassemble the bores unless it is necessary to verify movement of valves. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3774 Inspection Procedure Using the exploded views in this bulletin, inspect each bore for freedom of valve(s) movement and evidence of debris. Pay particular attention to those valves related to the customer's concern. Verify movement of the valves in their normal installed position. Valves may become restricted during removal or installation. This is normal due to small tolerances between the valves and bores. If a valve is restricted and cannot be corrected by cleaning the valve and bore, then replace the valve body. Describe the restricted valve on the repair order. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3775 Valve Body Spring and Bore Plug Chart (inch) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3776 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3777 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3778 Left Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3779 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3780 Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly Be sure all solenoids are installed with the electrical connectors facing the non-machined (cast) side of the valve body; otherwise the solenoids will bind against the transmission case as the valve body bolts are tightened and damage may occur. Disassembly/Reassembly If a valve is restricted by a metal burr from machining that bore, remove the valve and burr, then inspect movement in the valve's normal position. If no Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 07-07-30-024 > Sep > 07 > A/T - Valve Body Reconditioning > Page 3781 other debris or restrictions are found, then reassemble the valve body and install in the transmission. If the valve body has been contaminated with debris from another transmission component failure, then disassemble all bores for complete cleaning of all valve body components. If possible, keep individual bore parts separated for ease of reassembly. Use the illustrations in this bulletin for a positive identification and location of individual parts: Using GM Brake Clean, or equivalent, in a safe and clean environment (clean aluminum pan), clean the valve body and dry it with compressed air. Use appropriate eye protection. Clean individual valve body components with GM Brake Clean, or equivalent. Coat each valve with clean ATF and reassemble in each bore. Check each valve for free movement during assembly of each bore. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-030B Date: October 18, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: 4L60-E/4L65-E Automatic Transmission Diagnostic Information on Harsh 1-2 Upshift Models: 2001-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E or 4L65-E Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-030A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The following four conditions have been found to cause the majority of consistent, harsh 1-2 shift comments. ^ Chips/Sediment/Debris/Contamination found in the valve body, 1-2 accumulator valve (371) bore, may cause the 1-2 accumulator valve to stick or hang-up. ^ Chips/Sediment/Debris/Contamination found in the valve body, 4-3 sequence valve (383) bore, may cause the 4-3 sequence valve to stick or hang-up. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3786 A cracked 1-2 accumulator piston (56) that is allowing fluid to leak by. Mislocated/Missing valve body-to-spacer plate check balls (61). When attempting to correct a consistent harsh 1-2 shift, the four conditions listed above should be inspected as possible causes. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual for further possible causes of this condition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3787 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-030B > Oct > 05 > A/T - 4L60-E/4L65-E Harsh 1-2 Upshift Diagnosis > Page 3788 This diagnostic table should be used when addressing a harsh 1-2 shift concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3789 Valve Body: Diagrams Control Valve Body Assembly (1 of 2) Control Valve Body Assembly 350 - Control Valve Body Assembly 353 - Forward Accumulator Oil Seal 354 - Forward Accumulator Piston 355 - Forward Accumulator Pin 356 - Forward Accumulator Spring 357 Forward Abuse Valve 358 - Forward Abuse Valve Spring 359 - Bore Plug 360 - Coiled Spring Pin 360 - Coiled Spring Pin 361 - Low Overrun Valve 362 - Low Overrun Valve Spring 363 - Forward Accumulator Cover 364 - Forward Accumulator Cover Bolt 364a - Pressure Control Solenoid Retainer Bolt 365 - 1-2 Shift Valve Spring - Model Dependent 366 - 1-2 Shift Valve - Model Dependent 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve 368 - 2-3 Shift Valve 369 - 2-3 Shuttle Valve 370 - 1-2 Accumulator Valve Spring 371 - 1-2 Accumulator Valve 372 - 1-2 Accumulator Valve Sleeve 374 - Actuator Feed Limit Valve 375 - Actuator Feed Limit Valve Spring 376 - Bore Plug 377 - Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 378 - Pressure Control Solenoid Retainer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3790 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer Control Valve Body Assembly (2 of 2) Control Valve Body Assembly 340 - Manual Valve 350 - Control Valve Body Assembly 359 - Bore Plug 360 - Coiled Spring Pin 380 - Regulator Apply Valve 381 - Bore Plug 381 - Bore Plug 381 - Bore Plug 381 - Bore Plug 382 4-3 Sequence Valve Spring 383 - 4-3 Sequence Valve 384 - 3-4 Relay Valve 385 - 3-4 Shift Valve 386 - 3-4 Shift Valve Spring 387 - Reverse Abuse Valve 388 - Reverse Abuse Valve Spring 389 3-2 Downshift Valve 390 - 3-2 Downshift Valve Spring 391 - 3-2 Control Valve 392 - 3-2 Control Valve Spring 394 - 3-2 Control Solenoid Valve 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3791 395 - Bore Plug and Solenoid Retainer 396 - TCC PWM Solenoid Valve 397 - Regulator Apply Spring 398 - Isolator Valve 399 - Pump Ball Check Valve - M33 Only Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3792 Valve Body: Service and Repair Valve Body and Pressure Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Ensure that removal of the valve body is necessary before proceeding. Important: These components can be serviced without removing the valve body from the transmission: The torque converter clutch solenoid (1) ^ The pressure control solenoid (2) ^ The internal wiring harness (3) ^ The 2-3 shift solenoid (4) ^ The 1-2 shift solenoid (5) ^ The transmission fluid pressure manual valve position switch (6) ^ The 3-2 shift solenoid (7) ^ The torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid (8) 2. Remove the fluid level indicator. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the oil pan, gasket, and filter. 5. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ The transmission fluid pressure manual valve position switch (1) ^ The 1-2 shift solenoid (2) ^ The 2-3 shift solenoid (3) ^ The pressure control solenoid (4) ^ The TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ The 3-2 shift solenoid (6) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3793 6. Remove the fluid indicator stop bracket bolt (2). 7. Remove the fluid indicator bracket (1). 8. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retainer (2) with a small screwdriver. Rotate the solenoid (1) in the bore, if necessary, until the flat part of the retainer (2) is visible. 9. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid (1) in order to access the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 10. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 11. Remove the TCC solenoid (with O-ring seal) and wiring harness from the control valve body. 12. Reposition the harness to the side of the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3794 13. Remove the control valve body bolts which retain the transmission fluid pressure switch to the control valve body. 14. Remove the transmission fluid pressure switch. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid pressure switch for damage or debris. 16. Remove the manual detent spring retaining bolt. 17. Remove the manual detent spring. 18. Inspect the manual detent spring for cracks or damage. 19. Important: Keep the control valve body level when lowering it from the vehicle. This will prevent the loss of checkballs located in the control valve body passages. Remove the remaining control valve body bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3795 20. Carefully begin to lower the control valve body down from the transmission case while simultaneously disconnecting the manual valve link. Installation Procedure Ball Check Valves 1. Install the checkballs (1-7) in the valve body. 2. Install the control valve body to the transmission case while simultaneously connecting the manual valve link to the manual valve. 3. Verify that the manual valve link (3) is installed properly to the inside detent lever (1) and the manual valve (2). 4. Install one bolt (M6 X 1.0 X 47.5) hand tight in the center (1) of the valve body to hold it in place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3796 5. Important: When installing bolts throughout this procedure, be sure to use the correct bolt size and length in the correct location as specified. Do not install the transmission fluid indicator stop bracket and bolt at this time. Install but do not tighten the control valve body bolts which retain only the valve body directly. Each numbered bolt location corresponds to a specific bolt size and length, as indicated: ^ M6 X 1.0 X 65.0 (1) ^ M6 X 1.0 X 54.4 (2) ^ M6 X 1.0 X 47.5 (3) ^ M6 X 1.0 X 35.0 (4) ^ M8 X 1.0 X 20.0 (5) ^ M6 X 1.0 X 12.0 (6) ^ M6 X 1.0 X 18.0 (7) 6. Install the manual detent spring. 7. Install but do not tighten the manual detent spring retaining bolt. 8. Install the transmission fluid pressure switch. 9. Install but do not tighten the control valve body bolts which retain the transmission fluid pressure switch to the control valve body. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3797 10. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Notice: Torque valve body bolts in a spiral pattern starting from the center. If the bolts are torqued at random, valve bores may be distorted and inhibit valve operation. Tighten the control valve body bolts in a spiral pattern starting from the center, as indicated by the arrows. ^ Tighten the control valve body bolts (in sequence) to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 11. Ensure that the manual detent spring is aligned properly with the detent lever. ^ Tighten the manual detent spring bolt to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the TCC solenoid with a new O-ring seal to the valve body. 13. Install the TCC solenoid bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3798 ^ Tighten the TCC solenoid retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 14. Install the internal wiring harness to the valve body. The internal wiring harness has a tab (1) on the edge of the conduit. 15. Place the tab between the valve body and the pressure switch in the location shown (2). Press the harness into position on the valve body bolt bosses (1, 3). 16. Install the TCC PWM solenoid (1) to the control valve body. 17. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retainer (2). 18. Install the transmission fluid indicator stop bracket (1) and bolt (2). ^ Tighten the transmission fluid indicator stop bracket bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3799 19. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ The transmission fluid pressure manual valve position switch (1) ^ The 1-2 shift solenoid (2) ^ The 2-3 shift solenoid (3) ^ The pressure control solenoid (4) ^ The TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ The 3-2 shift solenoid (6) 20. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 21. Lower the vehicle. 22. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-002E Date: September 23, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) On, Transmission Stuck in Second or Third Gear, Instrument Cluster Inoperative (Verify and Repair Source of Voltage Loss In Transmission Solenoid Power Supply Circuit) Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E, 4L80-E or 4L85-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M33, MT1, MN8) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, add additional models and add additional diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-002D (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: ^ The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is ON. ^ The transmission is defaulted to second gear (4L80/85-E). ^ The transmission is defaulted to third gear (4L60/65-E). ^ The instrument cluster is inoperative. Upon investigation, one or all of the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0740, P0753, P0758, P0785, P0787, P0973, P0976, P1860, P2761, P2764 and P2769 may be set depending on the vehicle. Cause The most likely cause of this condition may be a loss of voltage to the transmission solenoid power supply circuit. This condition may also be the result of an incorrect installation of an aftermarket electronic device such as a remote starter or alarm system. Correction Important: If the vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket electronic device and the DTCs are being set when the device is being used, verify that the appropriate fuse is being supplied battery voltage during operation. If voltage is not present at this fuse, these DTCs will be set due to lack of voltage at the solenoids. This condition is most likely to occur with an incorrectly installed remote starting system. If this is the case, refer the customer to the installer of the system for corrections. ANY REPAIRS DUE TO AFTERMARKET INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES IS A NON-WARRANTABLE ITEM. 1. With the ignition switch in the RUN position, test for battery voltage at the circuit fuse in the transmission solenoid power supply circuit. Refer to the appropriate SI Document for the transmission solenoid power supply circuit information. 2. If battery voltage is present at the fuse, inspect the ignition voltage circuit between the fuse and the transmission for possible opens. 3. If battery voltage is not present at the fuse, test for continuity between the fuse and the ignition switch. If NO continuity is between the fuse and the ignition switch, repair the open in that circuit. 4. If you have continuity between the fuse and the ignition switch, the most likely cause is the ignition switch. Replace the ignition switch using the appropriate Ignition Switch Replacement procedure in SI. Refer to group number 2.188 of the parts catalog for part description and usage of the ignition switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's > Page 3808 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-002E Date: September 23, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) On, Transmission Stuck in Second or Third Gear, Instrument Cluster Inoperative (Verify and Repair Source of Voltage Loss In Transmission Solenoid Power Supply Circuit) Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E, 4L80-E or 4L85-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M33, MT1, MN8) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, add additional models and add additional diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-002D (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: ^ The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is ON. ^ The transmission is defaulted to second gear (4L80/85-E). ^ The transmission is defaulted to third gear (4L60/65-E). ^ The instrument cluster is inoperative. Upon investigation, one or all of the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0740, P0753, P0758, P0785, P0787, P0973, P0976, P1860, P2761, P2764 and P2769 may be set depending on the vehicle. Cause The most likely cause of this condition may be a loss of voltage to the transmission solenoid power supply circuit. This condition may also be the result of an incorrect installation of an aftermarket electronic device such as a remote starter or alarm system. Correction Important: If the vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket electronic device and the DTCs are being set when the device is being used, verify that the appropriate fuse is being supplied battery voltage during operation. If voltage is not present at this fuse, these DTCs will be set due to lack of voltage at the solenoids. This condition is most likely to occur with an incorrectly installed remote starting system. If this is the case, refer the customer to the installer of the system for corrections. ANY REPAIRS DUE TO AFTERMARKET INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES IS A NON-WARRANTABLE ITEM. 1. With the ignition switch in the RUN position, test for battery voltage at the circuit fuse in the transmission solenoid power supply circuit. Refer to the appropriate SI Document for the transmission solenoid power supply circuit information. 2. If battery voltage is present at the fuse, inspect the ignition voltage circuit between the fuse and the transmission for possible opens. 3. If battery voltage is not present at the fuse, test for continuity between the fuse and the ignition switch. If NO continuity is between the fuse and the ignition switch, repair the open in that circuit. 4. If you have continuity between the fuse and the ignition switch, the most likely cause is the ignition switch. Replace the ignition switch using the appropriate Ignition Switch Replacement procedure in SI. Refer to group number 2.188 of the parts catalog for part description and usage of the ignition switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's > Page 3814 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Clutch Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38836 Bushing Installer and Clutch Arbor Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. Mark the flywheel, cover plate, and pressure plate for installation alignment. 4. Install J 38836 through the cover plate, pressure plate, and into the flywheel for support during plate removal. 5. Remove the bolts and washers securing the clutch pressure plate and cover plate to the flywheel. 6. Remove J 38836 from the plates. 7. Clean all the clutch parts with a clean, water dampened cloth in order to remove any fibers. 8. Inspect all of the clutch parts for these conditions: ^ Wear and damage ^ Scoring and flatness with a straight edge ^ Driven plate runout. The runout must not be more than 0.508 mm (0.020 inch). ^ Scoring, gouges, and loose rivets on the friction pads ^ Oil soaked friction pads ^ Nicks, burrs, and sliding fit on all splines ^ Bending and breaks in the clutch pressure plate cover spring Installation Procedure 1. Using J 38836 for installation alignment, position the pressure plate and cover plate to the flywheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3819 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Secure the plates to the flywheel with bolts and washers. ^ Use the marks made during removal to align the plates if using the old clutch assembly. ^ Tighten each bolt one turn at a time in order to avoid warping the clutch pressure plate cover. Use a criss-cross pattern for tightening the bolts. ^ Tighten the pressure and cover plate bolts for the NV1500 transmission to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the pressure and cover plate bolts for the NV3500 to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove J 38836 from the clutch plates. 4. Install the transmission. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Test the transmission and clutch system for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Clutch Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3825 Clutch Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345347, in Canada 10953517) or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42371 Clutch Line Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Remove the master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal. 2. Turn the master cylinder 45 degrees clockwise to unlock the master cylinder. 3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the clutch master cylinder start switch. 4. Remove the clips securing the clutch line to the dash panel and heat shield. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder from the dash panel. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 7. Using the J 42371 remove the clutch line from the concentric slave cylinder. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3829 1. Install the clutch master cylinder. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Pull back on the connector sleeve and connect the clutch line to the concentric slave cylinder. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Install the clips securing the clutch line to the dash panel and heat shield. 6. Position the clutch master cylinder into the cowl panel hole. 7. Turn the master cylinder 45 degrees counterclockwise to lock the master cylinder. 8. Connect the wiring harness to the clutch master cylinder start switch. 9. Connect the master cylinder rod to the clutch pedal. 10. Bleed the clutch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Concentric Actuator Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission. 2. Remove the 2 bolts securing the concentric actuator cylinder to the clutch housing. 3. Remove the actuator cylinder from the transmission input shaft. If required, the bearing can be removed from the actuator cylinder for replacement. Installation Procedure 1. Position the actuator cylinder to the transmission input shaft. Ensure that the bleed screw and the coupling are positioned toward the transmission ports. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Secure the concentric actuator cylinder to the clutch housing with 2 bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 3. Install the transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal. 2. Remove the clutch pedal from the support by depressing the side tabs. Installation Procedure 1. Position the clutch pedal into the support. 2. Secure the master cylinder rod to the clutch pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Clutch Start Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3839 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair Clutch Start Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the plastic retainer tabs from the clutch start switch. 2. Remove the clutch start switch from the push rod. 3. Remove the connector from the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the connector to the clutch start switch. 2. Install the clutch start switch to the pushrod with the plastic tabs. 3. Install the push rod to the clutch pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair Pilot Bearing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43276 Clutch Pilot Bearing Remover - J 26516-A Clutch Pilot Bearing Installer - J 8092 Driver Handle Removal Procedure 1. Remove the Flywheel. 2. Caution: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: When using the J 43276 Clutch Pilot Bearing Remover, always secure the J 43276-1 Clutch Pilot Bearing Remover tool body using a wrench. Do not allow the J 43276-1 tool body to rotate. Failing to do so causes damage to the J 43276-1 tool body. Remove the clutch pilot bearing using the J 43276. 1. Install the J 43276-1 tool body into the clutch pilot bearing. 2. Using a wrench secure the J 43276-1 tool body. 3. Insert the J 43276-2 forcing screw into the J 43276-1 tool body. 4. Rotate the J 43276-2 forcing screw clockwise into the J 43276-1 tool body until the clutch pilot bearing is completely removed from the crankshaft. 5. Rotate the J 43276-2 forcing screw counterclockwise to remove the J 43276-2 forcing screw from the J 43276-1 tool body. 6. Remove the J 43276-1 tool body from the clutch pilot bearing. 3. Discard the clutch pilot bearing. Installation Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. Install the NEW clutch pilot bearing using the J 26516-A with the J 8092. 2. Measure to ensure the proper installation depth is obtained. 3. Install the flywheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Clutch Pressure And Cover Plate Bolts First Pass ............................................................................................................................... Tighten each bolt one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern Final Pass ............................................................................................................................................ Tighten bolts for NV3500 to 40 Nm (29 Ft. Lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3846 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J 38836 Bushing Installer and Clutch Arbor Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. Mark the flywheel, cover plate, and pressure plate for installation alignment. 4. Install J 38836 through the cover plate, pressure plate, and into the flywheel for support during plate removal. 5. Remove the bolts and washers securing the clutch pressure plate and cover plate to the flywheel. 6. Remove J 38836 from the plates. 7. Clean all the clutch parts with a clean, water dampened cloth in order to remove any fibers. 8. Inspect all of the clutch parts for these conditions: ^ Wear and damage ^ Scoring and flatness with a straight edge ^ Driven plate runout. The runout must not be more than 0.508 mm (0.020 inch). ^ Scoring, gouges, and loose rivets on the friction pads ^ Oil soaked friction pads ^ Nicks, burrs, and sliding fit on all splines ^ Bending and breaks in the clutch pressure plate cover spring Installation Procedure 1. Using J 38836 for installation alignment, position the pressure plate and cover plate to the flywheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3847 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Secure the plates to the flywheel with bolts and washers. ^ Use the marks made during removal to align the plates if using the old clutch assembly. ^ Tighten each bolt one turn at a time in order to avoid warping the clutch pressure plate cover. Use a criss-cross pattern for tightening the bolts. ^ Tighten the pressure and cover plate bolts for the NV1500 transmission to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the pressure and cover plate bolts for the NV3500 to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove J 38836 from the clutch plates. 4. Install the transmission. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Test the transmission and clutch system for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Shift Lock Control Feature Function Shift Interlock: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Lock Control Feature Function Bulletin No.: 03-07-30-043A Date: May 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Information Regarding Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-30-043 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). This bulletin is being issued to better explain how the Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control (formerly known as Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)) feature is intended to operate. Revised wording regarding the shift lock control system began appearing in the Owner Manuals beginning with the 2004 model year. The shift lock control feature was intended to prevent drivers from shifting out of Park with the vehicle running without the brakes applied. However, if the ignition switch is in the Accessory (ACC) position, it may be possible on some vehicles to move the shift lever out of Park WITHOUT first activating the brake. The shift lock control system is ONLY active when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ON position. This means that when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ON position, the shift lever cannot be moved out of the Park position without activating the brake. Some owners may feel that the shift lock control system prevents an unattended child from moving the vehicle. Please stress to owners, as stated in the Owner Manual, that children should NEVER be left unattended in a vehicle, even if the ignition key has been removed from the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Component Information > Specifications Differential Carrier: Specifications Differential Carrier Assembly Case Halves Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Differential Carrier Assembly Shield Bolts .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Differential Carrier Assembly Shield Bracket Bolt ................................................................................................................................ 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.) Differential Carrier Assembly to Frame Bolts ........................................................................................................................................ 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Case > Component Information > Specifications Differential Case: Specifications Pinion and Differential Case Bearing Preload, New Bearings .............................................................................................. 3.4 - 6.2 Nm (30 - 55 inch lbs.) Pinion and Differential Case Bearing Preload, Used Bearings ............................................................................................. 2.8 - 5.1 Nm (25 - 45 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Axle Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Axle Housing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Housing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place jack or utility stands (such as GMDE 123-B67313) at the front of the vehicle. 3. Support the rear axle housing in order to relieve tension on the leaf springs. 4. Remove the rear tires and wheels assemblies. 5. Disconnect the shock absorbers from the axle brackets. 6. Disconnect the vent hose from the rear axle housing. Important: Do not remove propeller shaft from the transmission or transfer case. 7. Disconnect the propeller shaft attached to the rear drive axle. Refer to the appropriate procedure in Propeller Shaft: ^ Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece ^ Propeller Shaft Replacement - Two Piece 8. Secure the propeller shaft out of the way in order not put stress on the universal joints. 9. Remove the rear axle housing cover and gasket. 10. Disconnect the brake caliper hose from the brake pipe. 11. Remove the brake calipers. 12. Remove the brake rotors. 13. Remove the backing plates. 14. Remove the brake pipe from the axle housing. 15. Remove the rear park brake cables. 16. Remove right rear park brake cable from the cable guide on the rear axle. 17. Disconnect the rear spring from the axle. 18. Lower the axle from the vehicle. 19. Remove the differential assembly. 20. Remove the drive pinion yoke. 21. Remove the drive pinion. 22. Remove the drive pinion bearings from the drive pinion. 23. Remove the differential side bearings. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new differential side bearings to the differential assembly. 2. Determine the selective shim thickness for the drive pinion. 3. Install the new drive pinion bearings. 4. Install the drive pinion. 5. Install the new drive pinion yoke oil seal and drive pinion yoke. 6. Install the differential assembly. 7. Install the new rear axle shaft bearings and oil seals. 8. Install the axle housing assembly to the rear springs. 9. Install the brake pipe to the axle housing. 10. Install the backing plates. 11. Install the brake rotors. 12. Install the brake calipers. 13. Connect the brake caliper hose to the brake pipe. 14. Install the rear axle housing cover and new gasket. 15. Install the right rear park brake cable in the cable guide on the rear axle. 16. Connect the park brake cables. 17. Install the propeller shaft. Refer to the appropriate procedure in Propeller Shaft: ^ Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece ^ Propeller Shaft Replacement - Two Piece 18. Connect the shock absorbers to the axle brackets. 19. Connect the vent hose to the axle housing. 20. Install the rear tires and wheels assemblies. 21. Fill the axle with lubricant. Use the proper fluid. 22. Bleed the brakes system, disc brake systems only. 23. Remove the safety stands. 24. Lower the vehicle. 25. Test drive vehicle and check for leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fill Plug, Differential > Component Information > Specifications Fill Plug: Specifications Fill Plug ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Front Drive Axle Lubrication Update Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Front Drive Axle Lubrication Update Bulletin No.: 05-00-90-010 Date: December 07, 2005 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Revised Front Drive Axle Carrier Lubricant Information Models: 1999-2005 Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 2005 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel or All-Wheel Drive and Separate Front Drive Axle Carriers This bulletin is being issued to revise the front drive axle carrier lubricant specification in the Maintenance and Lubrication and the Front Drive Axle sub-sections of the Service Manual. Please replace the current information in the Service Manual with the following information. The information has been updated within SI. If you are using a paper version of this Service Manual, please make a reference to this bulletin on the affected page. This information also updates the information found in the Owner Manual. Important: Front drive axle carriers do not require periodic lubricant replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Front Drive Axle Lubrication Update > Page 3870 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Oil Capacity Front .................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.6 pints (1.2 liters) Rear ................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................... 4.0 pints (1.9 liters) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3873 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Type Differential Fluid Type Front and Rear Grade ......................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... GL-5 Viscosity ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 80W-90 Front Differential Differential Fluid Type The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB number 05-00-90-010 dated December 07, 2005. 1999-2004 7.25 Inch (Blazer, Jimmy, S-10, Sonoma, Astro, Safari) Grade ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................... GL-5 Viscosity ............................................................................................................. ...................................................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 7.25 Inch (Trailblazer, Envoy, Bravada, Rainier Grade ....................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ Synthetic Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 75W-90 8.25 Inch With Selectable 4WD Grade ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................... GL-5 Viscosity ................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. 80W-90 8.25 Inch With AWD Grade ......................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Synthetic Viscosity ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 75W-90 1999-2001 9.25 Inch Grade ............................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................ GL-5 Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 9.25 Inch Grade ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Synthetic Viscosity .................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 75W-90 Front Drive Axle Differential Fluid Type The content of this article reflects the changes identified in TSB number 05-00-90-010 dated December 07, 2005. 1999-2004 7.25 Inch (Blazer, Jimmy, S-10, Sonoma, Astro, Safari) Grade ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................... GL-5 Viscosity ............................................................................................................. ...................................................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 7.25 Inch (Trailblazer, Envoy, Bravada, Rainier Grade ....................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ Synthetic Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 75W-90 8.25 Inch With Selectable 4WD Grade ............ .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................... GL-5 Viscosity ................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. 80W-90 8.25 Inch With AWD Grade ......................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................. Synthetic Viscosity ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 75W-90 1999-2001 9.25 Inch Grade ............................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................ GL-5 Viscosity .............................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 80W-90 2002-2005 9.25 Inch Grade ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Synthetic Viscosity .................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 75W-90 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Front Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Front Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Front Drive Axle 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Make sure the vehicle is level. 3. Inspect the front axle for leaks. Repair as necessary. 4. Remove the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. 5. Clean the area around the front axle fill plug. 6. Remove the front axle fill plug and the washer. 7. Inspect the oil level. Specification The oil level should be between 0 - 13 mm (0 - 0.5 inch) below the fill plug opening. 8. If the level is low, add oil until the level is even with the bottom edge of the fill plug opening. Use the proper fluid. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 9. Install the fill plug and the washer. Tighten the plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. 11. Lower the vehicle. Lubricant Replacement - Front Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Front Drive Axle Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3876 3. Remove the fill plug and the washer. 4. Remove the drain plug and the washer. 5. Drain the fluid from the front axle differential. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the drain plug and the washer. Tighten the drain plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 2. Fill the front differential with lubricant. Use the proper fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3877 3. Install the fill plug and the washer. Tighten the fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the front differential carrier shield, if equipped. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3878 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (7.6 Inch Axle) Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (7.6 Inch Axle) 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Make sure the vehicle is level. 3. Inspect the rear axle for leaks. Repair as necessary. 4. Clean the area around the rear axle fill plug. 5. Remove the rear axle fill plug. 6. Inspect the lubricant level. The lubricant level should be between 0 - 10 mm (0 - 0.4 inch) below the fill plug opening. 7. If the level is low, add lubricant until the level is even with the bottom edge of the fill plug opening. Use the proper fluid. Refer to fluid and Lubricant Recommendations in Maintenance and Lubrication. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the rear axle fill plug. Tighten the rear axle fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (8.6 Inch Axle) Lubricant Level Inspection - Rear Drive Axle (8.6 Inch Axle) 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Make sure the vehicle is level. 3. Inspect the rear axle for leaks. Repair as necessary. 4. Clean the area around the rear axle fill plug. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3879 5. Remove the rear axle fill plug. 6. Fabricate a dipstick from a pipe cleaner or similar item. Form the pipe cleaner into an "L". 7. Insert the pipe cleaner into the fill plug opening with the stem facing down. 8. Remove the pipe cleaner and measure the distance from the bend in the pipe cleaner to the lubricant level. The distance between the bend and the lubricant level should be 15 - 40 mm (0.6 - 1.6 inch). 9. If the measurement is greater than 40 mm (1.6 inch), add lubricant until the level is between 15 40 mm (0.6 - 1.6 inch) from the bottom edge of the fill plug hole. Use the proper fluid. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 10. Install the rear axle fill plug. Tighten the rear axle fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 11. Lower the vehicle. Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Lubricant Replacement - Rear Drive Axle Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the rear axle fill plug. 3. Remove the rear axle housing cover and the rear axle housing cover gasket. 4. Drain the lubricant into a suitable container. 5. Inspect the bottom of the rear axle housing for excessive metal particle accumulation. This accumulation is symptomatic of extreme wear. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3880 1. Install the new rear axle housing cover gasket and the rear axle housing cover. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the rear axle housing cover bolts. Tighten the rear axle housing cover bolts in a crosswise pattern to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill the rear axle. Use the proper fluid. 4. Install the rear axle fill plug. Tighten the rear axle fill plug to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Specifications Pinion Bearing: Specifications Pinion Bearing Preload, New Bearings ................................................................................................................................ 1.7 - 3.4 Nm (15 30 inch lbs.) Pinion Bearing Preload, Used Bearings ................................................................................................................................ 1.1 - 2.3 Nm (10 20 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Pinion Bearings Replacement Pinion Bearing: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Bearings Replacement Drive Pinion Bearings Replacement Tools Required ^ J5590 Rear Pinion Bearing Race Installer (7.6 inch axle) ^ J7817 Outer Bearing Race Installer (7.6 inch axle) ^ J8092 Driver Handle ^ J8611-01 Rear Pinion Bearing Race Installer (8.6 inch axle) ^ J22912-01 Split Plate Bearing Puller ^ J24433 Pinion Cone and Side Bearing Installer (8.6 inch axle) ^ J29609 Rear Pinion Bearing Cup Installer (7.6 inch axle) ^ J45870 Pinion Bearing Cup Installer (8.6 inch axle) ^ J45871 Pinion Bearing Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. 5. Remove the axle shafts. 6. Remove the differential assembly. 7. Remove the drive pinion from the axle. 8. For 7.6 inch axles, press the bearing off of the pinion using the J22912-01. 9. For 8.6 inch axles, install the J45871 (1) around the pinion bearing and the J22912-01 (2) in the inverted position around the J45871. 10. Press the bearing off of the pinion using the J45871 and the J22912-01. 11. Remove the shim. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Pinion Bearings Replacement > Page 3886 12. Remove the outer pinion bearing cup from the axle housing using a hammer and brass drift in the slots provided. Move the drift back and forth between one side of the cup and the other in order to evenly work the cup out of the housing. 13. Remove the inner pinion bearing cup from the axle housing using a hammer and brass drift in the slots provided. Move the drift back and forth between one side of the cup and the other in order to evenly work the cup out of the housing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the outer pinion bearing cup using the J7817 (7.6 inch axle) or the J8611-01 (all 8.6 inch axles) (1) and the J8092 (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Pinion Bearings Replacement > Page 3887 2. Install the inner pinion bearing cup using the J29609 (7.6 inch axle) or the J45870 (8.6 inch axle) (1), and the J8092 (2). 3. Determine the selective shim thickness for the pinion. 4. Install the selective shim between the inner pinion bearing and the shoulder on the gear. 5. Install the inner pinion bearing using the J5590 (7.6 inch axle) or the J24433 (8.6 inch axles). Press the bearing on until the cone seats on the pinion shim. 6. Install a new collapsible spacer. 7. Lubricate the pinion bearing with axle lubricant. Use the proper fluid. 8. Install the pinion into the axle housing. 9. Install the outer pinion bearing onto the pinion. 10. Install a new pinion oil seal and the pinion flange/yoke. 11. Install the differential assembly. 12. Install the brake rotors. 13. Install the brake calipers. 14. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 15. Fill the axle with lubricant. Use the proper fluid. 16. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drive Pinion Bearings Replacement > Page 3888 Pinion Bearing: Service and Repair Differential Side Bearings Replacement Differential Side Bearings Replacement Tools Required ^ J8092 Universal Driver Handle - S/4 in - 10 ^ J21784 Side Bearing Installer ^ J22888-D Side Bearing Remover Kit ^ J22912-01 Split-Plate Bearing Puller ^ J25299 Side Bearing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2. Remove the differential side bearings by doing the following: 2.1. Install the differential assembly into a vise. 2.2. Install the J8107-2 (7.6 inch axle) or the J8107-4 (8.6 inch axle) (1) J22888-20A (2) onto the differential case. 2.3. Remove the differential side bearings using the J22888-20A. 3. Remove the differential assembly from the vise. Installation Procedure 1. Install the differential side bearings by doing the following: 1.1. In order to protect the differential case, install the J8107-2 or the J8107-4 in the case on the side opposite the bearing installation. 1.2. Install the J25299 (7.6 inch axle) or the J21784 (8.6 inch axle) (2) and the J8092 (1) onto the differential case bearing as shown. 1.3. Drive the bearing onto the case using the J25299 or the J21784 (2) and the J8092(1) 2. Install the differential assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Front Drive Axle Differential Drive Pinion Flange Yoke, Seal, and Dust Deflector Replacement - Front Tools Required ^ J33782 Pinion Seal Installer ^ J8614-01 Flange and Pulley Holding Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. 5. Remove the front differential carrier assembly shield, if equipped. 6. Remove the left front differential carrier assembly shield bracket. 7. Reference mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the front axle pinion yoke. 8. Remove the yoke retainer bolts and the yoke retainers from the front axle pinion yoke. Notice: When removing the propeller shaft, do not attempt to remove the shaft by pounding on the yoke ears or using a tool between the yoke and the universal joint. If the propeller shaft is removed by using such means, the injection joints may fracture and lead to premature failure of the joint. 9. Disconnect the propeller shaft from the front axle pinion yoke. Wrap the bearing caps with tape in order to prevent the loss of bearing rollers. 10. Support the propeller shaft and move out of the way as necessary. 11. Measure the torque required in order to rotate the pinion. Use an inch-pound torque wrench. Record the torque value for reassembly. This will give the combined preload for the following components: ^ The pinion bearings ^ The pinion seal ^ The carrier bearings Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3893 ^ The axle bearings ^ The axle seals 12. Scribe a line (1) on the pinion shaft and the pinion yoke (2). Record the number of exposed threads on the pinion shaft. 13. Install the J8614-01 onto the pinion as shown. 14. Remove the pinion nut while holding the J8614-01. 15. Install the J8614-2 (2) and the J8614-3 (3) into the J8614-01(1) as shown. 16. Remove the pinion yoke by turning the J8614-3 (3) clockwise while holding the J8614-01 (1). Important: Carefully pry the seal from the bore. Do not distort or scratch the aluminum case. 17. Remove the oil seal using a flat-bladed tool. 18. Remove the dust deflector from the pinion yoke by doing the following: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3894 ^ Tap the deflector off the pinion yoke. ^ Clean up the stake points on the pinion yoke. Installation Procedure Important: Stake the new deflector at 3 new equally spaced positions. You must stake the new deflector in such a way that you do not damage the seal operating surface. 1. Install the new deflector and stake the dust deflector onto the pinion yoke. Important: Drive the seal in straight, not at an angle, as this will damage the aluminum housing. 2. Install the oil seal by doing the following: 2.1. Position the oil seal in the bore. 2.2. Install the J33782 over the oil seal. 2.3. Strike the J33782 with a hammer until the seal flange seats on the axle housing surface. 3. Apply sealant, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent, to the splines of the drive pinion yoke. 4. Install the pinion yoke. Align the reference marks made during removal. Notice: Do not hammer the pinion flange/yoke onto the pinion shaft. Pinion components may be damaged if the pinion flange/yoke is hammered onto the pinion shaft. 5. Seat the pinion yoke onto the pinion shaft by tapping it with a soft-faced hammer until a few pinion shaft threads show through the yoke. 6. Install the washer and a new pinion nut. 7. Install the J8614-01 onto the pinion yoke as shown. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: If the rotating torque is exceeded, the pinion will have to be removed and a new collapsible spacer installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3895 8. Tighten the pinion nut while holding the J8614-01. Tighten the pinion nut until the pinion end play is just taken up. Rotate the pinion while tightening the nut to seat the bearings. 9. Measure the rotating torque of the pinion. Compare the measurement with the rotating torque recorded earlier. Tighten the pinion nut, in small increments, as needed, until the torque required in order to rotate the pinion is 0.40 - 0.57 Nm (3 - 5 inch lbs.) greater than the torque recorded during removal. 10. Once the specified torque is obtained, rotate the pinion several times to ensure the bearings have seated. Recheck the rotating torque and adjust if necessary. 11. Install the propeller shaft to the pinion yoke. Align the reference marks made during removal. 12. Install the yoke retainers and the yoke retainer bolts to the pinion yoke. Tighten the yoke retainer bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 13. Inspect the axle lubricant level, and add, if necessary. 14. Install the brake rotors. 15. Install the brake calipers. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3896 Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Drive Pinion Flange Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Tools Required ^ J8614-01 Flange/Pulley Holding Tool ^ J22388 Pinion Oil Seal Installer - Rear ^ J33782 Pinion Oil Seal Installer ^ J38694 Extension Housing Oil Pump/Seal Installer Removal Procedure Important: Observe and mark the positions of all the driveline components relative to the propeller shaft and the axles prior to disassembly. These components include the propeller shafts, drive axles, pinion flanges, output shafts, etc. Assemble all the components in the exact places in which you removed the parts. Follow any specifications, torque values, and measurements obtained prior to disassembly. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the rear brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. 5. Disconnect the propeller shaft from the drive pinion yoke. Position and secure the propeller shaft away from the rear axle. 6. Measure the amount of torque required to rotate the pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench. This will give the combined preload for the following components: ^ The pinion bearings ^ The pinion seal ^ The carrier bearings ^ The axle bearings ^ The axle seals 7. Record the measurement. 8. Draw an alignment mark between the pinion stem and the pinion flange/yoke. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3897 9. Install the J8614-01 as shown. 10. Remove the pinion nut while holding the J8614-0 1. 11. Remove the washer. 12. Install the J8614-2(2) and the J8614-3 (3) into the J8614-01 (1) as shown. 13. Remove the pinion yoke by turning the J8614-3 (3) clockwise while holding the J8614-01 (1). Use a container in order to retrieve the lubricant. Important: Do not damage the axle housing sealing surface. 14. Remove the pinion oil seal using a suitable seal removal tool. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3898 1. Install the new pinion oil seal using one of the following: ^ For vehicles with a 7.6 inch axle, 2-Door Utilities and 4WD Pickups w/ RPO M50 and w/o RPO ZR2, use the J33782. ^ For 2-Door Utilities, use the J38694 (8.6 inch axle). 2. Apply sealant, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent, to the splines of the pinion flange/yoke. Important: Install the pinion gear flange/yoke to the pinion gear shaft in the same position as marked during removal in order to maintain correct driveline balance. 3. Install the pinion yoke. Align the marks made during removal. Notice: Do not hammer the pinion flange/yoke onto the pinion shaft. Pinion components may be damaged if the pinion flange/yoke is hammered onto the pinion shaft. 4. Seat the pinion flange/yoke onto the pinion shaft by tapping it with a soft-faced hammer until a few pinion shaft threads show through the flange/yoke. 5. Install the washer and a new pinion nut. 6. Install the J8614-01 onto the pinion flange/yoke as shown. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: If the rotating torque is exceeded, the pinion will have to be removed and a new collapsible spacer installed. 7. Tighten the pinion nut while holding the J8614-01. Tighten the nut until the pinion end play is removed. Rotate the pinion while tightening the nut to seat the bearings. 8. Measure the rotating torque of the pinion. Compare this measurement with the rotating torque recorded during removal. Tighten the nut in small increments, as needed, until the rotating torque is 0.40 - 0.57 Nm (3 - 5 inch lbs.) greater than the rotating torque recorded during removal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3899 9. Once the specified torque is obtained, rotate the pinion several times to ensure the bearings have seated. Check the rotating torque and adjust if necessary. 10. Install the propeller shaft to the drive pinion flange/yoke. 11. Install the brake rotors. 12. Install the brake calipers. 13. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 14. Inspect and add axle lubricant to the axle housing, if necessary. 15. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Pinion Gear: Service and Repair Drive Pinion and Ring Gear Replacement Tools Required ^ J22536 Pinion Driver Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. 5. Remove the axle shafts. 6. Remove the differential assembly. 7. Remove the drive pinion flange/yoke and the oil seal. 8. Install the J22536 as shown. Ensure that the J22536 is firmly seated on the pinion. 9. Drive the pinion out using the J22536 and a hammer. Strike the J22536 slowly. Do not let the pinion fall out of the rear axle housing. 10. Remove the collapsible spacer from the pinion. Discard the spacer. 11. Remove the pinion bearings and the cups. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3903 Important: The ring gear bolts have left-hand threads. 12. Remove the ring gear bolts. Discard the bolts. 13. Remove the ring gear from the differential case. Drive the ring gear off with a brass drift if necessary. Installation Procedure Important: The mating surface of the ring gear and the differential case must be clean and free of burrs before installing the ring gear. 1. Install the ring gear onto the differential case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3904 Important: The ring gear bolts have left-hand threads. 2. Install the new ring gear bolts. Hand start each bolt to ensure that the ring gear is properly installed to the differential case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Tighten the ring gear bolts. Tighten the ring gear bolts alternately and in stages, gradually pulling the ring gear onto the differential case. Tighten the ring gear bolts in sequence to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the pinion bearing cups. 5. Determine the selective shim thickness for the pinion gear. 6. Install the selective shim onto the pinion. 7. Install the inner pinion bearing to the pinion. 8. Install a new collapsible spacer. 9. Lubricate the pinion bearings with axle lubricant. 10. Install the pinion to the axle housing. 11. Install the outer pinion bearing. 12. Install a new pinion oil seal and the pinion yoke. 13. Install the differential assembly. 14. Perform a gear tooth contact pattern check on the pinion and the ring gear. 15. Install the axle shafts. 16. Install the brake rotors. 17. Install the brake calipers. 18. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 19. Fill the axle with lubricant. Use the proper fluid. 20. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Ring Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Ring Gear: Service and Repair Drive Pinion and Ring Gear Replacement Tools Required ^ J22536 Pinion Driver Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. 5. Remove the axle shafts. 6. Remove the differential assembly. 7. Remove the drive pinion flange/yoke and the oil seal. 8. Install the J22536 as shown. Ensure that the J22536 is firmly seated on the pinion. 9. Drive the pinion out using the J22536 and a hammer. Strike the J22536 slowly. Do not let the pinion fall out of the rear axle housing. 10. Remove the collapsible spacer from the pinion. Discard the spacer. 11. Remove the pinion bearings and the cups. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Ring Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3908 Important: The ring gear bolts have left-hand threads. 12. Remove the ring gear bolts. Discard the bolts. 13. Remove the ring gear from the differential case. Drive the ring gear off with a brass drift if necessary. Installation Procedure Important: The mating surface of the ring gear and the differential case must be clean and free of burrs before installing the ring gear. 1. Install the ring gear onto the differential case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Ring Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3909 Important: The ring gear bolts have left-hand threads. 2. Install the new ring gear bolts. Hand start each bolt to ensure that the ring gear is properly installed to the differential case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Tighten the ring gear bolts. Tighten the ring gear bolts alternately and in stages, gradually pulling the ring gear onto the differential case. Tighten the ring gear bolts in sequence to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the pinion bearing cups. 5. Determine the selective shim thickness for the pinion gear. 6. Install the selective shim onto the pinion. 7. Install the inner pinion bearing to the pinion. 8. Install a new collapsible spacer. 9. Lubricate the pinion bearings with axle lubricant. 10. Install the pinion to the axle housing. 11. Install the outer pinion bearing. 12. Install a new pinion oil seal and the pinion yoke. 13. Install the differential assembly. 14. Perform a gear tooth contact pattern check on the pinion and the ring gear. 15. Install the axle shafts. 16. Install the brake rotors. 17. Install the brake calipers. 18. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 19. Fill the axle with lubricant. Use the proper fluid. 20. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Drive Axle Inner Axle Seal and/or Bearing Replacement - Front Drive Axle Inner Axle Seal and/or Bearing Replacement - Front Drive Axle Tools Required ^ J23907 Slide Hammer with Bearing Adapter ^ J29369-1 Bushing and Bearing Remover ^ J42211 Axle Bearing Installer ^ J42738 Seal Installer ^ J8092 Universal Driver Handle - 3/4 in-10 Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the left or the right wheel drive shaft as necessary. Important: Do not damage the case. 3. If replacing the left side seal and/or bearing, perform the following steps: 3.1. For Oldsmobile only, remove the left inner axle shaft. 3.2. Remove the inner axle shaft seal cover. 3.3. Install the J29369-1 to the backside of the inner axle shaft bearing. 3.4. Install the J23907 to the J29369-1. 3.5. Remove the inner axle shaft bearing by pulling on the J23907. 4. Mount the inner axle shaft seal cover in a vise. 5. Install the J29369-1 to the backside of the inner axle shaft seal. 6. Install the J23907to the J29369-1. 7. Remove the inner axle shaft seal by pulling on the J23907. 8. If replacing the right side seal and/or bearing, perform the following steps: 8.1. Remove the inner axle shaft and housing assembly. 8.2. Remove the inner axle shaft from the inner axle shaft housing. 8.3. Install the J29369-1 (2) to the backside of the bearing. 8.4. Install the J23907(1) to the J29369-1 (2). 8.5. Remove the bearing and the seal by pulling on the J23907 (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3914 1. If installing the right side bearing and/or seal, perform the following steps: 1.1. Install the bearing with the square shoulder in using the J42211 and the J8092. 1.2. Install the new axle shaft seal using the J42738. 1.3. Install the inner axle shaft to the inner axle shaft housing. 1.4. Install the inner axle shaft and housing assembly. 2. If installing the left side bearing and/or seal, perform the following steps: 2.1. Install the bearing with the square shoulder in using the J42211 and the J8092. 2.2. Install the new axle shaft seal into the inner axle shaft seal cover using the J42738. 3. Install the inner axle shaft seal cover. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the inner axle shaft seal cover bolts. Tighten the inner axle shaft seal cover to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. For Oldsmobile only, install the left inner axle shaft. Carefully tap the inner axle shaft into place with a soft mallet. 6. Install the wheel drive shaft. 7. Inspect the axle lubricant level and add, if necessary. 8. Lower the vehicle. Differential Drive Pinion Flange Yoke, Seal, and Dust Deflector Replacement - Front Differential Drive Pinion Flange Yoke, Seal, and Dust Deflector Replacement - Front Tools Required ^ J33782 Pinion Seal Installer ^ J8614-01 Flange and Pulley Holding Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3915 5. Remove the front differential carrier assembly shield, if equipped. 6. Remove the left front differential carrier assembly shield bracket. 7. Reference mark the relationship of the propeller shaft to the front axle pinion yoke. 8. Remove the yoke retainer bolts and the yoke retainers from the front axle pinion yoke. Notice: When removing the propeller shaft, do not attempt to remove the shaft by pounding on the yoke ears or using a tool between the yoke and the universal joint. If the propeller shaft is removed by using such means, the injection joints may fracture and lead to premature failure of the joint. 9. Disconnect the propeller shaft from the front axle pinion yoke. Wrap the bearing caps with tape in order to prevent the loss of bearing rollers. 10. Support the propeller shaft and move out of the way as necessary. 11. Measure the torque required in order to rotate the pinion. Use an inch-pound torque wrench. Record the torque value for reassembly. This will give the combined preload for the following components: ^ The pinion bearings ^ The pinion seal ^ The carrier bearings ^ The axle bearings ^ The axle seals 12. Scribe a line (1) on the pinion shaft and the pinion yoke (2). Record the number of exposed threads on the pinion shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3916 13. Install the J8614-01 onto the pinion as shown. 14. Remove the pinion nut while holding the J8614-01. 15. Install the J8614-2 (2) and the J8614-3 (3) into the J8614-01(1) as shown. 16. Remove the pinion yoke by turning the J8614-3 (3) clockwise while holding the J8614-01 (1). Important: Carefully pry the seal from the bore. Do not distort or scratch the aluminum case. 17. Remove the oil seal using a flat-bladed tool. 18. Remove the dust deflector from the pinion yoke by doing the following: ^ Tap the deflector off the pinion yoke. ^ Clean up the stake points on the pinion yoke. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3917 Important: Stake the new deflector at 3 new equally spaced positions. You must stake the new deflector in such a way that you do not damage the seal operating surface. 1. Install the new deflector and stake the dust deflector onto the pinion yoke. Important: Drive the seal in straight, not at an angle, as this will damage the aluminum housing. 2. Install the oil seal by doing the following: 2.1. Position the oil seal in the bore. 2.2. Install the J33782 over the oil seal. 2.3. Strike the J33782 with a hammer until the seal flange seats on the axle housing surface. 3. Apply sealant, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent, to the splines of the drive pinion yoke. 4. Install the pinion yoke. Align the reference marks made during removal. Notice: Do not hammer the pinion flange/yoke onto the pinion shaft. Pinion components may be damaged if the pinion flange/yoke is hammered onto the pinion shaft. 5. Seat the pinion yoke onto the pinion shaft by tapping it with a soft-faced hammer until a few pinion shaft threads show through the yoke. 6. Install the washer and a new pinion nut. 7. Install the J8614-01 onto the pinion yoke as shown. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: If the rotating torque is exceeded, the pinion will have to be removed and a new collapsible spacer installed. 8. Tighten the pinion nut while holding the J8614-01. Tighten the pinion nut until the pinion end play is just taken up. Rotate the pinion while tightening the nut to seat the bearings. 9. Measure the rotating torque of the pinion. Compare the measurement with the rotating torque recorded earlier. Tighten the pinion nut, in small increments, as needed, until the torque required in order to rotate the pinion is 0.40 - 0.57 Nm (3 - 5 inch lbs.) greater than the torque recorded during removal. 10. Once the specified torque is obtained, rotate the pinion several times to ensure the bearings have seated. Recheck the rotating torque and adjust if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3918 11. Install the propeller shaft to the pinion yoke. Align the reference marks made during removal. 12. Install the yoke retainers and the yoke retainer bolts to the pinion yoke. Tighten the yoke retainer bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 13. Inspect the axle lubricant level, and add, if necessary. 14. Install the brake rotors. 15. Install the brake calipers. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3919 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Rear Axle Housing Cover and Gasket Replacement Rear Axle Housing Cover and Gasket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Drain the rear axle. 3. Remove the rear axle housing cover bolts (1). 4. Remove the rear axle housing cover (2) from the axle housing. 4.1. Catch the oil in a drain pan. 4.2. Remove any gasket material from the rear axle housing and/or the rear axle housing cover. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear axle housing cover (2) and a new gasket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the rear axle housing cover bolts (1). Tighten the rear housing cover bolts in a crosswise pattern to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill the rear axle. Use the proper fluid. 4. Lower the vehicle. Drive Pinion Flange Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Drive Pinion Flange Yoke and/or Oil Seal Replacement Tools Required ^ J8614-01 Flange/Pulley Holding Tool ^ J22388 Pinion Oil Seal Installer - Rear ^ J33782 Pinion Oil Seal Installer ^ J38694 Extension Housing Oil Pump/Seal Installer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3920 Removal Procedure Important: Observe and mark the positions of all the driveline components relative to the propeller shaft and the axles prior to disassembly. These components include the propeller shafts, drive axles, pinion flanges, output shafts, etc. Assemble all the components in the exact places in which you removed the parts. Follow any specifications, torque values, and measurements obtained prior to disassembly. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. 3. Remove the rear brake calipers. 4. Remove the brake rotors. 5. Disconnect the propeller shaft from the drive pinion yoke. Position and secure the propeller shaft away from the rear axle. 6. Measure the amount of torque required to rotate the pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench. This will give the combined preload for the following components: ^ The pinion bearings ^ The pinion seal ^ The carrier bearings ^ The axle bearings ^ The axle seals 7. Record the measurement. 8. Draw an alignment mark between the pinion stem and the pinion flange/yoke. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3921 9. Install the J8614-01 as shown. 10. Remove the pinion nut while holding the J8614-0 1. 11. Remove the washer. 12. Install the J8614-2(2) and the J8614-3 (3) into the J8614-01 (1) as shown. 13. Remove the pinion yoke by turning the J8614-3 (3) clockwise while holding the J8614-01 (1). Use a container in order to retrieve the lubricant. Important: Do not damage the axle housing sealing surface. 14. Remove the pinion oil seal using a suitable seal removal tool. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new pinion oil seal using one of the following: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3922 ^ For vehicles with a 7.6 inch axle, 2-Door Utilities and 4WD Pickups w/ RPO M50 and w/o RPO ZR2, use the J33782. ^ For 2-Door Utilities, use the J38694 (8.6 inch axle). 2. Apply sealant, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent, to the splines of the pinion flange/yoke. Important: Install the pinion gear flange/yoke to the pinion gear shaft in the same position as marked during removal in order to maintain correct driveline balance. 3. Install the pinion yoke. Align the marks made during removal. Notice: Do not hammer the pinion flange/yoke onto the pinion shaft. Pinion components may be damaged if the pinion flange/yoke is hammered onto the pinion shaft. 4. Seat the pinion flange/yoke onto the pinion shaft by tapping it with a soft-faced hammer until a few pinion shaft threads show through the flange/yoke. 5. Install the washer and a new pinion nut. 6. Install the J8614-01 onto the pinion flange/yoke as shown. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: If the rotating torque is exceeded, the pinion will have to be removed and a new collapsible spacer installed. 7. Tighten the pinion nut while holding the J8614-01. Tighten the nut until the pinion end play is removed. Rotate the pinion while tightening the nut to seat the bearings. 8. Measure the rotating torque of the pinion. Compare this measurement with the rotating torque recorded during removal. Tighten the nut in small increments, as needed, until the rotating torque is 0.40 - 0.57 Nm (3 - 5 inch lbs.) greater than the rotating torque recorded during removal. 9. Once the specified torque is obtained, rotate the pinion several times to ensure the bearings have seated. Check the rotating torque and adjust if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Axle > Page 3923 10. Install the propeller shaft to the drive pinion flange/yoke. 11. Install the brake rotors. 12. Install the brake calipers. 13. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. 14. Inspect and add axle lubricant to the axle housing, if necessary. 15. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal and/or Bearing Replacement Tools Required ^ J8092 Driver Handle ^ J22813-01 Axle Bearing Remover/Installer (7.6 inch Axle) ^ J23771 Axle Shaft Seal Installer (7.6 inch Axle) ^ J23765Axle Shaft Bearing Installer (7.6 inch Axle) ^ J2619-01 Slide Hammer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the rear axle housing cover. 4. Remove the axle shaft. 5. For axles with disc brakes, remove the axle shaft seal and the bearing from the axle housing using the J22813-01 and the J2619-01 (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the axle shaft bearing into the axle tube using of the 323765 (1) and the L18092 (2). Drive the axle shaft bearing into the axle housing until the tool bottoms against the tube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3928 2. Install the axle shaft seal using the J23771. Drive the tool into the bore until the axle shaft seal bottoms flush with the tube. 3. Install the axle shaft. 4. Install the rear axle housing cover. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Fill the rear axle. Use the proper fluid. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Rear Axle Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper. 4. Remove the brake rotor. 5. Remove the rear cover and the gasket. 6. Remove the pinion shaft locking bolt. 7. On axles without a locking differential, remove the pinion shaft. 8. On axles with a locking differential, remove the shaft part way. Rotate the case until the pinion shaft touches the housing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3934 9. On axles with a locking differential, use a screwdriver, or a similar tool, in order to enter the differential case and rotate the rear axle shaft lock (1) until the lock aligns with the thrust block (2). 10. Push the flange of the axle shaft inward towards the differential assembly. 11. Remove the axle shaft lock from the button end of the axle shaft. Important: When removing the axle shaft, do not rotate the shaft. Rotating the shaft will misalign the gears. Misaligning the gears will make the assembly difficult. 12. Remove the axle shaft from the housing. Installation Procedure Important: Carefully insert the axle shaft in order to not damage the seal. 1. Install the axle shaft into the rear axle housing. 2. Slide the axle shaft into the differential assembly allowing the splines to engage the differential side gear. 3. On axles without a locking differential, place the axle shaft lock on the button end of the axle shaft. 4. On axles with a locking differential, place the axle shaft lock (1) on the axle shaft (3) so that the ends are flush with the thrust block (2). 5. Pull the shaft flange outward in order to seat the axle shaft lock into the differential side gear. 6. Install the pinion shaft. Align the hole in the pinion shaft with the bolt hole in the differential case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3935 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the new pinion shaft lock bolt. Tighten the pinion shaft locking bolt to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the rear cover and the gasket. 9. Install the brake rotor. 10. Install the brake caliper. 11. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 12. Fill the rear axle. Use the proper fluid. 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3936 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Unlock the steering column so that the steering linkage is free to move. 2. Raise the vehicle. Support the vehicle with suitable safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the two front tire and wheel assembly. 4. In order to prevent the drive axle from turning, insert a drift through the brake caliper and into one of the rotor vanes. 5. Remove the axle nut and washer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3937 6. Remove the drift from the brake rotor. 7. Remove the front brake rotors and support the caliper with a piece of wire in order to prevent damage to the brake hose. Refer to Brake Rotor Replacement - Front in Disc Brakes. 8. Remove the brackets from the upper control arm holding both the ABS wire and the brake hose. 9. Remove the ABS bracket located on the top of the upper control arm ball joint. 10. Strap the frame to the hoist in order to prevent movement. Notice: Be careful that the safety stand does not damage or bend any components it may contact. 11. Position a safety stand under the lower control arm. 12. Support the weight of the steering knuckle assembly and lower control arm with a safety stand. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3938 13. Disengage the wheel drive shaft from the hub by placing a brass drift against the outer end of the drive axle in order to protect the threads. Sharply strike the brass drift with a hammer. Do not attempt to remove the axle at this time. 14. Support the steering knuckle and assembly with a piece of wire in order to prevent damage to the outer tie rod and ABS wire. 15. Disconnect the upper ball joint from the steering knuckle. 16. Remove the lower part of shock absorber. 17. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle. 18. After the lower ball joint is loose from the knuckle, simultaneously push the axle shaft in toward the differential carrier in order to allow room for the knuckle and assembly to be removed. 19. Remove the axle from the steering knuckle assembly. Important: Lower the safety stand from the lower control arm in order to relieve the pressure of the torsion bar and in order to allow for clearance. Do not damage the axle seal during removal of the differential carrier shield. 20. Remove the front differential carrier shield. 21. Disconnect the left side wheel drive shaft from the differential carrier by placing a block of wood or a brass drift against the tripot housing. Firmly strike the block of wood outward from the case with a hammer. Strike hard enough to overcome the snap ring pressure holding in the shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3939 22. Disconnect the right side wheel drive shaft from the differential carrier by placing a block of wood or a brass drift against the tripot housing. Firmly strike the block of wood outward from the case with a hammer. Strike hard enough to overcome the snap ring pressure holding in the shaft. 23. Pull the axle straight out from the differential carrier. 24. Support the drive axle so as not to tear the boot. Caution: To prevent personal injury and/or component damage, do not allow the weight of the vehicle to load the front wheels, or attempt to operate the vehicle, when the wheel drive shaft(s) or wheel drive shaft nut(s) are removed. To do so may cause the inner bearing race to separate, resulting in damage to brake and suspension components and toss of vehicle control. 25. Remove the drive axle. Installation Procedure Important: Do not lubricate or damage the differential carrier axle seals during installation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3940 1. In order to prevent damage to the boot, cover the following components with a shop towel: ^ The shock mounting bracket ^ The lower control arm ball stud ^ All other sharp edges 2. Install the wheel drive shaft to the differential carrier. 2.1. With both hands on the tripot housing, align the splines on the shaft with the differential carrier. 2.2. Center the drive axle into the differential carrier seal. 2.3. Firmly push the shaft straight into the differential carrier until the snap ring seats into place. Notice: Be careful that the safety stand does not damage or bend any components it may contact. 3. Raise the safety stand to support the weight of the lower control arm. Important: It will be necessary to slightly start the knuckle onto the drive axle while simultaneously guiding the lower ball stud to its proper location on the steering knuckle. 4. Reconnect the lower ball joint to the steering knuckle. 5. Install the lower part of the shock absorber. 6. Reconnect the upper ball joint to the steering knuckle. 7. Install the drive axle washer and nut. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the wheel drive shaft nut. Tighten the nut to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle > Page 3941 9. Install the ABS bracket located on the top of the upper control arm ball joint. 10. Install the brackets from the upper control arm holding both the ABS wire and the brake hose. 11. Install the front brake rotors. 12. Install the front differential carrier shield. Refer to Shield Replacement in Front Drive Axle. 13. Remove the strap from the frame. 14. Install the two front tire and wheel assembly. 15. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Tools Required ^ J41048 Swage Clamp Tool ^ J35566 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Plier ^ J8059 Snap Ring Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the clamp from the boot with a pair of side cutters. Important: Do not damage the tripot housing (1). 2. Use a hand grinder to cut through the swage ring. 3. Remove the tripot housing (1) and the tri-lobal tripot bushing (2) from the halfshaft bar (5). 4. Thoroughly degrease the housing (1) and the spider assembly. 5. Discard the tripot bushing. 6. Use 320 grit 3M cloth (or equivalent) to remove any evident corrosion in the transmission sealing surface. 7. Allow the housing (1) and the spider assembly to dry. Important: Handle the tripot spider assembly (1) with care. Tripot balls and needle rollers may separate from the spider trunnion if the tripot balls and needle rollers are not handled carefully. 8. Compress the tripot boot (4) onto the halfshaft bar (3), away from the spider assembly (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3946 9. Spread the spacer rings (1, 3) using J8059 (or equivalent) to remove the spider assembly (2). 10. Remove the following items: ^ The spacer ring (1) ^ The spider assembly (2) ^ The second spacer ring (3) ^ The tripot boot (4) 11. Discard the tripot boot and spacer rings. 12. Clean the halfshaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the boot mounting area (grooves). 13. Inspect the following items: ^ The needle rollers ^ he needle bearings ^ The trunnion 14. Inspect the tripot housing for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. 15. Use the appropriate kit to replace any damaged parts. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3947 1. Position the new swage clamp onto the neck of the boot. Do not swage. 2. Slide the new small swage clamp (2) and the boot (1) to the proper position (3) on the halfshaft bar. 3. Position the neck of the boot in the boot groove on the halfshaft bar. 4. In order to swage the swage clamp, position the inboard end (1) of the halfshaft assembly in J41048. 5. Align the swage clamp (2) within J41048. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3948 6. Place the top half of the J41048 on the bottom half. 7. Inspect to make sure there are no pinch points on the boot before proceeding. 8. Insert the bolts (2). 9. Tighten the bolts (2) by hand until snug. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 10. Align the following items: ^ The boot ^ The halfshaft bar ^ The swage clamp Each bolt 180 degrees at a time, using a ratchet wrench. Alternate between each bolt until both sides are bottomed. 11. Loosen the bolts. 12. Separate the dies. Important: If deformities exist in the swage clamp, place the swage clamp back into J41048. Ensure the swage clamp covers the whole swaging area. Re-swage the swage clamp. 13. Inspect the swage clamp for any "lip" deformities. Important: Assemble the joint with the convolute retainer in the correct position. Assemble the joint to meet the specified dimension to avoid boot damage. 14. Install the convolute retainer over the boot capturing four convolutions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3949 Important: Ensure that the rings are fully seated. 15. Install the spacer ring (2) and spider assembly (1) onto the halfshaft bar (3). 16. Install the other spacer ring in the groove at the end of the halfshaft bar. Ensure that the rings are fully seated. 17. Pack the boot and housing with the grease supplied in the kit. The amount of grease supplied in this kit has been pre-measured for this application. 18. Place the large retaining clamp (2) on the boot. 19. Place the housing (1) and the new tri-lobal tripot bushing over the spider assembly (3). 20. Install the boot onto the tri-lobal tripot bushing. 21. Inspect the inboard stroke position (see diagram). ^ For male tripot housing assembly: dimension a = 280 mm (11 inch). ^ For female tripot housing assembly: dimension b = 228 mm (9 inch). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3950 22. Secure the large retaining clamp (2) and the boot (3) to the housing (1) using J35566. 23. Remove the convolute retainer from the boot (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3951 Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Outer Joint and Seal Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement Tools Required ^ J35910 Seal Clamp Tool ^ J41048 Swage Clamp Tool ^ J8059 Snap Ring Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Place the halfshaft in a vise. 2. Place protective covers over the vise jaws. 3. Use a hand grinder to cut through the swage rings (2). Do not damage the outer race. 4. Compress the seal on the halfshaft and away from the CV joint outer race (1). 5. Wipe all grease away from the face of the CV joint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3952 6. Find the halfshaft retaining snap ring (3), which is located in the inner race (2). 7. Spread the snap ring ears apart using J8059 (or equivalent). 8. Pull the CV joint from the halfshaft (4). 9. Discard the old seal. 10. Place a brass drift against the cage (1). 11. Tap gently on the brass drift in order to tilt the cage. 12. Remove the first ball (2) when the cage tilts. 13. Repeat the previous step to remove all of the balls. 14. Pivot the cage (4) and the inner race 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (1). At the same time, align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race (2). 15. Lift out the cage (4) and the inner race. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3953 16. Remove the inner race (1) from the cage (2) by rotating the inner race (1) upward. 17. Thoroughly degrease all of the CV joint parts. 18. Check the outer CV joint assembly for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 19. Clean the halfshaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the seal mounting area (grooves). Assembly Procedure Important: Replace the joint assembly if necessary. 1. Inspect all of the parts for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. 2. Put a light coat of the recommended grease on the inner and the outer race grooves. 3. Insert the inner race (1) into the cage (2) by rotating the inner race downward. 4. Hold the inner race (1) at 90 degrees to the centerline of the cage. 5. Align the lands of the inner race (2) with the windows of the cage (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3954 6. Rotate the inner race downward to insert the inner race into the cage. 7. Insert the cage (4) and inner race into the outer race (1). 8. Place a brass drift against the cage (1). 9. Tap gently on the brass drift in order to tilt the cage (1). 10. Install the first ball (2) when the cage tilts. 11. Repeat previous step to reinstall all of the balls. 12. Pack the CV joint seal and the CV joint assembly with the grease supplied in the kit. The amount of grease supplied in this kit has been pre-measured for this application. 13. Place the new small swage clamp (2) onto the CV joint seal (1). 14. Place the large retaining clamp on the seal (1). 15. Position the small end of the CV joint seal (1) into the joint seal groove (3) on the halfshaft bar. 16. Position the outboard end of the halfshaft assembly(1) in J41048. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3955 17. Align the swage clamp (2) within J41048. 18. Place the top half of the J41048 on the bottom half. 19. Check to make sure there are no pinch points on the seal before proceeding with procedures. 20. Insert the bolts (2). Tighten the bolts (2) by hand until snug. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 21. Align the following items: ^ The seal ^ The halfshaft bar ^ The swage clamp Tighten each bolt 180 degrees at a time, using a ratchet wrench. Alternate between each bolt until both sides are bottomed. 22. Loosen the bolts. 23. Separate the dies. 24. Check the swage clamp for any "lip" deformities. If the deformities exist, place the swage clamp back into the J41048. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3956 Important: Ensure that the retaining ring side of the CV joint inner race faces the halfshaft bar (1) before installation. 25. Place the retaining snap ring into the CV joint Inner race. Important: The retaining snap ring inside of the inner race engages in the halfshaft bar groove with a click when the CV joint is in the proper position. 26. Slide the CV joint (2) onto the halfshaft bar (1). 27. Pull on the CV joint (2) to verify engagement. 28. Slide the large diameter of the CV joint seal (1), with the large retaining ring (2) in place, over the outside edge of the CV joint outer race (3). 29. Position the lip of the CV joint seal (1) into the groove on the CV joint outer race (3). 30. Manipulate the CV joint seal (1) to remove any excess air. 31. Secure the large retaining clamp (1) to the housing with J35910 (or equivalent), a breaker bar (3), and a torque wrench (2). Torque the large retaining clamp (1) to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3957 32. Check the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Description and Operation Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Description and Operation Wheel Drive Shafts Description and Operation Front Wheel Drive Shafts are flexible assemblies which consist of the following components: ^ Front wheel drive shaft constant velocity joint outer joint. ^ Front wheel drive shaft tri-pot joint inner joint. ^ The front wheel drive shaft connects the front wheel drive shaft tri-pot joint and the front wheel drive shaft constant velocity joint. ^ Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Cover 15 Series ^ The front wheel drive shaft tri-pot joint is completely flexible, and moves with an in and out motion. ^ The front wheel drive shaft constant velocity joint is flexible but can not move in and out. The Wheel Drive Shaft is a balanced shaft that transmits rotational force from the front differential to the front wheels when the transfer case is engaged. The wheel drive shaft is mounted to the front differential by bolting the flange of the wheel drive shaft to the flange on the inner output shaft of the front differential. The other end of the wheel drive shaft is splined to fit into and drive the hub assembly when the transfer case is engaged. The tri-pot joint and constant velocity joint on the wheel drive shaft allows the shaft to be flexible to move with the suspension travel of the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Seal Replacement Tools Required ^ J41048 Swage Clamp Tool ^ J35566 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Plier ^ J8059 Snap Ring Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the clamp from the boot with a pair of side cutters. Important: Do not damage the tripot housing (1). 2. Use a hand grinder to cut through the swage ring. 3. Remove the tripot housing (1) and the tri-lobal tripot bushing (2) from the halfshaft bar (5). 4. Thoroughly degrease the housing (1) and the spider assembly. 5. Discard the tripot bushing. 6. Use 320 grit 3M cloth (or equivalent) to remove any evident corrosion in the transmission sealing surface. 7. Allow the housing (1) and the spider assembly to dry. Important: Handle the tripot spider assembly (1) with care. Tripot balls and needle rollers may separate from the spider trunnion if the tripot balls and needle rollers are not handled carefully. 8. Compress the tripot boot (4) onto the halfshaft bar (3), away from the spider assembly (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3963 9. Spread the spacer rings (1, 3) using J8059 (or equivalent) to remove the spider assembly (2). 10. Remove the following items: ^ The spacer ring (1) ^ The spider assembly (2) ^ The second spacer ring (3) ^ The tripot boot (4) 11. Discard the tripot boot and spacer rings. 12. Clean the halfshaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the boot mounting area (grooves). 13. Inspect the following items: ^ The needle rollers ^ he needle bearings ^ The trunnion 14. Inspect the tripot housing for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. 15. Use the appropriate kit to replace any damaged parts. Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3964 1. Position the new swage clamp onto the neck of the boot. Do not swage. 2. Slide the new small swage clamp (2) and the boot (1) to the proper position (3) on the halfshaft bar. 3. Position the neck of the boot in the boot groove on the halfshaft bar. 4. In order to swage the swage clamp, position the inboard end (1) of the halfshaft assembly in J41048. 5. Align the swage clamp (2) within J41048. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3965 6. Place the top half of the J41048 on the bottom half. 7. Inspect to make sure there are no pinch points on the boot before proceeding. 8. Insert the bolts (2). 9. Tighten the bolts (2) by hand until snug. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 10. Align the following items: ^ The boot ^ The halfshaft bar ^ The swage clamp Each bolt 180 degrees at a time, using a ratchet wrench. Alternate between each bolt until both sides are bottomed. 11. Loosen the bolts. 12. Separate the dies. Important: If deformities exist in the swage clamp, place the swage clamp back into J41048. Ensure the swage clamp covers the whole swaging area. Re-swage the swage clamp. 13. Inspect the swage clamp for any "lip" deformities. Important: Assemble the joint with the convolute retainer in the correct position. Assemble the joint to meet the specified dimension to avoid boot damage. 14. Install the convolute retainer over the boot capturing four convolutions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3966 Important: Ensure that the rings are fully seated. 15. Install the spacer ring (2) and spider assembly (1) onto the halfshaft bar (3). 16. Install the other spacer ring in the groove at the end of the halfshaft bar. Ensure that the rings are fully seated. 17. Pack the boot and housing with the grease supplied in the kit. The amount of grease supplied in this kit has been pre-measured for this application. 18. Place the large retaining clamp (2) on the boot. 19. Place the housing (1) and the new tri-lobal tripot bushing over the spider assembly (3). 20. Install the boot onto the tri-lobal tripot bushing. 21. Inspect the inboard stroke position (see diagram). ^ For male tripot housing assembly: dimension a = 280 mm (11 inch). ^ For female tripot housing assembly: dimension b = 228 mm (9 inch). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3967 22. Secure the large retaining clamp (2) and the boot (3) to the housing (1) using J35566. 23. Remove the convolute retainer from the boot (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3968 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Outer Joint and Seal Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Seal Replacement Tools Required ^ J35910 Seal Clamp Tool ^ J41048 Swage Clamp Tool ^ J8059 Snap Ring Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Place the halfshaft in a vise. 2. Place protective covers over the vise jaws. 3. Use a hand grinder to cut through the swage rings (2). Do not damage the outer race. 4. Compress the seal on the halfshaft and away from the CV joint outer race (1). 5. Wipe all grease away from the face of the CV joint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3969 6. Find the halfshaft retaining snap ring (3), which is located in the inner race (2). 7. Spread the snap ring ears apart using J8059 (or equivalent). 8. Pull the CV joint from the halfshaft (4). 9. Discard the old seal. 10. Place a brass drift against the cage (1). 11. Tap gently on the brass drift in order to tilt the cage. 12. Remove the first ball (2) when the cage tilts. 13. Repeat the previous step to remove all of the balls. 14. Pivot the cage (4) and the inner race 90 degrees to the centerline of the outer race (1). At the same time, align the cage windows (3) with the lands of the outer race (2). 15. Lift out the cage (4) and the inner race. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3970 16. Remove the inner race (1) from the cage (2) by rotating the inner race (1) upward. 17. Thoroughly degrease all of the CV joint parts. 18. Check the outer CV joint assembly for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 19. Clean the halfshaft bar. Use a wire brush to remove any rust in the seal mounting area (grooves). Assembly Procedure Important: Replace the joint assembly if necessary. 1. Inspect all of the parts for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. 2. Put a light coat of the recommended grease on the inner and the outer race grooves. 3. Insert the inner race (1) into the cage (2) by rotating the inner race downward. 4. Hold the inner race (1) at 90 degrees to the centerline of the cage. 5. Align the lands of the inner race (2) with the windows of the cage (3). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3971 6. Rotate the inner race downward to insert the inner race into the cage. 7. Insert the cage (4) and inner race into the outer race (1). 8. Place a brass drift against the cage (1). 9. Tap gently on the brass drift in order to tilt the cage (1). 10. Install the first ball (2) when the cage tilts. 11. Repeat previous step to reinstall all of the balls. 12. Pack the CV joint seal and the CV joint assembly with the grease supplied in the kit. The amount of grease supplied in this kit has been pre-measured for this application. 13. Place the new small swage clamp (2) onto the CV joint seal (1). 14. Place the large retaining clamp on the seal (1). 15. Position the small end of the CV joint seal (1) into the joint seal groove (3) on the halfshaft bar. 16. Position the outboard end of the halfshaft assembly(1) in J41048. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3972 17. Align the swage clamp (2) within J41048. 18. Place the top half of the J41048 on the bottom half. 19. Check to make sure there are no pinch points on the seal before proceeding with procedures. 20. Insert the bolts (2). Tighten the bolts (2) by hand until snug. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 21. Align the following items: ^ The seal ^ The halfshaft bar ^ The swage clamp Tighten each bolt 180 degrees at a time, using a ratchet wrench. Alternate between each bolt until both sides are bottomed. 22. Loosen the bolts. 23. Separate the dies. 24. Check the swage clamp for any "lip" deformities. If the deformities exist, place the swage clamp back into the J41048. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3973 Important: Ensure that the retaining ring side of the CV joint inner race faces the halfshaft bar (1) before installation. 25. Place the retaining snap ring into the CV joint Inner race. Important: The retaining snap ring inside of the inner race engages in the halfshaft bar groove with a click when the CV joint is in the proper position. 26. Slide the CV joint (2) onto the halfshaft bar (1). 27. Pull on the CV joint (2) to verify engagement. 28. Slide the large diameter of the CV joint seal (1), with the large retaining ring (2) in place, over the outside edge of the CV joint outer race (3). 29. Position the lip of the CV joint seal (1) into the groove on the CV joint outer race (3). 30. Manipulate the CV joint seal (1) to remove any excess air. 31. Secure the large retaining clamp (1) to the housing with J35910 (or equivalent), a breaker bar (3), and a torque wrench (2). Torque the large retaining clamp (1) to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Joint and Seal Replacement > Page 3974 32. Check the gap dimension on the clamp ear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3975 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Tools and Equipment Special Tools and Equipment Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 3989 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 3990 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 3991 Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3992 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft Seal and/or Bearing Replacement Tools Required ^ J8092 Driver Handle ^ J22813-01 Axle Bearing Remover/Installer (7.6 inch Axle) ^ J23771 Axle Shaft Seal Installer (7.6 inch Axle) ^ J23765Axle Shaft Bearing Installer (7.6 inch Axle) ^ J2619-01 Slide Hammer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the rear axle housing cover. 4. Remove the axle shaft. 5. For axles with disc brakes, remove the axle shaft seal and the bearing from the axle housing using the J22813-01 and the J2619-01 (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install the axle shaft bearing into the axle tube using of the 323765 (1) and the L18092 (2). Drive the axle shaft bearing into the axle housing until the tool bottoms against the tube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3993 2. Install the axle shaft seal using the J23771. Drive the tool into the bore until the axle shaft seal bottoms flush with the tube. 3. Install the axle shaft. 4. Install the rear axle housing cover. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Fill the rear axle. Use the proper fluid. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3997 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Hub, Bearing, and Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45859 Axle Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and the wheel. 3. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 4. Remove the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. 5. Remove the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 6. Remove the rotor. 7. On 4WD vehicles, disengage the wheel driveshaft from the hub and bearing using the J 45859 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3998 8. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt from the wheel hub and bearing. 9. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the wheel hub and bearing. 10. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. Important: Lay the wheel hub and bearing on the wheel hub studs on the outboard side. This prevents damage or contamination to the bearing seal. 11. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle. 12. Remove the splash shield from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3999 13. Remove the wheel hub and bearing seal from the wheel hub and bearing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel hub and bearing seal to the wheel hub and bearing. 2. Install the splash shield to the steering knuckle. Align the shield to the steering knuckle. 3. Install the wheel hub and bearing assembly to the steering knuckle. Align the threaded holes. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4000 4. Install the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing. 6. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the rotor. 8. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 9. Install the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 10. Install the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. ^ Tighten the drive axle nut to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the tire and the wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Drive Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................ ................................................ 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Support: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Center Support Bearing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the propeller shaft. 3. Remove the center bearing using the following steps: 3.1. Stand the propeller shaft (2) on end in the press (1) with the center bearing (3) supported by the press bars (4). 3.2. Press the propeller shaft (2) down and off the center bearing (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the center bearing (3) onto the propeller shaft (2) by pressing the center bearing onto the shaft using a press (1). Ensure that the center bearing is fully seated on the propeller shaft. 2. Install the propeller shaft. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4012 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Diagrams Driveline Disassembled Views Double Cardan Propeller Shaft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4013 Propeller Shaft with Center Bearing Front Drive Propeller Shaft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4014 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation Propeller Shaft Description and Operation The propeller shaft is a tube with universal joints at both ends which do not require periodic maintenance, that transmit power from the transfer case or transmission output shaft to the differential. Front Propeller Shaft Description The front propeller shaft transmits rotating force from the transfer case to the front differential when the transfer case is engaged. The front propeller shaft connects to the transfer case using a splined slip joint. One Piece Propeller Shaft Description A 1 piece propeller shaft uses a splined slip joint to connect the driveline to the transmission or transfer case. Two Piece Propeller Shaft Description There are 3 universal joints used on the two piece propeller shaft, A center bearing assembly is used to support the propeller shaft connection point, and help isolate the vehicle from vibration. Propeller Shaft Phasing Description The propeller shaft is designed and built with the yoke lugs (ears) in line with each other. This produces the smoothest running shaft possible. A propeller shaft designed with built in yoke lugs in line is known as in - phase. An out of phase propeller shaft often causes vibration. The propeller shaft generates vibration from speeding up and slowing down each time the universal joint goes around. The vibration is the same as a person snapping a rope and watching the wave reaction flow to the end. An in phase propeller shaft is similar to 2 persons snapping a rope at the same time and watching the waves meet and cancel each other out. A total cancellation of vibration produces a smooth flow of power in the drive line. All splined shaft slip yokes are keyed in order to ensure proper phasing. Universal Joint Description The universal joint is connected to the propeller shah. The universal consist of 4 caps with needle bearings and grease seals mounted on the trunnions of a cross or spider. These bearings and caps are greased at the factory and no periodic maintenance is required. There are 2 universal joints used in a one piece propeller shaft and 3 used in two piece propeller shaft. The bearings and caps are pressed into the yokes and held in place with snap rings, except for 2 bearings on some models witch are strapped onto the pinion flange of the differential. Universal joints are designed to handle the effects of various loads and rear axle windup conditions during acceleration and braking. The universal joint operates efficiently and safely within the designed angle variations. when the design angles are exceeded, the operational life of the joint decreases. Center Bearing Description Center bearings support the driveline when using 2 or more propeller shafts. The center bearing is a ball bearing mounted in a rubber cushion that attaches to a frame crossmember. The manufacturer prelubricates and seals the bearing. The cushion allows vertical motion at the driveline and helps isolate the vehicle from vibration. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive/Propeller Shaft: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic Starting Point - Propeller Shaft Begin the system diagnosis by reviewing the system Description and Operation. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will help you determine the correct symptom diagnostic procedure when a malfunction exists. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will also help you determine if the condition described by the customer is normal operation. Refer to Symptoms - Propeller Shaft on in order to identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/- Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4017 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Symptoms - Propeller Shaft Before beginning diagnosis, review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system function. Classifying the Symptom Propeller Shaft symptoms can usually be classified into the following categories: ^ Leaks ^ Noises ^ Vibrations Leak and noise related symptoms are diagnosed within the Propeller Shaft information. For vibration related symptoms, refer to Diagnostic Starting Point - Vibration Diagnosis and Correction in Vibration Diagnosis and Correction for diagnosis. Visual/Physical Inspection ^ Inspect the system for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Propeller Shaft. ^ Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: ^ Leak at Front Slip Yoke See: Leak at Front Slip Yoke ^ Universal Joint Noise See: Universal Joint Noise ^ Ping, Snap, or Click Noise See: Ping, Snap, or Click Noise ^ Knock or Clunk Noise See: Knock or Clunk Noise ^ Scraping Noise See: Scraping Noise ^ Squeak Noise See: Squeak Noise Knock or Clunk Noise Knock or Clunk Noise Leak at Front Slip Yoke Leak at Front Slip Yoke Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4018 Ping, Snap, or Click Noise Ping, Snap, or Click Noise Scraping Noise Scraping Noise Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed Shudder on Acceleration at Low Speed Squeak Noise Squeak Noise Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4019 Universal Joint Noise Universal Joint Noise Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece Removal Procedure Important: Observe the position of all the driveline components. Accurately mark the relationship of the components before removal. These components include the propeller shafts, the drive axles, the pinion flanges, and the output shafts. Reassemble all components in the exact relationship to each other as they were before removal. Follow the specifications, the torque values, and any measurements that were obtained prior to disassembly. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Accurately reference mark the propeller shaft. 3. Remove the clamp bolts from the rear of the pinion flange. Notice: When removing the propeller shaft, do not attempt to remove the shaft by pounding on the yoke ears or using a tool between the yoke and the universal joint. If the propeller shaft is removed by using such means, the injection joints may fracture and lead to premature failure of the joint. 4. Remove the propeller shaft from the rear axle flange by sliding forward. 5. Tape the bearing cups in order to prevent the loss of bearing rollers. Important: Do not allow the universal joint to incline greatly; the joint may fracture. 6. Remove the propeller shaft by using the following procedure: 6.1. Lower the rear of propeller shaft. 6.2. Gently pull the shaft from the transmission. 7. Clean all the parts using a suitable solvent. 8. Inspect the outer diameter of the nylon injected yoke for burrs. Burring damages the transmission seal. 9. Inspect for proper installation and uniform seating of the bearing cups. 10. Inspect the slip yoke splines for damage. Replace the parts as necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece > Page 4022 1. Slide the propeller shaft into the transmission. Important: Install a new universal joint whenever a slip joint or companion flange is serviced. 2. Lubricate the slip joint. 3. Install the yoke to the pinion flange. 4. Align the reference marks on the pinion flange and the propeller shaft rear yoke. Seat the yoke properly. 5. Install the retainers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the rear pinion flange bolts into the pinion flange. Tighten ^ Tighten the rear pinion flange bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) for 2.2L engines. ^ Tighten the rear pinion flange bolts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) for 4.3L engines. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece > Page 4023 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Replacement - Two Piece Propeller Shaft Replacement - Two Piece Removal Procedure Important: Observe and accurately reference mark all driveline components relative to the propeller shaft ad axles before disassembly. These components include the propeller shaft, the drive axles, the pinion flanges, the output shafts, etc. All components must be reassembled in the exact relationship to each other as they were when removed. In addition, published specifications and torque values, as well as any measurements made prior to disassembly must be followed. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Reference mark the rear propeller shaft to the pinion flange/yoke and to the front propeller shaft, then reference mark the front shaft to the transmission or the transfer case. 3. Remove the center bearing support bracket from the crossmember. 4. Remove the bolts and/or the yoke retainers from the rear axle pinion flange/yoke as necessary. 5. Remove the rear propeller shaft with the center bearing by sliding the propeller shaft from the spline shaft. 6. Remove the propeller shaft from the rear of the transmission or the transfer case. 7. Clean the mating surfaces bearing caps, bearing straps and pinion yoke of corrosion using crocus cloth or 400 grit sandpaper. 8. Clean all parts with an approved solvent. 9. Inspect the outer surface of the front slip yoke for burrs. Burring damages the transmission seal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece > Page 4024 10. Inspect the slip yoke splines for wear. 11. Inspect for proper installation and uniform seating of the bearing cups. 12. Inspect for twisted slip yoke splines or the wrong universal joint. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the splines of the front propeller shaft stub shaft for a sufficient coating of grease. If the splines of the stub shaft does not have a sufficient coating of grease, lubricate the shaft with chassis grease (GM P/N 12377985 or equivalent). 2. Install the front propeller shaft to the transmission or the transfer case lining up the index splines. 3. Install the rear propeller shaft with the center bearing. Ensure the spline of both front and rear shaft mesh. 4. Install the rear propeller shaft to the rear axle pinion flange/yoke. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the yoke retainers and/or the bolts as necessary. ^ Tighten the yoke retainer bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) (single universal joint type). ^ Tighten the flange bolts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) (double cardan joint type). Important: The center bearing must be aligned in order to prevent damage to the propeller shaft assembly. When bolting the center bearing in place, be sure to keep the center perpendicular (89 91 degrees) to the propeller shaft. 6. Install the bolts of the center bearing to the crossmember. Tighten the center bearing support bolts and nuts to 70 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece > Page 4025 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece > Page 4026 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Propeller Shaft Replacement - Front Propeller Shaft Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Important: Observe the position of all the driveline components. Accurately mark the relationship of the components before removal. These components include the propeller shafts, the drive axles, the pinion flanges, and the output shafts. Reassemble all components in the exact relationship to each other as they were before removal. Follow the specifications, the torque values, and any measurements obtained prior to disassembly. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Accurately reference mark the propeller shaft. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft bolts and yoke clamp from the front drive axle. 4. Remove the propeller shaft from the transfer case. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Propeller Shaft Replacement - One Piece > Page 4027 1. Align the previously drawn reference marks. 2. Install the shaft to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Ensure that the propeller shaft assembly is fully engaged into the slip yoke. The retaining ring will produce a snapping noise when the shaft is properly engaged. 3. Install the front propeller shaft yoke clamp bolts to the front drive axle. Tighten the front propeller shaft yoke clamp bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4028 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Special Tools and Equipment Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring Tools Required ^ J9522-3 U Joint Bearing Separator ^ J9522-5 U Joint Bearing Spacer Remover Disassembly Procedure Notice: Never clamp propeller shaft tubing in a vise. Clamping could dent or deform the tube causing an imbalance or unsafe condition. Always clamp on one of the yokes and support the shaft horizontally. Avoid damaging the slip yoke sealing surface. Nicks may damage the bushing or cut the lip seal. 1. Support the propeller shaft in a line horizontal with the table of a press. 2. Mark the propeller shaft as to which end is the transmission end and which end goes to the rear axle. 3. Place the universal joint so that the lower ear of the yoke is supported on a 30 mm (1 1/8 inch) socket. 4. In order to shear the plastic retaining ring on the bearing cup, place J9522-3 on the open horizontal bearing cups. Press the lower bearing cup out of the yoke ear. 5. If you do not completely remove the bearing cup, lift the cross and insert J9522-5 between the seal and the bearing cup you are removing. Continue to press the bearing cup out of the yoke. 6. Rotate the propeller shaft. Press the opposite bearing cup out of the yoke. 7. Mark the orientation of the slip yoke to the tube for proper reassembly. 8. Remove the cross from the yoke. 9. Remove the remaining universal joint parts from the yoke. If you are replacing the front universal joint, remove the bearing cups in the slip yoke in the same manner. 10. Inspect the retaining ring grooves for plastic. 11. Inspect the bearing cup bores in the yoke ears for burrs or imperfections. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring > Page 4033 12. Clean the remains of the sheared plastic bearing retainers from the grooves in the yoke. 13. The sheared plastic may prevent the bearing cups from pressing into place and thus prevent the bearing retainers from properly seating. Assembly Procedure 1. Remove the bearing cups from the universal joint. 2. Assemble 1 bearing cup part way into 1 side of the yoke. 3. Turn the yoke ear toward the bottom. 4. Assemble the cross into the yoke so the trunnion seats freely into the bearing cup. 5. With the trunnion seated in the bearing cup, press the bearing cup into the yoke until the bearing cup is flush with the yoke ear. 6. Assemble the opposite bearing cup part way into the yoke ear. 7. Ensure that the trunnions start straight and true into both bearing cups. 8. Press the opposite bearing cup into the yoke ear while working the cross all the time in order to inspect for a free unbinding movement of the trunnions in the bearing cups. Important: If there seems to be a hang-up or binding, stop pressing, and inspect the needle bearings for misalignment in the bearing cup. 9. Press the bearing cup into the yoke until the bearing retainer groove clears the inside of the yoke. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring > Page 4034 10. Assemble the bearing retainer in the retainer groove. 11. Continue pressing until you can snap both retainers into place. 12. If seating the retainer is difficult, spring the yoke slightly with a firm blow from a dead blow hammer. 13. It may be necessary to lubricate the snap ring with a slight amount of chassis grease so the snap ring seats in the bearing cup groove. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring > Page 4035 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joint Replacement- External Snap Ring Universal Joint Replacement- External Snap Ring Tools Required ^ J9522-3 U-Joint Bearing Separator ^ J9522-5 U-Joint Bearing Spacer Remover Disassembly Procedure Notice: Never clamp propeller shaft tubing in a vise. Clamping could dent or deform the tube causing an imbalance or unsafe condition. Always clamp on one of the yokes and support the shaft horizontally. Avoid damaging the slip yoke sealing surface. Nicks may damage the bushing or cut the lip seal. 1. Support the propeller shaft in a line horizontal with the table of a press. 2. Mark the propeller shaft in order to show which end connects to the transmission and which end goes to the rear axle. 3. Disassemble the snap rings by pinching the ends together with a pair of pliers. 4. If the ring does not readily snap out of the groove in the yoke, tap the end of the cup lightly in order to relieve the pressure from the ring. 5. Place the universal joint so that the lower ear of the yoke is supported on a 30 mm (1-1/8 inch) hex head socket or a 27 mm (1-1/16 inch) socket. 6. Place J9522-3 on the open horizontal bearing cups. Press the lower bearing cup out of the yoke ear. 7. If you do not completely remove the bearing cup, lift the cross and insert J9522-5 between the seal and the bearing cup you are removing. Continue pressing the bearing cup out of the yoke. 8. Rotate the propeller shaft. Press the opposite bearing cup out of the yoke. 9. Mark the orientation of the slip yoke to the tube for proper reassembly. 10. Remove the cross from the yoke. 11. Remove the remaining universal joint parts from the yoke. 12. If you are replacing the front universal joint, remove the bearing cups in the slip yoke in the same manner. 13. Inspect the retaining ring grooves for dirt, corrosion, or pieces of the old ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring > Page 4036 14. Inspect the bearing cup bores for burrs or imperfections. 15. Clean the retaining ring grooves. Corrosion, dirt, rust, or pieces of the old retaining ring may prevent the bearing cups from pressing into place or prevent the bearing retainers from properly seating. Assembly Procedure 1. Remove the bearing cups from the universal joint. 2. Assemble 1 bearing cup part way into 1 side of the yoke. Turn the yoke ear toward the bottom. 3. Assemble the cross into the yoke so that the trunnion seats freely into the bearing cup. 4. With the trunnion seated in the bearing cup, press the bearing cup into the yoke until the bearing cup is flush with the yoke ear. 5. Install the opposite bearing cup part way into the yoke ear. 6. Ensure that the trunnions start straight and true into both bearing cups. 7. Press the opposite bearing cup into the yoke ear while working the cross all the time in order to inspect for free unbinding movement of the trunnions in the bearing cups. Important: If there seems to be a hang up or binding, stop pressing. Inspect the needle bearings for misalignment in the bearing cup. 8. Press the bearing cup into the yoke until the bearing cup retainer groove is visible over the top of the bearing cup. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joint Replacement - Nylon Injected Ring > Page 4037 9. Assemble the bearing retainer in the retainer groove. 10. Continue pressing until both retainers can be snapped into place. 11. If the retainer is difficult to seat, the yoke can be sprung slightly with a firm blow from a dead blow hammer. 12. It may be necessary to lubricate the snap ring with a slight amount of chassis grease so that the snap ring seats in the bearing cup groove. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Engine Flywheel Bolt ........................................................................................................................... .................................................. 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.) Flywheel to torque converter bolt ........................................................................................................ ......................................................... 63 Nm (46 Ft lb) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4041 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Engine Flywheel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission. 2. Remove the clutch assembly, if equipped. 3. Remove the engine flywheel bolts. 4. Remove the engine flywheel (automatic transmission) (1), if applicable. 5. Remove the engine flywheel (manual transmission) (2), if applicable. Flywheel 6. Important: If replacing the engine flywheel (manual transmission), then NEW flywheel weights must be installed into the NEW engine flywheel in the same location as the old flywheel weights in the old engine flywheel. Note the position of any flywheel weights for assembly (if applicable). 7. Clean and inspect all parts. Installation Procedure Flywheel Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4042 1. Important: If replacing the engine flywheel (manual transmission), note the position and length of the original flywheel weights (if applicable). Flywheel weights of the same length must be installed into the new engine flywheel in the same location as the old flywheel weights were in the old engine flywheel. Note the position of the flywheel weights and install the NEW flywheel weights as required. A properly installed flywheel weight will be flush or slightly below flush with the face of the engine flywheel. 2. Install the engine flywheel (1 or 2) to the crankshaft. Align the engine flywheel locator hole to the flywheel locator pin. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine flywheel bolts. ^ Tighten the engine flywheel bolts in sequence to 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the clutch assembly, if equipped. 5. Install the transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Engine Flywheel Bolt ........................................................................................................................... .................................................. 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4046 Flywheel: Service and Repair Engine Flywheel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission. 2. Remove the clutch assembly, if equipped. 3. Remove the engine flywheel bolts. 4. Remove the engine flywheel (automatic transmission) (1), if applicable. 5. Remove the engine flywheel (manual transmission) (2), if applicable. Flywheel 6. Important: If replacing the engine flywheel (manual transmission), then NEW flywheel weights must be installed into the NEW engine flywheel in the same location as the old flywheel weights in the old engine flywheel. Note the position of any flywheel weights for assembly (if applicable). 7. Clean and inspect all parts. Installation Procedure Flywheel Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4047 1. Important: If replacing the engine flywheel (manual transmission), note the position and length of the original flywheel weights (if applicable). Flywheel weights of the same length must be installed into the new engine flywheel in the same location as the old flywheel weights were in the old engine flywheel. Note the position of the flywheel weights and install the NEW flywheel weights as required. A properly installed flywheel weight will be flush or slightly below flush with the face of the engine flywheel. 2. Install the engine flywheel (1 or 2) to the crankshaft. Align the engine flywheel locator hole to the flywheel locator pin. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the engine flywheel bolts. ^ Tighten the engine flywheel bolts in sequence to 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the clutch assembly, if equipped. 5. Install the transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 2.0L (2.2 Qt) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4058 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................................................................ Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4059 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Fluid Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36511 Oil Fill/Drain Plug Hex Bit Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Using J 36511 remove the oil fill and drain plugs. Drain the oil in a suitable container. Installation Procedure 1. Apply sealant to the oil drain plug threads. Use sealant GM P/N 12346004 or the equivalent. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Using J 36511 install the oil drain plug. ^ Tighten the oil drain plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4060 3. Fill the transmission to the level of the fill plug hole. 4. Apply sealant to the oil fill plug threads. Use sealant GM P/N 12346004 or the equivalent. 5. Using J 36511 install the oil fill plug. ^ Tighten the oil fill plug to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear Sensor/Switch, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the backup lamp switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The backup lamp switch has pre-applied thread sealant on the threads. Install the backup lamp switch. ^ Tighten the backup lamp switch to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 38801 Input Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission. 2. Remove the 2 clutch actuator bolts. 3. Remove the clutch actuator from the input shaft. 4. Remove the 6 bolts from the front bearing retainer. Carefully remove the front bearing retainer. 5. Remove the seal from the front bearing retainer by using a hammer and a punch. 6. Remove the old gasket material from the front bearing retainer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front > Page 4068 Installation Procedure Important: Inspect the bearing retainer for any nicks or cracks that may result in a leak. Replace as necessary. 1. Place the seal in the front bearing retainer. 2. Using the J 38801 install the seal. 3. Apply RTV gasket material to the inboard side of the bearing retainer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front > Page 4069 4. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the front bearing retainer and the 6 bolts to the transmission. ^ Tighten the 6 bearing retainer bolts to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the clutch actuator and the bolts. ^ Tighten the clutch actuator bolts to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.). 6. Install the transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front > Page 4070 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Rear (2WD) Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Rear (2WD) ^ Tools Required J 23129 Universal Seal Remover - J 6125-1B Slide hammer - J 36503 Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 3. Remove the rear oil seal from the rear case using the J 6125-1B (1) and the J 23129 (2). Installation Procedure 1. Using the J 36503 install the new rear oil seal. 2. Install the rear propeller shaft. 3. Check the transmission oil level. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front > Page 4071 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Rear (4WD) Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Rear (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 36825 Universal Seal Remover - J 23907 Slide Hammer - J 36502-2A Shaft Seal Protector/Installer - J 36502 Extension Housing Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transfer case. 2. Using the J 36825 and the J 23907 remove the seal from the extension housing. Installation Procedure 1. Position J 36502-2A over the output shaft. 2. Using J 36502 install the rear output shaft seal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Oil Seal Replacement - Front > Page 4072 3. Remove J 36502-2A from the output shaft. 4. Fill the space between the seal lips with grease GM P/N 1052497 or equivalent. 5. Install the transfer case. 6. Check the transmission oil level. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches M/T > Gear Sensor/Switch, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the backup lamp switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The backup lamp switch has pre-applied thread sealant on the threads. Install the backup lamp switch. ^ Tighten the backup lamp switch to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Boot, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Boot: Service and Repair Control Lever and/or Boot Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the shift lever from the shift tower. Do not remove the shift lever adjusting nut. 2. Remove the screws securing the boot to the panel. 3. Remove the boot from the shift tower. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the boot over the shift tower and secure to the panel with the screws. ^ Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 2. Install the shift lever to the shift tower. If required, center the shift lever with the adjusting nut. ^ Tighten the adjusting nut to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Support the transmission with a transmission jack. 3. Remove the transmission mount to the transmission support retaining nut. 4. Raise the transmission to take the weight off of the mount. 5. Remove the transmission mount to the transmission mounting bolts. 6. Raise the transmission just enough to remove the transmission mount. 7. Remove the transmission mount from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transmission mount to the vehicle. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transmission mount to the transmission mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4084 3. Lower the transmission. 4. Install the transmission mount to the transmission support retaining nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove the transmission jack. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine, A/T Controls Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-04-21-002 Date: March 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Guidelines for Replacement of Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) Models: 2005 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with New Venture Gear (NVG) Transfer Case (RPOs NP1, NP4, NP8) Dealers are replacing the TCCM unnecessarily. Dealers are replacing the TCCM with codes stored in HISTORY only. The TCCM does not have a current fault condition when tested. Parts reviewed at the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) have a 75% No Trouble Found (NTF) rate. The only two legitimate reasons to replace the TCCM are: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C0550 ^ NO Communication with a scan tool. DTC C0550 This DTC indicates that the module has an internal fault and should be replaced. No Communication ^ The no communication conditions referenced here are also caused by a module internal fault to a point where the module physically will not talk. A technician cannot pull DTCs from the module because it will not communicate. The module is electrically dead. ^ No communication is not to be confused with a U1026 code. This code tells the technician that the module may still be functioning but is temporarily off line. This code may be set by the Instrument Panel (IP) or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) against the TCCM. The technician needs to figure out why the module went off line. These are typically caused by connection concerns. There is no need to replace a TCCM for a U1026 DTC. Diagnostic Aids ^ When diagnosing a transfer case electrical control system, ALWAYS check power and ground wiring first. ^ Test the connections for intermittent or poor connections, complete plug insertion, bent pins, pushed out terminals and water contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement > Page 4096 Pay particular attention to the terminal connections at the module. Spread or open terminal connections may create an intermittent contact. Do a pin drag test. Refer to the terminal testing information in the table shown. ^ After repairs are complete, ALWAYS clear DTCs from the module prior to a system function test. If codes are not cleared first, the system will not function after repair. The technician may erroneously think that the system is still down and that further repairs are needed. Warranty Dealers who unnecessarily replace the TCCM that are found to have No Trouble Found (NTF) at the WPC will be returned to the AVM (Area Service Manager), or the DSM (District Service Manager) in Canada, through the Regional Feedback Process and may be charged back for the repair through the WINS system. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Control Module: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4099 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4100 Control Module: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4101 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4102 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4105 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4106 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4107 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4113 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Regulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to release tension on the reverse boost valve retaining ring. 4. Remove the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 5. Remove the reverse boost valve sleeve (5) and the reverse boost valve (4). 6. Remove the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 7. Remove the pressure regulator valve (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure regulator valve (1). 2. Install the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 3. Install the reverse boost valve (4) in the reverse boost valve sleeve (5). 4. Install the reverse boost valve (4) and sleeve (5) in the oil pump cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4114 5. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to expose the retaining ring slot. 6. Install the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 7. Install the transmission oil filter and pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams Tow/Haul Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4118 Tow/Haul Switch: Testing and Inspection Tow/Haul Switch/Indicator Always On or Inoperative Circuit Description Tow/haul mode enables the operator to achieve enhanced shift performance when towing or hauling a load. When tow/haul mode is selected, the tow/haul switch input signal to the body control module (BCM) is momentarily toggled to zero volts. This signals the powertrain control module (PCM) to extend the length of time between upshifts and increase transmission line pressure. Cycling the tow/haul switch again disables tow/haul mode and returns the transmission to a normal shift pattern. Diagnostic Aids Inspect the connectors at the BCM, and all other circuit connecting points for an intermittent condition. Inspect the circuit wiring for an intermittent condition. If the electrical circuit checks are OK and the tow/haul shift pattern is not occurring, there may be a mechanical/hydraulic condition that prevents tow/haul operation. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4119 Steps 1-8 Test Description These numbers correspond to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This step tests for a faulty tow/haul switch. 3. This step tests for voltage input from the BCM to the tow/haul switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4123 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4124 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4125 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Gear Sensor/Switch, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the backup lamp switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The backup lamp switch has pre-applied thread sealant on the threads. Install the backup lamp switch. ^ Tighten the backup lamp switch to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4135 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4136 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4137 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4140 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4145 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Remove the vacuum line for the transfer case vacuum switch. 5. Remove the transfer case vacuum switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case vacuum switch ^ Tighten the transfer case vacuum switch to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case vacuum switch vacuum line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4148 3. Install the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Install the transfer case brace bolts. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt at the engine to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the transfer case brace bolt at the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the transfer case shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4149 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4150 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4151 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4158 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4159 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4160 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4161 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4162 Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4165 2. Install the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the front propeller shaft. 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4166 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case right rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the transfer case shield. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4167 Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor into the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case left rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4174 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4175 Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4178 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4179 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4180 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-04-21-002 Date: March 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Guidelines for Replacement of Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) Models: 2005 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with New Venture Gear (NVG) Transfer Case (RPOs NP1, NP4, NP8) Dealers are replacing the TCCM unnecessarily. Dealers are replacing the TCCM with codes stored in HISTORY only. The TCCM does not have a current fault condition when tested. Parts reviewed at the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) have a 75% No Trouble Found (NTF) rate. The only two legitimate reasons to replace the TCCM are: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C0550 ^ NO Communication with a scan tool. DTC C0550 This DTC indicates that the module has an internal fault and should be replaced. No Communication ^ The no communication conditions referenced here are also caused by a module internal fault to a point where the module physically will not talk. A technician cannot pull DTCs from the module because it will not communicate. The module is electrically dead. ^ No communication is not to be confused with a U1026 code. This code tells the technician that the module may still be functioning but is temporarily off line. This code may be set by the Instrument Panel (IP) or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) against the TCCM. The technician needs to figure out why the module went off line. These are typically caused by connection concerns. There is no need to replace a TCCM for a U1026 DTC. Diagnostic Aids ^ When diagnosing a transfer case electrical control system, ALWAYS check power and ground wiring first. ^ Test the connections for intermittent or poor connections, complete plug insertion, bent pins, pushed out terminals and water contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement > Page 4185 Pay particular attention to the terminal connections at the module. Spread or open terminal connections may create an intermittent contact. Do a pin drag test. Refer to the terminal testing information in the table shown. ^ After repairs are complete, ALWAYS clear DTCs from the module prior to a system function test. If codes are not cleared first, the system will not function after repair. The technician may erroneously think that the system is still down and that further repairs are needed. Warranty Dealers who unnecessarily replace the TCCM that are found to have No Trouble Found (NTF) at the WPC will be returned to the AVM (Area Service Manager), or the DSM (District Service Manager) in Canada, through the Regional Feedback Process and may be charged back for the repair through the WINS system. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Control Module: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4188 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4189 Control Module: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4190 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4191 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4194 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4195 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4196 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case New Venture 233 (RPO NP1) .............................................................................................................. ............................................................. 1.0L (1.1 Qt) New Venture 236 (RPO NP8) .......................... ................................................................................................................................................. 1.9L (2.0 Qt) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4201 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Case NV 233 (RPO NP1) ...................................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Dexron III NV 236 (RPO NP8) ............................................................................................................................................ AUTO-TRAK II Fluid GM P/N 12378508 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure Important: When servicing the transfer case, use only hand tools when removing the fill or drain plugs. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Important: If the drain or fill plugs are damaged and need to be replaced, use only replacement plugs that are made from aluminum. Remove the transfer case fill plug. 4. Important: When draining the transfer case oil, always use the proper container for draining. Remove the transfer case drain plug. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case drain plug. ^ Tighten the transfer case drain plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4204 2. Fill the transfer case with the proper amount of approved fluid. 3. Install the transfer case fill plug. ^ Tighten the oil fill plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4205 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid Replacement Removal Procedure Important: When servicing the transfer case fluid, use only hand tools when removing the fill or drain plugs. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case from the vehicle. 3. Important: If the drain or fill plugs are damaged and need to be replaced, use only replacement plugs that are made from aluminum. Remove the transfer case fill plug. 4. Important: When draining the transfer case oil, always use the proper container for draining. Remove the transfer case drain plug. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case drain plug. ^ Tighten the transfer case drain plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4206 2. Fill the transfer case with the proper amount of approved fluid. 3. Install the transfer case fill plug. ^ Tighten the oil fill plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4211 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4212 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4213 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4216 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4221 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Remove the vacuum line for the transfer case vacuum switch. 5. Remove the transfer case vacuum switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case vacuum switch ^ Tighten the transfer case vacuum switch to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case vacuum switch vacuum line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4224 3. Install the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Install the transfer case brace bolts. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt at the engine to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the transfer case brace bolt at the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the transfer case shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4225 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4226 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4227 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-04-21-002 Date: March 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Guidelines for Replacement of Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) Models: 2005 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with New Venture Gear (NVG) Transfer Case (RPOs NP1, NP4, NP8) Dealers are replacing the TCCM unnecessarily. Dealers are replacing the TCCM with codes stored in HISTORY only. The TCCM does not have a current fault condition when tested. Parts reviewed at the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) have a 75% No Trouble Found (NTF) rate. The only two legitimate reasons to replace the TCCM are: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C0550 ^ NO Communication with a scan tool. DTC C0550 This DTC indicates that the module has an internal fault and should be replaced. No Communication ^ The no communication conditions referenced here are also caused by a module internal fault to a point where the module physically will not talk. A technician cannot pull DTCs from the module because it will not communicate. The module is electrically dead. ^ No communication is not to be confused with a U1026 code. This code tells the technician that the module may still be functioning but is temporarily off line. This code may be set by the Instrument Panel (IP) or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) against the TCCM. The technician needs to figure out why the module went off line. These are typically caused by connection concerns. There is no need to replace a TCCM for a U1026 DTC. Diagnostic Aids ^ When diagnosing a transfer case electrical control system, ALWAYS check power and ground wiring first. ^ Test the connections for intermittent or poor connections, complete plug insertion, bent pins, pushed out terminals and water contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement > Page 4233 Pay particular attention to the terminal connections at the module. Spread or open terminal connections may create an intermittent contact. Do a pin drag test. Refer to the terminal testing information in the table shown. ^ After repairs are complete, ALWAYS clear DTCs from the module prior to a system function test. If codes are not cleared first, the system will not function after repair. The technician may erroneously think that the system is still down and that further repairs are needed. Warranty Dealers who unnecessarily replace the TCCM that are found to have No Trouble Found (NTF) at the WPC will be returned to the AVM (Area Service Manager), or the DSM (District Service Manager) in Canada, through the Regional Feedback Process and may be charged back for the repair through the WINS system. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Control Module: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4236 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4237 Control Module: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4238 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4239 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4242 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4243 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4244 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Front Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 33843 Front Output Shaft Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the dust seal from the front output shaft. 5. Remove the output shaft retaining ring. 6. Notice: Do not damage the sealing surfaces of the transfer cases or the shafts when prying the seals for removal. Damaging the sealing surface may cause leakage or require replacement of the damaged component. Remove the front output shaft seal. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front output shaft seal. 2. Using the J 33843 , install the front output shaft seal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4249 3. Install the output shaft retaining ring. 4. Install the dust seal on the front output shaft. 5. Install the front propeller shaft. 6. Check the transfer case fluid level. 7. Install the transfer case shield. 8. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Rear Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 33843 Output Shaft Seal Installer - J 45380 Transfer Case Rear Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case rear output shaft seal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4250 5. Inspect the rear output shaft bushing for scoring or wear. 6. Remove the rear output shaft bushing if required, using the J 45380. ^ Install the finger section of the J 45380 in front of the bushing. ^ Install the tube and forcing screw to the finger section. Ensure the forcing screw is backed out. ^ Using a wrench on the forcing screw, remove the rear output shaft bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW rear output shaft bushing, if required, using the J 45380. ^ Install the bushing or the finger section of the J 45380. ^ Install the finger section to the main body of the J 45380. ^ Position the bushing and tool to the case. ^ Using a hammer and the J 45380, install the bushing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4251 2. Important: Ensure the drain hole on the boot of the rear output shaft seal is facing down toward the ground. Install the transfer case rear output shaft seal in the transfer case with your fingers. 3. Using the J 33843, install the transfer case rear output shaft seal in the transfer case. 4. Install the rear propeller shaft. ^ Check the transfer case fluid level. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4252 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Front Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Front ^ Tools Required J 44636-1Front Output Shaft Seal Installer - J 44636-2Front Output Shaft Seal Protector Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft from the transfer case. 4. Remove the transfer case front output shaft dust seal. 5. Remove the transfer case front output shaft seal. Installation Procedure 1. Install the J 44636-2 on the transfer case front output shaft. 2. Install the transfer case front output shaft seal on the J 44636-2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4253 3. Using the J 44636-1, install the transfer case front output shaft seal. 4. Remove the J 44636-1 from the transfer case front output shaft. 5. Remove the J 44636-2 from the transfer case front output shaft. 6. Install the transfer case front output shaft dust seal. 7. Install the front propeller shaft to the transfer case. 8. Check the transfer case fluid level. 9. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 10. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Rear Transfer Case Output Shaft Seal Replacement - Rear ^ Tools Required J 37668-A Output Shaft Seal Installer (4401 and 4470 Transfer Case) - J 45380 Transfer Case Rear Bushing Remover and Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4254 3. Remove the rear propeller shaft from the transfer case. 4. Remove the transfer case rear output shaft seal. 5. Inspect the rear output shaft bushing for scoring or wear. 6. Remove the rear output shaft bushings if required, using the J 45380. ^ Install the finger section of the J 45380 in front of the bushing. ^ Install the tube and forcing screw to the finger section. Ensure the forcing screw is backed out. ^ Using a wrench on the forcing screw, remove the rear output shaft bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW rear output shaft bushing, if required, using the J 45380. ^ Install the bushing or the finger section of the J 45380. ^ Install the finger section to the main body of the J 45380. ^ Position the bushing and tool to the case. ^ Using a hammer and the J 45380, install the bushing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4255 2. Important: Ensure the drain hole on the boot of the rear output shaft seal is facing down toward the ground. Install the transfer case rear output shaft seal in the transfer case with your fingers. 3. Using the J 37668-A , install the transfer case rear output shaft seal. 4. Install the rear propeller shaft in to the transfer case. ^ Check the transfer case fluid level. 5. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Input Shaft Seal Replacement Transfer Case Input Shaft Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 42738 Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case from the vehicle. 3. Remove the transfer case input shaft seal. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4256 1. Important: When installing the input shaft seal, make sure that the part numbers on the seal are facing outward (toward the technician). Align the transfer case input shaft seal evenly on the input shaft. 2. Important: The input shaft seal should be even with the surface of the transfer case after installation. Using the J 42738, install the transfer case input shaft seal. 3. Install the transfer case in the vehicle. 4. Check the transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4262 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4263 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4264 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4267 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4272 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Remove the vacuum line for the transfer case vacuum switch. 5. Remove the transfer case vacuum switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case vacuum switch ^ Tighten the transfer case vacuum switch to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case vacuum switch vacuum line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4275 3. Install the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Install the transfer case brace bolts. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt at the engine to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the transfer case brace bolt at the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the transfer case shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4276 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4277 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4278 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4285 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4286 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4287 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4288 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4289 Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4292 2. Install the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the front propeller shaft. 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4293 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case right rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the transfer case shield. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4294 Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor into the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case left rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4301 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4302 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4303 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4304 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4305 Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4308 2. Install the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the front propeller shaft. 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4309 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case right rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the transfer case shield. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4310 Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor into the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case left rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4315 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4316 Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4319 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4320 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4321 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Clutch Shimming Transfer Case Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Clutch Shimming Bulletin No.: 04-04-21-003 Date: November 10, 2004 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transfer Case Clutch Plate Shimming - Parts Availability Change Models: 1999-2000 Cadillac Escalade 1998-2005 Chevrolet Blazer 1999-2005 Chevrolet Astro Van, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2002-2005 Chevrolet Avalanche 1998-2005 GMC Jimmy 1999 GMC Suburban 1999-2005 GMC Safari Van, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 1998-2001 Oldsmobile Bravada with NV 136/236/246 Automatic Transfer Case (RPO NP4 or NP8) While performing the transfer case clutch shimming procedure found in Service Information (SI), you may find it necessary to replace the clutch pack selective fit shim to obtain the correct clutch pack clearance. The selective fit shims for this repair were previously released as a kit, P/N 12474121, which contained all eight selective fit sizes. Effective immediately, the clutch pack shims will be available individually as listed below. The shim kit, P/N 12474121, will be discontinued and no longer available once current stock has been depleted. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4332 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4333 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4334 Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 4339 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 4340 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator > Page 4341 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4345 Shift Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4346 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4347 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4350 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4351 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4352 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4353 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4354 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4355 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4356 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4357 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4358 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4359 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4360 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4361 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4362 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4363 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4364 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4365 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4366 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4367 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4368 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4369 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4370 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4371 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4372 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4373 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4374 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4375 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4376 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Control and Shift Solenoids Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 2. Important: Do not remove the valve body for this procedures. Removal of the 1-2 accumulator is necessary only if servicing the pressure control solenoid. Remove the 1-2 accumulator if necessary. 3. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 5. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 6. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 7. Remove the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4377 8. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the 3-2 control solenoid. Installation Procedure 1. Install the 3-2 control solenoid. 2. Install the 3-2 control solenoid retainer. 3. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoids. 4. Install the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid retainers. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid.Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4378 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 7. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 8. Install the 1-2 accumulator. 9. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 10. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Electronic Components Electronic Components 36 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) - Model Dependent 66 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve 69 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch 108 - Secondary Fluid Pump Assembly - M33 Models Only 367a - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 367b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 377 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 394 - 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 396 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4382 Park Neutral Position (PNP) Switch 1 - Automatic Transmission 4L60-E/4L65-E 2 - Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 1 - VSS Sensor 2 - Transfer Case C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4383 C175 1 - Automatic Transmission 2 - C175 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4386 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4387 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4388 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4389 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4390 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4391 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4392 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4393 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4394 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4395 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4396 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4397 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4398 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4399 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4400 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4401 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4402 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4403 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4404 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4405 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4406 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4407 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4408 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4409 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4410 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Connector Views Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4411 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid, TCC Solenoid, and Wiring Harness ^ Tools Required J 28458 Seal Protector Retainer Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and the filter. 3. Disconnect the transmission harness 20-way connector from the transmission internal harness pass-through connector. Depress both tabs on the connector and pull straight up; do not pry the connector. 4. Important: Removal of the valve body is not necessary for this procedure. Remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly. Do not remove the spacer plate. 5. Disconnect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors from these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4412 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid in order to access one of the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. 8. Remove the pressure control solenoid retainer. 9. Remove the pressure control solenoid. 10. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining bolts and the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness. 11. Using J 28458, release the pass-through electrical connector from the transmission case. 1. Use the small end of the J 28458 over the top of the connector. 2. Twist in order to release the four tabs retaining the connector. 3. Pull the harness connector down through the transmission case. 1. Remove the TCC solenoid (with O-ring seal) and wiring harness assembly from the transmission case. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4413 2. Inspect the TCC solenoid and wiring harness assembly for these defects: ^ Damage ^ Cracked connectors ^ Exposed wires ^ Loose pins Installation Procedure 1. Install the wiring harness and TCC solenoid assembly with a new O-ring seal to the transmission. 2. Install the pass-through electrical connector to the transmission case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the valve body bolts which retain the internal wiring harness and install the TCC solenoid retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the control valve body retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the TCC solenoid retaining bolts to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4414 4. Install the pressure control solenoid. Ensure that the electrical tabs are facing outboard. 5. Install the pressure control solenoid retainer and retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the pressure control solenoid retaining bolt to 11 Nm (97 inch lbs.). 6. Install the TCC PWM solenoid to the control valve body. 7. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retainer. 8. Connect the internal wiring harness electrical connectors to these components: ^ Transmission fluid pressure switch (1) ^ 1-2 shift control solenoid (2) ^ 2-3 shift control solenoid (3) ^ Pressure control solenoid (4) ^ TCC PWM solenoid (5) ^ 3-2 control solenoid (6) 9. Install the 1-2 accumulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4415 10. Connect the transmission harness 20-way connector to the transmission pass-through connector. Align the arrows on each half of the connector and insert straight down. 11. Install the transmission oil pan and filter. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4421 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4422 Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4425 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4426 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4427 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Shared Diagnostic Trouble Codes Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-060 Date: September 23, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Engine Control Module (ECM), Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code(s) (DTC)(s) P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P1621 Shared In Multiple Modules Models: 2005-2006 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Beginning in 2005, some control modules (ECM's, TCM's) have specific codes that describe internal failures of the module. These DTCs are not module specific and can be found on any controller that has these codes. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2012 committee has set these specific codes to be an industry standard of all manufacturers. Currently, these common codes are: ^ P0601 - Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0601 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM) ^ P0602 - Control Module Not Programmed ^ P0602 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed ^ P0603 - Control Module Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0603 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset ^ P0604 - Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P0604 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM) ^ P1621 - Control Module Long Term Memory Performance ^ P1621 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance Important: ^ Use caution when diagnosing these shared codes to perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure on the appropriate module. ^ A low voltage condition may set one or more of the above codes. Repair any low voltage conditions prior to diagnosing the above codes. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) document for Diagnosis and Repair procedures. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-04-21-002 Date: March 10, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Guidelines for Replacement of Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) Models: 2005 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with New Venture Gear (NVG) Transfer Case (RPOs NP1, NP4, NP8) Dealers are replacing the TCCM unnecessarily. Dealers are replacing the TCCM with codes stored in HISTORY only. The TCCM does not have a current fault condition when tested. Parts reviewed at the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) have a 75% No Trouble Found (NTF) rate. The only two legitimate reasons to replace the TCCM are: ^ Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C0550 ^ NO Communication with a scan tool. DTC C0550 This DTC indicates that the module has an internal fault and should be replaced. No Communication ^ The no communication conditions referenced here are also caused by a module internal fault to a point where the module physically will not talk. A technician cannot pull DTCs from the module because it will not communicate. The module is electrically dead. ^ No communication is not to be confused with a U1026 code. This code tells the technician that the module may still be functioning but is temporarily off line. This code may be set by the Instrument Panel (IP) or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) against the TCCM. The technician needs to figure out why the module went off line. These are typically caused by connection concerns. There is no need to replace a TCCM for a U1026 DTC. Diagnostic Aids ^ When diagnosing a transfer case electrical control system, ALWAYS check power and ground wiring first. ^ Test the connections for intermittent or poor connections, complete plug insertion, bent pins, pushed out terminals and water contamination. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Transfer Case Control Module Replacement > Page 4444 Pay particular attention to the terminal connections at the module. Spread or open terminal connections may create an intermittent contact. Do a pin drag test. Refer to the terminal testing information in the table shown. ^ After repairs are complete, ALWAYS clear DTCs from the module prior to a system function test. If codes are not cleared first, the system will not function after repair. The technician may erroneously think that the system is still down and that further repairs are needed. Warranty Dealers who unnecessarily replace the TCCM that are found to have No Trouble Found (NTF) at the WPC will be returned to the AVM (Area Service Manager), or the DSM (District Service Manager) in Canada, through the Regional Feedback Process and may be charged back for the repair through the WINS system. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Control Module: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4447 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4448 Control Module: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4449 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4450 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4453 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4454 Control Module: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right lower hinge trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 2 wiring harness connectors from the automatic transfer case control module 3. Remove the 3 nuts securing the automatic transfer case control module to the retainer. 4. Slide the automatic transfer case control module straight out from the retainer. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the automatic transfer case control module into the retainer with the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 > Page 4455 2. Connect the 2 wiring harness connectors to the automatic transfer case control module. 3. Install the right lower hinge trim panel. 4. Start the engine and test the automatic transfer case system for proper shift operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4461 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Regulator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission oil pan and filter. 3. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to release tension on the reverse boost valve retaining ring. 4. Remove the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 5. Remove the reverse boost valve sleeve (5) and the reverse boost valve (4). 6. Remove the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 7. Remove the pressure regulator valve (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure regulator valve (1). 2. Install the pressure regulator isolator spring (3) and the pressure regulator valve spring (2). 3. Install the reverse boost valve (4) in the reverse boost valve sleeve (5). 4. Install the reverse boost valve (4) and sleeve (5) in the oil pump cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4462 5. Compress the reverse boost valve sleeve into the bore of the oil pump to expose the retaining ring slot. 6. Install the reverse boost valve retaining ring, then slowly release tension on the reverse boost valve sleeve. 7. Install the transmission oil filter and pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON III transmission fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams Tow/Haul Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4466 Tow/Haul Switch: Testing and Inspection Tow/Haul Switch/Indicator Always On or Inoperative Circuit Description Tow/haul mode enables the operator to achieve enhanced shift performance when towing or hauling a load. When tow/haul mode is selected, the tow/haul switch input signal to the body control module (BCM) is momentarily toggled to zero volts. This signals the powertrain control module (PCM) to extend the length of time between upshifts and increase transmission line pressure. Cycling the tow/haul switch again disables tow/haul mode and returns the transmission to a normal shift pattern. Diagnostic Aids Inspect the connectors at the BCM, and all other circuit connecting points for an intermittent condition. Inspect the circuit wiring for an intermittent condition. If the electrical circuit checks are OK and the tow/haul shift pattern is not occurring, there may be a mechanical/hydraulic condition that prevents tow/haul operation. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Tow/Haul Switch <--> [Transmission Mode Switch, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4467 Steps 1-8 Test Description These numbers correspond to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This step tests for a faulty tow/haul switch. 3. This step tests for voltage input from the BCM to the tow/haul switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Transmission Range Switch Connector End View, Wiring Harness Side Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4471 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment Important: ^ This procedure is for vehicles that have not had the switch removed or replaced. If the switch has been removed or replaced, refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement for the proper adjustment procedure. ^ Apply the parking brake. ^ The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. ^ Check the switch for proper operation. If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: 1. Place the transmission range selector in the N (Neutral) position. 2. With an assistant in the drivers seat, raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park/neutral position switch mounting bolts. 4. With the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position, rotate the switch while the assistant attempts to start the engine. 5. After a successful start, turn the engine off. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts securing the switch to the transmission. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. 9. Replace the park/neutral position switch if proper operation can not be achieved. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4472 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Park/Neutral Position Switch Replacement ^ Tools Required J 41364-A Park/Neutral Switch Aligner Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into neutral. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the nut securing the transmission control lever to the manual shaft. 5. Remove the transmission control lever from the manual shaft. 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 7. Remove the bolts securing the park/neutral position switch to the transmission. 8. Remove the park/neutral position switch from the manual shaft. If the park/neutral position switch did not slide off the manual shaft, file the outer edge of the manual shaft in order to remove any burrs. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch to the transmission manual shaft by aligning the switch hub flats with the manual shaft flats. 2. Slide the switch onto the transmission manual shaft until the switch mounting bracket contacts the mounting bosses on the transmission. 3. Important: If a new switch is being installed, the switch will come with a positive assurance bracket. The positive assurance bracket aligns the new switch in it proper position for installation and the use of neutral position adjustment tool will not be necessary. Install the switch to the transmission with two bolts finger tight. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4473 4. Position the tool J 41364-A onto the park/neutral position switch. Ensure that the two slots on the switch where the manual shaft is inserted are lined up with the lower two tabs on the tool. 5. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Rotate the tool until the upper locator pin on the tool is lined up with the slot on the top of the switch. ^ Tighten the bolts securing the switch to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the J 41364-A from the switch. If installing a new switch, remove the positive assurance bracket at this time. 7. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 8. Install the transmission control lever to the manual shaft with the nut. ^ Tighten the control lever nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Check the switch for proper operation. The engine must start in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions only. If proper operation of the switch can not be obtained, replace the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Gear Sensor/Switch, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the backup lamp switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The backup lamp switch has pre-applied thread sealant on the threads. Install the backup lamp switch. ^ Tighten the backup lamp switch to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect the backup lamp switch electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4483 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4484 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4485 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4488 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Shift Control Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Insert a pocket crew driver between the control switch and the instrument panel. 2. Using light pressure, pry the control switch from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the control switch from the instrument panel. 4. Remove the electrical connectors from the control switch. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When installing the control switch, a snap should be felt or heard when it is properly seated. Install the electrical connectors in the transfer case control switch. 2. Install the automatic transfer case switch into the instrument panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4493 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Transfer Case Vacuum Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Remove the vacuum line for the transfer case vacuum switch. 5. Remove the transfer case vacuum switch. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case vacuum switch ^ Tighten the transfer case vacuum switch to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case vacuum switch vacuum line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4496 3. Install the transfer case brace, if equipped. 4. Install the transfer case brace bolts. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt at the engine to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the transfer case brace bolt at the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case bolt to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the transfer case shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 6. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 7. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4497 1. Important: The motor/encoder gasket does not have to be replaced if the motor/encoder is being removed from the transfer case for other service procedures. Replace the motor/encoder gasket only if damaged. If the motor/encoder is being replaced, a new gasket will come with the replacement motor/encoder. Install the motor/encoder gasket. 2. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install motor/encoder mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 5. Install the transfer case shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4498 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Motor/Encoder Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield from the vehicle. 3. Remove the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Remove the motor/encoder mounting bolts. 5. Remove the motor/encoder assembly. 6. Remove the motor/encoder gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Important: When performing this service procedure, make sure that the motor/encoder unit is flat against the transfer case for proper installation. Install the motor/encoder to the transfer case. 2. Install the motor/encoder gasket to the transfer case. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4499 Install motor/encoder mounting bolts to the transfer case. ^ Tighten the motor/encoder mounting bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the motor/encoder electrical connector. 4. Install the transfer case shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Updated Transfer Case Speed Sensor Conn. Bulletin No.: 06-04-21-001 Date: May 17, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Updated Transfer Case Connector Service Kit Now Available For Transfer Case Speed Sensor Wire Harness Connector that Comes Loose Or Connector Retainer Clip Breaks Models: 2007 and Prior GM Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Four-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive Technicians may find that when the transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector is removed, the connector lock flexes/bends and does not return to the original position. The transfer case speed sensor wire harness connector then has no locking device. On older vehicles, the plastic connector retainer becomes brittle and the clip may break as soon as it is flexed. In the past, the only service fix was to install a wire harness connector service pack, P/N 88987183. This repair procedure involved splicing a new service connector with an integral connector lock. This connector service kit is of the same design and was still prone to failure over time. A new connector service repair kit is now available, P/N 15306187, that is an updated design. This new kit should be used whenever the speed sensor wire harness connector requires replacement. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Front Axle Indicator Switch Connector End View Front Axle Indicator Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4506 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4507 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Connector End View 2 Transfer Case Shift Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4508 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Connector End View Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C1 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Connector End View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4509 Transfer Case Shift Control Switch C2 Transfer Case Encoder Motor Connector End View Transfer Case Encoder Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4510 Speed Sensor: Diagrams NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Control Connector End Views Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Front Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Connector End View Propshaft Speed Sensor - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4513 2. Install the transfer case speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the front propeller shaft. 4. Install the transfer case shield to the vehicle. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4514 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NVG 236-NP8 Transfer Case Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Right Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case shield. 3. Remove the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the transfer case speed sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor. ^ Tighten the transfer case right rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case right rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Install the transfer case shield. 4. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Transfer Case Speed Sensor Replacement (Left Rear) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the transfer case left rear speed sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NVG 233-NP1 Transfer Case > Page 4515 Installation Procedure 1. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor into the transfer case. ^ Tighten the transfer case left rear speed sensor to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the transfer case left rear speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4521 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4522 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: After installation, calibrate the new EBCM to the tire size that is appropriate to the vehicle. 1. Important: Thoroughly wash all contaminants from around the EHCU. The area around the EHCU must be free from loose dirt to prevent contamination of disassembled ABS components. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the EBCM (2). 2. Remove the four T 25-TORX® mounting screws (1) that fasten the EBCM (2) to the BPMV (3). 3. Remove the EBCM (2) from the BPMV (3). Removal may require a light amount of force. Important: Do not use a tool to pry the EBCM or the BPMV. 4. Clean the BPMV (3) to EBCM (2) mounting surfaces with a clean cloth. Installation Procedure Important: Do not reuse the old mounting screws. Always install new mounting screws with the new EBCM. 1. Important: Do not use RTV or any other type of sealant on the EBCM gasket or mating surfaces. Install EBCM (2) on to the BPMV (3). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the four new T-25 TORX® screws (1) in the EBCM (2). ^ Tighten the four T-25 TORX® screws to 5 Nm (39 inch lbs.) in an X-pattern. 3. Connect the electrical connectors to the EBCM (2). 4. Revise the tire calibration using the Scan Tool Tire Size Calibration function. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Important: Thoroughly wash all contaminants from around the EHCU. The area around the EHCU must be free from loose dirt to prevent contamination of disassembled ABS components. Disconnect the two electrical harness connectors from the EBCM (2). 2. Important: Make sure that brake lines are tagged and kept in order for proper reassembly. Disconnect the 5 brake lines from the BPMV (3). 3. Remove 2 bolts (4) securing the BPMV mounting bracket (5) to the BPMV (3). 4. Disconnect the 2 way ABS pump motor connector. 5. Remove the four T-25 TORX screws (1) from the EBCM (2). 6. Important: Do not use a tool to pry the EBCM or the BPMV. Excessive force will damage the EBCM. Remove the EBCM (2) from the BPMV (3). Removal may require a light amount of force. Important: Do not reuse the EBCM mounting bolts. Always install new bolts. 7. Clean the EBCM (2) to BPMV (3) mounting surfaces with a clean cloth. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Do not use RTV or any other type of sealant on the EBCM gasket or mating surfaces. Install EBCM (2) onto BPMV (3). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not reuse the old mounting bolts. Always install new bolts with the new BPMV. Install the four EBCM bolts. ^ Tighten the four bolts to 5 Nm (39 inch lbs.) in an X-pattern. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4526 3. Connect the 2 way ABS pump motor connector to the EBCM (2). 4. Install BPMV (3) to EHCU bracket (5). 5. Connect the two electrical harness connectors to the EBCM (2). 6. Important: The brake pipes are held in the proper place by a frame mounted plastic bracket. Make sure that the brake pipes stay in the correct place for proper reassembly. Install the 5 brake pipes to the BPMV (3). ^ Tighten the brake pipe fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 7. Bleed the brake system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Wheel Speed Sensor Mounting Bolt 12 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4530 Front Frame Grounds Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4531 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4532 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme II Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Two - Person Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Use the two-person bleed procedure under the following conditions: ^ Installing a new Electro-Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) or new Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV). ^ Air is trapped in the valve body. ^ Do not drive the vehicle until the brake pedal feels firm. ^ Do not reuse brake fluid that is used during bleeding. ^ Use the vacuum, the pressure and the gravity bleeding procedures only for base brake bleeding. 1. Raise the vehicle in order to access the system bleed screws. 2. Bleed the system at the right rear wheel first. 3. Install a clear hose on the bleed screw. 4. Immerse the opposite end of the hose into a container partially filled with clean DOT 3 brake fluid. 5. Open the bleed screw 1/2 to 1 full turn. 6. Slowly depress the brake pedal. While the pedal is depressed to its full extent, tighten the bleed screw. 7. Release the brake pedal and wait 10-15 seconds for the master cylinder pistons to return to the home position. 8. Repeat the previous steps for the remaining wheels. The brake fluid which is present at each bleed screw should be clean and free of air. 9. This procedure may use more than a pint of fluid per wheel. Check the master cylinder fluid level every four to six strokes of the brake pedal in order to avoid running the system dry. 10. Press the brake pedal firmly and run the Scan Tool Automated Bleed Procedure. Release the brake pedal between each test. 11. Bleed all four wheels again using Steps 3-9. This will remove the remaining air from the brake system. 12. Evaluate the feel of the brake pedal before attempting to drive the vehicle. 13. Bleed the system as many times as necessary in order to obtain the appropriate feel of the pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 4538 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 3.1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary add Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 3.2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3.3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 3.4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 3.5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 3.6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 3.7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 3.8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 3.9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder - after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder - loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 3.10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With the right front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 21.1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 21.2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 4539 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings installed to the master cylinder ports, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to at least the half-way point with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the master cylinder reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 lbs.), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 8. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 9. Remove the transparent hoses from the master cylinder reservoir. 10. Install the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 11. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 12. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Brake Pedal Pivot Bolt 19 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4543 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column at the support bracket. 2. Remove the brake pedal pivot bolt and discard the bolt. 3. Remove the brake pedal. 4. Inspect the brake pedal pivot bushing for damage or wear. Installation Procedure 1. If the brake pedal pivot bushing is damaged or worn, replace the bushing using the following procedure: 1.1. Squeeze the end that will be facing the brake pedal pivot nut. 1.2. Insert the bushing into the pivot hub just enough to hold the bushing in place. 1.3. Rapidly push the bushing through the hub until the bushing snaps in place. 2. Install the brake pedal. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The brake pedal pivot bolt is a prevailing torque bolt and must be replaced each time the bolt is removed. 3. Install the new brake pedal pivot bolt and the brake pedal pivot nut. Tighten the brake pedal pivot bolt to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the steering column. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Brake Warning System Description and Operation Brake Warning Indicator The Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) illuminates the brake warning indicator when one or more of the following occurs: ^ The Body Control Module (BCM) detects that the park brake is engaged. The IPC receives a class 2 message from the BCM requesting illumination. ^ The Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) detects a low brake fluid condition. The IPC receives a class 2 message from the EBCM requesting illumination. ^ The EBCM detects an ABS malfunction which disables dynamic rear proportioning (DRP). The IPC receives a class 2 message from the EBCM requesting illumination. ^ The IPC performs the bulb check at the start of each ignition cycle. The brake warning indicator illuminates for approximately 3 seconds before turning OFF. ^ The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM or with the EBCM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4547 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection For information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Hydraulic System Testing and Inspection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Bleeder Valve (Front Wheel) 62 inch lbs. Bleeder Valve (Rear Wheel) 62 inch lbs. Caliper Bracket to Knuckle Mounting Bolt (Dual Piston Front Caliper) 133 ft. lbs. Caliper Bracket to Mounting Plate Bolt (Rear Wheel) 52 ft. lbs. Caliper Guide Pin Mounting Bolt (Dual Piston Front Caliper) 85 ft. lbs. Caliper Mounting Bolt (2 wheel disc brakes) 38 ft. lbs. Guide Pin Bolt (Rear Caliper) 23 ft. lbs. Mounting Brake Nut (Rear Wheel) 47 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, using an appropriate tool, remove the brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Compress the front caliper piston. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4554 ^ Install a large C-clamp over the top of the caliper housing and against the back of the outboard pad. ^ Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the brake caliper bore. ^ Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the 2 metal gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 9. Discard the 2 metal gaskets. 10. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts. 12. Remove the brake caliper. 13. Remove the brake pads from the brake caliper. 14. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 15. Remove the rubber O-rings. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4555 16. Discard the rubber O-rings. Installation Procedure 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non-lubricated, compressed filter air. 3. Lubricate the sleeves and bushings with Delco Silicone Lube, GM P/N 18010909, or equivalent. 4. Install the rubber O-ring bushings to the brake caliper. 5. Install the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 6. Install the brake pads to the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the brake caliper mounting bolts. Tighten the brake caliper mounting bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the washers, replace them with new washers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4556 8. Install the front brake hose fitting, the 2 new gaskets and the brake hose fitting bolt. Tighten the front brake hose bolt to 54 Nm(40 ft. lbs.). 9. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 10. Bleed the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake system for leaks. 12. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4557 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 4. Remove the 2 copper gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 5. Discard the 2 copper gaskets. 6. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 7. Remove the brake hose and washers from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4558 9. Remove the brake caliper assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the brake caliper bolts to the mounting bracket. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses without Twists or Bends Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the old bolt washers. Always use new washers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4559 3. Install the brake hose bolt and washers. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 5. Bleed the brake calipers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly, 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4560 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake hose to brake caliper bolt. Important: The gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 4. Discard the metal gaskets. 5. Plug the opening in the front brake hose with a rubber plug in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 6. Remove the caliper guide pin bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4561 7. Remove the caliper from the caliper anchor bracket. Installation Procedure 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non lubricated, compressed filtered air. 3. Apply high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper bolts. 4. DO NOT apply the lubricant to the brake pad hardware. 5. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4562 6. Install the brake caliper bolts. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the NEW metal (copper) gaskets to the brake hope and the bolt. Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the rear brake hose bolt. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4563 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single A Piston) Tools Required ^ J26267 Piston Seal Installer Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all of the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Install a piece of wood or shop towels between the caliper and the piston. 3. Cover the brake caliper with a shop rag. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. 4. Apply only enough compressed air to the brake caliper to remove the piston. 5. Remove the shop rag cover from the brake caliper. 6. Remove the piece of wood or shop towels from the brake caliper. 7. Remove the boot from the front brake caliper. Important: When removing the, front brake caliper piston seal, use a non metallic tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4564 8. Remove the front brake caliper piston seal. 9. Remove the bleeder valve from the brake caliper body. 10. Clean the following items with denatured alcohol. ^ The bleeder valve ^ The brake caliper body bore ^ The brake caliper piston Important: If the corrosion cannot be removed, replace the brake caliper housing and piston. 11. Using a crocus cloth, clean the corrosion from the brake caliper bore. 12. Dry the parts using non lubricated, filtered compressed air. 13. Replace the brake caliper or the piston if any of the following conditions exist: ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4565 1. Lubricate the following parts with clean brake fluid. ^ The piston ^ The piston seal ^ The brake caliper bore. Important: Ensure that the piston seal is not twisted in the brake caliper bore groove. 2. Install the piston seal. 3. Install the boot on the piston. 4. Install the piston in the caliper bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4566 5. Using J26267, install the front caliper piston boot.. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the bleeder valve. Tighten the bleeder valve to 12 Nm (110 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4567 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, using an appropriate tool, remove the brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4568 6. Compress the front caliper piston. ^ Install a large C-clamp over the top of the caliper housing and against the back of the outboard pad. ^ Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the brake caliper bore. ^ Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the 2 metal gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 9. Discard the 2 metal gaskets. 10. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts. 12. Remove the brake caliper. 13. Remove the brake pads from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4569 14. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 15. Remove the rubber O-rings. 16. Discard the rubber O-rings. Installation Procedure 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non-lubricated, compressed filter air. 3. Lubricate the sleeves and bushings with Delco Silicone Lube, GM P/N 18010909, or equivalent. 4. Install the rubber O-ring bushings to the brake caliper. 5. Install the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 6. Install the brake pads to the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the brake caliper mounting bolts. Tighten the brake caliper mounting bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4570 Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the washers, replace them with new washers. 8. Install the front brake hose fitting, the 2 new gaskets and the brake hose fitting bolt. Tighten the front brake hose bolt to 54 Nm(40 ft. lbs.). 9. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 10. Bleed the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake system for leaks. 12. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 4. Remove the 2 copper gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 5. Discard the 2 copper gaskets. 6. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 7. Remove the brake hose and washers from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4571 8. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. 9. Remove the brake caliper assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4572 2. Install the brake caliper bolts to the mounting bracket. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses without Twists or Bends Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the old bolt washers. Always use new washers. 3. Install the brake hose bolt and washers. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 5. Bleed the brake calipers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly, 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4573 3. Remove the brake hose to brake caliper bolt. Important: The gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 4. Discard the metal gaskets. 5. Plug the opening in the front brake hose with a rubber plug in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 6. Remove the caliper guide pin bolts. 7. Remove the caliper from the caliper anchor bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4574 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non lubricated, compressed filtered air. 3. Apply high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper bolts. 4. DO NOT apply the lubricant to the brake pad hardware. 5. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the brake caliper bolts. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4575 7. Install the NEW metal (copper) gaskets to the brake hope and the bolt. Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the rear brake hose bolt. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single A Piston) Tools Required ^ J26267 Piston Seal Installer Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all of the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Install a piece of wood or shop towels between the caliper and the piston. 3. Cover the brake caliper with a shop rag. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. 4. Apply only enough compressed air to the brake caliper to remove the piston. 5. Remove the shop rag cover from the brake caliper. 6. Remove the piece of wood or shop towels from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4576 7. Remove the boot from the front brake caliper. Important: When removing the, front brake caliper piston seal, use a non metallic tool. 8. Remove the front brake caliper piston seal. 9. Remove the bleeder valve from the brake caliper body. 10. Clean the following items with denatured alcohol. ^ The bleeder valve ^ The brake caliper body bore ^ The brake caliper piston Important: If the corrosion cannot be removed, replace the brake caliper housing and piston. 11. Using a crocus cloth, clean the corrosion from the brake caliper bore. 12. Dry the parts using non lubricated, filtered compressed air. 13. Replace the brake caliper or the piston if any of the following conditions exist: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4577 ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Assembly Procedure 1. Lubricate the following parts with clean brake fluid. ^ The piston ^ The piston seal ^ The brake caliper bore. Important: Ensure that the piston seal is not twisted in the brake caliper bore groove. 2. Install the piston seal. 3. Install the boot on the piston. 4. Install the piston in the caliper bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4578 5. Using J26267, install the front caliper piston boot.. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the bleeder valve. Tighten the bleeder valve to 12 Nm (110 inch lbs.). Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Dual Piston) Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Dual Piston) Tools Required ^ J8092 Driver Handle ^ J43885 Boot Seal Installer Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Install a piece of wood or shop towels between the piston and the inside of the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4579 3. Remove the pistons (2) from the caliper bores. 4. Remove the boots (1) from the caliper bores. Do not scratch the caliper bores. 5. Remove the piston seals (3) from the caliper bores. Do not use a metal tool. 6. Remove the bleeder valve cap (4). 7. Remove the bleeder valve (5) from the caliper housing (6). 8. Clean the bleeder valve, the caliper bores, the caliper passages and the pistons with denatured alcohol. Dry the parts and blow out the brake fluid passages. Use dry and filtered compressed air. 9. Replace the pistons or the caliper if any of the following conditions exist: ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Corrosion in the caliper bore Use a crocus cloth in order to polish light corrosion from the caliper bore. Replace the caliper if the corrosion cannot be removed. ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Assembly Procedure 1. Lubricate the new piston seals (3), the caliper bores, and the pistons (2) using clean brake fluid. 2. Install the piston seals (3). Ensure that the piston seals are not twisted in the caliper bore grooves. 3. Install the boot seals (1) on the pistons (2). 4. Install the pistons in the caliper bores. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the bleeder valve (5) in the caliper housing (6). Tighten the bleeder valve to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 6. Install the bleeder valve cap (4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4580 7. Install the boot seals into the caliper housing bores using the J8092 and the J43885. Brake Caliper Overhaul - Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul - Rear Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Pad the interior of the caliper with clean shop towels. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the piston from the caliper bore. 4. Remove the boot from the caliper bore. Do not scratch the housing bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4581 5. Remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. Do not use a metal tool. 6. Remove the bleeder valve and bleeder valve cap from the caliper body. 7. Remove the guide pins and guide pin sleeves from the anchor bracket. 8. Clean the following components with denatured alcohol. ^ The bleeder valve ^ The caliper bore ^ The caliper passages ^ The piston ^ The lining contact area on the anchor bracket. 9. Dry the parts and blow out the brake fluid passages. Use dry and filtered compressed air. 10. Replace the piston or the caliper if any of the following conditions exist: ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Corrosion in the caliper bore. Use crocus cloth in order to polish light corrosion from the caliper bore. Replace the caliper if the corrosion cannot be removed. ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 11. Replace the bleeder valve cap. Tighten the bleeder valve to 12 Nm (110 inch lbs.). Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4582 1. Lubricate the new piston seal, the caliper bore, and the piston with clean brake fluid. 2. Install the piston seal. Make sure the piston seal is not twisted in the caliper bore groove. 3. Install the boot into the caliper housing bore by hand. 4. Install the piston in the caliper bore. Push the piston to the bottom of the bore by hand. 5. Install the boot on the piston. Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4583 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the front brake pads, outboard shown. 4. Remove the front brake caliper bracket mounting bolts, lower shown. 5. Remove the front brake caliper mounting bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4584 1. Install the new bushing and sleeves. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the front brake caliper bracket mounting bolts, lower shown. Tighten the brake caliper mounting bracket bolt to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake pad assembly. 4. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6 and 7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4585 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the rear brake pads. 4. Remove the anti raffle retainers. 5. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket mounting bolts. 6. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4586 1. Install the caliper bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the rear brake caliper bracket mounting bolts. Tighten the rear brake caliper bracket mounting bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear brake anti rattle retainers. 4. Install the rear brake pads. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 7. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 8. Slowly release the brake pedal. 9. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Pad Minimum Thickness See Note Replace the disc brake pads when the friction surface is worn to within 0.76 mm (0.030 inch) of the mounting plates. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Important: The following service procedure is for the vehicles that have had the brake rotor retainers removed. 6. Install and hand tighten a wheel lug nut to hold the brake rotor in place. 7. Compress the front caliper piston. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4592 7.1. Install a large C-clamp over the top of the brake caliper housing and against the back of the outboard pad. 7.2. Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the caliper bore. 7.3. Remove the C-clamp from the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. Important: DO NOT disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. 8. Remove the brake caliper assembly from the mounting bracket. 9. Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 10. Remove the inboard brake pad. 11. Remove the retainer spring. 12. Remove the outboard brake pad. 13. Inspect the disc brake mounting and hardware. 14. Inspect the disc brake caliper. 15. Inspect the caliper bolts for corrosion or damage. Do not attempt to polish away any corrosion. If corrosion is found, use new parts, including bushings, when installing the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4593 Installation Procedure Important: Before installing new brake pads, clean the outside surface of the caliper boot with denatured alcohol. 1. Install the outboard lining. 2. Install the retainer spring on the inboard brake lining. 3. Install inboard lining in the caliper. Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses without Twists or Bends Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the caliper. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 7. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 8. Slowly release the brake pedal. 9. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 11. Burnish the new brake pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4594 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Dual Piston Caliper) Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Dual Piston Caliper) Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, using the appropriate tool, remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Compress the front caliper piston. 6.1. Install a large C-clamp over the top of the brake caliper housing and against the back of the outboard pad. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4595 6.2. Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the caliper bore. 6.3. Remove the C-clamp from the brake caliper. Important: DO NOT disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper assembly from the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. 9. Remove the inboard brake pad. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4596 10. Remove the outboard brake pad. 11. Inspect the disc brake caliper. 12. Inspect the caliper bolts and bushings for corrosion or damage, replace if damaged or corroded. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new anti/rattle retainers. Important: DO NOT reuse the old anti/rattle retainers. Use new anti/rattle retainers. 2. Install the outboard brake pad. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4597 3. Install inboard brake pad. 4. Remove the brake caliper from the support. Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the brake caliper. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 8. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 9. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 10. Slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 12. Burnish the new brake pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4598 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Replacement - Rear Brake Pads Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid is midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full and the minimum allowable level, using the appropriate tool, remove the brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install a large C-clamp over the top of the brake caliper housing and against the back of the outboard brake pad. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4599 7. Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the caliper bore. 8. Remove the C-clamp from the brake caliper. 9. Remove the brake caliper assembly from the mounting bracket. 10. Using denatured alcohol, clean the Make pads and related parts. 11. Using non-lubricated, filtered compressed air, dry the brake pads and related parts. 12. Remove the rear brake pads. Important: DO NOT reuse the rear brake pad anti/rattle spring. Used the NEW brake pad anti/rattle spring. 13. Remove the rear brake pad anti/raffle spring from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4600 14. Remove the anti/raffles springs from the mounting bracket. 15. Inspect the brake caliper. Installation Procedure Important: When replacing the rear brake pads, DO NOT reuse the old anti/rattle springs use supplied in the brake pad kit. 1. Install the NEW anti/rattle springs on the mounting bracket. 2. Install the rear brake pads on the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4601 3. Install the anti/rattle spring on the rear brake caliper. 4. Install the brake caliper assembly on the mounting bracket. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 7. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 8. Slowly release the brake pedal. 9. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 5-6 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 10. Burnish the new brake pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) > Page 4602 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal Injury and vehicle damage. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km1h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-05-22-002L Date: 090326 Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-05-22-002L Date: March 26, 2009 Subject: Disc Brake Warranty Service and Procedures Models: 1999-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 1999-2004 Isuzu Light Duty Trucks (Canada Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) 1999-2010 Saturn Vehicles (Canada Only) EXCLUDING 2009-2010 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to inform you that due to improvements in vehicle brake corner and wheel design, assembly plant build processes and dealership required tools like the On-Car Lathe, measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) is no longer a required step when performing base brake service. Due to this change, you are no longer required to enter the LRO measurement on the repair order or in the warranty system failure code section. The bulletin information below and the base brake labor operations have been updated accordingly. Due to this change it is more important than ever to properly maintain your brake lathe (per the Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure in this bulletin). Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002K (Section 05 Brakes). For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all GM's Standard Brake Service Procedures and Policy Guidelines for brake rotor and brake pad service and wear. For additional information, the Service Technical College lists a complete index of available Brake courses. This information can be accessed at www.gmtraining.com > resources > training materials > brakes courseware index. In Canada, refer to Service Know How course 55040.00V and Hydraulic Brake Certification program 15003.16H. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM BRAKE SERVICE. The following four (4) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful brake service. 1. Measure and Document Pre-Service Rotor Thickness* (REQUIRED on Repair Order) determine rotor clean-up/refinish/replace 2. Properly clean ALL brake corner mating surfaces - hub, rotor and wheel 3. Properly clean-up/refinish rotor, measure and document post-service rotor thickness (REQUIRED on Repair Order) Important If it is determined the rotor needs to be refinished, verify lathe equipment is properly calibrated. 4. Properly reassemble the brake corner using proper torque tools, torque specification and torque sequence - wheel lug nuts. * The bulletin refers to Minimum Thickness specification as the minimum allowable thickness after refinish. Always refer to SI to verify the spec stamped on the rotor is the minimum thickness spec after refinish and not the discard spec. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4607 Bulletin Format ***REPAIR ORDER REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4608 Important When using any one of the brake labor operations listed in this bulletin (except for H9709 - Brake Burnish), the following two rotor measurements (1. Original Rotor Thickness, 2. Refinished Rotor Thickness are required and MUST be written/documented on the repair order, or for your convenience, complete the form (GM Brake Service Repair Order Documentation for Required Measurements) shown above and attach it to the repair order. If the Warranty Parts Center generates a request, this Documentation/Form must be attached to the repair order that is sent back. Important Documentation of brake lathe maintenance and calibration as recommended by the lathe manufacturer must be available for review upon request. Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Original And Refinished Thickness - REQUIRED When resurfacing a brake rotor or drum, the ORIGINAL thickness (measured thickness before refinish) and REFINISHED thickness (measured thickness after refinish) MUST be written/documented on the repair order hard copy for each rotor serviced. If a rotor replacement is necessary, only the original thickness measurement needs to be recorded. Repair Order Documentation - Explanation of Part Replacement - REQUIRED If replacement of a brake component is necessary, proper documentation on the repair order is required. See the following examples: ^ Brake rotor replacement - Customer comment was brake pulsation. Rotor was refinished on a prior brake service. After rotor measurement, it was determined that refinishing the rotor again would take it under the Minimum Thickness specification. ^ Brake pad replacement - Customer comment was brake squeak noise. On inspection, found pads contaminated by fluid leak at caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4609 TOOL INFORMATION CORRECTION PLATE PART INFORMATION Refer to TSB 01-05-23-001 for the Brake Align(R) application chart. For vehicles repaired under warranty, Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates should be submitted in the Net Amount at cost plus 40%. Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates are available through the following suppliers: - Dealer Equipment and Services - Brake Align(R) LLC (U.S. Dealers Only) * We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items, which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4610 WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4611 WORKSHEET - BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION Important Brake lathe calibration should be performed and recorded monthly or if you are consistently measuring high LRO after rotor refinishing. Disclaimer GM Brake Service Procedure GM BRAKE SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wheel and caliper. 2. Measure rotor thickness. In order to determine if the rotor can be refinished, do the following steps: Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4612 If performing routine Brake Service for worn pads only, and the rotors are not damaged and measure within specification - DO NOT REFINISH ROTORS. 1. Remove the rotor(s). 2. Measure the rotor for original thickness using a brake micrometer. Multiple measure points should be taken and the lowest measurement should be recorded. 3. Reference the Minimum Thickness specification stamped on the backside of the rotor or SI for Minimum Thickness specification/other. In most cases, the rotor should be refinished unless the measurement taken makes it obvious that refinishing the rotor would take the measurement under the Minimum Thickness specification (then replacement is necessary). DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. 3. ***Record the lowest ORIGINAL rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy as noted in the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 4. Clean all of the mating surfaces between the hub, the rotor and the wheel using the J 42450A Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit and J 41013 - Whiz Wheel(R). If rotors are not to be refinished - Go To Step 8. Important Cleaning all mating surfaces and making them free of corrosion, burrs and other debris (which includes removal of Hubless rotors) is critical and MUST be performed whether using an On-Car or Bench Lathe Refinish Procedure. 5. Be sure to follow the appropriate refinishing procedure listed below for the type of lathe you are using. Important Only replace the rotors if they do not meet the Minimum Thickness specification. Important DO NOT REFINISH NEW ROTORS. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important Prior to making the cut, install the recommended clip-on style disc silencer supplied with the lathe. Use of this silencer is critical to prevent chatter from occurring during the cut. Bench Type Lathe 1. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. 2. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information, see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure (Bench-Type)" section in this bulletin. 3. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn 4. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 5. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 6. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 7. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Reinstall the rotor(s). Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4613 When using the On-Car lathe on vehicles equipped with limited slip (or posi-trac) rear system, it is critical that the rear drive shaft is disconnected/disengaged prior to operation of the On-Car lathe. Remember to mark and re-index the drive shaft correctly on re-assembly to prevent creating driveline vibration. Whenever the lathe drive motor is being switched on, the operator MUST keep their body out of the wheel well area until the machine has reached its normal operating RPM. 2. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Important When raising the vehicle on the lift, be sure to have it at a good working height (waist high is average) to accommodate mounting the On-Car lathe. Optimally, the center piston on the lathe trolley will be mid-travel. If the lathe trolley center piston is completely compressed (bottoming out) or inversely fully extended and hanging off the vehicle hub, this could affect the calibration time of the lathe. 3. Select the correct adapter for the vehicle you're working on and mount it to the hub with the vehicle lug nuts. Hand tighten 34-41 Nm (25-30 lb ft) the nuts using equal torque. DO NOT use impact wrenches, excessive torque will damage the adapter. Important Ensure the adapter sits flush on the rotor hat surface. Be sure to remove any rust, rotor retaining clips, etc. that may preclude the adapter from sitting flat on the mounting surface. 4. Connect the lathe to the adapter, turn on the lathe and activate the computer to compensate for run-out in the hub. 5. Once the computer indicates the compensation process was successful, on the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 6. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 7. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 8. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 9. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. 10. Dismount the lathe, but leave the lathe adapter attached to the vehicle. 6. Once the rotor has been properly machined, wash the rotor with soap and water (use a mild dish washing soap) or wipe it clean with GM approved brake cleaner, P/N 88862650 (Canadian P/N 88901247). Important Thoroughly cleaning the rotor will prevent the possible transfer of finite metal dust left as a by-product of machining to the pad material during the seating process, thus reducing the opportunity for squeaks or other noises to occur. 7. ***Record the REFINISHED rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy. Refer to the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 8. Setting up to measure for Lateral Run Out (LRO): Important Measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) (steps 8 - 15) is no longer required however, these steps are being left in the overall procedure as a good check to be performed in the case of a repeat pulsation complaint. If you are not checking for LRO, go to step 16. Bench-Type Lathe 1. Ensure that the mating surfaces of the rotor hat section and the hub mating surface are clean and free of debris. 2. Mount the new, original or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub. Important Always hold the rotor on the bottom half so any debris that may be dislodged from the vents will fall out instead of falling into the mounting area. Any movement or jarring from the rotor falling over on the studs can release rust from the vents on the rotor. 3. Tilt the top of the rotor in towards the vehicle so you can see the studs and ease the rotor onto the studs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4614 4. Slide the rotor all the way to the hub and hold it in place until you have placed one of the conical washers (with the tapered hole side facing out) and run the first lug nut up tight by hand so the rotor doesn't move when you release it. 5. Place the conical washers on the rest of the studs (with the tapered hole side facing out), start and snug the lug nuts by hand. 6. Using the one half inch drive impact wrench and a torque stick (J 39544) or equivalent, start with the lug nut opposite of the one you first tightened by hand and tighten the lug nuts using a star pattern until they touch the hub but do not completely torque. Then again, starting with the first lug nut you tightened by hand, tighten all the lug nuts in a star pattern to the specific vehicle torque specification. 7. DO NOT reinstall the caliper or the wheel at this time. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Leave the On-Car adapter on the wheel. 2. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor outboard friction surface approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the rotor's outer edge. The stylus should be perpendicular to the friction surface of the rotor. Important Make sure the dial indicator needle tip is screwed tight, a loose tip could cause false readings. 10. Measure for LRO. Follow the procedure below to determine if the LRO is within specification (0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS). 1. Rotate the rotor and locate the point on the rotor where the lowest dial indicator reading is indicated and set the dial indicator to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor from the low point and locate the point with the highest dial indicator reading (rotor "high spot"). Note the amount and mark the location of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location. If the high point falls between two studs, mark both studs. In instances where the vehicle has "capped lug nuts" you should mark the hub. 11. If the Lateral Run Out (LRO) measurement is 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS, no correction is necessary. Go to Step 15 if this is the first rotor completed. Go to Step 16 if this is the second rotor completed. If the LRO is GREATER than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), go to Step 12. 12. If the LRO measurement is greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), use the following procedure to correct for LRO: Important If the LRO measurement is over 0.279 mm (0.011 in), determine the source or cause of the LRO and correct it (i.e. verify drive axle nut torque specification, refinished rotor is source of LRO due to a lathe qualification issue - see "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure"). Hubless Rotor 1. Remove the rotor and using the Brake Align(R) application chart (found in TSB 01-05-23-001B), choose the correct plate to bring the rotor LRO to 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or less. The plates come in 0.0762 mm (0.003 in), 0.1524 mm (0.006 in) and 0.2286 (0.009 in) compensation. For more information on proper plate selection, see the instruction video/DVD included in the "Brake Align(R)" kit or TSB 01-05-23-001B. 2. Align the V-notch of the selected Brake Align(R) correction plate to the marked wheel stud ("high spot") or between the two points marked (if the "high spot" is between two wheel studs). Important IF Brake Align(R) Correction Plates are not available for the vehicle being serviced, refer to SI Document - Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction for correcting LRO. Important Per Brake Align(R) manufacturer, NEVER attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates together on one hub. NEVER attempt to reuse a previously installed Correction Plate. 3. Reinstall the rotor using the same method and precautions as the first time - found in Step 8. Make sure to index the rotor correctly to the marks made in step 10, otherwise LRO will be comprised. Hubbed / Captured / Trapped Rotor 1. Measure the rotor thickness. 2. Refinish or replace the rotor (see Service Information for further details). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4615 13. Use a Dial Indicator to measure the rotor to verify the LRO is within specification. 14. If using, BENCH LATHE - DO NOT remove conical washers and lug nuts at this time. ON-CAR LATHE - You must remove adapter and install conical washers and lug nuts to retain rotor position. Important For Hubless rotor design, while removing the adapter, you must hold the rotor tight to the hub and install the top conical washer and lug nut first to ensure no debris falls between the surface while removing the adapter. Then, install the remaining conical washers and lug nuts. Otherwise, LRO will be comprised. 15. Perform Steps 1 through 7 on the opposite side of the vehicle (steps 1-12, if performing LRO). 16. Reinstall the rotors on both sides of the vehicle and perform the following steps: 1. Reinstall the calipers and pads. 2. Pump the brakes to pressurize the calipers. 3. Remove the lug nuts/conical washers. 4. Install and properly torque the wheels. Important It is critical to follow the star pattern wheel torque procedure and use the proper tools (torque stick or torque wrench) as referenced in SI. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify the repairs. Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Calibration of the brake lathe should be performed and recorded monthly or whenever post-service brake rotor LRO measurements are consistently reading above specification. BENCH-TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate a Bench-type brake lathe: 1. After refinishing a rotor, loosen the arbor nut and while holding the inside bell clamp to keep it from rotating, rotate the rotor 180 degrees. 2. Retighten the arbor nut and set the dial indicator on the rotor using the same instructions as checking the run out on the vehicle. 3. Rotate the arbor and read the runout. 4. Divide the reading by two and this will give you the amount of runout the lathe is cutting into the rotor. Important If there is any runout, you will need to machine the inside bell clamp in place on the lathe (this procedure is for a Bench type lathe ONLY, DO NOT machine inside the bell clamp on an On-Car type lathe). Machining the Inside Bell Clamp (Bench Type Lathe Only) Any nicks or burrs on the shoulder of the arbor must be removed. An 80-grit stone can be used to accomplish this. Spray WD-40(R) on the shoulder and with the lathe running, hold the stone flat against the shoulder surface using slight pressure. When the burrs are gone, clean the surface. Burrs must also be removed from the hub of the inside bell clamp. This can be accomplished with the stone and WD-40(R). Keep the stone flat on the hub while removing the burrs. After removing the burrs, clean the hub. Place the bell clamp on the arbor of the lathe and use the small radius adapters first and then spacers to allow you to tighten the arbor nut to secure the bell clamp to the lathe. Position the tool bit in the left hand of the rotor truer so you can machine the face of the bell clamp. Machine the face of the bell clamp taking just enough off of it to cut the full face of the clamp the full 360 degrees. Before you loosen the arbor nut, match mark the hub of the bell clamp to the arbor and line up these marks before machining a rotor. A magic marker can be used to make the match marks. Machine a rotor and recheck the calibration. Repeat this procedure on all Inside Bell Clamps used. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4616 Important If runout is still present, contact the brake lathe supplier. ON-CAR TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate an On-Car brake lathe: 1. Connect the lathe to a vehicle using the appropriate adapter. 2. Attach a vise-grip dial indicator to a fixed point in the wheel well and bring the dial indicator to a flat surface on the cutting head. 3. Turn on the lathe and press the "start" button so the lathe begins to compensate. 4. Once compensation is complete, note the runout as measured by the dial indicator. Measured runout at this point is overstated given that it is outside the rotor diameter. 5. If runout is in excess of 0.1016 mm (0.004 in) (0.050 mm (0.002 in) as measured within the rotor diameter), calibration must be tightened. Follow manufacturer's instructions for tightening the calibration of the lathe. This information is found in the manual supplied with the lathe. Important If the machine is taking a long time to compensate during normal use, prior to checking the lathe calibration, it is recommended that the machine be disconnected from the adapter and the adapter (still connected to the vehicle) is rotated 180 degrees and the machine reattached. This will accomplish two things: - It will re-verify the machine is properly attached to the adapter. - It will change the location of the runout (phase) relative to the machine and thus possibly allow for quick compensation as a result of the position change. The following information has been added as a reference to ensure your Pro-Cut PFM lathe provides a consistent smooth surface finish over long term usage. Cutting Tips / Depth of Cut / Tip Life The cutting tips must be right side up. Reference marks always face up. The cutting tips may not have chips or dings in the surface of the points. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. When cleaning or rotating the cutting bits, make sure that the seat area for the tip on the tool is free and clear of debris. Cutting Head On each brake job, the technician must center the cutting head for that particular vehicle using one of the mounting bolt holes on the slide plate. Once the head is centered, it is vital that the technician use one hand to push the head firmly and squarely back into the dovetail on the slide plate while using the other hand to tighten the Allen-Hex bolt that secures the head. Failure to do this could result in chatter occurring during the cut. Tool Holder Plate (Cutting Head) The tool holder plate is the plate that the cutting arms are attached to. It can bend or break if a technician accidently runs the cutting arms into the hub of the rotor while the rotor is turning. (Cuts of more than 0.508 mm (0.020 in) can also bend this plate). Once bent, the lathe will most likely not cut properly until the tool holder plate is replaced. In order to verify the condition of the tool holder plate on a machine that will not cut right, remove the mounting bolt and remove the cutting head from the slide plate. With the cutting head titled at an angle, lay the long edge of the tool holder plate down on the flat part of the slide plate. If any gap can be seen between the edge and the slide plate, the tool holder plate is bent and the source of vibration. Also check to ensure that the cutting arms are lying flat on the upper side of the tool holder plate. If the mounting arm post is bent, it will show itself by having the back of the cutting arm lifting off the surface of the tool holder. Gib Adjustment / Loose Gib As wear occurs between the slide plate and the box it rides on, you must take up the slack. You do this by way of a moveable wedge, which we call the gib. Your lathe manual details adjustment process, which you should perform when required after monthly checks or whenever surface finish is inconsistent. Brake Pulsation BRAKE PULSATION Brake pulsation is caused by brake rotor thickness variation. Brake rotor thickness variation causes the piston in the brake caliper, when applied, to "pump" in and out of the caliper housing. The "pumping" effect is transmitted hydraulically to the brake pedal. Brake pulsation concerns may result from two basic conditions: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4617 1. Thickness Variation Pulsation is Caused by Lateral Run Out (LRO). LRO on a brake corner assembly is virtually undetectable unless measured (with a dial indicator after the brake service) and will not be detected as brake pulsation during an after brake service test drive. If the brake corner is assembled with excessive LRO (greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), thickness variation will develop on the brake rotor over time and miles. Excessive LRO will cause the brake pads to wear the brake rotors unevenly, which causes rotor thickness variation. Pulsation that is the result of excessive Lateral Run Out usually develops in 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi). The more excessive the LRO, the faster the pulsation will develop. LRO can also be induced when uneven torque is applied to wheel nuts (lug nuts). Improper wheel tightening after tire rotation, spare tire usage, brake inspection, etc. can be the cause of brake pulsation. Again, it usually takes 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) AFTER the service event for the condition to develop. The customer does not usually make the connection between the service event and the awareness of the pulsation. The proper usage of torque wrenches and/or torque sticks (torque limiting sockets) will greatly reduce or eliminate the pulsation conditions after wheel service events. The improper use of impact wrenches on wheel nuts greatly increases the likelihood of pulsation after wheel service. The following are examples of pulsation conditions and reimbursement recommendations: - If the customer noticed the condition between 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) and it gradually got worse, normally the repair would be covered. The customer may tolerate the condition until it becomes very apparent. - If a GM dealer performed a prior brake service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce proper brake lathe maintenance. - If the customer had the brake service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. - If a customer indicated they had wheel service, ask who performed the service. Then; - If a GM dealer performed the service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce the use of torque sticks at the dealer. Two common size torque sticks cover 90% of all GM products. Each technician needs to use torque sticks properly every time the wheel nuts are tightened. - If the customer had the wheel service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. 2. Thickness Variation Pulsation Caused by Brake Rotor Corrosion - Rotor corrosion is another form of thickness variation, which can cause a pulsation concern and can be addressed as follows: - Cosmetic Corrosion: In most instances rotor corrosion is cosmetic and refinishing the rotor is unnecessary. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (Lot Rot / Low Miles - 0-321 km (0-200 mi): At times more extensive corrosion can cause pulsation due to thickness variation. This usually happens when the vehicle is parked for long periods of time in humid type conditions and the braking surface area under the pads corrodes at a different rate compared to the rest of the braking surface area. Cleaning up of braking surfaces (burnishing) can be accomplished by 10 - 15 moderate stops from 56- 64 km/h (35 - 40 mph) with cooling time between stops. If multiple moderate braking stops do not correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (without rotor flaking / higher mileage 3,200-8,000 km (2,000-5,000 mi): In some cases, more extensive corrosion that is not cleaned up by the brake pad over time and miles can cause the same type of pulsation complaint due to thickness variation. In these cases, the rotor surface is usually darker instead of shiny and a brake pad foot print can be seen against the darker surface. This darker surface is usually due to build-up, on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (with rotor flaking / higher mileage - 8,000 + km (5,000 + miles) : At times, more extensive corrosion over time and miles can cause pulsation due to thickness variation (flaking). This flaking is usually a build up, mostly on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. When rotor measurements are taken, the low areas are usually close to the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement and the high areas usually measure more than the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement (depending on mileage and normal wear). To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" described below. Important In some flaking instances, cleaning-up this type of corrosion may require more rotor material to be removed then desired. Customer consideration should be taken in these situations and handled on a case by case basis, depending on the amount/percentage of rotor life remaining and the vehicle's warranty time and miles. Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4618 BRAKE ROTOR CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE Clean-up the rotors on an approved, well-maintained brake lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure" section in this bulletin. 1. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 2. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 3. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 4. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 5. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important In many of these instances, such a minimal amount of material is removed from the rotor that customer satisfaction is not a concern for future brake services. This procedure is intended to "Clean-up" the rotor surface and should be conveyed to the customer as such - not as "cut", "refinish" or "machine", which tends to be terms understood as a substantial reduction of rotor material/life. If the brake lathe equipment being used is not capable of removing minor amounts of material while holding tolerances, further lathe maintenance, repair, updates or equipment replacement may be necessary. Brake Noise BRAKE NOISE Some brake noise is normal and differences in loading, type of driving, or driving style can make a difference in brake wear on the same make and model. Depending on weather conditions, driving patterns and the local environment, brake noise may become more or less apparent. Verify all metal-to-metal contact areas between pads, pad guides, caliper and knuckles are clean and lubricated with a thin layer of high temperature silicone grease. Brake noise is caused by a "slip-stick" vibration of brake components. While intermittent brake noise may be normal, performing 3 to 4 aggressive stops may temporarily reduce or eliminate most brake squeal. If the noise persists and is consistently occurring, a brake dampening compound may be applied to the back of each pad. This allows parts to slide freely and not vibrate when moving relative to each other. Use Silicone Brake Lubricant, ACDelco P/N 88862181 (Canadian P/N 88862496) or equivalent. The following noises are characteristics of all braking systems and are unavoidable. They may not indicate improper operation of the brake system. Squeak/Squeal Noise: - Occurs with front semi-metallic brake pads at medium speeds when light to medium pressure is applied to the brake pedal. - Occasionally a noise may occur on rear brakes during the first few stops or with cold brakes and/or high humidity. Grinding Noise: - Common to rear brakes and some front disc brakes during initial stops after the vehicle has been parked overnight. - Caused by corrosion on the metal surfaces during vehicle non-use. Usually disappears after a few stops. Groan Noise: A groan type noise may be heard when stopping quickly or moving forward slowly from a complete stop. This is normal. On vehicles equipped with ABS, a groan or moan type noise during hard braking applications or loose gravel, wet or icy road conditions is a normal function of the ABS activation. Key Points - Frequently Asked Questions KEY POINTS - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS - Q: How do on-car lathes react to Axle Float? Does the play affect the machining of the rotor, either surface finish or LRO? Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4619 A: Because the Pro-Cut on-car lathe adjusts in a live mode while spinning the hub/rotor, the dynamics of a floating axle are effectively eliminated. Once the lathe is compensated, there is no difference in the cutting/surface finish and LRO are just the same as with a non-floating axle. - Q: Which lathe is essential for performing brake work, the bench or on-car? A: Dealers must have a well maintained bench lathe and well maintained on-car lathe. These lathes need to be calibrated on a monthly basis. BOTH lathes are essential to providing quality brake service. - Q: What is the expected tip life for an on-car lathe? A: The geometry and composition of the Pro-Cut tips are designed for "single pass" cutting. When using the Pro-Cut the cutting depth should be set to take all material needed to get below rust grooves, eliminate all run-out and resurface the entire disc in a single pass. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. No "skim cut" or "finish cut" is needed. Failure to follow this procedure will shorten tip life. The Pro-cut tips will last between 7-12 cuts per corner. With three usable corners, a pair of tips is good for at least 21 cuts. - Q: Why does GM recommend the use of single pass (referred to as "positive rake") bench and on-car brake lathes? A: GM Service and GM Brake Engineering have performed competitive evaluations on a significant number of bench and on-car brake lathes. These tests measured critical performance characteristics such as flatness, surface finish and the ability of the lathe to repeat accuracy over many uses. In each test, single pass lathe designs out performed the competitors. Single pass brake lathes are more productive requiring less time to perform the same procedure. - Q: Is it okay to leave the caliper/pads installed while cutting rotors using an on-car lathe? A: On-car lathes should never be used with the pads and calipers installed on the vehicle. The debris from cutting the rotors can contaminate the brake pads/calipers which can lead to other brake concerns and comebacks. - Q: What information needs to be documented on the Repair Order? A: Any claim that is submitted using the labor operations in this bulletin, must have the Original Rotor Thickness and Refinish Rotor Thickness (if refinished) documented on the repair order. For more information, refer to the "Repair Order Required Documentation" section of this bulletin. All Warranty Repair Orders paid by GM, are subject to review for compliance and may be debited where the repair does not comply with this procedure. Brake Warranty BRAKE WARRANTY Brake Rotors: - Brake rotor warranty is covered under the terms of the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Reference the vehicle's warranty guide for verification. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced during normal/routine pad replacement. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced and is ineffective in correcting brake squeal type noises and/or premature lining wear out. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for cosmetic corrosion. Clean up of braking surfaces can be accomplished by 10-15 moderate stops from 56-64 km/h (35-40 mph) with cooling time between stops. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for rotor discoloration/hard spots. - Rotors should be refinished NOT replaced for Customer Pulsation concerns. This condition is a result of rotor thickness variation, usually caused by LRO (wear induced over time and miles) or corrosion (Lot Rot). - When rotor refinishing, only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. - Rotors should be refinished for severe scoring - depth in excess of 1.5 mm (0.060 in). Important If the scoring depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in) after the rotor is refinished, it should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4620 - It is not necessary to replace rotors in pairs. Rotors may be replaced individually. However, caution should be exercised, as a variance in surface finish may cause a brake pull condition. - New rotors should not be refinished before installation. Original equipment rotor surfaces are ground to ensure smooth finish and parallelism between mounting and friction surfaces. If a new rotor has more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in) Lateral Run Out (LRO) when properly mounted on the hub, correct it using one of the following methods: 1. For hubless rotor designs, use the correction plate procedure found in the "GM Brake Service Procedure for Hubless Rotors" outlined in this bulletin. 2. For hubbed/trapped/captured rotor designs, refinish the rotor using an On-Car lathe and the procedure outlined in this bulletin. - Never reuse rotors that measure under the Minimum Thickness specification. In this instance, the rotor should be replaced. Important If the Minimum Thickness specification is not visible on the rotor, reference Service Information (SI) for the specific vehicle application. DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. Brake Pads: Important When determining the warranty coverage (as an example) - if all four front or four rear brake pads are excessively worn evenly, that would NOT be covered under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to driving habits or trailering. However, if the brake pads are excessively worn un-evenly, side-to-side or same side/inner-to-outer pads, then consideration should be given to cover this under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to poor operation of other braking components. - Consideration should be given for covering brake pads up to 39,000 km (24,000 mi) (excluding owner abuse, excessive trailering, or the situations that would not be considered normal use). - Installation of new rotors does not require pad replacement. Do not replace pads unless their condition requires it - excessively worn, damage or contaminated. Brake Wear: Several factors impact brake lining wear and should be taken into account when reviewing related issues: - heavy loads / high temperatures / towing / mountainous driving / city driving / aggressive driving / driver braking characteristics (left foot or two feet) The following are conditions that may extend brake lining wear: - light loads / highway driving / conservative driving / level terrain Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4621 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Bulletin No.: 06-05-22-007 Date: November 30, 2006 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Brake Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) The purpose of this bulletin is to advise dealership personnel of labor operation changes relating to brake repairs. Existing brake rotor and drum labor operations have been revised to remove the refinishing times and new labor operations have been established for refinishing brake rotors or drums. The changes will become effective with the release of the December 2006 Labor Time Guide. The following changes: Applies to all 2005-2007 vehicles, unless 2005 was the last year of production for that particular model. May apply to 2004 and prior models years if the vehicle was produced after 2005 - e.g. TrailBlazer, Envoy, etc. Where the new labor operations for refinishing rotors or drums do not apply, the existing labor operations will still contain time for refinishing. Always refer to the Labor Time Guide for the appropriate labor operations and time for the vehicle being repaired. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 4622 The list shown is of labor operations for brake service. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4623 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front JM3 Front Disc Brakes 10.5 X 1.03 in. Rotor Discard Thickness 0.965 inch All brake rotors have a discard dimension cast into them. Replace any rotor that does not meet this specification. After refinishing the rotor, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum or discard thickness specifications. Rotor Minimum Allowable 0.980 inch Thickness After Refinish Rotor Thickness (new) 1.03 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.002 inch Lateral Runout Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.059 inch Scoring Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.001 inch Thickness Variation JC1 Front Disc Brakes 10.8 X 1.14 in. Rotor Discard Thickness 1.08 in All brake rotors have a discard dimension cast into them. Replace any rotor that does not meet this specification. After refinishing the rotor, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum or discard thickness specifications. Rotor Minimum Allowable 1.13 inch Thickness After Refinish Rotor Thickness (new) 1.14 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.002 inch Lateral Runout Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.059 inch Scoring Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.001 inch Thickness Variation) Rear JC1 Rear Disc Brakes 11.6 X .79 in. Rotor Discard Thickness 0.728 inch All brake rotors have a discard dimension cast into them. Replace any rotor that does not meet this specification. After refinishing the rotor, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum or discard thickness specifications. Rotor Minimum Allowable 0.735 inch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4624 Thickness After Refinish Rotor Thickness (new) 0.787 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.002 inch Lateral Runout Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.059 inch Scoring Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.001 inch Thickness Variation Front Rotor Discard Thickness 1.08 inch All brake rotors have a discard dimension cast into them. Replace any rotor that does not meet this specification. After refinishing the rotor, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum or discard thickness specifications. Rotor Minimum Allowable 1.13 inch Thickness After Refinish Rotor Thickness (new) 1.14 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable Lateral 0.002 inch Runout Rotor Maximum Allowable Scoring 0.059 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.001 inch Thickness Variation Rear Rotor Discard Thickness 0.728 inch All brake rotors have a discard dimension cast into them. Replace any rotor that does not meet this specification. After refinishing the rotor, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum or discard thickness specifications. Rotor Minimum Allowable 0.735 inch Thickness After Refinish Rotor Thickness (new) 0.787 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable Lateral 0.002 inch Runout Rotor Maximum Allowable Scoring 0.059 inch Rotor Maximum Allowable 0.001 inch Thickness Variation Rear Brake Backing Plate Mounting 100 ft. lbs. Nuts Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal Injury and vehicle damage. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km1h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4627 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Rotor Replacement - Front Brake Rotor Replacement - Front Tools Required ^ J42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Removal Procedure Important: The following service procedures applies to both 4 wheel and 2 wheel drive vehicles. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the brake caliper, 2 wheel drive vehicles. 4. Remove the brake caliper and mounting bracket, 4 wheel drive. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4628 5. Remove the retaining ring, 4 wheel drive vehicles only. 6. Remove the brake rotor, 4 wheel drive vehicles only. 7. Remove the brake rotor and wheel bearings, 2 wheel drive vehicles only. 8. Inspect the brake rotor. 9. Inspect the brake caliper. 10. Refinish the rotor if necessary. Installation Procedure Notice: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the wheel bearing flange, clean any rust or foreign material from the mating surface of the rotor and flange with the J42450 hub cleaning kit. Failure to do this may result in increased lateral runout of the rotor and brake pulsation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4629 1. Using the J42450-A, clean the hub flange, 4 wheel drive vehicles. 2. Install the brake rotor, 4 wheel drive shown. 3. Install the brake rotor and wheel bearings, 2 wheel drive vehicles only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4630 4. Install the brake caliper and mounting bracket, 4 wheel drive vehicles. 5. Install the brake caliper, 2 wheel drive vehicles. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4631 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Rotor Replacement - Rear Brake Rotor Replacement - Rear Tools Required ^ J42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. 1. Remove the brake caliper. 2. Remove the brake pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4632 3. Remove the brake caliper mount. 4. Remove and dispose of the sheet metal rotor retainers. 5. Remove the brake rotor. 6. Inspect the brake rotor. 7. Refinish the brake rotor if necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Failure to obtain a firm pedal before moving vehicle may result in personal injury. Notice: Whenever the rotor has been separated from the axle flange, clean any rust or foreign material from the mating surface of the axle flange and brake rotor. Failure to do this may result in increased lateral runout of the rotor and brake pulsation. 1. Using the J42450-A, clean the axle flange. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4633 2. Install the brake rotor. 3. Install the brake caliper mount. 4. Install the brake pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4634 5. Install the brake caliper. 6. Burnish replaced or refinished rotors. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4635 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Disc Brake Splash Shield Replacement - Front Disc Brake Splash Shield Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the hub and bearing assembly. 4. Remove the splash shield. Installation Procedure 1. Install the splash shield. 2. Install the hub and bearing assembly. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 6. Slowly release the brake pedal. 7. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 5-6 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4636 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Burnishing Pads and Rotors Burnishing Pads and Rotors Caution: Road test a vehicle under safe conditions and while obeying all traffic laws. Do not attempt any maneuvers that could jeopardize vehicle control. Failure to adhere to these precautions could lead to serious personal Injury and vehicle damage. Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km1h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Brake Rotor Replacement - Front Brake Rotor Replacement - Front Tools Required ^ J42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Removal Procedure Important: The following service procedures applies to both 4 wheel and 2 wheel drive vehicles. 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the brake caliper, 2 wheel drive vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4637 4. Remove the brake caliper and mounting bracket, 4 wheel drive. 5. Remove the retaining ring, 4 wheel drive vehicles only. 6. Remove the brake rotor, 4 wheel drive vehicles only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4638 7. Remove the brake rotor and wheel bearings, 2 wheel drive vehicles only. 8. Inspect the brake rotor. 9. Inspect the brake caliper. 10. Refinish the rotor if necessary. Installation Procedure Notice: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the wheel bearing flange, clean any rust or foreign material from the mating surface of the rotor and flange with the J42450 hub cleaning kit. Failure to do this may result in increased lateral runout of the rotor and brake pulsation. 1. Using the J42450-A, clean the hub flange, 4 wheel drive vehicles. 2. Install the brake rotor, 4 wheel drive shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4639 3. Install the brake rotor and wheel bearings, 2 wheel drive vehicles only. 4. Install the brake caliper and mounting bracket, 4 wheel drive vehicles. 5. Install the brake caliper, 2 wheel drive vehicles. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Rotor Replacement - Rear Brake Rotor Replacement - Rear Tools Required ^ J42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4640 1. Remove the brake caliper. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Remove the brake caliper mount. 4. Remove and dispose of the sheet metal rotor retainers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4641 5. Remove the brake rotor. 6. Inspect the brake rotor. 7. Refinish the brake rotor if necessary. Installation Procedure Caution: Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Failure to obtain a firm pedal before moving vehicle may result in personal injury. Notice: Whenever the rotor has been separated from the axle flange, clean any rust or foreign material from the mating surface of the axle flange and brake rotor. Failure to do this may result in increased lateral runout of the rotor and brake pulsation. 1. Using the J42450-A, clean the axle flange. 2. Install the brake rotor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4642 3. Install the brake caliper mount. 4. Install the brake pads. 5. Install the brake caliper. 6. Burnish replaced or refinished rotors. Disc Brake Splash Shield Replacement - Front Disc Brake Splash Shield Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Notice: Refer to Brake Caliper Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4643 3. Remove the hub and bearing assembly. 4. Remove the splash shield. Installation Procedure 1. Install the splash shield. 2. Install the hub and bearing assembly. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 6. Slowly release the brake pedal. 7. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 5-6 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. Disc Brake Backing Plate Replacement - Rear Disc Brake Backing Plate Replacement - Rear Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4644 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the park brake cable from the rear brake caliper. 4. Remove the brake caliper and bracket assembly. 5. Remove the rear brake rotor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4645 6. Remove the park brake shoe. 7. Remove the rear drive axle. 8. Remove the retaining nuts from the backing plate. 9. Remove the backing plate from the rear axle housing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the backing plate to the axle housing flange. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4646 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the backing plate nuts. Tighten Tighten the backing plate bolts to 68 Nm (48 lb ft). 3. Install the rear drive axle. 4. Install the park brake shoe. 5. Install the rear brake rotor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4647 6. Install the brake caliper and bracket assembly. 7. Install the park brake cable to the rear brake caliper. 8. Adjust the park brake shoe. 9. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 10. Lower the vehicle. Brake Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor Refinishing Tools Required ^ J41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit ^ J42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Important: Do NOT refinish the brake rotors in order to correct any of the following complaints: ^ Growl or squeal brake noise ^ Premature brake lining wear ^ Cosmetic or superficial corrosion of the rotor braking surface ^ Rotor discoloration Refinish the brake rotors ONLY when one or more of the following conditions exist: ^ Groove depth in excess of specification ^ Severe scoring of the rotor braking surface ^ Brake pulsation caused by the following: Lateral runout in excess of specification - Brake rotor thickness variation in excess of specification - Corrosion or pitting that is deeper than the rotor braking surface Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Burnishing Pads and Rotors > Page 4648 1. Use the J42450-A in order to clean the wheel bearing/hub. 2. Use a micrometer in order to measure the thinnest point of the brake rotor. If the thinnest point of the brake rotor exceeds the brake rotor minimum thickness, do NOT refinish the brake rotor. Replace the brake rotor. 3. Use the J41013 in order to THOROUGHLY clean the rust from the brake rotor flange. 4. Refinish the brake rotor. Refer to the brake lathe manufacturer's operating instructions. Important: Failure to obtain the best possible braking surface finish may cause the vehicle to stop with difficulty. 5. After machining the rotor, use 120 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper and a non-directional rotor finisher, if available, in order to create a non-directional braking surface. 6. Clean the braking surfaces with GM P/N 12377981, Canadian P/N 10953463, or equivalent brake parts cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Bulletin No.: 06-05-22-007 Date: November 30, 2006 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Brake Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) The purpose of this bulletin is to advise dealership personnel of labor operation changes relating to brake repairs. Existing brake rotor and drum labor operations have been revised to remove the refinishing times and new labor operations have been established for refinishing brake rotors or drums. The changes will become effective with the release of the December 2006 Labor Time Guide. The following changes: Applies to all 2005-2007 vehicles, unless 2005 was the last year of production for that particular model. May apply to 2004 and prior models years if the vehicle was produced after 2005 - e.g. TrailBlazer, Envoy, etc. Where the new labor operations for refinishing rotors or drums do not apply, the existing labor operations will still contain time for refinishing. Always refer to the Labor Time Guide for the appropriate labor operations and time for the vehicle being repaired. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Rotor/Drum Refinishing Labor Operations > Page 4654 The list shown is of labor operations for brake service. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Wheel Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Bulletin No.: 03-05-24-001A Date: March 21, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Service Information Regarding Rear Brake Drum Wheel Cylinder Inspections Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2005 and Prior Saturn Vehicles with Rear Drum Brakes Supercede: This bulletin is being revised add model years and include all GM vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-05-24-001 (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information on proper inspection of rear drum brake wheel cylinders. Important: It is not recommended that dust boots be removed during inspection processes as dirt and debris could contaminate the wheel cylinder bore causing premature wear of the wheel cylinder. In addition, most bores should look damp and some lubricant may drip out from under the boot as a result of lubricant being present. All rear drum brake wheel cylinders are assembled with a lubricant to aid in assembly, provide an anti-corrosion coating to the cylinder bore, and lubricate internal rubber components. As a result of this lubrication process, it is not uncommon for some amount of lubricant to accumulate at the ends of the cylinder under the dust boot. Over time, the lubricant may work its way to the outside of the boot and cause an area of the boot to look damp. Evidence of a damp area on the boot does not indicate a leak in the cylinder. However, if there is excessive wetness (i.e. drips) coming from the boot area of the wheel cylinder, it could indicate a brake hydraulic fluid leak requiring wheel cylinder replacement. (Refer to the Wheel Cylinder Replacement procedures in the appropriate Service Manual.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme II Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Automated Bleed Procedure ABS Automated Bleed Procedure Two - Person Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Important: ^ Use the two-person bleed procedure under the following conditions: ^ Installing a new Electro-Hydraulic Control Unit (EHCU) or new Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV). ^ Air is trapped in the valve body. ^ Do not drive the vehicle until the brake pedal feels firm. ^ Do not reuse brake fluid that is used during bleeding. ^ Use the vacuum, the pressure and the gravity bleeding procedures only for base brake bleeding. 1. Raise the vehicle in order to access the system bleed screws. 2. Bleed the system at the right rear wheel first. 3. Install a clear hose on the bleed screw. 4. Immerse the opposite end of the hose into a container partially filled with clean DOT 3 brake fluid. 5. Open the bleed screw 1/2 to 1 full turn. 6. Slowly depress the brake pedal. While the pedal is depressed to its full extent, tighten the bleed screw. 7. Release the brake pedal and wait 10-15 seconds for the master cylinder pistons to return to the home position. 8. Repeat the previous steps for the remaining wheels. The brake fluid which is present at each bleed screw should be clean and free of air. 9. This procedure may use more than a pint of fluid per wheel. Check the master cylinder fluid level every four to six strokes of the brake pedal in order to avoid running the system dry. 10. Press the brake pedal firmly and run the Scan Tool Automated Bleed Procedure. Release the brake pedal between each test. 11. Bleed all four wheels again using Steps 3-9. This will remove the remaining air from the brake system. 12. Evaluate the feel of the brake pedal before attempting to drive the vehicle. 13. Bleed the system as many times as necessary in order to obtain the appropriate feel of the pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 4665 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, or if you disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, you must perform the following steps: 3.1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary add Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. If removal of the reservoir cap and diaphragm is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 3.2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3.3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 3.4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port and tighten securely. 3.5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 3.6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 3.7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 3.8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.3-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 3.9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder - after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder - loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.3-3.8. 3.10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 6. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 7. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 8. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 9. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 10. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 11. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 8-10 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 12. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 13. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 14. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 16. With the right front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right front hydraulic circuit install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 7-11. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 20. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 21. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 21.1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. 21.2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 22. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 23. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 4666 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings installed to the master cylinder ports, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to at least the half-way point with Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the master cylinder reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 lbs.), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 8. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 9. Remove the transparent hoses from the master cylinder reservoir. 10. Install the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 11. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 12. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Bleeder Valve (Front Wheel) 62 inch lbs. Bleeder Valve (Rear Wheel) 62 inch lbs. Caliper Bracket to Knuckle Mounting Bolt (Dual Piston Front Caliper) 133 ft. lbs. Caliper Bracket to Mounting Plate Bolt (Rear Wheel) 52 ft. lbs. Caliper Guide Pin Mounting Bolt (Dual Piston Front Caliper) 85 ft. lbs. Caliper Mounting Bolt (2 wheel disc brakes) 38 ft. lbs. Guide Pin Bolt (Rear Caliper) 23 ft. lbs. Mounting Brake Nut (Rear Wheel) 47 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, using an appropriate tool, remove the brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Compress the front caliper piston. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4672 ^ Install a large C-clamp over the top of the caliper housing and against the back of the outboard pad. ^ Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the brake caliper bore. ^ Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the 2 metal gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 9. Discard the 2 metal gaskets. 10. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts. 12. Remove the brake caliper. 13. Remove the brake pads from the brake caliper. 14. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 15. Remove the rubber O-rings. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4673 16. Discard the rubber O-rings. Installation Procedure 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non-lubricated, compressed filter air. 3. Lubricate the sleeves and bushings with Delco Silicone Lube, GM P/N 18010909, or equivalent. 4. Install the rubber O-ring bushings to the brake caliper. 5. Install the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 6. Install the brake pads to the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the brake caliper mounting bolts. Tighten the brake caliper mounting bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the washers, replace them with new washers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4674 8. Install the front brake hose fitting, the 2 new gaskets and the brake hose fitting bolt. Tighten the front brake hose bolt to 54 Nm(40 ft. lbs.). 9. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 10. Bleed the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake system for leaks. 12. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4675 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 4. Remove the 2 copper gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 5. Discard the 2 copper gaskets. 6. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 7. Remove the brake hose and washers from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4676 9. Remove the brake caliper assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the brake caliper bolts to the mounting bracket. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses without Twists or Bends Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the old bolt washers. Always use new washers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4677 3. Install the brake hose bolt and washers. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 5. Bleed the brake calipers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly, 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4678 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake hose to brake caliper bolt. Important: The gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 4. Discard the metal gaskets. 5. Plug the opening in the front brake hose with a rubber plug in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 6. Remove the caliper guide pin bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4679 7. Remove the caliper from the caliper anchor bracket. Installation Procedure 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non lubricated, compressed filtered air. 3. Apply high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper bolts. 4. DO NOT apply the lubricant to the brake pad hardware. 5. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4680 6. Install the brake caliper bolts. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the NEW metal (copper) gaskets to the brake hope and the bolt. Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the rear brake hose bolt. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4681 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single A Piston) Tools Required ^ J26267 Piston Seal Installer Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all of the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Install a piece of wood or shop towels between the caliper and the piston. 3. Cover the brake caliper with a shop rag. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. 4. Apply only enough compressed air to the brake caliper to remove the piston. 5. Remove the shop rag cover from the brake caliper. 6. Remove the piece of wood or shop towels from the brake caliper. 7. Remove the boot from the front brake caliper. Important: When removing the, front brake caliper piston seal, use a non metallic tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4682 8. Remove the front brake caliper piston seal. 9. Remove the bleeder valve from the brake caliper body. 10. Clean the following items with denatured alcohol. ^ The bleeder valve ^ The brake caliper body bore ^ The brake caliper piston Important: If the corrosion cannot be removed, replace the brake caliper housing and piston. 11. Using a crocus cloth, clean the corrosion from the brake caliper bore. 12. Dry the parts using non lubricated, filtered compressed air. 13. Replace the brake caliper or the piston if any of the following conditions exist: ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4683 1. Lubricate the following parts with clean brake fluid. ^ The piston ^ The piston seal ^ The brake caliper bore. Important: Ensure that the piston seal is not twisted in the brake caliper bore groove. 2. Install the piston seal. 3. Install the boot on the piston. 4. Install the piston in the caliper bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4684 5. Using J26267, install the front caliper piston boot.. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the bleeder valve. Tighten the bleeder valve to 12 Nm (110 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4685 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. 3. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum full point and the minimum allowable level, using an appropriate tool, remove the brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 4. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 5. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4686 6. Compress the front caliper piston. ^ Install a large C-clamp over the top of the caliper housing and against the back of the outboard pad. ^ Slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston is fully seated in the brake caliper bore. ^ Remove the C-clamp from the caliper. 7. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the 2 metal gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 9. Discard the 2 metal gaskets. 10. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 11. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts. 12. Remove the brake caliper. 13. Remove the brake pads from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4687 14. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 15. Remove the rubber O-rings. 16. Discard the rubber O-rings. Installation Procedure 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non-lubricated, compressed filter air. 3. Lubricate the sleeves and bushings with Delco Silicone Lube, GM P/N 18010909, or equivalent. 4. Install the rubber O-ring bushings to the brake caliper. 5. Install the brake caliper mounting bolt sleeves. 6. Install the brake pads to the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Install the brake caliper mounting bolts. Tighten the brake caliper mounting bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4688 Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the washers, replace them with new washers. 8. Install the front brake hose fitting, the 2 new gaskets and the brake hose fitting bolt. Tighten the front brake hose bolt to 54 Nm(40 ft. lbs.). 9. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 10. Bleed the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake system for leaks. 12. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 13. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Dual Piston) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper hose bolt from the brake caliper. 4. Remove the 2 copper gaskets from the brake caliper bolt. These gaskets maybe stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 5. Discard the 2 copper gaskets. 6. Plug the opening in the front brake hose in order to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. 7. Remove the brake hose and washers from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4689 8. Remove the brake caliper guide pin bolts. 9. Remove the brake caliper assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4690 2. Install the brake caliper bolts to the mounting bracket. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses without Twists or Bends Notice in Service Precautions. Important: When performing the following service procedure, DO NOT reuse the old bolt washers. Always use new washers. 3. Install the brake hose bolt and washers. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. 5. Bleed the brake calipers. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly, 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Brake Caliper Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4691 3. Remove the brake hose to brake caliper bolt. Important: The gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 4. Discard the metal gaskets. 5. Plug the opening in the front brake hose with a rubber plug in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 6. Remove the caliper guide pin bolts. 7. Remove the caliper from the caliper anchor bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4692 1. If reusing the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers, clean the brake caliper pin bolts and retainers using denatured alcohol. 2. Dry the brake caliper pin bolts using non lubricated, compressed filtered air. 3. Apply high temperature silicone brake lubricant to the brake caliper bolts. 4. DO NOT apply the lubricant to the brake pad hardware. 5. Install the brake caliper on the mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the brake caliper bolts. Tighten the brake caliper bolts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4693 7. Install the NEW metal (copper) gaskets to the brake hope and the bolt. Notice: Refer to Brake Hose Installation Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Install the rear brake hose bolt. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single Piston) Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Single A Piston) Tools Required ^ J26267 Piston Seal Installer Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all of the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Install a piece of wood or shop towels between the caliper and the piston. 3. Cover the brake caliper with a shop rag. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. 4. Apply only enough compressed air to the brake caliper to remove the piston. 5. Remove the shop rag cover from the brake caliper. 6. Remove the piece of wood or shop towels from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4694 7. Remove the boot from the front brake caliper. Important: When removing the, front brake caliper piston seal, use a non metallic tool. 8. Remove the front brake caliper piston seal. 9. Remove the bleeder valve from the brake caliper body. 10. Clean the following items with denatured alcohol. ^ The bleeder valve ^ The brake caliper body bore ^ The brake caliper piston Important: If the corrosion cannot be removed, replace the brake caliper housing and piston. 11. Using a crocus cloth, clean the corrosion from the brake caliper bore. 12. Dry the parts using non lubricated, filtered compressed air. 13. Replace the brake caliper or the piston if any of the following conditions exist: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4695 ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Assembly Procedure 1. Lubricate the following parts with clean brake fluid. ^ The piston ^ The piston seal ^ The brake caliper bore. Important: Ensure that the piston seal is not twisted in the brake caliper bore groove. 2. Install the piston seal. 3. Install the boot on the piston. 4. Install the piston in the caliper bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4696 5. Using J26267, install the front caliper piston boot.. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the bleeder valve. Tighten the bleeder valve to 12 Nm (110 inch lbs.). Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Dual Piston) Brake Caliper Overhaul - Front (Dual Piston) Tools Required ^ J8092 Driver Handle ^ J43885 Boot Seal Installer Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Install a piece of wood or shop towels between the piston and the inside of the brake caliper. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4697 3. Remove the pistons (2) from the caliper bores. 4. Remove the boots (1) from the caliper bores. Do not scratch the caliper bores. 5. Remove the piston seals (3) from the caliper bores. Do not use a metal tool. 6. Remove the bleeder valve cap (4). 7. Remove the bleeder valve (5) from the caliper housing (6). 8. Clean the bleeder valve, the caliper bores, the caliper passages and the pistons with denatured alcohol. Dry the parts and blow out the brake fluid passages. Use dry and filtered compressed air. 9. Replace the pistons or the caliper if any of the following conditions exist: ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Corrosion in the caliper bore Use a crocus cloth in order to polish light corrosion from the caliper bore. Replace the caliper if the corrosion cannot be removed. ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Assembly Procedure 1. Lubricate the new piston seals (3), the caliper bores, and the pistons (2) using clean brake fluid. 2. Install the piston seals (3). Ensure that the piston seals are not twisted in the caliper bore grooves. 3. Install the boot seals (1) on the pistons (2). 4. Install the pistons in the caliper bores. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the bleeder valve (5) in the caliper housing (6). Tighten the bleeder valve to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 6. Install the bleeder valve cap (4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4698 7. Install the boot seals into the caliper housing bores using the J8092 and the J43885. Brake Caliper Overhaul - Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul - Rear Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all the brake fluid from the caliper. 2. Pad the interior of the caliper with clean shop towels. Caution: Refer to Eye Protection Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Safety Glasses and Compressed Air Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Remove the piston from the caliper bore. 4. Remove the boot from the caliper bore. Do not scratch the housing bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4699 5. Remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. Do not use a metal tool. 6. Remove the bleeder valve and bleeder valve cap from the caliper body. 7. Remove the guide pins and guide pin sleeves from the anchor bracket. 8. Clean the following components with denatured alcohol. ^ The bleeder valve ^ The caliper bore ^ The caliper passages ^ The piston ^ The lining contact area on the anchor bracket. 9. Dry the parts and blow out the brake fluid passages. Use dry and filtered compressed air. 10. Replace the piston or the caliper if any of the following conditions exist: ^ Scoring on the piston surface or in the caliper bore ^ Corrosion on the piston ^ Chrome plating damage on the piston ^ Corrosion in the caliper bore. Use crocus cloth in order to polish light corrosion from the caliper bore. Replace the caliper if the corrosion cannot be removed. ^ Pitting in the caliper bore Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 11. Replace the bleeder valve cap. Tighten the bleeder valve to 12 Nm (110 inch lbs.). Assembly Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4700 1. Lubricate the new piston seal, the caliper bore, and the piston with clean brake fluid. 2. Install the piston seal. Make sure the piston seal is not twisted in the caliper bore groove. 3. Install the boot into the caliper housing bore by hand. 4. Install the piston in the caliper bore. Push the piston to the bottom of the bore by hand. 5. Install the boot on the piston. Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Front Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4701 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the front brake pads, outboard shown. 4. Remove the front brake caliper bracket mounting bolts, lower shown. 5. Remove the front brake caliper mounting bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4702 1. Install the new bushing and sleeves. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the front brake caliper bracket mounting bolts, lower shown. Tighten the brake caliper mounting bracket bolt to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake pad assembly. 4. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 5. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 7. Slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6 and 7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4703 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the rear brake pads. 4. Remove the anti raffle retainers. 5. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket mounting bolts. 6. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper Replacement - Front (Single Piston) > Page 4704 1. Install the caliper bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the rear brake caliper bracket mounting bolts. Tighten the rear brake caliper bracket mounting bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear brake anti rattle retainers. 4. Install the rear brake pads. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 7. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 8. Slowly release the brake pedal. 9. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 6-7 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4709 Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4710 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Brake Fluid and Brake Fluid Handling Use extreme care when selecting brake system fluids or seal damage can result. Do not reuse brake system fluids. Do not mix power steering fluid with brake fluid. Fluid contamination may result in swelling and deterioration of rubber parts. This can lead to reduced brake performance and the eventual loss of braking capability. Service booster components in a clean work area separate from the brake servicing area. Wash hands before changing work areas. Do not use the same containers for brake and power steering fluids. Caution: Brake fluid may be irritating to the skin or the eyes, or may cause nausea, vomiting, or diarrhea if swallowed. In case of contact or swallowing take the following actions: ^ Eye contact - rinse thoroughly with water ^ Skin contact - wash with soap and water ^ if swallowed - Contact a physician immediately. Give two glasses of water and induce vomiting by sticking fingers down the throat. Notice: Brake fluid will damage electrical connections and painted surfaces. Use shop cloths, suitable containers, and fender covers to prevent brake fluid from contacting these areas. Always re-seal and wipe off brake fluid containers to prevent spills. Always store brake fluid in a closed, sealed container. Never use previously opened containers of stored brake fluid. Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container. Brake fluid left in open or improperly sealed containers will absorb moisture. Moisture can lower the brake fluid boiling point, causing the following problems: ^ Brake system contamination ^ Corrosion ^ Deterioration of rubber components Substandard Or Contaminated Brake Fluid It the brake fluid contains improper fluid, water, or other contaminates, the brake fluid may boil or may deteriorate rubber components in the hydraulic brake system. Evidence of rubber deterioration occurs in the following areas: ^ Swollen master cylinder piston seals ^ Swelling of the wheel cylinder boots ^ Swelling of caliper boots ^ Swelling of the master cylinder reservoir diaphragm If rubber deterioration is found, replace all rubber parts, including the hoses, in the brake system. Inspect for brake fluid on the brake linings. Replace the brake linings that are contaminated with brake fluid. If the brake fluid is contaminated and the master cylinder piston seals are good, check for leaks and excessive heat conditions. If no leaks or excessive heat conditions are found, flush the brake system. Flushing The Hydraulic Brake System In order to flush the brake hydraulic system, run new brake fluid through the brake system. Continue until the brake fluid at each bleeder valve comes out clear. Flushing is the only way to clean contaminated fluid out of the system. Flush the brake hydraulic system for the following reasons: ^ New hydraulic brake parts are installed ^ Contamination may be present ^ You do not know the grade of brake fluid in the brake system ^ Mineral oil is present in the brake fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4714 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4715 3. Using a pair of needle nose pliers, compress the locking tabs on the fluid level sensor 4. Remove the brake fluid level sensor from the reservoir. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4716 1. Install the brake fluid level sensor in the reservoir. Important: A snap should be felt or heard when installing the brake fluid level sensor into the reservoir, 2. Install the electrical connector to the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4717 3. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications Brake Hose/Line: Specifications Brake Junction Block Bolt 13 ft. lbs. Brake Pipe Fittings 13 ft. lbs. Brake Pipe Fittings to BPMV 15 ft. lbs. Brake Pipe Fittings Master Cylinder 22 ft. lbs. Front Flex Hose to Caliper Bolt 40 ft. lbs. Front Flex Hose Support Clip Nut 16 ft. lbs. Rear Flex Hose to Bracket Bolt 13 ft. lbs. Brake Hose Fitting Bolt (Rear Wheel) 40 ft. lbs. Front Flex Hose Bolt (Front Wheel) 40 ft. lbs. Rear Brake Pipe Fitting 16 ft. lbs. Front Brake Lines to BPMV 22 ft. lbs. Master Cylinder Brake Lines to BPMV 18 ft. lbs. Rear Brake Line to BPMV 18 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Always use double-walled steel brake pipe when replacing brake pipes. The use of any other pipe is not recommended and may cause brake system failure. Carefully route and retain replacement brake pipes. Always use the correct fasteners and in the original location for replacement brake pipes. Failure to properly route and retain brake pipes may cause damage to the brake pipes and brake system resulting in personal injury. Important: Brake pipes that run parallel to each other must maintain a 6 mm (1/4 lbs.) clearance. 1. Disconnect the brake pipe fittings. 2. Remove the brake pipe fasteners from the vehicle. 3. Remove the brake pipe from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Bend the brake pipe to achieve proper fit. 2. Install the brake pipe to the vehicle. Maintain a clearance of 19 mm (3/4 lbs.) for all moving or vibrating components. 3. Install the brake pipe fasteners to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Connect the brake pipe fittings. ^ Tighten the brake pipe fittings to the BPMV or the wheel jounce hoses to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the brake pipe fittings to the master cylinder to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 5. Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Refer to one of the following procedures: ^ If the brake pipe that was replaced was between the master cylinder and the BPMV, refer to ABS Automated Bleed Procedure. ^ If the brake pipe that was replaced was between the BPMV and the wheel jounce hoses, refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 4723 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) Brake Hose Replacement - Front (Single Piston Caliper) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front tires and wheels assembly. 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hoses and the brake pipes. 4. Using a backup wrench on the brake pipe fitting, disconnect the brake pipe from the brake hose. Important: Install a plug or cap in the brake pipe to the exposed brake pipe fitting end in order to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 5. Disconnect the brake pipe fitting from the flex brake hose at the frame. 6. Remove the front brake hose retainer at the frame bracket. 7. Remove the hose front flex brake hose bolt and gaskets from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the brake hose from the brake caliper. 9. Remove the copper gaskets from the brake hose bolt. These gaskets maybe stick to the brake caliper or the brake hose bolt. Installation Procedure Important: DO NOT reuse the old copper gaskets. Always use NEW copper gaskets. 1. Install the NEW copper gaskets on the brake hose bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 4724 2. Install the brake caliper bolt to the brake caliper. Tighten the brake hose bolt to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the plug or cap from the exposed brake pipe fitting. 4. Install the brake hose to the brake pipe. Important: Ensure that the brake hose is not twisted and does not come in contact with any of the suspension components. 5. Using a backup wrench on the brake pipe fitting, tighten the brake hose fitting. Tighten the brake hose fitting to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the brake pipe retaining clips. 7. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 9. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 4725 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Front (Dual Piston Caliper) Brake Hose Replacement - Front (Dual Piston Caliper) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. 3. Clean all dirt and other foreign material from the brake hoses and brake pipe fitting. 4. Using a backup wrench on the brake pipe fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fitting from the brake hose fitting. 5. Disconnect the brake pipe fitting at the frame. 6. Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting ends in order to prevent fluid loss and contamination. 7. Remove the brake pipe retainer. 8. Remove the brake hose retainer nut and bolt from the upper control arm. 9. Remove the front brake hose bolt and gaskets from the caliper. 10. Remove the front brake hose. 11. Remove the metal gaskets from the brake hose bolt. The metal gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. Installation Procedure Important: DO NOT reuse the old metal gaskets (copper), replace them with NEW metal (copper) gaskets. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 4726 1. Install the metal gaskets (copper) on the brake hose bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: The brake hose must not be twisted. Ensure that the brake hose is not in contact with any of the suspension components. 2. Install the front brake hose to brake caliper. Tighten the front brake hose bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the rubber cap or plug from the brake pipe fitting. 4. Install the brake hose to the brake pipe. 5. Using a backup wrench, tighten the brake hose and the brake pipe fitting. Tighten brake hose fitting to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the brake hose retaining bracket to the upper control arm. 7. Install the brake hose retaining bracket bolt and nut. Tighten brake hose retaining bracket nut to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the brake hose retaining clip at the frame. 9. Bleed the hydraulic system. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 4727 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement - Rear Brake Hose Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Support the vehicle with safety stands. 3. Clean the dirt and foreign material from the brake hose and brake pipe fitting. 4. Install a rubber cap or plug on the brake pipe fitting in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 5. Using a backup wrench, disconnect the brake hose and brake pipe fitting. 6. Remove the brake hose retainer. 7. Remove the brake pipe from the brake junction block. 8. Remove the brake junction block mounting bolt. 9. Remove the brake hose. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: After installation, ensure that the rear flex hose is not twisted and that the rear flex hose does not come in contact with any other components. 1. Install the brake junction block mounting bolt. Tighten the brake junction block bolt to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the brake hose to the brake junction block. Tighten the brake hose fitting to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake hose fitting to the brake pipe fitting. Tighten the brake hose fitting to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. 5. Remove the safety stands. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 4728 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Tube Adapter Replacement Tube Adapter Replacement Removal Procedure Important: If you must remove more than one tube adapter at one time, stamp the BPMV with a number (1, 2 or 3) in order to indicate the number of grooves cut into the tube adapters. This procedure will aid proper reassembly. 1. Remove the appropriate brake line from the tube adapter (1). 2. Remove the tube adapter from the BPMV (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the new gasket (2) on the tube adapter (1). Notice: Refer to Component Fastener Tightening Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the new tube adapter (1) into the BPMV (3). Tighten the tube adapter to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake line. Tighten the brake line to 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 4. Bleed the system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve (BPMV) Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Important: Thoroughly wash all contaminants from around the EHCU. The area around the EHCU must be free from loose dirt to prevent contamination of disassembled ABS components. Disconnect the two electrical harness connectors from the EBCM (2). 2. Important: Make sure that brake lines are tagged and kept in order for proper reassembly. Disconnect the 5 brake lines from the BPMV (3). 3. Remove 2 bolts (4) securing the BPMV mounting bracket (5) to the BPMV (3). 4. Disconnect the 2 way ABS pump motor connector. 5. Remove the four T-25 TORX screws (1) from the EBCM (2). 6. Important: Do not use a tool to pry the EBCM or the BPMV. Excessive force will damage the EBCM. Remove the EBCM (2) from the BPMV (3). Removal may require a light amount of force. Important: Do not reuse the EBCM mounting bolts. Always install new bolts. 7. Clean the EBCM (2) to BPMV (3) mounting surfaces with a clean cloth. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Do not use RTV or any other type of sealant on the EBCM gasket or mating surfaces. Install EBCM (2) onto BPMV (3). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Do not reuse the old mounting bolts. Always install new bolts with the new BPMV. Install the four EBCM bolts. ^ Tighten the four bolts to 5 Nm (39 inch lbs.) in an X-pattern. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4732 3. Connect the 2 way ABS pump motor connector to the EBCM (2). 4. Install BPMV (3) to EHCU bracket (5). 5. Connect the two electrical harness connectors to the EBCM (2). 6. Important: The brake pipes are held in the proper place by a frame mounted plastic bracket. Make sure that the brake pipes stay in the correct place for proper reassembly. Install the 5 brake pipes to the BPMV (3). ^ Tighten the brake pipe fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 7. Bleed the brake system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Master Cylinder Mounting Nut 27 ft. lbs. Brake Master Cylinder JC1/JM3 1 in. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4736 Locations View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Overhaul Master Cylinder Overhaul Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the brake master cylinder from the vehicle. 2. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 3. Clean the outside of the master cylinder reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 4. Remove the reservoir cap and diaphragm from the reservoir. 5. Inspect the reservoir cap and diaphragm for the following conditions. If any of these conditions are present, replace the affected components. ^ Cuts or cracks ^ Nicks or deformation 6. Remove the master cylinder reservoir from the master cylinder. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress the primary piston (2) and remove the piston retainer. 8. Remove the primary piston assembly from the cylinder bore. 9. Plug the cylinder inlet ports and the rear outlet port. Apply low pressure, non-lubricated, filtered air into the front outlet port, in order the remove the secondary piston (1) with the primary (6) and secondary (5) seals, and the return spring. 10. Discard the primary piston assembly, the piston retainer, and the seals and seal retainer from the secondary piston. Assembly Procedure Important: Do not use abrasives to clean the brake master cylinder bore. 1. Clean the interior and exterior of the master cylinder, the secondary piston (1), and the return spring in denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 2. Inspect the master cylinder bore, inlet and outlet ports, the secondary piston (1), and the return spring for cracks, scoring, pitting, and/or corrosion. Replace the master cylinder if any of these conditions exist. 3. Dry the master cylinder and the individual components with non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Lubricate the master cylinder bore, the secondary piston (1), the return spring, and all of the individual overhaul components with Delco, Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 5. Assemble the lubricated, new primary seal (6) and retainer, and new secondary seal (5) onto the secondary piston. 6. Install the lubricated return spring and secondary piston assembly (1) into the cylinder bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul > Page 4739 7. Install the lubricated, new primary piston assembly (2) into the cylinder bore. 8. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress the primary piston (2) and install the new piston retainer. 9. Install the master cylinder reservoir to the master cylinder. 10. Install the reservoir cap and diaphragm to the reservoir. 11. Install the master cylinder to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul > Page 4740 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Replacement Master Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Apply the parking brake and block the wheels. 2. Disconnect the brake pipes from the master cylinder. Important: Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting ends in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 3. Plug the open brake pipe ends. 4. Remove the master cylinder nuts and bolts. 5. Remove the master cylinder from the vehicle. 6. Drain the master cylinder reservoir of all the brake fluid. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul > Page 4741 1. Bench bleed the master cylinder. 2. Install the master cylinder to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the master cylinder bolts and nuts. Tighten the nuts to 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the brake pipes to the master cylinder. Tighten the pipe nuts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 5. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul > Page 4742 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the master cylinder from the vehicle. 2. Secure the master cylinder in a vise. Do not clamp the master cylinder body, secure only at the flange. 3. Carefully remove the brake master cylinder reservoir retaining pins. 4. Remove the reservoir from the master cylinder by pulling the reservoir straight up and away from the cylinder. 5. Remove the seals from the master cylinder. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the reservoir for cracks or deformation. If found, replace the reservoir. 2. Clean the reservoir with denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the reservoir with non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Lubricate the new seals and the outer surface area of the reservoir-to-housing barrels with Delco Supreme 11 GM P/N 12377967, Canadian P/N 992667 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul > Page 4743 5. Install the lubricated seals, make sure they are fully seated. 6. Install the reservoir to the master cylinder by pressing the reservoir straight down on the master cylinder until the pin holes are aligned. 7. Carefully tap the reservoir retaining pins into place to secure the reservoir. 8. Install the cover on the reservoir. 9. Remove the master cylinder from the vice. 10. Install the master cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Overhaul > Page 4744 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Visually inspect the brake fluid level through the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, the brake system should be inspected for wear and possible brake fluid leaks. 3. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, and an inspection of the brake system did not reveal wear or brake fluid leaks, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 4. If brake system service was just completed, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 5. If the brake fluid level is above the half-full point, adding brake fluid is not recommended under normal conditions. 6. If brake fluid is to be added to the master cylinder reservoir, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. Use only Delco Supreme 11, GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Wheel Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Wheel Cylinder Inspection Guidelines Bulletin No.: 03-05-24-001A Date: March 21, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Service Information Regarding Rear Brake Drum Wheel Cylinder Inspections Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2005 and Prior Saturn Vehicles with Rear Drum Brakes Supercede: This bulletin is being revised add model years and include all GM vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-05-24-001 (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information on proper inspection of rear drum brake wheel cylinders. Important: It is not recommended that dust boots be removed during inspection processes as dirt and debris could contaminate the wheel cylinder bore causing premature wear of the wheel cylinder. In addition, most bores should look damp and some lubricant may drip out from under the boot as a result of lubricant being present. All rear drum brake wheel cylinders are assembled with a lubricant to aid in assembly, provide an anti-corrosion coating to the cylinder bore, and lubricate internal rubber components. As a result of this lubrication process, it is not uncommon for some amount of lubricant to accumulate at the ends of the cylinder under the dust boot. Over time, the lubricant may work its way to the outside of the boot and cause an area of the boot to look damp. Evidence of a damp area on the boot does not indicate a leak in the cylinder. However, if there is excessive wetness (i.e. drips) coming from the boot area of the wheel cylinder, it could indicate a brake hydraulic fluid leak requiring wheel cylinder replacement. (Refer to the Wheel Cylinder Replacement procedures in the appropriate Service Manual.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Actuator: Service and Repair Park Brake Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Relieve the tension from the park brake cables by loosening the nut at the equalizer. 5. Remove the rear park brake cable from the park brake actuator lever. 6. Remove the park brake cable from the mounting bracket by depressing the locking tabs. 7. Remove the rotor. 8. Remove the axle shaft. 9. Remove the park brake shoe. 10. Remove the backing plate bolts. 11. Remove the park brake actuator lever housing from the backing plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake actuator lever housing to the backing plate. 2. Perform the following procedure before installing the backing plate bolts. 2.1. Remove all traces of the original adhesive patch. 2.2. Clean the threads of the bolt with brake parts cleaner or the equivalent and allow to dry. 2.3. Apply Threadlocker GM P/N 12345493, Red LOCTITE #272, or for Canada use P/N 10953488 to the threads of the bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the backing plate bolts. Tighten the backing plate bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the park brake shoe. 5. Install the axle shaft. 6. Adjust the park brake shoe. 7. Install the rotor. 8. Install the park brake cable to the mounting bracket until the locking tabs snap into place. 9. Install the rear park brake cable to the park brake actuator lever. 10. Tighten the nut to the intermediate cable at the equalizer. Tighten the nut to 3.5 Nm (31 inch lbs.). 11. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 12. Remove the safety stands. 13. Lower vehicle. 14. Adjust park brake cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Backing Plate: Specifications Rear Park Brake Backing Plate Mounting Bolts 100 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Cable: Specifications Park Brake Cable Mounting Bracket Bolt 12.6 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake, if applied. 2. Remove the left trim panel-knee bolster. 3. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Loosen the park brake cable at the equalizer. 5. Remove the front park brake cable from the connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4761 6. Remove the retainer and the grommet. 7. Remove the front brake cable from the park brake pedal. 8. Remove the front park brake cable. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front park brake cable in the connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4762 2. Install the park brake cable in the retainer and grommet. 3. Install the park brake cable on the park brake pedal. 4. Install the left trim-panel knee bolster. 5. Adjust the park brake cable. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4763 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Mounting Bracket Replacement Park Brake Cable Mounting Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the parking brake, if applied. 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the park brake equalizer. 4. Using the J37043 (1), collapse the locking tabs on the park brake cable. 5. Remove the park brake cable from the mounting bracket. 6. Remove the cable mounting bolts for the mounting bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4764 7. Remove the park brake cable mounting bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake cable mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake cable mounting bracket bolt. Tighten the mounting bracket bolt to 17 Nm (12.6 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear cables to the mounting bracket by inserting the cable till all the retaining tabs snap into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4765 4. Install the park brake equalizer. 5. Adjust the park brake. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4766 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Replacement - Rear (4WD Pickups and Utilities) Park Brake Cable Replacement - Rear (S4WD Pickups and Utilities) Removal Procedure Tools Required ^ J37043 Park Brake Cable Release Tool 1. Release the park brake, if applied. 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the front cable at the equalizer. 4. Using the J37043 (1), collapse the locking finger for the rear park brake cable. 5. Remove the rear park brake cable from the connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4767 6. Remove the rear park brake cable from the equalizer. 7. Using the J37043 (1), collapse the locking finger for the rear park brake cable. 8. Slide the inner park brake cable to the rearward. 9. Remove the park brake cable from the frame retainers. 10. Remove the park brake cable from the rear axle housing retainers, if needed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4768 11. Remove the park brake cable from the park brake actuator. 12. Using the J37043 (1), collapse the locking tabs on the park brake cable. 13. Remove the J37043 (1) from the park brake cable. 14. Remove the park brake cable from the rear brake cable bracket. Installation Procedure Important: When installing the park brake cable in any of the retainers, ensure that the locking tabs on the park brake cable are fully seated against the retainer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4769 1. Install the park brake cable frame retainers. 2. Install the park brake cable in the rear axle housing retainers, if removed. 3. Install the park brake cable in the brake caliper bracket. 4. Install the park brake cable on the park brake actuator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4770 5. Install the park brake cable, on the equalizer 6. Install the park brake cable in the connector. 7. Adjust the park brake. 8. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4771 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement Park Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement Removal Procedure Tools Required ^ J37043 Park Brake Cable Release Tool 1. Release the park brake, if applied. 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the right rear park brake cable from the equalizer. 4. Remove the spring from the equalizer, if equipped. 5. Remove the park brake from the connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4772 6. Using the J37043 (1), collapse the locking tabs on the park brake cable. 7. Remove the park brake cable from the equalizer. Installation Procedure Important: When installing the park brake cable in the equalizer, ensure that the locking tabs on the park brake cable are properly seated against the equalizer. 1. Install the park brake cable in the equalizer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Park Brake Cable Replacement - Front > Page 4773 2. Install the park brake cable in the connector. 3. Install the right rear park brake cable in the equalizer. 4. Install the equalizer spring. 5. Adjust the park brake. 6. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Lever: Specifications Park Brake Lever Mounting Bolts 18 ft. lbs. Park Brake Lever Mounting Nut 18 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4777 Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Park Brake Release Handle Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake, if applied. 2. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 3. Remove the brake release handle from the park brake pedal. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake release handle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4778 2. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Pedal: Service and Repair Park Brake Pedal Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake, if applied. 2. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Loosen the park brake cable. 4. Remove the park brake release handle. 5. Press the retaining tabs in on the front park brake cable. 6. Remove the front park brake cable from the park brake pedal. 7. Remove the park brake pedal mounting bolts. 8. Remove the park brake pedal assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4782 Installation Procedure 1. Install the brake pedal assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake pedal mounting bolts and the nut. Tighten the park brake pedal retaining bolts and the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the park brake cable to the brake pedal assembly. Important: Ensure that the brake cable retainer are expanded and are locked in the park brake pedal bracket 4. Install the front brake cable to the park brake pedal assembly. 5. Install the brake release handle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4783 6. Adjust the park brake cable. 7. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Park Brake Shoe Retaining Clip Kit Parking Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Park Brake Shoe Retaining Clip Kit Bulletin No.: 02-05-26-001C Date: January 19, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Rear Parking Brake Shoe Retaining Spring Clip Service Kit for Drum-in-Hat (DIH) Equipped Vehicles Models: 2004-2005 Buick Rainier 2002-2005 Cadillac Escalade Models 2002-2005 Chevrolet Avalanche 1998-2005 Chevrolet Blazer 1999-2005 Chevrolet Silverado Models 2000-2005 Chevrolet Suburban, Tahoe 2002-2005 Chevrolet SSR, TrailBlazer Models 2003-2005 Chevrolet Astro, Express 1998-2005 GMC Jimmy 1999-2005 GMC Sierra Models 2000-2005 GMC Yukon Models 2002-2005 GMC Envoy Models 2003-2005 GMC Safari, Savana 1998-2004 Oldsmobile Bravada This Bulletin ONLY applies to 1500 series vehicles with four wheel disc brakes. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and clarify parts usage information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-05-26-001B (Section 05 - Brakes). A rear parking brake retaining spring clip kit has been released for service. This kit consists of two parking brake hold down spring clips (2) and bolts (3). Note: Use J 46277 Rotor Removal Tool with J 6125-B Slide Hammer to remove the rotor from the vehicle. Place J 46277 between the rotor surfaces in the vent section of the rotor. DO NOT place J 46277 on the back side of the rotor surface, it may damage the rotor surface. During rear brake rotor removal, it is possible to damage the parking brake shoe retaining spring clip. Order this new kit when replacement of the clips is required but the parking brake shoes do not require replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Park Brake Shoe Retaining Clip Kit > Page 4788 Important: The spring clip kits mentioned in this bulletin do not address any parking brake concerns. Refer to the Parking Brakes sub-section of the Service Manual for any diagnostic information. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Warranty Information When removal of the rear brake rotors results in damage to the spring clips on vehicles under warranty, use the labor operation shown in conjunction with one of the kit part numbers listed above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Park Brake Shoe Retaining Clip Kit > Page 4789 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4790 Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Park Brake Shoe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Release the park brake, if applied. 2. Raise and the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the wheel and the tire. 4. Remove the park brake cable from the park brake lever. Important: In the following service procedure, the brake caliper and mounting ' bracket does not have to be separated. Relocate the brake caliper and bracket to the side and secure. 5. Remove the rear brake caliper and bracket assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4791 6. Remove the rear brake rotor. 7. Using denatured alcohol, clean the park brake shoe assembly. 8. Using non-lubricated, filtered compressed air, dry the park brake shoe assembly. 9. Slide the park brake shoe (2) down until it is disengaged from the hold down spring (3). 10. Lift the shoe (2) away from the backing plate and slide the shoe up, off of the actuation mechanism (1). 11. Remove the shoe (2) over the axle flange and from the vehicle. 12. Turn the adjustment screw to the fully home position in the notched adjustment nut, then back it off 1/4 turn. 13. Align the slots in both the adjusting screw and tappet to be parallel with the backing plate face. 14. Using denatured alcohol, clean the rear backing plate of dirt and foreign materials. 15. Using non-lubricated, filtered air, dry the backing plate. Installation Procedure 1. Install a new park brake shoe (2) over the axle flange. 2. Position the shoe (2) on the actuation mechanism. 3. Holding the lower end of the shoe (2) away from the backing plate, slide the shoe down, over the top of the hold down spring (3). 4. Place the lower end of the shoe (2) against the backing plate. 5. Slide the shoe (2) up and under the hold down spring (3). Important: The shoe must be central on the backing plate and with both tips located in the slots of the actuation mechanism (1). 6. Inspect the position of the shoe assembly. 7. Manually check the park brake for proper operation by moving the park brake actuator lever and observing the movement of the actuation mechanism. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4792 8. Install the park brake cable to the park brake lever. 9. Adjust the park brake shoe (1). 10. Install the rear brake rotor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4793 11. Install the brake caliper and mounting bracket. 12. Install the tire and wheel. 13. Lower the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Warning Switch: Specifications Park Brake Warning Light Switch Mounting Bolt 35 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4797 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4798 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 2. Remove the electrical connector. 3. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4799 4. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake warning lamp switch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Tighten the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4800 3. Install the electrical connector. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Vacuum Booster Mounting Nut 30 ft. lbs. Brake Assist Tandem Diaphragm JC1/JM3 10.24 in. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4805 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Remove the master cylinder away from the vacuum booster. 3. Support the master cylinder. 4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum booster. 5. Remove the left closeout/insulator panel. 6. Remove the pushrod retainer from the brake pedal pin. 7. Remove the stop lamp switch and the pushrod from the brake pedal pin. 8. Remove the steering column support bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4806 9. Remove the vacuum booster mounting nuts. 10. Remove the vacuum booster assembly. 11. Remove the gasket. Installation Procedure 1. Install the vacuum booster assembly and the gasket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the vacuum booster mounting nuts on the vacuum booster. Tighten the vacuum booster mounting nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the steering column support bracket. 4. Install the stop lamp switch and the pushrod to the brake pedal pin. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4807 5. Install the pushrod retainer to the brake pedal pin. The retainer will snap into place. 6. Install the left closeout/insulator panel. 7. Install the check valve to the vacuum booster. 8. Install the master cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve and/or Hose Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the vacuum brake booster check valve (1) from the vacuum brake booster. 2. Remove the vacuum brake booster hose clamp at the check valve. 3. Remove the vacuum brake booster check valve from the hose (2). 4. Disconnect the vacuum brake booster hose at the engine. 5. Remove the vacuum brake booster hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Connect the vacuum brake booster hose at the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4811 2. Install the vacuum brake booster check valve to the hose (2). 3. Install the vacuum brake booster hose clamp to the check valve. 4. Install the vacuum brake booster check valve (1) to the vacuum brake booster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4816 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4817 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution in Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. Important: After installation, calibrate the new EBCM to the tire size that is appropriate to the vehicle. 1. Important: Thoroughly wash all contaminants from around the EHCU. The area around the EHCU must be free from loose dirt to prevent contamination of disassembled ABS components. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the EBCM (2). 2. Remove the four T 25-TORX® mounting screws (1) that fasten the EBCM (2) to the BPMV (3). 3. Remove the EBCM (2) from the BPMV (3). Removal may require a light amount of force. Important: Do not use a tool to pry the EBCM or the BPMV. 4. Clean the BPMV (3) to EBCM (2) mounting surfaces with a clean cloth. Installation Procedure Important: Do not reuse the old mounting screws. Always install new mounting screws with the new EBCM. 1. Important: Do not use RTV or any other type of sealant on the EBCM gasket or mating surfaces. Install EBCM (2) on to the BPMV (3). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the four new T-25 TORX® screws (1) in the EBCM (2). ^ Tighten the four T-25 TORX® screws to 5 Nm (39 inch lbs.) in an X-pattern. 3. Connect the electrical connectors to the EBCM (2). 4. Revise the tire calibration using the Scan Tool Tire Size Calibration function. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4822 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Fluid Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution in Service Precautions. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fluid level sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4823 3. Using a pair of needle nose pliers, compress the locking tabs on the fluid level sensor 4. Remove the brake fluid level sensor from the reservoir. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4824 1. Install the brake fluid level sensor in the reservoir. Important: A snap should be felt or heard when installing the brake fluid level sensor into the reservoir, 2. Install the electrical connector to the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4825 3. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Warning Switch: Specifications Park Brake Warning Light Switch Mounting Bolt 35 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4829 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4830 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 2. Remove the electrical connector. 3. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4831 4. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake warning lamp switch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Tighten the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4832 3. Install the electrical connector. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Wheel Speed Sensor Mounting Bolt 12 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4836 Front Frame Grounds Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4837 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4838 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Clutch Start Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4844 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair Clutch Start Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the plastic retainer tabs from the clutch start switch. 2. Remove the clutch start switch from the push rod. 3. Remove the connector from the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the connector to the clutch start switch. 2. Install the clutch start switch to the pushrod with the plastic tabs. 3. Install the push rod to the clutch pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions Jump Starting: Service Precautions CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 4849 Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. NOTE: This vehicle has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system. Make sure the vehicle or equipment being used to jump start the engine is also 12 volt, negative ground. Use of any other type of system will damage the vehicle's electrical components. This vehicle has a 12 volt positive, negative ground electrical system. Do not try to jump start a vehicle if you are unsure of the other vehicle's positive voltage or ground position. The booster (charged) battery and the discharged battery should be treated carefully when using jumper cables. 1. Position the vehicle with the booster (charged) battery so that the jumper cables will comfortably reach the battery of the other vehicle. - Do not let the 2 vehicles touch. - Make sure that the jumper cables do not have loose clamps or missing insulation. 2. Perform the following steps on both vehicles: 1. Place the automatic transmission in PARK. 2. Block the wheels. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn off all electrical loads that are not needed (leave the hazard flashers ON). 5. Turn OFF the ignition switch. 3. Attach the end of 1 jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. IMPORTANT: Some vehicles have a battery remote positive stud. ALWAYS use the battery remote positive stud in order to give or to receive a jump start. 4. Attach one end of the remaining jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery. 5. Make the final connection of the negative jumper cable to the block or suitable bracket connected directly to the block, away from the battery. NOTE: Do not connect the negative booster cable to the housings of other vehicle electrical accessories or equipment. The current flow during jump starting may damage such equipment. 6. Start the engine of the vehicle that is providing the jump start and turn off all electrical accessories. Raise the engine RPM to approximately 1500 RPM. 7. Crank the engine of the vehicle with the battery.If the engine does not crank or cranks too slowly, perform the following steps: 0. Turn the ignition OFF. 1. Allow the booster vehicle engine to run at approximately 1500 RPM for 5 minutes. 2. Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 4850 8. Reverse the steps exactly when removing the jumper cables. The negative battery cable must first be disconnected from the engine that was jump started. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure Negative: Service and Repair Disconnect/Connect Procedure BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE DISCONNECT/CONNECT PROCEDURE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn off all the lamps and accessories. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. 3. Remove the battery ground negative cable and bolt from the battery 4.3L. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Clean any existing corrosion from the battery terminal bolt flange and the battery cable end. Install the battery ground negative cable and bolt to the battery. Tighten the battery terminal bolt to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 4856 Negative: Service and Repair Replacement procedure BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the negative battery cable bolt from the frame. 4. Remove the negative battery cable bolt from the radiator support. 5. Remove the negative battery cable bolt from the block. 6. Remove the negative battery cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the negative battery cable. 2. Install the negative battery cable bolt to the block. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Negative, Battery Cable > System Information > Service and Repair > Disconnect/Connect Procedure > Page 4857 Tighten the negative battery cable bolt to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 3. Install the negative battery cable bolt to the radiator support. Tighten the negative battery cable bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 4. Install the negative battery cable bolt to the frame. Tighten the negative battery cable bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Positive: Technician Safety Information CAUTION: Batteries produce explosive gases. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Batteries supply levels of electrical current high enough to cause burns. Therefore, in order to reduce the risk of personal injury while working near a battery, observe the following guidelines: - Always shield your eyes. - Avoid leaning over the battery whenever possible. - Do not expose the battery to open flames or sparks. - Do not allow battery acid to contact the eyes or the skin. Flush any contacted areas with water immediately and thoroughly. - Get medical help. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4862 Positive: Vehicle Damage Warnings BATTERY DISCONNECT CAUTION CAUTION: Unless directed otherwise, the ignition and start switch must be in the OFF or LOCK position, and all electrical loads must be OFF before servicing any electrical component. Disconnect the negative battery cable to prevent an electrical spark should a tool or equipment come in contact with an exposed electrical terminal. Failure to follow these precautions may result in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or its components. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 4863 Positive: Service and Repair BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the positive battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the bolt retaining the positive battery cable to the underhood fuse block. 4. Remove the nut retaining the positive battery cable to the generator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 6. Remove the nut retaining the positive battery cable to the starter. 7. Remove the positive battery cable bolt from the engine. 8. Remove the battery positive cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the positive battery cable to the vehicle. 2. Install the positive battery cable nut to the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Positive, Battery Cable > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 4864 NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 6 N.m (80 lb in). 3. Install the nut retaining the positive battery cable to the starter. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Install the nut retaining the positive battery cable to the generator. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Install the nut retaining the positive battery cable to the underhood fuse block. Tighten the positive battery cable nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Connect the positive battery cable to the battery. Tighten the positive terminal bolt to 14 N.m (11 lb ft). 8. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Generator Usage Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4871 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4872 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4873 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4874 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4875 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4876 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4877 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4878 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4879 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4880 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4881 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4882 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4883 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4884 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4885 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4886 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4887 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4888 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4889 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4890 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4891 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4892 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4893 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4894 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Bracket Replacement GENERATOR BRACKET REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the engine cooling fan. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Remove the generator. 5. Remove the engine wiring harness bracket from the generator mounting bracket. 6. Remove the drive belt tensioner. 7. Remove the drive belt idler pulley. 8. Remove the 3 bolts and nut holding the generator mounting bracket to the engine. 9. Remove the generator mounting bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the generator mounting bracket to the cylinder head. 2. Install the 2 generator mounting bracket bolts and the nut. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the generator mounting bracket bolts and nut to 41 N.m (30 lb ft). 3. Install the drive belt idler pulley. 4. Install the drive belt tensioner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement > Page 4897 5. Install the engine wiring harness bracket to the generator mounting bracket. Tighten the engine wiring harness bracket bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Install the generator. 7. Install the drive belt. 8. Install the engine cooling fan. 9. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement > Page 4898 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Replacement GENERATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the heater hose brace bolt from the generator. 4. Remove the generator mounting bolts. 5. Remove the generator from the mounting bracket. 6. Disconnect the generator electrical connector. 7. Remove the generator output (BAT) terminal retaining nut from the generator. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement > Page 4899 1. Connect the generator output (BAT) terminal wire. Ensure the insulating boot is covering the terminal nut. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the generator output (BAT) terminal nut to 17 N.m (12 lb ft). 2. Connect the generator electrical connector. 3. Install the generator to the generator mounting bracket. 4. Install the generator mounting bolts. Tighten the generator mounting bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 5. Install the heater hose bracket bolt to the generator. Tighten the heater hose bracket to the generator bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Install the drive belt. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Clutch Start Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4904 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair Clutch Start Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the plastic retainer tabs from the clutch start switch. 2. Remove the clutch start switch from the push rod. 3. Remove the connector from the switch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the connector to the clutch start switch. 2. Install the clutch start switch to the pushrod with the plastic tabs. 3. Install the push rod to the clutch pedal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Locations Ignition Lock: Locations For additional steering column components locations, Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 4912 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 4913 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 4914 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 4919 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications Starter Motor Usage Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Starter Motor: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4925 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4926 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4927 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4928 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4929 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4930 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4931 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4932 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4933 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4934 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4935 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4936 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4937 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4938 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4939 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4940 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4941 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4942 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4943 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4944 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4945 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4946 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4947 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4948 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4949 Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTER MOTOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove the differential carrier shield mounting bolts, if equipped. 4. Remove the differential carrier shield, if equipped. 5. Remove the starter mounting bolts. 6. Disconnect the wires from the solenoid. 7. Remove the starter from the vehicle.Note the location of the shims, if equipped. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4950 1. Connect the wires to the solenoid. - Tighten the battery positive cable nut to 9 N.m (80 lb in). - Tighten the engine wiring harness to starter nut to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the starter and the inboard starter mounting bolt. Do not tighten. 3. Install the starter shims, if equipped. 4. Install the outboard starter mounting bolt. Tighten the starter mounting bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 5. Install the differential carrier shield, if equipped. 6. Install the differential carrier shield mounting bolts, if equipped. Tighten the differential carrier bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4960 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4961 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4962 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4963 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4964 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4965 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4966 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4967 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4968 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4969 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4970 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4971 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4972 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4973 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4974 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4975 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4976 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4977 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4978 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4979 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4980 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4981 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4982 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4983 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4984 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Accessory Power Outlet - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4985 Accessory Power Outlet - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4986 Accessory Power Outlet - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4987 Accessory Power Output - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4988 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - I/P Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 4995 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 4996 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 4997 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 4998 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 4999 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Underhood location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5000 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5001 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5002 Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5003 Fuse: Locations Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5004 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5005 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5006 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5007 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5008 location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5009 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5010 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5011 Location View Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5012 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5013 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5014 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5015 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - I/P Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5018 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5019 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5020 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5021 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5022 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5023 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5024 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5025 Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5026 Fuse: Application and ID Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5027 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5028 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5029 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5030 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5031 location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5032 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5033 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5034 Location View Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5035 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5036 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5037 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5038 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5043 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5044 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5045 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5046 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5047 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5048 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5049 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5050 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C4 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5051 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C4 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5052 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5053 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5056 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5057 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5058 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair Ground Strap: Service and Repair GROUND STRAP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Additional ground straps are used to connect the body and the frame to the engine and the transmission. Always connect all ground straps in order to ensure a good ground path to the battery for all electrical components. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the ground strap bolt from the engine. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Remove the ground strap bolt from the cowl. 5. Remove the ground strap. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ground strap. 2. Install the ground strap bolt to the cowl. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the ground strap to cowl bolt to 17 N.m (12 lb ft). 3. Raise the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5062 4. Install the ground strap bolt to the engine. Tighten the ground strap bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5067 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5068 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5069 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5070 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5071 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5072 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5081 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5087 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 - C199 C100 (Heated Oxygen Sensor Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5090 C101 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5091 C102 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5092 C104 (Chassis Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5093 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5094 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5095 C108 (Electric Shift Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness, With RPO Code NP1) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5096 C108 (Active Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness,With RPO Code NP8) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5097 C109 (Body Harness To The 4WAL/SIR Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5098 C114 (w/4WD Front Axle Switch Extension Harness To Body Harness) C116 C1 (Active Transfer Case Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5099 C116 C2 (Engine Harness To Active Transfer Case Harness) C117 (Engine Harness To AIR Harness, w/ California Emissions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5100 C119 (4WAL/SIR Harness To AIR Jumper Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5101 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C200 - C299 C200 (IP Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5102 C201 (Steering Column Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Control Harness) C203 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5103 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5104 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5105 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5106 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5107 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5108 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5109 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5110 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 8 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5111 C204 (Column Shifter Plug To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5112 C204 (Floor Shifter Harness To Body Harness) (Utility And Crew Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5113 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5114 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5115 C210 (Body Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Controls Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5116 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5117 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5118 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5119 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5120 C211 (steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5121 C217 (body Harbess To IP Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5122 C219 (Left Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Jumper Harness to the Right Sensor Harness) (W/ K18) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5123 C223 (IP Harness To Auxiliary Power Tray) (Extended Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5124 C224 (Body Harness To Ashtray Insert) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5125 C229 (Body Harness To Dome Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5126 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C300 - C399 C300 (Dome Lamp Harness To Sunroof Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5127 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5128 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5129 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Recliner Harness, LH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5130 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Reclinear Harness, LH) (Utility W/ Power Seats, Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5131 C303 (Power Seat Harness, RH To Power Recliner Harness, RH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5132 C304 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5133 C305 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5134 C306 ( Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5135 C307 (Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5136 C310 (Sunroof Jumper Harness To Sunroof Harness) (ZRX/Extreme With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5137 C315 (Body Harness To Passenger Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) (4-Door Utility With Power Seats) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5138 C317 (Utility Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5139 C317 (Pickup Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5140 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C400 - C499 C401 (Tail Lamp Harness To Chassis Harness) (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5141 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5142 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5143 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5144 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5145 C411 (Body Harness To Endgate Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5146 C412 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5147 C413 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5148 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5149 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5150 C432 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5151 C433 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5152 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 (Heated Oxygen Sensor Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5153 C101 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5154 C102 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5155 C104 (Chassis Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5156 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5157 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5158 C108 (Electric Shift Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness, With RPO Code NP1) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5159 C108 (Active Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness,With RPO Code NP8) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5160 C109 (Body Harness To The 4WAL/SIR Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5161 C114 (w/4WD Front Axle Switch Extension Harness To Body Harness) C116 C1 (Active Transfer Case Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5162 C116 C2 (Engine Harness To Active Transfer Case Harness) C117 (Engine Harness To AIR Harness, w/ California Emissions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5163 C119 (4WAL/SIR Harness To AIR Jumper Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5164 C200 (IP Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5165 C201 (Steering Column Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Control Harness) C203 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5166 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5167 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5168 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5169 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5170 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5171 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5172 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5173 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 8 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5174 C204 (Column Shifter Plug To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5175 C204 (Floor Shifter Harness To Body Harness) (Utility And Crew Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5176 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5177 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5178 C210 (Body Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Controls Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5179 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5180 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5181 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5182 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5183 C211 (steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5184 C217 (body Harbess To IP Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5185 C219 (Left Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Jumper Harness to the Right Sensor Harness) (W/ K18) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5186 C223 (IP Harness To Auxiliary Power Tray) (Extended Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5187 C224 (Body Harness To Ashtray Insert) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5188 C229 (Body Harness To Dome Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5189 C300 (Dome Lamp Harness To Sunroof Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5190 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5191 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5192 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Recliner Harness, LH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5193 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Reclinear Harness, LH) (Utility W/ Power Seats, Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5194 C303 (Power Seat Harness, RH To Power Recliner Harness, RH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5195 C304 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5196 C305 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5197 C306 ( Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5198 C307 (Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5199 C310 (Sunroof Jumper Harness To Sunroof Harness) (ZRX/Extreme With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5200 C315 (Body Harness To Passenger Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) (4-Door Utility With Power Seats) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5201 C317 (Utility Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5202 C317 (Pickup Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5203 C401 (Tail Lamp Harness To Chassis Harness) (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5204 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5205 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5206 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5207 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5208 C411 (Body Harness To Endgate Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5209 C412 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5210 C413 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5211 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5212 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5213 C432 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5214 C433 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5215 C500 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (w/o Power Locks/Windows) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5216 C500 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (w/Power Locks/Windows) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5217 C500 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (w/Power Locks/Windows) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5218 C501 (Body Harness To LH Front Door Harness) (4-Door) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5219 C501 (Body Harness To LH Front Door Harness) (4-Door) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5220 C502 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (2-Door Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5221 C601 (Body Harness To Door Harness, RH Front) (w/o Power Locks/Windows) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5222 C601 (Body Harness To Door Harness, RH Front) (w/ Power Locks/Windows) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5223 C601 (Body Harness To Door Harness, RH Front) (w/ Power Locks/Windows) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5229 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5230 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5231 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5236 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5237 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5238 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5247 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5248 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5249 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5254 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5260 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5261 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5262 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5267 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5268 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5269 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5270 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5271 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5272 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5277 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 5282 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5288 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5289 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5290 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5291 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5292 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5293 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 5298 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5305 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5306 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5307 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5308 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5309 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5310 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5311 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5312 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5313 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5314 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5315 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5316 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5317 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5318 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5319 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5320 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5321 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5322 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5323 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5324 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5325 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5326 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5327 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5328 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5329 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Accessory Power Outlet - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5330 Accessory Power Outlet - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5331 Accessory Power Outlet - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5332 Accessory Power Output - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5333 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - I/P Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5340 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5341 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5342 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5343 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5344 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Underhood location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5345 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5346 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5347 Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5348 Fuse: Locations Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5349 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5350 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5351 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5352 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5353 location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5354 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5355 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5356 Location View Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5357 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5358 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5359 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5360 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - I/P Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5363 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5364 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5365 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5366 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5367 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse Block - Underhood location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5368 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5369 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5370 Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5371 Fuse: Application and ID Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5372 Application Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5373 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5374 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5375 Fuse Block - I/P Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5376 location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5377 Application Table Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5378 Application Table Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5379 Location View Location View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5380 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5381 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5382 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Fuse Block - I/P > Page 5383 Relay Block - Body Wire Entry Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5388 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5389 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5390 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C1 Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5391 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5392 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5393 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C2 Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5394 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5395 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C4 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5396 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C4 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5397 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5398 Fuse Block - Underhood Connector C6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Fuse Block: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5401 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5402 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5403 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair Ground Strap: Service and Repair GROUND STRAP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Additional ground straps are used to connect the body and the frame to the engine and the transmission. Always connect all ground straps in order to ensure a good ground path to the battery for all electrical components. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the ground strap bolt from the engine. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Remove the ground strap bolt from the cowl. 5. Remove the ground strap. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ground strap. 2. Install the ground strap bolt to the cowl. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the ground strap to cowl bolt to 17 N.m (12 lb ft). 3. Raise the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5407 4. Install the ground strap bolt to the engine. Tighten the ground strap bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5412 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5413 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5414 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5415 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5416 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5417 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5426 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5432 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 - C199 C100 (Heated Oxygen Sensor Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5435 C101 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5436 C102 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5437 C104 (Chassis Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5438 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5439 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5440 C108 (Electric Shift Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness, With RPO Code NP1) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5441 C108 (Active Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness,With RPO Code NP8) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5442 C109 (Body Harness To The 4WAL/SIR Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5443 C114 (w/4WD Front Axle Switch Extension Harness To Body Harness) C116 C1 (Active Transfer Case Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5444 C116 C2 (Engine Harness To Active Transfer Case Harness) C117 (Engine Harness To AIR Harness, w/ California Emissions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5445 C119 (4WAL/SIR Harness To AIR Jumper Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5446 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C200 - C299 C200 (IP Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5447 C201 (Steering Column Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Control Harness) C203 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5448 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5449 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5450 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5451 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5452 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5453 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5454 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5455 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 8 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5456 C204 (Column Shifter Plug To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5457 C204 (Floor Shifter Harness To Body Harness) (Utility And Crew Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5458 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5459 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5460 C210 (Body Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Controls Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5461 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5462 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5463 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5464 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5465 C211 (steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5466 C217 (body Harbess To IP Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5467 C219 (Left Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Jumper Harness to the Right Sensor Harness) (W/ K18) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5468 C223 (IP Harness To Auxiliary Power Tray) (Extended Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5469 C224 (Body Harness To Ashtray Insert) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5470 C229 (Body Harness To Dome Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5471 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C300 - C399 C300 (Dome Lamp Harness To Sunroof Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5472 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5473 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5474 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Recliner Harness, LH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5475 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Reclinear Harness, LH) (Utility W/ Power Seats, Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5476 C303 (Power Seat Harness, RH To Power Recliner Harness, RH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5477 C304 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5478 C305 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5479 C306 ( Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5480 C307 (Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5481 C310 (Sunroof Jumper Harness To Sunroof Harness) (ZRX/Extreme With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5482 C315 (Body Harness To Passenger Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) (4-Door Utility With Power Seats) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5483 C317 (Utility Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5484 C317 (Pickup Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5485 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C400 - C499 C401 (Tail Lamp Harness To Chassis Harness) (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5486 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5487 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5488 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5489 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5490 C411 (Body Harness To Endgate Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5491 C412 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5492 C413 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5493 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5494 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5495 C432 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5496 C433 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5497 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C100 (Heated Oxygen Sensor Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5498 C101 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5499 C102 (Body Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5500 C104 (Chassis Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5501 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5502 C106 (Forward Lamp Harness To Body Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5503 C108 (Electric Shift Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness, With RPO Code NP1) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5504 C108 (Active Transfer Case Extension Harness To Body Harness,With RPO Code NP8) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5505 C109 (Body Harness To The 4WAL/SIR Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5506 C114 (w/4WD Front Axle Switch Extension Harness To Body Harness) C116 C1 (Active Transfer Case Harness To Engine Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5507 C116 C2 (Engine Harness To Active Transfer Case Harness) C117 (Engine Harness To AIR Harness, w/ California Emissions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5508 C119 (4WAL/SIR Harness To AIR Jumper Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5509 C200 (IP Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5510 C201 (Steering Column Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Control Harness) C203 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5511 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5512 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5513 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5514 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5515 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5516 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5517 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5518 C203 (Body Harness To IP Harness) Part 8 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5519 C204 (Column Shifter Plug To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5520 C204 (Floor Shifter Harness To Body Harness) (Utility And Crew Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5521 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5522 C209 (Dome Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5523 C210 (Body Harness To Redundant Steering Wheel Controls Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5524 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5525 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5526 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5527 C211 (Steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5528 C211 (steering Column Harness To Body Harness) Part 5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5529 C217 (body Harbess To IP Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5530 C219 (Left Inflatable Restraint Discriminating Sensor Jumper Harness to the Right Sensor Harness) (W/ K18) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5531 C223 (IP Harness To Auxiliary Power Tray) (Extended Cab) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5532 C224 (Body Harness To Ashtray Insert) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5533 C229 (Body Harness To Dome Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5534 C300 (Dome Lamp Harness To Sunroof Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5535 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5536 C301 (Dome Harness To Overhead Console) (w/o GDO) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5537 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Recliner Harness, LH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5538 C302 (Power Seat Harness, LH To Power Reclinear Harness, LH) (Utility W/ Power Seats, Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5539 C303 (Power Seat Harness, RH To Power Recliner Harness, RH) (Utility w/ Power Seats, Non-Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5540 C304 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5541 C305 (Body Harness To LR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5542 C306 ( Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5543 C307 (Body Harness To RR Door Harness) (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5544 C310 (Sunroof Jumper Harness To Sunroof Harness) (ZRX/Extreme With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5545 C315 (Body Harness To Passenger Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) (4-Door Utility With Power Seats) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5546 C317 (Utility Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5547 C317 (Pickup Body Harness To Driver's Seat Assembly Pigtail Connector) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5548 C401 (Tail Lamp Harness To Chassis Harness) (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5549 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5550 C402 (Body Harness To RH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5551 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5552 C403 (Body Harness To LH Tail Lamp Harness) (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5553 C411 (Body Harness To Endgate Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5554 C412 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5555 C413 (Endgate Harness To Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5556 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5557 C430 (Chassis Harness To License Lamp Harness) (Utility Domestic) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5558 C432 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5559 C433 (Body Harness To Defogger Grid Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5560 C500 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (w/o Power Locks/Windows) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5561 C500 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (w/Power Locks/Windows) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5562 C500 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (w/Power Locks/Windows) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5563 C501 (Body Harness To LH Front Door Harness) (4-Door) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5564 C501 (Body Harness To LH Front Door Harness) (4-Door) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5565 C502 (Body Harness To LF Door Harness) (2-Door Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5566 C601 (Body Harness To Door Harness, RH Front) (w/o Power Locks/Windows) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5567 C601 (Body Harness To Door Harness, RH Front) (w/ Power Locks/Windows) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C100 - C199 > Page 5568 C601 (Body Harness To Door Harness, RH Front) (w/ Power Locks/Windows) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5574 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5575 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5576 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement Relay Box: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left insulator/closeout panel. 2. Remove the screw (1) securing the junction block (2) to the instrument panel. 3. Peel the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness back to give more play in the individual wires going to the junction block. 4. Remove each wire and terminal from the old junction block. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install each wire and terminal in the new junction block. 2. Rewrap the wrapping (3) on the wiring harness. 3. Install the junction block (2) to the instrument panel with the screw (1). 4. Install the left insulator/closeout panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5581 Relay Box: Service and Repair Underhood Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement UNDERHOOD ELECTRICAL CENTER OR JUNCTION BLOCK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery positive cable cover. 3. Remove the battery positive cable bolt. 4. Remove the battery positive cable from the underhood electrical center. 5. Remove the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. 6. Loosen the bolts that secure the electrical connectors to the bottom of the underhood electrical center. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5582 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the underhood electrical center . 8. Remove the underhood electrical center from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the underhood electrical center. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the electrical connector to the underhood electrical center bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 2. Install the bolts that attach the underhood electrical center to the underhood electrical center support bracket. Tighten the underhood fuse block to the underhood electrical center support bracket bolts to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Attach the battery positive cable with bolt to the underhood electrical center. Tighten the battery positive cable to the underhood electrical center bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement > Page 5583 4. Replace the battery positive cable cover. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5592 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5593 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5594 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5599 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5605 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5606 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 5607 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5612 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5613 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5614 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5615 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5616 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5617 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 5622 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 5627 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5633 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5634 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5635 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5636 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5637 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 5638 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 5643 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5649 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5650 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5651 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5652 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5653 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5654 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 5655 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 5658 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Trim Height Specifications > Page 5659 Fastener Tightening Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (?). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 5662 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (?). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 5663 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description Toe Description Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 5664 Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 5665 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (?). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear. Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (?). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Toe Description Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 5666 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Lead/Pull Description Lead/Pull Description At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 5667 Lead/pull is usually caused by these factors: ^ Tire construction ^ Wheel alignment ^ Unbalanced steering gear The way in which a tire is built may produce lead/pull. The rear tires will not cause lead. Memory Steer Description Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment Alignment: Service and Repair Measuring Wheel Alignment Measuring Wheel Alignment Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the these inspections inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: ^ Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. ^ Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. ^ Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. ^ Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. ^ Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. ^ Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. ^ Inspect the vehicle trim height. ^ Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. ^ Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Perform these steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. 4. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 5670 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (RWD) Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (RWD) Important: Before you adjust caster and camber angles, raise and release the front bumper. Do this twice in order to allow the vehicle to return to a normal height. 1. Adjust the caster and the camber by inserting shims between the upper control arm shaft and the frame bracket. Add shims or subtract shims or transfer shims in order to change the readings. 2. In order to adjust the caster and the camber, loosen the upper control arm shaft-to-frame nuts (1). Add shims or remove shims (2) as required. Tighten the nuts. Check the toe after you change the caster and the camber. 3. Caster - Transfer the shims from front to rear or from rear to front. The transfer of one shim from the rear bolt to the front bolt decreases positive caster. 4. Camber - Change the shims at the front and the rear of the cross shaft. Add an equal number of shims at the front and the rear of the cross shaft. This decreases positive camber. 5. A normal shim pack will leave at least two threads of the bolt exposed beyond the nut (1). The difference between the front shim pack and the rear shim pack must not exceed 10 mm (0.40 inch). If you cannot meet these requirements, check for damage to the control arms and to related parts. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut on the thinner shim pack first. This improves the shaft-to-frame clamping force. This also improves torque retention. ^ Tighten the nuts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 5671 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (4WD) Front Caster and Camber Adjustment (4WD) 1. Important: Before adjusting the caster angle and camber angle, raise and release the front bumper. Do this twice in order to allow the vehicle to return to a normal height. Use the cams on the upper control arm frame attaching bolts to adjust the caster and the camber. To adjust the caster and the camber, loosen the upper control arm-to-frame attaching nuts. Rotate the cam by rotating the bolt head. ^ Caster - To increase positive caster, move the front cam lobe inboard and move the rear cam lobe outboard. ^ Camber - To increase positive camber, move the front and the rear cam lobes inboard. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts after you select the proper cam position. ^ Tighten the nuts to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Measuring Wheel Alignment > Page 5672 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment Tie rod adjuster parts often rust in service. Discard the nuts and the bolts if the torque required to remove the nut from the bolt exceeds 9 Nm (80 lb inch) after breakaway. Apply penetrating oil between the clamp and the tube. Rotate the clamps until the clamps move freely. Install new bolts and nuts with the correct part number if needed. Change the length of the tie rods in order to increase or decrease toe-in. Use the threaded sleeve to change the length of the tie rods. When the tie rods are mounted ahead of the steering knuckle, the rods must be decreased in length to increase toe or increased in length to decrease toe. Perform these steps to make front toe adjustments: 1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead position. 2. Perform the toe adjustments separately at each side. 3. Determine the toe (3) from the alignment equipment. 4. Loosen the tie rod adjuster clamp bolts at each end to the tie rod adjuster sleeve. 5. Adjust the toe by turning the tie rod adjuster in order to achieve the proper toe specification. 6. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Position the tie rod adjuster clamps. ^ Tighten the tie rod adjuster clamp bolts to 21 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 7. Verify the number of threads showing on the tie rod ends at each side of the adjuster sleeve are equal within three threads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 5689 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Link: Service and Repair Relay Rod Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 6627-A Tie Rod Puller - J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the steering linkage shield. 3. Remove the differential carrier shield mounting bolts. 4. Remove the differential carrier shield. Important: Use the proper tool in order to separate all ball joints. 5. Remove inner tie rods ball stud nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5694 6. Remove the inner tie rods ball studs from the relay rod using J6627-A. 7. Remove the steering shock absorber ball stud nut at the relay rod. 8. Disconnect the steering shock absorber from the relay rod using J24319-B. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5695 9. Remove the pitman arm ball stud nut at the relay rod. 10. Disconnect the pitman arm ball stud from the relay rod using J24319-B. 11. Remove the idler arm ball stud nut at the relay rod. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5696 12. Disconnect the idler arm ball stud from the relay rod using J24319-B. 13. Remove the relay rod. 14. Inspect the following components: ^ The threads on the tie rod for damage ^ The threads on the tie rod end for damage ^ The ball stud threads for damage ^ The ball stud seals for excessive wear 15. Clean the threads on the ball stud and ball stud nut. Installation Procedure 1. Install the idler arm ball stud to the relay rod. Ensure that the seal is on the stud. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the new nut to the idler arm ball stud at the relay rod. ^ Tighten the idler arm ball stud nut to 82 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5697 3. Install the relay rod ball stud to the pitman arm. Ensure that the seal is on the stud. 4. Install the new nut to the pitman arm ball stud at the relay rod. ^ Tighten the pitman arm ball stud nut to 83 Nm (61 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the steering shock absorber to the relay rod. 6. Install the steering shock absorber ball stud nut at the relay rod. ^ Tighten the steering shock absorber ball stud nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the inner tie rod ball studs to the relay rod. Ensure the seal is on the stud. 8. Install the new nuts to the inner tie rod ball studs at the relay rod. ^ Tighten the inner tie rod ball stud nuts to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5698 9. Install the differential carrier shield. 10. Install the differential carrier shield mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the differential carrier shield mounting bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the steering linkage shield. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Adjust the front toe. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Steering Knuckle Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller - J 43631 Ball Joint Separator Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the wheel hub and bearing. 4. Remove the cotter pin from the outer tie rod retaining nut. 5. Remove the outer tie rod retaining nut. 6. Remove the outer tie rod end from the steering knuckle using J24319-B. 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket mounting bolts and nuts from the upper control arm. 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket from the upper control arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5702 9. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint retaining nut. 10. Remove the upper ball joint retaining nut. 11. Using a pry bar, placed under the upper control arm and on top of the frame, pry upward. 12. With the aid of a helper, carefully hammer on the steering knuckle in the area of the upper ball joint stud in order to release the stud from the steering knuckle. 13. Remove the upper ball joint from the steering knuckle. 14. Remove the cotter pin from the lower joint retaining nut. 15. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut. 16. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle using J43631. 17. Remove the steering knuckle from the vehicle. 18. Remove the steering knuckle seal. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5703 1. Install the steering knuckle seal. 2. Install the steering knuckle to the upper and lower ball joints ball studs. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the lower ball joint to the steering knuckle retaining nut. ^ Tighten the lower ball joint to steering knuckle retaining nut to 108 Nm (79 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the lower ball joint retaining nut in order to align the cotter pin. Do not tighten the lower ball joint retaining nut more than 1/6 turn. 4. Install a new cotter pin to the lower ball joint retaining nut. Bend the pin ends against the nut. 5. Install the upper ball joint to the steering knuckle retaining nut. ^ Tighten the upper ball joint retaining nut to 83 Nm (61 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the upper ball joint retaining nut in order to align the cotter pin. Do not tighten the upper ball joint retaining nut more than 1/6 turn. 6. Install a new cotter pin to the upper ball joint stud. Bend the pin ends against the nut. 7. Install the wheel speed sensor and the brake hose bracket to the upper control arm. 8. Install the wheel speed sensor and the brake hose bracket to the upper control arm mounting bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5704 ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor and brake hose bracket to the upper control arm nuts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the tie rod end ball stud to the steering knuckle. 10. Install the outer tie rod ball retaining nut. ^ Tighten the outer tie rod ball retaining nut to 53 Nm (39 ft. lbs.). 11. Install a new cotter pin to the outer tie rod retaining nut. Bend the pin ends against the nut flats. 12. Install the wheel hub and bearing. 13. Check the front wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Idler Arm > Component Information > Specifications Idler Arm: Specifications Steering Linkage (Non-Rack & Pinion) Idler Arm Mounting Bolts and Nuts ................................................................................................................................................... 108 Nm (79 ft. lbs.) Idler Arm to Relay Rod Nut (RWD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) Idler Arm to Relay Rod Nut (4WD) ..................................................................................................................................................... 82 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Idler Arm > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5708 Idler Arm: Service and Repair Idler Arm Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove steering linkage shield. 3. Remove differential carrier shield mounting bolts. 4. Remove differential carrier shield. 5. Remove the idler arm mounting bolts and nuts from the frame. Important: Use the proper tool in order to separate all ball joints. 6. Remove the idler arm ball stud nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Idler Arm > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5709 7. Disconnect the relay rod from the idler arm using J 24319-B. 8. Remove the idler arm. 9. Inspect the ball stud threads for damage. 10. Inspect the ball stud seal for cuts or other damage. 11. Clean the threaded ball stud. 12. Clean the threads on the ball stud nut. Installation Procedure 1. Position the idler arm on the frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the idler arm mounting bolts and nuts to the frame. ^ Tighten the idler arm mounting bolt and nuts to 108 Nm (79 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the relay rod to the idler arm ball stud. Ensure that the seal is on the stud. 4. Install the new nut to the idler arm ball stud. ^ Tighten the idler arm ball stud nut to 82 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Idler Arm > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5710 5. Install differential carrier shield. 6. Install differential carrier shield mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the differential carrier shield mounting bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 7. Install steering linkage shield. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Adjust the front toe. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Pitman Arm Shaft Seal Service Kit Pitman Arm: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pitman Arm Shaft Seal Service Kit INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-02-33-001A Date: October 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Pitman Arm Shaft Seal Service Kit Models: 2004-2005 Buick Rainier 2000-2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2000-2005 Chevrolet Blazer, S-10 2000-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2000-2005 GMC Jimmy, Sonoma 2000-2011 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2000-2004 Oldsmobile Bravada 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 with Recirculating Ball Steering Gears Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and models involved. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-33-001 (Section 02 - Steering). Note Do not replace the entire steering gear for a pitman seal leak. Technicians have been replacing entire steering gears due to not being able to service just the leaking pitman shaft seal. The seal is serviced as a kit and is not called out separately in the catalog illustration. The seal package is cataloged in Group 06.855 as Seal Kit - GM Part Number 26002516 - Steering Gear Pitman Shaft, which includes the seal, washer, retaining ring and dust seal or G/M P/N 19256667, which includes the seal and retainer. Refer to Steering Gear Pitman Shaft Seal in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5715 Pitman Arm: Specifications Power Steering System Pitman Arm Ball Stud to Relay Rod Nut .............................................................................................................................................. 83 Nm (61 ft. lbs.) Pitman Arm to Power Steering Gear Nut .......................................................................................................................................... 250 Nm (184 ft. lbs.) Steering Linkage (Non-Rack & Pinion) Pitman Arm to Relay Rod Nut (RWD) ................................................................................................................................................. 48 Nm (36 ft. lbs.) Pitman Arm to Relay Rod Nut (4WD) .................................................................................................................................................. 83 Nm (61 ft. lbs.) Pitman Arm to Steering Gear Nut ..................................................................................................................................................... 250 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service Pitman Arm: Service and Repair On Vehicle Service Pitman Arm Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 29107-A Pitman Arm Puller - J 6632-01 Pitman Arm Puller Removal Procedure 1. Remove the power steering gear. 2. Install power steering gear into vise. 3. Remove the pitman arm nut and washer from the pitman arm shaft. Notice: Do not hammer on the pitman arm, pitman arm shaft or puller. Damage to the pitman arm or steering gear may result. 4. Disconnect the pitman arm from the pitman shaft using J6632-01 or J29107-A. 5. Inspect the following items: ^ The ball stud threads for damage ^ The ball stud seals for excessive wear 6. Clean the threads on the ball stud. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 5718 1. Install the pitman arm to the pitman arm shaft. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the pitman arm washer and nut to the pitman arm shaft. ^ Tighten the pitman arm nut to 250 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove power steering gear from the vise. 4. Install the power steering gear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 5719 Pitman Arm: Service and Repair Off Vehicle Service Pitman Shaft Seals and Bearing Replacement - Off Vehicle (700 Gear) ^ Tools Required J 6278 Pitman Shaft Bearing Remover and Installer - J 4245 Internal Snap Ring Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the pitman shaft and the side cover. Refer to Steering Gear Pitman Shaft and Housing Cover Replacement - Off Vehicle (700 Gear). 2. Remove the pitman arm (3) from the steering gear (1). 3. Remove the pitman shaft boot (2). 4. Remove the dust seal (1). 5. Remove the retaining ring using the J 4245. Important: Use care not to score the steering gear housing bore when prying out the seals and the washers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 5720 6. Use a screwdriver to pry the backup washer (3) and the double lip seal (2) from the steering gear housing (1). 7. Inspect the steering gear housing (1) for burrs. 8. Insert J 6278 through the hole in the top of the steering gear housing (1). 9. Drive out the needle bearing (2). Assembly Procedure 1. Install the needle bearing (2) to the steering gear housing (1) using the J6278. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 5721 2. Coat the double lip seal (2) and the washer (3) with grease. 3. Install the double lip seal (2). 4. Install the backup washer (3). 5. Install the retaining ring using the J 4245. Important: Do not install the lock washer and nut until complete installation of the pitman arm and its components have been installed. Do not adjust the pitman shaft until all components have been installed on the steering gear housing. 6. Install the pitman shaft and the side cover. Refer to Steering Gear Pitman Shaft and Housing Cover Replacement - Off Vehicle (700 Gear). 7. Install the dust seal (1). 8. Install the pitman shaft boot (2). 9. Install the pitman arm (3) to the steering gear (1). 10. Install the lock washer (4). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 5722 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 11. Install the nut (5). ^ Tighten the pitman arm nut to 250 Nm (184 ft. lbs.). 12. Refer to Pitman Shaft Over-Center Preload Adjustment - Off Vehicle (700 Gear) to adjust the pitman shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding the Power Steering System ^ Tools Required J 35555 Metal Mityvac - J 43485 Power Steering Bleeder Adapter Important: Hoses touching the frame, body, or engine may cause system noise. 1. Verify that the hoses do not touch any other part of the vehicle. Important: Loose connections may not leak, but could allow air into the steering system. 2. Verify that all hose connections are tight. Notice: If the power steering system has been serviced, an accurate fluid level reading cannot be obtained unless air is bled from the steering system. The air in the fluid may cause pump cavitation noise and may cause pump damage over a period of time. Important: Maintain the fluid level throughout the bleed procedure. 3. Remove the pump reservoir cap. Important: Use clean, new power steering fluid only. 4. Fill the pump reservoir with fluid to the FULL COLD level. 5. Attach the J 43485 to the J 35555 or equivalent. 6. Place the J 43485 on or in the pump reservoir filler neck. 7. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg) maximum. 8. Wait 5 minutes. Typical vacuum drop is 7 - 10 kPa (2 - 3 in Hg). If the vacuum does not remain steady, refer to Excessive Vacuum Drop Diagnosis at the end of this procedure. 9. Remove the J 43435 and the J 35555. 10. Reinstall the pump reservoir cap. 11. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5727 12. Turn off the engine. 13. Verify the fluid level. Repeat steps 11-13 until the fluid stabilizes. Important: Do not turn steering wheel to lock. 14. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle. 15. Turn the steering wheel 180 - 360 degrees in both directions 5 times. 16. Switch the ignition off. Notice: When adding fluid or making a complete fluid change, always use the proper power steering fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid will cause hose and seal damage and fluid leaks. 17. Verify the fluid level. 18. Remove the pump reservoir cap. 19. Attach the J 43485 to the J 35555 or equivalent. 20. Place the J 43485 on or in the pump reservoir filler neck. 21. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg) maximum. 22. Wait 5 minutes. 23. Remove the J 43485 and the J 35555 24. Verify the fluid level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5728 25. Reinstall the pump reservoir cap. Excessive Vacuum Drop Diagnosis 1. If the vacuum continues to drop, remove the pressure and return hose from the pump. 2. Install the plugs (1,2) supplied with the J 43485 into the pressure and return port. 3. Attach the J 43485 to the J 35555 or equivalent. 4. Place the J 43485 on or in the pump reservoir filler neck. 5. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg) maximum. 6. If the vacuum drops again, repair or replace the pump. If the vacuum holds steady, continue to check the other parts of the steering system. Important: Fluid must be free from bubbles and foam. Be aware of periodic bubbles that indicate a loose connection or leaking O-ring seal in the return hose or the pressure hose. Fluid must be free from discoloration. 7. Observe the fluid. 8. If condition persists, replace the following parts: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5729 ^ The return hose clamps ^ The return hose O-rings ^ The pressure hose O-rings ^ The gear cylinder line O-rings ^ The reservoir to pump O-ring 9. Repeat the bleed procedure from the beginning. 10. Drive the vehicle approximately 16 km (10 mi) in order to warm the system to operating temperature. Evaluate vehicle on a smooth flat surface. 11. Verify the following conditions: ^ There is smooth power assist. ^ The vehicle operates quietly. ^ The pump maintains the proper fluid level. ^ There is not any leaking in the steering system. ^ The fluid is free of foam or discoloration. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Information not provided by the manufacturer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5734 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Cooler Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the power steering cooler hoses from the power steering cooler. 4. Remove the Grille. 5. Remove the radiator air intake baffle retaining clips from LH side. 6. Position the radiator air intake baffle out of the way. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5738 7. Remove the hood latch support mounting bolts. 8. Move the hood latch support forward. 9. Remove the power steering cooler retaining bolts. 10. Remove the power steering cooler from the radiator support. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5739 1. Install the power steering cooler to the radiator core support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the power steering cooler retaining bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.). 3. Reposition the hood latch support to the radiator core support. 4. Install the hood latch support mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5740 5. Reposition the radiator air intake baffle to the radiator core support. 6. Install the radiator air intake baffle retaining clips to the LH side. 7. Install the grille. 8. Connect the power steering cooler hoses to the power steering cooler. ^ Tighten the power steering hoses clamps to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 9. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 10. Install the air cleaner assembly. 11. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Power Steering Reservoir Replacement - Off Vehicle (CB Series) Disassembly Procedure 1. Place the hydraulic pump (1) on a fixed, flat surface, with the shaft facing upward. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the retaining clip tab (3). 3. Using the screwdriver, force the retaining clip tab (3) outward. 4. Slide the reservoir clip (4) away from the hydraulic pump assembly (1). 5. Repeat the above steps to remove the second reservoir clip (4). 6. Remove the reservoir (2) from the hydraulic pump housing (1). 7. Remove the O-ring seal from the neck of the reservoir (2) or inside the hydraulic pump housing (1). Discard the O-ring seal. Assembly Procedure 1. Lubricate the new O-ring seal with power steering fluid. 2. Install the new O-ring seal onto the neck of the reservoir (2). 3. Install the reservoir (2) onto the hydraulic pump assembly (1). Ensure the reservoir neck is completely engaged onto the hydraulic pump assembly (1). 4. Align the feet of the reservoir with the sides of the hydraulic pump housing. 5. Install the new reservoir retaining clips (4) (supplied with the pump). Ensure the retaining clip tabs (3) fully engage with the hydraulic pump housing (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Pressure Hose Power Steering Pressure Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the steering linkage shield, if equipped. 3. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the pressure hose from the power steering pump. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. Disconnect the power steering gear pressure hose from the power steering gear. 8. Remove the power steering gear pressure hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 5748 1. Install the power steering gear pressure hose to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the power steering pressure hose to the power steering gear. ^ Tighten the power steering pressure hose to the power steering gear to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Connect the power steering pressure hose to the power steering pump. ^ Tighten the power steering pressure hose to the power steering pump to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 7. Install the steering linkage shield, if equipped. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 5749 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Return Hose Power Steering Return Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the power steering gear return hose from the power steering pump (for vehicles without a power steering cooler). 4. Disconnect the power steering gear return hose from the power steering cooler, if equipped. 5. Disconnect the wiring harness clip from the power steering return hose at the power steering gear. 6. Disconnect the power steering gear return hose from the power steering gear. 7. Remove the power steering gear return hose from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 5750 Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. 1. Install the power steering gear return hose to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the power steering return hose to the power steering gear. ^ Tighten the power steering return hose to the power steering gear to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the wiring harness clip to the power steering return hose at the power steering gear. 4. Connect the power steering gear return hose to the power steering cooler, if equipped. ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 5. Connect the power steering gear return hose to the power steering pump (for vehicles without a power steering cooler). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 5751 ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 6. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 5752 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Power Steering Hose Disconnected. 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Install a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose from the power steering pump. 4. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose from the power steering cooler. 5. Remove the power steering cooler hose from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Installing Hoses Without Twists or Bends. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Hose > Page 5753 1. Install the power steering cooler hose to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Connect the power steering cooler hose to the power steering cooler. ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 3. Connect the power steering cooler hose to the power steering pump. ^ Tighten the power steering hose clamp to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.). 4. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 5. Install the air cleaner assembly. 6. Bleed the power steering system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Power Steering Pump Replacement Tips Power Steering Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Pump Replacement Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-02-32-013B Date: August 07, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips/Recommendations When Power Steering Pump Replacement is Necessary Models: 1997-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update the information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-02-32-013A (Section 02 - Steering). A recently completed analysis of returned power steering (PS) pumps that had been replaced for noise, no power assist, no or low pressure and leaking conditions has indicated a high number of "No Trouble Found" results. Corporate Bulletin Number 01-02-32-004 indicates that when attempting to repair a power steering concern, the steering system analyzer should be utilized to assist the technician in a successful diagnosis. Note- Saturn ASTRA does not utilize the Power Steering System Analyzer. In addition, extensive warranty analysis has shown that the following situations are all significant root causes of PS pump failures: - Improper pulley installation - Re-using the O-rings - Using fluid other than the OE-specified steering fluid - Failure to flush the PS system In order to help improve customer satisfaction and reduce comebacks, GM recommends the following tips for replacing a PS pump: 1. Low or no pressure from the PS pump may be the results of dirty or contaminated fluid, which could cause the pressure relief valve to stop functioning. Using the proper tools, flush and bleed the PS system. Any residual contaminants will result in pump failure. 2. When removing the pulley, use the proper special tools. Because the pulley alignment is critical, distorting the pulley may damage bearings on the new PS pump. Note Some new PS pumps may not include a new O-ring. Please refer to the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. 3. Be sure to use only the new O-rings included with the PS pump. The new reservoir O-ring must be lubricated with OE-specific PS fluid prior to installation. Also make sure that the control valve O-ring is in its exact groove position and is NOT covering the pressure bypass hole. 4. Bleed the PS system according to the procedures/recommendations in SI. Following these procedures and using the correct tools and fluids should help ensure that the new PS pump operates properly. Skipping steps may cost you time and trouble later. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pressure Control Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Pressure Control Valve: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Flow Control Valve Replacement - Off Vehicle (CB Series) Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the connector and fitting assembly (4). 2. Remove the O-ring seal (3). 3. Remove the control valve assembly (3) and the flow control spring (2) from the pump housing assembly (1). Assembly Procedure 1. Install the flow control spring (2) to the pump housing assembly (1). 2. Install the control valve assembly (3) to the flow control spring (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pressure Control Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5761 3. Lubricate the O-ring seal (3) with power steering fluid. 4. Install the O-ring seal (3). Notice: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems. 5. Install the connector and fitting assembly (3) to the pump housing (1). Tighten Tighten the connector and fitting assembly (3) to 75 Nm (55 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump Bracket Bolts and Nut ........................................................................................................................................ 41 Nm (301 ft. lbs.) Power Steering Pump Control Valve Fitting ............................................................................................................................................ 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.) Power Steering Pump Front Mounting Bolts ............................................................................................................................................ 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Power Steering Pump Mounting Studs ..................................................................................................................................................... 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) Power Steering Pump Rear Mounting Bracket Nuts ................................................................................................................................ 41 Nm (31 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5766 Power Steering Pump Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5767 Power Steering Pump: Diagrams Power Steering Pump Disassembled View (CB Series) S/T Truck PCB Series Power Steering Pump Reservoir (1) Hydraulic Pump Reservoir (2) Reservoir Capstick Assembly (3) O-Ring Seal (4) Flow Control Spring (5) Control Valve Assembly (6) O-Ring Seal (7) Connector and Fitting Assembly (8) Hydraulic Pump Housing Assembly (9) Reservoir Retaining Clip (RH) (10) Reservoir Retaining Clip (LH) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pulley Power Steering Pulley Replacement ^ Tools Required J25034-C Power Steering Pump Pulley Remover - J 25033-C Power Steering Pump Pulley Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fan clutch. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the power steering pump pulley using J 25034-C. Installation Procedure 1. Place the power steering pump pulley on the end of the power steering pump shaft. 2. Install the power steering pump pulley using J 25033-C. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5770 3. Ensure that the power steering pump pulley (1) is flush against the power steering pump shaft (2), with an allowable variance of 0.25 mm (0.010 inch). 4. Install the drive belt. 5. Install the fan clutch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5771 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Replacement Power Steering Pump Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Place a drain pan under the vehicle. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the power steering pump pulley. 4. Disconnect the power steering pressure hose from the power steering gear. 5. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose from the power steering pump. 6. Disconnect the air reactor tube from the lower reactor tube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5772 7. Remove the air reactor pipe lower retaining nut. 8. Disconnect the air reactor pipe from the check valve and remove reactor pipe. 9. Remove the power steering pump filler neck tube mounting bolt. 10. Remove the power steering pump filler neck tube. 11. Remove the power steering rear mounting-bracket nut from the engine stud. 12. Remove the power steering pump front mounting bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5773 13. Loosen the accessory mounting bracket bolts and nuts and pull accessory mounting bracket forward. 14. Remove the power steering pump and power steering pressure hose from the vehicle. Important: Note the position of the power steering pressure hose to the power steering pump to ensure proper installation to the vehicle. 15. Remove the power steering pressure hose from the power steering pump. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the power steering pressure hose to the power steering pump. ^ Tighten the hose to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the power steering pump and power steering pressure hose to the vehicle. 3. Reposition the power steering pump bracket and tighten the power steering pump bracket mounting bolts and nut. ^ Tighten the power accessory mounting bracket mounting bolts and nut to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5774 4. Install the power steering pump front mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the power steering pump rear mounting bracket nut to the engine stud. ^ Tighten the nut to 41 Nm (31 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the filler neck tube. 7. Install the filler neck tube mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5775 8. Connect the lower secondary air injection reactor pipe to the check valve. 9. Install the lower secondary air injection reactor pipe bracket to the power steering pump bracket stud. 10. Install the power steering pump mounting bracket retaining nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 41 Nm (31 ft. lbs.). 11. Connect the lower secondary air injection reactor pipe lower connection. 12. Connect the power steering cooler hose to the power steering pump. 13. Connect the power steering pressure hose to the power steering gear. 14. Install the power steering pump pulley. 15. Install the air cleaner assembly. 16. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. 17. Fill the power steering system. 18. Bleed the system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pulley > Page 5776 19. Inspect the hoses for clearance away from the frame and other components. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5782 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5783 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5784 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5785 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5786 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5787 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5788 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5789 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 5790 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Damper: Service and Repair Steering Damper Replacement ^ Tools Required J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the steering linkage shield. 3. Remove the differential carrier shield mounting bolts. 4. Remove the differential carrier shield. Important: Use the proper tool in order to separate all ball joints. 5. Remove the cotter pin from the steering shock absorber ball stud nut. 6. Remove the steering shock absorber ball stud nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5794 7. Remove the steering shock absorber from the relay rod using J24319-B. 8. Remove the steering shock absorber mounting bolt at the front crossmember bracket nut. 9. Remove the steering shock absorber mounting bolt from the front crossmember bracket. 10. Remove the steering shock absorber. 11. Inspect the ball stud threads for damage. 12. Inspect the ball stud seals for excessive wear. 13. Clean the threads in the ball stud and the ball stud nut. Installation Procedure 1. install the steering shock absorber mounting bolt to the front crossmember bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5795 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the steering shock absorber mounting bolt to the front crossmember bracket nut. ^ Tighten the steering shock absorber mounting bolt to the front crossmember bracket nut to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the new cotter pin to the steering shock absorber mounting bolt to the frame bracket nut. Bend out the ends of the cotter pin. 4. Install the steering shock absorber ball stud to the relay rod. Ensure that the seal is on the stud. 5. Install the steering shock absorber ball stud nut. ^ Tighten the steering shock absorber ball stud nut to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the new cotter pin to the steering shock absorber ball stud nut. Bend out the ends of the cotter pin. 7. Install the differential carrier shield. 8. Install the differential carrier shield mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the differential carrier shield mounting bolts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the steering linkage shield. 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Pitman Arm Shaft Seal Service Kit Steering Gear Seal: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pitman Arm Shaft Seal Service Kit INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-02-33-001A Date: October 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Pitman Arm Shaft Seal Service Kit Models: 2004-2005 Buick Rainier 2000-2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2000-2005 Chevrolet Blazer, S-10 2000-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2000-2005 GMC Jimmy, Sonoma 2000-2011 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2000-2004 Oldsmobile Bravada 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 with Recirculating Ball Steering Gears Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and models involved. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-33-001 (Section 02 - Steering). Note Do not replace the entire steering gear for a pitman seal leak. Technicians have been replacing entire steering gears due to not being able to service just the leaking pitman shaft seal. The seal is serviced as a kit and is not called out separately in the catalog illustration. The seal package is cataloged in Group 06.855 as Seal Kit - GM Part Number 26002516 - Steering Gear Pitman Shaft, which includes the seal, washer, retaining ring and dust seal or G/M P/N 19256667, which includes the seal and retainer. Refer to Steering Gear Pitman Shaft Seal in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5801 Steering Gear Seal: Service and Repair Pitman Shaft Seal Replacement - On Vehicle (4WD) ^ Tools Required J4245 Internal Snap Ring Pliers - J 6219 Pitman Shaft Oil Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the pitman arm. 2. Remove the snap ring (1) using J 4245. 3. Remove the following components from the power steering gear (1): ^ The dust seal (5) ^ The return ring (4) ^ The washer (3) ^ The pitman shaft oil seal (2) 4. Inspect the pitman shaft seal surfaces for roughness or pitting. Replace the pitman shaft if the shaft is pitted. 5. Clean the pitman shaft and seal areas using a wire brush. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5802 1. Lubricate the new seals with grease. 2. Apply a single layer of tape to the pitman arm shaft in order to avoid damaging the seals. 3. Install the pitman shaft oil seal (2) and washer (3) to power steering gear. 4. Use J 6219 in order to seat the pitman shaft oil seal and the washer into the power steering gear. The seal should be in far enough to install the return, dust seal, and snap ring. 5. Install the return ring and dust seal to the power steering gear. 6. Use J 6219 in order to seat the return ring and dust seal into the power steering gear. 7. Install the snap ring (1) to the pitman arm shaft using J 4245. 8. Install the pitman arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5807 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5808 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5809 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5810 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5811 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5812 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5813 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5814 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5815 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5816 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5817 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5818 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5819 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5820 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5821 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5822 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5823 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5824 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5825 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5826 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5827 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5828 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5829 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 5830 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5831 Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the inflator module. 3. Remove the screws (1) which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. 4. Remove the two screws (1) which retain the control button assembly (2) to the steering wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5832 5. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the control button assembly (1). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector (2) to the control button assembly (1). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the control button assembly (2) to the steering wheel with the two screws (1). ^ Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (13 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5833 3. Install the horn contact plate to the steering wheel with the screws (1). ^ Tighten the screws to 5.5 Nm (50 inch lbs.). 4. Install the inflator module. 5. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Intermediate Steering Shaft Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Intermediate Steering Shaft Seal Replacement - Intermediate Steering Shaft Removal Procedure 1. Remove the steering column. 2. Remove the intermediate shaft seal from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the intermediate shaft seal to the vehicle. 2. Install the steering column. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Intermediate Steering Shaft > Page 5838 Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement - Upper Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement - Upper Removal Procedure 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the keynote the relationship of the upper intermediate shaft to the lower intermediate shaft and the upper intermediate shaft to the steering column in order to ensure proper installation. 3. Remove the steering column. 4. Remove the nut and the bolt that retain the upper intermediate shaft to the steering column. 5. Remove the upper intermediate shaft from the steering column. Installation Procedure 1. Install the upper intermediate shaft to the steering column. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the nut and the bolt that retain the upper intermediate shaft to the steering column. ^ Tighten the nut to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the steering column. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Intermediate Steering Shaft > Page 5839 Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement - Lower Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement - Lower ^ Tools Required J 42640 Steering Column Anti-Rotation Pin Removal Procedure Notice: The front wheels of the vehicle must be maintained in the straight ahead position and the steering column must be in the LOCK position before disconnecting the steering column or intermediate shaft. Failure to follow these procedures will cause improper alignment of some components during installation and result in damage to the Restraints coil assembly. 1. Lock the steering column through the access hole in the lower steering column trim cover using J 42640. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Note the relationship of the lower intermediate shaft to the upper intermediate shaft and the lower intermediate shaft to the steering gear input shaft in order to ensure proper installation. 3. Remove the intermediate shaft shield from the lower intermediate shaft. 4. Remove the lower intermediate shaft coupling to steering gear input shaft retaining bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Intermediate Steering Shaft > Page 5840 5. Remove the lower intermediate shaft from the vehicle. 1. Slide the lower intermediate shaft rearward in order to remove the lower intermediate shaft coupling from the steering gear input shaft. 2. Slide the lower intermediate shaft forward in order to remove the lower intermediate shaft from the upper intermediate shaft. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower intermediate shaft. 1. Slide the lower intermediate shaft rearward in order to install the lower intermediate shaft to the upper intermediate shaft. 2. Slide the lower intermediate shaft forward in order to install the lower intermediate shaft coupling to the steering gear input shaft. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the lower intermediate shaft coupling to steering gear input shaft retaining bolt. ^ Tighten the lower intermediate shaft coupling to steering gear input shaft retaining bolt to 35 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the shield to the lower intermediate shaft. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Unlock the steering column by removing J 42640 from the steering column lower trim cover access hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation Steering Wheel: Description and Operation Steering Wheel and Column Description and Operation The steering wheel and column has 4 primary functions: ^ Vehicle steering ^ Vehicle security ^ Driver convenience ^ Driver safety Vehicle Steering The steering wheel is the first link between the driver and the vehicle. The steering wheel is fastened to a steering shaft within the column. At the lower end of the column, the intermediate shaft connects the column to the steering gear. Vehicle Security-Some Vehicle Models Theft deterrent components are mounted and designed into the steering column. These components allow the column to be locked in order to minimize theft: ^ The ignition switch ^ The steering column lock ^ The ignition cylinder Driver Convenience The steering wheel and column may also have driver controls attached for convenience and comfort. These controls may be mounted on or near the steering wheel or column. ^ The turn signal switch ^ The hazard switch ^ The headlamp dimmer switch ^ The wiper/washer switch ^ The horn pad/cruise control switch ^ The redundant radio entertainment system controls ^ The tilt or tilt/telescoping functions ^ The navigation/OnStar features ^ The HVAC controls Driver Safety The energy-absorbing steering column compresses in the event of a front-end collision, which reduces the chance of injury to the driver. The mounting capsules break away from the mounting bracket in the event of an accident. Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator If the vehicle is equipped with a floor mounted console gear shifter, it has a ignition lock cylinder control actuator system in the steering column as an added safety feature. The ignition lock cylinder control actuators purpose is to prevent the steering wheel from being locked when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle may still be moving. The column ignition lock system consists of a ignition lock cylinder control actuator, and a park position switch that is located in the A/T shift lock control switch. The ignition lock cylinder control actuator contains a pin that is spring loaded out to mechanically prevent the ignition key cylinder from being turned to the lock position when vehicle transmission is not in the Park position. If vehicle power is lost, and/or the transmission is not in the Park position the operator will not be able to turn the ignition key to the lock position and will not be able to remove the ignition key from the column. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5844 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Replacement ^ Tools Required J 1859-A Steering Wheel Puller Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the inflator module. 3. Remove the horn plunger from the steering column by pressing inward to the stop and rotating the horn plunger 90 degrees. 4. On vehicles with redundant steering wheel controls, disconnect the steering wheel electrical connector. 5. Remove the nut that retains the steering wheel to the steering shaft. 6. Mark the steering wheel to the steering shaft. This will ensure proper alignment during installation. 7. Notice: When removing the steering wheel, use only the specified steering wheel puller. Do not hammer on the end of the steering column shaft. Hammering could loosen the plastic injections which maintain the steering column rigidity. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5845 Install J 1859-A to the steering wheel. 8. Remove the steering wheel using J 1859-A. 9. Remove the J 1859-A from the steering wheel. Installation Procedure 1. Important: Ensure that the turn signal on the multifunction switch is in the neutral position when installing the steering wheel. Align the mark on the steering wheel and the steering shaft. 2. Install the steering wheel to the steering shaft. 3. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the steering wheel retaining nut to the steering shaft. ^ Tighten the nut to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 4. On vehicles with redundant steering wheel controls, connect the steering wheel electrical connector. 5. Install the horn plunger to the steering column. 6. Install the inflator module. 7. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Specifications Tie Rod: Specifications Steering Linkage (Non-Rack & Pinion) Inner Tie Rod to Relay Rod Nut ........................................................................................................................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) Outer Tie Rod to Steering Knuckle Nut ............................................................................................................................................... 53 Nm (39 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5849 Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 6627-A Tie Rod Puller - J24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the cotter pin from outer tie rod ball stud nut. 3. Remove the outer tie rod ball stud nut. 4. Remove the inner tie rod ball stud nut. Notice: Do not attempt to disconnect a steering linkage joint by driving a wedge between the joint and the attached part. Seal damage may result which will cause premature failure of the joint. Important: Use the proper tool in order to separate all tie rods and ball joints. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5850 5. Remove the outer tie rod ball stud from the steering knuckle using J24319-B. 6. Remove the inner tie rod ball stud from the relay rod using J6627-A. 7. Perform the following steps in order to remove the tie rod ends from the adjuster tube: 7.1. Loosen the clamp bolts. 7.2. Unscrew the assemblies. 8. Inspect for the following possible conditions: ^ The tie rod ends for damage ^ The tie rod end seals for excessive wear ^ The tie rod threads for damage ^ The tie rod end for damage ^ The ball stud threads for damage ^ The adjuster tube for bending ^ The adjuster tube for damaged threads 9. Clean the following components: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5851 ^ The ball stud threads ^ The ball stud nut ^ The tapered surfaces Installation Procedure Important: ^ If the tie rod ends were removed, lubricate the tie rod ends with chassis lubricant. ^ Ensure that the number of threads on both the inner and the outer tie rod ends are equal within three threads. 1. Connect the tie rod ends to the adjuster tube. 2. Install the inner tie rod ball stud to the relay rod. Ensure that the seal is on the stud. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the new nut to the inner tie rod ball stud. ^ Tighten the inner tie rod ball stud nut to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the outer tie rod ball stud to the steering knuckle. Ensure that the seal is on the stud. 5. Install the nut to the outer tie rod ball stud. ^ Tighten the outer tie rod ball stud nut to 53 Nm (39 ft. lbs.). Important: Do not back the nut off in order to align the cotter pin hole. Advance the nut in order to align the nut slot with the cotter pin hole. 6. Install the new cotter pin to outer tie rod nut. 7. Spread the cotter pin ends. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Adjust the front toe. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5852 10. Position the two clamps (2) between the locating dimples (1) at either end of the adjuster tube. 11. The clamps must be positioned within the correct angular travel, as shown. 12. Ensure that the clamp slot (2) is not aligned with the adjuster tube slot (1). 13. Maintain the position of each tie rod end as the clamps are tightened in order to ensure free movement of each joint. 14. When clamps are tightened to specifications, the ends may touch. 15. Install the adjuster tube clamp bolts. ^ Tighten the adjuster tube clamp bolts to 21 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Wear Limits Important: If a seal is cut or torn, replace ball joint. Horizontal Looseness ........................................................................................................................................................ 2.00 MM (0.080 Inch) Maximum RWD Vehicles Scrape a scale, a screwdriver, or a fingernail across cover. If round housing is flush with or inside of cover surface, replace lower ball joint. 4WD Vehicles If dial indicator reading is more than 3.18 MM (0.125 Inch), replace lower ball joint. Disconnect upper ball joint from steering knuckle. If you find any looseness or can twist stud with your fingers, replace upper ball joint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5857 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection ^ Tools Required J 8001 Dial Indicator 1. Important: The vehicle must rest on a level surface. ^ The vehicle must be stable. Do not rock the vehicle on the floor stands. ^ The upper control arm bumper must not contact the frame. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Support the lower control arm with a floor stand or jack, as far outboard as possible, under the stabilizer bar bracket. 3. Important: If a seal is cut or torn, replace the ball joint. Clean and inspect the ball joints seals for cuts or tears. If the ball joint seals are damaged, replace the ball joint. 4. Check the wheel bearing for looseness. If looseness in the wheel bearing is present, refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis 5. Check the ball joints for horizontal looseness. 1. Position the J 8001 dial indicator against the lowest outboard point on the wheel rim. 2. Rock the wheel in and out while reading the dial indicator. This shows horizontal looseness in both joints. 3. The dial indicator reading should be no more than 2.00 mm (0.080 inch). If the reading is too high, check the lower ball joints for vertical looseness. 1. Important: Do not support the lower control arm with a jack stand for a RWD vehicle, this will unload or cause compression on the wear indicator and will cause the wear indicator to give a false reading. For RWD vehicles, check the lower ball joints for wear and for vertical looseness using this procedure: 1. Remove the safety stand from under the lower control arm. 2. Inspect by sight the lower ball joint for wear. The position of the housing into which the grease fitting is threaded indicates wear. This round housing projects 1.27 mm (0.050 inch) beyond the surface of the ball joint cover on a new lower ball joint. Under normal wear, the surface of the ball joint housing retreats inward very slowly. 3. First observe, then scrape a scale, a screwdriver, or a fingernail across the cover. If the round housing is flush with or inside of the cover surface, replace the lower ball joint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5858 2. Notice: Do not pry between the lower arm and the wheel drive shaft boot or in such a manner that the ball joint seal is contacted. Damage to the wheel drive shaft boot will result (4WD). For 4WD vehicles, place a J 8001 dial indicator (1) against the spindle in order to show vertical movement. 3. Pry between the lower control arm (2) and the outer bearing race (1) while reading the dial indicator. This shows vertical looseness in the lower ball joints. The lower ball joint may show some looseness. 4. If the dial indicator reading is more than 3.18 mm (0.125 inch), replace the lower ball joint. 5. If the lower ball joint is within specifications, and there is too much horizontal looseness, check the upper ball joint for wear. 1. Disconnect the upper ball joint from the steering knuckle. 2. If you find any looseness or can twist the stud with your fingers, replace the upper ball joint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint Replacement Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Ball Joint Replacement Upper Ball Joint Replacement (4WD) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Unload the torsion bar. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket mounting bolt and nut from the upper control arm. 5. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket from the upper control arm. 6. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint retaining nut. 7. Remove the upper ball joint retaining nut. 8. Using a pry bar, placed under the upper control arm and on top of the frame, pry upward. 9. With the aid of a helper, carefully hammer on the steering knuckle in the area of the upper ball joint stud in order to release the stud from the steering knuckle. 10. Disconnect the upper ball joint from the steering knuckle. 10.1. Place a block under the upper control arm to keep the control arm and the steering knuckle out of the way. 10.2. Suspend the steering knuckle to prevent straining the brake line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint Replacement > Page 5861 11. Remove the rivets from the upper ball joint. Use a 3.175 mm (1/8 inch) drill to cut a 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) deep hole in the center of each rivet. 12. Drill the rivet heads away using a 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) drill. 13. Remove the rivets using a pin punch. 14. Remove the upper ball joint. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint Replacement > Page 5862 1. Install the upper ball joint to the upper control arm. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the upper ball joint retaining bolts and the nuts. ^ Tighten the upper ball joint retaining nuts to 23 Nm (17ft. lbs.). 3. Re-install the upper ball joint to the steering knuckle. 4. Install the upper ball joint to steering knuckle retaining nut. ^ Tighten the upper ball joint to steering knuckle retaining nut to 83 Nm (61 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the upper ball joint to steering knuckle retaining nut in order to align for the cotter pin. Do not tighten the nut more than 1/6 turn. 5. Install the new cotter pin to the upper ball joint stud. Bend the pin ends against the nut. 6. Connect the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket to the upper control arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint Replacement > Page 5863 7. Install the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket mounting bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor bracket and brake hose bracket mounting nut to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 8. Load the torsion bar. 9. Install the tire and the wheel. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Inspect the front wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint Replacement > Page 5864 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Ball Joint Replacement Lower Ball Joint Replacement (4WD) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Unload the torsion bar. 4. Remove the wheel drive shaft. 5. Drill a pilot hole in the lower ball joint rivets using a 3.175 mm (1/8 inch) drill to cut a 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) deep hole in the center of each rivet. 6. Drill the rivet heads away using a 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) drill. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint Replacement > Page 5865 7. Remove the rivets using a pin punch. 8. Remove the lower ball joint from lower control arm. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lower ball joint to the lower control arm. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the lower ball joint retaining bolts and the nuts. ^ Tighten the lower ball joint retaining nuts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel drive shaft. 4. Load the torsion bar. 5. Install the tire and the wheel. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Inspect the front wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Upper Upper Control Arm Bushings Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 21474-01 Control Arm Bushing Service Set Removal Procedure 1. Remove the upper control arm. 2. Install the upper control arm in a vise. 3. Remove the upper control arm bushings using J 21474-01. Installation Procedure 1. Install the upper control arm bushings using J 21474-01. 2. Remove the upper control arm from the vise. 3. Install the upper control arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 5871 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Lower Lower Control Arm Bushings Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 21474-01 Control Arm Bushing Service Set Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower control arm. 2. Remove the front bushing. Use the J21474-01. 3. Remove the rear bushing. Use the J21474-01 Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 5872 1. Install the front bushing. Use the J21474-01 2. Install the rear bushing. Use the J21474-01. 3. Install the lower control arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement Cross-Member: Service and Repair Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36202 Torsion Bar Loading/Unloading Tool Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the torsion bars in order to avoid chipping or scratching the coating. Damage to the coating will result in premature failure of the torsion bars. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Mark the adjuster bolt. 3. Install J 36202 to the adjustment arm and the crossmember. 4. Increase the tension on the adjustment arm until the load is removed from the adjuster bolt. Important: To aid in assembly, record the number of turns the tool makes when removing the adjuster bolt. 5. Remove the the adjuster bolt and adjuster nut. 6. Remove J 36202 from the adjustment arm, allowing the torsion bar to unload. 7. Remove the adjustment arm by sliding the torsion bar forward until the torsion bar clears the adjustment arm. 8. Remove the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts. 9. Remove the torsion bar support link upper mounting bolts. 10. Remove the torsion bar support from the frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 5877 11. Remove the torsion bars. Note the exact direction of the forward end and the side of the torsion bar that is being removed. 12. Remove the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts. 13. Remove the torsion bar links from the torsion bar support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the torsion bar links to the torsion bar support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts. ^ Tighten the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 5878 3. install the torsion bars in relation to where the bars were removed. 4. Install the torsion bar support to the frame. 5. Install the torsion bar support link upper mounting bolts to the frame. 6. Install the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the adjustment arm to the torsion bar support and slide the torsion bar rearward until the torsion bar fully engages the adjustment arm. 8. Install J 36202 to the adjustment arm and the crossmember. 9. Increase the tension on the adjustment arm in order to load the torsion bar. Important: Tighten the adjuster bolt the same amount of turns that were required to remove the adjuster bolt during removal. 10. Install the adjuster bolt and adjuster nut Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 5879 11. Remove J 36202 from the adjustment arm and crossmember. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Check the wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 5880 Cross-Member: Service and Repair Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2) Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission mount shield bolts, if equipped. 3. Remove the transmission mount shield, if equipped. 4. Install the transmission jack to the transmission and support the transmission. 5. Disconnect the transmission wiring harness from transmission support, if necessary. 6. Remove the transmission mount to the transmission support stud nut or nuts. 7. Remove the catalytic converter hanger bracket from the transmission support, if necessary. 8. Remove the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 5881 9. Remove the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts, ZR2. 10. Remove the transmission support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transmission support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts, ZR2. Tighten the transmission support to the frame nuts to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 3. Install the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts. Tighten the transmission support to the frame nuts to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 4. Install the catalytic converter hanger bracket to transmission support, if necessary. Tighten the catalytic converter hanger bracket to the transmission support mounting bolts to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 5882 5. Install the transmission mount to the transmission support stud nut or nuts. Tighten the transmission mount to the transmission support stud nuts to 57 N.m (42 lb ft). 6. Connect the transmission wiring harness to the transmission support,if necessary. 7. Remove the transmission jack from the transmission. 8. Install the transmission mount shield, if equipped. 9. Install the transmission mount shield bolts, if equipped. * Tighten the transmission mount shield front bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). * Tighten the transmission mount shield rear bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Steering Knuckle Replacement (4WD) ^ Tools Required J 24319-B Steering Linkage and Tie Rod Puller - J 43631 Ball Joint Separator Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the wheel hub and bearing. 4. Remove the cotter pin from the outer tie rod retaining nut. 5. Remove the outer tie rod retaining nut. 6. Remove the outer tie rod end from the steering knuckle using J24319-B. 7. Remove the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket mounting bolts and nuts from the upper control arm. 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wiring harness bracket and brake hose bracket from the upper control arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5886 9. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint retaining nut. 10. Remove the upper ball joint retaining nut. 11. Using a pry bar, placed under the upper control arm and on top of the frame, pry upward. 12. With the aid of a helper, carefully hammer on the steering knuckle in the area of the upper ball joint stud in order to release the stud from the steering knuckle. 13. Remove the upper ball joint from the steering knuckle. 14. Remove the cotter pin from the lower joint retaining nut. 15. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut. 16. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle using J43631. 17. Remove the steering knuckle from the vehicle. 18. Remove the steering knuckle seal. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5887 1. Install the steering knuckle seal. 2. Install the steering knuckle to the upper and lower ball joints ball studs. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the lower ball joint to the steering knuckle retaining nut. ^ Tighten the lower ball joint to steering knuckle retaining nut to 108 Nm (79 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the lower ball joint retaining nut in order to align the cotter pin. Do not tighten the lower ball joint retaining nut more than 1/6 turn. 4. Install a new cotter pin to the lower ball joint retaining nut. Bend the pin ends against the nut. 5. Install the upper ball joint to the steering knuckle retaining nut. ^ Tighten the upper ball joint retaining nut to 83 Nm (61 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the upper ball joint retaining nut in order to align the cotter pin. Do not tighten the upper ball joint retaining nut more than 1/6 turn. 6. Install a new cotter pin to the upper ball joint stud. Bend the pin ends against the nut. 7. Install the wheel speed sensor and the brake hose bracket to the upper control arm. 8. Install the wheel speed sensor and the brake hose bracket to the upper control arm mounting bolts and nuts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5888 ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor and brake hose bracket to the upper control arm nuts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the tie rod end ball stud to the steering knuckle. 10. Install the outer tie rod ball retaining nut. ^ Tighten the outer tie rod ball retaining nut to 53 Nm (39 ft. lbs.). 11. Install a new cotter pin to the outer tie rod retaining nut. Bend the pin ends against the nut flats. 12. Install the wheel hub and bearing. 13. Check the front wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement (4WD) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the steering linkage shield. 3. Remove the stabilizer shaft bracket mounting bolts. 4. Remove the stabilizer shaft bracket. 5. Remove the stabilizer shaft insulator. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stabilizer shaft insulator to the stabilizer shaft. Face the slit in the stabilizer shaft insulator forward. 2. Install the stabilizer shaft bracket over the stabilizer shaft insulator. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the stabilizer shaft bracket mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the stabilizer shaft mounting bracket bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the steering linkage shield. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Suspension Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (4WD) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer shaft link bolt. 3. Remove the stabilizer shaft link insulator, spacer, and upper retainer. 4. Inspect all of the parts for wear or damage. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stabilizer shaft link insulators to the stabilizer shaft link bolt. 2. Install the stabilizer shaft link bolt through the stabilizer shaft. 3. Install the stabilizer shaft link spacer. 4. Install the stabilizer shaft link bolt through the lower control arm with the parts stacked properly. 5. Install the stabilizer shaft link upper retainer. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Tighten the stabilizer shaft link bolt. ^ Tighten the stabilizer shaft link bolt to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5897 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Suspension 4-Door Utility Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (4-Door Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer shaft link upper nut and bolt. 3. Remove the stabilizer shaft link lower nut and bolt. 4. Remove the stabilizer shaft link Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5898 1. Install the stabilizer shah. 2. Install the stabilizer shaft link lower mounting bolt. 3. Install the stabilizer shaft link upper mounting bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the stabilizer shaft link mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the stabilizer shaft link lower mounting nut to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the stabilizer shaft link upper mounting nut to 35 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 2-Door Utility Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (2-Door Utility) Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5899 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the stabilizer shaft link upper mounting bolt and nut. 3. Remove the stabilizer shaft link lower mounting nut. 4. Remove the stabilizer shaft link. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stabilizer shaft link. 2. Install the stabilizer shaft link lower mounting nut. 3. Install the stabilizer shaft link upper mounting bolt and nut. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Tighten the stabilizer shaft link mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the stabilizer shaft link lower mounting nut to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). ^ Tighten the stabilizer shaft link upper mounting nut to 35 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Leaf Spring Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Leaf Spring Bushing: Service and Repair Spring Bushing Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the leaf spring from the vehicle. 2. Remove the bushing from the spring assembly. Press the spring bushing from the spring in an arbor press. 3. Clean the spring eye of any remaining parts of the bushing. 4. Remove any burrs from the spring eye that could cause the new bushing to bind when the bushing is installed. Installation Procedure 1. Apply rubber lubricant to the bushing (1). Apply lubricant to the spring eye (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Leaf Spring Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5904 2. Install the bushing to the spring assembly. Press the bushing into the spring using an arbor press. 3. Install the leaf spring to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Shackle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Shackle Replacement Shackle: Service and Repair Spring Shackle Replacement Spring Shackle Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the fuel tank (2-door utilities only). 3. Remove the EVAP canister (2-door utilities only), if necessary. 4. Remove the spare tire, if necessary. 5. Disconnect rear exhaust hangers and lower exhaust system, if necessary. 6. Support the rear axle. 7. Remove the frame to spring shackle mounting nut and bolt. 8. Remove the leaf spring to spring shackle mounting nut and bolt. 9. Remove the spring shackle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the spring shackle to the vehicle. 2. Install the spring shackle to leaf spring mounting bolt and nut. Do not tighten the nut. 3. Install the frame to the spring shackle mounting bolt and nut. Do not tighten the nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Shackle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Shackle Replacement > Page 5909 4. Raise the axle support so that there is a distance of 164 - 176 mm (6.46 - 6.94 inch) between the axle tube and the metal surface of the bumper bracket (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Tighten the spring shackle mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the spring shackle mounting nuts to 122 Nm (89 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove rear axle support. 7. Raise exhaust system and connect rear exhaust hangers, if necessary. 8. Install the spare tire, if necessary. 9. Install the EVAP canister (2-door utilities only), if necessary. 10. Install the fuel tank (2-door utilities only). 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Shackle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Shackle Replacement > Page 5910 Shackle: Service and Repair Shackle Bushing Replacement Shackle Bushing Replacement ^ Tools Required J 21474-01 Control Arm Bushing Service Kit Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the fuel tank (2-door utilities only). 3. Remove the EVAP canister (2-door utilities only). 4. Remove spare tire on, if necessary. 5. Disconnect rear exhaust hangers and lower exhaust system, if necessary. 6. Support the rear axle. 7. Remove the spring shackle to frame mounting nut and bolt. 8. Loosen the lower spring shackle mounting bolt at the leaf spring. Leave the bolt attached. 9. Lower the axle until there is enough clearance to remove the spring shackle bushing. 10. Use a blunt punch to straighten out the bushing flange that comes through the inner frame. Important: Replace both of the spring shackle bushings while the fuel tank is removed from the vehicle. 11. Remove the spring shackle bushing using J 21474-01. 12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 for other spring shackle bushing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new spring shackle bushing using J 21474-01. 2. Pull the spring shackle bushing into the frame rail until the flanged portion of the spring shackle bushing is flush with the rail. 3. Stake the spring shackle bushing inner flange. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Shackle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Shackle Replacement > Page 5911 4. Raise the axle into position. 5. Install the spring shackle to frame mounting bolt and nut. Do not tighten the nut. 6. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other spring shackle bushing. 7. Raise the axle support so that there is a distance of 164 - 176 mm (6.46 - 6.94 inch) between the axle tube and the metal surface of the bumper bracket (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 8. Tighten the spring shackle mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the rear spring shackle nuts to 122 Nm (89 ft. lbs.). 9. Remove the rear axle support. 10. Raise the exhaust system and connect the rear exhaust hangers, if necessary 11. Install the spare tire, if necessary. 12. Install the EVAP canister (2-door utilities only). 13. Install the fuel tank (2-door utilities only). 14. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 5916 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5917 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Shock Absorber Lower and Upper Nuts (4WD) ....................................................................................................................................... 73 Nm (54 ft. lbs.) Shock Absorber Lower Bolts (RWD) ....................................................................................................................................................... 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Shock Absorber Upper Nut (RWD) ................................................................................................................................................. 12 Nm (106 inch lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Suspension Shock Absorber Replacement Shock Absorber Replacement (4WD) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the shock absorber lower mounting nut and bolt. 4. Remove the shock absorber upper mounting nut and bolt. 5. Remove the shock absorber. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shock absorber to the bracket. 2. Install the upper and lower shock absorber bolts. Fit the bolts in the direction shown. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the upper and lower shock absorber nuts. ^ Tighten the shock absorber mounting nuts and the bolts with the front suspension loaded. ^ Tighten the shock absorber upper and lower mounting nuts to 73 Nm (54 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the tire and wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. Shock Absorber Disposal Shock Absorber Disposal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5920 Caution: Gas charged shock absorbers contain high pressure gas. Do not remove the snap ring from inside the top of the tube. If the snap ring is removed, the contents of the shock absorber will come out with extreme force which may result in personal injury. Caution: To prevent personal injury, wear safety glasses when centerpunching and drilling the shock absorber. Use care not to puncture the shock absorber tube with the centerpunch. 1. Make an indentation 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the bottom (4) of the tube (3) using a centerpunch. 2. Clamp the shock absorber in a vise horizontally with the shock absorber rod (1) completely extended. 3. Drill a hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (4) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 4. Make an indentation in the middle (2) of the tube (3) with a centerpunch. 5. Drill a second hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (2) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Oil will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 6. Remove the shock absorber from the vise. Hold the shock absorber over a drain pan horizontally with the holes down. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (3) to completely drain the oil from the shock absorber. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5921 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Shock Absorber Shock Absorber Replacement Shock Absorber Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Support the rear axle. 3. Disconnect automatic level control air lines from shock absorber, if equipped. 4. Remove the shock absorber upper mounting bolts. 5. Remove the shock absorber lower mounting nut. 6. Remove the shock absorber lower mounting bolt (four door utilities only). 7. Remove the shock absorber from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. install the shock absorber to the vehicle. 2. Install the shock absorber lower mounting bolt (four door utilities only). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the shock absorber upper mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the shock absorber upper mounting bolts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the shock absorber lower mounting nut. ^ Tighten the shock absorber lower mounting nut to 84 Nm (62 ft. lbs.) on 2-door utility models. ^ Tighten the shock absorber lower mounting nut to 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.) on 4-door utility models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5922 5. Connect automatic level control air line to shock absorber, if equipped. 6. Remove the rear axle support. 7. Lower the vehicle. Shock Absorber Disposal Shock Absorber Disposal Caution: Gas charged shock absorbers contain high pressure gas. Do not remove the snap ring from inside the top of the tube. If the snap ring is removed, the contents of the shock absorber will come out with extreme force which may rebuff in personal injury. Caution: To prevent personal injury, wear safety glasses when centerpunching and drilling the shock absorber. Use care not to puncture the shock absorber tube with the centerpunch. 1. Make an indentation 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the bottom (4) of the tube (3) using a centerpunch. 2. Clamp the shock absorber in a vise horizontally with the shock absorber rod (1) completely extended. 3. Drill a hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (4) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Gas or a gas/oil mixture will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 4. Make an indentation in the middle (2) of the tube (3) with a centerpunch. 5. Drill a second hole in the shock absorber at the centerpunch (2) using a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Oil will exhaust when the drill bit penetrates the shock absorber. Use shop towels in order to contain the escaping oil. 6. Remove the shock absorber from the vise. Hold the shock absorber over a drain pan horizontally with the holes down. Move the rod (1) in and out of the tube (3) to completely drain the oil from the shock absorber. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair Torsion Bar: Service and Repair Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36202 Torsion Bar Loading/Unloading Tool Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the torsion bars in order to avoid chipping or scratching the coating. Damage to the coating will result in premature failure of the torsion bars. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Mark the adjuster bolt. 3. Install J 36202 to the adjustment arm and the crossmember. 4. Increase the tension on the adjustment arm until the load is removed from the adjuster bolt. Important: To aid in assembly, record the number of turns the tool makes when removing the adjuster bolt. 5. Remove the the adjuster bolt and adjuster nut. 6. Remove J 36202 from the adjustment arm, allowing the torsion bar to unload. 7. Remove the adjustment arm by sliding the torsion bar forward until the torsion bar clears the adjustment arm. 8. Remove the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts. 9. Remove the torsion bar support link upper mounting bolts. 10. Remove the torsion bar support from the frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5926 11. Remove the torsion bars. Note the exact direction of the forward end and the side of the torsion bar that is being removed. 12. Remove the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts. 13. Remove the torsion bar links from the torsion bar support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the torsion bar links to the torsion bar support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts. ^ Tighten the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5927 3. install the torsion bars in relation to where the bars were removed. 4. Install the torsion bar support to the frame. 5. Install the torsion bar support link upper mounting bolts to the frame. 6. Install the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the adjustment arm to the torsion bar support and slide the torsion bar rearward until the torsion bar fully engages the adjustment arm. 8. Install J 36202 to the adjustment arm and the crossmember. 9. Increase the tension on the adjustment arm in order to load the torsion bar. Important: Tighten the adjuster bolt the same amount of turns that were required to remove the adjuster bolt during removal. 10. Install the adjuster bolt and adjuster nut Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5928 11. Remove J 36202 from the adjustment arm and crossmember. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Check the wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5932 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Hub, Bearing, and Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45859 Axle Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and the wheel. 3. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 4. Remove the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. 5. Remove the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 6. Remove the rotor. 7. On 4WD vehicles, disengage the wheel driveshaft from the hub and bearing using the J 45859 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5933 8. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt from the wheel hub and bearing. 9. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the wheel hub and bearing. 10. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. Important: Lay the wheel hub and bearing on the wheel hub studs on the outboard side. This prevents damage or contamination to the bearing seal. 11. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle. 12. Remove the splash shield from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5934 13. Remove the wheel hub and bearing seal from the wheel hub and bearing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel hub and bearing seal to the wheel hub and bearing. 2. Install the splash shield to the steering knuckle. Align the shield to the steering knuckle. 3. Install the wheel hub and bearing assembly to the steering knuckle. Align the threaded holes. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5935 4. Install the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing. 6. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the rotor. 8. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 9. Install the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 10. Install the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. ^ Tighten the drive axle nut to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the tire and the wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Drive Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................ ................................................ 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions Vehicle Lifting: Service Precautions CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 5944 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair LIFTING AND JACKING THE VEHICLE CAUTION: - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed. - To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. NOTE: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: - Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. - The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. - Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Use only the prescribed lift points when elevating the vehicle. Vehicle Lift Points Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 5945 Vehicle Lifting Points The jack and hoist lift points for the front of the vehicle are located between the front body mounts and the transmission crossmember. The jack and hoist lift points for the rear of the vehicle are located at the front hangers for the rear springs. The front end lift points for the floor jack are at the following locations: Beneath the lower control arms, inboard from the shock absorber mounts - Beneath the center of the front crossmember The rear end lift points for the floor jack are at the following locations: Beneath the axle housing, inboard from the shock absorber mounts - Beneath the axle differential Whenever the vehicle is lifted using a jack or a floor jack, observe the following precautions: Chock the wheels at the end of the vehicle opposite the end being lifted - Use jack stands for support. Place jack stands at the any of the following locations: Beneath the frame Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 5946 - Beneath the front suspension crossmember - Beneath the axle When removing major components from the vehicle while the vehicle is on a hoist, chain the vehicle frame to the hoist pads in order to prevent tip-off. NOTE: When jacking or lifting a vehicle, do not allow the lift pads to contact any of the following parts: The catalytic converter - The brake lines - The brake cables - The fuel lines - The accelerator cables - The transmission shift cables Lift pad contact may damage the parts. Lift pad contact may cause unsatisfactory vehicle performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 5961 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 5975 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Service and Repair Spare Tire: Service and Repair Tire Hoist and Shaft Replacement (4 Door Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire carrier. 2. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 3. Remove hoist assembly mounting nuts. 4. Remove hoist assembly mounting bolts from the frame. 5. Remove hoist assembly mounting bolts from the rear crossmember. 6. Remove hoist assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the hoist assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Spare Tire > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5980 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install hoist assembly mounting bolts to the rear crossmember. ^ Tighten the hoist assembly mounting bolts to the rear crossmember to 11 Nm (100 inch lbs.). 3. Install hoist assembly mounting bolts to the frame. 4. Install hoist assembly mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the hoist assembly mounting nuts to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Install the spare tire to the spare tire carrier. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 5989 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 5990 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 5991 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 5996 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 6001 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 6002 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 6003 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 6009 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 6010 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 6011 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 6016 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 6021 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 6022 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 6027 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 6028 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 6029 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 6034 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 6039 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 6040 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 6041 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 6051 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 6052 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 6053 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 6058 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 6063 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 6064 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6069 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel exhibits excessive runout. ^ The wheel is bent. ^ The wheel is cracked. ^ The wheel is severely rusted. ^ The wheel is severely corroded. Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. ^ The wheel leaks air. Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause: ^ Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel ^ Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components ^ Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius ^ Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance ^ Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: ^ The wheel has elongated bolt holes. ^ The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. You can repair porosity in aluminum wheels. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair 1. Remove the tire and wheel. 2. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 3. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order to locate the leak. 4. Inscribe a mark on the wheel in order to indicate the leak areas. 5. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to Indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 6. Remove the tire from the wheel. Important: Do not damage the exterior surface of the wheel. 7. Use number 80 grit sandpaper to scuff the inside of the rim surface at the leak area. 8. Use general purpose cleaner such as 3M (R) P/N 08984 or equivalent, to clean the leak area. 9. Apply 3 mm (0.12 inch) thick layer of adhesive/sealant, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or equivalent, to the leak area. 10. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. 11. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 12. Install the tire to the wheel. 13. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 14. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order ensure the leak is sealed. 15. Balance the tire and wheel. 16. Install the tire and wheel. 17. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6072 Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Finish Damage Evaluation Procedure Important: ^ If the wheels are chrome-plated, do not re-plate or refinish the wheels. ^ If the wheels are polished aluminum, do not refinish the wheels in the dealer environment. Utilize a refinisher that meets manufacturer guidelines. 1. Inspect the wheels for damage from uncoated wheel balance weights or from automatic car wash facilities. 2. Inspect the wheels for the following conditions: ^ Corrosion ^ Scrapes ^ Gouges 3. Verify the damage is not deeper than what sanding can remove. 4. Inspect the wheels for cracks. If a wheel has cracks, discard the wheel. 5. Inspect the wheels for bent rim flanges. If a rim flange is bent, discard the wheel. Refinishing Procedure Caution: To avoid serious personal injury when applying any two part component paint system, follow the specific precautions provided by the paint manufacturer. Failure to follow these precautions may cause lung irritation and allergic respiratory reaction. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove the balance weights from the wheel. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. 4. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel: ^ Lubricants ^ Wax ^ Dirt Important: ^ Do not re-machine the wheel. ^ Do not use chemicals in order to strip the paint from the wheel. 5. Use plastic media blasting in order to remove the paint from the wheel. 6. If the wheel had a machined aluminum finish, spin the wheel and use sand paper in order to restore the circular machined appearance. Important: The wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface must remain free of paint. 7. Mask the wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface. 8. Follow the paint manufacturer's instructions for painting the wheel. 9. Unmask the wheel. 10. Install a new valve stem. Important: Use new coated balance weights in order to balance the wheel. 11. Install the tire to the wheel. 12. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel mounting surface: ^ Corrosion ^ Overspray ^ Dirt 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6073 Wheels: Service and Repair Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Wheel Nut Torque Adapters Caution: If penetrating oil gets on the vertical surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum it could cause the wheel to work loose as the vehicle is driven, resulting in loss of control and an injury accident Notice: Never use heat to loosen a tight wheel. It can shorten the life of the wheel, studs, or hub and bearing assemblies. Wheel nuts must be tightened in sequence and to the specified torque to avoid bending the wheel or rotor. Important: Penetrating oil effectively removes tight wheels. Apply the oil sparingly to the hub surface, if you use oil. Removing wheels can be difficult, because of foreign material or a tight fit between the wheel center hole and the hub or the rotor. Excessive force, such as hammering on the wheel or the tire, can cause damage. Slightly tapping the tire side wall with a rubber mallet is acceptable. Wheel removal should be performed in the following manner: 1. Tighten all wheel nuts on the affected wheel. Do not torque the wheel nuts. 2. Loosen each wheel nut two turns. 3. Apply quick, hard jabs to the brake pedal in order to loosen the wheel. If this does not loosen the wheel, rock the vehicle from side to side, using the body weight of 1 or more persons. 4. Repeat this procedure if the wheel is still tight. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 3. Remove the wheel nuts. Mark the location of the tire and wheel assembly to the hub assembly. 4. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 5. Clean the wheel nuts, studs, and the wheel and rotor mounting surfaces. Installation Procedure Caution: Before installing the wheels, remove any buildup of corrosion on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or disc mounting surface by scraping and wire brushing. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This can cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, causing loss of control and possibly personal injury. Notice: A torque wrench or J 39544 must be used to ensure that wheel nuts are tightened to specification. Never use lubricants or penetrating fluids on wheel stud, nuts, or mounting surfaces, as this can raise the actual torque on the nut without a corresponding torque reading on the torque wrench. Wheel nuts, studs, and mounting surfaces must be clean and dry. Failure to follow these instructions could result in wheel, nut, and/or stud damage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6074 1. Install the wheel and the tire assembly. Align the locating mark of the tire and wheel to the hub assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts evenly and alternately to avoid excessive runout. ^ Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) using J 39544-KIT 3. Install the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6075 Wheels: Service and Repair Tire Repair Tire Repair Many different materials and techniques are available on the market in order to repair tires. Not all of the materials and techniques work on some types of tires. Tire manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. Obtain the instructions from the manufacturer. If the vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, do not repair the compact spare. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6076 Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair 1. Remove the tire and wheel. 2. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 3. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order to locate the leak. 4. Inscribe a mark on the wheel in order to indicate the leak areas. 5. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to Indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 6. Remove the tire from the wheel. Important: Do not damage the exterior surface of the wheel. 7. Use number 80 grit sandpaper to scuff the inside of the rim surface at the leak area. 8. Use general purpose cleaner such as 3M (R) P/N 08984 or equivalent, to clean the leak area. 9. Apply 3 mm (0.12 inch) thick layer of adhesive/sealant, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or equivalent, to the leak area. 10. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. 11. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 12. Install the tire to the wheel. 13. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 14. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order ensure the leak is sealed. 15. Balance the tire and wheel. 16. Install the tire and wheel. 17. Lower the vehicle. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Finish Damage Evaluation Procedure Important: ^ If the wheels are chrome-plated, do not re-plate or refinish the wheels. ^ If the wheels are polished aluminum, do not refinish the wheels in the dealer environment. Utilize a refinisher that meets manufacturer guidelines. 1. Inspect the wheels for damage from uncoated wheel balance weights or from automatic car wash facilities. 2. Inspect the wheels for the following conditions: ^ Corrosion ^ Scrapes ^ Gouges 3. Verify the damage is not deeper than what sanding can remove. 4. Inspect the wheels for cracks. If a wheel has cracks, discard the wheel. 5. Inspect the wheels for bent rim flanges. If a rim flange is bent, discard the wheel. Refinishing Procedure Caution: To avoid serious personal injury when applying any two part component paint system, follow the specific precautions provided by the paint manufacturer. Failure to follow these precautions may cause lung irritation and allergic respiratory reaction. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove the balance weights from the wheel. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. 4. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel: ^ Lubricants ^ Wax ^ Dirt Important: ^ Do not re-machine the wheel. ^ Do not use chemicals in order to strip the paint from the wheel. 5. Use plastic media blasting in order to remove the paint from the wheel. 6. If the wheel had a machined aluminum finish, spin the wheel and use sand paper in order to restore the circular machined appearance. Important: The wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface must remain free of paint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6077 7. Mask the wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface. 8. Follow the paint manufacturer's instructions for painting the wheel. 9. Unmask the wheel. 10. Install a new valve stem. Important: Use new coated balance weights in order to balance the wheel. 11. Install the tire to the wheel. 12. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel mounting surface: ^ Corrosion ^ Overspray ^ Dirt 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly to the vehicle. Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation ^ Tools Required J 39544-KIT Wheel Nut Torque Adapters Caution: If penetrating oil gets on the vertical surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum it could cause the wheel to work loose as the vehicle is driven, resulting in loss of control and an injury accident Notice: Never use heat to loosen a tight wheel. It can shorten the life of the wheel, studs, or hub and bearing assemblies. Wheel nuts must be tightened in sequence and to the specified torque to avoid bending the wheel or rotor. Important: Penetrating oil effectively removes tight wheels. Apply the oil sparingly to the hub surface, if you use oil. Removing wheels can be difficult, because of foreign material or a tight fit between the wheel center hole and the hub or the rotor. Excessive force, such as hammering on the wheel or the tire, can cause damage. Slightly tapping the tire side wall with a rubber mallet is acceptable. Wheel removal should be performed in the following manner: 1. Tighten all wheel nuts on the affected wheel. Do not torque the wheel nuts. 2. Loosen each wheel nut two turns. 3. Apply quick, hard jabs to the brake pedal in order to loosen the wheel. If this does not loosen the wheel, rock the vehicle from side to side, using the body weight of 1 or more persons. 4. Repeat this procedure if the wheel is still tight. Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 3. Remove the wheel nuts. Mark the location of the tire and wheel assembly to the hub assembly. 4. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 5. Clean the wheel nuts, studs, and the wheel and rotor mounting surfaces. Installation Procedure Caution: Before installing the wheels, remove any buildup of corrosion on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or disc mounting surface by scraping and wire brushing. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6078 loosen. This can cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, causing loss of control and possibly personal injury. Notice: A torque wrench or J 39544 must be used to ensure that wheel nuts are tightened to specification. Never use lubricants or penetrating fluids on wheel stud, nuts, or mounting surfaces, as this can raise the actual torque on the nut without a corresponding torque reading on the torque wrench. Wheel nuts, studs, and mounting surfaces must be clean and dry. Failure to follow these instructions could result in wheel, nut, and/or stud damage. 1. Install the wheel and the tire assembly. Align the locating mark of the tire and wheel to the hub assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts evenly and alternately to avoid excessive runout. ^ Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) using J 39544-KIT 3. Install the wheel hub cap, if equipped. 4. Lower the vehicle. Tire Repair Tire Repair Many different materials and techniques are available on the market in order to repair tires. Not all of the materials and techniques work on some types of tires. Tire manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. Obtain the instructions from the manufacturer. If the vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, do not repair the compact spare. Tire Mounting and Dismounting Tire Mounting and Dismounting Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6079 Notice: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. 1. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp, sometimes called European-type, tire changers are recommended. 2. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. 3. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Notice: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 4. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (Canadian P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. 5. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. 6. inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 7. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Tire Rotation Tire Rotation In order to equalize wear, rotate the tires at the specified intervals. Also, rotate the tire and wheel assembly whenever you notice uneven tire wear. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions, due to design. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that can generate tire noise. This especially makes regular tire rotation necessary. ^ For vehicles with single rear wheels (4 tires), rotate the tires as shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 6080 ^ For vehicles with single rear wheels (5 tires), rotate the tires as shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Steps 1-7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6084 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Hub, Bearing, and Seal Replacement ^ Tools Required J 45859 Axle Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and the wheel. 3. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 4. Remove the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. 5. Remove the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 6. Remove the rotor. 7. On 4WD vehicles, disengage the wheel driveshaft from the hub and bearing using the J 45859 or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6085 8. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt from the wheel hub and bearing. 9. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the wheel hub and bearing. 10. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. Important: Lay the wheel hub and bearing on the wheel hub studs on the outboard side. This prevents damage or contamination to the bearing seal. 11. Remove the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle. 12. Remove the splash shield from the steering knuckle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6086 13. Remove the wheel hub and bearing seal from the wheel hub and bearing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel hub and bearing seal to the wheel hub and bearing. 2. Install the splash shield to the steering knuckle. Align the shield to the steering knuckle. 3. Install the wheel hub and bearing assembly to the steering knuckle. Align the threaded holes. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6087 4. Install the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts. ^ Tighten the wheel hub and bearing to the steering knuckle mounting bolts to 105 Nm (77 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing. 6. Install the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt. ^ Tighten the wheel speed sensor to the wheel hub and bearing mounting bolt to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the rotor. 8. Install punch in rotor vanes to hold from turning, 4WD vehicles only. 9. Install the drive axle washer, 4WD vehicles only. 10. Install the drive axle nut, 4WD vehicles only. ^ Tighten the drive axle nut to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the tire and the wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Drive Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................ ................................................ 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: Customer Interest Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 6100 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Wheel Fastener: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing Bulletin No.: 01-03-10-009A Date: July 27, 2004 TECHNICAL Subject: Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Missing and/or Loose (Replace Missing Covers and Add Sealant to All Covers) Models: 2005 and All Prior Passenger Cars (Except All Cadillac Models and Pontiac GTO) with Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-03-10-009. Condition Some customers may comment that the plastic wheel nut covers are missing and/or loose. Correction Important: ^ DO NOT USE a silicone-based adhesive. ^ Do not apply the *permatex(R) around the threads in a circular pattern. ^ Apply a single bead across the threads approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) in length, 5 mm (0.2 in) in height and 5 mm (0.2 in) in width. Replace any missing plastic wheel nut covers with the appropriate covers and apply Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) to the threads of all the plastic wheel nut covers. Tighten finger tight plus a 1/4 turn with a hand wrench. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any other such items which may be available from other sources. Permatex(R) # 2 Form A Gasket Sealant(R) part numbers (available at your local parts supplier) ^ P/N 80009 (2A/2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80015 (2AR) - 44 ml (1.5 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80010 (2B/2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube boxed ^ P/N 80016 (2BR) - 89 ml (3 oz) tube carded ^ P/N 80011 (2C) - 325 ml (11 oz) tube boxed Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Fastener: > 01-03-10-009A > Jul > 04 > Wheels Plastic Wheel Nut Covers Loose/Missing > Page 6106 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6107 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nuts .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 140 Nm (100 ft. lbs.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6108 Wheel Nut Torque Sequence Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6109 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: ^ The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. ^ The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. ^ M = Metric ^ 12 = Diameter in millimeters ^ 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle with safety stands. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and the wheel. 3. Remove the rotor. Important: Do not hammer on a wheel stud. 4. Remove the wheel stud bolt using J 43631. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel stud to the wheel hub and bearing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install 4 washers and the nut to the wheel stud. ^ Tighten the wheel stud nut to 130 Nm (95 ft. lbs.), drawing in the wheel stud. 3. Remove the nut and the washers. 4. Install the rotor. 5. Install the tire and the wheel. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6112 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement ^ Tools Required J 43631 Ball Joint Separator Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the rotor. 4. Remove the wheel stud from the axle flange using the J43631. Installation Procedure 1. Install the stud into the axle flange. 2. Install the 4 washers and the lug nut to the stud. 3. Tighten the lug nut in order to draw the stud into the flange until the stud fully seats. 4. Remove the lug nut and the washers. 5. Install the rotor. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams Air Temperature Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Temperature Actuator AIR TEMPERATURE ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE The air temperature actuator is located on the top right hand side of the HVAC module. 1. Remove the instrument panel carrier. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the air temperature actuator retaining screws. 4. Remove the air temperature actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the air temperature actuator to the HVAC module. Ensure that the actuator is seated on the locating tab. 2. Install the air temperature actuator retaining screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Connect the electrical connector (2). 4. Install the instrument panel carrier. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 6120 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defroster Actuator DEFROSTER ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE The defroster actuator is located on the bottom left side of the HVAC module. 1. Remove the left side instrument panel sound insulator. 2. Remove the lower IP instrument panel sound insulator. 3. Disconnect the vacuum connector (3) from the defroster actuator (4). 4. Remove the actuator rod retaining clip (1). 5. Remove the actuator rod (2) from the defroster door lever (5). 6. Firmly pull on the defroster actuator in order to remove the actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the defroster actuator. Ensure that the retaining tab locks into place. 2. Install the actuator rod (2) to the defroster door lever (5). 3. Install the actuator rod retaining clip (1). 4. Connect the vacuum connector (3) to the defroster actuator (4). 5. Install the lower IP instrument panel sound insulator. 6. Install the left side instrument panel sound insulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 6121 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Actuator MODE ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE The mode actuator is located on the top left side of the HVAC module. 1. Remove the knee bolster. 2. Remove the right side driver knee bolster bracket (2) from the steering column bracket (1) and the intermediate bracket (3). 3. Disconnect the vacuum connectors (1) from the mode actuator (5). 4. Remove the actuator rod retaining clip (4). 5. Remove the actuator rod (2) from the mode door lever (3). 6. Firmly pull on the mode actuator in order to remove the actuator from the HVAC module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the mode actuator. Ensure that the retaining tabs lock into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 6122 2. Install the actuator rod (2) to the mode door lever (3). 3. Install the actuator rod retaining clip (4). 4. Connect the vacuum connectors (1) to the mode actuator (5). 5. Install the right side driver knee bolster bracket (2) to the steering column bracket (1) and the intermediate bracket (3). - Tighten the knee bolster bracket mounting nuts (5) to 5.5 N.m (49 lb in). - Tighten the intermediate bracket mounting bolts (4) to 10 N.m (88 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Temperature Actuator > Page 6123 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Actuator RECIRCULATION ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Push up on the J-spring in order to release the storage compartment door. 2. Firmly pull rearward to release the recirculation actuator (2) locking tab. 3. Remove the actuator rod from the recirculation door (1) by pushing the actuator up and to the left. IMPORTANT: The air inlet door is behind the air distribution duct. 4. Disconnect the vacuum connector from the recirculation actuator (2). 5. Remove the recirculation actuator (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the recirculation actuator (2). 2. Connect the vacuum connector to the recirculation actuator (2). 3. Install the actuator rod to the recirculation door (1) by placing the hole in the actuator rod over the hook on the recirculation door lever. 4. Align the recirculation actuator with the recirculation door assembly and firmly push forward to engage the recirculation actuator locking tab. 5. Push up on the J-spring in order to return the storage compartment door to the normal position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Auxiliary Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6129 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6130 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6131 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6132 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6133 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6134 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6135 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6136 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6137 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6138 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6139 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6140 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6141 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6142 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6143 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6144 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6145 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6146 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6147 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6148 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6149 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6150 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6151 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Auxiliary Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6152 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Body Wiring To Blower Motor And Resistor (With RPO Code C42) Body Wiring To Blower Motor And Resistor (With RPO Code C60) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6156 Blower Motor Relay Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams Blower Motor Resistor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair This Article has been updated by bulletin #PIT3330, dated December 22, 2004. Condition/Concern: A customer may inquire about the availability of the passenger compartment air filter. Recommendation/Instructions: Starting in 2003 model year, the passenger compartment air filter is no longer available as a factory option. With the redesigned HVAC case, there is no longer a cavity for the filter. The GM parts catalog indicates there is a replacement filter available; however, there is no provision for it. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Pressure Relief Valve Replacement (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the body side stationary window (2-Door only). 2. Remove the molding from the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Remove the pressure relief ventilation valve using a flat-bladed tool in order to release the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure relief ventilation valve assembly pressing into place until firmly seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6166 2. Install the molding to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Install the molding fasteners to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 4. Install the body side stationary window (2-Door only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Pressure Relief Valve Replacement (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the body side stationary window (2-Door only). 2. Remove the molding from the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Remove the pressure relief ventilation valve using a flat-bladed tool in order to release the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure relief ventilation valve assembly pressing into place until firmly seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6170 2. Install the molding to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Install the molding fasteners to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 4. Install the body side stationary window (2-Door only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams A/C Compressor Clutch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams Control Assembly: Diagrams HVAC Control Assembly C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6178 HVAC Control Assembly C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6179 HVAC Control Assembly C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6180 HVAC Control Assembly C4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6181 HVAC Control Assembly C5 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6182 Control Assembly: Service and Repair HVAC CONTROL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 2. Remove the HVAC control assembly retaining screws. 3. Depress the HVAC control assembly retaining tabs and remove the HVAC control assembly from the instrument panel. 4. Disconnect the vacuum harness connector from the HVAC control assembly. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the HVAC control assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors to the HVAC control assembly. 2. Connect the vacuum harness connector to the HVAC control assembly. 3. Install the HVAC control assembly to the instrument panel. Ensure that all 4 retaining tabs lock into place. 4. Install the HVAC control assembly retaining screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Install the instrument panel accessory trim plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 6191 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 6192 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 99-01-39-004C Date: June 12, 2009 Subject: Air Conditioning Odor (Install Evaporator Core Dryer Kit and Apply Cooling Coil Coating) Models: 1993-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 All Equipped with Air Conditioning Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 and 2010 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-01-39-004B (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment about musty odors emitted from the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system at vehicle start-up in hot, humid conditions. Cause This condition may be caused by condensate build-up on the evaporator core, which does not evaporate by itself in high humidity conditions. The odor may be the result of microbial growth on the evaporator core. When the blower motor fan is turned on, the microbial growth may release an unpleasant musty odor into the passenger compartment. There are several other possible sources of a musty odor in a vehicle. A common source is a water leak into the interior of the vehicle or foreign material in the HVAC air distribution system. Follow the procedures in SI for identifying and correcting water leaks and air inlet inspection. The procedure contained in this bulletin is only applicable if the odor source has been determined to be microbial growth on the evaporator core inside the HVAC module. Correction Many vehicles currently incorporate an afterblow function within the HVAC control module software. The afterblow feature, when enabled, employs the HVAC blower fan to dry the evaporator after vehicle shut down and this function will inhibit microbial growth. Technicians are to confirm that the customer concern is evaporator core odor and that the vehicle has the imbedded afterblow feature, as defined in the SI document for that specific vehicle model, model year and specific HVAC option. Refer to SI for enabling the afterblow function. Vehicles being delivered in areas prone to high humidity conditions may benefit from having the afterblow enabled calibration installed prior to any customer comment. Important If the vehicle is not factory equipped with the imbedded afterblow enable feature, it may be added with the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module Kit (P/N 12497910 or AC Delco 15-5876). Important When installing the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module, you MUST use the included electrical splice connectors to ensure a proper splice. Complete detailed installation instructions and self testing procedures are supplied with the kit. If necessary, the Electronic Evaporator Dryer Module may be installed underhood if it is protected from extreme heat and water splash areas. To immediately remove the evaporator core odor on all suspect vehicles, it is necessary to eliminate the microbial growth and prevent its re-occurrence. To accomplish this, perform the following procedure: Vehicle and Applicator Tool Preparation 1. The evaporator core must be dry. This may be accomplished by disabling the compressor and running the blower fan on the recirc heat setting for an extended period of time. Note Compressor engagement will cause the evaporator core to remain wet and will prevent full adherence of the Coiling Coil Coating to the evaporator core surfaces. 2. Verify that the air conditioning drain hose is not clogged and place a drain pan beneath the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 6198 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet below the evaporator core. 4. Remove the cabin air filter, if equipped, and cover the opening prior to applying the Cooling Coil Coating, as the product may clog the filter. If the cabin air filter appears to have little or no remaining life, suggest a replacement to your customer. 5. If the HVAC module has a blower motor cooling tube, be careful NOT TO SPRAY THE COOLING COIL COATING INTO THE BLOWER MOTOR COOLING TUBE. 6. Attach the Flexible Applicator Pressure Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) to a compressed air line operating at 586 kPa (85 psi) to 793 kPa (115 psi). 7. Shake the bottle of Cooling Coil Coating well. Screw the bottle onto the cap on the applicator tool's pick-up tube. Note The pick-up tube is designed for 120 ml (4 oz) and 240 ml (8 oz) bottles and should coil slightly in the bottom of a 120 ml (4 oz) bottle. 8. Use one of the following three methods to apply the Cooling Coil Coating. Important If the Pressure Applicator Spray Tool (J-43810-20A) is not available, the Cooling Coil Coating is also available in an aerosol can (P/N 12377951 (in Canada, 10953503)). Application Through Blower Motor Control Module Opening - Remove the blower motor control module (blower motor resistor). Refer to the applicable procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor resistor) opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor blower motor control module (blower motor control module). Application Through Blower Motor Opening - Remove the blower motor. Refer to the applicable blower motor removal procedure in SI. - Clean any debris or foreign material from inside the HVAC module and on the evaporator core surface. - Apply the Cooling Coil Coating directly to the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. - Use the flexible wand to direct the Cooling Coil Coating over the entire evaporator core and surrounding gasket surfaces. - When the application is complete, install the blower motor. Application Through a Hole in the HVAC Module - If neither of the two previous application methods are available, it may be necessary to drill a hole in the HVAC module. - Locate an area of the HVAC module between the blower motor and the evaporator core. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole in the HVAC module. Use caution to keep the drill clear of the evaporator core and the blower motor fan. - With the air distribution vents closed and the blower motor fan speed on HIGH, insert the applicator tool into the hole and spray the Cooling Coil Coating into the airstream toward the evaporator core. - Use a GM approved RTV sealant to plug the hole in the HVAC module. 9. After the Cooling Coil Coating application is complete, start and run the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes, with the compressor disabled, HVAC mode set to Recirculate/Max, heat set to full warm, blower motor fan speed on high, and one window open approximately 12 mm (1/2 in). This cures the Cooling Coil Coating onto the evaporator core surface. 10. While the engine is running, rinse the applicator tool with warm water to prolong the life of the tool. Be sure to spray warm water through the nozzle to rinse out any residual Cooling Coil Coating still in the capillary pick up tube, otherwise it will dry and clog the applicator tool. Also remove the small green valve from the bottle cap and rinse it thoroughly while rolling it between two fingers and then reinstall it. If this valve is clogged , the Cooling Coil Coating will not flow through the applicator tool. 11. Shut off the engine and enable the compressor again. 12. Verify proper HVAC system operation. 13. Remove the protective cover from inside the vehicle. 14. Remove the drain pan from underneath the vehicle. 15. Reinstall the cabin air filter if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 99-01-39-004C > Jun > 09 > A/C - Musty Odors Emitted From (HVAC) System > Page 6199 Parts Information Important The Cooling Coil Coating listed below is the only GM approved product for use under warranty as an evaporator core disinfectant and for the long term control of evaporator core microbial growth. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 6204 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 6205 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 6210 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Contaminated R134A Refrigerant Bulletin No.: 06-01-39-007 Date: July 25, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Found on Market for Automotive Air-Conditioning Systems Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin should be directed to the Service Manager as well as the Parts Manager. Commercially Available Contaminated R134a Refrigerant Impurities have been found in new commercially available containers of R134a. High levels of contaminates may cause decreased performance, and be detrimental to some air-conditioning components. Accompanying these contaminates has been high levels of moisture. Tip: Excessive moisture may cause system concerns such as orifice tube freeze-up and reduced performance. Industry Reaction: New Industry Purity Standards Due to the potential availability of these lower quality refrigerants, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), and the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Industry (ARI) are in the process of instituting reliable standards that will be carried on the labels of future R134a refrigerant containers. This identifying symbol will be your assurance of a product that conforms to the minimum standard for OEM Automotive Air-Conditioning use. How Can You Protect Yourself Today? It is recommended to use GM or ACDelco(R) sourced refrigerants for all A/C repair work. These refrigerants meet General Motors own internal standards for quality and purity, insuring that your completed repairs are as good as the way it left the factory. Parts Information The part numbers shown are available through GMSPO or ACDelco(R). The nearest ACDelco(R) distributor in your area can be found by calling 1-800-223-3526 (U.S. Only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment > Page 6211 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 1.8 lbs (0.8 kg) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6214 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerant ....................................................................................................................... R134a P/N 12356150 U.S. (10953485 Canada) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - New PAG Oil Refrigerant Oil: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - New PAG Oil Bulletin No.: 02-01-39-004B Date: November 16, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: New PAG Oil Released Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X Built With R-134a Refrigeration System All Air Conditioning Compressor Types (Excluding R4 and A6 Type Compressors) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the PAG oil part number used for R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-01-39-004A (Section 01 - HVAC). All General Motors vehicles built with R-134a refrigerant systems shall now be serviced with GM Universal PAG Oil (excluding vehicles equipped with an R4 or A6 compressor). R4 and A6 compressors with R-134a refrigerant systems shall use PAG OIL, GM P/N 12356151 (A/C Delco part number 15-118) (in Canada, use P/N 10953486). Important: The PAG oil referenced in this bulletin is formulated with specific additive packages that meet General Motors specifications and use of another oil may void the A/C systems warranty. Use this new PAG oil when servicing the A/C system on the vehicles listed above. Oil packaged in an 8 oz tube should be installed using A/C Oil Injector, J 45037. Refer to the HVAC Section of Service Information for detailed information on Oil Balancing and Capacities. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES ACCUMULATOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2.0 oz) NOTE: Add PAG equal to the amount of oil drained from the old accumulator plus the additional specified amount. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 60 ml (2.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount drained. The Delphi Compressor HT6 service compressor is shipped dry. CONDENSER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 30 ml (1.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount drained. EVAPORATOR REPLACEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 90 ml (3.0 oz) NOTE: If more than the specified amount of PAG oil was drained from a component, add the equal amount drained. TOTAL SYSTEM PAG OIL CAPACITY (HT6) ................................................................................................................................. 236 ml (8.0 oz) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6221 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL Polyalkylene glycol (PAG) Oil ................................................................................................................ GM P/N 12378526 (Canadian P/N 88900060) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams A/C High Pressure Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations A/C Accumulator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6229 A/C Low Pressure Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Body Wiring To Blower Motor And Resistor (With RPO Code C42) Body Wiring To Blower Motor And Resistor (With RPO Code C60) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6234 Blower Motor Relay Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams A/C High Pressure Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations A/C Accumulator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Low Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6243 A/C Low Pressure Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Controller, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Controller: Service and Repair VACUUM CONTROL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel carrier. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) from the vacuum control assembly (5). 3. Disconnect the vacuum harness connector from the vacuum control assembly. 4. Remove the vacuum control assembly retaining screws. 5. Remove the vacuum control assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the vacuum control assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the vacuum control assembly retaining screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Connect the vacuum harness connector to the vacuum control assembly. 4. Connect the electrical connector (4) to the vacuum control assembly (5). 5. Install the instrument panel carrier. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Reservoir HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Reservoir HVAC: Service and Repair VACUUM TANK REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the brake pressure modulator valve. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose(s). 3. Using a flat-bladed tool, depress the retaining tabs in order to remove the vacuum tank. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the vacuum tank. Ensure that the retaining tabs lock into place. 2. Install the vacuum hose(s). 3. Install the brake pressure modulator valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Air Bag System REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER A COLLISION ACCIDENT WITH OR WITHOUT INFLATOR MODULE DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT INSPECTIONS CAUTION: Proper operation of the SIR sensing system requires that any repairs to the vehicle structure return the vehicle structure to the original production configuration. Not properly repairing the vehicle structure could cause non-deployment in a collision or deployment for conditions less severe than intended. After any collision, inspect the following components as indicated. If you detect any damage, replace the component. If you detect any damage to the mounting points or mounting hardware, repair or replace the mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. The steering column -Perform the steering column accident damage checking procedures. Refer to Steering Column Accident Damage Inspection in Steering Wheel and Column. - The I/P knee bolsters and mounting points -Inspect the knee bolsters for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - The I/P brackets, braces, etc.- Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - The seat belts - Perform the seat belt operational and functional checks. Refer to Operational and Functional Checks in Seat Belts. - The I/P cross car beam - Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - The I/P mounting points and brackets - Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. - The seats and seat mounting points - Inspect for bending, twisting, buckling, or any other type of damage. ACCIDENT WITH FRONTAL AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT - COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND INSPECTIONS After a collision involving air bag deployment, replace the following components. If you detect any damage to the mounting points or mounting hardware, repair or replace the mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. Inflatable restraint I/P module - Inflatable restraint steering wheel module - Inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil - Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - Inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensors Perform Additional Inspections On The Following Components. Steering wheel module coil and the coil wiring pigtail - Inspect for melting, scorching, or other damage due to excessive heat. - Mounting points or mounting hardware for the I/P module, steering wheel module, SDM, and inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor - Inspect for any damage and repair or replace each component as needed. SENSOR REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES The SIR/side air bag sensor replacement policy requires replacing sensors in the area of accident damage. The area of accident damage is defined as the portion of the vehicle which is crushed, bent, or damaged due to a collision. An example of this would be a moderate collision where the front of the vehicle impacts a tree, if the vehicle has an SIR sensor mounted forward of the radiator, replace the SIR sensor. Replace the sensor whether or not the air bags have deployed. - Replace the sensor even if the sensor appears to be undamaged. Sensor damage which is not visible, such as slight bending of the mounting bracket or cuts in the wire insulation, can cause improper operation of the SIR/side air bag sensing system. Do not try to determine whether the sensor is undamaged. Replace the sensor. Also, if you follow a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) table and a malfunctioning sensor is indicated, replace the sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System > Page 6255 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt System REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER A COLLISION CAUTION: Restraint systems can be damaged in a collision. To help avoid injury and ensure that all parts in need of replacement are replaced: Replace any seat belt system that was in use during the collision serious enough to deploy any automatic restraint device such as air bags and seat belt pretensioners. This not only includes seat belt systems in use by people of adult size, but seat belt systems used to secure child restraints, infant carriers and booster seats, including LATCH system and top tether anchorages. Replace any seat belt system that has torn, worn, or damaged components. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints and LATCH system components, if any. Replace any seat belt system if you observe the words "REPLACE" or "CAUTION", or if a yellow tag is visible. Do not replace a seat belt if only the child seat caution label is visible. Replace any seat belt system if you are doubtful about its condition. This not only includes adult seat belt systems, but built-in child restraints, LATCH system components, and any restraint system used to secure infant carriers, child restraints, and booster seats. Do NOT replace single seat belt system components in vehicles that have been in a collision as described above. Always replace the entire seat belt system with the buckle, guide and retractor assembly, which includes the latch and webbing material. After a minor collision where no automatic restraint device was deployed, seat belt system replacement may not be necessary, unless some of the parts are torn, worn, or damaged. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag System > Page 6256 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Steering Column Steering Column Accident Damage Inspection ^ Vehicles involved in accidents involving these conditions may also have a damaged or misaligned steering column: ^ Frame damage ^ Major body or sheet metal damage ^ Where the steering column has been impacted ^ Where supplemental inflatable restraint systems deployed ^ Inspect the capsules on the steering column bracket assembly. All capsules must be securely seated in the bracket slots and inspected for any loose conditions when pushed or pulled by hand. ^ Observe how the bracket is attached to the jacket assembly. ^ If the capsules are not securely seated and the bracket is bolted to the jacket assembly, replace only the bracket. ^ If the capsules are not securely seated and the bracket is welded to the jacket assembly, replace only the jacket assembly. ^ Inspect for tab (1) breakage on the bearing and adapter assembly. ^ Visually inspect the steering shaft for sheared injected plastic (1). If the steering shaft shows sheared plastic, replace the steering shaft. ^ Any frame damage that could cause a bent steering shaft must have the steering shaft runout checked. Using a dial indicator at the lower end of the steering shaft, rotate the steering wheel. The runout must not exceed 1.60 mm (0.06 inch). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6262 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6263 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6264 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6265 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6266 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6267 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6268 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6269 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6270 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 6274 Inflatable Restraint I/P Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 6275 Air Bag: Description and Operation INFLATOR MODULES The inflator modules contain a housing, inflatable air bag, initiating device, canister of gas generating material and, in some cases, stored compressed gas. The initiator is part of the inflator module deployment loop. When the vehicle is involved in a collision of sufficient force, the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) will cause current to flow through the deployment loops to the initiator. Current passing through the initiator ignites the material in the canister producing a rapid generation of gas and the release of compressed gas, if present. The gas produced from this reaction rapidly inflates the air bag. Once the air bag is inflated it quickly deflates through the air bag vent holes. Each inflator module is equipped with a shorting bar located on the connector of the module. The shorting bar shorts the inflator module deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the air bag when it is disconnected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures Air Bag: Service and Repair Deployment Procedures DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES Inflator modules can be deployed inside or outside of the vehicle. The method used depends upon the final disposition of the vehicle. Review the following procedures in order to determine which will work best in a given situation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6278 Air Bag: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Module Replacement INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position in order to unlock the steering wheel. 3. Turn the steering wheel 90 degrees so the side of the SIR module is at the 12 o'clock position in order to gain access to the access holes behind the steering wheel. 4. Insert a flat-bladed tool into each access hole and push the leaf spring in order to release the notched pin that retains the inflator module. 5. Turn the steering wheel 180 degrees in order to gain access to the remaining access holes. 6. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the remaining access holes and push the leaf spring to release the notched pin that retains the inflator module. 7. Tilt the top of the inflator module rearward in order to gain access to the SIR wiring. 8. Disconnect the SIR lead wire from the clip on the inflator module. 9. Disconnect the SIR lead wire from the clip on the steering wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6279 10. Disconnect the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector. 12. Remove the inflator module from the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 13. Fully deploy the module before disposal. If the module was replaced under warranty, fully deploy and dispose of the module after the required retention period. Refer to Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the SIR electrical connector. 2. Connect the CPA retainer to the SIR connector. 3. Install the SIR lead wire to the clip on the steering wheel. 4. Install the SIR lead wire to the clip on the inflator module. 5. Press the inflator module into the steering wheel firmly enough that the module engages and latches the notched pins in the leaf springs. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the SIR wires do not get pinched during installation of the inflator module. 6. Rotate the steering wheel back into the straight position. 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. 8. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6280 Air Bag: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Module Replacement INFLATABLE RESTRAINT INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the radio. 3. Remove the I/P storage compartment door. 4. Remove the fasteners (4,5) that retain inflatable restraint module to the instrument panel. 5. Remove the inflatable restraint module (2) from the instrument panel (3). 6. Fully deploy the module before disposal. If the module was replaced under warranty, fully deploy and dispose of the module after the required retention period. Refer to Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the inflatable restraint module to the instrument panel. 2. Install the fasteners (1) that retain the inflatable restraint module (2) to the instrument panel (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the retaining nuts (5) and bolts (4) to 8.0 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Install the radio. 4. Install the I/P storage compartment door. 5. Enable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6281 Air Bag: Service and Repair Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping INFLATOR MODULE HANDLING AND SCRAPPING CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. Live (Undeployed) Inflator Modules Use special care when handling or storing live (undeployed) inflator modules. Inflator module deployment produces a rapid generation of gas. This may cause the inflator module, or an object in front of the inflator module, to project through the air in the event of an unlikely deployment. Scrapping Procedures During the course of a vehicle's useful life, certain situations may arise which will require the disposal of a live (undeployed) inflator module. Do not dispose of a live (undeployed) inflator module through normal disposal channels until the inflator module has been deployed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disposing of a live (undeployed) inflator module. Do not deploy an inflator module in the following situations: After replacement of an inflator module under warranty. The inflator module may need to be returned undeployed to the manufacturer. - If the vehicle is the subject of a product liability report (GM-1241) related to the SIR system. When a vehicle is the subject of a product liability report, do not alter the SIR system in any manner. - If the vehicle is involved in a campaign affecting the inflator modules. Follow the instructions in the Campaign Service Bulletin for proper SIR handling procedures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6282 Air Bag: Service and Repair Deployment Procedures DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES Inflator modules can be deployed inside or outside of the vehicle. The method used depends upon the final disposition of the vehicle. Review the following procedures in order to determine which will work best in a given situation. Steering Wheel Module Replacement INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position in order to unlock the steering wheel. 3. Turn the steering wheel 90 degrees so the side of the SIR module is at the 12 o'clock position in order to gain access to the access holes behind the steering wheel. 4. Insert a flat-bladed tool into each access hole and push the leaf spring in order to release the notched pin that retains the inflator module. 5. Turn the steering wheel 180 degrees in order to gain access to the remaining access holes. 6. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the remaining access holes and push the leaf spring to release the notched pin that retains the inflator module. 7. Tilt the top of the inflator module rearward in order to gain access to the SIR wiring. 8. Disconnect the SIR lead wire from the clip on the inflator module. 9. Disconnect the SIR lead wire from the clip on the steering wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6283 10. Disconnect the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector. 12. Remove the inflator module from the vehicle. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 13. Fully deploy the module before disposal. If the module was replaced under warranty, fully deploy and dispose of the module after the required retention period. Refer to Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the SIR electrical connector. 2. Connect the CPA retainer to the SIR connector. 3. Install the SIR lead wire to the clip on the steering wheel. 4. Install the SIR lead wire to the clip on the inflator module. 5. Press the inflator module into the steering wheel firmly enough that the module engages and latches the notched pins in the leaf springs. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the SIR wires do not get pinched during installation of the inflator module. 6. Rotate the steering wheel back into the straight position. 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. 8. Connect the battery negative cable. Instrument Panel Module Replacement INFLATABLE RESTRAINT INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6284 1. Disable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. - Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the radio. 3. Remove the I/P storage compartment door. 4. Remove the fasteners (4,5) that retain inflatable restraint module to the instrument panel. 5. Remove the inflatable restraint module (2) from the instrument panel (3). 6. Fully deploy the module before disposal. If the module was replaced under warranty, fully deploy and dispose of the module after the required retention period. Refer to Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the inflatable restraint module to the instrument panel. 2. Install the fasteners (1) that retain the inflatable restraint module (2) to the instrument panel (3). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the retaining nuts (5) and bolts (4) to 8.0 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Install the radio. 4. Install the I/P storage compartment door. 5. Enable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 Inflator Module Handling and Scrapping INFLATOR MODULE HANDLING AND SCRAPPING CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. Live (Undeployed) Inflator Modules Use special care when handling or storing live (undeployed) inflator modules. Inflator module deployment produces a rapid generation of gas. This may cause the inflator module, or an object in front of the inflator module, to project through the air in the event of an unlikely deployment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6285 Scrapping Procedures During the course of a vehicle's useful life, certain situations may arise which will require the disposal of a live (undeployed) inflator module. Do not dispose of a live (undeployed) inflator module through normal disposal channels until the inflator module has been deployed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disposing of a live (undeployed) inflator module. Do not deploy an inflator module in the following situations: After replacement of an inflator module under warranty. The inflator module may need to be returned undeployed to the manufacturer. - If the vehicle is the subject of a product liability report (GM-1241) related to the SIR system. When a vehicle is the subject of a product liability report, do not alter the SIR system in any manner. - If the vehicle is involved in a campaign affecting the inflator modules. Follow the instructions in the Campaign Service Bulletin for proper SIR handling procedures. Deployment Outside Vehicle (I/P Module and Steering Wheel Module) DEPLOYMENT OUTSIDE VEHICLE (I/P MODULE AND STEERING WHEEL MODULE) Deploy inflator modules outside of the vehicle when the vehicle will be returned to service. Situations that require deployment outside of the vehicle include the following: - Using the SIR diagnostics, you determine that the inflator module is malfunctioning. - The inflator module is cosmetically damaged (scratched or ripped). - The inflator module pigtail (if equipped) is damaged. - The inflator module connector is damaged. - The inflator module connector terminals are damaged. Deployment and disposal of a malfunctioning inflator module is subject to any required retention period. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Disposal Caution in Service Precautions. Tools Required J 38826 SIR Deployment Harness - J 39401-B SIR Deployment Fixture - An appropriate pigtail adaptor 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove the inflator module. 5. Place the inflator module with the vinyl trim cover facing up and away from the surface on a work bench, floor or deployment fixture. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Caution in Service Precautions. 6. Clear an area on the floor approximately 1.85 m (6 ft) in diameter for deployment of the inflator module. If possible, use a paved, outdoor location free of activity. Otherwise, use an area free of activity on the shop floor. Make sure you have sufficient ventilation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6286 7. Make sure no loose or flammable objects are in the area. 8. When deploying a steering wheel module, place the steering wheel module in the center of the cleared area. 9. When deploying an I/P module, refer to the following instructions: - Place the J 39401-B SIR deployment fixture (2) in the center of the cleared area. - Fill the deployment fixture (2) with water or sand. - Mount the I/P module (1) in the deployment fixture (2) with the vinyl/plastic trim facing up. - To mount, use 4 m 6 bolts (6), nuts (8), and washers (7) to properly secure the I/P module (1) to the deployment fixture (2). - Tighten all fasteners prior to deployment. 10. Inspect the J 38826 SIR deployment harness and the appropriate pigtail adapter for damage. Replace as needed. 11. Short the 2 SIR deployment harness (1) leads together using 1 banana plug seated into the other. 12. Connect the appropriate pigtail adapter (2) to the SIR deployment harness (1). 13. Extend the SIR deployment harness and adapter to full length from the deployment fixture. 14. Connect the inflator module (1) to the adapter (2) on the SIR deployment harness (3). 15. Clear the area of people. IMPORTANT: The rapid expansion of gas involved with deploying an inflator module is very loud. Notify all people in the immediate area that an inflator module will be deployed. - When the inflator module deploys, the deployment fixture may jump vertically. This is a normal reaction of the inflator module due to the force of the rapid expansion of gas inside the inflator module. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6287 16. Separate the 2 banana plugs on the SIR deployment harness. 17. Place a 12 V minimum/2 A minimum power source (i.e. vehicle battery) near the shorted end of the SIR deployment harness. 18. Connect the SIR deployment harness wires to the power source. Inflator module deployment will occur when contact is made. 19. Disconnect the SIR deployment harness from the power source. 20. Seat 1 banana plug into the other in order to short the deployment harness leads. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Deployed Inflator Modules Are Hot Caution in Service Precautions. 21. If the inflator module did not deploy, disconnect the adapter and discontinue the procedure. Contact the Technical Assistance Group for further assistance. Otherwise, proceed to the following steps. 22. Put on a pair of shop gloves. 23. Disconnect the pigtail adapter from the inflator module as soon as possible. 24. Dispose of the deployed inflator module through normal refuse channels. 25. Wash hands with a mild soap. Deployment Inside Vehicle (Vehicle Scrapping Procedures) DEPLOYMENT INSIDE VEHICLE (VEHICLE SCRAPPING PROCEDURES) Deploy inflator modules inside of the vehicle when destroying the vehicle or when salvaging the vehicle for parts. This includes but is not limited to the following situations: - The vehicle has completed its useful life. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6288 - Irreparable damage occurs to the vehicle in a non-deployment type accident. - Irreparable damage occurs to the vehicle during a theft. - The vehicle is being salvaged for parts to be used on a vehicle with a different VIN as opposed to rebuilding as the same VIN. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Inflatable Module Deployment Outside Vehicle Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the ignition key. 3. Put on safety glasses. 4. Remove all loose objects from the front seats. 5. Disconnect the inflatable restraint steering wheel module connector (2) located next to the steering column. 6. Cut the steering wheel module harness connector out of the vehicle, leaving at least 16 cm (6 in) of wire at the connector. 7. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the connector wire leads. 8. Cut two 4.6 m (15 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. Use these wires to fabricate the deployment harness. 9. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 10. Twist together 1 end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. Deployment wires shall remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the inflator module. 11. Twist together 1 connector wire lead to one deployment wire. 12. Inspect that the previous connection is secure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6289 13. Bend flat the twisted connection. 14. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 15. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 16. Connect the deployment harness to the steering wheel module connector. 17. Route the deployment harness out of the vehicle's driver side. 18. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. Use these wires to fabricate the deployment harness. 19. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 20. Twist together 1 end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. Deployment wires shall remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the side impact module. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6290 21. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 22. Route the deployment harness out of the vehicle's driver side. 23. Disconnect the inflatable restraint I/P module connector (1) located behind the glove box (3). 24. Cut the I/P module harness connector out of the vehicle, leaving at least 16 cm (6 in) of wire at the connector. 25. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from each of the connector wire leads. 26. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. These wires will be used to fabricate the deployment harness. 27. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 28. Twist together 1 end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. 29. Twist together 1 connector wire lead to 1 deployment wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6291 30. Bend flat the twisted connection. 31. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 32. Twist together, bend, and tape the remaining connector wire lead to the remaining deployment wire. 33. Connect the deployment harness to the I/P module connector. 34. Route the deployment harness out of the vehicle's passenger side. 35. Cut two 6.1 m (20 ft) deployment wires from a 0.8 mm (18 gage) or thicker multi-strand wire. Use these wires to fabricate the deployment harness. 36. Strip 13 mm (0.5 in) of insulation from both ends of the wires cut in the previous step. 37. Twist together 1 end from each of the wires in order to short the wires. Deployment wires shall remain shorted, and not connected to a power source until you are ready to deploy the side air bag module. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6292 38. Bend flat the twisted connection. 39. Secure and insulate the connection using electrical tape. 40. Route the deployment harness out of the vehicle's passenger side. 41. Stretch the driver side harness to full length. 42. Stretch the passenger side harness to full length. 43. Completely cover the windshield and front door window openings with a drop cloth. 44. Place a power source, 12 V minimum/2 A minimum (i.e., a vehicle battery) near the shorted ends of the passenger side deployment harness. 45. Separate the 2 ends of the I/P module deployment harness wires. 46. Connect the I/P module deployment harness wires to the power source in order to deploy the I/P module. 47. Disconnect the I/P module deployment harness wires from the power source. 48. Twist together 1 end of each wire of the I/P module on the passenger side deployment harness in order to short the wires. 49. Move the power source, 12 V minimum/2 A minimum (i.e., a vehicle battery) near the shorted ends of the driver side deployment harness. 50. Separate the 2 ends of the steering wheel module deployment harness wires. 51. Connect the steering wheel module deployment harness wires to the power source in order to deploy the steering wheel module. 52. Disconnect the steering wheel module deployment harness wires from the power source. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Deployment Procedures > Page 6293 53. Twist together 1 end of each wire of the steering wheel module on the driver side deployment harness in order to short the wires. 54. Remove the drop cloth from the vehicle. 55. Disconnect all harnesses from the vehicle. 56. Discard the harnesses. 57. Scrap the vehicle in the same manner as a non-SIR equipped vehicle. 58. If one or all of the inflator modules did not deploy, perform the following steps to remove the undeployed module(s) from the vehicle: - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Replacement - Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module Replacement 59. Contact the Technical Assistance Group for further assistance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6297 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6298 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at various locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM performs calculations using the signals received from the internal and external sensors. The SDM compares the results of the calculations to values stored in memory. When these calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator ON. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON. In the event that ignition 1 voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important to note, when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6299 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the floor console, if equipped. 3. Cut an "X" in the carpet over the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). 4. Fold the carpet back to expose the SDM. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (4) from the SDM harness connector (3). 6. Disconnect the SDM harness connector (3) from the SDM (2). 7. Remove the SDM mounting fasteners (1). 8. Remove the SDM (2) from the vehicle. 9. Repair the fasteners using the following procedure: 1. Remove the stripped nut and discard the nut. 2. Drill out the weld spots to the weld stud from the floor pan side, then remove and discard the stud. 3. Condition the floor panel attaching surface where the new stud is to be installed. 4. Install new weld stud GM P/N 115115602 and clamp the weld stud. 5. Migweld the stud at the drilled holes from above or below the floor pan (as required). 6. Apply body sealer GM P/N 9984248 around any exposed openings. 7. Install a new fastener GM P/N 11515933. IMPORTANT: The following repair procedures should only be used in the event that the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) mounting studs and/or fasteners are damaged to the extent that the SDM may no longer be properly mounted. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other impurities from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM (2) horizontally to the vehicle. 3. Point the arrow on the SDM toward the front of the vehicle. 4. Install the SDM mounting fasteners (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten fasteners to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Install the SDM harness connector (3) to the SDM (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6300 6. Install the CPA (4) to the SDM harness connector (3). 7. Tape the cut carpet to cover the SDM. 8. Install the floor console, if equipped. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. IMPORTANT: The AIR BAG indicator may remain ON after the SDM has been replaced. DTC B1001 may set requiring the SDM part number to be set in multiple modules. If the indicator remains ON after enabling the SIR system, perform the diagnostic system check and follow the steps thoroughly to ensure that the SDM is set properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6304 Inflatable Restraint I/P Module Disable Switch (Pickup Only) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil C1 (Pigtail To The Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6308 Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil C2 (Pigtail To The Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6309 Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil C2 (Pigtail To The SWC Switches) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6310 Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil C4 (Pigtail To The Body Harness) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6311 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE COIL The steering wheel module coil is attached to the steering column and is located under the steering wheel. The steering wheel module coil consists of 2 or more current-carrying coils. The coils allow the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining continuous electrical contact between the driver deployment loop and the steering wheel module. Two coil wires are used for the steering wheel module deployment loop. Additional coil wires are used for accessories attached to the steering wheel depending on the vehicle model. The steering wheel module coil connector is located near the base of the steering column. The connector contains a shorting bar that shorts the steering wheel module coil deployment loop circuitry to prevent unwanted deployment of the air bag when it is disconnected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6312 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT STEERING WHEEL MODULE COIL REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 42640 Steering Column Anti Rotation Pin REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR System. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Verify the following before removing the SIR coil: - The wheels on the vehicle are straight ahead. - That J 42640 is installed or the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. NOTE: The wheels of the vehicle must be straight ahead and the steering column in the LOCK position before disconnecting the steering column or intermediate shaft from the steering gear. Failure to do so will cause the SIR coil assembly to become uncentered, which may cause damage to the coil assembly. 3. Remove the steering wheel from the steering shaft. 4. On vehicles with a tilt column, pull the tilt lever straight out from the steering column. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6313 5. Remove 2 TORX(R) head screws (1) from the lower trim cover (2). 6. Remove the lower trim cover (2). 7. Remove 2 TORX(R) head screws (2) from the upper trim cover (1). 8. Remove the upper trim cover (1). 9. Remove the wire harness straps from the steering wheel column wire harness. 10. Remove the retaining ring (3). 11. Remove the SIR coil (4) from the steering shaft. 12. If replacing, discard the SIR coil. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Verify the following: - The wheels on the vehicle are straight ahead. - That J 42640 is installed or the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. NOTE: The new SIR coil assembly will be centered. Improper alignment of the SIR coil assembly may damage the unit, causing an inflatable restraint malfunction. - The wheels of the vehicle must be straight ahead and the steering column in the LOCK position before disconnecting the steering column or intermediate shaft from the steering gear. Failure to do so will cause the SIR coil assembly to become uncentered, which may cause damage to the coil assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6314 2. If reusing the existing coil it MUST be centered, refer to Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil Centering in Steering Wheel and Column. IMPORTANT: Do not remove the centering tab from the new SIR coil until the installation is complete. If the SIR coil does not come with a centering tab, you must center the SIR coil. 3. Align the SIR coil assembly (1) with the horn tower on the turn signal cancel cam assembly (2). 4. Slide the SIR coil (4) onto the steering shaft assembly (2). 5. Firmly seat the retaining ring (3) into the groove on the steering shaft assembly (2). 6. Remove and discard the centering tab from the new SIR coil (4). 7. Install the upper trim cover (1) and secure by using 2 TORX(R) head screws (2). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6315 8. Install the lower trim cover (2) and secure by using 2 TORX(R) head screws (1). 9. Verify that the tabs on the lower trim cover (1) engage with the tabs on the upper trim cover (2). Snap the tabs together. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 10. On vehicles with a tilt column, align the tilt lever into the steering column. 11. Slide the tilt lever handle into the steering column until the handle locks into position. 12. Install the steering wheel onto the steering shaft. 13. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6319 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6320 Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6321 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END DISCRIMINATING SENSOR The front end discriminating sensor is equipped on some vehicles to supplement SIR system performance. The discriminating sensor is an electro-mechanical sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). The SDM uses the input from the discriminating sensor to assist in determining the severity of a frontal collision further supporting air bag deployment. If the SDM determines a deployment is warranted, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6322 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END DISCRIMINATING SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove off road skid plate, if equipped. 3. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector. 4. Disconnect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector from the sensor. 5. Drill out the mounting rivets. 6. Remove the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The following procedures should be utilized in the event that sensor mounting holes or fasteners are damaged to the extent that the sensor can no longer be properly mounted. 7. Perform the following steps in order to complete the first fastener repair: 1. Remove and discard the improperly installed rivet. 2. Reattach sensor with new rivet. 8. Perform the following steps in order to complete the second fastener repair: 1. Remove the improperly installed rivet. 2. Enlarge the mounting holes (1) in the lower radiator support to 9.0 mm (0.35 in). 3. Insert and properly seat the rivnut. 4. Install sensor with screw. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6323 Tighten fasteners to 8.0 N.m (71 lb in). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other impurities from the mounting surface. 2. Install the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor horizontally to the lower radiator support surface. Ensure that the arrow is pointing toward the front of the vehicle. 3. Install the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor mounting rivets (GM P/N 15715058). 4. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector to the sensor. 5. Install the connector position assurance (CPA) to the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector. 6. Install the off road skid plate, in equipped. 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation AIR BAG INDICATOR The AIR BAG indicator, located in the instrument panel cluster (IPC) is used to notify the driver of SIR system malfunctions and to verify that the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is communicating with the IPC. When the ignition is turned ON, the SDM is supplied with ignition 1 voltage and the IPC flashes the AIR BAG indicator 7 times. While flashing the indicator, the SDM conducts test on all SIR system components and circuits. If no malfunctions are detected the SDM will communicate with the IPC through the class 2 serial data circuit and request the IPC to turn the AIR BAG indicator OFF. The SDM provides continuous monitoring of the air bag circuits by conducting a sequence of checks. If a malfunction is detected the SDM will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and request the IPC to turn the AIR BAG indicator ON. The presence of a SIR system malfunction could result in non-deployment of the air bags. The AIR BAG indicator will remain ON until the malfunction has been repaired. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Description and Operation Knee Diverter: Description and Operation DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE BOLSTERS The knee bolsters are designed to help restrain the lower torsos of front seat occupants by absorbing energy through the front seat occupants' upper legs. In a frontal collision the front seat occupants legs may come in contact with the knee bolsters. The knee bolsters are designed to crush or deform absorbing some of the impact, which helps to reduce bodily injuries. The driver and passenger knee bolsters are located in the lower part of the instrument panel and must be inspected for damage after a collision. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Knee Bolster Knee Diverter: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Knee Bolster TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - KNEE BOLSTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Set the park brake. 2. Block the wheels. 3. Remove the left side instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 4. Remove the lower I/P sound insulator. 5. Remove the park brake release cable from the park brake lever. 6. Remove the screw that retains the courtesy lamp to the knee bolster. 7. Remove the screws that retain the knee bolster trim panel to the I/P. 8. Remove the knee bolster trim panel from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knee bolster trim panel to the vehicle. 2. Install the screws that retain the knee bolster trim panel to the I/P. - Tighten the TORX(r) screws to 9 N.m (80 lb in). - Tighten the hex head screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the screw that retains the courtesy lamp to the knee bolster. 4. Install the park brake release cable to the park brake lever. 5. Install the lower I/P sound insulator. 6. Install the left side I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Knee Bolster > Page 6340 Knee Diverter: Service and Repair Knee Bolster Replacement KNEE BOLSTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 2. Remove the left sound insulator. 3. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 4. Remove the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 5. Remove the nuts that retain the knee bolster from the steering column support. 6. Remove the knee bolster from the studs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the knee bolster to the studs. 2. Install the nuts that retain the knee bolster to the steering column support. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. 5. Install the left sound insulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6345 Inflatable Restraint Sensing And Diagnostic Module (SDM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6346 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM) The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) is a microprocessor and the control center for the SIR system. The SDM contains internal sensors along with several external sensors, if equipped, mounted at various locations on the vehicle. In the event of a collision, the SDM performs calculations using the signals received from the internal and external sensors. The SDM compares the results of the calculations to values stored in memory. When these calculations exceed the stored value, the SDM will cause current to flow through the appropriate deployment loops to deploy the air bags. The SDM records the SIR system status when a deployment occurs and turns the AIR BAG indicator ON. The SDM performs continuous diagnostic monitoring of the SIR system electrical components and circuitry when the ignition is turned ON. If the SDM detects a malfunction, a DTC will be stored and the SDM will command the AIR BAG indicator ON. In the event that ignition 1 voltage is lost during a collision, the SDM maintains a 23-volt loop reserve (23 VLR) for deployment of the air bags. It is important to note, when disabling the SIR system for servicing or rescue operations to allow the 23 VLR to dissipate, which could take up to 1 minute. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6347 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Before applying power to the SDM, make sure that it is securely fastened with the arrow facing toward the front of the vehicle. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the floor console, if equipped. 3. Cut an "X" in the carpet over the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). 4. Fold the carpet back to expose the SDM. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) (4) from the SDM harness connector (3). 6. Disconnect the SDM harness connector (3) from the SDM (2). 7. Remove the SDM mounting fasteners (1). 8. Remove the SDM (2) from the vehicle. 9. Repair the fasteners using the following procedure: 1. Remove the stripped nut and discard the nut. 2. Drill out the weld spots to the weld stud from the floor pan side, then remove and discard the stud. 3. Condition the floor panel attaching surface where the new stud is to be installed. 4. Install new weld stud GM P/N 115115602 and clamp the weld stud. 5. Migweld the stud at the drilled holes from above or below the floor pan (as required). 6. Apply body sealer GM P/N 9984248 around any exposed openings. 7. Install a new fastener GM P/N 11515933. IMPORTANT: The following repair procedures should only be used in the event that the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) mounting studs and/or fasteners are damaged to the extent that the SDM may no longer be properly mounted. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other impurities from the mounting surface. 2. Install the SDM (2) horizontally to the vehicle. 3. Point the arrow on the SDM toward the front of the vehicle. 4. Install the SDM mounting fasteners (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten fasteners to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Install the SDM harness connector (3) to the SDM (2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6348 6. Install the CPA (4) to the SDM harness connector (3). 7. Tape the cut carpet to cover the SDM. 8. Install the floor console, if equipped. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. IMPORTANT: The AIR BAG indicator may remain ON after the SDM has been replaced. DTC B1001 may set requiring the SDM part number to be set in multiple modules. If the indicator remains ON after enabling the SIR system, perform the diagnostic system check and follow the steps thoroughly to ensure that the SDM is set properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6354 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6355 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6356 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6357 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6358 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6359 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6360 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6361 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 6362 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair CHILD RESTRAINT TETHER ANCHOR REPLACEMENT (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cargo tie down mounting bolt. 2. Remove the cargo tie down loop. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the cargo tie down loop on the floor. 2. Install the cargo tie down loop to the floor with the mounting bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cargo tie down loop mounting bolt to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 6371 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the bolt that retains the lower seat belt anchor plate to the vehicle. 2. Carefully pry open the upper seat belt anchor plate cover with a flat-bladed tool. 3. Remove the bolt that retains the upper seat belt anchor plate to the vehicle. 4. Remove the body side trim panel. 5. Guide the seat belt through the opening in the body side trim cover. 6. Remove the bolt that retains the seat belt retractor assembly to the vehicle. 7. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6374 1. Install the seat belt retractor assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bolt that retains the seat belt retractor assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the seat belt retractor assembly bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 3. Guide the seat belt through the opening in the body side trim cover. 4. Install the body side trim panel. 5. Install the seat belt opening trim cover by firmly pressing the cover into place. 6. Install the upper seat belt anchor plate and bolt to the vehicle. Tighten the upper seat belt anchor plate bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 7. Close the upper seat belt anchor plate cover. 8. Install the lower seat belt anchor plate and bolt to the vehicle. Tighten the lower seat belt anchor plate bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6375 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear (Utility) SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - REAR (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat assembly. 2. Remove the lower seat belt anchor plate from the rear seat bolt. 3. Remove the upper seat belt anchor bolt cover. 4. Remove the bolt that retains the upper seat belt anchor plate. 5. Remove the body side trim panel. 6. Guide the seat belt through the opening in the body side trim panel. 7. Remove the bolt that retains the seat belt retractor assembly to the vehicle. 8. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6376 1. Install the seat belt retractor assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bolt that retains the rear seat belt retractor assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the seat belt retractor assembly bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 3. Guide the seat belt through the opening in the body side trim panel. 4. Install the body side trim panel. 5. Install the upper seat belt anchor plate and bolt to the vehicle. Tighten the upper seat belt anchor plate bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 6. Install the upper seat belt anchor bolt cover. 7. Install the lower seat belt anchor plate to the rear seat bolt. 8. Install the rear seat assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6377 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Center Rear (Utility) SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT - CENTER REAR (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold the rear seats forward.Lift the rear seat floor filler trim panels to access the center rear seat belt assembly. 2. Remove the center rear seat belt assembly retaining nuts from the vehicle. 3. Remove the center rear seat belt assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the center rear seat belt assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the center rear seat belt assembly retaining nuts to the vehicle. 3. Install the center rear seat belt assembly retaining nuts to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the center rear seat belt assembly retaining nuts to 80 N.m (59 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 6386 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 6392 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-09-40-002A > Jun > 09 > Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-002E Date: September 23, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) On, Transmission Stuck in Second or Third Gear, Instrument Cluster Inoperative (Verify and Repair Source of Voltage Loss In Transmission Solenoid Power Supply Circuit) Models: 2006 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 2005-2006 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E, 4L80-E or 4L85-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M33, MT1, MN8) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, add additional models and add additional diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-002D (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: ^ The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is ON. ^ The transmission is defaulted to second gear (4L80/85-E). ^ The transmission is defaulted to third gear (4L60/65-E). ^ The instrument cluster is inoperative. Upon investigation, one or all of the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0740, P0753, P0758, P0785, P0787, P0973, P0976, P1860, P2761, P2764 and P2769 may be set depending on the vehicle. Cause The most likely cause of this condition may be a loss of voltage to the transmission solenoid power supply circuit. This condition may also be the result of an incorrect installation of an aftermarket electronic device such as a remote starter or alarm system. Correction Important: If the vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket electronic device and the DTCs are being set when the device is being used, verify that the appropriate fuse is being supplied battery voltage during operation. If voltage is not present at this fuse, these DTCs will be set due to lack of voltage at the solenoids. This condition is most likely to occur with an incorrectly installed remote starting system. If this is the case, refer the customer to the installer of the system for corrections. ANY REPAIRS DUE TO AFTERMARKET INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES IS A NON-WARRANTABLE ITEM. 1. With the ignition switch in the RUN position, test for battery voltage at the circuit fuse in the transmission solenoid power supply circuit. Refer to the appropriate SI Document for the transmission solenoid power supply circuit information. 2. If battery voltage is present at the fuse, inspect the ignition voltage circuit between the fuse and the transmission for possible opens. 3. If battery voltage is not present at the fuse, test for continuity between the fuse and the ignition switch. If NO continuity is between the fuse and the ignition switch, repair the open in that circuit. 4. If you have continuity between the fuse and the ignition switch, the most likely cause is the ignition switch. Replace the ignition switch using the appropriate Ignition Switch Replacement procedure in SI. Refer to group number 2.188 of the parts catalog for part description and usage of the ignition switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's > Page 6402 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 01-07-30-002E > Sep > 05 > Electrical - A/T Stuck in 2nd/3rd Gear/MIL ON/DTC's > Page 6408 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the driver-side seat belt buckle electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt that retains the driver-side seat belt buckle or buckles to the seat. 3. Remove the driver-side seat belt buckle or buckles from the seat. 4. Remove the bolt that retains the passenger-side seat belt buckle or buckle and belt assembly to the seat. 5. Remove the passenger-side seat belt buckle or buckle and belt assembly from the seat. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the passenger-side seat belt buckle or buckle and belt assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the bolt that retains the passenger-side seat belt buckle or buckle and belt assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the seat belt buckle or buckle and belt assembly bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6411 3. Install the driver-side seat belt buckle or buckles to the seat. 4. Install the bolt that retains the driver-side seat belt buckle or buckles to the seat. Tighten the seat belt buckle or buckles bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 5. Connect the driver-side seat belt buckle electrical connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6412 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear (Utility) SEAT BELT BUCKLE REPLACEMENT - REAR (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold the rear seats forward.Lift the rear seat floor filler trim panels to access the rear seat belt buckle assembly. 2. Remove the rear seat belt buckle assembly retaining nuts. 3. Remove the rear seat belt buckle assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rear seat belt buckle assembly to the vehicle. 2. Install the rear seat belt buckle assembly retaining nuts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the rear seat belt buckle assembly retaining nuts to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6416 Seat Belt Switch - LF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F Date: June 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints). Important: DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint. The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt extensions (extenders) should be minimal. Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15 in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended. Important: Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada. Warranty Information ^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. ^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the dealers. ^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 6425 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 6426 Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Availability INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-09-40-002A Date: June 04, 2009 Subject: Seat Belt Latch Stop Button Available for Service Models: 2005-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2009-2010 HUMMER H3T .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-40-002 (Section 09 - Restraints). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. All seat belt retractor assemblies contain a stop button. If a stop button becomes damaged, the button can be replaced by ordering a replacement button through the GM Parts Catalog. The seat belt retractor assembly does not need replacement. Refer to the Seat Belt Latch Stop Installation procedure in SI for the complete installation procedure. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of stop buttons, see Stop Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6427 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTORS CAUTION: Perform this test in an area clear of other vehicles or obstructions. Do not conduct this test on the open road. A large, empty parking lot is suitable. Failure to observe this precaution may result in damage to the vehicle and possible personal injury. 1. Fasten the seat belts, an assistant is needed when the retractor under test is not part of the driver seat belt. 2. Accelerate the vehicle slowly to 16 km/h (10 mph) and apply the brakes firmly. 3. Verify that the seat belt locks when braking firmly. 4. If the belt does not lock, proceed with the following steps. 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2. Tilt the seat belt retractor slowly. 3. Ensure that the seat belt webbing can be pulled from the retractor at an inclination of 15 degrees or less and cannot be pulled from the retractor at an inclination of 45 degrees or more. 4. If the seat belt retractor does not operate as described, replace the retractor assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6432 Inflatable Restraint I/P Module Disable Switch (Pickup Only) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations SIR Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6436 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6437 Inflatable Restraint Front End Discriminating Sensor - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6438 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END DISCRIMINATING SENSOR The front end discriminating sensor is equipped on some vehicles to supplement SIR system performance. The discriminating sensor is an electro-mechanical sensor and is not part of the deployment loops, but instead provides an input to the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). The SDM uses the input from the discriminating sensor to assist in determining the severity of a frontal collision further supporting air bag deployment. If the SDM determines a deployment is warranted, the SDM will cause current to flow through the deployment loops deploying the frontal air bags. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6439 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair INFLATABLE RESTRAINT FRONT END DISCRIMINATING SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. CAUTION: Do not strike or jolt the inflatable restraint front end sensor. Before applying power to the front end sensor make sure that it is securely fastened. Failure to observe the correct installation procedure could cause SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs. - Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove off road skid plate, if equipped. 3. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector. 4. Disconnect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector from the sensor. 5. Drill out the mounting rivets. 6. Remove the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The following procedures should be utilized in the event that sensor mounting holes or fasteners are damaged to the extent that the sensor can no longer be properly mounted. 7. Perform the following steps in order to complete the first fastener repair: 1. Remove and discard the improperly installed rivet. 2. Reattach sensor with new rivet. 8. Perform the following steps in order to complete the second fastener repair: 1. Remove the improperly installed rivet. 2. Enlarge the mounting holes (1) in the lower radiator support to 9.0 mm (0.35 in). 3. Insert and properly seat the rivnut. 4. Install sensor with screw. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6440 Tighten fasteners to 8.0 N.m (71 lb in). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Remove any dirt, grease, or other impurities from the mounting surface. 2. Install the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor horizontally to the lower radiator support surface. Ensure that the arrow is pointing toward the front of the vehicle. 3. Install the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor mounting rivets (GM P/N 15715058). 4. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector to the sensor. 5. Install the connector position assurance (CPA) to the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor harness connector. 6. Install the off road skid plate, in equipped. 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 and to SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6444 Seat Belt Switch - LF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Accessory Delay Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6454 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6455 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6456 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6457 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6458 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6459 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6460 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6461 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6462 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6463 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6464 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6465 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6466 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6467 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6468 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6469 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6470 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6471 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6472 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6473 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6474 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6475 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6476 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6477 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Mast > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Mast: Service and Repair FIXED ANTENNA MAST REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Unscrew the Antenna Mast. NOTE: Use tape on the tool surface so that you do not damage the paint on the antenna mast. 2. Remove the antenna mast from the antenna base. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the antenna mast to the antenna base. 2. Screw the antenna mast to the antenna base. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the antenna mast to 5 N.m (44 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-08-46-003B > Feb > 05 > Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Antenna, Navigation: Customer Interest Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Info - Global Position Sensor (GPS) Performance Degradation # 00-08-46-003B - (Feb 9, 2005) Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Trucks 2002-2005 Saturn Vehicles with Navigation Systems and/or OnStar(R) This bulletin is being revised to include additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-003A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Navigation and OnStar(R) systems require a GPS antenna in order to function properly. This antenna may be located inside the vehicle. If the GPS antenna is located inside the vehicle, performance of the system may be compromised by window tinting film. If the GPS system performance is in question and the vehicle has window tinting, a quick diagnostic check can be made by temporarily moving the GPS antenna to an external vehicle surface, such as the decklid or roof. If the GPS function of the navigation or On Star(R) system operates normally with the antenna relocated the repair would not be considered a warranty repair. The subsequent repair procedure or GPS placement would be up to the customer. Some vehicles have the GPS antenna located on the rear window shelf Objects placed on the rear window shelf such as tissue boxes, books, dolls, etc,, also have the potential to interfere with GPS performance. Warranty Information Repairs made to the vehicle navigation and/or OnStar(R) system, which are the result of window tinting, are not considered warranty repairs. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Antenna, Navigation: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 6495 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-003B > Feb > 05 > Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Antenna, Navigation: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - GPS System Performance Degradation Info - Global Position Sensor (GPS) Performance Degradation # 00-08-46-003B - (Feb 9, 2005) Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Trucks 2002-2005 Saturn Vehicles with Navigation Systems and/or OnStar(R) This bulletin is being revised to include additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-003A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Navigation and OnStar(R) systems require a GPS antenna in order to function properly. This antenna may be located inside the vehicle. If the GPS antenna is located inside the vehicle, performance of the system may be compromised by window tinting film. If the GPS system performance is in question and the vehicle has window tinting, a quick diagnostic check can be made by temporarily moving the GPS antenna to an external vehicle surface, such as the decklid or roof. If the GPS function of the navigation or On Star(R) system operates normally with the antenna relocated the repair would not be considered a warranty repair. The subsequent repair procedure or GPS placement would be up to the customer. Some vehicles have the GPS antenna located on the rear window shelf Objects placed on the rear window shelf such as tissue boxes, books, dolls, etc,, also have the potential to interfere with GPS performance. Warranty Information Repairs made to the vehicle navigation and/or OnStar(R) system, which are the result of window tinting, are not considered warranty repairs. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Antenna, Navigation: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Antenna, Navigation: > 00-08-46-002A > Apr > 05 > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 6505 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Antenna, Phone: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 6510 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Global Positioning System Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 6515 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Cable: Service and Repair COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the antenna mast. 2. Remove the radio antenna cable from the radio extension cable. 3. Remove the fender. 4. Remove the radio antenna cable nut. 5. Remove the radio antenna bezel. 6. Remove the radio antenna cable screws. 7. Remove the radio antenna cable. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the radio antenna cable. 2. Install the radio antenna cable screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the radio antenna cable screws to 2.8 N.m (25 lb in). 3. Install the radio antenna bezel. 4. Install the radio antenna cable nut. 5. Install the fender. Tighten the radio antenna cable nut to 6 N.m (53 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6520 6. Install the radio antenna cable to the radio extension cable. 7. Install the antenna mast. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Key In Signal, Antitheft > Component Information > Locations Steering Column Components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6529 Keyless Entry Receiver: Service and Repair REMOTE CONTROL DOOR LOCK RECEIVER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side instrument panel sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the remote control door lock receiver from the instrument panel sound insulator by unsnapping it. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the remote control door lock receiver from the instrument panel sound insulator by snapping it. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the left side instrument panel sound insulator. 4. Reprogram the transmitters. Refer to Transmitter Programming. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Test the operation of the system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 6534 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Insert a small coin between the 2 halves of the transmitter case at the slot provided near the key ring hole. 2. Twist the coin in order to open the case. 3. Open the transmitter case. 4. Remove the battery. NOTE: Refer to Handling ESD Sensitive Parts Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the battery with the positive (+) side up.Use one 3 V CR2032 battery (or the equivalent). 2. Ensure that the seal is in position. Align the 2 halves of the case and snap the two halves together. 3. Resynchronize the transmitter. Refer to Transmitter Synchronization. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Cellular Phone: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6550 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Cellular Phone: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6555 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6561 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6574 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6588 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6589 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6590 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6591 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6592 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6593 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6594 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6595 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6596 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6597 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6598 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6599 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6600 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6601 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6602 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6603 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6604 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6605 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6606 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6607 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6608 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6609 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6610 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6611 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6612 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Driver Information Center (DIC) C1 (w/Trip Computer) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6613 Driver Information Center (DIC) C1 (w/o Trip Computer) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6614 Driver Information Center (DIC) C2 (w/Short Console) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6615 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER (DIC) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The driver information center (DIC) consists of a multi-function electronic display placed in the overhead console. The DIC displays the following information: - The vehicle fuel information - The outside temperature - The direction the vehicle is facing The display parameters are cycled, changed, and acknowledged using the following 2 DIC buttons mounted at the side of the driver information center: US/MET: Allows the display to switch between English and Metric units. MODE: Used to toggle between OFF, COMP/TEMP and TRIP. COMP/TEMP COMP: In the Compass Mode, one of eight compass readings (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, and NW) will be displayed to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. TEMP: In the Temperature Mode, the outside air temperature is displayed in either °C or °F. If the outside air temperature is below 3°C (37°F), the display will toggle between ICE and the current outside air temperature in 8 second increments. TRIP In the Trip Mode, the DIC displays the following information based on class 2 serial data: AVG ECON: The DIC displays the average fuel economy since the last reset. AVG SPEED: The DIC displays the average speed since the last reset. FUEL USED: The DIC displays the amount of fuel used since the last reset. INST ECON: The DIC displays the instantaneous fuel economy since the last second of driving. RANGE: The DIC displays the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of driving. The display format for each mode is indicated in the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Information Center Module Replacement Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Center Module Replacement DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a flat-bladed tool, carefully remove the display lens (1) from the overhead console (3). 2. Remove the electronic display module (2) from the console (3). 3. Disconnect the electrical connection. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connection. 2. Install the electronic display module (2) to the overhead console (3). 3. Install the display lens (1) by snapping the lens into place. 4. Calibrate the compass. Refer to Electronic Compass Calibration . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Information Center Module Replacement > Page 6618 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Center Replacement (With Sunroof) DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER REPLACEMENT (WITH SUNROOF) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screw at the front of the console that retains the sunroof console to the roof. 2. Pull downward on the rear of the console in order to remove the sunroof console from the roof. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1, 5, 6) as needed. 4. Remove the screw that retains the sunroof console mounting bracket to the roof. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the electrical connectors (1, 5, 6) as needed . 2. Insert the console mounting tabs into the mounting bracket and push upward on the rear of the console in order to install the console. 3. Install the screw at the front of the console that retains the console to the roof. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Information Center Module Replacement > Page 6619 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Center Replacement (Without Sunroof) DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT SUNROOF) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screw at the front of the console that retains the console to the roof. 2. Pull downward at the rear of the console in order to remove the console from the roof. 3. Disconnect the electrical connections as needed. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connections as needed. 2. Insert the mounting tabs into the roof panel and push upward on the rear of the console in order to install the console to the roof. 3. Install the screw at the front of the console that retains the console to the roof. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6628 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6633 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6638 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6639 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6645 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6662 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6667 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6668 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Headphones / Earphones > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Entertainment System - Headphone Foam Pad Replacement Headphones / Earphones: Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment System - Headphone Foam Pad Replacement Bulletin No.: 05-08-44-005A Date: July 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Rear Seat Headphone Foam Ear Pad Replacement if Worn or Damaged Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with Rear Seat Entertainment System (RPOs U32, U42) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years and update the shipping costs. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-44-005 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Foam ear pads on the rear headphone may become worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads may wear out when not handled and stored carefully. If the headphone foam ear pads become damaged or worn out, the foam pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace the complete headphone set. Parts Information All pricing information listed in this bulletin is in U.S. dollars and is subject to change without notice. The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs directly through the supplier. Have your customer call Unwired at 1-888-293-3332, then prompt zero (0). The replacement, P/N CS-980 (thick earfoam), can be ordered for $3.50 (USD) per pair plus $2.50 USPS shipping. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6690 Garage Door Opener Locator View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6693 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6694 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6695 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6696 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6697 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6698 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6699 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6700 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6701 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6702 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6703 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6704 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6705 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6706 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6707 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6708 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6709 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6710 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6711 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6712 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6713 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6714 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6715 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6716 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6717 Garage Door Opener Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6718 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation GARAGE DOOR OPENER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The garage door opener is located in the overhead console. The valet switch provides battery voltage to the garage door opener. If battery voltage is lost due to a condition such as a dead battery, the garage door opener unit relies on the non-serviceable internal power backup supply. The unit is programmed using the customer's hand-held transmitters for the garage doors, electric entrance gates, or lighting and security systems. The garage door opener is rolling code capable. Rolling code is a system that allows the code that the customer's receiver receives from the garage door opener to change every time the garage door opener is used within operating range of the receiver. When the receiver and the garage door opener are initially programmed together, a code is established and a new code is created for every new transmission. The software in the receiver recognizes the garage door opener and accepts the new code. The garage door opener is compatible with most, but not all types and brands of transmitters. If a problem should occur with a compatibility conflict with a transmitter, call HomeLink(TM) at 1-800-355-3515. The garage door opener is a transmitter operating between 288-399 MHz. The power and range of the transmitter is limited to comply with laws governing the generation of radio frequency interference (RFI). The transmitter is programmed by the user to accept the signal generated by the user's transmitters, refer to Control Module References in Computer/Integrating Systems for replacement, setup and programming. The garage door opener has 3 buttons that may be programmed for individual transmitter/receiver combinations to control up to 3 garage door openers, security gates, and lighting systems. Each button represents a transmitter code section of the transmitter, which operates separately from any other button, and may be considered a separate transmitter. Operation consists of simply pressing a button to activate the corresponding transmitter. Battery voltage is provided to the garage door opener from the IGN SEN fuse in the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block. The garage door opener is grounded through G400. Inadvertent power is supplied from the body control module (BCM). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis by reviewing the system Description and Operation. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will help you determine the correct symptom diagnostic procedure to use when a malfunction exists. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will also help you determine if the condition described by the customer is normal operation. Refer to Symptoms - Garage Door Opener in order to identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6721 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - Symptoms - Garage Door Opener SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: Review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Garage Door Opener Description and Operation. Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the garage door opener. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to Garage Door Opener Inoperative in order to diagnose the symptom. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6722 Steps 1 - 10 Step 11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garage Door Opener Replacement Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Service and Repair Garage Door Opener Replacement GARAGE DOOR OPENER REPLACEMENT The overhead console (4) on some models provides a location for installing a garage door opener transmitter (2). Use the following procedure in order to install a transmitter. 1. Press the compartment latch forward in order to open the compartment door. 2. Remove the hook and loop patch from the top of the console. 3. Peel the adhesive backing from the hook and loop patch. 4. Firmly press the hook and loop patch to the back of the transmitter, as close to the center of the transmitter as possible. 5. Center the button on the transmitter over the button on the compartment door (3).Firmly press the transmitter into place. 6. Use the pegs inside the compartment door in order to make sure that the button on the compartment door makes contact with the button on the transmitter. 7. Add one peg at a time until the transmitter operates when the compartment door is closed and the button is pushed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garage Door Opener Replacement > Page 6725 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Service and Repair Garage Door Opener Programming Universal GARAGE DOOR OPENER PROGRAMMING - UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER PROGRAMMING IMPORTANT: Do not use the garage door opener (GDO) with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse safety feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. - Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming. The GDO is programmed by using the customer's hand-held transmitter(s). Turn the ignition OFF while programming the GDO transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to 3 channels: 1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down the 2 outside buttons on the GDO transmitter for approximately 20 seconds, until the light on the GDO transmitter begins to flash rapidly. Then release the buttons. This procedure erases any previous settings and initializes the memory for all 3 channels. 2. Decide which of the 3 channels you want to program to the transmitter you have. 3. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the front surface of the GDO (less than 1 inch) so you can still see the light. 4. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter button and the desired button on the GDO transmitter. Continue to hold both buttons through Step 5. 5. Hold down the buttons on both transmitters until you see the light on the GDO transmitter flash slowly and then rapidly. The rapid flashing, which could take up to 90 seconds, indicates that the GDO transmitter has been programmed. Release the buttons on both transmitters when the light starts to flash rapidly. IMPORTANT: The GDO is compatible with most, but not all, types and brands of transmitters. If the GDO light does not flash rapidly after 90 seconds, there may be a compatibility conflict with the transmitter used to program the GDO. Call HomeLink(TM) at 1-800-355-3515 in order to address this problem. TRAINING THE GDO FOR ROLLING CODE RECEIVERS This procedure is for training the customer's rolling code garage door openers to their GDO transmitter. The GDO must already be programmed to its hand-held transmitter. The training process below must be completed within 30 seconds or it must be repeated. 1. Locate the train button on the garage door opener receiver. Refer to the operator's manual for the garage door opener (or call HomeLink(TM) at 1-800-355-3515 for assistance). Follow instructions for the garage door opener in order to determine when the unit is in train mode. 2. Return to the GDO transmitter in the vehicle, and press the button that you want trained for rolling codes 3 times, for 1 second each time. If not successfully programmed, try 2-5 seconds each time. 3. Press the button used again in order to verify that the GDO transmitter has been programmed. You may use either the hand-held transmitter or the GDO to open the garage door. The GDO is compatible with most, but not all, types and brands of transmitters. If the GDO light does not flash rapidly after 90 seconds, there may be a compatibility conflict with the transmitter used to program the GDO. Call HomeLink(TM) at 1-800-355-3515 in order to address compatibility concerns. ERASING CHANNELS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garage Door Opener Replacement > Page 6726 To erase programmed channels, hold down the 2 outside buttons until the light on the GDO transmitter begins to flash. Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be reprogrammed using the Garage Door Opener Programming and the Training GDO for Rolling Code Receivers procedures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Global Positioning System Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-002A Date: April 12, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: OnStar(R) System Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts Availability Models: 1996-2005 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 with OnStar(R) and Glass Mounted Antennas Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years, models and parts information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-002 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Replacement parts for the OnStar(R) system cellular antenna are available as follows: ^ Cellular Antenna Kit - If the antenna mast or exterior base is damaged or missing or if the antenna base has separated from the exterior glass surface. ^ Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling - If the antenna coupling on the inside of the glass requires replacement. Important: If glass replacement is required, both the Cellular Antenna Kit and the Cellular Antenna Inner Coupling are required. The kits listed contain all the necessary parts and instructions needed to properly install a new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling to the glass surface. To obtain maximum adhesion during installation, the instructions included in the kits must be followed carefully and exactly as written. Important: Do not attempt to reinstall the original cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling using any type of glue, adhesive tapes, etc. Doing so may eliminate the cellular signal transfer through the glass and reduce the maximum performance of the system that includes air bag deployment notification. Important: To obtain maximum adhesion between the new cellular exterior base or interior coupling and the glass surface, the base, coupling and glass must be kept dry and above 15°C (60°F) during the installation and for the 24 hours immediately following the installation. Not keeping the vehicle dry and above the temperature listed for 24 hours may result in the new cellular antenna exterior base or interior coupling coming off. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > OnStar(R) - Cellular Antenna Replacement Parts > Page 6732 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Calibration Procedure MEMORY SEAT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The memory seat module uses position sensor inputs to establish soft stop locations for the adjuster motors several millimeters ahead of the physical limits of the adjuster assembly. After replacing a memory seat module or adjuster components, it may be necessary to reset the adjuster motor soft stop locations. When the repair procedure has been completed, operate the seat adjuster switch in every direction until the seat adjuster reaches its mechanical hard stop by repeatedly pressing and releasing the switch as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 6738 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Control Module Replacement MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the memory seat module harness connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws securing the memory module bracket to the seat adjuster frame. 4. Remove the memory module bracket with the module. 5. Remove the module from the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the memory seat module into the bracket until the module is seated. 2. Install the memory seat module and bracket to the seat adjuster frame assembly with 2 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Install the memory seat module harness connectors. 4. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 6739 5. Calibrate the seat. Refer to Memory Seat Calibration Procedure . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6748 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6753 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6759 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-012E Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: DVD Navigation Update Program, Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid, AVN Software Update Discs and Ordering Information Models: 2002-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please direct this information to your Sales Consultants, Service Consultants, Parts Personnel and Used Car Department. This bulletin ONLY applies to North American dealers/retailers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2010 model year and update the usage table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). DVD Navigation Update Program The data on the DVD map disc ages at a rate of 15-20% per year. As the data ages, the functionality of the navigation system declines. Offering GM customers new navigation DVDs will ensure that the customers have the latest information for their system. General Motors offered a Navigation Disc Update Program for 2006 and 2007 model year vehicles. This program concluded on December 31, 2009. The DVD Navigation Update Program policy has changed and customers are no longer eligible for free annual updates, however, a navigation DVD update disc can be purchased for $199 (USD) + shipping. If the navigation disc is needed for a warranty situation, the disc can be purchased for $120 (USD). The dealer must provide a VIN and RO# to qualify for the reduced price. The dealer must call the GM Navigation Disc Center, as this option is not available on the website. The GM Navigation Disc Center launched on March 15, 2006. There are two ways to obtain an updated disc: - Via the web through gmnavdisc.com - GM Navigation Disc Center Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid The following table can be used to identify acceptable discs for testing the navigation unit's map drive functionality. This should only be used to verify the map drive's ability to read the map disc properly and to determine if there is an issue with the unit's map drive or the disc. Some functions, such as voice recognition, may not work properly with some of the discs in the list. If the disc is found to be defective always contact the GM Navigation Disc Center to obtain the most recent disc for the vehicle. AVN Software Update Discs Technical Service Bulletins are sometimes generated to address specific navigation radio operational or performance issues. When a navigation radio bulletin is issued, it may contain instructions to utilize an advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update with a specific part number. GM dealers must order advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update discs as directed in the specific bulletin. AVN software update discs are for the dealer to update the navigation radio software only. They do NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. AVN software update discs can be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). To obtain an AVN software update disc, follow the specific ordering information provided in the bulletin. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 6768 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-010F Date: March 09, 2009 Subject: Navigation Radio Diagnostic Tips Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Equipped with Navigation Radio Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years involved, the radio part number list, remove the PQC parts restriction and revise the diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-010E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Recent part reviews indicate that the majority of Navigation Radios returned for analysis do not test as defective. In many cases, published SI documents were available to correct the condition without the need for an exchange unit. The following Diagnostic Tips may assist with the proper diagnosis and repair of Navigation Radio Concerns. Note For U.S. dealers the 2009 and 2010 Model Year Navigation Radios are currently on restriction through the Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Refer to PI PIC5102. To order Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC) for 2008 and prior model year vehicles, please continue to follow the normal process and contact an authorized Electronic Service Center (ESC) for assistance. For any Navigation Radio replaced, a copy of the Repair Order (RO) must be included with the returned radio. Be sure to document the customer's concern in detail, including unusual noises and what functions are affected. List any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) on the RO. Ensure the radio is sufficiently protected during shipping to prevent damage to the radio assembly. Note Navigation Radios with physical damage (for example: shattered displays, impact damage to the radio face and fluid damage) must be reviewed with the District Service Manager for appropriate coverage prior to replacing the radio. The dealership must note the District Service Manager's approval on the Repair Order, along with the reason for the goodwill assistance. Do NOT disassemble the radio to try and retrieve stuck CDs/DVDs as this may result in a debit to the dealership. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-015, Information on Inappropriate Warranty Claims submitted for Damaged Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters. Getting Started Retrieve the Navigation Radio part number using the Tech 2(R). Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-44-005C - Utilizing Tech 2 to Retrieve Part Numbers for Radios, Compact Disc (CD) Changers and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC). Use the table below to determine the appropriate Diagnostic Tips Review to follow based on the radio part number. Scroll down the bulletin to find the corresponding Diagnostic Tips Review. Printing This Document To print the applicable Diagnostic Tips Review pages, select File then Print Preview. Use the arrows at the top of the screen to scroll left and right through the bulletin to identify the correct pages containing the questions. With the pages identified, click on the Print button at the top left. In the pop-up box, select "Pages" in the "Print Range" and type in the pages. For example, to print pages 19 through 22, type in the box provided "19-22". Once the page range has been filled in, click the Print box at the bottom of the pop-up box. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6777 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6778 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6779 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6780 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6781 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6782 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6783 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6784 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6785 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6786 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6787 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6788 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6789 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6790 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6791 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6792 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6793 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6794 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-023 > Jun > 08 > Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-023 Date: June 18, 2008 Subject: Information On Navigation Radio Not Displaying Accurate Vehicle Location After Radio Replacement, Power Loss Or Battery Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Navigation Radio The purpose of this bulletin is to inform technicians and customers that the Navigation Radio may not display the vehicle location icon on the map accurately after a radio or battery has been replaced or after battery power has been removed from the radio. The vehicle location icon accuracy may be degraded if the GPS signal is not available and the GPS displayed icon has a red line through it. The Navigation Radio does not keep learned GPS information or gyroscope and vehicle speed signals stored when the battery power is removed from the radio. The Navigation radio continually uses GPS, gyroscope and vehicle speed data to maintain the vehicle location icon positioned accurately on the displayed map. There may be periods of time during a drive cycle when the GPS signal may not be available and the vehicle location icon still appears to be accurate. This is due to the radio having internal gyroscopes and receiving a vehicle speed signal to maintain accuracy if the radio had received a good GPS signal earlier in the drive cycle. Normal driving will improve the accuracy of the vehicle location icon on the displayed map. It may be necessary for the vehicle to be driven up to 40 km (25 mi) with 15 left and 15 right turns while the vehicle location icon is matched to roads on the displayed map. Do not replace the radio for this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6811 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 07-08-44-007 > Apr > 07 > Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Bulletin No.: 07-08-44-007 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Obtaining Replacement Navigation Discs When Radios are Exchanged Order Replacement Navigation Disc Through Navigation Disc Center Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X with a Navigation Radio Attention: The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealership personnel of a new procedure for obtaining a replacement navigation disc for radios that are sent to an ESC for exchange. This bulletin applies to U.S. and Canadian dealers only and is not intended for use by export dealers. When a navigation radio warranty exchange is performed, the customer must have a navigation disc to operate the new radio. If the customer's navigation disc was damaged or is stuck in the failed radio, the customer would have to wait for an excessive period of time for the disc to be returned or replaced. The Electronic Service Centers (ESC) are not authorized to remove stuck navigation discs from cores, as the cores must be returned to the supplier for analysis prior to any disassembly. The time it would take for the supplier to return the navigation disc would significantly delay the completion of the repair at the dealership. If the customer's navigation disc is damaged or cannot be removed from the radio, the dealership is to obtain an exchange radio through an ESC and a new navigation disc through the GM Navigation Disc Center. Both items can be shipped overnight to the dealership upon request. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information Via the web through gmnavdisc.com The GM Navigation Disc Center is also the center of expertise for navigation system questions. Warranty Information Include the part number and cost of the new navigation disc on the warranty claim for the navigation radio exchange. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-012E Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: DVD Navigation Update Program, Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid, AVN Software Update Discs and Ordering Information Models: 2002-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please direct this information to your Sales Consultants, Service Consultants, Parts Personnel and Used Car Department. This bulletin ONLY applies to North American dealers/retailers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2010 model year and update the usage table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). DVD Navigation Update Program The data on the DVD map disc ages at a rate of 15-20% per year. As the data ages, the functionality of the navigation system declines. Offering GM customers new navigation DVDs will ensure that the customers have the latest information for their system. General Motors offered a Navigation Disc Update Program for 2006 and 2007 model year vehicles. This program concluded on December 31, 2009. The DVD Navigation Update Program policy has changed and customers are no longer eligible for free annual updates, however, a navigation DVD update disc can be purchased for $199 (USD) + shipping. If the navigation disc is needed for a warranty situation, the disc can be purchased for $120 (USD). The dealer must provide a VIN and RO# to qualify for the reduced price. The dealer must call the GM Navigation Disc Center, as this option is not available on the website. The GM Navigation Disc Center launched on March 15, 2006. There are two ways to obtain an updated disc: - Via the web through gmnavdisc.com - GM Navigation Disc Center Navigation Disc Diagnostic Aid The following table can be used to identify acceptable discs for testing the navigation unit's map drive functionality. This should only be used to verify the map drive's ability to read the map disc properly and to determine if there is an issue with the unit's map drive or the disc. Some functions, such as voice recognition, may not work properly with some of the discs in the list. If the disc is found to be defective always contact the GM Navigation Disc Center to obtain the most recent disc for the vehicle. AVN Software Update Discs Technical Service Bulletins are sometimes generated to address specific navigation radio operational or performance issues. When a navigation radio bulletin is issued, it may contain instructions to utilize an advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update with a specific part number. GM dealers must order advanced vehicle navigation (AVN) software update discs as directed in the specific bulletin. AVN software update discs are for the dealer to update the navigation radio software only. They do NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. AVN software update discs can be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). To obtain an AVN software update disc, follow the specific ordering information provided in the bulletin. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 06-08-44-012E > Apr > 10 > Navigation System - Software/DVD Update Program > Page 6825 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-010F Date: March 09, 2009 Subject: Navigation Radio Diagnostic Tips Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Equipped with Navigation Radio Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years involved, the radio part number list, remove the PQC parts restriction and revise the diagnostic information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-010E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Recent part reviews indicate that the majority of Navigation Radios returned for analysis do not test as defective. In many cases, published SI documents were available to correct the condition without the need for an exchange unit. The following Diagnostic Tips may assist with the proper diagnosis and repair of Navigation Radio Concerns. Note For U.S. dealers the 2009 and 2010 Model Year Navigation Radios are currently on restriction through the Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Refer to PI PIC5102. To order Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC) for 2008 and prior model year vehicles, please continue to follow the normal process and contact an authorized Electronic Service Center (ESC) for assistance. For any Navigation Radio replaced, a copy of the Repair Order (RO) must be included with the returned radio. Be sure to document the customer's concern in detail, including unusual noises and what functions are affected. List any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) on the RO. Ensure the radio is sufficiently protected during shipping to prevent damage to the radio assembly. Note Navigation Radios with physical damage (for example: shattered displays, impact damage to the radio face and fluid damage) must be reviewed with the District Service Manager for appropriate coverage prior to replacing the radio. The dealership must note the District Service Manager's approval on the Repair Order, along with the reason for the goodwill assistance. Do NOT disassemble the radio to try and retrieve stuck CDs/DVDs as this may result in a debit to the dealership. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-015, Information on Inappropriate Warranty Claims submitted for Damaged Radios and Instrument Panel Clusters. Getting Started Retrieve the Navigation Radio part number using the Tech 2(R). Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-44-005C - Utilizing Tech 2 to Retrieve Part Numbers for Radios, Compact Disc (CD) Changers and Instrument Panel Clusters (IPC). Use the table below to determine the appropriate Diagnostic Tips Review to follow based on the radio part number. Scroll down the bulletin to find the corresponding Diagnostic Tips Review. Printing This Document To print the applicable Diagnostic Tips Review pages, select File then Print Preview. Use the arrows at the top of the screen to scroll left and right through the bulletin to identify the correct pages containing the questions. With the pages identified, click on the Print button at the top left. In the pop-up box, select "Pages" in the "Print Range" and type in the pages. For example, to print pages 19 through 22, type in the box provided "19-22". Once the page range has been filled in, click the Print box at the bottom of the pop-up box. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6834 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6835 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6836 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6837 Diagnostic Tips Review Table Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6838 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6839 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6840 Diagnostic Tips Review # 1 - Delphi Super Nav and Black Tie Nav Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6841 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6842 Diagnostic Tips Review # 2 - Delphi Legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6843 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6844 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6845 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6846 Diagnostic Tips Review # 3 - Denso Navigation Radios Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6847 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6848 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6849 Diagnostic Tips Review # 4 - Denso legacy Navigation Radio Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6850 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-010F > Mar > 09 > Navigation Radio - Diagnostic Tips > Page 6851 Diagnostic Tips Review # 5 - Alpine Silver Box Navigation Radio Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) Aftermarket Device Interference Information Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 08-08-44-023 > Jun > 08 > Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Adaptation After Radio/Battery R&R; INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-023 Date: June 18, 2008 Subject: Information On Navigation Radio Not Displaying Accurate Vehicle Location After Radio Replacement, Power Loss Or Battery Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Navigation Radio The purpose of this bulletin is to inform technicians and customers that the Navigation Radio may not display the vehicle location icon on the map accurately after a radio or battery has been replaced or after battery power has been removed from the radio. The vehicle location icon accuracy may be degraded if the GPS signal is not available and the GPS displayed icon has a red line through it. The Navigation Radio does not keep learned GPS information or gyroscope and vehicle speed signals stored when the battery power is removed from the radio. The Navigation radio continually uses GPS, gyroscope and vehicle speed data to maintain the vehicle location icon positioned accurately on the displayed map. There may be periods of time during a drive cycle when the GPS signal may not be available and the vehicle location icon still appears to be accurate. This is due to the radio having internal gyroscopes and receiving a vehicle speed signal to maintain accuracy if the radio had received a good GPS signal earlier in the drive cycle. Normal driving will improve the accuracy of the vehicle location icon on the displayed map. It may be necessary for the vehicle to be driven up to 40 km (25 mi) with 15 left and 15 right turns while the vehicle location icon is matched to roads on the displayed map. Do not replace the radio for this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 07-08-44-007 > Apr > 07 > Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Replacement Navigation Discs Bulletin No.: 07-08-44-007 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Obtaining Replacement Navigation Discs When Radios are Exchanged Order Replacement Navigation Disc Through Navigation Disc Center Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2007 and Prior Saab 9-7X with a Navigation Radio Attention: The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealership personnel of a new procedure for obtaining a replacement navigation disc for radios that are sent to an ESC for exchange. This bulletin applies to U.S. and Canadian dealers only and is not intended for use by export dealers. When a navigation radio warranty exchange is performed, the customer must have a navigation disc to operate the new radio. If the customer's navigation disc was damaged or is stuck in the failed radio, the customer would have to wait for an excessive period of time for the disc to be returned or replaced. The Electronic Service Centers (ESC) are not authorized to remove stuck navigation discs from cores, as the cores must be returned to the supplier for analysis prior to any disassembly. The time it would take for the supplier to return the navigation disc would significantly delay the completion of the repair at the dealership. If the customer's navigation disc is damaged or cannot be removed from the radio, the dealership is to obtain an exchange radio through an ESC and a new navigation disc through the GM Navigation Disc Center. Both items can be shipped overnight to the dealership upon request. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information Via the web through gmnavdisc.com The GM Navigation Disc Center is also the center of expertise for navigation system questions. Warranty Information Include the part number and cost of the new navigation disc on the warranty claim for the navigation radio exchange. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations Steering Wheel Control Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 6877 Remote Control: Diagrams Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Page 6878 Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) Speaker - LF (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6883 Speaker - LF (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6884 Speaker - LF Door Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6885 Speaker - LR (2-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6886 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker - LF (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6887 Speaker - LF (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6888 Speaker - LF Door Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6889 Speaker - LR (2-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6890 Speaker - LR Door (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6891 Speaker - RF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6892 Speaker - RF (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6893 Speaker - RF Door Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6894 Speaker - RR (2-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > LF (Pickup) > Page 6895 Speaker - RR Door (4-Door Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 6898 Speaker: Service and Repair Front SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front speaker grille screws. 2. Remove the radio front speaker grille. 3. Remove the DRL sensor from the right speaker grille, if equipped. 4. Turn the DRL sensor counterclockwise 1/4 turn in order to remove. 5. Remove the radio front speaker screws. 6. Remove the radio front speaker. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the radio front speaker. 3. Install the radio front speaker screws. Tighten the radio front speaker screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the DRL sensor to the right speaker grille, if equipped. 5. Turn the DRL sensor counterclockwise 1/4 turn in order to install. 6. Install the radio front speaker grille. 7. Install the radio front speaker grille screws. Tighten the radio front speaker screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 8. Inspect for proper circuit operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 6899 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Door SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR TOOLS REQUIRED J 34940 Rivet Gun REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the radio rear side door speaker retaining rivets. 3. Remove the radio rear side door speaker. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the radio side rear door speaker. 3. Install the speaker retaining rivets using J 34940. 4. Install the door trim panel. 5. Inspect for proper circuit operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 6900 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Door SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - FRONT DOOR TOOLS REQUIRED J 34940 Rivet Gun REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the speaker retaining rivets. 3. Remove the front side door speaker. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the radio front side door speaker. 3. Install the speaker retaining rivets using J 34940. 4. Install the door trim panel. 5. Inspect for proper circuit operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker Replacement Reference > Page 6901 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear (Utility) SPEAKER REPLACEMENT - REAR (UTILITY) TOOLS REQUIRED J 34940 Rivet Gun REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear body side trim panel. 2. Remove the radio rear speaker retaining rivets. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the radio rear speaker from the rear body side trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the radio rear speaker to the body side inner panel. 3. Install the speaker retaining rivets using J 34940. 4. Install the rear body side trim panel. 5. Inspect for proper circuit operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Tape Player > Component Information > Service and Repair Tape Player: Service and Repair CASSETTE PLAYER CARE AND CLEANING TOOLS REQUIRED J 39916-A CD and Cassette Diagnostic Audio Kit Follow the recommended cleaning schedule: - Clean the cassette player every 15 hours for the best performance. - Clean the cassette player every 50 hours in order to prevent damage to the tape head. Clean the following 2 parts on the tape player: - The head - The capstan Leave the tape player in the vehicle, since you can reach the parts through the tape door. Perform this service at least every 50 hours of cassette operation. After 50 hours of tape play, CLN (Clean) appears on the display as a reminder. Although the system will still function when this message is displayed, the following conditions may occur until the head and the capstan are cleaned: - Reduced sound quality - Damage to the cassette tapes After cleaning the cassette tape player, press and hold EJECT for 5 seconds in order to reset the CLN indicator. The radio displays - - - in order to show that the clean feature has been reset. Failure to clean the cassette player regularly may cause the following conditions: - Reduced sound quality - Damage to the cassettes - Damage to the mechanism Keep the cassette tapes correctly stored in their plastic cases away from the following conditions: - Contaminants - Direct sunlight - Extreme heat Failure to correctly store the cassette tapes may cause the following conditions: - Improper operation of the cassette tapes - Premature failure of the tape player The cassettes are subject to wear. The sound quality may degrade over time. Before servicing a tape player, verify that the following conditions exist: - The cassette tape is in good condition. - The tape player is clean. Clean the tape player at least after every 50 hours of use in order to provide optimum performance. The radio displays CLN as a reminder every 50 hours. If a reduction in the sound quality occurs, regardless of when the tape player was last cleaned, play a different cassette tape in order to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If the second cassette tape results in no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. Use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette (part of J 39916-A ) for proper tape player cleaning. This cleaner is a wet-type cleaning system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Tape Player > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6905 The wet-type cleaning system uses a cleaning cassette with pads. The pads scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. If you use this type of cleaner, the following conditions may occur: - The radio displays an error. - The cartridge ejects. These conditions are normal and is the result of an added feature in the tape player that detects broken tapes. If an error occurs, insert the cleaning cassette at least 3 times in order to thoroughly clean the tape player. You can also use a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner. This type of cleaner uses a cassette with a fabric belt which cleans the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not cause an error, but may not clean the tape player as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Accessory Delay Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6911 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6912 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6913 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6914 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6915 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6916 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6917 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6918 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6919 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6920 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6921 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6922 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6923 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6924 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6925 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6926 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6927 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6928 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6929 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6930 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6931 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6932 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6933 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 6934 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6943 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6948 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6953 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6954 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 6960 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 6977 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6982 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 6983 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7005 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7006 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7007 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7013 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7014 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7015 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7024 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7025 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7026 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7032 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7033 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 7034 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Passlock Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7047 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7048 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7049 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7050 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7051 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7052 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7053 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7054 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7055 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7056 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7057 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7058 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7059 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7060 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7061 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7062 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7063 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7064 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7065 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7066 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7067 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7068 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7069 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7070 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7071 Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the inflator module. 3. Remove the screws (1) which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. 4. Remove the two screws (1) which retain the control button assembly (2) to the steering wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7072 5. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the control button assembly (1). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the electrical connector (2) to the control button assembly (1). 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the control button assembly (2) to the steering wheel with the two screws (1). ^ Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (13 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Transmitter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7073 3. Install the horn contact plate to the steering wheel with the screws (1). ^ Tighten the screws to 5.5 Nm (50 inch lbs.). 4. Install the inflator module. 5. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Tow Hook Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower bumper valance. 2. Remove the bolts from the tow hooks. 3. Remove the hooks from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the tow hooks to the frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts to the tow hooks. Tighten the bolts to 55 N.m (41 lb ft). 3. Install the lower bumper valance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Trailer Hitch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear bumper impact bar. 2. Remove 4 nuts and 2 stud plate assemblies securing the trailer hitch to each frame rail. 3. Remove the hitch from the frame rails. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the trailer hitch to each frame rail with 4 nuts and 2 stud plate assemblies. Tighten the trailer hitch nuts to 90 N.m (66 lb ft). 2. Install the rear bumper impact bar. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel Details, RH Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7088 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7089 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7090 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7091 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7092 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7093 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7094 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7095 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7096 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7097 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7098 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7099 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7100 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7101 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7102 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7103 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7104 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7105 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7106 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7107 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7108 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7109 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7110 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7111 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7112 Body Control Module: Connector Views Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7113 Body Control Module (BCM) C1 Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7114 Body Control Module (BCM) C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7115 Body Control Module (BCM) C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System Body Control Module: Description and Operation Body Control System BODY CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION BCM FUNCTIONS The body control module (BCM) performs multiple body control functions. The BCM can control devices directly connected to its outputs based on input information. The BCM evaluates this information and controls certain body control systems by commanding outputs on or off. The BCM control inputs can be: Sensors and switches that are directly connected to the BCM - Class 2 serial data received from other control modules connected to the class 2 serial data link The BCM is also capable of controlling other vehicle systems that are not directly wired to the BCM. The BCM does this by sending specific messages on the class 2 serial data link. The control module capable of performing the required function will respond to the BCM message. The BCM controls these functions: Audible warnings-Refer to Audible Warnings Description and Operation in Instrument Panel, Gages and Console. - Automatic door locks-Refer to Power Door Locks Description and Operation in Doors. - Automatic headlamp control-Refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Interior lighting-Refer to Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation in Lighting Systems. - Keyless entry (AUO option)-Refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation in Keyless Entry. - Passlock theft deterrent-Refer to Vehicle Theft Deterrent (VTD) Description and Operation in Theft Deterrent. - Retained accessory power (RAP)-Refer to Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation. SERIAL DATA POWER MODE On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the power mode master (PMM). On this vehicle the PMM is the body control module (BCM). The BCM receives 2 signals from the ignition switch. These are the Ignition 1 and Ignition 3 circuits. To determine the correct power mode the BCM uses: The state of these signals/circuits, either switch closed or switch open. - The status of the engine run flag (ERF). Correct Ignition Switch Inputs The chart indicates the modes detected and transmitted by the BCM. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION Since the operation of the vehicle systems depends on the power mode, there is a fail-safe plan in place should the body control module (BCM) fail to send a power mode message. The fail-safe plan covers modules with discrete ignition signal inputs as well as those modules using exclusively serial data control of power mode. SERIAL DATA MESSAGES The modules that depend exclusively on serial data messages for power modes stay in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message until they receive the engine status from the powertrain control module (PCM). If the BCM fails, the modules monitor the serial data circuit for the engine run flag serial data. If the engine run flag serial data is true, indicating that the engine is running, the modules fail-safe to Run. In this state the modules and their subsystems can support all operator requirements. If the engine run flag serial data is false, indicating that the engine is not running, the modules fail-safe to OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. DISCRETE IGNITION SIGNALS Those modules that have discrete ignition signal inputs also remain in the state dictated by the last valid BCM message received on the serial data circuits. They then check the state of their discrete ignition input to determine the current valid state. If the discrete ignition input is active, B+, the modules will fail-safe to the RUN power mode. If the discrete ignition input is not active, open or 0 voltage, the modules will fail-safe to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 7118 OFF-AWAKE. In this state the modules are constantly checking for a change status message on the serial data circuits and can respond to both local inputs and serial data inputs from other modules on the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 7119 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Data Link Communications DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with modules on the class 2 serial data line. The serial data line is the means by which the microprocessor-controlled modules in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the scan tool is connected to the class 2 serial data line through the DLC, the scan tool can be used to monitor each module for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Class 2 serial data is transmitted on a single wire at an average of 10.4 kbps. This value is an average, class 2 uses a variable pulse width modulation to carry data and depending on the message it may operate faster or slower. The bus will float at a nominal 7.0 volts during normal operation. Each module can pull this lower during the transmission. The bus is not at battery positive voltage or ground potential during normal operation. When the ignition switch is in RUN, each module communicating on the class 2 serial data line sends a state of health (SOH) message every 2 seconds to ensure that the module is operating properly. When a module stops communicating on the class 2 serial data line, for example if the module loses power or ground, the SOH message it normally sends on the data line every 2 seconds disappears. Other modules on the class 2 serial data line, which expect to receive that SOH message, detect its absence; those modules in turn set an internal DTC associated with the loss of SOH of the non-communicating module. The DTC is unique to the module which is not communicating, for example, when the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) SOH message disappears, several modules set DTC U1088. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not normally represent a failure of the module that set it. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector located below the instrument panel and close to the steering column. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and it is required to provide the following: Scan tool power battery positive voltage at terminal 16 - Scan tool power ground at terminal 4 - Common signal ground at terminal 5 - Class 2 serial data signal at terminal 2 CLASS 2 SERIAL DATA LINE The class 2 serial data line on this vehicle is a star configuration. The following modules are attached to SP 201 and communicate on the class 2 serial data line: The body control module (BCM) - The driver information center (DIC), w/Trip - The electronic brake control module (EBCM) - The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) - The instrument panel cluster (IPC) - The memory seat module (MSM) - driver, w/D44 - The powertrain control module (PCM) - The radio - The transfer case shift control module (TCSCM), w/NP8 DIAGNOSTIC ENABLE CIRCUIT W/NP1 The transfer case shift control module is equipped with the ability to store diagnostic information, which is useful to a technician in the event of module, component or wiring failures. This information can be retrieved from the transfer case shift control module (TCSCM) by way of flash codes, which are displayed on the 3 transfer case shift control switch buttons. These buttons are located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. For more information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Displaying in Transfer Case - NVG 233-NP1. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Body Control System > Page 7120 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Retained Accessory Power (RAP) RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER (RAP) POWER MODE Retained accessory power (RAP) is a vehicle power mode that permits the operation of selected customer convenience items after the ignition switch is turned OFF. These selected items will remain in operation until a passenger compartment door is opened or until the RAP function timer reaches its limit. The body control module (BCM) turns OFF the RAP function and de-energizes the RAP relay when one of the following conditions are met: The BCM senses the opening of any door or the lift gate. - The ignition switch transitions from OFF to ON. - The BCM receives a message from its internal timer indicating the end of the RAP period after 10 minutes. - The BCM detects a decrease in battery capacity below a prescribed limit. The BCM monitors the ignition switch position, battery condition, and passenger compartment door status to determine whether RAP should be initiated. If the ignition switch transitions from ON to OFF, the battery voltage is within the acceptable range and the passenger compartment doors are closed, the body control module energizes the RAP relay. This provides power for the following: Driver information center (DIC) - Outside rearview mirror switch - Power door lock control switches - Power window control switches - Radio - Sunroof Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which are not communicating. - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7123 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms - Computer/Integrating Systems SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: There are no DTCs set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: - Data Link Communications Description and Operation - Body Control System Description and Operation - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: - Scan Tool Does Not Power Up See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Class 2 Device See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection - Power Mode Mismatch See: Power Mode Mismatch - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) On After Timeout - Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative See: Diagnosis By Symptom Computer/Integrating Systems/Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Inoperative Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7124 Steps 1 - 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7125 Steps 11 - 14 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7126 Steps 1 - 12 Power Mode Mismatch POWER MODE MISMATCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Normal vehicle class 2 communications and module operations will not begin until the system power mode has been identified. Discrete wires from the ignition switch contacts are monitored by the power mode master (PMM) module in order to determine the correct power mode. The PMM communicates the system power mode to all class 2 modules on the class 2 serial data line. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation to identify which module is the PMM and the applicable power mode look up table. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7127 Steps 1 - 6 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7128 Steps 7 - 13 The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 5. This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required. 6. This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits. 7. If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together. 8. This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7129 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS DATA Battery Voltage: The scan tool displays the battery voltage. RAP Timer: The scan tool displays the seconds left before the BCM turns the RAP relay OFF. The BCM uses this feature to allow the operation of the radio and the power windows for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes) after the ignition is turned OFF. After the time has elapsed or the door is opened the BCM will open the ground circuit for the RAP relay. INPUT 1 Driver Door Jamb Sw.: The scan tool displays the position of the driver door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the driver door is open. Ignition 1: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN or CRANK position. Ignition 3: The BCM uses this data in order to determine the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the ignition switch is in the RUN position only. Ignition Power Mode: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition switch. The scan tool displays OFF, RUN, CRANK and UNKNOWN. The UNKNOWN display is when the BCM can not determine the position of the ignition switch. Key in Ignition: The scan tool displays the position of the ignition key in the ignition switch cylinder. The scan tool displays YES when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition switch cylinder. The BCM uses this data in controlling the operation of the reminder chime feature. Liftglass/Rear Gate: The scan tool displays position of the liftglass/rear gate. Psgr. Door Jamb/Door Handle Switches: The scan tool displays the position of the passenger door. The scan tool displays ACTIVE when the door is open. RAP Relay Feedback: The scan tool displays the state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM activates the RAP relay. OUTPUTS RAP Relay: The scan tool displays the commanded state of the RAP relay. The scan tool displays ON when the BCM provides ground to the RAP relay control circuit. The BCM will allow operation of the radio and the power windows with the ignition OFF and the doors closed for up to 1198 seconds (approximately 20 minutes). MODULE INFORMATION 1 Manufacturers Enable Counter: The scan tool displays the actual value for the manufacturers enable counter (MEC) in the BCM. This information is for the assembly plant only. Software Design Suffix: The scan tool displays the version of the software part number in the BCM. Software Part Number: The scan tool displays the software identification number (ID) in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 2 RAP Calibration Number: The scan tool displays the RAP calibration part number in the BCM. RAP Suffix: The scan tool displays the RAP identification number in the BCM. MODULE INFORMATION 3 Module Part Number: The scan tool displays the part number assigned to the BCM that is currently in the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7130 Body Control Module (BCM) Scan Tool Output Controls Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Control Module: Procedures BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) PROGRAMMING/RPO CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION IMPORTANT: The following procedures must be followed: Programming the BCM - Programming Theft Deterrent System Components The procedures below are designed to setup the body control module (BCM) correctly during BCM related service. Before you start, read these procedures carefully and completely. PROGRAMMING THE BCM IMPORTANT: After the procedure is completed, the personalization settings of the BCM are set to a default setting. Inform the customer that the personalization must be set again. Perform the BCM special function "Request BCM Info. for SPS," then connect the scan tool to the SPS terminal. Refer to Service Programming System (SPS) in Programming and Setup. PROGRAMMING THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS Perform the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in Theft Deterrent after successfully finishing the Setup New BCM procedure. If the Programming Theft Deterrent System Components in the Theft Deterrent procedure is not performed after a BCM replacement, one of the following conditions will occur: The vehicle will not be protected against theft by the Passlock system. - The engine will not crank or start. IMPORTANT: After programming, perform the following to avoid future misdiagnosis: 1. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 2. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. 3. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. 4. Use the scan tool in order to retrieve history DTCs from all modules. 5. Clear all history DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7133 Body Control Module: Removal and Replacement BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The ignition switch should be in the OFF position when connecting or disconnecting the connectors to the body control module (BCM). Always disconnect the Brown BCM connector FIRST and connect the Brown BCM connector LAST. The BCM can set DTCs with the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Remove the lower I/P sound insulator from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the BCM. 4. Bend the 2 snap retainers back slightly and pull the BCM from the bracket at an angle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the BCM to the bracket at an angle under the wide hook retainer, with the label facing away from the bracket. 2. Apply pressure on the left side of the BCM in order to move the module toward the mounting bracket base. Snap the module into place. 3. Ensure that the module is fully seated. Ensure that both snap retainers are holding the module. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the BCM. Connect the brown connector LAST. 5. Install the lower I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 6. Install the left I/P sound insulator to the vehicle. 7. Use the following components in order to program the BCM with the proper calibrations: - The Techline Terminal - The scan tool 8. Perform the BCM programming. Refer to Body Control Module (BCM) Programming/RPO Configuration. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 9. Clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair > Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) Removal Procedure 1. Remove 8 nuts (1) and 4 U-bolts (3) securing the assist step assembly to the mounting brackets. 2. Remove the 11 nuts (2) and 4 brackets. 3. Remove the plastic end caps from the assist step assembly, if required. 1. Remove the 3 screws from the assist step assembly. 2. Remove the plastic end cap by pulling the cap straight out of the step assembly. 4. Remove the plastic step pads, if required, by breaking the plastic pad from the assist step assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install new plastic step pads to the assist step assembly by pressing the new pads into place. 2. Install the plastic end cap to the assist step assembly. 1. Install the plastic end cap by pressing the cap straight into the assist step assembly. 2. Install 3 screws into the step assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the 4 brackets and 11 nuts (2). Tighten to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 4. Install the assist step assembly to the mounting brackets with 4 U-bolts (3) and 8 nuts (1). Tighten the step assembly nuts to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair > Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) > Page 7138 5. If the studs are bent or missing, use a center punch at the center of the missing location. Using a 12.7 mm (0.5 in) drill, drill a hole. 6. Install a rivnut into the frame. 7. Install bolt (1) in rivnuts. Tighten to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair > Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) > Page 7139 Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair Assist Step Replacement (ZR2) Assist Step Replacement (ZR2) Removal Procedure 1. Remove 6 nuts (1) and 3 U-bolts (3) securing the assist step assembly to the mounting brackets. 2. Remove the 8 nuts (2) and 3 brackets. 3. Remove the plastic end caps from the assist step assembly, if required. 1. Remove the 3 screws from the assist step assembly. 2. Remove the plastic end cap by pulling the cap straight out of the step assembly. 4. Remove the plastic step pads, if required, by breaking the plastic pad from the assist step assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair > Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) > Page 7140 1. Install new plastic step pads to the assist step assembly by pressing the new pads into place. 2. Install the plastic end cap to the assist step assembly. 1. Install the plastic end cap by pressing the cap straight into the assist step assembly. 2. Install 3 screws into the step assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the 3 brackets and 8 nuts (2). Tighten to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 4. Install the assist step assembly to the mounting brackets with 3 U-bolts (3) and 6 nuts (1). Tighten the step assembly nuts to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 5. If the studs are bent or missing, use a center punch at the center of the missing location. Using a 12.7 mm (0.5 in) drill, drill a hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair > Assist Step Replacement (ZR5) > Page 7141 6. Install a rivnut into the frame. 7. Install bolt (1) in rivnuts. Tighten to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the grille. 2. Remove the push-pin retainers attaching the fascia to the front bumper. 3. Remove the front bumper fascia from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front bumper fascia to the vehicle. 2. Install the push-pin fascia retainers. Ensure that the retainers lock into position. 3. Install the grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) > Page 7150 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Xtreme) Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (Xtreme) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamps. 3. Remove the push-pins that retain the fascia to the impact bar. 4. Remove the screws that retain the fascia to the fascia support. 5. Remove the fascia from the impact bar retainers. 6. Remove the fascia from the vehicle. 7. Remove the front fog lamps from the fascia. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front fog lamp to the fascia. 2. Install the front fascia to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the fascia screws to the impact bar retainers. Tighten the fascia screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 4. Install the push-pins that retain the fascia to the impact bar. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the fog lamps. 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) > Page 7151 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Air Deflector Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia (Pickups and Utilities) Air Deflector Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia (Pickups and Utilities) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front bumper from the vehicle. 2. Remove the license plate bracket, if equipped. 3. Remove the push-in retainers from each end of the deflector. 4. Pull the air deflector retainers from the slots in the bumper. 5. Remove the deflector from the vehicle. 6. Remove the fog lamps from the deflector, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fog lamps to the deflector, if equipped. 2. Install the deflector to the vehicle. Ensure that the retainers lock into position. 3. Install the license plate bracket, if equipped. 4. Install 2 air deflector push-in retainers, one on either end of the deflector. 5. Install the front bumper to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) > Page 7152 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Air Deflector Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia (Optional) Air Deflector Replacement - Front Bumper Fascia (Optional) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front bumper from the vehicle. 2. Remove the license plate bracket, if equipped. 3. Remove 6 push-in retainers securing the deflector to the bumper. 4. Pull the air deflector retainers from the slots in the bumper. 5. Remove the deflector from the vehicle. 6. Remove the fog lamps from the deflector, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fog lamps to the deflector, if equipped. 2. Install the deflector to the vehicle. Ensure that the snap retainers lock into position. 3. Install 6 push-in air deflector retainers securing the deflector to the bumper. 4. Install the license plate bracket, if equipped. 5. Install the front bumper to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Front Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the grille. 2. Remove the radiator air intake baffle. 3. Remove the front wheel opening flare extension, if equipped. 4. Remove the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the bumper impact bar. 5. Disconnect the fog lamp connectors, if equipped. 6. Remove the nuts and the bolts that retain the bumper impact bar to the frame. 7. Remove the bumper impact bar from the vehicle. 8. If replacing the bumper impact bar, perform the following: 1. Remove the license plate bracket, if equipped. 2. Remove the air deflector from the bumper impact bar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the following components if removed: 1. Install the air deflector to the bumper impact bar. 2. Install the license plate bracket. 2. Install the bumper impact bar to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the bolts and the nuts that retain the bumper impact bar to the frame. Tighten the bumper impact bar to the frame bolts to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 4. Install the fog lamp connectors, if equipped. 5. Install the nuts and the bolts that retain the bumper impact bars to the brace. Tighten the bumper impact bar to the brace bolts to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper > Page 7159 6. Install the front wheel opening flare extension, if equipped. 7. Install the radiator air intake baffle. 8. Install the grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper > Page 7160 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Brace Replacement - Front Bumper (Chevrolet) Brace Replacement - Front Bumper (Chevrolet) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the impact bar. 2. Remove the 2 nuts and bolts that retain the brace to the frame. 3. Remove the brace from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brace to the vehicle. 2. Install the 2 nuts and bolts that retain the brace to the bumper frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the bumper impact bar. Tighten the front bumper brace bolts to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Impact Bar Replacement - Front Bumper > Page 7161 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Brace Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) Brace Replacement - Front Bumper (GMC) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the impact bar. 2. Remove the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the frame. 3. Remove the brace from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the brace to the vehicle. 2. Install the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the bumper frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the nut and the bolt that retain the brace to the bumper impact bar. Tighten the front bumper brace bolts to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Panel Replacement - Rear Bumper (Standard) Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Filler Panel Replacement - Rear Bumper (Standard) Filler Panel Replacement - Rear Bumper (Standard) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the license plate lamp harness. 2. Remove the bolts which retain the rear bumper filler panel to the vehicle. 3. Remove the rear bumper filler panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the bumper filler panel to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts which retain the rear bumper filler panel to the vehicle. Tighten the rear bumper filler panel bolts to 1.5 N.m (14 lb in). 3. Install the license plate lamp harness. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Filler Panel Replacement - Rear Bumper (Standard) > Page 7169 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement - Rear Bumper Removal Procedure 1. Remove the license lamps. 2. Remove all of the step pads from the bumper. 3. Remove the clips securing the fascia at the bottom of the impact bar. 4. Remove the fascia. Installation Procedure 1. Install the fascia to the impact bar with the clips on the bottom edge of the fascia. 2. Install the step pads to the bumper. 3. Install the license lamps. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7174 Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Impact Bar Replacement - Rear Bumper (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear bumper step pads. 2. Remove the license plate lamps. 3. Remove the nuts and the bolts that retain the rear bumper impact bar to the bumper bracket. 4. Remove the rear bumper impact bar from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the rear bumper impact bar to the vehicle as follows: 1. Position the bumper impact bar on the bumper brackets so that the holes in the impact bar are aligned with the bracket holes. 2. Install 2 bolt plates and 4 nuts on top of the impact bar. 3. Install 2 bolt and nuts through the bottom of the impact bar. Tighten the rear bumper impact bar nuts to 90 N.m (66 lb ft). 2. Install the license plate lamps. 3. Install the rear bumper step pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Duct: Service and Repair Pressure Relief Valve Replacement (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the body side stationary window (2-Door only). 2. Remove the molding from the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Remove the pressure relief ventilation valve using a flat-bladed tool in order to release the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure relief ventilation valve assembly pressing into place until firmly seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7178 2. Install the molding to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Install the molding fasteners to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 4. Install the body side stationary window (2-Door only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Pressure Relief Valve Replacement (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the body side stationary window (2-Door only). 2. Remove the molding from the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Remove the pressure relief ventilation valve using a flat-bladed tool in order to release the retainers. Installation Procedure 1. Install the pressure relief ventilation valve assembly pressing into place until firmly seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7182 2. Install the molding to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 3. Install the molding fasteners to the quarter panel rear window (4-Door only). 4. Install the body side stationary window (2-Door only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the bolt from the right and the left vent grille end panels. 3. Lift up on the right and the left vent grille end panels to release the retaining clips. 4. Remove the right and the left vent grille end panels. 5. Remove the screws that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 6. Remove the push-pin retainers that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 7. Remove the center vent grille panel from the cowl. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7187 1. Install the center vent grille panel to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 3. Install the push-pin retainers securing the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 4. Install the right and the left vent grille end panels to the cowl. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the screws securing the securing the right and the left vent grille ends to the cowl. 6. Install the windshield wiper arms. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Front Outside Removal Procedure 1. Close the window. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove the water deflector. 4. Remove the outside door handle screw access hole plug. 5. Remove the outside door lock rod from the handle (2). 6. Remove the outside door handle rod from the handle (1). 7. Remove the screws that retain the outside door handle to the door panel. 8. Remove the outside door handle from the door. 9. Remove and retain the lock cylinder from the outside door handle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lock cylinder to the outside door handle. 2. Install the outside door handle to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7195 3. Install the screws that retains the outside door handle to the door panel. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 4. Install the outside door lock rod to the handle (2). 5. Install the outside door handle rod to the handle (1). 6. Install the outside door handle screw access hole plug. 7. Install the water deflector. 8. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Handle Switch > System Information > Diagrams Door Handle Switch - Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Handle Switch > System Information > Diagrams > Page 7199 Front Door Handle Switch: Service and Repair POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Replacement Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement Door Handle Replacement - Front Inside Door Handle Replacement - Front Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the inside door handle rods. 3. Remove the inside door handle retaining rivets. 4. Remove the inside door handle from the door by sliding the handle rearward. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inside door handle to the door by sliding the handle forward. Ensure that the handle is properly seated. 2. Install the inside door handle retaining rivets. 3. Install the inside door handle rods. 4. Install the door trim panel. Door Handle Replacement - Inside Door Handle Replacement - Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Replacement > Page 7204 2. Remove the handle retaining bolt. 3. Release the handle locator tab from the locator cutout, by sliding the handle forward. 4. Release the rod retainer locks. 5. Remove the rods from the handle. 6. Remove the handle from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Position the handle to the door. 2. Install the rods to the handle. 3. Install the rod retainer locks. 4. Insert the handle locator tab into the locator cutout and move the handle rearward, indexing the fastener hole to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the handle retaining bolt. Tighten bolt to 10 N.m (88 lb in). 6. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Replacement > Page 7205 Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Components Handle Bezel Replacement - Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screw that retains the front inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw that retains the rear inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. 3. Remove the inside door handle bezel from the door trim panel by sliding rearward. Installation Procedure 1. Route the inside door handle and the lock rod through the appropriate openings in the bezel. 2. Align the lock rod to the door lock knob. 3. Position the bezel and snap the bezel into place. 4. Install the rear inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. 5. Install the front inside door bezel to the door trim panel. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Insert the screw that retains the inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Replacement > Page 7206 Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Hinge Roller Pin Replacement - Door Tools Required J 36604 Door Hinge Spring Compressor Removal Procedure Caution: Before removing the spring, cover the spring with a towel to prevent the spring from flying and possibly causing damage or personal injury. 1. Remove the door hinge spring using the J 36604. 2. Remove the C-clips that retain the door hinge roller pins. 3. Support the door in the open position. 4. Remove the door hinge roller pins from the vehicle. Use a soft-faced hammer and locking pliers in order to remove the hinge pins. 5. Position the door away from the hinge. Remove and discard the old bushings. Installation Procedure 1. Install the new bushings and position the door on the hinges. 2. Install the door hinge roller pins to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7210 3. Install the C-clips that retain the door hinge roller pins. 4. Install the door hinge spring using the J 36604. 5. Lubricate the hinge roller pins using multi-purpose lubricant Superlube (GM P/N 12346241) or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Front Door Latch: Customer Interest Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 7219 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Front Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 7225 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7226 Front Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7227 The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7228 Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 7229 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7230 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Raise the window to the closed position. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove the water deflector. 4. Remove the inside door lock rod (1) from the latch assembly. 5. Remove the inside door handle rod (2) from the latch assembly. 6. Remove the outside door lock rod (1) from the latch assembly. 7. Remove the outside door handle rod (2) from the latch assembly. 8. Disconnect the power actuator wiring connector, if equipped. 9. Remove the fasteners that retain the latch assembly to the door. 10. Remove the latch assembly from the door. 11. Remove the lock actuator from the latch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lock actuator to the latch. 2. Install the latch assembly to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the fasteners that retain the latch assembly to the door. Tighten the fasteners to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 4. Connect the power actuator wiring connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7231 5. Install the outside door handle rod (2) to the latch assembly. 6. Install the outside lock rod (1) to the latch assembly. 7. Install the inside door handle rod (2) to the latch assembly. 8. Install the inside door lock rod to the latch assembly (1). 9. Install the water deflector. 10. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Bezel Replacement Handle Bezel Replacement - Inside Handle Bezel Replacement - Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screw that retains the front inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw that retains the rear inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. 3. Remove the inside door handle bezel from the door trim panel by sliding rearward. Installation Procedure 1. Route the inside door handle and the lock rod through the appropriate openings in the bezel. 2. Align the lock rod to the door lock knob. 3. Position the bezel and snap the bezel into place. 4. Install the rear inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. 5. Install the front inside door bezel to the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement > Page 7236 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Insert the screw that retains the inside door handle bezel to the door trim panel. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Door Handle Bezel Replacement Door Handle Bezel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel from the door. 2. Release the 4 tabs retaining the bezel to the trim panel. 3. Remove the bezel from the trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the bezel to the door, ensuring that all 4 retaining tabs are fully seated. 2. Install the door trim panel to the door. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement > Page 7237 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Panel Replacement Trim Panel Replacement - Side Front Door Tools Required J 38778 Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the inside door handle bezel. 2. Remove the window regulator handle, if equipped. 3. Remove the power accessory switch mounting panel, if equipped with power accessories. 4. Remove the trim panel armrest screws. 5. Use the J 38778 in order to release the door trim panel retainers. 6. Remove the door trim panel from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the door trim panel to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the trim panel armrest screws. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting plate, if equipped with power accessories. 4. Install the window regulator handle, if equipped. 5. Install the inside door handle bezel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement > Page 7238 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Water Deflector Replacement - Door Water Deflector Replacement - Door Removal Procedure Waterproof deflectors are used in order to seal the door inner panel and prevent water from entering the body. The deflector is secured by a strip of adhesive between the water deflector and the door. 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the door speaker if equipped. 3. Remove the water deflector(s) from the door. 4. Remove the water deflector(s) from the rear side door. 5. Break the bond between the sealer and the door with a flat-bladed tool in order to remove the deflector(s). Installation Procedure 1. Install the water deflector(s) to the rear side door. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Bezel Replacement > Page 7239 2. Install the water deflector(s) to the door. 3. Use strip caulking as a sealant between the deflector(s) and the door if necessary. 4. Install the door speaker. 5. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Striker Replacement - Door Removal Procedure Important: If both of the door striker bolts are removed at the same time, the striker backing plate will fall into the body. This will result in additional time to perform the repair. 1. Remove the front door lower striker bolt. 2. Remove the rear door lower striker bolt. 3. Loosen the upper striker bolts enough in order to rotate the striker and the spacer (if equipped) away from the lower bolt hole. 4. Install the lower striker bolt. Tighten the lower striker bolt sufficiently in order to hold the striker backing plate in place. 5. Remove the following components: * The upper striker bolt * The spacer (if equipped) * The striker Installation Procedure 1. Install the following components: * The striker * The spacer (if equipped) * The upper striker bolt 2. If the striker backing plate has moved, rotate the lower striker bolt until the upper threaded hole is properly aligned. 3. Remove the lower bolt. 4. Rotate the striker and the spacer (if equipped) in order to align the lower threaded hole in the striker backing plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7243 5. Install the front door lower striker bolt. 6. Install the rear lower striker bolt. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 7. Adjust the door striker in order to properly engage the door latch, if necessary. Loosen the door striker bolts in order to adjust the door striker. Tighten the door striker bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door opening weatherstrip from the door opening. 2. Gently pull the weatherstrip from the pinch weld flange. Installation Procedure 1. Install the door opening weatherstrip to the door opening. 2. Position the pre-formed corner of the weatherstrip in the upper rear corner of the door opening. 3. Push the weatherstrip onto the pinch weld flange. Start at the pre-formed corner and work around the entire edge of the door opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening > Page 7248 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door (Drip Channel) Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door (Drip Channel) Removal Procedure 1. Open the door. 2. Remove the weatherstrip drip channel (3). Installation Procedure Important: Apply the drip channel in an environment free of dust or dirt that could come in contact with the sticky backing (2) and prevent proper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the drip channel is to be mounted. Use a general purpose adhesive remover. 2. Clean the affected body area with wax and grease remover, and wipe with isopropyl alcohol. 3. Dry the area thoroughly. 4. Ensure the body area is at a temperature range of 21-41°C (80-105°F). 5. Ensure that the drip channel is at a temperature range of 21-41°C (80-105°F). 6. Install end of drip channel begining at the upper rear corner (4) of front side door opening frame, towards the windshield reveal molding flange (1) removing the tape backing as seal is applied. 7. When the drip channel is in position use a roller to firmly attach the tape to the entire contact surface. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening > Page 7249 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Door Bottom Sealing Strip Replacement - Door Bottom Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad Clip Remover Removal Procedure Use the J 38778 in order to remove the door bottom weatherstrip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Position the door bottom weatherstrip. 2. Press the weatherstrip into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Weatherstrip Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Weatherstrip Weatherstrip Replacement - Window The outer door weatherstrip is used in order to seal the inner and outer door panels and the window at the belt line. The outer door weatherstrip can be replaced. Do not remove the inner sealing strip since the strip is stapled to the trim panel. Removal Procedure 1. Open the window. 2. Remove outer door weather strip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Position the weatherstrip and press it into place. 2. Close the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Weatherstrip > Page 7255 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the side front door trim panel. 2. Remove the staples that secure the sealing strip to the trim panel. 3. Remove the sealing strip. Installation Procedure 1. Position the sealing strip on the trim panel. 2. Install the sealing strip to the trim panel using the original staples or a heavy-duty staple gun. 3. Install the side front door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Motor Replacement - Power Window Removal Procedure Caution: Do not attempt to service the regulator motor without releasing the counterbalance spring tension. The regulator lift arm is under tension from the counterbalance spring and can cause personal injury if the motor is removed from the regulator. 1. Remove the window regulator. 2. Drill a hole through the window regulator and the sector gear. 3. Install a bolt and a nut through the hole in order to lock the sector gear in position. 4. Drill out the rivets that secure the power window motor to the window regulator. 5. Remove the power window motor from the window regulator. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power window motor to the window regulator. Important: Remove the nut and the bolt that were used in order to secure the sector gear in position. 2. Install the rivets in order to secure the power window motor to the window regulator. 3. Install the window regulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door Tools Required J 34940 Rivet Gun Removal Procedure 1. Remove the window. 2. Disconnect the power window motor electrical connector, if equipped. 3. Remove the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 4. Drill out the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door. 5. Remove the window regulator from the door. 6. Remove the power window motor, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power window motor, if equipped. 2. Install the window regulator to the door. 3. Install the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door using J 34940. 4. Connect the electrical connector, if equipped. 5. Connect the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 6. Install the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Rear Outside Removal Procedure 1. Close the window. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Peel back the corner of the water deflector in order to expose the door handle screw access hole. 4. Remove the outside door handle screw access hole plug. 5. Remove the outside door handle rod from the handle. 6. Remove the screws that retain the outside door handle to the door panel. 7. Remove the outside door handle from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the outside door handle to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws that retain the outside door handle to the door. Tighten the screws to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the outside door handle rod to the handle. 4. Install the outside door handle screw access hole plug. 5. Return the water deflector corner to the original position. 6. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Replacement - Rear Inside Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the inside door handle rod (2). 3. Remove the inside door handle retaining rivets. 4. Remove the inside door handle from the door by sliding the handle rearward. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inside door handle to the door by sliding the handle forward. Ensure that the handle is properly seated. 2. Install the inside door handle retaining rivets. 3. Install the inside door handle rod (2). 4. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: Customer Interest Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 7278 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Rear Door Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 05-08-64-002B > Apr > 06 > Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold > Page 7284 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7285 Rear Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7286 The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-64-002B Date: 060403 Body - Door Latches Freezes in Extreme Cold Bulletin No.: 05-08-64-002B Date: April 03, 2006 TECHNICAL Subject: Door Latch Freezing in Cold Temperatures (Apply Super Lube) Models: 2005-2007 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-64-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7287 Some customers may comment on a door latch freezing due to ice accumulation in cold temperatures. Cause Water from a car wash or off the road may have entered the latch and frozen, causing the detent to move slowly. GM Super Lube(R) has been found to be an ideal solution to resolve latch freezing. Correction 1. Verify that the striker properly engages the latch and that no obstructions are preventing the door from closing. Important: The latch and its backing plate have been removed on the above illustration to show the location for the lube. 2. Allow the latch to completely thaw and apply compressed air for two seconds to the latch to force out any moisture. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the location. Spray GM Super Lube(R) on BOTH sides of the latch detent lever for approximately two to three seconds. Refer to the above illustration (slashed area) for the lube location. Repeat for all door latches. Operate the door latch several times to spread the lubricant on all surfaces. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 7288 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7289 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Raise the window to the closed position. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove the water deflector. 4. Remove the inside door lock rod (1) from the latch assembly. 5. Remove the inside door handle rod from the latch assembly. 6. Remove the outside door handle rod from the latch assembly. 7. Disconnect the power actuator wiring connector, of equipped. 8. Remove the fasteners that retain the latch assembly to the door. 9. Remove the latch assembly from the door. 10. Remove the lock actuator from the latch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the lock actuator to the latch. 2. Install the latch assembly to the door. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7290 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the fasteners that retain the latch assembly to the door. Tighten the fasteners to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 4. Connect the power actuator wiring connector, if equipped. 5. Install the outside door handle rod to the latch assembly. 6. Install the inside door handle rod to the latch assembly. 7. Install the inside door lock rod (1) to the latch assembly. 8. Install the water deflector. 9. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Side Rear Door (Utility) Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the window weatherstrip 2. Remove the door handle bezel. 3. Remove the window regulator handle, if equipped. 4. Remove the power window switch, if equipped. 5. Remove the trim panel screws from the armrest. Carefully pry off the cover using a flat-bladed tool. 6. Use the J 38778 in order to release the door trim panel retainers. 7. Remove the door trim panel from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the door trim panel to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the trim panel armrest screws to the armrest. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 3. Position the cover and snap the cover into place. 4. Install the power window switch, if equipped. 5. Install the window regulator handle, if equipped. 6. Install the inside door handle bezel. 7. Install the window weatherstrip. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the rear side door window. 2. Remove the rear side door window weatherstrip. Start the at butt joint and pull the weatherstrip from the window opening. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear side door weatherstrip. 2. Locate the butt joint at the bottom center of the window opening and set the weatherstrip around the window opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window > Page 7298 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Upper Removal Procedure Pull the weatherstrip from the door frame. Installation Procedure Push the weatherstrip molding over the door frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the rear side door window. 2. Remove the rear side door window weatherstrip. Start the at butt joint and pull the weatherstrip from the window opening. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear side door weatherstrip. 2. Locate the butt joint at the bottom center of the window opening and set the weatherstrip around the window opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Tools Required J 34940 Rivet Gun Removal Procedure Important: The rear door power window motor and regulator replacement parts are sold as an assembly. Do not attempt to separate the motor from the regulator before verifying that separate replacement parts are available. 1. Remove the window. 2. Disconnect the power window motor electrical connector, if equipped. 3. Remove the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 4. Drill out the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door. 5. Remove the window regulator and the motor assembly (power windows only) from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the window regulator and the motor assembly (power windows only) to the door. 2. Install the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door using J 34940. 3. Install the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 4. Install the power window motor electrical connector, if equipped. 5. Install the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Hinge: > 01-08-63-001B > Dec > 05 > Body - Hood Hinge Rattling Noises Hood Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Hood Hinge Rattling Noises Bulletin No.: 01-08-63-001B Date: December 12, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Hood Hinge Rattle (Install Spring Washer) Models: 1995-2004 Chevrolet S-10 1995-2005 Chevrolet Blazer 1995-2004 GMC Sonoma 1995-2005 GMC Jimmy 1996-2002 Oldsmobile Bravada (Plant Codes 8 and K) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-63-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle coming from either or both front corners of the instrument panel near the hood hinge areas. This noise may often be mistaken for a loose shock absorber. The rattle may be heard when driving over rough roads and is most noticeable when the road surface creates a side-to-side vehicle motion. Cause Excessive clearance at the hood hinge attaching bolt may cause this condition. The excessive clearance allows the hood hinge to make metal contact with the hood hinge bracket, which produces a rattling noise. Correction Important: For additional information, see the Body Front End subsection of the Body and Accessories Section of the appropriate Service Manual. 1. Remove the hood hinge attaching bolt (1). 2. Install a spring washer (2) on the bolt as shown in above illustration. 3. Install the bolt. Tighten Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Hinge: > 01-08-63-001B > Dec > 05 > Body - Hood Hinge Rattling Noises > Page 7315 Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Hinge: > 01-08-63-001B > Dec > 05 > Body - Hood Hinge Rattling Noises Hood Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Hood Hinge Rattling Noises Bulletin No.: 01-08-63-001B Date: December 12, 2005 TECHNICAL Subject: Hood Hinge Rattle (Install Spring Washer) Models: 1995-2004 Chevrolet S-10 1995-2005 Chevrolet Blazer 1995-2004 GMC Sonoma 1995-2005 GMC Jimmy 1996-2002 Oldsmobile Bravada (Plant Codes 8 and K) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-63-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rattle coming from either or both front corners of the instrument panel near the hood hinge areas. This noise may often be mistaken for a loose shock absorber. The rattle may be heard when driving over rough roads and is most noticeable when the road surface creates a side-to-side vehicle motion. Cause Excessive clearance at the hood hinge attaching bolt may cause this condition. The excessive clearance allows the hood hinge to make metal contact with the hood hinge bracket, which produces a rattling noise. Correction Important: For additional information, see the Body Front End subsection of the Body and Accessories Section of the appropriate Service Manual. 1. Remove the hood hinge attaching bolt (1). 2. Install a spring washer (2) on the bolt as shown in above illustration. 3. Install the bolt. Tighten Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Hinge: > 01-08-63-001B > Dec > 05 > Body - Hood Hinge Rattling Noises > Page 7321 Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure 1. Use the J 38778 in order to remove the retainers that retain the insulator to the hood. 2. Remove the insulator from the hood. Installation Procedure 1. Install the insulator to the hood. 2. Install the retainers to the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Adjustments Hood Latch: Adjustments Hood Latch Adjustment Inspection Procedure 1. Release the primary hood latch in order to inspect the operation of the pop-up spring. 2. Attempt to raise the hood while the hood is in the pop-up position. * The hood should raise without the hood striker binding against the latch. * The secondary latch should engage in order to prevent the hood from being raised. Adjustment Procedure 1. Remove the hood latch mounting bracket. 2. Loosen the nuts that retain the hood latch support to the hood latch mounting bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Move the hood latch from side to side until the striker enters the center of the latch assembly. Tighten the primary hood latch support bracket mounting bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Replacement - Primary Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement - Primary Hood Latch Replacement - Primary Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the hood release cable from the primary hood latch: 1. Place a flat-bladed tool into the cable clip. 2. Pry the cable clip open in order to remove the cable. 3. Pry the cable housing from the primary latch. 3. Mark the mounting bracket position. 4. Remove the bolts that retain the primary latch mounting bracket to the radiator support. 5. Remove the primary hood latch and mounting bracket from the vehicle. 6. Remove the bolts that retain the primary hood latch to the mounting bracket. 7. Remove the primary hood latch from the mounting bracket. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Replacement - Primary > Page 7330 1. Install the bolts that retain the primary hood latch to the mounting bracket. Tighten the primary hood latch mounting bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 2. Position the primary hood latch assembly on the radiator support. 3. Use the marks in order to align the bracket. 4. Install the bolts that retain the primary hood latch to the mounting bracket. Tighten the primary hood latch mounting bracket bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the cable to the primary hood latch assembly, by performing the following procedures: 1. Install the cable housing into the primary latch. 2. Install the cable into the latch container clip. 6. Inspect the operation of the hood latch. 7. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Replacement - Primary > Page 7331 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement - Secondary Hood Latch Replacement - Secondary Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the bolts that retain the latch assembly to the hood. 3. Remove the secondary hood latch assembly from the hood. Installation Procedure 1. Install the secondary hood latch assembly to the hood. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the secondary hood latch bolts that retain the latch assembly to the hood. Tighten the secondary hood latch mounting bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Replacement - Primary > Page 7332 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Support Replacement Hood Latch Support Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open and support the hood. 2. Remove the grille. 3. Remove the primary latch assembly. 4. Remove the bolts that retain the primary hood latch support bracket to the radiator support. 5. Remove the primary hood latch support from the vehicle. 6. Mark the position of the nuts that retain the latch mounting bracket to the support bracket. 7. Remove the primary latch mounting bracket from the support bracket bolts. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the bolts that retain the primary latch mounting bracket to the support bracket. Tighten the primary latch mounting bracket to the support bracket bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Replacement - Primary > Page 7333 2. Install the primary latch support bracket to the vehicle. 3. Install the bolts that retain the primary latch support bracket to the radiator support. Tighten the primary latch support bracket to the radiator support bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the primary hood latch assembly. 5. Install the radiator grille. 6. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Replacement - Primary > Page 7334 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Pop-Up Spring Replacement Hood Pop-Up Spring Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to push in the hood mounted end of the spring in order to release the retainers. 2. Remove the spring from the hood. Installation Procedure 1. Position the spring to the hood. 2. Insert the spring into the hood retainers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open and support the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the windshield wiper washer reservoir. 4. Remove the screws securing the underhood fuse block in order to pull the unit away from the fender. Important: Block the hood latch in order to prevent the hood from locking until you have installed the hood latch release cable. 5. Disconnect the hood latch cable from the primary latch assembly. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to release the clip and lift the cable assembly from the primary latch. 6. In order to aid in installation, tie a mechanic's wire to the end of the cable. 7. Remove the clips that retain the hood release cable. Pry open the clips with a flat-bladed tool. 8. Pull the cable back through the opening between the radiator support and the left fender. 9. Pull the cable back from behind the antilock brake module. 10. Remove the body hinge trim panel. 11. Remove the hood release cable grommet. 12. Remove the adhesive tape securing the release cable to the side of the cowl. 13. Remove the hood release cable and the lever bolts from the cowl side panel. 14. Remove the hood latch cable assembly from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7338 Guide the cable through the cowl panel underneath the instrument panel from the inside of the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the hood latch assembly to the vehicle. Guide the cable through the cowl panel underneath the instrument panel from the inside of the vehicle. 2. Guide the cable along the left fender behind the antilock brake module, the underhood fuse block, and the windshield wiper/washer reservoir. 3. Route the cable around the end of the radiator support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the hood release cable and the lever bolts to the cowl side panel. Tighten the hood release cable and the lever bolts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Secure the release cable to the side of the cowl with adhesive tape. 6. Install the hood release cable to the retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7339 7. Install the hood release cable grommet. 8. Install the hood latch cable to the latch. 9. Install the body hinge pillar trim panel. 10. Install the screws securing the underhood fuse block. 11. Install the windshield wiper/washer reservoir. 12. Connect the negative battery cable. 13. Inspect the hood latch release cable for proper operation. 14. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Hood Hold-Open Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise the hood. Support the hood with something other than the hood hold-open rod. 2. Remove the hood hold-open rod from the retainers. Pull the bottom of the rod toward you in order to release the rod from the bottom retainer. 3. Remove the retainers from the radiator support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the retainers to the radiator support. 2. Install the hood hold-open rod to the retainers. 3. Remove the temporary hood support. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Stop > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Stop: Service and Repair Hood Bumper Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front hood bumper by turning the front hood bumper (1) out counterclockwise. 2. Remove the side hood bumper by sliding the side hood bumper (2) rearward and pulling up. Installation Procedure 1. Install the side hood bumper by pushing down and sliding the side hood bumper (2) forward. 2. Install the front hood bumper (1) by turning the front hood bumper in clockwise until the hood closes flush with the fender. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Front Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Front Seal Replacement - Hood Front Removal Procedure 1. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the seal assembly away from the flange. 2. Remove the seal from the hood. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal assembly to the hood. 2. Press the seal assembly into place until fully seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Front > Page 7350 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws securing the seal to the cowl. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully break the adhesive bond. 3. Remove the seal from the cowl plenum flange. 4. Clean the flange. Use a suitable solvent such as a mixture of 50 percent isopropyl alcohol and 50 percent water or high-flash naptha. 5. Dry the area thoroughly. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the liner from the adhesive strip. 2. Position the seal to the cowl plenum. 3. Press the seal into place. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the screws to secure the seal to the cowl. Tighten the cowl plenum seal screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Endgate Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate. 2. Starting at the corner of the endgate flange, pull the weatherstrip molding from the endgate. Installation Procedure 1. Push the ends of the weatherstrip onto the endgate flange corners. 2. Push the weatherstrip molding onto the flange along the entire length of the endgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Locations Endgate Harness Routing View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7359 Liftglass Release Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7360 Liftgate (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7361 Liftglass Release Actuator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7362 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Service and Repair Lock Actuator Replacement - Rear Compartment Lid Tools Required J 34940 Rivet Gun Removal Procedure 1. Remove the endgate cover. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed. 3. Drill out the rivets that retain the endgate window release actuator to the endgate cover. 4. Remove the endgate window release actuator from the endgate cover. Installation Procedure 1. Install the endgate window release actuator to the endgate cover. 2. Install the rivets that retain the endgate window release actuator to the endgate cover using the J 34940 . 3. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Install the endgate cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Endgate Harness Routing View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7366 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams Rear Window Wiper Cutout and Liftglass Ajar Jamb Switch (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7367 Liftglass/End Gate Lock Cylinder Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Handle Replacement - Endgate (Utility) Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Handle Replacement - Endgate (Utility) Handle Replacement - Endgate (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the handle grip screws. 2. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 3. Release the liftgate handle rod retainer. 4. Remove the bolts that retain the liftgate outside handle to the liftgate. 5. Remove the liftgate outside handle from the liftgate. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Handle Replacement - Endgate (Utility) > Page 7372 1. Install the liftgate outside handle to the liftgate. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts that retain the liftgate outside handle to the liftgate. Tighten the bolts to 4 N.m (35 lb in). 3. Install the liftgate handle rod to the liftgate handle. 4. Engage the retainer. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Handle Replacement - Endgate (Utility) > Page 7373 Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Handle Replacement - Rear Door Inside Handle Replacement - Rear Door Inside Tools Required J 34940 Rivet Gun Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the inside handle to the endgate handle assembly. 3. Drill out the rivets that retain the endgate handle assembly to the endgate. 4. Remove the endgate handle assembly from the endgate. Installation Procedure 1. Position the endgate handle assembly on the endgate. 2. Install the endgate handle assembly to the endgate with 2 rivets using a J 34940 . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the screws that retain the inside handle to the endgate handle assembly. Tighten the screws to 2.8 N.m (25 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Handle Replacement - Endgate (Utility) > Page 7374 Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Pullstrap Replacement - Liftgate Pullstrap Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screw that retains the liftgate assist handle to the liftgate trim panel. 2. Carefully pry at the edge of the liftgate assist handle in order to remove the liftgate assist handle from the liftgate trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the liftgate assist handle to the liftgate trim panel. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screw that retains the liftgate assist handle to the liftgate trim panel. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Endgate Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Endgate Trim Panel Replacement - Endgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the inside handle to the endgate. 3. Remove the endgate inside handle from the endgate. 4. Remove the screw that retains the endgate trim panel to the endgate window latch support. 5. Remove the screws that retain the endgate trim panel to the endgate. 6. Remove the endgate trim panel from the endgate: 1. Release the retaining clips from the upper edge and the sides of the trim panel. 2. Lift the panel up in order to release the tabs along the bottom edge. Installation Procedure 1. Install the endgate trim panel to the endgate. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws that retain the endgate trim panel to the endgate. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 3. Install the screw that retains the endgate trim panel to the endgate window latch support. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 4. Install the endgate inside handle to the endgate. Tighten the handle to 2.8 N.m (25 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Panel Replacement - Endgate > Page 7379 Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate Trim Panel Replacement - Liftgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the liftgate window. 2. Remove the screw retaining the liftgate trim panel to the liftgate window latch support. 3. Open the liftgate. 4. Remove the pullstrap. 5. Remove the trim panel from the liftgate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the trim panel to the liftgate. 2. Install the pullstrap. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the screw retaining the liftgate trim panel to the liftgate window latch support. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Adjustments Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Adjustments Latch Adjustment - Rear Lift Window Panel Removal Procedure 1. Perform the following steps in order to inspect the window latch assembly for proper adjustment: 1. Hold the outside window handle. 2. Try to move the window in and out. If the latch is misaligned to the striker, a rattle condition will exist. 3. Inspect the window for a snug fit against the top and the sides of the body opening. 2. If the latch is misaligned and/or the window is not snug against the weatherstrip, adjust the latch using the following procedure. 3. Remove the endgate or the liftgate trim panel. 4. Remove the endgate cover. 5. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the window latch forward and backward. This will help to loosen the window latch nut. 6. Adjust the latch assembly location. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the latch assembly nut or nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Inspect the window panel for proper operation. 2. Install the endgate cover (if removed). 3. Install the endgate or the liftgate trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch Replacement - Endgate Window Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Endgate Window Latch Replacement - Endgate Window Removal Procedure 1. Remove the endgate cover. 2. Mark the location of the endgate window latch in order to ensure proper alignment at installation. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Remove the nuts that retain the endgate window latch to the endgate window latch support. 5. Remove the endgate window latch from the endgate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the endgate window latch. Ensure that the latch is properly aligned with the marks made during disassembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the nuts that retain the endgate window latch to the endgate window latch support. Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (88 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Install the endgate cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch Replacement - Endgate Window > Page 7385 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Latch Support Replacement - Endgate Window Latch Support Replacement - Endgate Window Removal Procedure 1. Remove the endgate window latch. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors as needed. 3. Mark the location of the endgate window latch support in order to ensure proper alignment during installation. 4. Remove the bolts that retain the endgate window latch support to the liftgate. 5. Remove the endgate window latch support from the endgate. Installation Procedure 1. Install the endgate window latch support. 2. Align the marks made during disassembly. 3. Connect the electrical connectors as needed. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the bolts that retain the endgate window latch support to the liftgate. Tighten the bolts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connectors as needed. 6. Install the endgate window latch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Strut Replacement - Rear Lift Window Panel (2-Door) Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Strut Replacement - Rear Lift Window Panel (2-Door) Strut Replacement - Rear Lift Window Panel (2-Door) Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the endgate window. Notice: Refer to Liftgate/Hood Assist Rod Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the retainer from the hinge pin at the upper end of the endgate window strut. Discard the retainer. 3. Remove the hinge pin from the upper end of the endgate window strut. Discard the hinge pin. 4. Lift up the retainer clips on the endgate window struts using a small flat-bladed tool. 5. Remove the lower end of the endgate window struts from the ball joint. 6. Remove the endgate window struts from the endgate window. Installation Procedure 1. Position the endgate window struts to the endgate window. 2. Install the lower end of the endgate window struts to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. 3. Install the new hinge pin to the upper end of the endgate window strut. 4. Install the new retainer to the hinge pin. 5. Remove the support from the endgate window. 6. Close the endgate window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Strut Replacement - Rear Lift Window Panel (2-Door) > Page 7390 Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Strut Replacement - Rear Lift Window Panel (4-Door) Strut Replacement - Rear Lift Window Panel (4-Door) Removal Procedure Caution: When a hood hold open device is being removed or installed, provide alternate support to avoid the possibility of damage to the vehicle or personal injury. 1. Open and support the endgate window. Notice: Refer to Liftgate/Hood Assist Rod Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Lift up the retainer clips on the endgate window struts using a small flat-bladed tool. 3. Remove the upper end of the endgate window struts from the ball joint. 4. Remove the lower end of the endgate window struts from the ball joint. Installation Procedure 1. Position the endgate window struts to the endgate window. 2. Install the upper end of the endgate window struts to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. 3. Install the upper end of the endgate window struts to the ball joint. Press in to place until fully seated. 4. Remove the support from the endgate window. 5. Close the endgate window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair Lock Striker Replacement - Endgate (Utility) Removal Procedure Important: Do not remove both endgate striker bolts at the same time in order to prevent the striker backing plate from falling into the body. 1. Remove the lower striker bolt. 2. Loosen the upper striker bolt in order to rotate the striker and the spacer (if equipped) away from the lower bolt hole. 3. Install the lower striker bolt. 4. Tighten the lower striker bolt in order to hold the striker backing plate in place. 5. Remove the upper striker bolt. 6. Remove the spacer (if equipped). 7. Remove the striker. Installation Procedure 1. Install the striker. 2. Install the spacer (if equipped). 3. Install the upper striker bolt. Rotate the lower striker bolt until the upper threaded hole is properly aligned in order to ensure that the backing plate is in the correct position. 4. Remove the lower bolt. 5. Rotate the striker and the spacer (if equipped) in order to align the lower threaded hole in the striker backing plate. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 6. Install the lower striker bolt. Tighten the bolts to 22 N.m (16 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Compartment Opening Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate or the liftgate. 2. Remove the weatherstrip molding from the pinch-weld flange. 3. Firmly grip the weatherstrip. 4. Pull the weatherstrip out and away from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Push the weatherstrip onto the pinch weld flange, beginning from the top corner of the endgate opening. 2. Completely seat the weatherstrip around the endgate or the liftgate opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION Body Emblem: Technical Service Bulletins 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-111-004B Date: September 25, 2009 Subject: Information on Discoloration, Blistering, Peeling or Erosion of Various Exterior Emblems Including Chevy Bowtie (Bulletin Cancelled) Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being cancelled. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-111-004A (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). This bulletin is being cancelled. The information is no longer applicable. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) Tools Required * J 25070 Heat Gun * J 41409 Body Molding Removal Tool Removal Procedure 1. When replacing or repairing an emblem/nameplate do the following: 1. Use tape to protect the mounting surface during removal. 2. Use tape for alignment marks for installation of the emblem/nameplate. 2. To remove an emblem/nameplate, heat the emblem/nameplate using a J 25070. Apply heat using a circular motion for about 30 seconds. 3. Use a J 41409 to lift or remove the emblem/nameplate from the panel surface. Important: If tape is still intact on the molding or panel, do not remove the tape. Clean the tape and the mating surface with adhesive cleaner. Wipe the tape and the mating surface with a clean, lint free cloth. If the tape is damaged, continue with the replacement procedure. 4. Apply the adhesive foam tape to the back of the emblem/nameplate and press the emblem/nameplate in place. 5. When replacing, remove all adhesive as follows: * For body panels use a 3M(TM) Scotch Brite molding adhesive remover disk 3M(TM) P/N 07501 or equivalent. * For plastic panels use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water in order to remove the adhesive. Installation Procedure Important: Apply the emblem/nameplate in an environment that is free from dust or other dirt that could come into contact with the sticky backing. Foreign material may cause improper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the emblem/nameplate will be installed. Use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water in order to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) > Page 7407 clean the area. 2. Dry the area thoroughly. 3. If the location of the emblem/nameplate has not been marked, apply tape and mark the location as shown. 4. Heat the mounting surface to approximately 27-41°C (80-105°F). 5. Ensure that the temperature of the emblem/name plate is approximately 29-32°C (85-90°F). 6. Remove the protective liner from the back of the emblem/name plate. 7. Position the emblem/name plate to the location marks and press the emblem/name plate to the mounting surface. 8. Apply equal pressure along the emblem/name plate in order to uniformly bond the item to the mounting surface. 9. Remove the protective tape from the mounting surface. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) > Page 7408 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (GMC) Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (GMC) Tools Required * J 25070 Heat Gun * J 41409 Body Molding Removal Tool Removal Procedure 1. When replacing or repairing an emblem/nameplate do the following: 1. Use tape to protect the mounting surface during removal. 2. Use tape for alignment marks for installation of the emblem/nameplate. 2. To remove an emblem/nameplate, heat the emblem/nameplate using a J 25070. Apply heat using a circular motion for about 30 seconds. 3. Use a J 41409 in order to lift or remove the emblem/nameplate from the panel surface. Important: If tape is still intact on the molding or panel, do not remove the tape. Clean the tape and the mating surface with adhesive cleaner. Wipe the tape and the mating surface with a clean, lint free cloth. If the tape is damaged, continue with the replacement procedure. 4. Apply the adhesive foam tape to the back of the emblem/nameplate and press the emblem/nameplate in place. 5. When replacing, remove all adhesive as follows: * For body panels use a 3M(TM) Scotch Brite molding adhesive remover disk 3M(TM) P/N 07501 or equivalent. * For plastic panels use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water in order to remove the adhesive. Installation Procedure Important: Apply the emblem/nameplate in an environment that is free from dust or other dirt that could come into contact with the sticky backing. Foreign material may cause improper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the emblem/nameplate will be installed. Use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water in order to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) > Page 7409 clean the area. 2. Dry the area thoroughly. 3. If the location of the emblem/nameplate has not been marked, apply tape and mark the location as shown. 4. Heat the mounting surface to approximately 27-41°C (80-105°F). 5. Ensure that the temperature of the emblem/name plate is approximately 29-32°C (85-90°F). 6. Remove the protective liner from the back of the emblem/name plate. 7. Position the emblem/name plate to the location marks and press the emblem/name plate to the mounting surface. 8. Apply equal pressure along the emblem/name plate in order to uniformly bond the item to the mounting surface. 9. Remove the protective tape from the mounting surface. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) > Page 7410 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (ZR5) Emblem/Nameplate Replacement - Door (ZR5) Tools Required * J 25070 Heat Gun * J 41409 Body Molding Removal Tool Removal Procedure 1. When replacing or repairing an emblem/nameplate do the following: 1. Use tape to protect the mounting surface during removal. 2. Use tape for alignment marks for installation of the emblem/nameplate. 2. To remove an emblem/nameplate, heat the emblem/nameplate using a J 25070. Apply heat using a circular motion for about 30 seconds. 3. Use a J 41409 to lift or remove the emblem/nameplate from the panel surface. Important: If tape is still intact on the molding or panel, do not remove the tape. Clean the tape and the mating surface with adhesive cleaner. Wipe the tape and the mating surface with a clean, lint free cloth. If the tape is damaged, continue with the replacement procedure. 4. Apply the adhesive foam tape to the back of the emblem/nameplate and press the emblem/nameplate in place. 5. When replacing, remove all adhesive as follows: * For body panels use a 3M(TM) Scotch Brite molding adhesive remover disk 3M(TM) P/N 07501 or equivalent. * For plastic panels use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water in order to remove the adhesive. Installation Procedure Important: Apply the emblem/nameplate in an environment that is free from dust or other dirt that could come into contact with the sticky backing. Foreign material may cause improper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the emblem/nameplate will be installed. Use a lint free cloth and Varnish Makers and Painters (VMP) naphtha or a 50/50 mixture by volume of isopropyl alcohol and water in order to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Emblem/Nameplate Replacement (Chevrolet) > Page 7411 clean the area. 2. Dry the area thoroughly. 3. If the location of the emblem/nameplate has not been marked, apply tape and mark the location as 50 mm up from the front door ditch and 75 mm back from the front door front edge. 4. Heat the mounting surface to approximately 27-41°C (80-105°F). 5. Ensure that the temperature of the emblem/name plate is approximately 29-32°C (85-90°F). 6. Remove the protective liner from the back of the emblem/name plate. 7. Position the emblem/name plate to the location marks and press the emblem/name plate to the mounting surface. 8. Apply equal pressure along the emblem/name plate in order to uniformly bond the item to the mounting surface. 9. Remove the protective tape from the mounting surface. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the bolt from the right and the left vent grille end panels. 3. Lift up on the right and the left vent grille end panels to release the retaining clips. 4. Remove the right and the left vent grille end panels. 5. Remove the screws that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 6. Remove the push-pin retainers that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 7. Remove the center vent grille panel from the cowl. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7415 1. Install the center vent grille panel to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 3. Install the push-pin retainers securing the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 4. Install the right and the left vent grille end panels to the cowl. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the screws securing the securing the right and the left vent grille ends to the cowl. 6. Install the windshield wiper arms. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair License Bracket Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the grille. 2. Drill out the rivets that retain the bracket to the front air deflector. 3. Remove the bracket from the front air deflector. Installation Procedure 1. Drill 4 new holes in the air deflector using a drill jig if a new air deflector has been installed. 2. Install the bracket to the front air deflector with 4 rivets. 3. Install the grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Windshield Moulding / Trim: Procedures Stationary Window Reveal Molding Repair Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Service Precautions. Important: The window reveal molding fills the cavity between the body and window. If the reveal molding is stretched or damaged, it cannot be reused and it must be replaced. 1. Lift up on the loose area of the reveal molding. 2. Clean the top edge of the window surface and the reveal molding with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water by volume on a dampened lint-free cloth. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Window Retention Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates. Important: Use care when applying the prep, clear #1, to the window. This primer dries almost instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied evenly. 2. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep, clear #1, to the channel area approximately 13 mm (1/2 in) to the upper edge of the window. 3. Wipe the glass primed area immediately with a clean lint-free cloth. 4. Shake the glass primer, black #2, for at least 1 minute. 5. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass primer, black #2, to the top edge of the window. 6. Apply a small bead of urethane adhesive (2) between the window (1) and the pinch-weld. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7423 7. Reinstall the window reveal molding. 1. Start from the loose area and hand-press the reveal molding into place over the edge of the window. 2. Run warm water over the reveal molding in order to speed the setup time of the urethane adhesive. 3. Tape should be applied in order to retain the reveal molding to the window. This will maintain a flush fit with the body. 4. The tape is to be removed after 6 hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7424 Windshield Moulding / Trim: Removal and Replacement Windshield Side Reveal Molding Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Peel back the weatherstrip tape in order to reveal the molding screws. 2. Remove the fasteners. 3. Remove the reveal molding from the windshield pillar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the reveal molding to the windshield pillar. 2. Install the fasteners. 3. Install the new weatherstrip tape (if required). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Wheelhouse Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the PCM from the Coolant recovery reservoir. 3. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir. 4. Remove the bolts that retain the wheelhouse to the radiator support. 5. Remove the bolts that retain the wheelhouse to the fender. 6. Remove the bolt that retains the wheelhouse panel to the cowl. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7430 7. Remove the wheelhouse panel from the fender. 8. Remove the splash shield from the wheelhouse panel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the splash shield to the wheelhouse panel. 2. Install the wheelhouse panel to the fender. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the wheelhouse panel to the cowl. Tighten the bolts that retain the wheelhouse panel to the frame to 29 N.m (21 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7431 4. Install the bolts that retain the wheelhouse panel to the fender. Tighten the bolts to 29 N.m (21 lb ft). 5. Install the bolts that retain the wheelhouse panel to the radiator support. Tighten the bolts to 29 N.m (21 lb ft). 6. Install the coolant recovery reservoir. 7. Install the PCM to the coolant recovery reservoir. 8. Install the battery tray. 9. Install the battery. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Wheelhouse Extension Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the wheelhouse extension retainers. 2. Remove the wheelhouse extension. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheelhouse extension. 2. Install the wheelhouse extension retainers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (2-Door Utility) Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (2-Door Utility) Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (2-Door Utility) Removal Procedure Properly support the frame when you change the frame cushions. If only one cushion is changed, lower the entire side on which the cushion in placed in order to provide clearance for the cushion. 1. Raise the vehicle slightly on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place jack stands under the body on the side of the vehicle that the cushions will be placed. 3. Remove the frame cushion bolts. 4. Remove the retainer. 5. Remove the lower cushion. 6. Lower the hoist enough in order to leave the body supported by the jack stands. 7. Remove the upper cushion. 8. Remove the shims, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shims, if equipped. 2. Install the upper cushion. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 7441 3. Raise the frame slightly on the hoist. 4. Install the lower cushion. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the frame cushion bolts. Tighten the bolts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 6. Lower the hoist. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 7442 Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (4-Door Utility) Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (4-Door Utility) Removal Procedure Important: Properly support the frame when you change the frame cushions. If only one cushion is changed, lower the entire side on which the cushion in placed in order to provide clearance for the cushion. 1. Raise the vehicle slightly on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Place jack stands under the body on the side of the vehicle that the cushions will be placed. 3. Remove the frame cushion bolts. 4. Remove the retainer. 5. Remove the lower cushion. 6. Lower the hoist enough in order to leave the body supported by the jack stands. 7. Remove the upper cushion. 8. Remove the shims, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Install the shims, if equipped. 2. Install the upper cushion. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Frame Cushion or Insulator Replacement (2-Door Utility) > Page 7443 3. Raise the frame slightly on the hoist. 4. Install the lower cushion. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the frame cushion bolts. Tighten the bolts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 6. Lower the hoist. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement Cross-Member: Service and Repair Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement ^ Tools Required J 36202 Torsion Bar Loading/Unloading Tool Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the torsion bars in order to avoid chipping or scratching the coating. Damage to the coating will result in premature failure of the torsion bars. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Mark the adjuster bolt. 3. Install J 36202 to the adjustment arm and the crossmember. 4. Increase the tension on the adjustment arm until the load is removed from the adjuster bolt. Important: To aid in assembly, record the number of turns the tool makes when removing the adjuster bolt. 5. Remove the the adjuster bolt and adjuster nut. 6. Remove J 36202 from the adjustment arm, allowing the torsion bar to unload. 7. Remove the adjustment arm by sliding the torsion bar forward until the torsion bar clears the adjustment arm. 8. Remove the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts. 9. Remove the torsion bar support link upper mounting bolts. 10. Remove the torsion bar support from the frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 7448 11. Remove the torsion bars. Note the exact direction of the forward end and the side of the torsion bar that is being removed. 12. Remove the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts. 13. Remove the torsion bar links from the torsion bar support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the torsion bar links to the torsion bar support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts. ^ Tighten the torsion bar links lower retaining nuts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 7449 3. install the torsion bars in relation to where the bars were removed. 4. Install the torsion bar support to the frame. 5. Install the torsion bar support link upper mounting bolts to the frame. 6. Install the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts. ^ Tighten the torsion bar support link upper mounting nuts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the adjustment arm to the torsion bar support and slide the torsion bar rearward until the torsion bar fully engages the adjustment arm. 8. Install J 36202 to the adjustment arm and the crossmember. 9. Increase the tension on the adjustment arm in order to load the torsion bar. Important: Tighten the adjuster bolt the same amount of turns that were required to remove the adjuster bolt during removal. 10. Install the adjuster bolt and adjuster nut Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 7450 11. Remove J 36202 from the adjustment arm and crossmember. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Check the wheel alignment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 7451 Cross-Member: Service and Repair Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2) Transmission Support Replacement (4WD, ZR2) Removal Procedure 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the transmission mount shield bolts, if equipped. 3. Remove the transmission mount shield, if equipped. 4. Install the transmission jack to the transmission and support the transmission. 5. Disconnect the transmission wiring harness from transmission support, if necessary. 6. Remove the transmission mount to the transmission support stud nut or nuts. 7. Remove the catalytic converter hanger bracket from the transmission support, if necessary. 8. Remove the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 7452 9. Remove the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts, ZR2. 10. Remove the transmission support. Installation Procedure 1. Install the transmission support. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts, ZR2. Tighten the transmission support to the frame nuts to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 3. Install the transmission support to the frame nuts and bolts. Tighten the transmission support to the frame nuts to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 4. Install the catalytic converter hanger bracket to transmission support, if necessary. Tighten the catalytic converter hanger bracket to the transmission support mounting bolts to 17 N.m (13 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torsion Bar and Support Assembly Replacement > Page 7453 5. Install the transmission mount to the transmission support stud nut or nuts. Tighten the transmission mount to the transmission support stud nuts to 57 N.m (42 lb ft). 6. Connect the transmission wiring harness to the transmission support,if necessary. 7. Remove the transmission jack from the transmission. 8. Install the transmission mount shield, if equipped. 9. Install the transmission mount shield bolts, if equipped. * Tighten the transmission mount shield front bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). * Tighten the transmission mount shield rear bolts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Trailer Hitch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear bumper impact bar. 2. Remove 4 nuts and 2 stud plate assemblies securing the trailer hitch to each frame rail. 3. Remove the hitch from the frame rails. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the trailer hitch to each frame rail with 4 nuts and 2 stud plate assemblies. Tighten the trailer hitch nuts to 90 N.m (66 lb ft). 2. Install the rear bumper impact bar. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille Replacement (GMC) Grille: Service and Repair Grille Replacement (GMC) Grille Replacement (GMC) Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the grille by gently pulling evenly in order to disengage the retainers. 3. Remove the grille from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the grille to the vehicle. Pressing into place until fully seated. 2. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille Replacement (GMC) > Page 7461 Grille: Service and Repair Grille Replacement (Chevrolet) Grille Replacement (Chevrolet) Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the grille by pulling it forward out of the radiator support. 3. Disconnect the headlamp washer filler hose from the grille. 4. Remove the park/turn signal bulb assembly from the lens. 5. Remove the fog lamp bulb assembly from the lens, if equipped. 6. If replacing the grille, remove the park turn signal lamp/fog lamp assembly from the grille. Installation Procedure 1. If removed, install the park turn signal/fog lamp assembly to the grille. Refer to Front Fog Lamp Park/Turn Signal Assembly Replacement in Lighting Systems. 2. Install the fog lamp bulb assembly to the lens, if removed. 3. Install the park/turn signal bulb assembly to the lens. 4. Connect the headlamp washer filler hose to the grille. 5. Install the grille by pressing into place until fully seated. 6. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Ash Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ash Tray: Procedures ASHTRAY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument panel trimplate. 2. Remove ashtray housing retaining screws. 3. Move the ashtray housing rearward in order to disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the clip that retains the electrical connectors to the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 6. Remove the ashtray housing from the instrument panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the ashtray housing to the instrument panel. 2. Position the ashtray housing in order to connect the electrical connectors. 3. Connect the electrical connectors. 4. Install the electrical connector retaining clip to the instrument panel. 5. Install the screws that retain the ash tray housing to the instrument panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 6. Install the instrument panel trimplate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Ash Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7467 Ash Tray: Removal and Replacement Ashtray Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the instrument panel trimplate. 2. Remove ashtray housing retaining screws. 3. Move the ashtray housing rearward in order to disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the clip that retains the electrical connectors to the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 6. Remove the ashtray housing from the instrument panel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the ashtray housing to the instrument panel. 2. Position the ashtray housing in order to connect the electrical connectors. 3. Connect the electrical connectors. 4. Install the electrical connector retaining clip to the instrument panel. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the screws that retain the ash tray housing to the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 6. Install the instrument panel trimplate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001 Date: March 30, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer. Warning If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. - Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean) - Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel) - Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber mats over carpeted floor mats) - Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle - When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal before driving the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is installed correctly and according to the instructions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 7472 After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 7473 Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 7474 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 7475 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Carpet: Procedures Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator, GM P/N 12378554, US ACDelco 88900909, Canadian P/N 88901678, may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. This non-toxic, biodegradable, odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove the following types of odor: * Objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks * Customer created odors, such as smoke You may safely use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet, and sound deadening materials. You may also induce this product into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts for the control of non-bacterial related odors. Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be used as an air freshener. This product may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers whose allergies make them sensitive to perfumes. This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. In cases such as water leaks, use this product with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the primary cause of the odor. Then use further applications on the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. How to Use this Product * Spray GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator directly or as an additive with carpet shampoo in steam cleaners. * Do not use on any interior surface that plain water would deteriorate, because this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. * Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a persistent or recurring odor, you may call to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. - In the USA, call 1-800-955-8591. - In Canada, call 1-800-977-4145. Floor Carpet Drying Floor Carpet Drying If the carpet or the pad or insulator is wet, use the following criteria for drying or for replacing the components: * For a 1-piece carpet assembly bonded to a cotton or a fiber padding, replace the entire assembly. * For a 2-piece carpet assembly with a cotton or a fiber padding, replace the padding only. While the carpet is out of the vehicle, dry the carpet using the method described below. * For a 1-piece carpet assembly bonded to a foam padding or attached to a synthetic padding, dry the carpet using the method described below. * For a 2-piece carpet assembly with a synthetic padding, dry the assembly using the method described below. Drying Method 1. If you observe puddles of liquid on the carpet face, use a wet vacuum to remove the excess moisture. 2. Blot the face of the carpet with a towel in order to absorb as much moisture as possible. 3. Point a fan at the affected area and air dry the carpet. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7478 Carpet: Removal and Replacement Mat/Carpet Replacement - Front Floor (Utility) Mat/Carpet Replacement - Front Floor (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front seats. 2. Remove the rear seats. 3. Remove the rear seat belt buckles from the floor. 4. Remove the door sill trim plates. 5. For 4-door models, remove the front side door lock pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (CF5). 6. For 4-door models, remove the C-pillar lower trim panels. Refer to Trim Replacement - Third Pillar (4-Door Utility). 7. Remove the body side trim panels as necessary. 8. Remove the floor console or cup holder, if equipped. 9. Remove the body hinge pillar trim panels. 10. Remove the carpet or mat from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Caution: In order to avoid personal injury or vehicle damage when you repair or replace the carpet, use the same thickness and material size as the original installation. Always return the carpet to the original location. 1. Install the carpet or the mat to the vehicle. 2. Install the body hinge trim panels. 3. Install the floor console or cup holder, if equipped. 4. Install the body side trim panels as necessary. 5. For 4-door models, install the C-pillar lower trim panels. Refer to Trim Replacement - Body Side (2-Door Utility). 6. For 4-door models, install the front side door lock pillar garnish moldings. Refer to Trim Replacement - Body Side (4-Door Utility). 7. Install the door sill trim plates. 8. Install the rear seat belt buckles to the floor. 9. Install the rear seats. 10. Install the front seats. Carpet Replacement - Rear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7479 Carpet Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear seat floor filler trim panels. 2. Remove the body side trim panels, as necessary. 3. Remove the jack from the vehicle. 4. Remove the endgate or the liftgate door sill trim plate. 5. Remove the bolts that retain the cargo tie down hooks to the floor. 6. Remove the cargo tie down hooks. 7. Remove the rear carpet or the mat from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Caution: In order to avoid personal injury or vehicle damage when you repair or replace the carpet, use the same thickness and material size as the original installation. Always return the carpet to the original location. 1. Install the rear carpet or the mat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7480 2. Install the cargo tie down hooks. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the bolts that retain the cargo tie down hooks to the floor. Tighten the bolts to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 4. Install the endgate or the liftgate door sill trim plate. 5. Install the jack to the vehicle. 6. Install the body side trim panels, as necessary. 7. Install the rear seat floor filler trim panels. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp: Service and Repair CONSOLE LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Gently pry the lens from the bulb housing. 2. Release the locking tabs in order to remove the bulb and socket from the lens. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulb to the socket. 2. Carefully snap the lens into position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7490 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7491 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7492 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7493 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7494 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7495 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7496 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7497 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 7498 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drink Holders: Procedures Cupholder Replacement - Front Floor Console CUPHOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE REMOVAL PROCEDURE Pull up on the lower edges of the cup holder in order to release the retaining clips and remove the cup holder from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Install the front floor cup holder to the vehicle. Cupholder Replacement - Front Seat CUPHOLDER REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Press the retaining tab under the cupholder while pulling outward in order to remove the cupholder from the bracket. 2. Remove the rubber pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7503 1. Install the rubber pad. 2. Slide the cupholder into the bracket. 3. Snap the cupholder into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7504 Drink Holders: Removal and Replacement Cupholder Replacement - Front Floor Console Cupholder Replacement - Front Floor Console Removal Procedure Pull up on the lower edges of the cup holder in order to release the retaining clips and remove the cup holder from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Install the front floor cup holder to the vehicle. Cupholder Replacement - Front Seat Cupholder Replacement - Front Seat Removal Procedure 1. Press the retaining tab under the cupholder while pulling outward in order to remove the cupholder from the bracket. 2. Remove the rubber pad. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7505 1. Install the rubber pad. 2. Slide the cupholder into the bracket. 3. Snap the cupholder into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation Glove Compartment: Description and Operation KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING KEY IDENTIFICATION AND USAGE The lock cylinder keyway is designed so that other model keys will not enter a current model lock cylinder. A single key is used for all locks on the vehicle. The key identification is obtained from the four-character key code stamped on the knockout portion of the key head. Knock the plugs out of the key head after code numbers have been recorded. The code list, available to owners of key cutting equipment from equipment suppliers, determines the lock combinations from the code numbers. CUTTING KEYS After the code has been determined from the code list or the key code diagram, perform the following steps: 1. Cut a blank key to the proper level of each of the tumbler positions. 2. Inspect the key operation in the lock cylinder. REPLACEMENT LOCK CYLINDERS New lock cylinders (except ignition lock cylinders) are available from the service parts warehouse with new lock cylinder locking bars. The tumblers are also available and must be assembled into the cylinder as recommended. For additional information, refer to the following. LOCK CYLINDER TUMBLER OPERATION All lock tumblers are shaped alike with the exception of the notched position on one side. As the key is inserted into the lock cylinder, the tumblers are lowered to the correct height so that notches on each tumbler are at the same level. When the notches on all 6 tumblers line up, 2 small springs push the side bar into the notches, allowing the cylinder to turn in the cylinder bore. Five types of tumblers are used in making the lock combinations, and each is coded and stamped with a number between 1 and 5. ASSEMBLING AND CODING IGNITION LOCK CYLINDERS TOOLS REQUIRED J 41340 Ignition Lock Holding Fixture 1. Determine the tumbler numbers/arrangement: 1. Place the tip of the key directly over the tip of the illustrated key. 2. Inspect that the diagram outlines the key. 3. Starting with position 1 (open end of cylinder), find and record the lowest level (tumbler number) that is visible. 4. Repeat the previous step for positions 2-10. 2. Starting with position 1, insert the tumblers (4) into their corresponding slots in the coded order. 3. Using your fingers, pull out the side bar (3) until the tumblers fall completely into place. 4. Insert one tumbler spring (2) above each tumbler (4). 5. Lubricate the tumblers using Superlube(R) GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 6. Insert the spring retainer (1) prongs into the slots at the end of each cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7509 7. Press down the retainer (1) until fully seated in the depression. 8. Inspect for proper tumbler installation: 1. Hold the spring retainer (2) in position. 2. Insert the key (1) into the cylinder. 3. The side bar (3) should drop down flush with the cylinder diameter if properly installed. 4. Disassemble and assemble properly as needed. 9. Remove the key. 10. Secure the cylinder in the J 41340. 1. Inspect that the spring retainer is facing up and positioned directly under the punch slots. 2. Push the cylinder into the J 41340 until butted with the cylinder bezel. 3. Tighten the holding screw. 11. Stake the bezel end of the retainer in place: 1. Hold the flat side of the punch, part of J 41340, squarely against the face of the cylinder bezel. 2. Stake the lock cylinder metal over the retainer corners. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7510 12. Stake the other end of the retainer: 1. Remove the punch, part of J 41340. 2. Rotate the punch, part of J 41340, 180 degrees. 3. Hold the punch, part of J 41340, squarely against the end of the punch slot on J 41340. 4. Stake the metal over the other end of the retainer. 13. Loosen the holding screw. 14. Remove the cylinder from the J 41340. 15. Inspect that the retainer is properly staked. Restake as needed. 16. Lubricate the cylinder retainer slot. 17. Insert the following parts into the cylinder retainer slot: - The retainer spring (2) - The retainer (3) 18. Lubricate the following parts with GM P/N 12345996 or equivalent as needed: - The detent pins (1) - The cylinder retainer (3) IMPORTANT: Use a paste type grease, not a spray, for the following step. SIDE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER CODING The side door lock cylinder has five snap-in tumblers. The number 1-5 positions (beginning closest to the cylinder head) is a brass retainer tumbler. The 6-10 positions are standard tumbler positions. Therefore, only the 6-10 positions are required. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7511 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair KEY AND LOCK CYLINDER CODING KEY IDENTIFICATION AND USAGE The lock cylinder keyway is designed so that other model keys will not enter a current model lock cylinder. A single key is used for all locks on the vehicle. The key identification is obtained from the four-character key code stamped on the knockout portion of the key head. Knock the plugs out of the key head after code numbers have been recorded. The code list, available to owners of key cutting equipment from equipment suppliers, determines the lock combinations from the code numbers. CUTTING KEYS After the code has been determined from the code list or the key code diagram, perform the following steps: 1. Cut a blank key to the proper level of each of the tumbler positions. 2. Inspect the key operation in the lock cylinder. REPLACEMENT LOCK CYLINDERS New lock cylinders (except ignition lock cylinders) are available from the service parts warehouse with new lock cylinder locking bars. The tumblers are also available and must be assembled into the cylinder as recommended. For additional information, refer to the following. LOCK CYLINDER TUMBLER OPERATION All lock tumblers are shaped alike with the exception of the notched position on one side. As the key is inserted into the lock cylinder, the tumblers are lowered to the correct height so that notches on each tumbler are at the same level. When the notches on all 6 tumblers line up, 2 small springs push the side bar into the notches, allowing the cylinder to turn in the cylinder bore. Five types of tumblers are used in making the lock combinations, and each is coded and stamped with a number between 1 and 5. ASSEMBLING AND CODING IGNITION LOCK CYLINDERS TOOLS REQUIRED J 41340 Ignition Lock Holding Fixture 1. Determine the tumbler numbers/arrangement: 1. Place the tip of the key directly over the tip of the illustrated key. 2. Inspect that the diagram outlines the key. 3. Starting with position 1 (open end of cylinder), find and record the lowest level (tumbler number) that is visible. 4. Repeat the previous step for positions 2-10. 2. Starting with position 1, insert the tumblers (4) into their corresponding slots in the coded order. 3. Using your fingers, pull out the side bar (3) until the tumblers fall completely into place. 4. Insert one tumbler spring (2) above each tumbler (4). 5. Lubricate the tumblers using Superlube(R) GM P/N 12346241 or equivalent. 6. Insert the spring retainer (1) prongs into the slots at the end of each cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7512 7. Press down the retainer (1) until fully seated in the depression. 8. Inspect for proper tumbler installation: 1. Hold the spring retainer (2) in position. 2. Insert the key (1) into the cylinder. 3. The side bar (3) should drop down flush with the cylinder diameter if properly installed. 4. Disassemble and assemble properly as needed. 9. Remove the key. 10. Secure the cylinder in the J 41340. 1. Inspect that the spring retainer is facing up and positioned directly under the punch slots. 2. Push the cylinder into the J 41340 until butted with the cylinder bezel. 3. Tighten the holding screw. 11. Stake the bezel end of the retainer in place: 1. Hold the flat side of the punch, part of J 41340, squarely against the face of the cylinder bezel. 2. Stake the lock cylinder metal over the retainer corners. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7513 12. Stake the other end of the retainer: 1. Remove the punch, part of J 41340. 2. Rotate the punch, part of J 41340, 180 degrees. 3. Hold the punch, part of J 41340, squarely against the end of the punch slot on J 41340. 4. Stake the metal over the other end of the retainer. 13. Loosen the holding screw. 14. Remove the cylinder from the J 41340. 15. Inspect that the retainer is properly staked. Restake as needed. 16. Lubricate the cylinder retainer slot. 17. Insert the following parts into the cylinder retainer slot: - The retainer spring (2) - The retainer (3) 18. Lubricate the following parts with GM P/N 12345996 or equivalent as needed: - The detent pins (1) - The cylinder retainer (3) IMPORTANT: Use a paste type grease, not a spray, for the following step. SIDE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER CODING The side door lock cylinder has five snap-in tumblers. The number 1-5 positions (beginning closest to the cylinder head) is a brass retainer tumbler. The 6-10 positions are standard tumbler positions. Therefore, only the 6-10 positions are required. DOOR REPLACEMENT - INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) COMPARTMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right side instrument panel sound insulator. 2. Push up on the J-spring in order to release the storage compartment door. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7514 3. Remove the screws that retain the instrument panel compartment door hinges to the instrument panel. 4. Remove the instrument panel storage compartment door from the instrument panel. 5. Remove the screws that retain the instrument panel compartment bezel to the instrument panel. 6. Remove the instrument panel compartment bezel from the instrument panel. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the instrument panel compartment lamp and switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the instrument panel compartment lamp and switch assembly. 2. Install the storage compartment bezel to the instrument panel. 3. Install the screws that retain the instrument panel compartment bezel to the instrument panel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 4. Install the instrument panel storage compartment door to the instrument panel. 5. Install the screws that retain the instrument panel compartment door hinges to the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7515 6. Push the storage compartment into place. 7. Install the right side instrument panel sound insulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner Replacement (Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the sunroof console, if equipped. 2. Remove the dome lamp. 3. Remove the sunroof opening trim, if equipped, by grasping it at the edge and pulling it away from the headliner. 4. Remove the coat hooks. 5. Remove the assist handles. 6. Remove the sunshades and the retainers. 7. Remove the windshield garnish moldings. 8. Remove the body lock pillar trim panels (4-door models only). 9. Remove the upper seat belt anchor bolts (2-door models only). 10. Remove the inside air temperature sensor grille. 11. Remove the body side trim panel. 12. Remove the rear upper garnish molding. 13. Remove the headliner from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7519 1. Install the headliner to the vehicle. New headliners must be pierced in order to accommodate actual vehicle accessories. 2. Install the rear upper garnish molding 3. Install the upper body side panel trim. 4. Install the inside air temperature sensor grille. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 5. Install the rear seat upper seat belt anchor bolts (2-door models only). Tighten the bolts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 6. Install the body lock pillar trim panels 4-door models only). 7. Install the windshield garnish moldings. 8. Install the sunshades and the retainers. 9. Install the assist handles. 10. Install the coat hooks. 11. Install the sunroof opening trim, if equipped, by carefully pressing it into place. 12. Install the dome lamp, if equipped. 13. Install the overhead or sunroof console, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair Assist Handle Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Carefully insert a flat-bladed tool between the cover and the handle in order to remove the assist handle covers. 2. Remove the screws that retain the assist handle to the vehicle. 3. Remove the assist handle from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the assist handle to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws that retain the assist handle to the vehicle. Tighten the screws to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 3. Install the assist handle covers. Position the covers and snap into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Scuff Plate: Procedures Door Sill Plate Replacement - Endgate DOOR SILL PLATE REPLACEMENT - ENDGATE TOOLS REQUIRED J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE Use the J 38778 in order to remove the door sill trim plate from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Install the door sill trim plate to the vehicle. Align the retainers along the door sill and press into place. Door Sill Plate Replacement DOOR SILL PLATE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE Use the J 38778 in order to remove the door sill trim plate from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7527 Install the door sill trim plate to the vehicle. Align the retainers along the door sill and press into place. Door Sill Plate Replacement - Liftgate DOOR SILL PLATE REPLACEMENT - LIFTGATE TOOLS REQUIRED J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE Use the J 38778 in order to remove the door sill trim plate from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Install the door sill trim plate to the vehicle. Align the retainers along the door sill and press into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7528 Scuff Plate: Removal and Replacement Door Sill Plate Replacement Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure Use the J 38778 in order to remove the door sill trim plate from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Install the door sill trim plate to the vehicle. Align the retainers along the door sill and press into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sun Visor: Procedures SUNSHADE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screws that retain the sunshade to the roof. 2. Disconnect the electrical connections, if equipped. 3. Remove the screw that retains the sunshade retainer to the roof. 4. Remove the sunshade from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the sunshade to the roof. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7533 2. Install the sunshade retainer and the sunshade retainer screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.1 N.m (10 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connections, if equipped. 4. Install the screws that retains the sunshade to the roof. Tighten the screws to 1.1 N.m (10 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7534 Sun Visor: Removal and Replacement Sunshade Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws that retain the sunshade to the roof. 2. Disconnect the electrical connections, if equipped. 3. Remove the screw that retains the sunshade retainer to the roof. 4. Remove the sunshade from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the sunshade to the roof. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7535 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the sunshade retainer and the sunshade retainer screws. Tighten the screws to 1.1 N.m (10 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connections, if equipped. 4. Install the screws that retains the sunshade to the roof. Tighten the screws to 1.1 N.m (10 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure 1. Use the J 38778 in order to remove the rear header garnish molding. Insert the J 38778 and work along the front edge of the trim panel from one end to the other. 2. Remove the cargo lamp from the roof rear header garnish molding. Installation Procedure 1. Install the cargo lamp from the roof to the rear header garnish molding. 2. install the roof rear header garnish molding to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7540 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (CF5) Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (CF5) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front and rear door sill trim plates. 2. Remove the upper and lower front seat belt anchor bolts. 3. Remove the front side door lock pillar garnish molding from the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front side door lock pillar garnish molding to the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the upper and the lower front seat belt anchor bolts. Tighten the screws to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 3. Install the front and the rear door sill trim plates. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7541 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (With RPO Code CF5) GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - SIDE DOOR LOCK PILLAR (With RPO Code CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front and rear door sill trim plates. 2. Remove the upper and lower front seat belt anchor bolts. 3. Remove the front side door lock pillar garnish molding from the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the front side door lock pillar garnish molding to the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. 2. Install the upper and the lower front seat belt anchor bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 3. Install the front and the rear door sill trim plates. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7542 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Sunroof Panel Window (ZRX/Xtreme With RPO Code CF5) GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - SUNROOF PANEL WINDOW (ZRX/XTREME With RPO Code CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. With a medium flat-bladed tool, remove the service cover. 2. Remove the motor/actuator trim cover screw (2). 3. Lower the motor/actuator trim cover and remove the sunroof switch (4) from the cover (5). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7543 4. Remove the 2 short screws (1, 2) from the sunroof panel window garnish molding. 5. Remove the 8 screw covers (3) from the lower sunroof panel window garnish molding. 6. Remove the 8 garnish molding screws. 7. Remove the sunroof panel window garnish molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the garnish molding to the headliner. 2. Ensure the sunroof switch wiring is positioned properly through the garnish molding. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7544 3. Install one short front screw (1) and install one long rear screw in order to hold the garnish molding (3) in position. 4. Install the remaining screws including the one other short screw next to the motor/actuator. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the 8 sunroof panel window garnish molding screw covers. 6. Position the sunroof switch (4) to the motor/actuator trim cover (5). 7. Locate switch to cover in order to secure. 8. Position motor/actuator trim cover to the sunroof panel window garnish molding. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7545 9. Install the motor/actuator trim cover screw (2). Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 10. Install the motor/actuator service cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7546 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure 1. Use the J 38778 in order to remove the rear header garnish molding. Insert the J 38778 and work along the front edge of the trim panel from one end to the other. 2. Remove the cargo lamp from the roof rear header garnish molding. Installation Procedure 1. Install the cargo lamp from the roof to the rear header garnish molding. 2. install the roof rear header garnish molding to the vehicle. Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (CF5) Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (CF5) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front and rear door sill trim plates. 2. Remove the upper and lower front seat belt anchor bolts. 3. Remove the front side door lock pillar garnish molding from the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7547 1. Install the front side door lock pillar garnish molding to the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the upper and the lower front seat belt anchor bolts. Tighten the screws to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 3. Install the front and the rear door sill trim plates. Garnish Molding Replacement - Side Door Lock Pillar (With RPO Code CF5) GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - SIDE DOOR LOCK PILLAR (With RPO Code CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front and rear door sill trim plates. 2. Remove the upper and lower front seat belt anchor bolts. 3. Remove the front side door lock pillar garnish molding from the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the front side door lock pillar garnish molding to the vehicle. Feed the seat belt through the garnish molding. 2. Install the upper and the lower front seat belt anchor bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). 3. Install the front and the rear door sill trim plates. Garnish Molding Replacement - Sunroof Panel Window (ZRX/Xtreme With RPO Code CF5) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7548 GARNISH MOLDING REPLACEMENT - SUNROOF PANEL WINDOW (ZRX/XTREME With RPO Code CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. With a medium flat-bladed tool, remove the service cover. 2. Remove the motor/actuator trim cover screw (2). 3. Lower the motor/actuator trim cover and remove the sunroof switch (4) from the cover (5). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7549 4. Remove the 2 short screws (1, 2) from the sunroof panel window garnish molding. 5. Remove the 8 screw covers (3) from the lower sunroof panel window garnish molding. 6. Remove the 8 garnish molding screws. 7. Remove the sunroof panel window garnish molding from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the garnish molding to the headliner. 2. Ensure the sunroof switch wiring is positioned properly through the garnish molding. 3. Install one short front screw (1) and install one long rear screw in order to hold the garnish molding (3) in position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7550 4. Install the remaining screws including the one other short screw next to the motor/actuator. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the 8 sunroof panel window garnish molding screw covers. 6. Position the sunroof switch (4) to the motor/actuator trim cover (5). 7. Locate switch to cover in order to secure. 8. Position motor/actuator trim cover to the sunroof panel window garnish molding. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7551 9. Install the motor/actuator trim cover screw (2). Tighten the screw to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 10. Install the motor/actuator service cover. Garnish Molding Replacement - Windshield Pillar Garnish Molding Replacement - Windshield Pillar Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad and Garnish Clip Remover Removal Procedure Use the J 38778 in order to remove the windshield garnish molding from the windshield pillar. Pull the molding away from the pillar and then up. Installation Procedure Install the windshield molding to the windshield pillar. Align the retainer clips with the slots and press the molding into place. Trim Panel Replacement - Body Side (2-Door Utility) Trim Panel Replacement - Body Side (2-Door Utility) Removal Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7552 1. Remove the upper and lower front seat anchor bolts. 2. Remove the rear seat belt lower anchor nut. 3. Remove the assist handle. 4. Remove the coat hook. 5. Remove the endgate or the liftgate opening door sill trim plate. 6. Fold the rear seats down. 7. Remove the jack storage cover (left side only). 8. Remove the screw that retains the upper body side trim body side trim panel to the vehicle (left side only). 9. Remove the upper body side trim panel from the vehicle. 10. Feed the seat belt through the trim panel. 11. Remove the body side front lower trim panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the body side front lower trim panel to the vehicle. 2. Install the upper body side trim panel to the vehicle. 3. Feed the seat belt through the trim panel. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the screw that retains the upper body side trim panel to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7553 Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Install the jack storage cover (left side only). 6. Install the endgate or the liftgate opening door sill trim plate. 7. Install the coat hook. 8. Install the assist handle. 9. Install the rear seat belt anchor nut. Tighten the nut to 80 N.m (59 lb ft). 10. Install the upper and lower front seat belt anchor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). Trim Panel Replacement - Body Side (4-Door Utility) Trim Panel Replacement - Body Side (4-Door Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the upper and lower rear seat belt anchor bolts. 2. Remove the endgate or the liftgate opening door sill trim plate. 3. Remove the jack storage cover (driver side only). 4. Remove the screws that retain the body side trim panel to the vehicle (driver side only). 5. Remove the spare tire and the carrier assembly (if equipped). 6. Remove the left and right body side trim panel from the vehicle. 7. Feed the seat belt through the trim panel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the body side trim panel to the vehicle. 2. Feed the seat belt through the trim panel. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the screws that retain the body side trim panel to the vehicle (left side only). Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 4. Install the spare tire and the carrier assembly (if equipped). 5. Install the jack storage cover (left side only). 6. Install the endgate or liftgate opening door sill trim plate. 7. Install the upper and lower rear seat belt anchor bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7554 * Tighten the upper bolts to to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). * Tighten the lower bolts to to 80 N.m (59 lb ft). Trim Panel Replacement - Left Hinge Pillar TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - LEFT HINGE PILLAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left front door sill trim plate. 2. Remove the body hinge pillar trim panel from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the body hinge pillar trim panel to the vehicle. 2. Install the left front door sill trim plate. Trim Panel Replacement - Right Hinge Pillar TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - RIGHT HINGE PILLAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the right front door sill trim plate from the vehicle by gently pulling it upward. 2. Remove the right-side instrument panel sound insulator. 3. Remove the body hinge pillar trim panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Garnish Molding Replacement - Rear Upper > Page 7555 1. Install the body hinge trim panel. 2. Install the right-side instrument panel sound insulator. 3. Install the right front door sill trim plate to the vehicle by snapping it into place. Trim Replacement - Third Pillar (4-Door Utility) Trim Replacement - Third Pillar (4-Door Utility) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door sill trim plate. 2. Remove the lower rear seat belt bolt. 3. Remove the body side lower trim panel from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the body side lower trim panel to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the lower seat belt bolt. Tighten the bolt to 70 N.m (52 lb in). 3. Install the rear door sill trim plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Lock Cylinder Replacement - Door Removal Procedure New lock cylinders are available as replacement components. When you replace a lock cylinder, apply a coating of appropriate lubricant inside the lock case and the cylinder keyway prior to installing the cylinder. Refer to Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations in Maintenance and Lubrication. In order to repair a binding lock cylinder, Refer to Binding Lock Cylinders. In order to code a new lock cylinder, Refer to Key and Lock Cylinder Coding in General Information. 1. Remove the outside door handle. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to remove the door lock cylinder retainer. 3. Remove the door lock cylinder from the outside door handle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the door lock cylinder to the outside door handle. 2. Install the door lock cylinder retainer. 3. Install the outside door handle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driven/Front Passenger (Except LH Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7564 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7565 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility, Crew Cab With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7566 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Pickup With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7567 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Without RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7568 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 7573 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 7574 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 7575 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7580 Keyless Entry Receiver: Service and Repair REMOTE CONTROL DOOR LOCK RECEIVER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left side instrument panel sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the remote control door lock receiver from the instrument panel sound insulator by unsnapping it. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the remote control door lock receiver from the instrument panel sound insulator by snapping it. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the left side instrument panel sound insulator. 4. Reprogram the transmitters. Refer to Transmitter Programming. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 5. Test the operation of the system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics Keyless Starting System: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-002 Date: February 27, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Inoperative Remote Vehicle Start Models: 2005-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2005-2008 HUMMER H2 with Remote Keyless Entry RPOs AP3 or AP8 Remote Vehicle Start (RVS) Inoperative Diagnostic Concerns Information on Hood Latch Switches One of the many components involved in the Remote Vehicle Starting System is the Hood Latch Switch. The state of this switch is checked by the BCM during a remote vehicle start request and the component must function properly in order for the vehicle to commence a remote start event. During the infancy of this option (RPO AP3/AP8) parts return analysis showed a significantly shorter than expected component life for the Hood Latch Switch shared across many different GM vehicles. The switches currently being factory installed, and sent as service replacement parts, are vastly improved in design and suitably robust. Most hood latch switches currently returned under warranty are analyzed and determined to have no trouble found (NTF). It is understandable and desirable that technicians gain familiarity with the vehicles they service on a daily basis, however it is required that technicians follow Strategy Based Diagnostics before replacing this switch. Important: The ONLY way to repair or replace a hood latch switch is to replace the LATCH ASSEMBLY. The switch CANNOT be serviced separately from the latch and is NOT AVAILABLE from GMSPO. Any effort to remove the switch from the latch will permanently damage the switch and void the warranty coverage of that part. Important: The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for RVS purposes. The switch is integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides two separate inputs to the BCM. These separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault. RVS System Operation The remote vehicle start (RVS) function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. RVS functions have an operating range of up to 59 m (195 ft) depending on conditions. The RVS sequence begins by pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the keyless entry transmitter. The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time an RVS is performed the vehicle doors are locked; however they may then be unlocked/locked with the transmitter or vehicle key at any time. Once activated the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The RVS time may be extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and holding the RVS buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called an RVS continue and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the RVS continue is performed at 7 minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The RVS event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the RVS button on the transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps. RVS System Description Remote vehicle start (RVS) begins as a Radio Frequency (RF) message received by the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) from a keyless entry transmitter. The RVS request is sent by the RCDLR to the body control module (BCM) via serial data line. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent (CTD) closures ajar status and body DTCs to determine if an RVS event will occur. If conditions are determined to be acceptable the RVS message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) to determine if engine starting will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable the ECM will initiate engine starting. During Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Starting System - System Inoperative Diagnostics > Page 7585 the engine run time in an RVS attempt before the operator enters the vehicle the ECM may discontinue engine operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned OFF. Reasons an RVS event will NOT Happen The RVS System WILL NOT operate if any of the following conditions are present: ^ A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is set - obtain vehicle DTCs. ^ Keyless Entry Transmitter is not Operational. ^ The vehicle is in Valet Mode. ^ RVS is Disabled through Vehicle Personalization. ^ More than 2 Remote Starts have been attempted. ^ The HAZARD switch is in the ON position. ^ A current HAZARD switch DTC is set. ^ A current HOOD AJAR DTC is set. ^ Rear compartment lid is ajar. ^ Any Door is not locked. ^ The Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system detects an alarm trigger. ^ Engine RPM greater than 0 Detected. ^ Excessive Coolant TEMP is registered. ^ Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent. ^ Vehicle is not in PARK. ^ A current Vehicle Theft Deterrent Malfunction DTC. ^ A current Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System DTC is set. ^ A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM. ^ Vehicle power mode is incorrect. Diagnostic Information Starting Point For additional assistance refer to Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative in the Electronic Service Information. This section will guide you through the complete Strategy Based Diagnostics and provide Specific Diagnostic Procedure Instructions. Warranty Information Please refer to the published Labor Time Guides and claim the corresponding labor operation for the component(s) replaced. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Insert a small coin between the 2 halves of the transmitter case at the slot provided near the key ring hole. 2. Twist the coin in order to open the case. 3. Open the transmitter case. 4. Remove the battery. NOTE: Refer to Handling ESD Sensitive Parts Notice in Service Precautions. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the battery with the positive (+) side up.Use one 3 V CR2032 battery (or the equivalent). 2. Ensure that the seal is in position. Align the 2 halves of the case and snap the two halves together. 3. Resynchronize the transmitter. Refer to Transmitter Synchronization. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driven/Front Passenger (Except LH Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7594 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7595 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility, Crew Cab With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7596 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Pickup With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7597 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Without RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7598 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7602 Door Lock Actuator - Front Passenger, RR, LR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Door Lock Actuator: Procedures Lock Actuator Replacement - Front Door LOCK ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT - FRONT DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Remove the door latch assembly. 4. Remove the 2 screws (2) that retain the lock actuator (1) to the latch. 5. Simultaneously lift up on and rotate the actuator away from the latch in order to disengage the rubber bumper (1) from the latch. 6. Remove the actuator from the latch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rubber bumper (1) to the latch. 2. Rotate the actuator toward the latch in order to fully engage the rubber bumper into the latch. 3. Install the actuator to the top of the latch. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the first tooth of the gear on the actuator and the first tooth of the gear on the latch align and interlock properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7605 4. Install the 2 screws (2) that retain the actuator (1) to the latch. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 0.75 N.m (6 lb in). 5. Install the latch to the door. 6. Install the water deflector. 7. Install the door trim panel. Lock Actuator Replacement - Rear Door LOCK ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT - REAR DOOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Remove the door latch assembly. 4. Remove the 2 screws (2) that retain the lock actuator (1) to the latch. 5. Simultaneously lift up on and rotate the actuator away from the latch in order to disengage the rubber bumper (1) from the latch. 6. Remove the actuator from the latch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7606 1. Install the rubber bumper (1) to the latch. 2. Rotate the actuator toward the latch in order to fully engage the rubber bumper into the latch. 3. Install the actuator to the top of the latch. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the first tooth of the gear on the actuator and the first tooth of the gear on the latch align and interlock properly. 4. Install the 2 screws (2) that retain the actuator (1) to the latch. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 0.75 N.m (6 lb in). 5. Install the latch to the door. 6. Install the water deflector. 7. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7607 Power Door Lock Actuator: Removal and Replacement Lock Actuator Replacement - Front Door Lock Actuator Replacement - Front Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Remove the door latch assembly. 4. Remove the 2 screws (2) that retain the lock actuator (1) to the latch. 5. Simultaneously lift up on and rotate the actuator away from the latch in order to disengage the rubber bumper (1) from the latch. 6. Remove the actuator from the latch. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rubber bumper (1) to the latch. 2. Rotate the actuator toward the latch in order to fully engage the rubber bumper into the latch. Important: Ensure that the first tooth of the gear on the actuator and the first tooth of the gear on the latch align and interlock properly. 3. Install the actuator to the top of the latch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7608 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the 2 screws (2) that retain the actuator (1) to the latch. Tighten the screws to 0.75 N.m (6 lb in). 5. Install the latch to the door. 6. Install the water deflector. 7. Install the door trim panel. Lock Actuator Replacement - Rear Door Lock Actuator Replacement - Rear Door Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Remove the door latch assembly. 4. Remove the 2 screws (2) that retain the lock actuator (1) to the latch. 5. Simultaneously lift up on and rotate the actuator away from the latch in order to disengage the rubber bumper (1) from the latch. 6. Remove the actuator from the latch. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7609 1. Install the rubber bumper (1) to the latch. 2. Rotate the actuator toward the latch in order to fully engage the rubber bumper into the latch. Important: Ensure that the first tooth of the gear on the actuator and the first tooth of the gear on the latch align and interlock properly. 3. Install the actuator to the top of the latch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the 2 screws (2) that retain the actuator (1) to the latch. Tighten the screws to 0.75 N.m (6 lb in). 5. Install the latch to the door. 6. Install the water deflector. 7. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock And Window Switch - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7613 Door Lock and Window Switch - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7614 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7615 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7616 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time Heated Element: Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Heated Mirrors, Defrosting Time INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-64-011A Date: February 25, 2010 Subject: Information on Heated Electrochromatic Outside Rearview Mirror Performance Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-64-011 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Defrosting Time/Performance Concern The electrochromatic (auto-dimming) outside rearview mirror used on the driver's side of many GM vehicles is slower to defrost than the passenger side outside rearview mirror. This is a normal condition. The glass on the driver's side electrochromatic mirror is twice as thick as the traditional glass on the passenger side mirror. The heating elements for the mirrors on both sides draw the same wattage, therefore the driver's side mirror will take approximately twice as long to defrost as the passenger mirror (approximately four minutes versus two minutes). Should a customer indicate that the driver's side heated mirror is not functioning correctly, verify it's function based upon this information prior to replacing the mirror. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Calibration Procedure MEMORY SEAT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The memory seat module uses position sensor inputs to establish soft stop locations for the adjuster motors several millimeters ahead of the physical limits of the adjuster assembly. After replacing a memory seat module or adjuster components, it may be necessary to reset the adjuster motor soft stop locations. When the repair procedure has been completed, operate the seat adjuster switch in every direction until the seat adjuster reaches its mechanical hard stop by repeatedly pressing and releasing the switch as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 7627 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Control Module Replacement MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the memory seat module harness connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws securing the memory module bracket to the seat adjuster frame. 4. Remove the memory module bracket with the module. 5. Remove the module from the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the memory seat module into the bracket until the module is seated. 2. Install the memory seat module and bracket to the seat adjuster frame assembly with 2 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Install the memory seat module harness connectors. 4. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 7628 5. Calibrate the seat. Refer to Memory Seat Calibration Procedure . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7632 Outside Rearview Folding Mirror Switch (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement > Page 7635 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Carefully use a flat-bladed tool in order to release the outside mirror switch retaining tabs from the trim panel. 2. Remove the outside mirror switch from the trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the power folding mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power folding mirror switch. 2. Position the power folding mirror switch to the door trim panel. 3. Apply downward pressure to the power folding mirror switch, ensuring the retaining tabs are fully seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement > Page 7636 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Folding Outside Mirror Switch Replacement POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the folding outside mirror switch by carefully using a flat-bladed tool in order to pry up on the leading edge. 3. Remove the accessory switch panel from the armrest. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge leaving the electrical connections connected. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the power folding mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power folding mirror switch. 2. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 3. Install the power folding mirror switch to the door trim panel. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: Customer Interest Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 7646 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 05-08-51-008C > Jun > 09 > Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint > Page 7652 Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 08-08-51-002 > Mar > 08 > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 08-08-51-002 > Mar > 08 > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 7662 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 7663 Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-08-51-008C Date: 090622 Body - Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 7664 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-08-51-008C Date: June 22, 2009 Subject: Bumps or Rust Colored Spots in Paint Due to Rail or Iron Dust (Remove Rail Dust) Models: 1994-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-51-008B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Visible rust colored spots or bumps on a vehicle's paint surface from rail or iron dust. Cause Rail dust comes from tiny iron particles produced from the friction between train wheels and the tracks and gets deposited on the vehicle surfaces. Iron dust can get deposited on the surface if the vehicle is stored near any operation producing iron dust such as an iron ore yard. Either material can lay on top of, or become embedded in, the paint surface. Correction Because the severity of the condition varies, proper diagnosis of the damage is critical to the success of repairs. Diagnosis should be performed on horizontal surfaces (hood, roof, deck lid, pick up box, etc.) after the vehicle has been properly cleaned. There are two types of repair materials recommended to repair rail dust or iron dust: 1. GEL TYPE OXALIC ACID: - Has the characteristics of the liquid type oxalic acid but stays where you put it because of its gel consistency. 2. CLAY TYPE NON-ACID BASED: - Requires surface lubricant during use. - Has different grades available. Caution Rail dust remover (Oxalic Acid) is an acidic substance containing chemicals that will break down the iron particles embedded in the finish. When working with rail dust remover, use the necessary safety equipment, including gloves and goggles. Follow the chemical manufacturer's directions closely because it may require special handling and disposal. If, upon inspection, some particles are still present, the various chemical manufacturer's processes can be repeated. After the removal process, small pits may remain in the clearcoat and can be corrected, in most cases, with a finesse/polish operation. Procedure 1. Move the vehicle to a cool shaded area and make sure that the vehicle surfaces are cool during the removal process. DO NOT PERFORM THE REMOVAL PROCESS IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR ON A VEHICLE WITH HOT OR WARM BODY PANELS. 2. Wash the vehicle with soap and water. Dry it immediately and clean the affected areas with a wax and grease remover. 3. Perform the removal process according to the chemical manufacturer's directions. Once the damage has been repaired, the final step involves a polishing process. Rail Dust Remover Manufacturers Use the chemical manufacturers listed below, or equivalent: Auto Magic(R) or Clay Magic(R) products available from: Auto Wax Company, Inc. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 7665 1275 Round Table Dr. Dallas, TX 75247 (800) 826-0828 (Toll-Free) or (214) 631-4000 (Local) Fax (214) 634-1342 www.automagic.com [email protected] E038 Fallout Gel or E038E Liquid Fallout Remover II available from: Valvoline Car Brite Company 1910 South State Avenue Indianapolis, In 46203 (800) 347-2439 (Toll Free) or (317) 788-9925 (Local) Fax (317) 788-9930 www.carbrite.com [email protected] *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. If rail dust remover is not available in your area, call one of the numbers listed above for a distributor near your location. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Refer to the Policy & Procedures Manual, section 1.2.1.7 for detailed information regarding warranty coverage for this condition. Important In certain cases where the vehicle finish is severely damaged and the actual repair time exceeds the published time, the additional time should be submitted in the "Other Labor Hours" field. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) Paint: Application and ID Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) COLOR COMPATIBILITY GUIDE (Paint Codes) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7668 WA130B/46 - WA214M/26 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7669 WA214M/26 - WA215M/38 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7670 WA215M/38 - WA228M/64 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7671 WA228M/64 - WA379E/86 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7672 WA379E/86 - WA397E/25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7673 WA397E/25 - WA519F/12 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7674 WA526F/72 - WA5456/43 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7675 WA5456/43 - WA703J/22 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7676 WA703J/22 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7677 WA722J/25 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7678 WA800J/98 - WA805K/62 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7679 WA805K/62 - WA811K/87 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7680 WA811K/87 - WA812K/88 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7681 WA812K/88 - WA815K/91 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7682 WA816K/92 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7683 WA817K/63 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7684 WA817K/63 - WA8265/61 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7685 WA8265/61 - WA8554/40 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7686 WA8554/40 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7687 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7688 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7689 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7690 WA8555/41 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7691 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7692 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7693 WA8624/50 - WA9088/94 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7694 WA9088/94 - WA913L/56 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7695 WA913L/56 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7696 WA9260/74 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7697 WA9260/74 - WA926L/59 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7698 WA926L/59 - WA928L/46 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7699 WA928L/46 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7700 WA929L/15 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7701 WA929L/15 - WA930L/68 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7702 WA930L/68 - WA937L/34 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7703 WA9414/34 - WA9539/47 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7704 WA9539/47 - WA9792/39 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7705 WA9792/39 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7706 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7707 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7708 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7709 Paint: Application and ID Paint Identification Precautions PAINT IDENTIFICATION Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM PIN 4901 MD This book identities the paint systems you may use. The basecoat/clearcoat paint is factory applied in the following 4 layers in order to give the finish a high gloss look: 1. A cathodic immersion primer 2. A primer/surfacer 3. A basecoat 4. A clear top coat (clearcoat) Refer to the Service Parts ID Label to identify the type of top coat on the vehicle. This label contains all paint related information for the vehicle. This includes paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7710 Paint: Application and ID Parts ID Label Location The vehicle service parts identification label is located inside the instrument panel I/P compartment. The label is used to help identify the vehicle original parts and options. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7711 Paint: Application and ID Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) COLOR COMPATIBILITY GUIDE (Paint Codes) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7712 WA130B/46 - WA214M/26 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7713 WA214M/26 - WA215M/38 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7714 WA215M/38 - WA228M/64 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7715 WA228M/64 - WA379E/86 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7716 WA379E/86 - WA397E/25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7717 WA397E/25 - WA519F/12 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7718 WA526F/72 - WA5456/43 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7719 WA5456/43 - WA703J/22 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7720 WA703J/22 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7721 WA722J/25 - WA722J/25 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7722 WA800J/98 - WA805K/62 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7723 WA805K/62 - WA811K/87 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7724 WA811K/87 - WA812K/88 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7725 WA812K/88 - WA815K/91 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7726 WA816K/92 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7727 WA817K/63 - WA817K/63 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7728 WA817K/63 - WA8265/61 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7729 WA8265/61 - WA8554/40 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7730 WA8554/40 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7731 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7732 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7733 WA8555/41 - WA8555/41 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7734 WA8555/41 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7735 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7736 WA8624/50 - WA8624/50 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7737 WA8624/50 - WA9088/94 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7738 WA9088/94 - WA913L/56 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7739 WA913L/56 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7740 WA9260/74 - WA9260/74 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7741 WA9260/74 - WA926L/59 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7742 WA926L/59 - WA928L/46 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7743 WA928L/46 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7744 WA929L/15 - WA929L/15 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7745 WA929L/15 - WA930L/68 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7746 WA930L/68 - WA937L/34 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7747 WA9414/34 - WA9539/47 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7748 WA9539/47 - WA9792/39 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7749 WA9792/39 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7750 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7751 WA994L/67 - WA994L/67 Paint Identification Precautions PAINT IDENTIFICATION Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7752 all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM PIN 4901 MD This book identities the paint systems you may use. The basecoat/clearcoat paint is factory applied in the following 4 layers in order to give the finish a high gloss look: 1. A cathodic immersion primer 2. A primer/surfacer 3. A basecoat 4. A clear top coat (clearcoat) Refer to the Service Parts ID Label to identify the type of top coat on the vehicle. This label contains all paint related information for the vehicle. This includes paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors. Parts ID Label Location The vehicle service parts identification label is located inside the instrument panel I/P compartment. The label is used to help identify the vehicle original parts and options. Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. All paint finish repairs of rigid exterior surfaces must meet GM standards. Refer to the latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N GM4901M-D to identify the paint systems you may use that have been engineered to meet GM standards. The GM Approved Refinish Materials book supplies all approved products, including volatile organic compound (VOC) compliant regulations recommended by the individual manufacturer, and detailed procedures for materials used in their paint system. Paint Identification Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Color Compatibility Guide (Paint Codes) > Page 7753 Paint Identification Caution: Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Important: Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book GM P/N 4901M-D. This book identifies the paint systems you may use. Use the service parts identification label to identify the type of paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors on the vehicle. Refer to Label - Vehicle Certification, Tire Place Card, Anti-Theft and Service Parts ID in General Information. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Calibration Procedure MEMORY SEAT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The memory seat module uses position sensor inputs to establish soft stop locations for the adjuster motors several millimeters ahead of the physical limits of the adjuster assembly. After replacing a memory seat module or adjuster components, it may be necessary to reset the adjuster motor soft stop locations. When the repair procedure has been completed, operate the seat adjuster switch in every direction until the seat adjuster reaches its mechanical hard stop by repeatedly pressing and releasing the switch as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 7759 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Control Module Replacement MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the memory seat module harness connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws securing the memory module bracket to the seat adjuster frame. 4. Remove the memory module bracket with the module. 5. Remove the module from the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the memory seat module into the bracket until the module is seated. 2. Install the memory seat module and bracket to the seat adjuster frame assembly with 2 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Install the memory seat module harness connectors. 4. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 7760 5. Calibrate the seat. Refer to Memory Seat Calibration Procedure . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams Memory Seat Module - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7764 Memory Seat Module - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7765 Memory Seat Module - Driver C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Harness Routing (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7769 Heated Seat Control Module - Driver/Front Passenger (Part Of The Heated Seat Assembly) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof Control Module And Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7773 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7774 Sunroof Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7775 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the straps that retain the wiring harness. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Slide the sunroof control module (2) to the right in order to remove the sunroof control module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the sunroof control module (2) to the left in order to install the sunroof control module to the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed. 3. Install the straps that retain the wiring harness. 4. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair SUNROOF SUNSHADE PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof glass. 2. Slide the sunshade forward. 3. Flex the center of the sunshade downward while pulling up and forward on the front center of the sunshade. 4. Pull the sunshade forward until the front tabs release from the track slots. 5. Flex the center of the sunshade downward and release the rear tabs from the track slots. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the rear tabs of the sunshade into the track slots. 2. Carefully slide the sunshade rearward until the front tabs are aligned with the track slots. 3. Push the front tabs through the track slots. 4. Slide the sunshade rearward. 5. Install the sunroof glass. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Sunroof Control Module And Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7784 Sunroof Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement (With RPO Code CF5) Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement (With RPO Code CF5) SUNROOF MOTOR/ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the straps that retain the wiring harness. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Remove the screws that retain the sunroof motor/actuator (1) to the sunroof assembly. 5. Remove the sunroof motor/actuator from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: Do not move the sunroof mechanism while the motor/actuator is not in place. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the sunroof motor/actuator (1) to the vehicle. 2. Install the screws that retain the sunroof motor/actuator (1) to the sunroof assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the sunroof motor/actuator screws to 3.5 N.m (31 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Install the straps that retain the wiring harness. 5. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Motor/Actuator Replacement (With RPO Code CF5) > Page 7787 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Sunroof Motor/Actuator Synchronization (ZRX/XTREME With RPO Code CF5) SUNROOF MOTOR/ACTUATOR SYNCHRONIZATION (ZRX/XTREME W/ CF5) TIMING PROCEDURE 1. Open the window at least 2 inches from the front of the sunroof. If the sunroof will not open, refer to Sunroof Manual Operation (ZRX/XTREME w/ CF5) . 2. Remove the motor. 3. Place your hands on the front edge of the window and gently push both sides to the full open position. Take care to move both sides of the window at the same time. Verify that the leading edge of the window panel is parallel with the rear edge of the sunroof mainframe. 4. Check the screws on the drive tube retainer plates (the gold colored screw located behind the motor block). If loose, check or re-insert the ends of the cable drive and return the tubes into place. Apply Loctite(r) Blue, GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent, to the screw threads prior to installing the screw. 5. Install the motor. 6. Test the function of the sunroof through several cycles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Sunroof Opening Position Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7791 Sunroof Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement SUNROOF OPENING POSITION SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the sunroof to the closed position. IMPORTANT: - Remove the headliner. - The sunroof open position (SOP) switch is aligned to the drive cables. The SOP switch comes from the factory set to the sunroof glass panel CLOSED position. A position lock pin has been installed by the factory on the top of the SOP switch. This pin must remain until after the installation of the sunroof actuator and of the SOP switch. This lock pin locks the drive gears in place and must be removed before the complete sunroof module is installed to the vehicle. - If the SOP switch is removed for inspection, the sunroof must be in the CLOSED position. A position lock pin must be inserted. If a position lock pin is not available, place 2 wires, such as the ends of a paper clip, in the holes. 2. Remove the sunroof window. 3. Remove the sunroof control module. 4. If you reuse the SOP switch, insert the position lock pin (1) in order to lock the SOP switch in the closed position. 5. Remove the sunroof motor/actuator. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the SOP switch (3). 7. Remove the screw (2) which secures the SOP switch to the sunroof module. 8. Hold down on both of the drive cables. Lift up on the SOP switch in order to remove the switch from the sunroof module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat-bladed tool if you adjust the cable mechanism and/or the cam mechanism in order to align the cable and/or the cam timing holes.When the timing holes are aligned, insert a pin with diameter 0.0317 mm (1/8 in) or a drill bit (1) into each set of the timing holes. Use tape in order to hold each pin in place. IMPORTANT: The cable mechanisms and/or the cam mechanisms, on both sides of the glass, contain a set of timing holes. These holes are aligned in the CLOSED position of the sunroof glass panel . These holes are located on the side opposite the rear screw hole, which is used in order to mount the sunroof glass panel. When installing a new sunroof open position (SOP) switch, set the sunroof glass panel to the CLOSED position. 2. Keeping the position lock pin on the new SOP switch, align the switch over the drive cables. IMPORTANT: The SOP switch comes from the factory with a position lock pin that is installed on top of the switch. This locks the timing gears in place. Do not remove the position lock pin until after the SOP switch and the actuator are installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement > Page 7794 3. Apply pressure to the SOP switch until the switch is completely seated.If the switch does not slide into position, the ridges on the drive cable housings will not go into the grooves on the back of the SOP switch. Lift each cable into the switch, and press down on the assembly until the assembly is completely seated. 4. Install the screw which secures the SOP switch to the sunroof module. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 3.4 N.m (30 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector to the SOP switch. 6. Install the sunroof motor/actuator. 7. Remove the position lock pin (1). 8. Remove the 2 alignment pins from the cable mechanisms and/or from the cam mechanisms. 9. Install the sunroof control module, but do not install the headliner until after the sunroof operation has been verified. 10. Verify the operation of the sunroof module. 11. Install the sunroof window. 12. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement > Page 7795 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement (With RPO Code CF5) SUNROOF SWITCH REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driver information console (DIC). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the driver information display module. 3. Remove 6 screws securing the sunroof switch assembly to the DIC. 4. Remove the sunroof switch assembly from the DIC. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the sunroof switch to the sunroof console with 6 screws. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the driver information display module. 3. Install the DIC. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair SUNROOF WINDOW TRACK ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (ZRX/XTREME W/ CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof motor/actuator. 2. Remove the long gold assembly screw. 3. Remove the sunroof window. 4. Remove the screws (1) from the window track. 5. Remove the window track assembly from the upper frame assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the window track assembly (left side) to the upper frame. Let the right side assembly hang. 2. Install the screws (1). 3. Lift the (right side) to the upper frame track. 4. Ensure the drive tubes are positioned into the front end of the window track. 5. Install the screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 4.0 N.m (35 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7799 6. Install the long gold assembly screw (1). 7. Install the sunroof window. 8. Install the motor/actuator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front SUNROOF DRAIN HOSE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the sunroof drain hose from the spigot at the front corner of the sunroof. 3. Unwrap the tape in order to remove the hose. IMPORTANT: The left front sunroof drain hose is a part of the dome lamp wiring harness. 4. Remove the rosebud clips from the front side door opening frame. 5. Remove the hose from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front > Page 7804 1. Install the sunroof drain hose to the spigot at the front corner of the sunroof. 2. Wrap the left drain hose to the dome lamp wiring harness using electrical tape. 3. Install the 4 rosebud clips on the harness assembly into the left front side door opening frame. 4. Install the 3 rosebud clips on the right drain hose into the right front side door opening frame. 5. Insert the hose through the hole in the outer sheet metal until the paint mark on the hose is visible. The hole is located above the front door top hinge. 6. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Front > Page 7805 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Sunroof Drain Hose Replacement - Rear SUNROOF DRAIN HOSE REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the rear drain hose from the drain exit located at the rear of the sunroof on either side. 3. Remove the rosebud clips securing the drain hose to the vehicle. 4. Remove the drain hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the rear drain hose from the drain exit located at the rear of the sunroof on either side. 2. Install the rosebud clips securing the drain hose to the vehicle. 3. Install the end of the drain hose into the sill opening. 4. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair SUNROOF FRAME REPLACEMENT (ZRX/XTREME W/ CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof panel window garnish molding. 2. Remove the screws (1) around the entire periphery of the lower frame (2). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector to the motor. 4. Remove the silver motor screw. 5. Carefully lower the rear of the frame and work the frame (2) from the front of the headliner. 6. Remove the lower frame (2) from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7809 7. Remove the upper frame assembly from the vehicle. IMPORTANT: The upper frame assembly will need to have new foam tape applied to the outer ring prior to assembly. The new foam tape will ensure the sunroof will seal properly upon the lower frame installation. 8. Remove the old foam tape and apply new foam tape to the upper frame assembly. IMPORTANT: When applying new foam tape, overlap the foam tape at a screw hole to ensure proper sealing of the screw holes. 9. Remove the sunroof window track assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the sunroof window track assembly to the new frame. 2. Position the upper frame to the roof panel. 3. Position the lower frame to the upper frame. IMPORTANT: The lower frame front needs to be positioned to the headliner first. Ensure the electrical wiring is positioned away from the upper and lower frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7810 4. When the front (2) is positioned, raise the rear of the lower frame into position. 5. Install the lower to upper frame attachment screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws (1) to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 6. Connect the electrical connector to the motor. 7. Install the silver motor screw. Tighten the screw to 4.0 N.m (35 lb in). 8. Close the sunroof window. 9. Water test the sunroof assembly. 10. Install the sunroof panel window garnish molding. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Sunroof Control Module And Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7814 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams Sunroof Control Module C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7815 Sunroof Control Module C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7816 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the straps that retain the wiring harness. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, as needed. 4. Slide the sunroof control module (2) to the right in order to remove the sunroof control module from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the sunroof control module (2) to the left in order to install the sunroof control module to the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connectors, as needed. 3. Install the straps that retain the wiring harness. 4. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair SUNROOF WINDOW REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the sunshade panel. IMPORTANT: The sunroof must be in the fully closed position prior to removing the glass panel. 2. Remove the 4 screws (2) that retain the sunroof window (1) to the sunroof module assembly. 3. Remove the sunroof window from the top of the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the sunroof window (1) to the vehicle. 2. Install the screws (2) that retain the sunroof window (1) to the sunroof module assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Perform the following steps in order to adjust the sunroof window. 1. Adjust the fit between the sunroof window and the roof opening.The fit should be equal on both sides. 2. Adjust the rear edge of the window slightly higher than the front edge in order to minimize wind noise. Tighten the sunroof window screws to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 4. Open and close the sunroof. 5. Inspect the fit of the sunroof window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair SUNROOF WINDOW WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof window. 2. Remove the sunroof window weatherstrip from the sunroof window by gently pulling the weatherstrip away at one point and continuing around the perimeter of the window. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Locate the seam on the weatherstrip. 2. Place the seam at the center of the rear edge of the sunroof window. 3. Firmly press the weatherstrip into place. Ensure that the weatherstrip is seated properly around the entire perimeter of the window. 4. Install the sunroof window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness: Service and Repair SUNROOF WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the sunroof module (2). 4. Remove the rosebud clips securing the dome lamp/sunroof harness to the left front side door opening frame. 5. Remove the tape securing the sunroof harness to the dome lamp harness 6. Disconnect the wiring harness from the body wiring harness. 7. Remove the wiring harness from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the wiring harness to the dome lamp harness by wrapping the harnesses with electrical tape. 2. Install the wiring harness rosebud clips to the left front side door opening frame. 3. Connect the wiring harness from the body wiring harness. 4. Connect the wiring harness from the sunroof module (2). 5. Install the headliner. 6. Install the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Head Rest: Procedures HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT - FRONT SEAT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Depress the retainers located in the top of the seat back.Pull upward in order to remove the head restraint at the same time. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Push the head restraint into the retainers at the top of the seat, ensuring that the head restraint locks into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7831 Head Rest: Removal and Replacement Head Restraint Replacement - Front Seat Removal Procedure Depress the retainers located in the top of the seat back. Pull upward in order to remove the head restraint at the same time. Installation Procedure Push the head restraint into the retainers at the top of the seat, ensuring that the head restraint locks into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Calibration Procedure MEMORY SEAT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The memory seat module uses position sensor inputs to establish soft stop locations for the adjuster motors several millimeters ahead of the physical limits of the adjuster assembly. After replacing a memory seat module or adjuster components, it may be necessary to reset the adjuster motor soft stop locations. When the repair procedure has been completed, operate the seat adjuster switch in every direction until the seat adjuster reaches its mechanical hard stop by repeatedly pressing and releasing the switch as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 7841 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Memory Seat Control Module Replacement MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the memory seat module harness connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws securing the memory module bracket to the seat adjuster frame. 4. Remove the memory module bracket with the module. 5. Remove the module from the bracket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Slide the memory seat module into the bracket until the module is seated. 2. Install the memory seat module and bracket to the seat adjuster frame assembly with 2 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Install the memory seat module harness connectors. 4. Install the front seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Seat Calibration Procedure > Page 7842 5. Calibrate the seat. Refer to Memory Seat Calibration Procedure . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams Power Seat Control Module: Diagrams Memory Seat Module - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7846 Memory Seat Module - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7847 Memory Seat Module - Driver C3 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor: Locations Seat Lumbar Motor and Seat Recliner Motor (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7851 Seat Motors (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Recliner Motor Seat Recliner Motor - Driver (w/o Memory) Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7854 Seat Recliner Motor - Driver (w/ Memory) Part 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7855 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Front Vertical Motor Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7856 Seat Front Vertical Motor - Front Passenger (w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7857 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Horizontal Motor Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7858 Sear Horizontal Motor - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7859 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Lumbar Motor Seat Lumbar Motor - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7860 Seat Lumbar Motor - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7861 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Seat Rear Vertical Motor Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 7862 Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7863 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR GUARD REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the 2 screws securing the guard to the seat. 2. Remove the guard. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Position the guard on the front of the seat adjuster assembly. 2. Install the guard to the seat with the 2 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Power Seat Motor Position Sensor: Diagrams Seat Front Vertical Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7867 Seat Horizontal Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7868 Seat Rear Vertical Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Seat Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7872 Seat Motors (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7873 Seat Harness Routing (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (w/ 6-Way) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7876 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver C1 (w/ 8-Way, w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7877 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver C2 (w/ 8-Way, W/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7878 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver/Front Passenger (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7879 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger (w/ 6-Way) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7880 Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger C1 (w/ 8-Way, W/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7881 Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger C2 (w/ 8-Way, w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7882 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Lumbar Switch Seat Lumbar Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7883 Seat Lumbar Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Lumbar Switch Replacement LUMBAR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7886 2. Install the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Seat Switch Replacement - Power SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7887 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with the 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7888 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7889 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with the 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Back: Procedures Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front SEAT BACK COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the head restraint, if equipped, from the seat back. 2. Remove the EZ entry release handle, if equipped, from the seat back. 3. Separate the J-strip at the base of the seat back. 4. Remove the seat cover from the pad by sliding the cover upward off the seat back. 5. Remove the seat back cardboard by unhooking the plastic clips from the lumber support. 6. Separate the seat back pad from the seat back frame. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back pad onto the seat back frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7894 2. Install the seat back cardboard to the seat by hooking the plastic clips onto the lumbar support. 3. Pull the seat cover over the entire seat back. 4. Engage the J-strip at the base of the seat back. 5. Install the head restraint to the seat back. Seat Back Filler Panel Replacement - Rear SEAT BACK FILLER PANEL REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Fold down the rear seat to access the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts. 2. Remove the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts. 3. Remove the rear seatback filler panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the rear seatback filler panel. 2. Install the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts to 80 N.m (59 lb ft). Seat Back Recliner Handle Replacement - Front Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7895 SEAT BACK RECLINER HANDLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the handle retaining screw. 2. Remove the recliner handle (1) from the seat bottom. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the recliner handle (1) to the seat bottom. 2. Install the retaining screw to secure the handle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the handle retaining screw to 1.5 N.m (14 lb in). Seat Back Recliner Replacement - Front SEAT BACK RECLINER REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the recliner handle. 2. Remove the recliner cover. 3. Remove the inertia latch from the recliner assembly. 4. Remove the recliner assembly bolts. 5. Remove the recliner assembly from the seat. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7896 1. Install the recliner assembly to the seat. 2. Install the recliner assembly to the seat frame bolts. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the recliner assembly to the seat frame bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the inertia latch. 4. Install the recliner trim cover to the seat. 5. Install the recliner handle. Seat Back Release Cable Replacement - Front SEAT BACK RELEASE CABLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the seat back recliner handle. 3. Remove the 4 J-strips (1) securing the seat cover to the frame. 4. Remove spring (2) from the seat adjuster. 5. Pull the seat cushion pad and cover back to expose the frame. 6. Remove the 2 nuts (1) securing the seat adjuster rail to the frame. 7. Remove the cable (2) from the clip (1) on the adjuster rail. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7897 8. Remove the cable (2) from the hole in the adjuster rail. 9. Remove the cable from the pass through hole (2) in the adjuster rail. 10. Remove the 2 bolts (1) from the seat back pivot assembly. 11. Remove the cable cover bracket (2). 12. Remove the cable (3) from the bracket (1) by loosening cable nut (2). 13. Remove cable (3). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the cable (3) through the hole (2) in the seat adjuster rail. 2. Hook the cable (3) into the rail and clip the cable to the rail (1). 3. Install the seat adjuster rail to the seat frame with 2 nuts (1). NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7898 4. Install the cable (3) to the seat back pivot assembly. 5. Install the cable (3) to the pivot assembly bracket by tightening cable nut (2). 6. Install the cable cover bracket (2) to the seat back pivot assembly. 7. Install the 2 bolts (1). Tighten the bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft) 8. Pull the pad and cover back over the seat frame. 9. Install the pad and cover to seat with J-strips (1). 10. Install the spring (2) to the seat adjuster rail. 11. Install the seat back recliner handle. 12. Install seat in the vehicle. Seat Back Replacement - Front (Bench Seat) SEAT BACK REPLACEMENT - FRONT (BENCH SEAT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the recliner assembly. 3. Remove the seat back pivot bolt. 4. Remove the seat back from the lower frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7899 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back to the lower frame. 2. Install the seat back pivot bolt. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the seat back pivot bolt to 47 N.m (35 lb ft). 3. Install the recliner assembly. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Seat Back Replacement - Front (Bucket Seat) SEAT BACK REPLACEMENT - FRONT (BUCKET SEAT) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the seat back cover and pad. 3. Remove the seat cushion trim cover and pad. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector for the seat back recliner motor, if equipped. 5. Remove the bolts securing the seat back to the seat adjuster assembly. 6. Remove the seat back. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat back to the seat adjuster assembly. 2. Install the bolts securing the seat back to the seat adjuster assembly. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the seat back bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the electrical connector for the seat back recliner motor, if equipped. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7900 4. Install the seat cushion trim cover and pad. 5. Install the seat back cover and pad. 6. Install the seat in the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7901 Seat Back: Removal and Replacement Seat Back Replacement - Front (Bench Seat) Seat Back Replacement - Front (Bench Seat) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the recliner assembly. 3. Remove the seat back pivot bolt. 4. Remove the seat back from the lower frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat back to the lower frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the seat back pivot bolt. Tighten the seat back pivot bolt to 47 N.m (35 lb ft). 3. Install the recliner assembly. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Seat Back Replacement - Front (Bucket Seat) Seat Back Replacement - Front (Bucket Seat) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the seat back cover and pad. 3. Remove the seat cushion trim cover and pad. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7902 4. Disconnect the electrical connector for the seat back recliner motor, if equipped. 5. Remove the bolts securing the seat back to the seat adjuster assembly. 6. Remove the seat back. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat back to the seat adjuster assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts securing the seat back to the seat adjuster assembly. Tighten the seat back bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the electrical connector for the seat back recliner motor, if equipped. 4. Install the seat cushion trim cover and pad. 5. Install the seat back cover and pad. 6. Install the seat in the vehicle. Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the head restraint, if equipped, from the seat back. 2. Remove the EZ entry release handle, if equipped, from the seat back. 3. Separate the J-strip at the base of the seat back. 4. Remove the seat cover from the pad by sliding the cover upward off the seat back. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7903 5. Remove the seat back cardboard by unhooking the plastic clips from the lumber support. 6. Separate the seat back pad from the seat back frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat back pad onto the seat back frame. 2. Install the seat back cardboard to the seat by hooking the plastic clips onto the lumbar support. 3. Pull the seat cover over the entire seat back. 4. Engage the J-strip at the base of the seat back. 5. Install the head restraint to the seat back. Seat Back Recliner Replacement - Front Seat Back Recliner Replacement - Front Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7904 Removal Procedure 1. Remove the recliner handle. 2. Remove the recliner cover. 3. Remove the inertia latch from the recliner assembly. 4. Remove the recliner assembly bolts. 5. Remove the recliner assembly from the seat. Installation Procedure 1. Install the recliner assembly to the seat. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the recliner assembly to the seat frame bolts. Tighten the recliner assembly to the seat frame bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the inertia latch. 4. Install the recliner trim cover to the seat. 5. Install the recliner handle. Seat Back Recliner Handle Replacement - Front Seat Back Recliner Handle Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the handle retaining screw. 2. Remove the recliner handle (1) from the seat bottom. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7905 1. Install the recliner handle (1) to the seat bottom. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the retaining screw to secure the handle. Tighten the handle retaining screw to 1.5 N.m (14 lb in). Seat Back Release Cable Replacement - Front Seat Back Release Cable Replacement - Front Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the seat back recliner handle. 3. Remove the 4 J-strips (1) securing the seat cover to the frame. 4. Remove spring (2) from the seat adjuster. 5. Pull the seat cushion pad and cover back to expose the frame. 6. Remove the 2 nuts (1) securing the seat adjuster rail to the frame. 7. Remove the cable (2) from the clip (1) on the adjuster rail. 8. Remove the cable (2) from the hole in the adjuster rail. 9. Remove the cable from the pass through hole (2) in the adjuster rail. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7906 10. Remove the 2 bolts (1) from the seat back pivot assembly. 11. Remove the cable cover bracket (2). 12. Remove the cable (3) from the bracket (1) by loosening cable nut (2). 13. Remove cable (3). Installation Procedure 1. Install the cable (3) through the hole (2) in the seat adjuster rail. 2. Hook the cable (3) into the rail and clip the cable to the rail (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 3. Install the seat adjuster rail to the seat frame with 2 nuts (1). Tighten the bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7907 4. Install the cable (3) to the seat back pivot assembly. 5. Install the cable (3) to the pivot assembly bracket by tightening cable nut (2). 6. Install the cable cover bracket (2) to the seat back pivot assembly. 7. Install the 2 bolts (1). Tighten the bolts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft) 8. Pull the pad and cover back over the seat frame. 9. Install the pad and cover to seat with J-strips (1). 10. Install the spring (2) to the seat adjuster rail. 11. Install the seat back recliner handle. 12. Install seat in the vehicle. Seat Back Filler Panel Replacement - Rear Seat Back Filler Panel Replacement - Rear Removal Procedure 1. Fold down the rear seat to access the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts. 2. Remove the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts. 3. Remove the rear seatback filler panel. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7908 1. Install the rear seatback filler panel. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts. Tighten the rear seatback filler panel retaining nuts to 80 N.m (59 lb ft). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 7913 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 7914 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 7915 Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 7916 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 7917 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Seat Cushion: Procedures SEAT CUSHION TRIM COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT (BENCH) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the seat back release lever, if equipped. 3. Remove the seat back. 4. Separate the J-strips from the seat bottom frame. 5. Remove the manual lumbar knob lever, if equipped. 6. Remove the seat bottom cover. 7. Remove the seat bottom pad. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the seat bottom pad to the seat bottom. 2. Install the seat bottom cover over the pad. 3. Engage the J-strips to the seat bottom frame. 4. Install the seat back. 5. Install the seat back release lever, if equipped. 6. Install the manual lumbar knob lever, if equipped. 7. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7922 Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion Trim Cover and Pad Replacement (Bench) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the seat back release lever, if equipped. 3. Remove the seat back. 4. Separate the J-strips from the seat bottom frame. 5. Remove the manual lumbar knob lever, if equipped. 6. Remove the seat bottom cover. 7. Remove the seat bottom pad. Installation Procedure 1. Install the seat bottom pad to the seat bottom. 2. Install the seat bottom cover over the pad. 3. Engage the J-strips to the seat bottom frame. 4. Install the seat back. 5. Install the seat back release lever, if equipped. 6. Install the manual lumbar knob lever, if equipped. 7. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Heater: Description and Operation HEATED SEATS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HEATED SEAT SYSTEM COMPONENTS The heated seats system consists of the following components: Heated seat switch - Driver heated seat relay module - Passenger heated seat relay module - Driver heated seat thermistor - Passenger heated seat thermistor - Driver back cushion heater element - Driver seat cushion heater element - Passenger back cushion heater element - Passenger seat cushion heater element - Passenger seat belt switch HEATED SEAT SYSTEM CONTROLS The heated seats are controlled by the following components: Headed seat switches - Heated seat modules - Passenger seat belt switch HEATED SEAT OPERATION Ignition voltage is supplied to the heated seat switches. When a heated seat switch is turned on, voltage is supplied through a resistor in the switch to the heated seat switch signal circuits and then to the heated seat module. Battery positive voltage and ground is supplied to the heated seat module for the heated seat elements. The seat heater module monitors the seat surface temperature through a thermistor located in the center of the seat back. With the heated seat switch turned on and the resistance through the heated seat thermistor within acceptable limits, the module closes an internal relay and battery positive voltage is then supplied to the seat heater elements. The passengers heated seat will not operate unless the seat belt is connected. This is a safety feature that ensures the seat will never remain ON. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Harness Routing (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7929 Heated Seat Control Module - Driver/Front Passenger (Part Of The Heated Seat Assembly) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driven/Front Passenger (Except LH Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7937 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility w/Content Theft) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7938 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Utility, Crew Cab With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7939 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Pickup With RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7940 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Driver (Without RPO Code RKE) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7941 Door Lock Cylinder Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock And Window Switch - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7945 Door Lock and Window Switch - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7946 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7947 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7948 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7952 Outside Rearview Folding Mirror Switch (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement POWER ACCESSORY SWITCH PANEL REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the power accessory switch panel from the armrest.Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the switch. 4. Remove the switches from the switch mounting panel, if necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switches to the switch mounting panel, if necessary. 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the switch. 3. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement > Page 7955 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement POWER MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Carefully use a flat-bladed tool in order to release the outside mirror switch retaining tabs from the trim panel. 2. Remove the outside mirror switch from the trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the power folding mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power folding mirror switch. 2. Position the power folding mirror switch to the door trim panel. 3. Apply downward pressure to the power folding mirror switch, ensuring the retaining tabs are fully seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Accessory Switch Panel Replacement > Page 7956 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Folding Outside Mirror Switch Replacement POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the folding outside mirror switch by carefully using a flat-bladed tool in order to pry up on the leading edge. 3. Remove the accessory switch panel from the armrest. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the cover up at the front leading edge leaving the electrical connections connected. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the power folding mirror switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the power folding mirror switch. 2. Install the power accessory switch mounting panel to the armrest. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 3. Install the power folding mirror switch to the door trim panel. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Power Seat Motor Position Sensor: Diagrams Seat Front Vertical Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7960 Seat Horizontal Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Motor Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7961 Seat Rear Vertical Position Sensor - Driver (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Seat Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7965 Seat Motors (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7966 Seat Harness Routing (8-Way w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (w/ 6-Way) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7969 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver C1 (w/ 8-Way, w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7970 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver C2 (w/ 8-Way, W/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7971 Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver/Front Passenger (w/ Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7972 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger (w/ 6-Way) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7973 Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger C1 (w/ 8-Way, W/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7974 Seat Adjuster Switch - Front Passenger C2 (w/ 8-Way, w/o Memory) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7975 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Seat Lumbar Switch Seat Lumbar Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver > Page 7976 Seat Lumbar Switch - Front Passenger Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Seat Switch: Procedures Lumbar Switch Replacement LUMBAR SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7979 2. Install the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Seat Switch Replacement - Power SEAT SWITCH REPLACEMENT - POWER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7980 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with the 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7981 Power Seat Switch: Removal and Replacement Seat Switch Replacement - Power Removal Procedure 1. Remove the seat from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 3 screws securing the trim panel to the seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the switch from the trim panel by snapping the switch out of the plastic retaining tabs. 5. Remove the switch assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the switch assembly to the trim panel by snapping the switch into the plastic retaining clips. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7982 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the trim panel to the seat with the 3 screws. 4. Install the seat to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Endgate Harness Routing View Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7986 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams Rear Window Wiper Cutout and Liftglass Ajar Jamb Switch (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7987 Liftglass/End Gate Lock Cylinder Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Sunroof Opening Position Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7994 Sunroof Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement SUNROOF OPENING POSITION SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Move the sunroof to the closed position. IMPORTANT: - Remove the headliner. - The sunroof open position (SOP) switch is aligned to the drive cables. The SOP switch comes from the factory set to the sunroof glass panel CLOSED position. A position lock pin has been installed by the factory on the top of the SOP switch. This pin must remain until after the installation of the sunroof actuator and of the SOP switch. This lock pin locks the drive gears in place and must be removed before the complete sunroof module is installed to the vehicle. - If the SOP switch is removed for inspection, the sunroof must be in the CLOSED position. A position lock pin must be inserted. If a position lock pin is not available, place 2 wires, such as the ends of a paper clip, in the holes. 2. Remove the sunroof window. 3. Remove the sunroof control module. 4. If you reuse the SOP switch, insert the position lock pin (1) in order to lock the SOP switch in the closed position. 5. Remove the sunroof motor/actuator. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the SOP switch (3). 7. Remove the screw (2) which secures the SOP switch to the sunroof module. 8. Hold down on both of the drive cables. Lift up on the SOP switch in order to remove the switch from the sunroof module. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Use a flat-bladed tool if you adjust the cable mechanism and/or the cam mechanism in order to align the cable and/or the cam timing holes.When the timing holes are aligned, insert a pin with diameter 0.0317 mm (1/8 in) or a drill bit (1) into each set of the timing holes. Use tape in order to hold each pin in place. IMPORTANT: The cable mechanisms and/or the cam mechanisms, on both sides of the glass, contain a set of timing holes. These holes are aligned in the CLOSED position of the sunroof glass panel . These holes are located on the side opposite the rear screw hole, which is used in order to mount the sunroof glass panel. When installing a new sunroof open position (SOP) switch, set the sunroof glass panel to the CLOSED position. 2. Keeping the position lock pin on the new SOP switch, align the switch over the drive cables. IMPORTANT: The SOP switch comes from the factory with a position lock pin that is installed on top of the switch. This locks the timing gears in place. Do not remove the position lock pin until after the SOP switch and the actuator are installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement > Page 7997 3. Apply pressure to the SOP switch until the switch is completely seated.If the switch does not slide into position, the ridges on the drive cable housings will not go into the grooves on the back of the SOP switch. Lift each cable into the switch, and press down on the assembly until the assembly is completely seated. 4. Install the screw which secures the SOP switch to the sunroof module. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 3.4 N.m (30 lb in). 5. Connect the electrical connector to the SOP switch. 6. Install the sunroof motor/actuator. 7. Remove the position lock pin (1). 8. Remove the 2 alignment pins from the cable mechanisms and/or from the cam mechanisms. 9. Install the sunroof control module, but do not install the headliner until after the sunroof operation has been verified. 10. Verify the operation of the sunroof module. 11. Install the sunroof window. 12. Install the headliner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Opening Position Switch Replacement > Page 7998 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement (With RPO Code CF5) SUNROOF SWITCH REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driver information console (DIC). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the driver information display module. 3. Remove 6 screws securing the sunroof switch assembly to the DIC. 4. Remove the sunroof switch assembly from the DIC. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the sunroof switch to the sunroof console with 6 screws. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the driver information display module. 3. Install the DIC. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Dam: Service and Repair Air Intake Baffle Replacement - Radiator Removal Procedure 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. Remove the outside air temperature sensor. 3. Remove the radiator air intake baffle retainers. 4. Remove the radiator air intake baffle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the radiator air intake baffle. 2. Install the radiator air intake baffle retainers. 3. Install the outside air temperature sensor. 4. Install the radiator grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Tailgate Latch: Service and Repair Latch Replacement - Endgate Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate. 2. Remove the endgate trim panel. 3. Remove the endgate latch rod from the endgate latch. 4. Remove the bolts that retain the endgate latch to the endgate. 5. Remove the endgate latch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the endgate latch to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts that retain the endgate latch to the endgate. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (88 lb in). 3. Install the endgate latch rod to the endgate latch. 4. Install the endgate trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Tow Hook Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the lower bumper valance. 2. Remove the bolts from the tow hooks. 3. Remove the hooks from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Install the tow hooks to the frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts to the tow hooks. Tighten the bolts to 55 N.m (41 lb ft). 3. Install the lower bumper valance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the bolt from the right and the left vent grille end panels. 3. Lift up on the right and the left vent grille end panels to release the retaining clips. 4. Remove the right and the left vent grille end panels. 5. Remove the screws that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 6. Remove the push-pin retainers that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 7. Remove the center vent grille panel from the cowl. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8018 1. Install the center vent grille panel to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the screws that secure the center vent grille panel to the cowl. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 3. Install the push-pin retainers securing the center vent grille panel to the cowl. 4. Install the right and the left vent grille end panels to the cowl. Tighten the screws to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in). 5. Install the screws securing the securing the right and the left vent grille ends to the cowl. 6. Install the windshield wiper arms. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door opening weatherstrip from the door opening. 2. Gently pull the weatherstrip from the pinch weld flange. Installation Procedure 1. Install the door opening weatherstrip to the door opening. 2. Position the pre-formed corner of the weatherstrip in the upper rear corner of the door opening. 3. Push the weatherstrip onto the pinch weld flange. Start at the pre-formed corner and work around the entire edge of the door opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening > Page 8024 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door (Drip Channel) Weatherstrip Replacement - Front Door (Drip Channel) Removal Procedure 1. Open the door. 2. Remove the weatherstrip drip channel (3). Installation Procedure Important: Apply the drip channel in an environment free of dust or dirt that could come in contact with the sticky backing (2) and prevent proper adhesion. 1. Clean the area where the drip channel is to be mounted. Use a general purpose adhesive remover. 2. Clean the affected body area with wax and grease remover, and wipe with isopropyl alcohol. 3. Dry the area thoroughly. 4. Ensure the body area is at a temperature range of 21-41°C (80-105°F). 5. Ensure that the drip channel is at a temperature range of 21-41°C (80-105°F). 6. Install end of drip channel begining at the upper rear corner (4) of front side door opening frame, towards the windshield reveal molding flange (1) removing the tape backing as seal is applied. 7. When the drip channel is in position use a roller to firmly attach the tape to the entire contact surface. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Door Opening > Page 8025 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Door Bottom Sealing Strip Replacement - Door Bottom Tools Required J 38778 Door Trim Pad Clip Remover Removal Procedure Use the J 38778 in order to remove the door bottom weatherstrip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Position the door bottom weatherstrip. 2. Press the weatherstrip into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Weatherstrip Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Weatherstrip Weatherstrip Replacement - Window The outer door weatherstrip is used in order to seal the inner and outer door panels and the window at the belt line. The outer door weatherstrip can be replaced. Do not remove the inner sealing strip since the strip is stapled to the trim panel. Removal Procedure 1. Open the window. 2. Remove outer door weather strip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Position the weatherstrip and press it into place. 2. Close the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Weatherstrip > Page 8030 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the side front door trim panel. 2. Remove the staples that secure the sealing strip to the trim panel. 3. Remove the sealing strip. Installation Procedure 1. Position the sealing strip on the trim panel. 2. Install the sealing strip to the trim panel using the original staples or a heavy-duty staple gun. 3. Install the side front door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Front Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Front Seal Replacement - Hood Front Removal Procedure 1. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully pry the seal assembly away from the flange. 2. Remove the seal from the hood. Installation Procedure 1. Position the seal assembly to the hood. 2. Press the seal assembly into place until fully seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seal Replacement - Hood Front > Page 8035 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Seal Replacement - Hood Rear Removal Procedure 1. Remove the screws securing the seal to the cowl. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to carefully break the adhesive bond. 3. Remove the seal from the cowl plenum flange. 4. Clean the flange. Use a suitable solvent such as a mixture of 50 percent isopropyl alcohol and 50 percent water or high-flash naptha. 5. Dry the area thoroughly. Installation Procedure 1. Remove the liner from the adhesive strip. 2. Position the seal to the cowl plenum. 3. Press the seal into place. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 4. Install the screws to secure the seal to the cowl. Tighten the cowl plenum seal screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Liftgate Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Endgate Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate. 2. Starting at the corner of the endgate flange, pull the weatherstrip molding from the endgate. Installation Procedure 1. Push the ends of the weatherstrip onto the endgate flange corners. 2. Push the weatherstrip molding onto the flange along the entire length of the endgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the rear side door window. 2. Remove the rear side door window weatherstrip. Start the at butt joint and pull the weatherstrip from the window opening. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear side door weatherstrip. 2. Locate the butt joint at the bottom center of the window opening and set the weatherstrip around the window opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window > Page 8043 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement - Rear Door Upper Removal Procedure Pull the weatherstrip from the door frame. Installation Procedure Push the weatherstrip molding over the door frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the rear side door window. 2. Remove the rear side door window weatherstrip. Start the at butt joint and pull the weatherstrip from the window opening. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear side door weatherstrip. 2. Locate the butt joint at the bottom center of the window opening and set the weatherstrip around the window opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair SUNROOF WINDOW WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT (CF5) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the sunroof window. 2. Remove the sunroof window weatherstrip from the sunroof window by gently pulling the weatherstrip away at one point and continuing around the perimeter of the window. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Locate the seam on the weatherstrip. 2. Place the seam at the center of the rear edge of the sunroof window. 3. Firmly press the weatherstrip into place. Ensure that the weatherstrip is seated properly around the entire perimeter of the window. 4. Install the sunroof window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Compartment Opening Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate or the liftgate. 2. Remove the weatherstrip molding from the pinch-weld flange. 3. Firmly grip the weatherstrip. 4. Pull the weatherstrip out and away from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Push the weatherstrip onto the pinch weld flange, beginning from the top corner of the endgate opening. 2. Completely seat the weatherstrip around the endgate or the liftgate opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module (CCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8057 Cruise Control Module (CCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8058 Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the cruise control cable. Refer to Cruise Control Cable Replacement (LU3). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 nuts that retain the cruise control module to the mounting bracket studs. 5. Remove the cruise control module from the mounting bracket. 6. Remove the 3 screws that retain the mounting bracket to the cowl panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the mounting bracket to the cowl panel with the 3 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cruise control module bracket screws to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 2. Install the cruise control module to the vehicle. 3. Install the 3 nuts that retain the cruise control module to the mounting bracket. Tighten the cruise control module nuts to 9.0 N.m (6.6 lb ft). 4. Connect the electrical connector. 5. Install the cruise control cable. Refer to Cruise Control Cable Replacement (LU3). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Test the systems operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL CABLE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the hood. NOTE: Do not remove the C-clip from the cruise control connector. The C-clip was not designed for removal. Damage may occur when removing. IMPORTANT: The cruise control cable does not require mechanical adjusting after the replacement. The cruise control module internally adjusts the cable. Refer to Cruise Control Description and Operation for the complete operational details. 2. Do not remove the adjuster screw from the end of the cruise control cable. No adjustment will be needed. 3. Remove the cruise control cable from the throttle linkage.Use a suitable tool to lightly pry off the end of the cruise control cable from the stud on the throttle lever. 4. Disconnect the cruise control cable from the round hole in the engine cable bracket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8062 5. Disconnect the cruise control cable locator clip from the rectangular hole in the routing bracket. 6. Remove the cruise control cable from the cruise control module housing. 7. Disconnect the cruise control cable bead (2) from the end of the ribbon (1). IMPORTANT: Do not allow the cruise control ribbon (1) to retract into the module assembly. 8. Remove the cruise control cable from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the cruise control cable to the vehicle. 2. Remove all bends and twists from the cruise control module ribbon and cable, by rotating until removed. 3. Attach the cruise control cable bead (2) to the cruise control module ribbon (1). IMPORTANT: Do not twist the cruise control module ribbon (1). - Pull the cruise control cable (2) to verify retention to the ribbon (1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8063 4. Check the orientation of the cruise control ribbon buckle to the cable end fitting. 5. Slide the cruise control cable conduit over the ribbon. 1. Install the tangs to the cruise control module housing. 2. Ensure that the tangs snap securely into place. 6. Snap the cruise control cable engine-end fitting (2) over the stud (1) on the throttle cam lever. 7. Connect the cruise control cable conduit fitting to the round hole in the engine cable bracket.Ensure that the tabs snap securely into the hole. 8. Connect the cruise control cable locator clip to the rectangular hole in the routing bracket. 0. Route the cruise control cable above the accelerator cable. 1. Ensure that the clip snaps securely into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8064 9. Connect the electrical connection to the cruise control servo module. 10. Test the systems operation. 11. Perform the Cruise Control System Functional Test. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. 12. Close hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module (CCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8069 Cruise Control Module (CCM) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8070 Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair CRUISE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Disconnect the cruise control cable. Refer to Cruise Control Cable Replacement (LU3). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 nuts that retain the cruise control module to the mounting bracket studs. 5. Remove the cruise control module from the mounting bracket. 6. Remove the 3 screws that retain the mounting bracket to the cowl panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the mounting bracket to the cowl panel with the 3 screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the cruise control module bracket screws to 4.5 N.m (40 lb in). 2. Install the cruise control module to the vehicle. 3. Install the 3 nuts that retain the cruise control module to the mounting bracket. Tighten the cruise control module nuts to 9.0 N.m (6.6 lb ft). 4. Connect the electrical connector. 5. Install the cruise control cable. Refer to Cruise Control Cable Replacement (LU3). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Test the systems operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8076 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8077 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8078 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8079 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8080 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8081 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8082 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8083 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8084 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8085 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8086 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8087 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8088 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8089 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8090 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8091 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8092 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8093 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8094 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8095 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8096 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8097 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8098 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8099 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8100 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation AUDIBLE WARNINGS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The audible warnings alert the driver of a system concern or a critical vehicle condition. The BCM generates the audible warnings through an internal speaker. The BCM emits audible warnings based on various inputs. If the BCM receives multiple audible warning requests, the warning with the highest priority sounds first. Fasten Safety Belt Warning The BCM activates the fasten safety belt audible warning, and also sends a class 2 message to the IPC to illuminate the fasten safety belt indicator when the following occurs: The ignition switch transitions to RUN. - The seat belt is not buckled and the signal circuit is low. If the seat belt is buckled while the chime is sounding, the chime stops. If the seat belt is unbuckled after the initial transition to RUN, the chime does not sound. Key-In-Ignition Warning The BCM activates the key-in-ignition audible warning when all of the following occurs: The driver door is open and the signal circuit is low. - The key is in the ignition and the signal circuit is low. The audible warning will sound for as long as the above conditions exist. Lights On Warning The BCM activates the lights on warning when the following occurs: The ignition is not in the RUN or START position. - The headlamp switch is in the PARK or Head position. - The instrument panel dimmer switch is not at the most dim setting. The audible warning will sound for as long as the above conditions exist. Low Fuel Warning The BCM activates the low fuel warning when the following occurs: The ignition is in the RUN or START position. - The fuel level is below 17 percent. - The BCM receives a class 2 message from the PCM requesting an audible warning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Brake Warning System Description and Operation Brake Warning Indicator The Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) illuminates the brake warning indicator when one or more of the following occurs: ^ The Body Control Module (BCM) detects that the park brake is engaged. The IPC receives a class 2 message from the BCM requesting illumination. ^ The Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) detects a low brake fluid condition. The IPC receives a class 2 message from the EBCM requesting illumination. ^ The EBCM detects an ABS malfunction which disables dynamic rear proportioning (DRP). The IPC receives a class 2 message from the EBCM requesting illumination. ^ The IPC performs the bulb check at the start of each ignition cycle. The brake warning indicator illuminates for approximately 3 seconds before turning OFF. ^ The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the BCM or with the EBCM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8104 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection For information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Hydraulic System Testing and Inspection. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams Cigarette Lighter: Diagrams Cigar Lighter Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8108 Cigar Lighter Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8109 Cigarette Lighter: Service and Repair CIGAR LIGHTER HOUSING OR 12 VOLT ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED J 42059 Cigarette Lighter Socket Remover REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cigarette lighter fuse. 2. Remove the cigarette lighter element. 3. Remove the cigarette lighter socket by placing one side of the "T" portion of the tool J 42059 into the tab window and then the other should be angled into the opposite tab window, then pull the lighter socket straight out. 4. Remove the tool from the lighter socket. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the cigarette lighter socket. 6. Remove the cigarette lighter retainer using your index finger and pulling out. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8110 1. Position the cigarette lighter retainer with the key to the slot into the cigarette lighter hole. 2. Install the cigarette lighter retainer pressing into place until fully seated. 3. Connect the electrical connector to cigarette lighter socket. 4. Align the cigarette lighter socket to the cigarette lighter retainer and press into place until fully seated. 5. Install the cigarette lighter fuse. 6. Install the cigarette lighter element. 7. Inspect the instrument panel lighter for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Diagrams Compass Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Electronic Compass Calibration Compass: Service and Repair Electronic Compass Calibration ELECTRONIC COMPASS CALIBRATION COMPASS CALIBRATION 1. Turn ON the ignition. IMPORTANT: Before calibrating the compass, drive the vehicle to a area that is magnetically clean, and free of large metallic objects. 2. Press the MODE button in order to advance to the COMP/TEMP mode. 3. Simultaneously depress and hold the US/MET and MODE buttons until a C is displayed, in approximately 10 seconds. 4. Release both buttons. 5. Drive the vehicle in circles at a speed of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) until the C is replaced by a proper vehicle heading. The calibration procedure is now complete. COMPASS MAGNETIC VARIATION ADJUSTMENT 1. Locate your geographic location. Refer to the variation zone map. IMPORTANT: Magnetic variation adjustments are required when the compass displays a constant error in heading. Variation is the difference between magnetic north and true north due to geographical location. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 3. Press the MODE button in order to advance to the COMP/TEMP mode. 4. With the DIC in the COMP/TEMP mode, simultaneously depress and hold the MODE and US/MET buttons until VAR CAL is displayed, in approximately 5 seconds. 5. Release both buttons. 6. Press the US/MET button in order to advance to the proper zone number. 7. Press the MODE button in order to enter and set the zone number. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Electronic Compass Calibration > Page 8116 Compass: Service and Repair Electronic Compass Module Replacement ELECTRONIC COMPASS MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE Due to the complexity of the compass system and the extent of outside influences on the compass' performance, thoroughly inspect the system prior to performing repairs. Inspect the compass in an area that is free from potential interference such as in an open field. Inspect that the compass is calibrated in order to verify the existence of a problem. 1. Remove the overhead console. 2. Remove the compass sensor from the overhead console. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the compass sensor to the overhead console. 2. Install the overhead console. 3. Calibrate the compass. Refer to Electronic Compass Calibration . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8122 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8123 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8124 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8125 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8126 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8127 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8128 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8129 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8130 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Switch: Diagrams Door Jamb Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8137 Door Jamb Switch - Front Passenger (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8138 Door Jamb Switch - LR/RR (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 3. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). 4. Reach up and disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Squeeze the locking tabs in order to remove the door jamb switch from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the door jamb switch to the vehicle. Fully seat the locking tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 4. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8141 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8142 Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Rear DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Caution Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Use a flat bladed tool in order to remove the door jamb switch from the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Tape the wires to the body in order to prevent them from dropping into the rear door hingepillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the door jamb switch to the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8147 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8148 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8149 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8150 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8151 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8152 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8153 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8154 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8155 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8156 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8157 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8158 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8159 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8160 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8161 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8162 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8163 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8164 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8165 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8166 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8167 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8168 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8169 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8170 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8171 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Driver Information Center (DIC) C1 (w/Trip Computer) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8172 Driver Information Center (DIC) C1 (w/o Trip Computer) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8173 Driver Information Center (DIC) C2 (w/Short Console) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8174 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER (DIC) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The driver information center (DIC) consists of a multi-function electronic display placed in the overhead console. The DIC displays the following information: - The vehicle fuel information - The outside temperature - The direction the vehicle is facing The display parameters are cycled, changed, and acknowledged using the following 2 DIC buttons mounted at the side of the driver information center: US/MET: Allows the display to switch between English and Metric units. MODE: Used to toggle between OFF, COMP/TEMP and TRIP. COMP/TEMP COMP: In the Compass Mode, one of eight compass readings (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, and NW) will be displayed to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. TEMP: In the Temperature Mode, the outside air temperature is displayed in either °C or °F. If the outside air temperature is below 3°C (37°F), the display will toggle between ICE and the current outside air temperature in 8 second increments. TRIP In the Trip Mode, the DIC displays the following information based on class 2 serial data: AVG ECON: The DIC displays the average fuel economy since the last reset. AVG SPEED: The DIC displays the average speed since the last reset. FUEL USED: The DIC displays the amount of fuel used since the last reset. INST ECON: The DIC displays the instantaneous fuel economy since the last second of driving. RANGE: The DIC displays the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last few hours of driving. The display format for each mode is indicated in the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Information Center Module Replacement Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Center Module Replacement DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Using a flat-bladed tool, carefully remove the display lens (1) from the overhead console (3). 2. Remove the electronic display module (2) from the console (3). 3. Disconnect the electrical connection. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connection. 2. Install the electronic display module (2) to the overhead console (3). 3. Install the display lens (1) by snapping the lens into place. 4. Calibrate the compass. Refer to Electronic Compass Calibration . Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Information Center Module Replacement > Page 8177 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Center Replacement (With Sunroof) DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER REPLACEMENT (WITH SUNROOF) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screw at the front of the console that retains the sunroof console to the roof. 2. Pull downward on the rear of the console in order to remove the sunroof console from the roof. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1, 5, 6) as needed. 4. Remove the screw that retains the sunroof console mounting bracket to the roof. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the electrical connectors (1, 5, 6) as needed . 2. Insert the console mounting tabs into the mounting bracket and push upward on the rear of the console in order to install the console. 3. Install the screw at the front of the console that retains the console to the roof. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Information Center Module Replacement > Page 8178 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Driver Information Center Replacement (Without Sunroof) DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT SUNROOF) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screw at the front of the console that retains the console to the roof. 2. Pull downward at the rear of the console in order to remove the console from the roof. 3. Disconnect the electrical connections as needed. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connections as needed. 2. Insert the mounting tabs into the roof panel and push upward on the rear of the console in order to install the console to the roof. 3. Install the screw at the front of the console that retains the console to the roof. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge: Specifications FUEL LEVEL SPECIFICATIONS The information in this table is intended for use with the J 33431-C Signal Generator and Instrument Panel Tester. The fuel level sensor values represent the test values to be used on the Signal Generator to drive the fuel gage display to the indicated positions. Vehicles that require more than one fuel level sensor calculate gage position from many possible resistance combinations of fuel levels between the two tanks. Therefore, the values in the table may not correlate directly to readings taken from the vehicle primary or secondary sending units. The values in the table are approximate values based on information obtained from properly operating vehicles. Actual results may vary slightly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8182 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation FUEL GAGE The IPC displays the fuel level as determined by the PCM. The IPC receives a class 2 message from the PCM indicating the fuel level percent. The fuel gage defaults to empty if: - The PCM detects a malfunction in the fuel level sensor circuit. - The IPC detects a loss of class 2 communications with the PCM. When the fuel level is less than a pre-determined value, the low fuel indicator illuminates. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8186 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY The fuel sender assembly consists of the following major components: - The fuel level sensor (6) - The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (1) - The fuel pump module (2) - The fuel strainer (3) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8187 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8188 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONES IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. The SIR system has been divided into Disabling and Enabling Zones. When performing service on or near SIR components or SIR wiring, it may be necessary to disable the SIR components in that zone. It may be necessary to disable more than one zone depending on the location of other SIR components and the area being serviced, refer to SIR Zone Identification Views. Refer to the illustration, to identify the specific zone or zones in which service will be performed. After identifying the zone or zones, proceed to the disabling and enabling procedures for that particular zone or zones. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8194 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 1 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 1 DISABLING PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from both inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors located on the frame crossmember. 7. Disconnect the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Connect the inflatable restraint front end discriminating sensor connectors to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8195 2. Install the CPA to the inflatable restraints front end discriminating sensor connectors. 3. Install the SIR fuse into the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 4. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 5. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8196 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 3 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 3 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8197 2. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 3. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Install the knee bolster. 6. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8198 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 5 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 5 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle's wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 5. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 6. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8199 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 5. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 6. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8200 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling Zone 8 SIR DISABLING AND ENABLING ZONE 6 DISABLING PROCEDURE 1. Turn the steering wheel until the vehicle wheels are pointing straight ahead. IMPORTANT: Refer to SIR Service Precautions before disabling the SIR system. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. 4. Remove the knee bolster. 5. Remove the SIR fuse from the instrument panel (I/P) fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. IMPORTANT: With the SIR fuse removed and the ignition ON, the AIR BAG indicator illuminates. This is normal operation and does not indicate an SIR system malfunction. 6. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) from the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 7. Disconnect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8201 8. Remove the CPA from the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 9. Disconnect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1). ENABLING PROCEDURE 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Connect the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the main I/P support. 3. Install the CPA to the I/P module yellow 2-way connector (1) located behind the I/P support. 4. Connect the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located left of the steering column near the knee bolster. 5. Install the CPA to the steering wheel module yellow 2-way connector (1) located near the knee bolster. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > SIR Disabling and Enabling Zones > Page 8202 6. Install the SIR fuse to the I/P fuse block (1) located in the I/P fuse block. 7. Install the knee bolster. 8. Staying well away from all air bags, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 1. The AIR BAG indicator will flash 7 times. 2. The AIR BAG indicator will then turn OFF. 9. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information if the AIR BAG indicator does not operate as described. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ALWAYS ON CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS If the problem is intermittent, refer to Intermittent Conditions. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic Strategies TEST DESCRIPTION Steps 1-6 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 2. This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 8207 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Inoperative MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INOPERATIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The powertrain control module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. There should be a steady MIL with the ignition ON and the engine OFF. MIL OPERATION The MIL is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). MIL Function The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible. - The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test. - A DTC will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM. MIL Illumination The MIL will illuminate with ignition switch ON and the engine not running. - The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started. - The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction. - The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present. - If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON. - If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON. TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 8208 Steps 1-11 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Always On > Page 8209 Steps 12-15 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 4. This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D Date: December 06, 2010 Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide Models: 2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new 2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM), also commonly called a body control module (BCM). Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today 1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2 is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed and stored in the IPC. A replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 8214 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 8215 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 8216 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8217 Odometer: Description and Operation ODOMETER The IPC contains a season odometer and a trip odometer. Momentarily press the trip/reset switch on the IPC in order to toggle between the season odometer and the trip odometer. Press the trip/reset switch for greater than 2 seconds, while the trip odometer is displayed, in order to reset the trip odometer. The IPC displays the vehicle mileage and trip mileage as determined by the IPC. The IPC calculates the mileage based on the vehicle speed signal circuit from the PCM. The odometer will display 'error' if an internal IPC memory failure is detected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation This vehicle does not use the Engine Oil Life System and has no monitor to reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8221 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair This vehicle does not use the GM Oil Life System, and does not have an oil life indicator to reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8226 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8227 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. Lift the temperature sensor upward in order to remove the temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the temperature sensor by sliding the temperature sensor downward. 3. Install the radiator grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Warning Switch: Specifications Park Brake Warning Light Switch Mounting Bolt 35 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8231 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8232 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 2. Remove the electrical connector. 3. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8233 4. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake warning lamp switch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Tighten the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8234 3. Install the electrical connector. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Switch: Diagrams Door Jamb Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8242 Door Jamb Switch - Front Passenger (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8243 Door Jamb Switch - LR/RR (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 3. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). 4. Reach up and disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Squeeze the locking tabs in order to remove the door jamb switch from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the door jamb switch to the vehicle. Fully seat the locking tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 4. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8246 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8247 Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Rear DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Caution Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Use a flat bladed tool in order to remove the door jamb switch from the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Tape the wires to the body in order to prevent them from dropping into the rear door hingepillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the door jamb switch to the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Pump And Sender Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8251 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY The fuel sender assembly consists of the following major components: - The fuel level sensor (6) - The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (1) - The fuel pump module (2) - The fuel strainer (3) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8252 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL SENDER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (UTILITY/CREW CAB) TOOLS REQUIRED J 44402Fuel Tank Sending Unit Wrench REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the fuel tank. 3. Remove the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. NOTE: Do Not handle the fuel sender assembly by the fuel pipes. The amount of leverage generated by handling the fuel pipes could damage the joints. 4. Remove the fuel sender assembly and the seal. Discard the seal. CAUTION: Drain the fuel from the fuel sender assembly into an approved container in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. Never store the fuel in an open container. 5. Clean the fuel sender sealing surfaces. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the new seal on the fuel tank. CAUTION: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury that may result from a fuel leak, always replace the fuel sender gasket when reinstalling the fuel sender assembly. IMPORTANT: The fuel strainer must be in a horizontal position when the fuel sender is installed in the tank. When installing the fuel sender assembly, assure that the fuel strainer does not block full travel of the float arm. 2. Install the fuel sender assembly into the fuel tank. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly retaining ring using the J 44402. 4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Refill the fuel tank. 6. Tighten the fuel filler cap. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. 8. Inspect for leaks. 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8253 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8257 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8258 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE GAGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. Lift the temperature sensor upward in order to remove the temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the temperature sensor by sliding the temperature sensor downward. 3. Install the radiator grille. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Warning Switch: Specifications Park Brake Warning Light Switch Mounting Bolt 35 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8262 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8263 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Park Brake Warning Lamp Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the knee bolster trim panel. 2. Remove the electrical connector. 3. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8264 4. Remove the park brake warning lamp switch from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake warning lamp switch. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt. Tighten the park brake warning lamp switch mounting bolt to 4 Nm (35 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8265 3. Install the electrical connector. 4. Install the knee bolster trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams Automatic Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation Speedometer Head: Description and Operation SPEEDOMETER The IPC displays the vehicle speed based on the information from the PCM. The PCM converts the data from the vehicle speed sensor to a 4000 pulses/mile signal. The IPC uses the vehicle speed signal circuit from the PCM in order to calculate the vehicle speed. The speedometer defaults to 0 km/h (0 mph) if a malfunction in the vehicle speed signal circuit exists. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Tachometer: Description and Operation TACHOMETER The IPC displays the engine speed based on the information from the PCM. The PCM converts the data from the engine speed sensor to a 2 pulses/engine revolution signal. The IPC uses the engine speed signal circuit from the PCM in order to calculate the engine speed. The tachometer defaults to 0 rpm if a malfunction in the engine speed signal circuit exists. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 8288 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-004A Date: March 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: PRNDL Display Reduced Visibility For Approximately One Minute Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Headlamp Control and Vacuum Fluorescent PRNDL Indicator Instrument Panel Cluster Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-0004 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). After backing the vehicle out of a garage or dark environment into a daylight environment, the PRNDL display has reduced visibility for approximately one minute. While the vehicle is parked in a dark environment, the sensor for the automatic headlamp/driving lamps senses that it is dark. When the key is turned to the run/start position, the automatic headlamp module will turn all driving lamps, the instrument panel cluster and PRNDL display ON in the night-time mode. The night-time mode intensity of the instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display is controlled by the automatic headlamp module and can be dimmed further by the customer using the dimming control of the headlamp switch. When the customer then moves the vehicle from the dark environment into the bright sunlight, it will take approximately one minute before the headlamp control module recognizes this as true daylight and not just a bright overhead street lamp shining on the sensor. The headlamp control module will then turn the headlamps off and restore the instrument panel and PRNDL display to full brilliance. Without the time delay, the automatic headlamp control module would switch to the night mode (turn on all driving lamps, instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display would dim) each time the vehicle was driven under an overpass or other darkened environment. This is a normal condition and no repair should be attempted. Ensure the instrument panel backlighting control is in the full bright position. This will help alleviate the condition. You may demonstrate to the customer what happens by placing a repair order over the automatic headlamp control light sensor, which will cause the automatic headlamp control module to switch to the night mode in approximately one minute. All driving lamps will come ON, the instrument panel backlight will be dim, and the PRNDL display will also dim to the night setting in conjunction with the position of the headlamp switch dimming control. Demonstrate to the customer the variance in the instrument panel backlighting and PRNDL display while adjusting the headlamp switch dimming control to both ends of its allowable range. Advise the customer to keep the headlight switch dimming control in the highest position to allow viewing of the PRNDL display in a bright environment. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8297 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front speaker grille from the vehicle. 2. Turn the sensor counter-clockwise 1/4 turn in order to remove. 3. Disconnect the electrical connection from the DRL ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connection to the DRL ambient light sensor. 2. Insert the sensor and turn counter-clockwise 1/4 turn in order to seat. 3. Install the front speaker grille to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Backup Lamp Switch (w/M/T) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the endgate or liftgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 3. Rotate the bulb sockets 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb sockets from the tail lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulbs from the sockets. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulbs into the sockets. 2. Install the bulb sockets to the tail lamp assembly by rotating the sockets 1/4 turn clockwise. 3. Install the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Close the endgate or liftgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the endgate or liftgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 3. Rotate the bulb sockets 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb sockets from the tail lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulbs from the sockets. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulbs into the sockets. 2. Install the bulb sockets to the tail lamp assembly by rotating the sockets 1/4 turn clockwise. 3. Install the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Close the endgate or liftgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Floor Pedals Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8312 Stop Lamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8313 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the pushrod retainer from the brake pedal pin. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and the pushrod from the brake pedal pin. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8314 2. Install the stop lamp switch and the pushrod to the brake pedal pin. 3. Install the pushrod retainer on the brake pedal pin. The retainer will snap into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Cargo Lamp (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8318 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair CARGO LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear window garnish molding. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the cargo lamp assembly from the roof rear header garnish molding by prying out the assembly using a flat-bladed tool. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the dome lamp assembly to the roof rear header garnish molding by pressing the assembly into position. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the rear window garnish molding. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagrams Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8322 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) (Utility w/Endgate) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8323 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP REPLACEMENT (UTILITY - ENDGATE WINDOW) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the screws that retain the high mount stop lamp to the endgate window. 2. Remove the high mount stop lamp from the vehicle. 3. Pull the rubber grommet from the body at the top of the endgate opening in order to remove the electrical connector.Pull the electrical connector through the hole in the body and disconnect. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector and push the connector through the hole in the body in order to install the electrical connector. 2. Insert the rubber grommet into the hole in order to ensure that the hole is properly seated. 3. Install the high mount stop lamp to the vehicle. 4. Install the screws that retain the high mount stop lamp to the endgate window. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the high mount stop lamp screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Cornering Lamp: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Halogen bulbs contain gas under pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help avoid personal injury: Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to cool before changing the bulb. - Leave the lamp switch OFF until the bulb change is complete. - Always wear eye protection when changing a halogen bulb. - Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass. - Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb. - Properly dispose of the used bulb. - Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. NOTE: Avoid touching the bulb or letting the bulb come in contact with anything damp. Oil from your skin or moisture on the bulb can cause the bulb to explode when the bulb is turned on. If either comes in contact with the bulb, clean the bulb with alcohol or a suitable degreaser and wipe the bulb dry. 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pulling up and outward. 4. Disconnect the lamp electrical connectors. 5. Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. 6. Push and rotate the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulbs from the headlamp assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8327 1. Push in and rotate the bulbs 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulbs to the headlamp. 2. Connect the lamp electrical connectors. 3. Install the headlamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing down and inward. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Ash Tray Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Ashtray Lamp Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Ash Tray Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8332 Ash Tray Lamp: Service and Repair ASHTRAY LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the ash tray housing. 3. Open the ash tray and remove the liner. 4. Remove the bulb and socket assembly from the ash tray housing. 5. Remove the bulb from the socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulb to the socket. 2. Install the bulb and socket assembly to the ash tray housing. 3. Install the ash tray liner. 4. Install the ashtray housing to the instrument panel. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Console Lamp: Service and Repair CONSOLE LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Gently pry the lens from the bulb housing. 2. Release the locking tabs in order to remove the bulb and socket from the lens. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulb to the socket. 2. Carefully snap the lens into position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL (I/P) LAMP REPLACEMENT IMPORTANT: This procedure calls for the replacement of incandescent bulbs only. The light emitting diodes (LEDS) are not replaceable individually. If a LED replacement is needed, replace the entire instrument panel cluster (IPC). Refer to Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Replacement . Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the IPC. 3. Unclip the IPC rear cover plate by prying gently on the tabs with a screwdriver. 4. Remove the rear cover plate from the IPC. 5. Remove the bulb and base assembly by turning the bulb 1/2 turn counterclockwise and pulling outward. Installation Procedure 1. Install the bulbs into the cluster by inserting the bulb and base assembly, and turning the bulb 1/2 turn clockwise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8339 2. Carefully snap the rear cover plate to the IPC. 3. Install the IPC. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Relay (With RPO Code ZR2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement (Without Sunroof) Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement (Without Sunroof) DOME LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT SUNROOF) REMOVAL PROCEDURE On utility vehicles, 2 different lamps are used. One type of dome lamp is incorporated to the overhead console. On utility vehicles without an overhead console, a separate unit is used. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to remove the dome lamp lens from the overhead console. 3. Remove the bulb from the overhead console. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulb to the overhead console. 2. Install the dome lamp lens to the overhead console by snapping the lens into position. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement (Without Sunroof) > Page 8352 Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement (With Sunroof) DOME LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT (WITH SUNROOF) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the dome lamp lens by carefully prying it out with a flat-bladed tool. 2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it down. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulb to the socket by pressing it into place. 2. Install the dome lamp lens. Ensure that the lens is fully seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Switch: Diagrams Door Jamb Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8359 Door Jamb Switch - Front Passenger (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8360 Door Jamb Switch - LR/RR (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 3. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). 4. Reach up and disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Squeeze the locking tabs in order to remove the door jamb switch from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the door jamb switch to the vehicle. Fully seat the locking tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 4. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8363 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8364 Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Rear DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Caution Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Use a flat bladed tool in order to remove the door jamb switch from the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Tape the wires to the body in order to prevent them from dropping into the rear door hingepillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the door jamb switch to the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8369 Fog Lamp Switch - Front Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel, RF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 8374 Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 8375 Hazard Warning Flasher: Service and Repair HAZARD AND TURN SIGNAL FLASHER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the glove box to expose the glove box retaining tab (1). 2. Lift the retaining tab and allow the glove box to hang freely. 3. Using a suitable flat-bladed tool, release the plastic retainer that retains the hazard/ turn signal flasher (1) to the C203 body harness connector (2) . 4. Remove the hazard/ turn signal flasher (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hazard/ turn signal flasher (1) to the C203 body harness connector (2). 2. Install the plastic retainer and ensure the hazard/ turn signal flasher will not work its way loose over time. 3. Lift the glove box retaining tab (1) to install the glove box to its original position. 4. Close the glove box. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Halogen bulbs contain gas under pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help avoid personal injury: Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to cool before changing the bulb. - Leave the lamp switch OFF until the bulb change is complete. - Always wear eye protection when changing a halogen bulb. - Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass. - Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb. - Properly dispose of the used bulb. - Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. NOTE: Avoid touching the bulb or letting the bulb come in contact with anything damp. Oil from your skin or moisture on the bulb can cause the bulb to explode when the bulb is turned on. If either comes in contact with the bulb, clean the bulb with alcohol or a suitable degreaser and wipe the bulb dry. 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pulling up and outward. 4. Disconnect the lamp electrical connectors. 5. Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. 6. Push and rotate the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulbs from the headlamp assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8380 1. Push in and rotate the bulbs 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulbs to the headlamp. 2. Connect the lamp electrical connectors. 3. Install the headlamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing down and inward. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Alignment Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams Headlamp Leveling Actuator Motor - Left/Right (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Alignment Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Headlamp Leveling Switch (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D Date: June 21, 2010 Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance. A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal. Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need to replace the entire headlamp housing. Warning Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps. Warning Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are often tinted in color. Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins. This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks. In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp. Notice Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are not covered under the new vehicle warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8394 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8395 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is OFF and that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 2. Remove the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the screws that retain the headlamp switch panel to the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 5. Remove the headlamp switch panel from the instrument panel accessory trim plate. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the headlamp switch panel to the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 2. Install the screws that retain the headlamp switch panel to the instrument cluster bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connectors. 4. Install the instrument panel accessory trim plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module/Horn Pad Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8400 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Horn Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the inflator module. 3. Remove the horn plunger from the steering column by pressing inward to the stop and rotating the horn plunger 90 degrees. 4. Remove the screws which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. 5. Remove the horn plunger from the steering wheel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the horn plunger to the steering wheel. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the screws which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. ^ Tighten the screws to 5.5 Nm (50 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8401 3. Install the horn plunger to the steering column. 4. Install the inflator module. 5. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views License Plate Lamp: Connector Views License Lamp - Center (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 8406 License Lamp - LR (pickup w/o Rear Step Bumper) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 8407 License Lamp - LR (Utility, Export, and Pickup w/Step Bumper) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 8408 License Lamp - RR (Pickup w/o Rear Step Bumper) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 8409 License Lamp - RR(Utility, Export, and Pickup w/Step Bumper) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8410 License Plate Lamp: Description and Operation License Lamps The park, tail, marker and license lamps are turned on when the headlamp switch is placed in the PARK or ON position or anytime the headlights are requested. The PARK LP fuse in the engine wiring harness junction block supplies battery positive voltage to the park lamp relay coil and the headlamp switch. The body control module (BCM) provides a ground, or control circuit, to the park lamp relay coil circuit during automatic lamp control (ALC) operation. When the park lamps are turned on during ALC, the BCM energizes the park lamp relay. The park lamps can also be supplied battery positive voltage directly from the headlamp switch. Current flow is to the FR PARK fuse, LR PARK fuse, RR PARK fuse and the TRL PARK fuse, and to their respective park, marker and license lamps. The front park and marker lamps are grounded at G111 and G112. The rear park, tail, marker and license lamps are grounded at G475 and G422 on the pickup and G450 and G402 on the utility. If the headlight switch is left in the ON position, the park, tail and marker lamps will remain on until turned off or the battery runs dead. The front side marker lamps on the export vehicle stay on steady and do not flash alternately with the turn signals as the domestic vehicle does due to they are grounded directly to G111 and G112. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > License Lamp Replacement (W/O Step Bumper) License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair License Lamp Replacement (W/O Step Bumper) LICENSE LAMP REPLACEMENT (W/O STEP BUMPER) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the screws that retain the license plate lamp to the license plate bracket. 4. Remove the license plate lamp from the license plate bracket. 5. Rotate the bulb and socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb and socket from the license plate lamp. 6. Remove the bulb from the socket. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector. 8. Remove the license plate lamp from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the license plate lamp to the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the bulb to the socket. 4. Rotate the bulb and socket 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulb and socket to the license plate lamp. 5. Install the license plate lamp to the license plate bracket. 6. Install the screws that retain the license plate lamp to the license plate bracket. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.4 N.m (12 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > License Lamp Replacement (W/O Step Bumper) > Page 8413 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair License Lamp Replacement (Filler Panel) LICENSE LAMP REPLACEMENT (FILLER PANEL) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Rotate the bulb and socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb and socket from the vehicle. 4. Remove the bulb from the socket if being replaced. 5. Remove the lens retaining clip from the license plate lamp. 6. Remove the lens from the filler panel. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the lens to the filler panel. 2. Install the lens retaining clip to the license plate lamp. 3. Install the bulb to the socket. 4. Rotate the bulb and socket 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulb and socket to the license plate lamp. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Halogen bulbs contain gas under pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help avoid personal injury: Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to cool before changing the bulb. - Leave the lamp switch OFF until the bulb change is complete. - Always wear eye protection when changing a halogen bulb. - Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass. - Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb. - Properly dispose of the used bulb. - Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. NOTE: Avoid touching the bulb or letting the bulb come in contact with anything damp. Oil from your skin or moisture on the bulb can cause the bulb to explode when the bulb is turned on. If either comes in contact with the bulb, clean the bulb with alcohol or a suitable degreaser and wipe the bulb dry. 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pulling up and outward. 4. Disconnect the lamp electrical connectors. 5. Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. 6. Push and rotate the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulbs from the headlamp assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 8419 1. Push in and rotate the bulbs 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulbs to the headlamp. 2. Connect the lamp electrical connectors. 3. Install the headlamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing down and inward. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement > Page 8420 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Utility) TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the endgate or liftgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 3. Rotate the bulb sockets 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb sockets from the tail lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulbs from the sockets. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulbs into the sockets. 2. Install the bulb sockets to the tail lamp assembly by rotating the sockets 1/4 turn clockwise. 3. Install the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Close the endgate or liftgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Halogen bulbs contain gas under pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help avoid personal injury: Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to cool before changing the bulb. - Leave the lamp switch OFF until the bulb change is complete. - Always wear eye protection when changing a halogen bulb. - Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass. - Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb. - Properly dispose of the used bulb. - Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. NOTE: Avoid touching the bulb or letting the bulb come in contact with anything damp. Oil from your skin or moisture on the bulb can cause the bulb to explode when the bulb is turned on. If either comes in contact with the bulb, clean the bulb with alcohol or a suitable degreaser and wipe the bulb dry. 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pulling up and outward. 4. Disconnect the lamp electrical connectors. 5. Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. 6. Push and rotate the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulbs from the headlamp assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8425 1. Push in and rotate the bulbs 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulbs to the headlamp. 2. Connect the lamp electrical connectors. 3. Install the headlamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing down and inward. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Relay (With RPO Code ZR2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8434 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front speaker grille from the vehicle. 2. Turn the sensor counter-clockwise 1/4 turn in order to remove. 3. Disconnect the electrical connection from the DRL ambient light sensor. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connection to the DRL ambient light sensor. 2. Insert the sensor and turn counter-clockwise 1/4 turn in order to seat. 3. Install the front speaker grille to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Backup Lamp Switch (w/M/T) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Floor Pedals Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8441 Stop Lamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8442 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOP LAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the pushrod retainer from the brake pedal pin. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and the pushrod from the brake pedal pin. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the stop lamp switch. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the electrical connector to the stop lamp switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8443 2. Install the stop lamp switch and the pushrod to the brake pedal pin. 3. Install the pushrod retainer on the brake pedal pin. The retainer will snap into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Door Switch: Diagrams Door Jamb Switch - Driver Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8450 Door Jamb Switch - Front Passenger (Pickup) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8451 Door Jamb Switch - LR/RR (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 3. Remove the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). 4. Reach up and disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Squeeze the locking tabs in order to remove the door jamb switch from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the door jamb switch to the vehicle. Fully seat the locking tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 3. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (right side only). 4. Install the instrument panel sound insulator (left side only). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8454 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Front > Page 8455 Door Switch: Service and Repair Door Jamb Switch Replacement - Rear DOOR JAMB SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Caution Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Use a flat bladed tool in order to remove the door jamb switch from the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Tape the wires to the body in order to prevent them from dropping into the rear door hingepillar. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the door jamb switch to the rear door hinge-pillar. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8459 Fog Lamp Switch - Front Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Alignment Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Headlamp Leveling Switch (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8466 Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8467 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is OFF and that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 2. Remove the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the screws that retain the headlamp switch panel to the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 5. Remove the headlamp switch panel from the instrument panel accessory trim plate. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the headlamp switch panel to the instrument panel accessory trim plate. 2. Install the screws that retain the headlamp switch panel to the instrument cluster bezel. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1 N.m (9 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connectors. 4. Install the instrument panel accessory trim plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module/Horn Pad Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8471 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Horn Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the inflator module. 3. Remove the horn plunger from the steering column by pressing inward to the stop and rotating the horn plunger 90 degrees. 4. Remove the screws which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. 5. Remove the horn plunger from the steering wheel. Installation Procedure 1. Install the horn plunger to the steering wheel. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Install the screws which retain the horn contact plate to the steering wheel. ^ Tighten the screws to 5.5 Nm (50 inch lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8472 3. Install the horn plunger to the steering column. 4. Install the inflator module. 5. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the upper and lower trim covers. 3. Important: The abrasion sleeve located on the steering column wire harness assembly must be reinstalled. Make note of what connector is coming out of the abrasion sleeve for installation purposes. Remove the wire harness assembly (1) from the wire harness strap (2). 4. Disconnect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector from the SIR system coil connector. 5. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly out of the bulkhead connector (1). 6. Remove the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2). 7. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8476 Installation Procedure 1. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) onto the steering column tilt head assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Be sure that the electrical contact of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) rests on the turn signal cancel cam assembly. Screw the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) into the turn signal and multifunction assembly (2). ^ Tighten the top pan head tapping screw (1) to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the side pan head tapping screw (3) to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 3. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly into the bulkhead connector (1). 4. Connect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector to the SIR coil connector. 5. Important: The abrasion sleeve must be installed back onto the steering column wire harness assembly. The ignition lock cylinder case wires and connector must be hanging out of the middle of the abrasion sleeve. Install the wire harness assembly (1) into the wire harness strap (2). 6. Install the upper and lower trim covers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8477 7. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Tail Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 8482 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Tail/Stop Lamp - Left/Right (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8485 Tail Lamp: Description and Operation Tail Lamps The park, tail, marker and license lamps are turned on when the headlamp switch is placed in the PARK or ON position or anytime the headlights are requested. The PARK LP fuse in the engine wiring harness junction block supplies battery positive voltage to the park lamp relay coil and the headlamp switch. The body control module (BCM) provides a ground, or control circuit, to the park lamp relay coil circuit during automatic lamp control (ALC) operation. When the park lamps are turned on during ALC, the BCM energizes the park lamp relay. The park lamps can also be supplied battery positive voltage directly from the headlamp switch. Current flow is to the FR PARK fuse, LR PARK fuse, RR PARK fuse and the TRL PARK fuse, and to their respective park, marker and license lamps. The front park and marker lamps are grounded at G111 and G112. The rear park, tail, marker and license lamps are grounded at G475 and G422 on the pickup and G450 and G402 on the utility. If the headlight switch is left in the ON position, the park, tail and marker lamps will remain on until turned off or the battery runs dead. The front side marker lamps on the export vehicle stay on steady and do not flash alternately with the turn signals as the domestic vehicle does due to they are grounded directly to G111 and G112. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8486 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the endgate or liftgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 3. Rotate the bulb sockets 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb sockets from the tail lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulbs from the sockets. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulbs into the sockets. 2. Install the bulb sockets to the tail lamp assembly by rotating the sockets 1/4 turn clockwise. 3. Install the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Close the endgate or liftgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations Instrument Panel, RF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 8491 Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 8492 Turn Signal Flasher: Service and Repair HAZARD AND TURN SIGNAL FLASHER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the glove box to expose the glove box retaining tab (1). 2. Lift the retaining tab and allow the glove box to hang freely. 3. Using a suitable flat-bladed tool, release the plastic retainer that retains the hazard/ turn signal flasher (1) to the C203 body harness connector (2) . 4. Remove the hazard/ turn signal flasher (1). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hazard/ turn signal flasher (1) to the C203 body harness connector (2). 2. Install the plastic retainer and ensure the hazard/ turn signal flasher will not work its way loose over time. 3. Lift the glove box retaining tab (1) to install the glove box to its original position. 4. Close the glove box. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Utility) Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Utility) TAIL LAMP ASSEMBLY AND /OR BACKUP, SIDEMARKER, STOP, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT (UTILITY) REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Open the endgate or liftgate. 2. Remove the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 3. Rotate the bulb sockets 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulb sockets from the tail lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulbs from the sockets. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the bulbs into the sockets. 2. Install the bulb sockets to the tail lamp assembly by rotating the sockets 1/4 turn clockwise. 3. Install the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the screws that retain the tail lamp assembly to the vehicle. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 1.9 N.m (17 lb in). 5. Close the endgate or liftgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Utility) > Page 8498 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp Assembly or Headlamp Bulb and/or Cornering, Sidemarker, Park, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY OR HEADLAMP BULB AND/OR CORNERING, SIDEMARKER, PARK, TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE CAUTION: Halogen bulbs contain gas under pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could cause it to shatter into flying glass fragments. To help avoid personal injury: Turn off the lamp switch and allow the bulb to cool before changing the bulb. - Leave the lamp switch OFF until the bulb change is complete. - Always wear eye protection when changing a halogen bulb. - Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass. - Keep dirt and moisture off the bulb. - Properly dispose of the used bulb. - Keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children. NOTE: Avoid touching the bulb or letting the bulb come in contact with anything damp. Oil from your skin or moisture on the bulb can cause the bulb to explode when the bulb is turned on. If either comes in contact with the bulb, clean the bulb with alcohol or a suitable degreaser and wipe the bulb dry. 1. Ensure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. 2. Ensure that the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly retainers by pulling up and outward. 4. Disconnect the lamp electrical connectors. 5. Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. 6. Push and rotate the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise in order to remove the bulbs from the headlamp assembly. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tail Lamp Assembly and /or Backup, Sidemarker, Stop, Turn Signal Bulb Replacement (Utility) > Page 8499 1. Push in and rotate the bulbs 1/4 turn clockwise in order to install the bulbs to the headlamp. 2. Connect the lamp electrical connectors. 3. Install the headlamp assembly to the vehicle. 4. Install the headlamp assembly retainers by pushing down and inward. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Multifunction, Turn Signal Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Caution: Refer to SIR Caution in Service Precautions. Disable the Restraints system. 2. Remove the upper and lower trim covers. 3. Important: The abrasion sleeve located on the steering column wire harness assembly must be reinstalled. Make note of what connector is coming out of the abrasion sleeve for installation purposes. Remove the wire harness assembly (1) from the wire harness strap (2). 4. Disconnect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector from the SIR system coil connector. 5. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly out of the bulkhead connector (1). 6. Remove the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2). 7. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8503 Installation Procedure 1. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) onto the steering column tilt head assembly. 2. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Important: Be sure that the electrical contact of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) rests on the turn signal cancel cam assembly. Screw the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) into the turn signal and multifunction assembly (2). ^ Tighten the top pan head tapping screw (1) to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs.). ^ Tighten the side pan head tapping screw (3) to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). 3. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly into the bulkhead connector (1). 4. Connect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector to the SIR coil connector. 5. Important: The abrasion sleeve must be installed back onto the steering column wire harness assembly. The ignition lock cylinder case wires and connector must be hanging out of the middle of the abrasion sleeve. Install the wire harness assembly (1) into the wire harness strap (2). 6. Install the upper and lower trim covers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8504 7. Enable the Restraints system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Vanity Mirror Lamp - Left/Right Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8509 Vanity Lamp: Description and Operation VANITY LAMPS The inadvertent power relay also provides battery positive voltage to each vanity mirror lamp. When the vanity mirror cover on the sunshade is opened, the internal switch closes to provide a ground circuit and the vanity lamp illuminates. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8510 Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair VANITY MIRROR LAMP REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Perform the following steps in order to remove the lens from the sunshade: 1. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the center slot at the bottom of the lens. 2. Gently pry downward in order to lift out the lens. 2. Pry out the bulb. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Press in the new bulb. 2. Perform the following steps in order to install the lens: 1. Slide the side tabs of the lens under the side of the vanity assembly frame. 2. Rotate the lens downward. 3. Snap the lens into the frame. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8520 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8521 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8522 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8528 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8529 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8530 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Heated Glass Element: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8533 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8534 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8535 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8536 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8537 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8538 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8539 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8540 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8541 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8542 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8543 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8544 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8545 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8546 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8547 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8548 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8549 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8550 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8551 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8552 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8553 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8554 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8555 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8556 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8557 Heated Glass Element: Description and Operation REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM COMPONENTS The rear window defogger system consist of the following components: HVAC control assembly - RR DEFOG relay - Rear window defogger grid REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OPERATION Battery positive voltage is supplied to the RR DEFOG relay switched input. Ignition voltage is supplied through the IGN E fuse, in the underhood fuse block, to the RR DEFOG relay coil. When you start the engine, and depress the rear window defogger switch. The HVAC control assembly illuminates the rear window defogger indicator and energizes the RR DEFOG relay by grounding the control circuit of the relay. This allows battery positive voltage from the relay switched input through the switch contacts and out the relay switched output to the RR DEFOG fuse and then to the rear window defogger grid. Ground for the rear window defogger grid is provided by G420. When you start the engine and press the rear window defogger switch for the first time, the defogger cycle lasts for 10 minutes. Further operation results in 5 minute defogger cycles. The defogger cycle resets to 10 minutes when you cycle the ignition to the OFF position and then start the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Heated Glass Element: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT For the inside rearview mirror with the automatic day-night feature or the rear window defogger (w/o C68), begin the diagnosis by reviewing the system Description and Operation. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will help you determine the correct symptom diagnostic procedure when a malfunction exists. Reviewing the Description and Operation information will also help you determine if the condition described by the customer is normal operation. Refer to Symptoms - Heated Glass Element in order to identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. For the rear window defogger, begin the diagnosis with the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: - The identification of the control modules which command the system - The ability of the control modules to communicate through the serial data circuit - The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8560 Heated Glass Element: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures A Symptoms SYMPTOMS IMPORTANT: - For the inside rearview mirror with the automatic day-night feature or the rear window defogger (w/o C68), review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to the following: Automatic Day-Night Mirror Description and Operation - Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation - For the rear window defogger (w/ C68) system, perform the following steps before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in Vehicle DTC Information, before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following conditions are true: No DTCs are set. - The control modules can communicate via the serial data link. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the rear window defogger system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation . Visual/Physical Inspection Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the rear window defogger or the automatic day-night feature of the inside rearview mirror. - Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Bad electrical connections or bad wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list: Defogger Inoperative - Rear Window - Defogger Grid Lines Diagnosis - Mirrors - Automatic Day-Night Inoperative Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8561 Steps 1 - 8 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8562 Steps 9 - 17 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8563 Steps 18 - 21 Defogger Inoperative - Rear Window DEFOGGER INOPERATIVE - REAR WINDOW TEST DESCRIPTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8564 Steps 1 - 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8565 Steps 11 - 23 The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table. 7. Listen for an audible click when the RR DEFOG relay operates. Command both the ON and OFF states of the RR DEFOG relay. Repeat the commands as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8566 Heated Glass Element: Component Tests and General Diagnostics DEFOGGER GRID LINES DIAGNOSIS 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the rear window defogger ON. 3. Connect a test lamp to a good ground. 4. Move the test lamp probe from zone 5 to zone 1 along each grid line. - If the test lamp does not illuminate anywhere on the grid, the problem may be in the circuit. Refer to Defogger Inoperative - Rear Window . - If the test lamp shows full brilliance at both ends of the grid lines, inspect for an open or poor connection in the ground circuit of the rear window defogger grid. - If the test lamp goes out, locate the open in that grid line. Test every grid line in at least 2 places (1, 3) to eliminate the possibility of bridging an open (2) in the grid line. IMPORTANT: The test lamp brilliance will decrease proportionately to the increased resistance in the grid line as the probe is moved from the battery positive bus wire to the ground bus wire. The test lamp brilliance may vary from one window to another. 5. If an open is located, replace the rear window. Refer to Window Replacement - Endgate in Trunk/Liftgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8567 Heated Glass Element: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Scan Tool Data Definitions SCAN TOOL DATA DEFINITIONS HVAC CONTROL MODULE Rear Defog Switch: The scan tool displays On or Off. When the rear defogger switch is pressed, the scan tool will display On. When the switch is released, the scan tool displays Off. HVAC Control Module HVAC Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection Bulletin No.: 04-08-48-001B Date: June 28, 2005 INFORMATION Subject: Rear Window Defogger - Broken Heating Grid Detection Method Models: 2006 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2006 HUMMER H2 2006 HUMMER H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2006 model year and additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-48-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The addition of vertical grid lines to the heated back window defogger circuits has made it difficult to detect broken defogger grid lines. In the past, it was a simple matter to use a voltmeter to check the continuity of each grid line in order to locate a non-functional line. Some new design back windows have two vertical grid lines that connect all of the horizontal grid lines together, thereby providing alternate routes for the electrical current to follow. This makes the old test method ineffective. If the vehicle does not have the vertical lines, the old (line-by-line) test methods can be used. Materials Required ^ Permatex(R) Quick Grid, GM P/N 12346001, or equivalent ^ A small ball of fine steel wool Type 00, or ^ Optional - A strip of liquid crystal heat sensitive paper, 51 mm x 305 mm (2 in x 12 in) or similar size (Contact Edmund Scientific at 800-728-6999 for part number CR30723-70 or go to www.scientificsonline.com), or ^ Optional-A portable infrared thermometer, GE-46819, available from Kent-Moore (1-800-345-2233), or equivalent. Correction There are three distinct zones across the back window that must be checked. They are: ^ the driver's side outboard of the two vertical lines ^ the passenger side outboard of the two vertical lines ^ the central zone that falls between the two vertical lines To detect a broken grid line in any of the above three zones and to isolate the exact location of the break, perform the following steps: Caution: ^ Approved safety glasses and gloves should be worn when performing this procedure to reduce the chance of personal injury. ^ Cover the rear shelf area to prevent damage to the interior trim material. 1. Start the engine and turn on the back window defogger. 2. Take the ball of fine steel wool and twist one end to a point. Move the point slowly across each grid line. Be sure to start at the far side of the zone and move it to the opposite side of the zone. When you bridge the grid line break with the steel wool, you will see a small spark. Repeat the test over the same area to be sure you have accurately located the break. Mark the exact location of the grid line break. Repeat this portion of the test for each grid line. If you do not see a spark at any point, it is possible that there are two breaks in the same line and zone. Close visual inspection using a magnifying glass may be the only way to locate breaks in this case. 3. The following are provided as an alternative way to detect a non-functional grid line. If available, use in addition to the steel wool. 3.1. Method using liquid crystal heat sensitive paper: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Broken Rear Window Defogger Grid Detection > Page 8572 Important: The first part of the test must be completed quickly before the entire surface of the back window becomes warm. 3.1.1. From outside the vehicle, place the heat sensitive paper (dull surface in contact with the glass) against the top driver side grid line. Start the engine and turn on the back window defogger. A distinct color change will take place at each conductive grid line. Repeat for the bottom grid lines until they have all been checked in the driver side zone. 3.1.2. Repeat the process for the passenger side and center area zones. 3.1.3. If no color change is noted for a grid line, place a crayon or china marker check mark beside it. Mark each grid line in the zone where it is non-conductive and, therefore, not heating up. More than one broken grid line may be found. 3.2. Method using portable infrared thermometer: 3.2.1. Start the engine and turn on the rear back window defogger. 3.2.2. From inside the vehicle, start at the top driver side grid line and slowly run the portable infrared thermometer vertically down the rear window contacting each grid line. You should be able to see a district variation in temperature readings. 3.2.3. Mark each grid line in the zone where it is non-conductive and, therefore, not heating up. More than one broken grid line may be found. 3.2.4. Repeat the process for the passenger side and center area zones. 4. Use Permatex(R) Quick Grid, GM P/N 12346001, or equivalent, to repair each broken grid line. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Wait 24 hours before turning the defogger on, or the repair can be fast cured using a heat gun, 260°C - 371°C (500°F - 700°F). Hold the heat gun within 25 - 51 mm (1-2 in) from the repair point for 2 to 3 minutes. 6. Recheck the grid line with the heat sensitive paper or portable infrared thermometer to ensure that the line is now functional and that the repair was successful. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Rear Defogger: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8575 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8576 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8577 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8578 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8579 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8580 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8581 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8582 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8583 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8584 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8585 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8586 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8587 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8588 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8589 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8590 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8591 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8592 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8593 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8594 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8595 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8596 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8597 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8598 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Lockout Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Window Lockout Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8607 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8608 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8609 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8610 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8611 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8612 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8613 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8614 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8615 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8616 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8617 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8618 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8619 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8620 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8621 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8622 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8623 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8624 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8625 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8626 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8627 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8628 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8629 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8630 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8631 Power Window Switch: Connector Views Door Lock And Window Switch - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8632 Door Lock and Window Switch - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8633 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8634 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8635 Window Switch - LR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8636 Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8637 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power window switch from the trim panel by using a flat-bladed tool in order to pry upward on the leading edge. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch.Use a small screwdriver in order to press in the retainer springs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Install the power window switch to the trim panel by pressing down. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Lockout Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Window Lockout Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair Motor Replacement - Power Window Removal Procedure Caution: Do not attempt to service the regulator motor without releasing the counterbalance spring tension. The regulator lift arm is under tension from the counterbalance spring and can cause personal injury if the motor is removed from the regulator. 1. Remove the window regulator. 2. Drill a hole through the window regulator and the sector gear. 3. Install a bolt and a nut through the hole in order to lock the sector gear in position. 4. Drill out the rivets that secure the power window motor to the window regulator. 5. Remove the power window motor from the window regulator. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power window motor to the window regulator. Important: Remove the nut and the bolt that were used in order to secure the sector gear in position. 2. Install the rivets in order to secure the power window motor to the window regulator. 3. Install the window regulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8650 Equivalents - Decimal And Metric Part 2 Arrows and Symbols ARROWS AND SYMBOLS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8651 Arrows And Symbols This service data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8652 Conversion - English/Metric Part 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8653 Conversion - English/Metric Part 2 Diagnostic Work Sheets DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEETS The GM Diagnostic Worksheet has been designed to improve communications between the service customer and the technician. The diagnostic worksheet can provide the technician with more information than the conventional repair order, since it is filled out by the service customer. Dealers in the US may contact Dealer Support Materials at 1-800-235-8521 and request Form Number DWS-01 to obtain these worksheets at no cost. Please limit your requests to a reasonable quantity. Registered and Non - Registered Trademarks REGISTERED AND NON-REGISTERED TRADEMARKS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8654 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8655 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8656 Listed are Registered Trademarks ((R)) or Non-Registered Trademarks ((TM)) which may appear in this service data. Special Tools Ordering Information SPECIAL TOOLS ORDERING INFORMATION The special service tools shown that have product numbers beginning with J, SA or BT are available for worldwide distribution from: OE Tool and Equipment Group Kent-Moore 28635 Mound Road Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3499 Phone: 1-800-345-2233 or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-7:00 pm Eastern Standard Time Fax: 1-800-578-7375 or 586-578-7321 The TECH 2 scan tool and accessories can be purchased through: Dealer Equipment and Services 5775 Enterprise Dr. Warren, MI, U.S.A 48092-3463 Phone: 1-800-GM-TOOLS or 586-574-2332 Monday through Friday 8:00 am-6:00 pm EST Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8657 Fax: 1-586-578-7205 Fasteners FASTENERS METRIC FASTENERS This vehicle provides fastener dimensions using the metric system. Most metric fasteners are approximate in diameter to equivalent English fasteners. Make replacements using fasteners of the same nominal diameter, thread pitch, and strength. A number marking identifies the OE metric fasteners except cross-recess head screws. The number also indicates the strength of the fastener material. A Posidrive(R) or Type 1A cross-recess identifies a metric cross-recess screw. For best results, use a Type 1A cross-recess screwdriver, or equivalent, in Posidrive(R) recess head screws. GM Engineering Standards and North American Industries have adopted a portion of the ISO-defined standard metric fastener sizes. The purpose was to reduce the number of fastener sizes used while retaining the best thread qualities in each thread size. For example, the metric M6.0 X 1 screw, with nearly the same diameter and 25.4 threads per inch replaced the English 1/4-20 and 1/4-28 screws. The thread pitch is midway between the English coarse and fine thread pitches. FASTENER STRENGTH IDENTIFICATION Fastener Strength Identification The most commonly used metric fastener strength property classes are 9.8 and 10.9. The class identification is embossed on the head of each bolt. The English, inch strength classes range from grade 2 to grade 8. Radial lines are embossed on the head of each bolt in order to identify the strength class. The number of lines on the head of the bolt is 2 lines less than the actual grade. For example, a grade 8 bolt will have 6 radial lines on the bolt head. Some metric nuts are marked with a single digit strength identification number on the nut face. The correct fasteners are available through GM SPO. Many metric fasteners available in the aftermarket parts channels are designed to metric standards of countries other than the United States, and may exhibit the following: Lower strength - No numbered head marking system - Wrong thread pitch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8658 The metric fasteners on GM products are designed to new, international standards. The following are the common sizes and pitches, except for special applications: M6.0 X 1 - M8 X 1.25 - M10 X 1.5 - M12 X 1.75 - M14 X 2.00 - M16 X 2.00 PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS Prevailing torque fasteners create a thread interface between the fastener and the fastener counterpart in order to prevent the fastener from loosening. ALL METAL PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by a designed distortion or deformation in the fastener. NYLON INTERFACE PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENERS These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a nylon material on the fastener threads. ADHESIVE COATED FASTENERS Adhesive Coated Fasteners These fasteners accomplish the thread interface by the presence of a thread-locking compound on the fastener threads. Refer to the appropriate repair procedure in order to determine if the fastener may be reused and the applicable thread-locking compound to apply to the fastener. A prevailing torque fastener may be reused ONLY if: The fastener and the fastener counterpart are clean and not damaged - There is no rust on the fastener - The fastener develops the specified minimum torque against its counterpart prior to the fastener seating Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8659 Metric Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development METRIC PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8660 English Prevailing Torque Fastener Minimum Torque Development ENGLISH PREVAILING TORQUE FASTENER MINIMUM TORQUE DEVELOPMENT Thread Inserts THREAD INSERTS General purpose thread repair kits. These kits are available commercially. Repair Procedure Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8661 1. Determine the size, the pitch, and the depth of the damaged thread. If necessary, adjust the stop collars on the cutting tool and tap to the required depth. CAUTION: Refer to Safety Glasses Caution in Service Precautions. IMPORTANT: Refer to the thread repair kit manufacturer's instructions regarding the size of the drill and tap to use. - Avoid any buildup of chips. Back out the tap every few turns and remove the chips. 2. Drill out the damaged threads. Clean out any chips. 3. Lubricate the tap with light engine oil. Tap the hole. Clean the threads. 4. Thread the thread insert onto the mandrel of the installer. Engage the tang of the insert onto the end of the mandrel. 5. Lubricate the insert with light engine oil, except when installing in aluminum and install the insert. IMPORTANT: The insert should be flush to one turn below the surface. 6. If the tang of the insert does not break off when backing out the installer, break the tang off with a drift. Training TRAINING DEALERS All U.S. Dealers participating in the GM Common Training Program can enroll through the GM Common Training System Website at https://www.gmcommontraining.com. Within the website, there are individual training paths that are designed to assist in planning the training needs for each individual. Technicians should advise their Service Manager of their training needs including course names and course numbers. Dealers who have questions about GM Common Training should contact the GM Common Training help desk at 1-888-748-2686. The help desk is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 am-8:00pm Eastern Standard Time, excluding holidays. For GM Access support, contact the GM Access Help Desk at 1-888-337-1010. FLEETS GM Fleet customers with GM Warranty In-Shop agreements are able to participate in service technical training through GM Common Training/GM Service Technical College (STC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8662 Assistance for all GM fleet customers using GM STC products and services is provided on the Internet via www.gmcommontraining.com using the "Contact Us" button on the site and/or the GM Common Training Help Desk at 1-888-748-2687. To order GM STC Training Materials, please contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. Most GM STC course materials have associated charges. To purchase authentic GM STC Training Materials, contact the GM Training Materials Headquarters at 1-800-393-4831. NON-GM DEALER TECHNICIANS Technicians training for non-GM dealers is available through ACDelco. This training is for ACDelco customers employed in the automotive or truck service industry. ACDelco courses are available at all approved GM Training Centers. Availability and schedules can be obtained by calling 1-800-825-5886 or contact us via the web at www.acdelcotechconnect.com and select the training button. Clinics are also offered through ACDelco Warehouse Distributors. Contract your dealer directly for more information. Abbreviations And Meanings ABBREVIATIONS AND MEANINGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8663 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8664 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8665 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8666 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8667 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8668 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8669 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8670 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8671 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8672 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8673 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8674 Power Window Switch: Connector Views Door Lock And Window Switch - Driver C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8675 Door Lock and Window Switch - Driver C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8676 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8677 Door Lock and Window Switch - Front Passenger C2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8678 Window Switch - LR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 8679 Window Switch - RR Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8680 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair POWER WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power window switch from the trim panel by using a flat-bladed tool in order to pry upward on the leading edge. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch.Use a small screwdriver in order to press in the retainer springs. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. 2. Install the power window switch to the trim panel by pressing down. Ensure that the retainers lock into place. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8690 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8691 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8692 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8698 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8699 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 8700 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Corner Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Weatherstrip Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Weatherstrip Weatherstrip Replacement - Window The outer door weatherstrip is used in order to seal the inner and outer door panels and the window at the belt line. The outer door weatherstrip can be replaced. Do not remove the inner sealing strip since the strip is stapled to the trim panel. Removal Procedure 1. Open the window. 2. Remove outer door weather strip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Position the weatherstrip and press it into place. 2. Close the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Window Weatherstrip > Page 8719 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Window Sealing Strip Sealing Strip Replacement - Front Door Window Belt Inner Removal Procedure 1. Remove the side front door trim panel. 2. Remove the staples that secure the sealing strip to the trim panel. 3. Remove the sealing strip. Installation Procedure 1. Position the sealing strip on the trim panel. 2. Install the sealing strip to the trim panel using the original staples or a heavy-duty staple gun. 3. Install the side front door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Endgate Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the endgate. 2. Starting at the corner of the endgate flange, pull the weatherstrip molding from the endgate. Installation Procedure 1. Push the ends of the weatherstrip onto the endgate flange corners. 2. Push the weatherstrip molding onto the flange along the entire length of the endgate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Quarter Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8728 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Body Side Stationary Window Replacement (Utility) Tools Required * J 24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife) * J 39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool * Urethane Adhesive Kit GM P/N 12346392 or Equivalent * Isopropyl Alcohol or Equivalent * Cartridge-type Caulking Gun * Commercial-type Utility Knife * Razor Blade Scraper * Suction Cups * Plastic Paddle Removal Procedure Important: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim. 1. Remove the body side trim panels. 2. For the 2-door utility only, remove the anchor bolt securing the rear seat belt assembly to the roof. Caution: Refer to Defroster Outlet Caution in Service Precautions. 3. Cover to protect the following parts from broken glass: * Upper dash pad * Defroster outlets and A/C outlets * Seats and carpeting Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Service Precautions. 4. For the 2-door utility only, cut the 2 rivets securing the glass assembly (2-door utility only). Important: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. 5. This will allow the urethane adhesive to be separated from the window. * Leave a base of urethane on the pinchweld flange. * The only suitable lubrication is clear water. * Use J 24402-A, J 39032 or equivalent in order to remove the window. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the stationary window from the opening. Installation Procedure 1. For the 2-door utility only, install a stationary window into the opening. Refer to Urethane Adhesive Installation of Stationary Windows. 2. For the 2-door utility only, install 2 new rivets in order to secure the glass assembly to the sheet metal. 3. Install 2 new rivets in order to secure the glass assembly to the sheet metal. 4. For the 2-door utility only, install the rear seat belt anchor bolt to the roof. 5. Install the body side trim panels. 6. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and interior trim. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip Replacement - Rear Door Window Removal Procedure 1. Open the rear side door window. 2. Remove the rear side door window weatherstrip. Start the at butt joint and pull the weatherstrip from the window opening. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear side door weatherstrip. 2. Locate the butt joint at the bottom center of the window opening and set the weatherstrip around the window opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Window Handle: Service and Repair Window Regulator Handle Replacement - Door Tools Required J 9886-01 Door Handle Clip Remover Removal Procedure 1. Close the window. 2. Insert the J 9886-01 between the handle and the bearing plate. 3. Align the J 9886-01 with the handle. 4. Push the J 9886-01 in order to disengage the clip. 5. Pull the handle from the door. 6. Remove the window regulator handle from the door. 7. Remove the bearing plate from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the bearing plate to the door. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8736 2. Install the window regulator handle to the door. 3. Install the retaining clip to the handle. 4. Insert the handle onto the window regulator shaft. Ensure that the handle points toward the front of the door. 5. Push on the handle until the clip engages on the shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Front Door Tools Required J 34940 Rivet Gun Removal Procedure 1. Remove the window. 2. Disconnect the power window motor electrical connector, if equipped. 3. Remove the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 4. Drill out the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door. 5. Remove the window regulator from the door. 6. Remove the power window motor, if equipped. Installation Procedure 1. Install the power window motor, if equipped. 2. Install the window regulator to the door. 3. Install the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door using J 34940. 4. Connect the electrical connector, if equipped. 5. Connect the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 6. Install the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator Replacement - Rear Door Tools Required J 34940 Rivet Gun Removal Procedure Important: The rear door power window motor and regulator replacement parts are sold as an assembly. Do not attempt to separate the motor from the regulator before verifying that separate replacement parts are available. 1. Remove the window. 2. Disconnect the power window motor electrical connector, if equipped. 3. Remove the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 4. Drill out the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door. 5. Remove the window regulator and the motor assembly (power windows only) from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the window regulator and the motor assembly (power windows only) to the door. 2. Install the rivets that secure the window regulator to the door using J 34940. 3. Install the electrical harness retainers, if equipped. 4. Install the power window motor electrical connector, if equipped. 5. Install the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Window Track: Service and Repair Window Run Channel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the water deflector. 3. Remove the bolts that retain the front run channel to the door. 4. Carefully pull the front run channel in order to disengage the run channel from the window weatherstrip. 5. Remove the front run channel from the door. 6. Slide the window forward. 7. Remove the bolts that retain the rear run channel to the door. 8. Carefully pull the front run channel in order to disengage the run channel from the window weatherstrip. 9. Remove the rear run channel from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Install the rear run channel to the door. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 2. Install the bolts that retain the rear run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (88 lb in). 3. Slide the window rearward into the rear run channel. 4. Install the front run channel to the door. 5. Install the bolts that retain the front run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (88 lb in). 6. Install the water deflector. 7. Install the door trim panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Windshield Moulding / Trim: Procedures Stationary Window Reveal Molding Repair Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Caution in Service Precautions. Important: The window reveal molding fills the cavity between the body and window. If the reveal molding is stretched or damaged, it cannot be reused and it must be replaced. 1. Lift up on the loose area of the reveal molding. 2. Clean the top edge of the window surface and the reveal molding with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water by volume on a dampened lint-free cloth. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Window Retention Caution in Service Precautions. 1. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates. Important: Use care when applying the prep, clear #1, to the window. This primer dries almost instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied evenly. 2. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep, clear #1, to the channel area approximately 13 mm (1/2 in) to the upper edge of the window. 3. Wipe the glass primed area immediately with a clean lint-free cloth. 4. Shake the glass primer, black #2, for at least 1 minute. 5. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass primer, black #2, to the top edge of the window. 6. Apply a small bead of urethane adhesive (2) between the window (1) and the pinch-weld. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8752 7. Reinstall the window reveal molding. 1. Start from the loose area and hand-press the reveal molding into place over the edge of the window. 2. Run warm water over the reveal molding in order to speed the setup time of the urethane adhesive. 3. Tape should be applied in order to retain the reveal molding to the window. This will maintain a flush fit with the body. 4. The tape is to be removed after 6 hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8753 Windshield Moulding / Trim: Removal and Replacement Windshield Side Reveal Molding Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Peel back the weatherstrip tape in order to reveal the molding screws. 2. Remove the fasteners. 3. Remove the reveal molding from the windshield pillar. Installation Procedure 1. Install the reveal molding to the windshield pillar. 2. Install the fasteners. 3. Install the new weatherstrip tape (if required). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Headlamp Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Headlamp Washer Fluid Pumb (Export) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Headlamp Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT - FRONT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Disconnect the washer hose from the nozzle. 3. Compress tabs on the bottom of the nozzle to remove. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the nozzle to the hood by pressing into place. 2. Install the washer hose to the nozzle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8765 Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8766 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to pry the switch away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors as necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors as necessary. 2. Install the switch to the instrument panel. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8770 Wiper Switch: Diagrams Rear Window Wiper Cutout and Liftglass Ajar Jamb Switch (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8771 Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8772 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to pry the switch away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors as necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors as necessary. 2. Install the switch to the instrument panel. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer HOSE REPLACEMENT - WINDSHIELD WASHER REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the hose from the nozzles. 3. Remove the hose clip from the hood. 4. Disconnect the hose from the pump. 5. Remove the hose. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Route the hose over the left wheelhouse panel. 2. Install the hose to the pump. 3. Install the hose to the nozzles. 4. Install the hose clip to the hood. 5. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer > Page 8777 Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Hose Replacement - Rear Window - Washer Pump to Endgate HOSE REPLACEMENT - REAR WINDOW - WASHER PUMP TO ENDGATE REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left front seat. 2. Remove the rear seat. 3. Remove the endgate/liftgate door sill plate. 4. Remove the left front and left rear door sill plates. 5. Remove the left body side trim panel. 6. Remove the left hinge pillar trim panel. 7. Fold over the left side of the carpet to allow access to the body harness. Refer to Mat/Carpet Replacement - Front Floor (Utility) and Carpet Replacement - Rear in Interior Trim. 8. Disconnect the washer hose connection (1) from the body harness (2) at the endgate. 9. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 10. Disconnect the hose (1) from the rear washer pump. 11. Install a plug to the rear washer pump nozzle to prevent washer fluid loss. 12. Push the hose grommet (2) in through the bulkhead. 13. Pull the washer hose (1) into the vehicle though the bulkhead. 14. Cut the old washer hose off where it enters the body wiring harness (2). 15. Remove the hose end from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the hose to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Replacement - Windshield Washer > Page 8778 2. Route the hose (1) out though the bulkhead. 3. Route the hose along the body harness (2), and tape the hose to the body harness with 3 wraps of electrical tape every 100 mm (4 in). 4. Seat the hose grommet (2) into the bulkhead. 5. Remove the plug from the rear washer pump nozzle. 6. Connect the hose (1) to the rear washer pump. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. Connect the washer hose connection (1) at the endgate. 9. Install the carpet. 10. Install the left hinge pillar trim panel. 11. Install the body side trim panel. 12. Install the left front and left rear door sill plates. 13. Install the endgate/liftgate door sill plate. 14. Install the rear seat. 15. Install the left front seat. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Windshield Washer Pump: Diagrams Rear Window Washer Fluid Pumb (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8782 Windshield Washer Fluid Pump Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8783 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP/RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the washer solvent from the solvent container. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the washer pumps. 4. Disconnect the hoses from the washer pumps. 5. Remove the screw retaining the solvent container to the vehicle. 6. Remove the solvent container from the vehicle. 7. Remove the washer pumps and grommets from the solvent container. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the washer pumps and grommets onto the solvent container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8784 2. Install the solvent container onto the vehicle with the screw. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 3. Connect the hoses to the washer pumps. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the washer pumps. 5. Refill the washer solvent in the solvent container. 6. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP/RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Raise and support the hood. 2. Remove the washer solvent from the solvent container. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the washer pumps. 4. Disconnect the hoses from the washer pumps. 5. Remove the screw retaining the solvent container to the vehicle. 6. Remove the solvent container from the vehicle. 7. Remove the washer pumps and grommets from the solvent container. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the washer pumps and grommets onto the solvent container. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8788 2. Install the solvent container onto the vehicle with the screw. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screw to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 3. Connect the hoses to the washer pumps. 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the washer pumps. 5. Refill the washer solvent in the solvent container. 6. Close the hood. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8792 Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8793 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in Service Precautions. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool in order to pry the switch away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors as necessary. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect the electrical connectors as necessary. 2. Install the switch to the instrument panel. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Replacement WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Mark the wiper park position on the windshield with a suitable non-permanent marker. 2. Remove the cover from the wiper arm nut. 3. Remove the wiper arm retaining nut. 4. Remove the wiper arm from the wiper transmission drive shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the wiper arm onto the wiper transmission drive shaft. 1. Align the wiper arm with the marks made on the windshield. 2. Push the wiper arm down onto the wiper transmission drive shaft completely. 2. Install the retaining nut onto the wiper transmission drive shaft and the wiper arm. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Install the cover on the wiper arm nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Replacement > Page 8798 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Replacement - Rear WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Put the wiper arm in the park position. 2. Remove the washer hose from the vehicle connector. 3. Remove the cap from the wiper arm. 4. Remove the nut from the wiper arm. 5. Remove the wiper arm from the wiper motor shaft. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the wiper arm on the wiper motor shaft in the park position with the wiper arm resting on the park ramp. 2. Install the nut on the wiper arm. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the nut to 23 N.m (17 lb ft). 3. Install the cap on the wiper arm. 4. Install the washer hose on the vehicle connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 8803 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Blade Replacement WIPER ARM BLADE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks in the vertical position. IMPORTANT: Do not allow the wiper arm to fall back and strike the windshield. 2. Push in the locking tab of the wiper blade clip and pull downward on the wiper arm blade. 3. Remove the wiper blade from the inside radius of the wiper arm. 4. Bring the wiper arm out through the opening in the wiper blade. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the hook of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade. 2. Position the wiper blade in the inside radius of the wiper arm hook. 3. Pull upward until the locking tab of the pivot engages the slot in the hook. 4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade onto the windshield. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 8806 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blade Element Replacement WIPER BLADE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm. IMPORTANT: Replace the wiper blade element if it is removed from the wiper blade. 2. Remove the bottom claws (2) of the wiper blade (1) from the notches in the wiper blade element (3). 3. Pull the wiper blade element (3) out through the wiper blade claws (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the open end of the wiper blade element (3) into the bottom claws of the wiper blade (2). IMPORTANT: Keep the wiper blade claws in the rubber claw channel of the wiper blade element. Do not allow the claws of the wiper blade to contact the metal spline of the wiper blade element. 2. Guide the wiper blade element (3) through the wiper blade (1) claw sets. 3. Engage the bottom claw (2) of the wiper blade (1) into the notches in wiper blade element (3). 4. Install the wiper blade onto the wiper arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 8807 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Blade Element Cleaning BLADE ELEMENT CLEANING Lift each blade assembly off of the windshield and clean the element with a cloth saturated with full strength washer solvent. Then rinse the blade assemblies with clear water. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 8808 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Arm Blade Replacement - Rear WIPER ARM BLADE REPLACEMENT - REAR 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the window. IMPORTANT: Do not to allow the wiper arm to fall back and strike the window. 2. Push in the locking tab of the wiper blade clip and pull downward on the wiper blade. 3. Remove the wiper blade pivot from the inside radius of the wiper arm. 4. Bring the wiper arm out through the opening in the wiper blade. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the hook of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade. 2. Position the wiper blade in the inside radius of the wiper arm hook. 3. Pull upward until the locking tab of the pivot engages the slot in the hook. 4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade onto the window. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arm Blade Replacement > Page 8809 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Blade Element Replacement - Rear BLADE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm. IMPORTANT: Replace the wiper blade element if it is removed from the wiper blade. 2. Remove the bottom claws (2) of the wiper blade (1) from the notches in the wiper blade element (3). 3. Pull the wiper blade element (3) out through the wiper blade claws (2). INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Insert the open end of the wiper blade element (3) into the bottom claws of the wiper blade (2). IMPORTANT: Keep the wiper blade claws in the rubber claw channel of the wiper blade element. Do not allow the claws of the wiper blade to contact the metal spline of the wiper blade element. 2. Guide the wiper blade element (3) through the wiper blade (1) claw sets. 3. Engage the bottom claw (2) of the wiper blade (1) into the notches in wiper blade element (3). 4. Install the wiper blade onto the wiper arm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Gear Box > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Gear Box: Service and Repair WIPER TRANSMISSION REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED - J 39232 Wiper Transmission Separator - J 39529 Wiper Transmission Installer REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper arms. 2. Remove the air inlet grille panel. 3. Remove the transmission drive link from the wiper motor crank arm using the J 39232 . 4. Remove the transmission screws. 5. Remove the transmission from the vehicle through the access openings in the top of the cowl. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the transmission to the vehicle. 2. Install the transmission mounting screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the wiper transmission mounting screws to 8 N.m (70 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Gear Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8813 3. Install the transmission drive link to the wiper motor crank arm using the J 39529 . IMPORTANT: - Lubricate the inside of the socket with white lithium grease (GM P/N 9985885) or equivalent. - The wiper transmission must be assembled to the crank arm past the second detent so the seal is compressed to a maximum height of 25.5 mm (1 in). 4. Install the air inlet grille panel. 5. Install the wiper arms. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Wiper Motor: Connector Views Rear Window Wiper Motor Controller (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 8818 Windshield Wiper Motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT TOOLS REQUIRED - J 39232 Wiper Transmission Separator - J 39529 Wiper Transmission Installer REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper arms. 2. Remove the air inlet grille panel. 3. Remove the transmission from the wiper motor drive link using the J 39232 . 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the wiper motor. 5. Remove the three screws and wiper motor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the wiper motor onto the vehicle with three screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the wiper motor mounting screws to 6.5 N.m (57 lb in). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 8821 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the transmission drive link socket onto the crank arm ball of the wiper motor using the J 39529 . IMPORTANT: - Lubricate the socket with white lithium grease (GM P/N 9985885) or equivalent. - The wiper transmission must be assembled to the crank arm past the second detent so the seal is compressed to a maximum height of 25.5 mm (1 in). 4. Install the air inlet grille panel. 5. Install the wiper arms. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 8822 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement - Rear WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT - REAR REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper arm from the shaft. 2. Remove the nut and the spacer from the shaft. 3. Remove the interior trim panel. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the controller. 5. Remove two screws and the wiper motor from the vehicle. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. 1. Install the wiper motor onto the vehicle with two screws while keeping the shaft centered in the tailgate hole. Tighten two screws to 6.5 N.m (57 lb in). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the controller. 3. Install the interior trim panel. 4. Install the spacer and the nut onto the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 8823 Tighten the nut to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 5. Install the wiper arm to the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 8824 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Module Replacement WIPER MOTOR MODULE REPLACEMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wiper motor electrical connector. 2. Remove the cover screws. 3. Remove the cover. 4. Remove the circuit board and terminal module by lifting up on the terminal. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. Install the circuit board and terminal module. 2. Install the cover and three screws. NOTE: Refer to Fastener Notice in Service Precautions. Tighten the screws to 2.6 N.m (23 lb in). 3. Install the wiper motor electrical connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Center I/P Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8828 Wiper Switch: Diagrams Rear Window Wiper Cutout and Liftglass Ajar Jamb Switch (Utility) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.3L VIN X (2005)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8829 Rear Wiper/Washer and Endgate Window Release Switch